diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc')
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx | 38 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx | 65296 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins | 2179 |
3 files changed, 0 insertions, 67513 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 9014b56cbae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc-fr.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `minitoc-fr.dtx', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% minitoc.dtx (with options: `minitoc-fr') -%% This is a generated file. -%% -%% -%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license -%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this -%% license is in: -%% -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version -%% 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -%% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). -%% -%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' -%% distributed with it. -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}% - [2008/07/16 minitoc v60 french documentation start file] -\input{minitoc.dtx} -%% -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `minitoc-fr.dtx'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 2957e0e9ccd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65296 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -% -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the -% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in: -% -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert. -% -% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l -% distributed with it. -% -% \fi -% -% \iffalse -%<*driver> -\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}% -%</driver> -%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/05] -%<package>\ProvidesPackage{minitoc} -%<*package> - [2008/07/16 v60 minitoc.dtx file] -%</package> -%<package>\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] -%<*driver> -\listfiles -\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book} -%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book} -\newlength{\iwidth} -\newlength{\awidth} -\newlength{\bwidth} -\newlength{\cwidth} -\newlength{\dwidth} -\newlength{\wkdim} -\setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -\addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% -% To add a kind of minitoc in the index -% -%\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\section*{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}\phantomsection} -\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\phantomsection\textbf{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} -% -% To frame a flag. -\newlength{\flagframethickness} -\setlength{\flagframethickness}{.1pt} -\newcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{black}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup} -\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\flagframethickness}{1mm}} -\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{FBcolor}{gray}{.93}} -\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{FBcolor}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}} -\newcommand{\flagboxa}[1]{\raisebox{-2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} -\newcommand{\flagboxu}[1]{\raisebox{2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}} -% -\def\ATOC#1{{#1}\stepcounter{section}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}#1}} -\newlength{\widthinc}\setlength{\widthinc}{3.5cm} -\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales à gauche! -\makeatletter -\def\mydotfill#1{% Filling dots; #1 = separation (dimension) - \leavevmode - \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{\cdot}\hss}\hfill - \kern\z@} -\def\mysymbfill#1#2{% Filling symbols; #1 = separation (dimension) #2 = symbol; - \leavevmode - \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{#2}\hss}\hfill - \kern\z@} -\makeatother -\let\RR\raggedright % or \RaggedRight ? -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}} -\IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\usepackage{marvosym}\def\myCoffeecup{~\Coffeecup}}{\let\myCoffeecup\relax} -\IfFileExists{mparhack.sty}{\usepackage{mparhack}}{} % not used if oneside. -\usepackage{chngpage} % to enlarge the biblio -\IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort&compress,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}\citeindextrue}{} -\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{} -\IfFileExists{fnbreak.sty}{\usepackage{fnbreak}}{} % Checks split footnotes -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\usepackage{ifthen} -\newcounter{currlevel}\setcounter{currlevel}{-1} -\makeatletter -\gdef\@idxitem#1{% - \par - \hangindent 40\p@ - \ifthenelse{#1 > \value{currlevel}}{{% - \nobreak - }{\ifthenelse{#1 = \value{currlevel}}{% - \pagebreak[0]% - }{% - \pagebreak[2]% - }}% - \setcounter{currlevel}{#1}% - \hangindent 40pt -}}% -\makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\makeatletter -\providecommand*{\toclevel@chaptersom}{0} -\makeatletter\providecommand*{\toclevel@sectionsom}{0} -\let\nouppercase\relax -\def\Shorttableofcontents#1#2{\bgroup\c@tocdepth=#2\@restonecolfalse - \if@tightshtoc - \parsep\z@ - \fi - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi - \@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\section*{{#1} - \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{sectionsom}{#1}}% - {\chapter*{{#1} - \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chaptersom}{#1}}% - \@startshorttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi\egroup} -\def\l@chaptersom{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} -\makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \IfFileExists{repeatindex.sty}{\usepackage{repeatindex}}{}% To improve the index; DOES NOT WORK %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\IfFileExists{sectsty.sty}{\usepackage[garrulous]{sectsty}% To fix long sectionning titles... - \partfont{\RR}% - \chapterfont{\RR}% - \sectionfont{\RR}% - \subsectionfont{\RR}% - \subsubsectionfont{\RR}}{} % NOT \paragraph or \subparagraph ! -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \usepackage[space,sort]{cite} % cite does not work well with hyperref... -%\RequirePackage[nocompress,sort]{cite}[2003/11/04] % cite[compress] or cite[sort] does not work well with hyperref; -% use a recent recent version of cite.sty to use its sort option. -% In fact, I use (above): \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}}{} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\providecommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} -\providecommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} -\providecommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak} -\or\relax -\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{-}\nolinebreak} -\fi -\let\bibpreamble\relax -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries This bibliography contains many URLs; you must be aware that -some of them might be inaccessible because they are obsolete, or because their site is down or encounters -some unexpected problem. Note also that the response of some sites may be slow (several seconds). -For instance, the entries -\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, from the \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/} -site, are very difficult to contact. - -The URLs beginning with ``\texttt{https:}'' to the TUGboat site may have a restricted access to the TUG members during -one year after publication. Being a member of TUG is useful and cheap! - -Some URLs may contain an extension not supported by your Web browser; in such cases, you should try to access to the -document manually. An example is~\cite{JMPL1}, whose extension is \suffix{.ps.gz}. - -Some URLs are too long for some tools; when possible, I shortened the URL to display only the contents the -directory, as for~\cite{pdftex}, or by using an URL to the catalogue entry (as for~\cite{arabi} -and~\cite{antomega}); when not possible, you should try -to access to the document manually.\par\lneed{12}% -}} -\or\relax -\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries Cette bibliographie contient de nombreux URLs; vous devez être -avertis que certains d'entre eux pourraient être inaccessibles parce qu'ils sont obsolètes, parce que leur site -est inactif ou subit un problème inattendu. Notez aussi que certains sites peuvent être lents à~répondre (quelques -secondes). -Par exemple, les entrées -\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, depuis le site \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/}, -sont très difficiles à~atteindre. - -Les URLs commençant par {\froff\og{} \texttt{https:}~\fg{}} vers le site de TUGboat peuvent avoir leur accès restreint -aux membres du TUG pendant un an après leur publication. Être membre du TUG est utile et n'est pas très cher! - -Certains URLs peuvent contenir un suffixe non supporté par votre navigateur Web; dans un tel cas, vous devriez -essayer d'accéder au document manuellement. Un exemple est~\cite{JMPL1}, dont le suffixe est \suffix{.ps.gz}. - -Certains URLs sont trop longs pour certains logiciels; lorsque c'était possible, j'ai raccourci l'URL pour -n'afficher que le contenu du répertoire, ainsi par exemple pour~\cite{pdftex}, ou en utilisant un URL vers -l'entrée dans le catalogue (comme pour~\cite{arabi} and~\cite{antomega}); lorsque ce n'était pas possible, -vous devrez essayer d'accéder manuellement au document.\par\lneed{12}% -}} -\fi -% inclusion graphique centrée verticalement -% #1=hauteur apparente [0pt] optionnelle, #2=largeur, #3=fichier image -% \newlength{\hivc}\setlength{\hivc}{0pt} -% \newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\setlength{\hivc}{#1}\leavevmode\rule[-.5\hivc]{0pt}{\hivc}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} -\newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}} -% -\renewcommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]} -\renewcommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\usepackage[english2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} -\or\relax -\usepackage[french2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} -\fi -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\emph{see}} -\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{see}~#1} -\or\relax -\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\textit{voir}} -\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{voir}~#1} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% NEW INDEX COMMANDS -% -- packages -\newcommand{\pack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipack{#1}} -\newcommand{\upack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\ipack}[1]{\ipackA{#1}\ipackB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\fi -% -- packages with special names (#1=real name, #2=sort) -\newcommand{\packa}[2]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipacka{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\upacka}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\ipacka}[2]{\ipackaA{#1}{#2}\ipackaB{#1}{#2}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\fi -% -- classes -\newcommand{\class}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\iclass{#1}} -\newcommand{\uclass}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\iclass}[1]{\iclassA{#1}\iclassB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\fi -% -- scripts -\newcommand{\scrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iscrp{#1}} -\newcommand{\uscrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\iscrp}[1]{\iscrpA{#1}\iscrpB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -% -- tools -\newcommand{\tool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\itool{#1}} -\newcommand{\utool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}} -\newcommand{\itool}[1]{\itoolA{#1}\itoolB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}} -\fi -% -- examples -\newcommand{\exam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iexam{#1}} -\newcommand{\uexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\iexam}[1]{\iexamA{#1}\iexamB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(example document)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Examples=\protect\leavevmode Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Exemples=\protect\leavevmode Exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -% -- old examples -\newcommand{\oexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioexam{#1}} -\newcommand{\uoexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ioexam}[1]{\ioexamA{#1}\ioexamB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(old example document)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Old Examples=\protect\leavevmode Old Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(ancien exemple de document)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Anciens exemples=\protect\leavevmode Anciens exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -% -- features -\newcommand{\feat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ifeat{#1}} -\newcommand{\ufeat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ifeat}[1]{\ifeatA{#1}\ifeatB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (feature)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Features=\protect\leavevmode Features\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (dispositif)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Dispositifs=\protect\leavevmode Dispositifs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- extensions/suffixes -\newcommand{\suffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\isuffix{#1}} -\newcommand{\usuffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\isuffix}[1]{\isuffixA{#1}\isuffixB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (extension)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Extensions=\protect\leavevmode Extensions\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (suffixe)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Suffixes=\protect\leavevmode Suffixes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- options (minitoc) -\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iopt{#1}} -\newcommand{\optd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptd{#1}} -\newcommand{\uopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\iopt}[1]{\ioptA{#1}\ioptB{#1}} -\newcommand{\ioptd}[1]{\ioptdA{#1}\ioptdB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default option)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option par défaut)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- options (other packages) -% \newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptp{#1}{#2}} -%\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}} -\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ioptp}[2]{\ioptpA{#1}{#2}\ioptpB{#1}{#2}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(\protect\textsf{#2} package)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(paquetage \protect\textsf{#2})}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- language options -\newcommand{\lopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ilopt{#1}} -\newcommand{\loptd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iloptd{#1}} -\newcommand{\ulopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ilopt}[1]{\iloptA{#1}\iloptB{#1}} -\newcommand{\iloptd}[1]{\iloptdA{#1}\iloptdB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(language option)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default language option)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(option de langue)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option de langue par défaut)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- names -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} -\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} -\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} -\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax} -\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax} -\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} -\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- authors names in bib -\newcommand{\bname}[3]{\bnameA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bnameB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -\newcommand{\bnamea}[4]{\bnameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\bnameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}} - -\newcommand\sksep{\ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}}% % put before the bib. refs in the index -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} -\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} -\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}} -\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}} -\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- tool names in bib -\newcommand{\btool}[2]{\btoolA{#1}{#2}\btoolB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\btoola}[3]{\btoolaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\btoolaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- pack names in bib -\newcommand{\bpack}[2]{\bpackA{#1}{#2}\bpackB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\bpacka}[3]{\bpackaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bpackaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- class names in bib -- nom, [ nom-tri ], clé-bib -\newcommand{\bclass}[2]{\bclassA{#1}{#2}\bclassB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\bclassa}[3]{\bclassaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bclassaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}} -\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}} -\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- environments -\newcommand{\env}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ienv{#1}} -\newcommand{\uenv}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ienv}[1]{\ienvA{#1}\ienvB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environment)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environments=\protect\leavevmode Environments>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environnement)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environnements=\protect\leavevmode Environnements>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- files -\newcommand{\xfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixfile{#1}} -\newcommand{\uxfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\ixfileA{#1}\ixfileB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (file)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Files=\protect\leavevmode Files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (fichier)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Fichiers=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- graphic files -\newcommand{\xgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrf{#1}} -\newcommand{\uxgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ixgrf}[1]{\ixgrfA{#1}\ixgrfB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(graphic file)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Graphic files=\protect\leavevmode Graphic files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier graphique)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Fichiers graphiques=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers graphiques\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- flags (graphic) files -\newcommand{\xgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrfl{#1}} -\newcommand{\uxgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ixgrfl}[1]{\ixgrflA{#1}\ixgrflB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(flag file)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Flags files=\protect\leavevmode Flags files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier drapeau)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Fichiers drapeaux=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers drapeaux\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- .mld /mlo couples -\newcommand{\xmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} -\newcommand{\ixmldo}[1]{\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}} -\newcommand{\uxmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- depth counters -\newcommand{\dcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\idcnt{#1}} -\newcommand{\udcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\idcnt}[1]{\idcntA{#1}\idcntB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(depth counter)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Depth counters=\protect\leavevmode Depth counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(compteur de profondeur)}\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs de profondeur=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs de profondeur\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- counters -\newcommand{\cnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\icnt{#1}} -\newcommand{\ucnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -\newcommand{\icnt}[1]{\icntA{#1}\icntB{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (counter)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Counters=\protect\leavevmode Counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (compteur)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- commands -\newcommand{\lit}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} % literal string -\newcommand{\clit}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} % literal command string -\newcommand{\com}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}\icom{#1}} -\newcommand{\ucom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} -\newcommand{\icom}[1]{\icomA{#1}\icomB{#1}} -\newcommand{\fkcom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[fake]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{fake#1}} -\newcommand{\ncom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[no]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{no#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (command)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commands=\protect\leavevmode Commands\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (commande)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commandes=\protect\leavevmode Commandes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- messages -%\newcommand{\mess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\imess{#1}} -%\newcommand{\umess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} -% \let\Buttonbox\Ovalbox % to be changed easily -\def\Buttonbox#1{\fbox{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily -% \def\Buttonbox#1{\keystroke{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily -\newcommand{\lmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\footnotesize - \hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}} -\newcommand{\phmess}{\footnotesize - \item[]{\textcolor{white}{\Buttonbox{\phantom{\texttt{M0000}}}}}} -\newcommand{\RMP}[1]{\reversemarginpar - \marginpar[{\raggedleft\strut\footnotesize\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}% - }\normalmarginpar} -\newcommand{\NMP}[1]{\normalmarginpar - \marginpar[{\raggedleft\Strutt\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}% - }\normalmarginpar} -\newcommand{\imess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\RMP{#1}} -\newcommand{\jmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\NMP{#1}} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\or\relax -\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}} -\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}} -\fi -\newcommand{\HPH}{\footnotesize\hphantom{\fbox{\texttt{M0000}}}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -- Stacked Messages in Margin \SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\ \lmess{W0055}} -\newcommand{\SMM}[1]{\bgroup% - \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. - \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - \protect #1% - \end{tabular}}\egroup} -% -- idem. plus a Z dangerous bend above -\newcommand{\SMMZ}[1]{\bgroup% - \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. - \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] - \protect #1% - \end{tabular}}\egroup} -% -- idem. plus a ZZ double dangerous bend above -\newcommand{\SMMZZ}[1]{\bgroup% - \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors. - \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex] - \protect #1% - \end{tabular}}\egroup} -% Redefine \virage and \Virage (beware to the braces!) -\AtBeginDocument{% -\renewcommand{\virage}{% - \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt}\hfill\null\\ - \HPH - \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar} -\renewcommand{\Virage}{% - \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\ - \HPH - \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}% -} %%% ATBEGINDOCUMENT -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\gdef\envname{environment} -\gdef\envsname{environments} -\gdef\Envsname{Environments} -\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% - \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} -%\def\generalname{General} -\gdef\generalname{} -\or\relax -\gdef\envname{environnement} -\gdef\envsname{environnements} -\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} -\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% - \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} -%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} -\gdef\generalname{} -\fi -\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\setlength{\ptcindent}{0pt} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\makeatletter -\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}% -{\typeout{*************************************^^J% - * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J% - *************************************}} -{} -\RequirePackage{doc} -\renewenvironment{theglossary}{% -\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi -\columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@ -% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]% -\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD -\raggedright -\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces} -{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} -\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}} -\AtBeginDocument{\providecommand{\phantomsection}{}} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48} % '60 -\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{} -\CodelineNumbered -\DisableCrossrefs -\setlength{\textwidth}{375pt} % was 355pt -\newlength{\winf}\setlength{\winf}{\textwidth} % width in frame -\newlength{\winp}\setlength{\winp}{\textwidth} % width in minipage -\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} -\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} -\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt} -\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt} -\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt} -\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} -\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} -\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} -\providecommand\marg[1]{% - {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}} -\providecommand\oarg[1]{% - {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}} -\providecommand\parg[1]{% - {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}} -\def\oc@scan#1{% - \ifx\oc@bslash#1% - \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else - \ifcat a\noexpand#1% - #1\let\next\oc@scan\else - \ifx\oc@percent#1% - \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}% - \else - #1\let\next\egroup - \fi\fi\fi\next} -\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}% -\def\oc@verb#1{% - \catcode`#1\active - \uccode`\~`#1% - \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}} -\begingroup - \obeyspaces% - \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ - /catcode`/\/active - /catcode`<=/catcode`{% - /catcode`>=/catcode`}% - /catcode`/{/active% - /catcode`/}/active% - /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>% - /gdef/begmac< \begin{macrocode}>% - /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>% -/endgroup% -\begingroup - \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\ - \catcode`\\=13 - /catcode`/|=/catcode`/% - /catcode`/%=13 - /gdef/oldcomments{| - /makeatletter - /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials - /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs - /raggedright - /oc@verb/>| - /oc@verb/<| - /let\/oc@bslash - /let%/oc@percent - /obeylines - /parindent/z@ - /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font - /rmfamily - /hfuzz/maxdimen - } -/endgroup -\begingroup - \sloppy% - \obeylines% - \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{% - \ifvmode% - \def\commentline{#1}% - \ifx\commentline\oldc% - \end{oldcomments}% - \else% - \ifx\commentline\begmac% - \begin{macrocode}% - \else% - \leavevmode% - #1^^M% - \fi\fi% - \else% - {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M% - \fi}% -\endgroup% -% \@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part} -\def\partname{File} -\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{% - \relax - \clearpage - \docincludeaux - \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}% - \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux\relax - \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha - \else \@docinclude#1 \fi} -\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage -\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi -\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for -\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi -\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw -\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux -\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi -\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex -\let\PrintIndex\relax -\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges -%\let\PrintChanges\relax -\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary -\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary -\part{\currentfile}% - {\let\ttfamily\relax - \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}% -\DocInput{\currentfile}% -\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex -\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges -\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary -\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary -\clearpage -\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi -\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux} -\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw - \immediate\write\@indexfile - {\string\indexentry{#1}% - {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}% -\let\filesep\@empty -\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}} -\def\@aalph#1{% - \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or - j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or - t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or - D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or - N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or - X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi} -\def\docincludeaux{% - \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}% - \let\filekey\@gobble - \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{% - \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize - \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}% - \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% - \global\let\docincludeaux\relax - \gdef\@oddfoot{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax - File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} % - \else - \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}% - File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} % - Date: \filedate\ % - Version \fileversion - \fi - \hfill\thepage}% - \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}% -\def\task#1#2{} -% ``Change History'' in TOC -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\gdef\envname{environment} -\gdef\envsname{environments} -\gdef\Envsname{Environments} -\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% - \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} -%\def\generalname{General} -\gdef\generalname{} -\or\relax -\gdef\envname{environnement} -\gdef\envsname{environnements} -\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} -\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% - \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} -%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} -\gdef\generalname{} -\fi -\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI -\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}} -\or\relax -\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}} -\fi -%% redefine \glossaryentry -\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}} -%%% -% morefloats.sty ... -% \iffalse -%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990 -%% Don Hosek, Quixote <dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu> -% \fi -% -% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed -% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that -% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed -% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact, -% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be -% exhausted long before that happened. -% -% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed: -\newinsert\bx@S -\newinsert\bx@T -\newinsert\bx@U -\newinsert\bx@V -\newinsert\bx@W -\newinsert\bx@X -\newinsert\bx@Y -\newinsert\bx@Z -\newinsert\bx@AA -\newinsert\bx@BB -\newinsert\bx@CC -\newinsert\bx@DD -\newinsert\bx@EE -\newinsert\bx@FF -\newinsert\bx@GG -\newinsert\bx@HH -\newinsert\bx@II -\newinsert\bx@JJ -\newinsert\bx@KK -\newinsert\bx@LL -\newinsert\bx@MM -\newinsert\bx@NN -\newinsert\bx@OO -\newinsert\bx@PP -\newinsert\bx@QQ -\newinsert\bx@RR -\newinsert\bx@SS -\newinsert\bx@TT -\newinsert\bx@UU -\newinsert\bx@VV -\newinsert\bx@WW -\newinsert\bx@XX -\newinsert\bx@YY -\newinsert\bx@ZZ -\newinsert\bx@AAA -\newinsert\bx@BBB -% -% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+ -% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+. -% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently. -% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's \texttt{doc.sty}~\cite{doc} to -% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed. -\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E - \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J - \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N - \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R - \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V - \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z - \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD - \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH - \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL - \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP - \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT - \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX - \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB} -\makeatother -%%% -\EnableCrossrefs -\CodelineIndex -% \PageIndex -% \RecordChanges -\input{minitoc.pre} -\providecommand{\capstart}{\empty} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\usepackage{fancybox} -% \usepackage[english]{keystroke} % ERRORS -\or\relax -\froff\usepackage{fancybox}\fron -% \usepackage[french]{keystroke} % ERRORS -\fi -% -%%%% FANCYHDR -% \usepackage{fancyhdr} -%%%% FANCYHDR -\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% - \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} -\providecommand{\hyperlink}[2]{\empty} -\providecommand{\hypertarget}[2]{\empty} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \makeatletter -% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble -% \string#1\actualchar -% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}% -% \@esphack} -% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}% -% \@esphack} -% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{% -% \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil -% \def\@tempb{ }% -% \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa -% \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar -% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar -% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}% -% \else -% \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax -% \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar -% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar -% \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}% -% \else -% \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar -% \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar -% \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}% -% \fi}% -% \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax -% \@tempc -% \fi} - \makeatletter - \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{% - #1\actualchar - {\string\ttfamily\space#1} - (\envname)% - \encapchar \string\main}% - \special@index{\Envsname\levelchar{% - \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar - \string\main}\@esphack} - \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack - {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% - \@esphack} - \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack - \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1} - (\envname)\encapchar \string\usage}% - \index{Envsname\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar - \string\usage}\@esphack} -% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} -% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} -\gdef\main#1{\textsf{#1}} -\gdef\usage#1{\textit{#1}} -% \gdef\hyperpage#1{\textbf{#1}} - \makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% NEW ENV - \makeatletter - \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% - \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% - } -% - \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack - {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}% - \@esphack} - \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}% - \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}% - } -% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{} -% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{} -\let\ohyperpage\hyperpage -\gdef\main#1{\textbf{#1}} -\gdef\usage#1{\textsf{#1}} -\gdef\hyperpage#1{\textit{\ohyperpage{#1}}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\ifcase\LANG\relax - \includecomment{ENGLISH} - \excludecomment{FRENCH} - \typeout{ENGLISH DOC} -\or\relax - \excludecomment{ENGLISH} - \includecomment{FRENCH} - \typeout{FRENCH DOC} -\else\relax - \includecomment{ENGLISH} - \excludecomment{FRENCH} - \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} -\def\ABK{\penalty-1\xspace} -\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} -\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~} -\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage -\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{% - \clearpage - {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}% - } -\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage -\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999 -\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits -\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen -\lefthyphenmin=3 -\righthyphenmin=3 -%%% pb \envname -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\gdef\envname{environment} -\gdef\envsname{environments} -\gdef\Envsname{Environments} -\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}% - \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}} -%\def\generalname{General} -\gdef\generalname{} -\or\relax -\gdef\envname{environnement} -\gdef\envsname{environnements} -\gdef\Envsname{Environnements} -\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}% - \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}} -%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral} -\gdef\generalname{} -\fi -%%% fixed notes -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.} -\or\relax -\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre zéro.} -\fi -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken in Acadia (see figure~\vref{f+acadien}) and some parts of the south -of the USA, like Louisiane; see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cajun_French}\,.} -\or\relax -\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parlée en Acadie (voir la figure~\vref{f+acadien}) et dans certaines parties du -sud des États-Unis, comme la Louisiane; voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Français_cadien}\,.} -\fi -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{By \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) and the -\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. See the \upack{Farsi\TeX} site at~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}} -\or\relax -\froff\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{Par \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) et le -\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. Voir le site de \upack{Farsi\TeX} à~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}\fron -\fi -\ifx\KOMAScript\undefined% - \DeclareRobustCommand{\KOMAScript}{\textsf{K\kern.05em O\kern.05em M\kern.05em A\kern.1em-\kern.1em Script}} -\fi -\ifx\PLaTeX\undefined -\makeatletter -\DeclareRobustCommand\PLaTeX{% after latex.dtx - P\kern-.08em L\kern-.36em - {\setbox0\hbox{T}% - \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{% - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \math@fontsfalse\selectfont - A} - \vss}% - }% - \kern-.15em - \TeX\@}% -\makeatother -\fi -\def\PLaTeXe{P\LaTeXe} -\def\quocngu{Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}} -%%%% Strings by language -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUAGE}} -\def\OFFSET{\mbox{OFFSET}} -\def\NB{\mbox{NUMBER}} -\def\NNN{\mbox{LINE}} -\def\PREPA{\mbox{PREPARATION}} -\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASS}} -\def\INAME{\mbox{INTERNAL\_NAME}} -\def\SEQ{\mbox{SEQUENCE}} -\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NEW\_TITLE}} -\def\FILE{\mbox{FILE}} -\def\CTR{\mbox{COUNTER}} -\def\VAL{\mbox{VALUE}} -\def\EXTEN{\mbox{EXTENSION}} -\def\STRING{\mbox{STRING}} -\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMAND}} -\def\PACK{\mbox{PACK}} -\or\relax -\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUE}} -\def\OFFSET{\mbox{DÉPLACEMENT}} -\def\NB{\mbox{NOMBRE}} -\def\NNN{\mbox{LIGNE}} -\def\PREPA{\mbox{PRÉPARATION}} -\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASSE}} -\def\INAME{\mbox{NOM\_INTERNE}} -\def\SEQ{\mbox{SÉQUENCE}} -\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NOUVEAU\_TITRE}} -\def\FILE{\mbox{FICHIER}} -\def\CTR{\mbox{COMPTEUR}} -\def\VAL{\mbox{VALEUR}} -\def\EXTEN{\mbox{SUFFIXE}} -\def\STRING{\mbox{CHAÎNE}} -\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMANDE}} -\def\PACK{\mbox{PAQUETAGE}} -\fi -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% On float pages, push the floats to the top -\makeatletter -\setlength{\@fptop}{\topskip} -\addtolength{\@fptop}{-10pt} -\setlength{\@fpsep}{1.5\baselineskip plus 0fil} -\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fill} -\makeatother -\usepackage{dblaccnt} % here! -\def\magicminitoc{\columnwidth=\linewidth\null\hfilneg\hspace*{-\itemindent}\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\minitoc\hfill\null} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\newsavebox{\Citname}% See TLC2 p 849 -\newenvironment{Citation}[1]% - {\sbox\Citname{#1}\unskip\noindent}% - {\null\hspace*{\fill}\nolinebreak[1]% - \quad\hspace*{\fill}% - \finalhyphendemerits=0\relax - \usebox{\Citname}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\newsavebox{\BMTC} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Load hypernat.sty to compress citations; beware to the catcode of ``:''. -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{} -\or\relax -\froff\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}\fron -\fi -\begin{document} -\pagestyle{headings} -% \setcounter{lofdepth}{2} -% \mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} -\raggedbottom -\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI -\setlength{\marginparpush}{1.0ex}% -% % FANCYHDR -% \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% -% \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} -% \pagestyle{fancy} -% \fancyhf{} % RAZ -% %\newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\marginparwidth}\addtolength{\fancyoff}{\marginparsep} -% \newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\leftmargin} -% \fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{\fancyoff} -% \fancyhead[RO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} -% \fancyhead[RE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage} -% \fancyhead[LO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} -% \fancyhead[LE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark} -% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt} -% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} -% \addtolength{\headheight}{2pt} -% % FANCYHDR -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\let\fron\relax -\let\froff\relax -\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing - \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}% - \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding} page}% - \def\reftextafter {on the \reftextvario{next}{following} page}% - \def\reftextbefore {on the \reftextvario{page before}{preceding page}}% - \def\reftextcurrent {on \reftextvario{this}{this} page}% -%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% - \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}% - \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% - \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}% -\or\relax -\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing - \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des figures}% - \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des tableaux}% - \renewcommand\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Fig.) - \renewcommand\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Tab.) - \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% - \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}% - \def\reftextafter {page suivante}% - \def\reftextbefore {page pr\'ec\'edente}% - \def\reftextcurrent {sur cette page}% -%% \def\reftextcurrent {\relax}% - \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}% - \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}% - \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}% -\fi -%% small in index -\let\svtheindex\theindex -%% preface of index - \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}% - \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}% -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\long\def\Indexhead{In this index, italic style numbers (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) are page numbers -(and hyperlinks, thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), normal roman numbers -(123) are code line -references for usage, bold roman numbers (\textbf{123}) are code line references for definitions; -colored numbers in square brackets, like this:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc}, are bibliographic references, eventually -sorted and compressed. - -The names of commands, environments, files, suffixes, options, features, messages identifiers\,\footnote{The -messages identifiers appear in the right margin of the text, near the points of usage.}, and languages, -are in \texttt{typewriter} font -(\textbf{\texttt{bold}} for default options or the default language). -The names of tools, packages and classes are in \textsf{sans serif} font. -The people names are in \textrm{roman} for the first names, in \textsc{Small Caps} for the family names, -separated by a comma, the -family name first\,\footnote{For some oriental names (like japanese, korean, vietnamese or indian names), -it is sometimes difficult to know which is the first or the last -name.}, like in ``\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie'' in the index.% - -Some commands (like the internal names of language specific letters) are not indexed. - -\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} -% -\par\bigskip}% -\or\relax -\long\def\Indexhead{Dans cet index, les nombres en italique (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) sont des numéros de pages -(et des hyperliens, grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), -les nombres en fonte romaine normale (123) sont des références à~des lignes de code d'utilisation, -les nombres en fonte romaine grasse (\textbf{123}) sont des références à~des lignes de code de définition; -les nombres colorés entre crochets carrés, comme ceci:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc-fr}, sont des références bibliographiques, -éventuellement triées et compressées. - -Les noms des commandes, environnements, fichiers, suffixes, options, dispositifs, identificateurs de messages\,\footnote{Les -identificateurs de messages apparaissent dans la marge droite du texte, près des points d'utilisation.} et -langues sont en fonte de \texttt{machine à~écrire} (\textbf{\texttt{grasse}} pour les options et la langue par défaut). -Les noms des outils, des paquetages et des classes sont en fonte \textsf{sans empattement}. -Les noms de personnes sont en \textrm{romain} pour les prénoms, en \textsc{Petites Capitales} -pour les noms de familles, séparés par -une virgule, le nom de famille en premier\,\footnote{Pour certains noms orientaux (par exemple, japonais, coréens, -vietnamiens ou indiens), il est parfois difficile de savoir quel est le prénom ou le nom de famille.}, -comme dans «~\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie~» dans l'index.% - -Certaines commandes (comme les noms internes de lettres spécifiques de certaines langues) ne sont pas indexées. - -\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}} -% -\par\bigskip}% -\fi -\makeatletter - \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\hspace*{15pt}}% - \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\hspace*{30pt}}% -\makeatother -%% \def\theindex{\svtheindex\small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}\setlength{\columnsep}{45pt}\sloppy} -\makeatletter -\renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \columnsep=2.1em% - \def\item{\@idxitem{0}\relax}% - \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\relax\hspace*{15pt}}% - \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\relax\hspace*{30pt}}% - \begin{multicols}{2}[\chapter*{\indexname}\Indexhead][10\baselineskip]% - \mtcaddchapter[\indexname]% - \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}% - \small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}% - \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% - \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}% - \setlength{\columnsep}{2.1em}% - \sloppy\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\thispagestyle{plain}\pagestyle{myheadings}\def\item{\@idxitem{0}}% -%% \raggedcolumns - \setcounter{collectmore}{-1}% Not perfect, but acceptable. - \raggedbottom}% - {\end{multicols}} -\makeatother -\nonfrenchspacing -\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} -\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} -\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} -\raggedbottom -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11} - \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} - \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1} - \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight} - \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt} - \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}% - \markboth{Index}{Index}% - Numbers written in italic refer to the page - where the corresponding entry is described; - numbers underlined refer to the - code line of the - definition; numbers in roman refer to the - code lines - where the entry is used.} - \DocInput{minitoc.dtx} - \clearpage -%% \begin{SMOOTH} - \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible -\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak - \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \begin{RaggedRight} -% \PrintChanges -% \end{RaggedRight} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \end{SMOOTH} - \flushbottom - \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\citeindexfalse}{} - \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} - \mtcsetrules{minitoc}{on} - \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.5ex}\relax\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.ex]\raggedcolumns}% - \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\relax\vspace{-1.5ex}}% - \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}% - \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}% - \setlength{\awidth}{\textwidth} - \addtolength{\awidth}{-1pt} -% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxrule} -% \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxsep} -% \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex} - \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-1\baselineskip\kern.5ex} - \makeatletter\savebox{\BMTC}{\relax{\begin{minipage}[t]{\awidth}\minitoc[l]\end{minipage}}}\makeatother% - \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}% - \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}% - \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}% - \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}% - \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[0] - \PrintIndex - \end{mtchideinmaintoc} - \AtEndDocument{\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}} - \mtcfixindex[chapter] -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \fi -% -% \CheckSum{0} -% -% \CharacterTable -% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -% -% -% \lefthyphenmin=3 -% \righthyphenmin=3 -% \hyphenation{Mittelbach} -% \hyphenation{Jackowski} -% \hyphenation{Impatient} -% \hyphenation{make-index} -% \hyphenation{hyper-link} -% -% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty} -% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input} -% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle} -% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa} -% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue} -% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum} -% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin} -% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup} -% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef} -% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\egroup} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist} -% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endinput,\endtrivlist} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global} -% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet} -% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcase} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item} -% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\ignorespaces,\index,\item} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower} -% \DoNotIndex{\let,\llap,\lower} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing} -% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage\nonfrenchspacing} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc} -% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\raggedleft,\rm,\sc} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut} -% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\small,\space,\string,\strut} -% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} -% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@} -% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\z@} -% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} -% \DoNotIndex{\`,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary} -% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\markboth,\mathcode} -% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\mathcode} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip} -% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox} -% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle} -% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\raise,\rangle} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb} -% \DoNotIndex{\section,\TeX,\underline,\verb} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} -% \DoNotIndex{\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar} -% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]} -% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode} -% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@} -% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q} -% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H} -% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z} -% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0} -% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\makeatletter,\makeatother} -% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary} -% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother} -% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} -% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined} -% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} -% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc} -% \DoNotIndex{\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc} -% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode} -% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifmmode} -% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting} -% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\newtoks} -% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf} -% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse} -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} -% \DoNotIndex{\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault} -% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault} -% \DoNotIndex{\*} -% \DoNotIndex{\ } -% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\MessageBreak} -% ^^A lettres de l'hébreu -% \DoNotIndex{\alef,\ayin,\bet,\finalmem,\finalnun,\kaf,\lamed,\mem,\nun,\resh,\shin,\tav,\tet,\vav,\yod} -% ^^A lettres hebrew2 -% \DoNotIndex{\hebalef} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebayin} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebbet} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalmem} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalnun} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebkaf} -% \DoNotIndex{\heblamed} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebmem} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebnun} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebresh} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebshin} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebtav} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebtet} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebvav} -% \DoNotIndex{\hebyod} -% ^^A lettres arabi -% \DoNotIndex{\T} -% \DoNotIndex{\alef} -% \DoNotIndex{\alefhamza} -% \DoNotIndex{\dal} -% \DoNotIndex{\fa} -% \DoNotIndex{\ha} -% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} -% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} -% \DoNotIndex{\lam} -% \DoNotIndex{\meem} -% \DoNotIndex{\qaf} -% \DoNotIndex{\ra} -% \DoNotIndex{\seen} -% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} -% \DoNotIndex{\waw} -% \DoNotIndex{\yahamza} -% ^^A lettres bulgares -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} -% ^^A lettres du cyrillique -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} -% ^^A lettres farsi3 -% \DoNotIndex{\alef} -% \DoNotIndex{\dal} -% \DoNotIndex{\fa} -% \DoNotIndex{\ha} -% \DoNotIndex{\jeem} -% \DoNotIndex{\kaf} -% \DoNotIndex{\lam} -% \DoNotIndex{\meem} -% \DoNotIndex{\nun} -% \DoNotIndex{\ra} -% \DoNotIndex{\seen} -% \DoNotIndex{\sheen} -% \DoNotIndex{\taa} -% \DoNotIndex{\waw} -% \DoNotIndex{\ya} -% ^^A lettres mongolb -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyru} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyry} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} -% ^^A lettres russianb -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyro} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} -% ^^A lettres serbianc -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh} -% ^^A lettres ukrainian -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP} -% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyra} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyre} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyri} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt} -% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu} -% ^^A not true macros -% \DoNotIndex{\PTC@,\MTC@,\STC@} -% -% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \title{{\Large The \textsf{minitoc} package}\thanks{This document -% corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}} -% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert \\ \url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}} -% \or\relax -% \title{{\Large Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}}\thanks{Ce document -% correspond à~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, daté \filedate.}} -% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert \\ {\froff\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}} -% \fi -% \makeatletter -% \let\SVtitle\@title -% \let\SVdate\@date -% \let\SVauthor\@author -% -% \def\@maketitle{% -% \newpage -% \null -% \vskip 2em% -% \begin{center}% -% \let \footnote \thanks -% {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}% -% \vskip 1.5em% -% {\large -% \lineskip .5em% -% \begin{tabular}[t]{c}% -% \SVauthor -% \end{tabular}\par}% -% \vskip 1em% -% {\large \SVdate}% -% \end{center}% -% \par -% \vskip 1.5em} -% \makeatother -% \maketitle -% \doparttoc -% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot -% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot -% {\parskip=0pt -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Summary}{0}}{} -% \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents} -% \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{List of figures} -% \renewcommand{\listtablename}{List of tables} -% \or\relax -% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Sommaire}{0}}{} -% \fi -% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -% \makeatletter -% \let\l@chaptersom\l@chapter -% \makeatother -% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -% \tableofcontents -% \mtcaddchapter -% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -% \listoffigures -% \mtcaddchapter -% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -% \listoftables -% \mtcaddchapter -% } -% ^^A FIX INDEX? -% \let\svmacro\macro -% \let\svendmacro\endmacro -% \let\svenvironment\environment -% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment -% ^^A \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup} -% ^^A \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup} -% ^^A FIX INDEX? -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter*{About this document\markboth{About this document}{About this document}} -% \markboth{About this document}{About this document} -% \mtcaddchapter[About this document] -% This document is rather thick, but please, be not afraid: you do not need to read every page. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The most useful chapters are in the first part (``{User's Manual}'', page~\pageref{p+UM}): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item the chapter~``The \upack{minitoc} package'', page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, describes the essential commands to use -% the package; -% \item the chapter ``Frequently Asked Questions'', page~\pageref{FAQ}, may help you to solve some -% specific problems; -% \item the chapter ``Memento'', page~\pageref{c+memento}, is a set of tables to be used as a -% remainder of the commands of this package; -% \item the chapter ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, gives the code of some documents showing the -% basic usage of the \upack{minitoc} package and some interesting situations; -% \item the chapter ``Messages'', page~\pageref{c+messages}, is certainly boring, but it should be searched if you get some -% warning or error messages from the \upack{minitoc} package, because it explains them and also the informative -% messages (table~\vref{t+allmess} will help you to find the meaning of a message); -% \item the chapter ``Jargon'', page~\pageref{c+jargon}, attemps to explain -% most of the technical terms used here; -% \item the chapter ``Installation'', page~\pageref{c+installation}, describes -% all the files included in the distribution of the package; -% \item the chapter ``Postface'', page~\pageref{c+postface}, -% gives an abbreviated history of the package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item The second part, ``Implementation'', page~\pageref{p+ID}, is much more technical; you can read it if you are -% interested in the details of the coding of the package. -% The chapter ``Language definition (\suffix{.mld}) and object -% (\suffix{.mlo}) files'', page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, may be useful if you are interested by some language. -% This chapter contains many maps and illustrations. -% \item The third part, ``Complements'', page~\pageref{p+complements}, contains a bibliography, a detailed history of -% the package, a list of acknowlegments, and an index. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \bigskip -% -% For this document, I have used: -% \begin{itemize} -% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% -% \item a short table of contents (summary), with the \com{shorttoc} command from my \pack{shorttoc} -% package~\cite{shorttoc}, displaying only parts and chapters;}{\relax} -% \item a main table of contents (\com{tableofcontents}), with a maximum depth~(6); -% \item a main list of figures (\com{listoffigures}) and a main list of tables (\com{listoftables}); -% \item for each part, a table of contents displaying only the chapters (\com{parttoc} with -% \dcnt{parttocdepth} equal to~1); -% ^^A \item for each part, a list of figures (\com{partlof}) and a list of tables (\com{partlot}) when useful; -% \item for each chapter, a complete table of contents (\com{minitoc} with \dcnt{minitocdepth} equal to~6); -% \item for each chapter, a list of figures (\com{minilof}) and a list of tables (\com{minilot}) when useful; -% \item customized parameters for the layout of the mini-tables; as the PDF version of the documentation uses hyperlinks -% (with the help of the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}), -% these mini-tables should help you to navigate within the document; -% \item some hyperlinks, placed in the right margin, contain a message identifier; the link points to the description -% of the message in the ``Messages'' chapter; try this one:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} -% \item some flags, with hyperlinks to articles (mainly in Wikipedia) about countries or languages; -% \item the \pack{calc} package~\cite{calc} to make some computations with comfort; -% \ifBT\relax -% \item the \pack{booktabs} package~\cite{booktabs} to format the tables; -% \else\fi -% \item the \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} and \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} packages to document the code; -% \item many other packages to improve the presentation of the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% \chapter*{À~propos de ce document\markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}} -% \markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document} -% \mtcaddchapter[À~propos de ce document] -% Ce document est assez épais, mais s'il vous plaît, n'en soyez pas effrayés: vous n'avez pas besoin de lire toutes -% les pages. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les chapitres les plus utiles sont dans la première partie («~{Manuel de l'utilisateur}~», page~\pageref{p+UM}): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item le chapitre~«~Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~», page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, décrit les commandes essentielles -% pour utiliser le paquetage; -% \item le chapitre «~Questions fréquemment posées~», page~\pageref{FAQ}, peut vous aider à~résoudre certains -% problèmes spécifiques; -% \item le chapitre «~Mémento~», page~\pageref{c+memento}, est un ensemble de tableaux à~utiliser -% comme aide-mémoire des commandes de ce paquetage; -% \item le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, donne le code de quelques documents montrant -% l'utilisation basique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et quelques situations intéressantes; -% \item le chapitre «~Messages~», page~\pageref{c+messages}, est certainement -% fastidieux, mais il faut le consulter lorsque vous recevez des messages d'avertissement ou d'erreur du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}, parce qu'il les explique ainsi que les messages informatifs (le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} -% vous aidera à~trouver la signification d'un message); -% \item le chapitre «~Jargon~», -% page~\pageref{c+jargon}, essaye d'expliquer la plupart des termes techniques utilisés ici; -% \item le chapitre «~Installation~», -% page~\pageref{c+installation}, décrit tous les fichiers inclus dans la distribution du paquetage; -% \item le chapitre «~Postface~», page~\pageref{c+postface}, donne un historique abrégé du paquetage. -% \end{itemize} -% \item La deuxième partie, «~Implantation~», page~\pageref{p+ID}, est bien plus technique; vous pouvez la lire si vous êtes -% intéressés par les détails du codage du paquetage. -% Le chapitre «~Fichiers de définition (\suffix{.mld}) et objets (\suffix{.mlo}) de langue~», -% page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, peut être utile si vous êtes intéressés par une certaine langue. -% Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses cartes et illustrations. -% \item La troisième partie, «~Compléments~», page~\pageref{p+complements}, contient une bibliographie, un historique -% détaillé du paquetage, une liste des remerciements et un index. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \bigskip -% -% Pour ce document, j'ai utilisé: -% \begin{itemize} -% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{% -% \item une table des matières abrégée (sommaire), avec la commande \com{shorttoc} de mon -% paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}, n'affichant que les parties et chapitres;}{\relax} -% \item une table des matières principale (\com{tableofcontents}), avec une profondeur maximale~(6); -% \item une liste principale des figures (\com{listoffigures}) et une liste principale des tableaux -% (\com{listoftables}); -% \item pour chaque partie, une table des matières ne montrant que les chapitres (\com{parttoc} avec -% \dcnt{parttocdepth} égale à~1); -% ^^A \item pour chaque partie, une liste des figures (\com{partlof}) -% ^^A et une liste des tableaux (\com{partlot}) lorsque c'est utile; -% \item pour chaque chapitre, une table des matières complète (\com{minitoc} avec \dcnt{minitocdepth} égale à~6); -% \item pour chaque chapitre, une liste des figures (\com{minilof}) et une liste des tableaux (\com{minilot}) -% lorsque c'est utile; -% \item des paramètres adaptés pour la mise en page mini-tables; comme la version PDF de la documentation utilise -% des hyperliens, (à~l'aide du paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}), ces mini-tables devraient -% vous aider à~vous déplacer dans le document; -% \item quelques hyperliens, placés dans la marge de droite, contiennent un identificateur de message; le lien -% renvoie à~la description du message dans le chapitre «~Messages~»; -% \item quelques drapeaux avec des hyperliens vers des articles (principalement de Wikipedia) sur des pays ou des langues; -% essayez celui-ci:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001} -% \item le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} pour faire certains calculs plus confortablement; -% \ifBT\relax -% \item le paquetage \pack{booktabs}~\cite{booktabs} pour formater les tableaux; -% \else\fi -% \item les paquetages \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} et \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} pour documenter le code; -% \item de nombreux autres paquetages pour améliorer la présentation de la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM} -% \or\relax -% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM} -% \fi -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \parttoc -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} -% ^^A \partlof -% ^^A \partlot -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{The \upack{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} -% \or\relax -% \frenchspacing -% \chapter{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc} -% \fi -% ^^A \pagestyle{headings} -% \minitoc -% \lsneed{5} -% \mtcskip -% \minilof -% \lsneed{5} -% \mtcskip -% \minilot -% \section{Introduction} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \upack{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been -% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). -% A summary of the evolution of this package is given in the chapter~\vref{c+postface}. -% This package creates a mini-table of contents -% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \upack{minitoc} package introduces -% its own jargon, explained in this document. -% It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})% -% at the beginning of each chapter of a document. -% It is also possible to have a mini-list of -% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot''). -% The document class should of course define chapters -% (classes like \class{book} or \class{report}~\cite{classes}) or sections -% (classes like \class{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \class{proc} class~\cite{proc}, and the \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} and -% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews} classes, load the standard -% \class{article} class, these classes will be just considered as variants of the \class{article} class.})~\cite{classes}. -% Thus, this package should not be used with -% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \class{letter}). -% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level -% (i.e.,~classes like \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article}), -% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents -% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document. -% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'') -% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot''). -% When the document class has no \com{chapter} command -% but has a \com{section} command, you may use section -% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level -% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots''). -% -% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables'' -% (or sometimes ``mini-lists''). -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, écrit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a été presque -% complètement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse). -% Un résumé de l'évolution de ce paquetage est donné dans le chapitre~\vref{c+postface}. -% Ce paquetage crée une mini-table des matières (une «~minitoc~»\,\footnote{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% introduit son propre jargon, expliqué dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas être trop difficile de -% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera évidemment utilisé ici.}) au début de chaque chapitre d'un document. -% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une -% mini-liste des figures (une «~minilot~») et une mini-liste des tableaux (une «~minilot~»). La classe de document -% devrait, bien sûr, définir des chapitres (classes telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}) ou des sections -% (classes telles que \class{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \class{proc}~\cite{proc}, ainsi que les classes -% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} et \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}, chargent la classe -% standard \class{article}, ces classes seront simplement considérées comme des variantes de la classe \class{article}.})~\cite{classes}. -% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas être utilisé avec des classes de document ne possédant pas les commandes de -% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \class{letter}). -% Lorsque la classe de document définit un niveau de sectionnement «~partie~» (c'est-à-dire des classes telles -% que \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}), vous pouvez créer une table des matières -% «~partielle~» (une «~parttoc~») au début de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste -% des figures partielle (une «~partlof~») et une liste des tableaux partielle (une «~partlot~») au début de chaque -% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne possède pas de commande \com{chapter} mais a une -% commande \com{section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des matières au niveau section («~secttocs~») au -% début de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures («~sectlofs~») ou des tableaux («~sectlots~») -% au niveau section. -% -% Toutes ces tables («~minitocs~», «~partlofs~», «~sectlots~», etc.) sont collectivement référencées sous le terme de -% «~mini-tables~» (ou parfois «~mini-listes~»). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Important restrictions}\label{note+sectionning}% -% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document. -% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local -% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level. -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Restrictions importantes}\label{note+sectionning}% -% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans -% le même document. Cette restriction est destinée à~éviter des documents pleins de mini-tables des matières, -% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales à~chaque niveau de sectionnement. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative -% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \com{part}. -% The commands relative -% to the section level are defined only if the document class -% defines \com{section} but does not define \com{chapter}. -% \or\relax -% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont définies que si la classe de document -% définit \com{part}. -% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont définies que si la classe de document définit \com{section} -% mais ne définit pas \com{chapter}. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Version} -% The current version of this package is~\#60. You will find a resumed history of the package in the ``Postface'' -% chapter (chapter~\vref{c+postface}) and a more detailed history in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Version} -% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#60. Vous trouverez un historique résumé de ce paquetage dans le -% chapitre «~Postface~» (chapitre~\vref{c+postface}) et un historique plus détaillé dans «~Historique des -% modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{License} -% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the -% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3 -% of this license or (as convenient) any later version. -% The latest version of this license is in -% \begin{quote} -% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} -% \end{quote} -% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{} -% version 2003/12/01 or later. -% -% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported. -% However, suggestions for corrections and reasoned improvements are welcome. -% \or\relax -% \section{Licence} -% Ce paquetage doit être distribué et/ou peut être modifié sous les conditions de la -% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version -% ultérieure. La plus récente version de cette licence est dans -% \begin{quote}\froff -% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} -% \end{quote} -% et la version~1.3 ou ultérieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou -% ultérieure. -% -% Mais, s'il vous plaît, ne me parlez pas de versions bricolées; elles ne seront pas maintenues. -% Cependant, les suggestions de corrections et d'améliorations raisonnables sont les bienvenues. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Using the \upack{minitoc} package} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et créer les mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To use the \upack{minitoc} package, you must insert a command: -% \or\relax -% Pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, vous devez insérer une commande: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must -% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning -% commands; if you modify some sectionning commands after loading the -% \upack{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}. -% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter, -% after the \com{chapter} command, at the point of the \com{minitoc} -% command. The \com{minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means -% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a -% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be used, -% but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you are asking for -% details with a high value for \dcnt{minitocdepth}. -% As an example, I~once used a \com{afterpage} command -% (\pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage}) to place the long -% minilof of chapter~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (so the minilof was forced to begin at the top of the next page).} inside a chapter. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Of course, it is better -% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide -% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the -% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% dans le préambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit être placée \emph{après} toute modification faite sur -% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement après le chargement du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}. -% La mini-table des matières sera dans le chapitre, après la commande \com{chapter}, à~l'emplacement de la -% commande \com{minitoc}. La commande \com{minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque -% n'importe~où}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~où~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alinéas -% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une -% note marginale ou infrapaginale). Même un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant peut être utilisé, mais avec -% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut être assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des -% détails avec une valeur élevée de \dcnt{minitocdepth}. -% Par exemple, il m'est arrivé d'utiliser une commande \com{afterpage} (paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage}) -% pour placer la longue minilof du chapitre~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (pour forcer la minilof à~commencer en haut de la -% page suivante).} à~l'intérieur d'un chapitre. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début du chapitre, éventuellement -% après un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi décider de la placer à~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez -% utiliser les mêmes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des matières pour -% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[ht] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} -% \centering -% {\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \emph{or:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \ldots&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ -% \com{dominilof}&&\\ -% \com{dominilot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{minitoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ -% \com{minilof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&&\\ -% \com{minilot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[ht] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc} -% \centering -% {\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \emph{ou:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{dominitoc}&&\\ -% \com{dominilof}&&\\ -% \com{dominilot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{minitoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&\\ -% \com{minilof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&\\ -% \com{minilot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}}% -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be -% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, -% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number. -% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique, -% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the -% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, -% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}.}. -% The suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and -% is \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables. -% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and -% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending on the -% document class. -% \or\relax -% Pour chaque mini-table des matières, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme -% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu du chapitre. «~Absolu~» signifie que ce numéro est -% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les -% mini-tables a résolu certains problèmes ténébreux, et aussi frappé d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que -% \com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}.}. -% Le suffixe est \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} pour -% les mini-listes de tableaux. -% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les -% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux -% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Préparation des mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of -% the \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.} -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, and \com{dominilot} (for mini-tables at the chapter level), -% take respectively the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} files, -% and cut slices from them to create the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} est directement dérivé de celui du -% paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.} -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent -% respectivement les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}, -% et en -% prélèvent des tranches pour créer les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} -% et \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The commands \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, and \com{dosectlot} (for mini-tables at the section level) -% and \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, and \com{dopartlot} (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog. -% -% The\virage{} \com{mtcprepare} command invokes (and replaces) all these preparation commands when they are available -% with the document class and if the adequate contents file exists. -% This command accepts also an optional argument to set the default position of the title -% for \emph{all} the mini-tables. -% -% All\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} the preparation commands are \emph{ignored} if the \com{nofiles} command is invoked -% in the preamble, to avoid to overwrite the mini-table auxiliary files. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% To\virage{} obtain a satisfactory result (i.e.,~non empty), please note that all these commands must -% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures}, -% and \com{listoftables} commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings. -% -% It\virage{} is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an -% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before} -% any \com{caption}-like command -% producing an entry in the list of figures (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables -% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables might result. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Les commandes \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau section), -% et \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et \com{dopartlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont -% analogues. -% -% La\virage{} commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque (et remplace) toutes ces commandes de préparation lorsqu'elles sont -% disponibles pour la classe du document et si le fichier de contenu adéquat existe. -% Cette commande accepte aussi un argument optionnel pour établir la position par défaut du titre -% pour \emph{toutes} les mini-tables. -% -% Toutes\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} les commandes de préparation sont \emph{ignorées} si -% la commande \com{nofiles} est invoquée dans le préambule, pour éviter d'écraser les fichiers auxiliaires des mini-tables. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Pour\virage{} obtenir un résultat satisfaisant (c'est-à-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent -% \emph{impérativement être placées avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \com{tableofcontents}, -% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|! -% -% Il\virage{} est aussi \emph{fortement} recommandé de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de -% sectionnement produisant une entrée dans la table des matières (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et -% \emph{avant} toute commande analogue à~\com{caption} produisant une entrée dans la liste des figures (pour les -% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les -% mini-tables pourraient être dans le désordre. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcskip} command may be used to add a vertical -% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is -% \com{mtcskipamount} (equal to \com{bigskipamount} by default). -% \com{mtcskip} eliminates any immediate previous vertical -% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is -% empty and skipped by the \optd{checkfiles} option. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcskip} peut être utilisée pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur -% est \com{mtcskipamount} (égale à~\com{bigskipamount} par défaut). \com{mtcskip} élimine tout saut vertical -% qui précède immédiatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc -% ignorée par l'option \optd{checkfiles}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The section-level table of contents will be in the section, -% after the \com{section} command, at the point of the \com{secttoc} command. The \com{secttoc} command -% may occur \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. It is often better to put it at the beginning of the section, -% or after some short introductory material. You should use the same conventions in all sections. If you want to add -% a~section-level table of contents for a section, you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. -% \or\relax -% La table des matières au niveau section sera dans la section, après la commande \com{section}, à~l'emplacement -% de la commande \com{secttoc}. La commande \com{secttoc} peut être placée \emph{presque n'importe~où} -% à~l'intérieur d'une section. Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début de la section, ou éventuellement -% après un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les mêmes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous -% souhaitez ajouter la table des matières au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la séquence -% donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} -% \centering{\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \emph{or:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ -% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ -% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{secttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{sectlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{sectlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[t!] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc} -% \centering{\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \emph{ou:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\ -% \com{dosectlof}&&\\ -% \com{dosectlot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{secttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{sectlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{sectlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be -% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, -% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number. -% The suffix is \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and -% is \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables. -% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and -% section~\vref{.8+3}). -% \or\relax -% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme -% \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. -% Le suffixe est \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} pour les -% listes de figures au niveau section et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section. -% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les -% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\usepackage} -% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{rem+FB}As\imess{W0056} floats (figures and tables) could drift\footnote{% -% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% -% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. -% There is a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places -% relative to the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship -% that slips its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} -% somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and -% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better -% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the -% \opt{insection} option in the \com{usepackage} command: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| -% \end{verse} -% if you want more consistent sectlofs and sectlots. -% The \opt{insection} option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its \optp{verbose}{placeins} -% and \optp{section}{placeins} options. -% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \com{FloatBarrier} command of this package to correctly place the -% figure or table and have a correct mini-table. -% The options \optp{above}{placeins} or \optp{below}{placeins} options should not be used, because they allow -% floats to drift above -% or below a \com{FloatBarrier} (or a section limit): the barrier becomes ``porous'' upwards\footnote{But a float -% can not drift upwards beyond the top of the current page.}~($\uparrow$) or -% downwards~($\downarrow$), or both~($\updownarrow$). The \optp{section}{placeins} option makes a more ``watertight'' -% barrier~($\equiv$). This is illustrated by the figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% -% The \pack{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, is available -% on CTAN archives; note that the file \xfile{placeins.sty} contains its own -% documentation, with a copy in \xfile{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18. -% \begin{figure}[p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{section}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{below}{placeins} option\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \caption{Float barriers}\label{f+barrier} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% Since version~\#45, this option also loads the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} -% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}) to force a float to appear \emph{after} its reference. -% The \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options of the \pack{placeins} package are no more used, -% because they allowed the floats to move out of the section. -% -% In\virage{} all cases, it is \emph{strongly} recommended to verify the position of -% the floats and, if necessary, to look at the messages of the \pack{placeins} package -% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% The placement of floats is a very complex problem, so some manual intervention may be necessary, like the use -% of the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} or, better, of the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow}. -% \or\relax -% \label{rem+FB}Comme\imess{W0056} les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient -% dériver\,\footnote{\selectlanguage{english}% -% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}% -% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. There is -% a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places relative to -% the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship that slips -% its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}} -% quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression -% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur -% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option -% \opt{insection} dans la commande \com{usepackage}: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}| -% \end{verse} -% si vous désirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus cohérentes. -% L'option \opt{insection} charge le paquetage -% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}. -% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} ou \optp{below}{placeins} ne devraient pas être utilisées, car elles permettent aux éléments -% flottants de dériver au-dessus ou en dessous d'une \com{FloatBarrier} (ou d'une limite de section): -% la barrière devient «~poreuse~» vers l'amont\,\footnote{Mais un élément flottant ne peut pas dériver vers -% l'amont au-delà du sommet de la page courante.}~($\uparrow$) ou vers l'aval~($\downarrow$), ou dans les -% deux sens~($\updownarrow$). -% Il peut même être nécessaire d'utiliser la commande \com{FloatBarrier} de ce paquetage pour placer -% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte. -% L'option \optp{section}{placeins} place une barrière plus étanche~($\equiv$). -% Ceci est illustré par la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% -% Le paquetage \pack{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN; -% notez que le fichier \xfile{placeins.sty} -% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \xfile{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus -% récente que 2005/04/18. -% \begin{figure}[p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{section}{placeins}\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{above}{placeins}\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% -% \bigskip -% -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\ -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\ -% \midrule -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \caption{Barrières pour les flottants}\label{f+barrier} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% Depuis la version~\#45, cette option charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} -% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}) pour forcer un élément flottant à~n'apparaître qu'\emph{après} sa référence. -% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins} du paquetage \pack{placeins} ne sont plus utilisées, -% car elles permettaient aux éléments de sortir de la section. -% -% Dans\virage{} tous les cas, il est \emph{fortement} recommandé de -% vérifier la position des éléments flottants et, si nécessaire, de regarder les messages du paquetage \pack{placeins} -% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% Le placement des éléments flottants est un problème très complexe, donc une intervention manuelle peut être nécessaire, -% comme l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float}, ou, mieux, du paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part, -% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. -% \or\relax -% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des matières partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée -% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[t!] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} -% \centering{\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ -% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \emph{or:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ -% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ -% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{parttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{partlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \com{partlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[t] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc} -% \centering{\small\ttfamily -% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}} -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\ -% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ -% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\ -% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\ -% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \emph{ou:}&&\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{doparttoc}&&\\ -% \com{dopartlof}&&\\ -% \com{dopartlot}&&\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\ -% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\ -% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\ -% \com{parttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{partlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \com{partlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\ -% \ldots&&\\ -% \end{tabularx}}} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be -% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, -% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. -% The suffix is \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and -% is \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} for partial lists of tables. -% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short -% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and section~\vref{.8+3}). -% \or\relax -% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme -% \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. -% Le suffixe est \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} pour les -% listes de figures au niveau partie et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie. -% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les -% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking -% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a -% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list -% of figures (i.e.,~the title and two horizontal rules). -% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring -% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a -% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part -% list of figures (i.e.,~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks -% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and -% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot). -% \or\relax -% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour -% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une mini-liste -% des figures vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander -% ou non une table des matières partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine -% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une liste partielle des figures -% vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables -% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and -% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended -% to put no \com{minitoc} command in -% a chapter without sections and no \com{minilof} or -% \com{minilot} command in a chapter without figures or tables. -% The \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option -% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file); -% the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option restores -% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignorées et ce problème devrait disparaître -% dans des circonstances normales. Néanmoins, il est recommandé de ne pas mettre de commande \com{minitoc} dans un -% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot} dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans -% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir la section~\vref{s+placing}), active par -% défaut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}); l'option de paquetage -% \opt{nocheckfiles} rétablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprimées). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents -% contain only references higher and to sections and -% subsections. The counters \dcnt{parttocdepth}, -% \dcnt{minitocdepth} and \dcnt{secttocdepth}, -% similar to \dcnt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial -% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of -% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\dcnt{lofdepth} and -% \dcnt{lotdepth}), as done by the \pack{subfigure} and -% \pack{subfig} packages~\cite{subfigure,subfig}\label{h.subfig} from -% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like -% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, -% and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Par défaut, les mini-tables et tables des matières partielles ne contiennent que les références jusqu'aux sections et -% sous-sections. Les trois compteurs \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} -% et \dcnt{secttocdepth}, similaires à~\dcnt{tocdepth}, permettent à~l'utilisateur de -% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affectées par ces compteurs, mais -% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeur pour ces listes (\dcnt{lofdepth} et -% \dcnt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par les paquetages\label{h.subfig} -% \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} et -% \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont créés si -% nécessaire, portant des noms évidents tels que \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, -% \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}\label{s+starred.chap} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections étoilés}\label{s+starred.chap} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \com{chapter*} and a -% \or\relax -% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \com{chapter*} et une commande -% \fi -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% command\Virage{} to add something in the -% table of contents, the numbering of the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered. -% To avoid that problem, a first method is to say: -% \or\relax -% pour\Virage{} ajouter quelque chose dans la table des matières, la numérotation des fichiers auxiliaires de -% \upack{minitoc} serait altérée. Pour éviter ce problème, une première méthode est de dire: -% \fi -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addstarredpart}\verb|{...}|\\ -% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{...}|\\ -% \com{addstarredsection}\verb|{...}| -% \end{quote} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or -% sect-toc; for lower levels, the usual command is sufficient: -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une part-, mini- ou -% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inférieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude: -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| -% \end{quote} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the -% minitoc of a starred chapter: -% \or\relax -% Donc, pour ajouter une entrée de niveau section dans la table des matières globale et dans la minitoc -% d'un chapitre étoilé: -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{verse} -% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ -% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\ -% \com{minitoc}\\ -% \com{section*}\verb|{First section}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{First section}|\\ -% \com{section*}\verb|{Second section}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Second section}| -% \end{verse} -% \or\relax -% \begin{verse} -% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ -% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\ -% \com{minitoc}\\ -% \com{section*}\verb|{Première section}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Première section}|\\ -% \com{section*}\verb|{Seconde section}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Seconde section}| -% \end{verse} -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when -% you use \com{chapter*} (or \com{section*}): the minitocs -% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \com{adjustmtc} -% (or \com{adjuststc} or \com{adjustptc}) command at the end -% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the -% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| or \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| -% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \pack{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows -% what to do about \com{adjustmtc} (and others), but can do -% nothing about \com{stepcounter} or \com{addtocounter}, as they are a standard basic commands -% of \LaTeX, not \upack{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:\nopagebreak -% \or\relax -% Il y a parfois un problème avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \com{chapter*} (ou \com{section*}):\ les -% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} (ou -% \com{adjuststc}, ou \com{adjustptc}) à~la fin du chapitre étoilé (ou de la section ou partie étoilée) pour -% incrémenter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| -% ou \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| (ceci -% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (voir la section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) -% sait quoi faire avec \com{adjustmtc} (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \com{stepcounter} ou -% \com{addtocounter}, car ce sont des -% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}. Syntaxe:\nopagebreak -% \fi -% \begin{quote} -% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad -% \com{adjustmtc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad -% \com{adjuststc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1). -% \or\relax -% où \emph{n} est l'incrément (défaut:~1). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters: -% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, -% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}; -% the same remarks as above apply. These commands have no argument. -% But a more clever way to solve this problem would be using commands similar to: -% \or\relax -% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{décrémenter} ou \emph{incrémenter} de~1 ces compteurs: -% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, -% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}; -% les mêmes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent. Ces commandes n'ont pas d'argument. -% Mais une manière plus élégante de résoudre ce problème serait d'utiliser des commandes similaires~à: -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| -% \end{quote} -% This\virage{} command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the -% counter, because it calls \com{adjustmtc}). The -% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put -% \emph{after} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ -% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will -% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs. -% If the optional argument is something invisible -% (like~\verb|~|, \com{space} or \com{quad}), the result will be strange -% but still logically correct. See also section~\vref{faq.30} for the problems with \com{mtcaddpart}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| -% \end{quote} -% Cette\virage{} commande ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières (et ajuste le compteur, -% car elle appelle \com{adjustmtc}). -% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{après} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ Si -% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entrée ne sera visible dans la table des matières ni -% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \com{space} ou \com{quad}), -% le résultat sera étrange mais cependant logiquement correct. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.30} pour les -% problèmes avec \com{mtcaddpart}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[th] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Adding an entry in the ToC for -% a starred part, chapter, or section}\label{t+mtcadd} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Level}&% -% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ -% \midrule -% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \thickline -% \textbf{Level}&% -% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\ -% \hline -% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[th] -% \changeskips -% \caption[Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une -% section étoilés]{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une -% section étoilés}\label{t+mtcadd} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Niveau}&% -% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ -% \midrule -% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \thickline -% \textbf{Niveau}&% -% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\ -% \hline -% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables} -% The mini-tables are typeset in a \env{verse}-like environment, and can be split over several pages. -% \or\relax -% \section{Composition des mini-tables} -% Les mini-tables sont composées dans un environnement analogue à~\env{verse}, et donc peuvent s'étendre sur -% plusieurs pages. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \com{mtcfont} -% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. -% In fact, the font \com{mtcfont} is selected at the beginning of a minitoc, minilof or minilot. More -% selective choices are made with the following fonts. -% Section entries are typeset -% in the \com{mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% La mini-table des matières est composée dans la fonte \com{mtcfont}, qui est -% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. -% En fait, la fonte \com{mtcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une minitoc, minilof ou minilot. Des choix -% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. -% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte -% \com{mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par défaut. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the -% commands \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, -% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} are available -% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are -% typeset in the fonts \com{mlffont} and \com{mltfont}, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. -% There are also \com{mlfSfont} and \com{mltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. -% See tables~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, -% who contributed these tables initially.}. -% \or\relax -% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, -% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, -% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} sont disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre -% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont composées dans les fontes -% \com{mlffont} et \com{mltfont}, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut. -% Il y a aussi \com{mlfSfont} et \com{mltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. -% Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Merci à~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, -% qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence it is not definitive. A~symptom of this -% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold fonts are mixed\,\footnote{This -% appears, e.g., if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts~\cite{cmt}. -% The symptom disappears if you do not use bold -% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}), -% for instance\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.} -% (the true length of -% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can often be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par -% \or\relax -% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par défaut n'est certainement pas parfait et n'est donc pas définitif. -% Un symptôme de -% cette imperfection est la présence d'alignements imprécis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses -% sont mélangées\,\footnote{Ceci apparaît notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR)~\cite{cmt}. -% Le symptôme disparaît si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage -% \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, comme dans ce document}{\relax}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.} -% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la même pour ces fontes). -% Ceci peut souvent être corrigé en changeant quelques fontes. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \footnotesize -% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands}\label{t+mtc+f1} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} -% \toprule -% Command -% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} -% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} -% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] -% \com{parttoc}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{partlof}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{partlot}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] -% \com{minitoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{minilof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{minilot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] -% \com{secttoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with -% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with -% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; -% changed by the language definition files or -% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.} -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} -% \thickline -% Command -% &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting} -% &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting} -% &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex] -% \com{parttoc}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{partlof}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{partlot}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex] -% \com{minitoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{minilof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{minilot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex] -% \com{secttoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with -% \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with -% no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english; -% changed by the language definition files or -% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.} -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \footnotesize -% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f1} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} -% \toprule -% Commande -% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} -% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} -% &\FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] -% \com{parttoc}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{partlof}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{partlot}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] -% \com{minitoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{minilof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{minilot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] -% \com{secttoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau -% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau -% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; -% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou -% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}} -% \thickline -% Commande -% &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut} -% &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut} -% &\FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par défaut}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex] -% \com{parttoc}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{partlof}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{partlot}% -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang} -% &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex] -% \com{minitoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{minilof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{minilot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex] -% \com{secttoc}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlof}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \com{sectlot}% -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang} -% &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex] -% &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily} -% & -% &\\[1ex] -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau -% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau -% \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais; -% changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou -% \com{renewcommand}.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.} -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \small -% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries}\label{t+mtc+f2} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% Level&Font&Default setting\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ -% \Strut -% Chapter\Chap -% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ -% Section -% &\com{ptcSfont} -% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ -% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ -% Subsection -% &\com{ptcSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{ptcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{ptcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{ptcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ -% \Strut -% Section -% &\com{mtcSfont} -% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ -% Subsection -% &\com{mtcSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{mtcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{mtcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{mtcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ -% \Strut -% Subsection -% &\com{stcSSfont} -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{stcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{stcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{stcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} -% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} -% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \thickline -% Level&Font&Default setting\\ -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\ -% \Strut -% Chapter\Chap -% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ -% Section -% &\com{ptcSfont} -% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ -% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ -% Subsection -% &\com{ptcSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{ptcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{ptcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{ptcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\ -% \Strut -% Section -% &\com{mtcSfont} -% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ -% Subsection -% &\com{mtcSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{mtcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{mtcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{mtcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\ -% \Strut -% Subsection -% &\com{stcSSfont} -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ -% Subsubsection -% &\com{stcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Paragraph -% &\com{stcPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Subparagraph -% &\com{stcSPfont} -% &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter} -% level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter} -% level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \small -% \caption{Fontes pour les entrées des mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f2} -% \centering -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ -% \Strut -% Chapitre\Chap -% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ -% Section -% &\com{ptcSfont} -% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ -% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ -% Sous-section -% &\com{ptcSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{ptcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{ptcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{ptcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ -% \Strut -% Section -% &\com{mtcSfont} -% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ -% Sous-section -% &\com{mtcSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{mtcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{mtcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{mtcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ -% \Strut -% Sous-section -% &\com{stcSSfont} -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{stcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{stcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{stcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} -% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} -% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \thickline -% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\ -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\ -% \Strut -% Chapitre\Chap -% &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\ -% Section -% &\com{ptcSfont} -% &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\ -% \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\ -% Sous-section -% &\com{ptcSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{ptcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{ptcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{ptcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\ -% \Strut -% Section -% &\com{mtcSfont} -% &\V\small\V\bfseries\\ -% Sous-section -% &\com{mtcSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{mtcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{mtcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{mtcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \hline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\ -% \Strut -% Sous-section -% &\com{stcSSfont} -% &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\ -% Sous-sous-section -% &\com{stcSSSfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Paragraphe -% &\com{stcPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\ -% Sous-paragraphe -% &\com{stcSPfont} -% &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex] -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter} -% (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter} -% (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% \fi -% ^^A \ifFLP\floatpagestyle{plain}\fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \changeskips -% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages} -% \ilopt{afrikaan}% -% \ilopt{afrikaans}% -% \ilopt{albanian}% -% \ilopt{arab}% -% \ilopt{arabic}% -% \ilopt{arab2}% -% \ilopt{arabi}% -% \ilopt{armenian}% -% \ilopt{bahasai}% -% \ilopt{bahasa}% -% \ilopt{indon}% -% \ilopt{indonesian}% -% \ilopt{bahasam}% -% \ilopt{malay}% -% \ilopt{meyalu}% -% \ilopt{bangla}% -% \ilopt{basque}% -% \ilopt{bengali}% -% \ilopt{bicig}% -% \ilopt{uighur}% -% \ilopt{bicig2}% -% \ilopt{uighur2}% -% \ilopt{bicig3}% -% \ilopt{uighur3}% -% \ilopt{bithe}% -% \ilopt{manju}% -% \ilopt{brazil}% -% \ilopt{brazilian}% -% \ilopt{breton}% -% \ilopt{bulgarian}% -% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% -% \ilopt{buryat}% -% \ilopt{buryat2}% -% \ilopt{catalan}% -% \ilopt{chinese1}% -% \ilopt{chinese2}% -% \ilopt{croatian}% -% \ilopt{czech}% -% \ilopt{danish}% -% \ilopt{devanagari}% -% \ilopt{hindi}% -% \ilopt{dutch}% -% \iloptd{english}% -% \ilopt{american}% -% \ilopt{australian}% -% \ilopt{british}% -% \ilopt{canadian}% -% \ilopt{newzealand}% -% \ilopt{UKenglish}% -% \ilopt{USenglish}% -% \ilopt{english1}% -% \ilopt{english2}% -% \ilopt{esperant}% -% \ilopt{esperanto}% -% \ilopt{estonian}% -% \ilopt{ethiopia}% -% \ilopt{ethiopian}% -% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% -% \ilopt{farsi1}% -% \ilopt{farsi2}% -% \ilopt{farsi3}% -% \ilopt{finnish}% -% \ilopt{finnish2}% -% \ilopt{french}% -% \ilopt{frenchb}% -% \ilopt{frenchle}% -% \ilopt{frenchpro}% -% \ilopt{francais}% -% \ilopt{acadien}% -% \ilopt{canadien}% -% \ilopt{french1}% -% \ilopt{french2}% -% \ilopt{galician}% -% \ilopt{german}% -% \ilopt{austrian}% -% \ilopt{germanb}% -% \ilopt{germanb2}% -% \ilopt{greek}% -% \ilopt{greek-mono}% -% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% -% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% -% \ilopt{guarani}% -% \ilopt{hangul1}% -% \ilopt{hangul2}% -% \ilopt{hangul3}% -% \ilopt{hangul4}% -% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% -% \ilopt{hanja1}% -% \ilopt{hanja2}% -% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% -% \ilopt{hebrew}% -% \ilopt{hebrew2}% -% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% -% \ilopt{icelandic}% -% \ilopt{interlingua}% -% \ilopt{irish}% -% \ilopt{italian}% -% \ilopt{italian2}% -% \ilopt{japanese}% -% \ilopt{japanese2}% -% \ilopt{japanese3}% -% \ilopt{japanese4}% -% \ilopt{japanese5}% -% \ilopt{japanese6}% -% \ilopt{kannada}% -% \ilopt{latin}% -% \ilopt{latin2}% -% \ilopt{latinc}% -% \ilopt{latinc2}% -% \ilopt{latvian}% -% \ilopt{latvian2}% -% \ilopt{letton}% -% \ilopt{letton2}% -% \ilopt{lithuanian}% -% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% -% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% -% \ilopt{lsorbian}% -% \ilopt{magyar}% -% \ilopt{hungarian}% -% \ilopt{magyar2}% -% \ilopt{magyar3}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% -% \ilopt{manju}% -% \ilopt{mexican}% -% \ilopt{mongol}% -% \ilopt{mongolb}% -% \ilopt{mongolian}% -% \ilopt{ngermanb}% -% \ilopt{ngerman}% -% \ilopt{naustrian}% -% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% -% \ilopt{norsk}% -% \ilopt{norsk2}% -% \ilopt{nynorsk}% -% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% -% \ilopt{occitan}% -% \ilopt{occitan2}% -% \ilopt{polish}% -% \ilopt{polish2}% -% \ilopt{polski}% -% \ilopt{portuguese}% -% \ilopt{portuges}% -% \ilopt{romanian}% -% \ilopt{romanian2}% -% \ilopt{romanian3}% -% \ilopt{russian}% -% \ilopt{russianb}% -% \ilopt{russianc}% -% \ilopt{russian2m}% -% \ilopt{russian2o}% -% \ilopt{russian-cca}% -% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% -% \ilopt{russian-lh}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% -% \ilopt{samin}% -% \ilopt{scottish}% -% \ilopt{serbian}% -% \ilopt{serbianc}% -% \ilopt{slovak}% -% \ilopt{slovene}% -% \ilopt{spanish}% -% \ilopt{castillan}% -% \ilopt{castillian}% -% \ilopt{spanish2}% -% \ilopt{spanish3}% -% \ilopt{spanish4}% -% \ilopt{swahili}% -% \ilopt{swedish}% -% \ilopt{swedish2}% -% \ilopt{thai}% -% \ilopt{turkish}% -% \ilopt{ukrainian}% -% \ilopt{ukraineb}% -% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% -% \ilopt{usorbian}% -% \ilopt{vietnam}% -% \ilopt{vietnamese}% -% \ilopt{welsh}% -% \ilopt{xalx}% -% \ilopt{khalkha}% -% \ilopt{xalx2}% -% \ilopt{xalx3}% -% \centering -% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small -% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing -% \begin{multicols}{4} -% \begin{itemize} -% ^^A \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em -% ^^A \def\labelitemi{--} -% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) -% \item albanian -% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{c}$ -% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ -% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ -% \item armenian\,$^c$ -% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ -% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ -% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ -% \item basque -% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ -% \item brazil (brazilian) -% \item breton -% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ -% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ -% \item buryat\,$^c$ -% \item buryat2\,$^c$ -% \item catalan -% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ -% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ -% \item croatian -% \item czech -% \item danish -% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ -% \item dutch -% \item english$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) -% \item english1 -% \item english2 -% \item esperant (esperanto) -% \item estonian -% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ -% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ -% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ -% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ -% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ -% \item finnish -% \item finnish2 -% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) -% \item french1 -% \item french2 -% \item galician -% \item german (austrian) -% \item germanb -% \item germanb2 -% \item greek\,$^c$ -% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item guarani\,$^h$ -% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ -% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ -% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ -% \item icelandic\,$^f$ -% \item interlingua -% \item irish -% \item italian -% \item italian2 -% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item kannada\,$^c$ -% \item latin -% \item latin2 -% \item latinc -% \item latinc2 -% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ -% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ -% \item lithuanian -% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) -% \item magyar (hungarian) -% \item magyar2 -% \item magyar3 -% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ -% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ -% \item mexican -% \item mongol\,$^c$ -% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ -% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) -% \item ngermanb2 -% \item norsk -% \item norsk2 -% \item nynorsk -% \item nynorsk2 -% \item occitan -% \item occitan2 -% \item polish -% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item polski\,$^c$ -% \item portuguese (portuges) -% \item romanian -% \item romanian2 -% \item romanian3 -% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item samin -% \item scottish -% \item serbian -% \item serbianc\,$^c$ -% \item slovak -% \item slovene -% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) -% \item spanish2 -% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ -% \item spanish4 -% \item swahili -% \item swedish -% \item swedish2 -% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ -% \item turkish -% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) -% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ -% \item welsh -% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ -% \item xalx2\,$^c$ -% \item xalx3\,$^c$ -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \hrule -% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[()]The languages between parentheses are aliases of a main language -% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file -% of that main language. -% \item[$^{\dagger}$] The presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory. -% \item[$^a$] The \ulopt{arab(ic)}\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} and \lopt{arab2} languages require the use of the -% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). -% \item[$^b$] The \ulopt{russian} language is not yet supported -% by the \pack{babel} system~\cite{babel,babel-user}, but -% \lopt{russianb}~\cite{russianb} is supported if you use -% babel-3.6 or a higher version; \lopt{russianc} is an extra. Look also at other \suffix{.mld} files for russian. -% \item[$^c$] Some languages may require specific fonts. -% \item[$^d$] Requires the \pack{CJK} package~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[$^e$] Requires \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). -% \item[$^f$] Requires a 8-bits input encoding. -% \item[$^g$] Uses also a \suffix{.mlo} file. -% \item[$^h$] Requires a specific input encoding. -% \item[$^i$] The \lopt{bicig} language is also known as \lopt{uighur}. -% \item[$^j$] The \lopt{arabi} and \lopt{farsi3} languages require the use of the -% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{table} -% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \changeskips -% ^^A \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages} -% \ilopt{afrikaan}% -% \ilopt{afrikaans}% -% \ilopt{albanian}% -% \ilopt{arab}% -% \ilopt{arabic}% -% \ilopt{arab2}% -% \ilopt{arabi}% -% \ilopt{armenian}% -% \ilopt{bahasai}% -% \ilopt{bahasa}% -% \ilopt{indon}% -% \ilopt{indonesian}% -% \ilopt{bahasam}% -% \ilopt{malay}% -% \ilopt{meyalu}% -% \ilopt{bangla}% -% \ilopt{basque}% -% \ilopt{bengali}% -% \ilopt{bicig}% -% \ilopt{uighur}% -% \ilopt{bicig2}% -% \ilopt{uighur2}% -% \ilopt{bicig3}% -% \ilopt{uighur3}% -% \ilopt{bithe}% -% \ilopt{manju}% -% \ilopt{brazil}% -% \ilopt{brazilian}% -% \ilopt{breton}% -% \ilopt{bulgarian}% -% \ilopt{bulgarianb}% -% \ilopt{buryat}% -% \ilopt{buryat2}% -% \ilopt{catalan}% -% \ilopt{chinese1}% -% \ilopt{chinese2}% -% \ilopt{croatian}% -% \ilopt{czech}% -% \ilopt{danish}% -% \ilopt{devanagari}% -% \ilopt{hindi}% -% \ilopt{dutch}% -% \iloptd{english}% -% \ilopt{american}% -% \ilopt{australian}% -% \ilopt{british}% -% \ilopt{canadian}% -% \ilopt{newzealand}% -% \ilopt{UKenglish}% -% \ilopt{USenglish}% -% \ilopt{english1}% -% \ilopt{english2}% -% \ilopt{esperant}% -% \ilopt{esperanto}% -% \ilopt{estonian}% -% \ilopt{ethiopia}% -% \ilopt{ethiopian}% -% \ilopt{ethiopian2}% -% \ilopt{farsi1}% -% \ilopt{farsi2}% -% \ilopt{farsi3}% -% \ilopt{finnish}% -% \ilopt{finnish2}% -% \ilopt{french}% -% \ilopt{frenchb}% -% \ilopt{frenchle}% -% \ilopt{frenchpro}% -% \ilopt{francais}% -% \ilopt{acadien}% -% \ilopt{canadien}% -% \ilopt{french1}% -% \ilopt{french2}% -% \ilopt{galician}% -% \ilopt{german}% -% \ilopt{austrian}% -% \ilopt{germanb}% -% \ilopt{germanb2}% -% \ilopt{greek}% -% \ilopt{greek-mono}% -% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}% -% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}% -% \ilopt{guarani}% -% \ilopt{hangul1}% -% \ilopt{hangul2}% -% \ilopt{hangul3}% -% \ilopt{hangul4}% -% \ilopt{hangul-u8}% -% \ilopt{hanja1}% -% \ilopt{hanja2}% -% \ilopt{hanja-u8}% -% \ilopt{hebrew}% -% \ilopt{hebrew2}% -% \ilopt{hindi-modern}% -% \ilopt{icelandic}% -% \ilopt{interlingua}% -% \ilopt{irish}% -% \ilopt{italian}% -% \ilopt{italian2}% -% \ilopt{japanese}% -% \ilopt{japanese2}% -% \ilopt{japanese3}% -% \ilopt{japanese4}% -% \ilopt{japanese5}% -% \ilopt{japanese6}% -% \ilopt{kannada}% -% \ilopt{latin}% -% \ilopt{latin2}% -% \ilopt{latinc}% -% \ilopt{latinc2}% -% \ilopt{latvian}% -% \ilopt{latvian2}% -% \ilopt{letton}% -% \ilopt{letton2}% -% \ilopt{lithuanian}% -% \ilopt{lithuanian2}% -% \ilopt{lowersorbian}% -% \ilopt{lsorbian}% -% \ilopt{magyar}% -% \ilopt{hungarian}% -% \ilopt{magyar2}% -% \ilopt{magyar3}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-b}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}% -% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}% -% \ilopt{manju}% -% \ilopt{mexican}% -% \ilopt{mongol}% -% \ilopt{mongolb}% -% \ilopt{mongolian}% -% \ilopt{ngermanb}% -% \ilopt{ngerman}% -% \ilopt{naustrian}% -% \ilopt{ngermanb2}% -% \ilopt{norsk}% -% \ilopt{norsk2}% -% \ilopt{nynorsk}% -% \ilopt{nynorsk2}% -% \ilopt{occitan}% -% \ilopt{occitan2}% -% \ilopt{polish}% -% \ilopt{polish2}% -% \ilopt{polski}% -% \ilopt{portuguese}% -% \ilopt{portuges}% -% \ilopt{romanian}% -% \ilopt{romanian2}% -% \ilopt{romanian3}% -% \ilopt{russian}% -% \ilopt{russianb}% -% \ilopt{russianc}% -% \ilopt{russian2m}% -% \ilopt{russian2o}% -% \ilopt{russian-cca}% -% \ilopt{russian-cca1}% -% \ilopt{russian-lh}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}% -% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}% -% \ilopt{samin}% -% \ilopt{scottish}% -% \ilopt{serbian}% -% \ilopt{serbianc}% -% \ilopt{slovak}% -% \ilopt{slovene}% -% \ilopt{spanish}% -% \ilopt{castillan}% -% \ilopt{castillian}% -% \ilopt{spanish2}% -% \ilopt{spanish3}% -% \ilopt{spanish4}% -% \ilopt{swahili}% -% \ilopt{swedish}% -% \ilopt{swedish2}% -% \ilopt{thai}% -% \ilopt{turkish}% -% \ilopt{ukrainian}% -% \ilopt{ukraineb}% -% \ilopt{uppersorbian}% -% \ilopt{usorbian}% -% \ilopt{vietnam}% -% \ilopt{vietnamese}% -% \ilopt{welsh}% -% \ilopt{xalx}% -% \ilopt{khalkha}% -% \ilopt{xalx2}% -% \ilopt{xalx3}% -% \centering -% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small -% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing -% \begin{multicols}{4} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item afrikaan (afrikaans) -% \item albanian -% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$ -% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$ -% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$ -% \item armenian\,$^c$ -% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$ -% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$ -% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$ -% \item basque -% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$ -% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$ -% \item brazil (brazilian) -% \item breton -% \item bulgarian\,$^c$ -% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$ -% \item buryat\,$^c$ -% \item buryat2\,$^c$ -% \item catalan -% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$ -% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$ -% \item croatian -% \item czech -% \item danish -% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$ -% \item dutch -% \item english\,$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish) -% \item english1 -% \item english2 -% \item esperant (esperanto) -% \item estonian -% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$ -% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$ -% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$ -% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$ -% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$ -% \item finnish -% \item finnish2 -% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien) -% \item french1 -% \item french2 -% \item galician -% \item german (austrian) -% \item germanb -% \item germanb2 -% \item greek\,$^c$ -% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item guarani\,$^h$ -% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ -% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$ -% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$ -% \item icelandic\,$^f$ -% \item interlingua -% \item irish -% \item italian -% \item italian2 -% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$ -% \item kannada\,$^c$ -% \item latin -% \item latin2 -% \item latinc -% \item latinc2 -% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$ -% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$ -% \item lithuanian -% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$ -% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian) -% \item magyar (hungarian) -% \item magyar2 -% \item magyar3 -% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$ -% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$ -% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$ -% \item mexican -% \item mongol\,$^c$ -% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$ -% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian) -% \item ngermanb2 -% \item norsk -% \item norsk2 -% \item nynorsk -% \item nynorsk2 -% \item occitan -% \item occitan2 -% \item polish -% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item polski\,$^c$ -% \item portuguese (portuges) -% \item romanian -% \item romanian2 -% \item romanian3 -% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$ -% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$ -% \item samin -% \item scottish -% \item serbian -% \item serbianc\,$^c$ -% \item slovak -% \item slovene -% \item spanish (castillan, castillian) -% \item spanish2 -% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$ -% \item spanish4 -% \item swahili -% \item swedish -% \item swedish2 -% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$ -% \item turkish -% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$ -% \item uppersorbian (usorbian) -% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$ -% \item welsh -% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$ -% \item xalx2\,$^c$ -% \item xalx3\,$^c$ -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \hrule -% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[()] Les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} -% chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de celle-ci. -% \item[$^{\dagger}$] La présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire. -% \item[$^a$] Les langues <<~\ulopt{arab(ic)}~>>\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} et <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage -% \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}). -% \item[$^b$] La langue <<~\uopt{russian}~» n'est pas encore supportée par le -% système \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, -% mais <<~\lopt{russianb}~>>~\cite{russianb} est supportée si vous utilisez -% babel-3.6 ou une version supérieure; <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est un supplément. Regardez aussi les autres -% fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour le russe. -% \item[$^c$] Certaines langues peuvent requérir des fontes spécifiques. -% \item[$^d$] Requiert le paquetage \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[$^e$] Requiert \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). -% \item[$^f$] Requiert un codage en entrée sur 8~bits. -% \item[$^g$] Utilise aussi un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. -% \item[$^h$] Requiert un codage en entrée spécifique. -% \item[$^i$] La langue \lopt{bicig} est aussi connue sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{\lopt{uighur}}). -% \item[$^j$] Les langues <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> et <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage -% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% ^^A \vspace*{-2\baselineskip} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi -% ^^A \afterpage{\clearpage} -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Titles are typeset in the \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by -% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by -% \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} -% and \com{mlttitle}, which -% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. -% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for -% languages other than english. -% -% \lneed{6} -% The language definition files like -% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (the suffix -% \suffix{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'') -% (and many others, see the list in table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. -% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). -% You can change the language of these titles by using the -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. -% \or\relax -% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des -% titres sont définis par \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} et \com{mlttitle}, qui sont les -% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. Ces titres devraient être redéfinis -% par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Les fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} -% et \xfile{english.mld} (le suffixe \suffix{.mld} signifie «~\emph{minitoc language definition -% (file)}~») (et bien d'autres, voir la liste dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont -% disponibles. Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée -% (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). -% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces -% titres en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \com{ptcfont} -% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% In fact, the font \com{ptcfont} is selected at the beginning of a parttoc, partlof or partlot. More -% selective choices are made with the following fonts. -% Chapter entries are typeset in the \com{ptcCfont} font, -% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. -% Section entries are typeset in the \com{ptcSfont} font, -% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% \or\relax -% La table des matières au niveau partie est composée dans la fonte \com{ptcfont}, qui est définie comme -% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% En fait, la fonte \com{ptcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une parttoc, partlof ou partlot. Des choix -% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. -% Les entrées de type chapitre sont composées dans la fonte -% \com{ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. -% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte \com{ptcSfont}, qui est -% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the -% commands \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, -% \com{ptcPfont}, and \com{ptcSPfont} are available -% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you -% want to use various fonts. -% \or\relax -% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et -% sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, \com{ptcPfont} et \com{ptcSPfont} sont -% disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Partial lists of figures and tables are -% typeset in the fonts \com{plffont} and \com{pltfont}, which are -% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% There are also \com{plfSfont} and \com{pltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. -% \or\relax -% Les listes de figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont composées dans les fontes \com{plffont} et \com{pltfont}, qui -% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% Il y a aussi \com{plfSfont} et \com{pltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Titles are typeset in the \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by -% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by -% \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} -% and \com{plttitle}, which -% are the strings ``Table of Contents'', -% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default. -% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for -% languages other than english. -% -% \lneed{3} -% The language definition files like -% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and many others; for a complete list, see -% table~\vref{t+languages}) are available. Read also section~\vref{fo+lang}. -% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). -% You can change the language of these titles by using the -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. -% \or\relax -% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des -% titres sont définis par \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} et \com{plttitle}, qui sont les -% chaînes «~Table of Contents~», «~List of Figures~» et «~List of Tables~» par défaut. -% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} -% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de -% nombreux autres; pour une liste complète, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}) sont disponibles. Lire aussi -% la section~\vref{fo+lang}. -% Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). -% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres -% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The section-level table of contents -% is typeset in the \com{stcfont} -% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% In fact, the font \com{stcfont} is selected at the beginning of a secttoc, sectlof or sectlot. -% -% More selective choices are made with the following fonts. -% Subsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSfont} font, -% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default. -% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSSfont} font, -% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% \or\relax -% La table des matières au niveau section est composée dans la fonte \com{stcfont}, qui est définie comme -% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% En fait, la fonte \com{stcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une secttoc, sectlof ou sectlot. -% -% Des choix plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes. -% Les entrées de sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSfont}, qui est -% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut. -% Les entrées de sous-sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSSfont}, qui est -% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\slffont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the -% commands \com{stcPfont} and \com{stcSPfont} -% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you -% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are -% typeset in the fonts \com{slffont} and \com{sltfont}, which are -% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. -% There are also \com{slfSfont} and \com{sltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries. -% \or\relax -% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{stcPfont} et \com{stcSPfont} sont disponibles -% (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous désirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de -% tableaux au niveau section sont composées dans les fontes \com{slffont} et \com{sltfont}, qui sont définies -% comme étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut. -% Il y a aussi \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Titles are typeset in the \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by -% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by -% \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} -% and \com{slttitle}, which are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default. -% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for -% languages other than english. -% -% \lneed{3} -% The language definition files like \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in -% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available. -% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}). -% You can change the language of these titles by using the -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro. -% \or\relax -% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des -% titres sont définis par \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} et \com{slttitle}, qui sont les -% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. -% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} ou \com{mtcsettitle} -% pour les langues autres que l'anglais. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de -% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez -% facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}). -% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres -% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Position of the titles} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Position des titres} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{doparttoc}, -% \com{dopartlof} and \com{dopartlot} accept an optional argument -% to change the default position of the -% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, -% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). -% The change is global for all the document. -% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc -% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the -% command \com{parttoc} (or \com{partlof} or \com{partlot}). -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et -% \com{dopartlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: -% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou -% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. -% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit -% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande -% \com{parttoc} (ou \com{partlof} ou \com{partlot}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dominitoc}, -% \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} accept an optional argument -% to change the default position of the -% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, -% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title). -% The change is global for all the document. -% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc -% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the -% command \com{minitoc} (or \com{minilof} or -% \com{minilot}). -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et -% \com{dominilot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: -% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou -% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. -% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit -% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande -% \com{minitoc} (ou \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dosecttoc}, -% \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} accept -% an optional argument to change the default position of the -% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, -% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title). -% The change is global for all the document. -% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc -% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the -% command \com{secttoc} (or \com{sectlof} or -% \com{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et -% \com{dosectlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant: -% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou -% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document. -% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit -% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande -% \com{secttoc} (ou \com{sectlof} ou \com{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Résumé du positionnement des titres} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the -% following preparation commands: -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ -% \com{mtcprepare}\\ -% \end{tabular}\par\noindent -% accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the -% title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center, -% \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no -% title), for all the corresponding mini-tables (for all mini-tables in the case of \com{mtcprepare}). -% \or\relax -% Pour résumer, par défaut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de préparation -% suivantes: -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\ -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\ -% \com{mtcprepare}\\ -% \end{tabular}\par\noindent -% accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), -% \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de -% titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes (de toutes les mini-tables dans le cas de -% \com{mtcprepare}). -% \fi -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The following insertion commands: -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ -% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ -% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} -% \end{tabular}\par\noindent -% accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the -% positionning only for the title of the current mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes: -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ -% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ -% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} -% \end{tabular}\par\noindent -% acceptent les mêmes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le -% titre de la mini-table courante. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue} -% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% With the commands \com{tightmtctrue} (or the \opt{tight} -% package option) and \com{tightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{loose} -% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space -% between contents lines. -% \or\relax -% Avec les commandes \com{tightmtctrue} (ou l'option de paquetage \opt{tight}) et -% \com{tightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les -% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\parsep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But\imess{I0043} with the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, -% \class{scrbook} and \class{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary -% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \com{parskip} to zero in place of -% \com{parsep} to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends on the options given -% to these \KOMAScript{} classes (\optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script} option, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} option and variants). -% \or\relax -% Mais\imess{I0043} avec les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl}, -% \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}), il peut être -% nécessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer à~zéro \com{parskip} au lieu -% de \com{parsep} pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacité des options ci-dessous dépend des options données -% à~ces classes \KOMAScript{} (options \optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} et variantes). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue} -% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \KOMAScript{} classes, with the commands \com{ktightmtctrue} (or the \opt{k-tight} -% package option) and \com{ktightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{k-loose} -% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space -% between contents lines. -% \or\relax -% Pour les classes \KOMAScript, avec les commandes \com{ktightmtctrue} (ou l'option de -% paquetage \opt{k-tight}) et -% \com{ktightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{k-loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les -% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Commandes simplifiées pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two -% useful commands: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\ -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{5} -% For instance, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ -% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| -% \end{quote} -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ -% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| -% \end{quote} -% will redefine \com{mtcSSfont} and \com{mlfSfont} with the given font commands. -% -% Note that \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \com{ptcfont}, etc. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Moreover, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| -% \end{quote} -% will redefine \com{ptifont} (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands. -% \or\relax -% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\ -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{5} -% Par exemple: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\ -% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| -% \end{quote} -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\ -% \verb| {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}| -% \end{quote} -% redéfinira \com{mtcSSfont} et \com{mlfSfont} avec les commandes de fontes données. -% -% Notez que \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de redéfinir \com{ptcfont}, etc. -% -% \lneed{5} -% De plus, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}| -% \end{quote} -% redéfinira \com{ptifont} (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes -% données. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les titres des mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the -% \com{mtcsettitle} command is also available: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{5} -% For instance, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description of contents}| -% \end{quote} -% will redefine \com{mtctitle} with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a -% mini-table type available in your document class. -% \or\relax -% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des titres des mini-tables, la commande -% \com{mtcsettitle} est aussi disponible: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{chaîne titre}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{5} -% Par exemple, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description du contenu}| -% \end{quote} -% redéfinira \com{mtctitle} avec la chaîne donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous redéfinissez un titre pour un -% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les profondeurs des mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the -% \com{mtcsetdepth} command is also available: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% For instance, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| -% \end{quote} -% will set the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a -% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth). -% \or\relax -% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande -% \com{mtcsetdepth}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% Par exemple: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}| -% \end{quote} -% forcera le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez une profondeur -% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa -% profondeur). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table offsets} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les déplacements des mini-tables} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To simplify the redefinition of the offsets for mini-tables, the -% \com{mtcsetoffset} command is also available: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{offset}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{3} -% For instance, -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| -% \end{quote} -% will set the macro \com{mtcoffset} to the given value. This command checks that you set a offset for a -% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its offset). -% \or\relax -% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des déplacements des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande -% \com{mtcsetoffset}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{déplacement}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{3} -% Par exemple: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}| -% \end{quote} -% forcera la macro \com{mtcoffset} à~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez un déplacement -% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer son -% déplacement). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} the argument of \com{mtcsetoffset} is \emph{not} verified. It must be a length value, -% without shrink nor stretch part. A positive offset is towards the right, a negative one towards the left. -% \or\relax -% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} l'argument de \com{mtcsetoffset} \emph{n'est pas} vérifié. Ce doit être une valeur de -% longueur, sans partie compressible ou extensible. Un déplacement positif se fait vers la droite, un déplacement -% négatif se fait vers la gauche. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Polymorphic entries in the mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Entrées polymorphes dans les mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The title of a sectionning command can appear in several places: -% a)~at the beginning of the section, of the chapter or of the part; -% b)~in the page header; -% c)~in the main TOC; -% d)~in the minitoc of the chapter (for a section title or lower); -% e)~in the parttoc of the part (for a chapter title or lower). -% A sectionning command has two arguments: an optionnal one, \textsl{OA}, and a mandatory one, \textsl{MA}, like in: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\section[|\textsl{OA}\verb|]{|\textsl{MA}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% \textsl{OA} is taken as \textsl{MA} if omitted. Normaly, \textsl{OA} is used in the TOC and in the minitables, as in -% the page headers when necessary. \textsl{MA} is used as title for the sectionning unit and is the default for -% \textsl{OA}. But, some times, you may need to have a different version (a~variant) for a sectionning unit title -% in a minitable. So, it is now possible to define such variants by detecting if that title is used inside some -% minitable: the following flags are defined (when meaningful): -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag:}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% But these flags are used to build three new commands, to be called from inside the optionnal argument -% (\textsl{OA}) of a -% sectionning command or that of a caption: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ -% \midrule -% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ -% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ -% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% Such entries are ``polymorphic''. -% See the example~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, for a short demonstration. -% \or\relax -% Le titre d'une commande se sectionnement peut apparaître en plusieurs endroits: -% a)~au début de la section, du chapitre ou de la partie; -% b)~dans l'en-tête de page; -% c)~dans la table des matières principale; -% d)~dans la minitoc du chapitre (pour un titre de section ou inférieur); -% e)~dans la parttoc de la partie pour un titre de chapitre ou inférieur). -% Une commande de sectionnement a deux arguments: un facultatif, \textsl{AF}, et un obligatoire, \textsl{AO}, comme dans: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\section[|\textsl{AF}\verb|]{|\textsl{AO}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% \textsl{AF} est pris égal à~\textsl{AO} si omis. Normalement, \textsl{AF} est utilisé dans la table des -% matières principale et dans les minitables, ainsi que dans les en-têtes de page si nécessaire. -% \textsl{AO} est utilisé comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement est la valeur par défaut pour~\textsl{OA}. -% Mais, parfois, vous pouvez vouloir une version différente (une variante) comme titre d'unité de -% sectionnement dans une minitable. Donc, il est maintenant possible de définir de telles variantes en détectant -% si ce titre est utilisé à~l'intérieur d'une minitable: les indicateurs suivants sont définis (lorsqu'ils ont un sens): -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur:}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% Mais ces indicateurs sont utilisés pour construire trois nouvelles commandes, devant être appelées depuis -% l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel -% (\textsl{AO}) d'une commande de sectionnement ou de celui d'un caption: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ -% \midrule -% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ -% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ -% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~». -% Voir l'exemple~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, pour une courte démonstration. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang} -% Most of the strings defined in the language definition files (\suffix{.mld}) were taken from the -% superb \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} of \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, -% some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users -% or taken from specific packages, like \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, -% \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, -% \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bangla, bengali)~\cite{bangtex}, -% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (spanish)~\cite{spanish4}. -% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, -% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, -% \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, -% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinese, -% korean-hangûl/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, -% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polish), -% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (swedish), -% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi or iranian), or \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} -% --- latvian (letton), -% \lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}, \lopt{polish2}, \lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o} and \lopt{spanish3} -% need \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), i.e.,~the Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}), -% or even found by searching on the Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian, -% \xfile{japanese.mld} for japanese, \xfile{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian). -% Other languages are welcome\,\footnote{I~am searching for the titles in corsican, in -% particular.}. See table~\vref{t+languages}. -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang} -% La plupart des chaînes définies dans les fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) ont été prises -% dans le superbe paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, certaines ont été adaptées, -% d'autres ont été mises à~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages spécifiques, tels -% que \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} -% (arménien)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bânglâ, bengalî)~\cite{bangtex}, -% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (espagnol)~\cite{spanish4}. -% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} pour \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, -% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and -% \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinois, -% coréen-hangûl/hanja, japonais, thaï)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, -% \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polonais), -% \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (suédois), -% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi ou iranien) -% \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec -% (\lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}), de polonais (\lopt{polish2}), de russe (\lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o}) et -% d'espagnol (\lopt{spanish3}) ont besoin -% de \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), c'est-à-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), -% (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont même été trouvées en -% cherchant sur le Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrillique, \xfile{japanese.mld} pour le -% japonais, \xfile{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues\,\footnote{Je recherche -% notamment les titres pour le corse (\emph{corsican}).}. -% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, -% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai and some variants of russian.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which -% are difficult to manipulate in a -% \suffix{.dtx} file, hence the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file, -% nicknamed a \suffix{.mlo} -% file\,\footnote{The extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the -% \suffix{.dtx} file in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package, but via \env{filecontents} -% environments in the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of -% the ``delete'' character. -% \or\relax -% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le coréen (hangûl et -% hanja), le japonais, le \lopt{malayalam-omega}, le thaï et certaines variantes du russe.}, les sources des titres -% utilisent quelques -% codages exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, donc le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors -% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier spécial, surnommé fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le -% suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langue pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas -% engendré par le fichier \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais via des -% environnements \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}, -% et en jouant sur le «~catcode~» du caractère «~delete~». -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}), -% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by -% \com{newcommand}, modifiable via \com{renewcommand}). -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number -% expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' -% in the current font. As the real size of \texttt{1em} is font dependent, the separation between the dots -% may vary if you use different fonts for different types of entries in the mini-tables. -% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command -% containing the representation of a length (e.g.,~\texttt{1.55em}). -% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the -% dotted line. It should be larger than \com{@pnumwidth}, and can be a rubber length (i.e.,~contain -% some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion, -% the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid -% most hyphenations. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% La mise en page est décrite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a été adaptée de~\cite{tocloft}), qui -% définit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, crées par -% \com{newcommand}, modifiables via \com{renewcommand}). -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, qui est la séparation entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un -% nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unités mathématiques}; 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un -% cadratin), qui est à~peu près la largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Comme la taille effective de -% \texttt{1em} dépend de la fonte, la séparation entre les points peut varier si vous utilisez des fontes -% différentes pour des types différents d'entrées dans les mini-tables. -% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, qui est la largeur de l'espace réservé pour le numéro de page. C'est une commande -% \LaTeX\ contenant la représentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}). -% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de -% points de conduite. Elle devrait être plus grande que \com{@pnumwidth}, et peut être une longueur -% élastique (c'est-à-dire contenir de la glu, comme \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous spécifiez la -% portion «~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~», le texte de l'entrée sera en déchiqueté sur la droite; ceci est utile si -% vous avez des entrées longues, et peut éviter la plupart des coupures de mots. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \newcommand{\maxx}{120} ^^A picture width -% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118} ^^A \maxx - 2\ -% \newcommand{\maxy}{55} ^^A picture height -% \newcommand{\maxym}{53} ^^A \maxy - 2 -% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57} ^^A \maxy + 2 -% \newcommand{\findent}{20} ^^A indent -% \newcommand{\findentp}{22} ^^A \findent + 2 -% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10} ^^A numwidth -% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30} ^^A \@tocrmarg -% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20} ^^A \@pnumwidth -% \newcommand{\fipn}{30} ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth -% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90} ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg -% \newcommand{\frnum}{100} ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth -% \newcommand{\fyi}{10} ^^A 1st y height -% \newcommand{\fyim}{8} ^^A \fyi - 2 -% \newcommand{\fyii}{20} ^^A 2nd y height -% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25} ^^A 3rd y height -% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30} ^^A 4th y height -% \newcommand{\fyv}{40} ^^A 5th y height -% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42} ^^A \fyv + 2 -% \newcommand{\flin}{4} ^^A length of leader lines -% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89} ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit -% \begin{figure}[tp] -% \centering -% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth} -% \divide \unitlength by \maxx -% \icom{mtcindent}\icom{@pnumwidth}\icom{@tocrmarg}\icom{numwidth}\icom{@dotsep}% -% \icom{linewidth}\icom{mtcindent}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) -% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} -% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} -% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} -% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} -% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} -% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} -% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} -% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} -% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} -% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end} -% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} -% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}} -% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} -% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} -% \end{picture} -% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc} -% \or\relax -% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp) -% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} -% \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}} -% \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}} -% \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}} -% \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}} -% \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}} -% \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}} -% \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}} -% \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}} -% \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}} -% \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre} -% \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} -% \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}} -% \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-tête\ldots} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}} -% \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.} -% \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}} -% \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}} -% \end{picture} -% \caption{Mise en page d'une entrée dans une table des matières (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only -% on the specified kinds of mini-tables, you should alter them indirectly via the \com{mtcsetformat} command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is -% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \com{@pnumwidth}), or -% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) keywords; so: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| -% \end{quote} -% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity -% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long (it prevents most hyphenations). -% \or\relax -% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caractère «~\texttt{@}~») et doivent avoir un -% effet local seulement sur les types spécifiés de mini-tables, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande -% \com{mtcsetformat}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{paramètre} est -% l'un des mots-clés \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \com{@pnumwidth}) -% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}); ainsi: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}| -% \end{quote} -% établira la marge de droite à~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'élasticité -% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs (elle évite bien des coupures de mots). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) parameter should obviously be greater than the -% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). -% -% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \com{@dotsep}) is large enough (try 450, then increase or decrease), -% the dots of leaders will be so much spread out that they will disappear. -% \or\relax -% Notez que le paramètre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}) devrait manifestement être plus grand que -% le paramètre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}). -% -% Si le paramètre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}) est suffisamment grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou -% diminuez), les points de conduite seront tellement espacés qu'ils disparaîtront. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz} -% \ifBT -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} -% \toprule -% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ -% \cmidrule(l){5-7} -% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ -% \midrule -% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{pltrule}&partlots&\com{nopltrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} -% \end{tabular}} -% \else -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} -% \thickline -% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\ -% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ -% \hline -% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&partlots&\com{noplfrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\ -% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{slfrule}§lofs&\com{noslfrule}§lofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \com{sltrule}§lots&\com{nosltrule}§lots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\ -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.} -% \end{tabular}} -% \fi -% -% \bigskip -% -% \medfigrule -% -% \bigskip -% -% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn} -% {\ttfamily% -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} -% \toprule -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% -% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}% -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} -% \thickline -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&% -% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\ -% \hline -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabular}% -% \fi} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz} -% \ifBT -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} -% \toprule -% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ -% \cmidrule(l){5-7} -% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ -% \midrule -% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{pltrule}&parttocs&\com{nopltrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} -% \end{tabular}} -% \else -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}} -% \thickline -% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\ -% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\ -% \hline -% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\ -% \com{stcrule}§tocs&\com{nostcrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{slfrule}§tocs&\com{noslfrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \com{sltrule}§tocs&\com{nosltrule}§tocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\ -% \thickline -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.} -% \end{tabular}} -% \fi -% -% \bigskip -% -% \medfigrule -% -% \bigskip -% -% \caption{Numéros de pages}\label{t+pn} -% {\ttfamily% -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} -% \toprule -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% -% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}% -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}} -% \thickline -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&% -% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\ -% \hline -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabular}% -% \fi} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Special Features} -% \or\relax -% \section{Dispositifs spéciaux} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Horizontal Rules} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Filets horizontaux} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their -% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \class{book}- or -% \class{report}-like document (i.e.,~when \com{chapter} is defined). To activate -% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available. -% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ -% \end{quote} -% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; -% if the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected; -% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: -% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{samepage} -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux après leurs titres et à~leurs fins. L'exception -% est la «~parttoc~» dans un document de type analogue à~\class{book} ou \class{report} (c'est-à-dire lorsque -% la commande \com{chapter} est définie). Pour activer ou désactiver ces filets, les commandes du -% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ -% \end{quote} -% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; -% si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées; -% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: -% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{samepage} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lsneed{4} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Numéros de pages, points de conduite} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section -% titles (with the section numbers), -% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available. -% But you can also use the following command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ -% \end{quote} -% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; -% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ: -% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, -% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, -% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, -% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, -% \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{samepage} -% If the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected. -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les numéros de page sont cités dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs désirent avoir -% seulement les titres des sections (avec les numéros des sections), mais pas les numéros des pages. Donc les -% déclarations évidentes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles. -% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+ -% \end{quote} -% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, -% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; -% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ: -% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, -% \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, -% \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4] -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, -% \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, -% \texttt{-}, et~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{samepage} -% Si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between -% the section titles and the page numbers. The \opt{undotted} -% package option removes these dots. The \optd{dotted} package option -% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% \or\relax -% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages. -% L'option de paquetage \opt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage -% \optd{dotted} est le choix par défaut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a -% partlot), in a \class{book}- or \class{report}-class document, is preceded and followed by a -% \com{cleardoublepage} (which acts like \com{clearpage} in a one-side document), and has a page style of -% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this -% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning -% is often obvious. A feature defined as \com{empty} does nothing. -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot), dans un document de classe \class{book} ou -% \class{report}, -% est précédée et suivie par une \com{cleardoublepage} (qui agit comme \com{clearpage} dans un document en recto), -% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en -% redéfinissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est souvent évidente. -% Un dispositif défini comme étant \com{empty} ne fait rien. -% \fi -% \afterpage{\clearpage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[p] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \caption{Features for mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} -% {\small\ttfamily% -% \let\Strut\relax -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% -% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}% -% \else -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcX{1}@{}} -% \thickline -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&% -% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabularx}% -% \fi} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[p] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \caption{Dispositifs pour les mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features} -% {\small\ttfamily% -% \let\Strut\relax -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% -% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}% -% \else -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}} -% \thickline -% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&% -% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\\hline -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% %% -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\ -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\ -% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\ -% \thickline -% \end{tabularx}% -% \fi} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The command: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names: -% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \feat{before}, -% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} or \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \com{clearpage}, -% \com{cleardoublepage}, -% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., either \com{empty} (does nothing). -% \or\relax -% La commande: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-clé}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% vous permet de redéfinir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table: -% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-clé} est l'un des suivants: \feat{before}, -% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une séquence de commandes telles que \com{clearpage}, -% \com{cleardoublepage}, \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., soit \com{empty} (ne fait rien). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted -% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by -% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \upack{minitoc} package.}} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est -% tirée et adaptée d'une version préliminaire de la seconde édition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par -% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, où il commente le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} -% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle} -% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \Virage{}default commands for -% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being simply a standard \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}| command, -% because in document classes defining the \com{chapter} command (like \class{book} or \class{report}), -% the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages. -% If the document is printed -% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This -% behaviour is a consequence from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an -% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these -% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using -% \com{thispagestyle} and set the style of the following pages by using \com{pagestyle}, but you must not forget -% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short theorical example\,\footnote{This example shows that -% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the -% following pages.}: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{pagestyle}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| -% \end{verse} -% where we add a \com{cleardoublepage} before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for -% the first page of the parttocs, -% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs, -% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a -% \com{cleardoublepage}. -% \or\relax -% Les\Virage{} commandes par défaut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie -% sont définies comme étant simplement \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|, car -% dans les classes de document définissant la commande \com{chapter} (comme \class{book} ou \class{report}), -% les mini-tables au niveau partie sont sur -% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprimé recto-verso, la première page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages -% ne sont pas numérotées et n'ont ni en-tête ni bas de page. Ce comportement est une conséquence des définitions par défaut -% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous désirez un comportement différent, vous pouvez changer -% ces définitions. Notez que, par défaut, seule la \emph{première} page de ces mini-tables est composée dans le -% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez établir le style de cette première page en utilisant -% \com{thispagestyle} et établir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \com{pagestyle}, mais vous ne devez -% pas oublier de rétablir le style normal après la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple théorique\,\footnote{Cet exemple -% montre que le troisième argument peut être une \emph{séquence} de commandes: nous établissons le style de la page -% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\ -% \verb| {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}| -% \end{verse} -% où nous ajoutons une commande \com{cleardoublepage} avant chaque parttoc, puis nous établissons le style de page -% \texttt{empty} pour la première page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages -% suivantes des parttocs, et établissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages après la mini-table, -% après une commande \com{cleardoublepage}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}\label{faq.5} -% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter -% number zero (or even a weirder number). -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Le problème du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (résolu)}\label{faq.5} -% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro~un, mais par le chapitre numéro~zéro (ou même -% portant un numéro plus bizarre). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} -% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} -% \begin{description} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item[Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] -% \or\relax -% \item[Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To make the \upack{minitoc} -% package work with such documents, you must insert the command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} -% \end{quote} -% before the \com{dominitoc} and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number -% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not} -% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a -% \begin{verse} -% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| -% \end{verse} -% command to get a first chapter -% numbered~0. The \com{firstpartis} and -% \com{firstsectionis} commands are similar for parts and sections with -% a non standard numbering. -% \or\relax -% Pour que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez insérer la commande: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}} -% \end{quote} -% avant la commande \com{dominitoc} et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le numéro du premier chapitre. Cette -% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la numérotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande -% \begin{verse} -% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}| -% \end{verse} -% pour obtenir un premier chapitre numéroté~0. Et les deux commandes \com{firstpartis} -% et \com{firstsectionis} sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une numérotation non standard. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item[Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] -% \or\relax -% \item[Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)] -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commands are now obsolete, as this -% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files). -% Thus now they just produce harmless warnings. -% \or\relax -% Ces\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commandes sont désormais obsolètes, car ce problème -% a été résolu (via la numérotation «~absolue~» -% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent désormais seulement des avertissements bénins. -% \fi -% \end{description} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries} -% \subsection{Special Entries in the TOC}\label{special.entries} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \subsection{Entrées spéciales pour la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la -% ^^A bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries} -% \subsection{Entrées spéciales dans la TdM}\label{special.entries} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for -% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of -% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index, -% you should use the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} -% (package available from the CTAN archives). -% \or\relax -% Si\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} vous souhaitez ajouter des entrées dans la table des matières pour des objets tels que la table de -% matières elle-même, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez -% utiliser le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (paquetage disponible sur les archives CTAN). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in -% an article class document) when the \suffix{.toc} file is -% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \com{dominitoc} phase). -% \or\relax -% Mais ces entrées sont considérées comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article) -% lorsque le fichier est analysé pour préparer les minitocs (la phase \com{dominitoc}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note\imess{I0043} that the same problems appear if you use one of the \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or -% \class{scrartcl} \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} with some options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, -% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, and \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). -% The solutions are the same ones. -% \or\relax -% Notez\imess{I0043} que les mêmes problèmes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez l'une des classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} -% \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or \class{scrartcl} avec certaines options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, -% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script} et \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}). -% Les solutions sont les mêmes. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So you must add an \com{mtcaddchapter} command, \emph{without -% argument}, after each of the involved commands \com{tableofcontents}, -% \com{listoffigures}, and \com{listoftables}. -% \or\relax -% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}, \emph{sans argument}, après chacune des commandes -% \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables} mises en jeu. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the bibliography, you should add a \com{adjustmtc} command after the \com{bibliography} command. -% \or\relax -% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} après la commande \com{bibliography}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\printglossary} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the glossary, it is a bit more complicated, you should add the -% following commands just after the \com{printglossary} command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} this can be done by: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@. -% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else -% the \texttt{section} level. -% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is -% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, -% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. -% \or\relax -% Pour le glossaire, c'est un peu plus compliqué; -% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printglossary}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} ceci peut être remplacé par: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée du glossaire dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si -% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. -% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est -% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} de vérifier le résultat et, si -% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\printindex} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the index, it is like for the glossary, you should add the -% following commands just after the \com{printindex} command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} this can be done by: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@. -% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else -% the \texttt{section} level. -% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is -% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, -% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. -% \or\relax -% Pour l'index, c'est comme pour le glossaire: -% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printindex}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} ceci peut être remplacé par: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée d'index dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si -% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. -% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est -% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si -% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the nomenclature\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or the \pack{nomentbl} -% package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} calls \pack{nomencl}).}, -% it is like for the glossary, you should add the -% following commands just after the \com{printnomenclature} command: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{W0096}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{E0040}} this can be done by: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% where the optional argument is the level for the nomenclature entry in the TOC\@. -% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else -% the \texttt{section} level. -% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is -% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and, -% if necessary, adjust the optional argument. -% \or\relax -% Pour la nomenclature\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le paquetage -% \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} appelle \pack{nomencl}).}, c'est comme pour le glossaire, -% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printnomenclature}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter} -% \end{quote} -% \lneed{3} -% Mais ceci peut être remplacé par: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+ -% \end{quote} -% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée de la nomenclature dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si -% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}. -% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est -% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \virage\emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si -% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography -% and/or glossary (or index or nomenclature) are processed as starred sections, you must -% modify these additions to use section level commands. -% -% \lneed{5} -% And proceed \virage\emph{with extreme care}, tracking in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file the -% insertion of \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are -% some examples in the \exam{mtc-add.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}), -% and \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) files distributed with -% \upack{minitoc}. The \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example shows how much that problem is difficult. -% \or\relax -% Bien sûr, les documents dans lesquels la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la -% bibliographie et/ou le glossaire (ou l'index ou la nomenclature) sont traités comme des sections étoilées, -% modifiez ces additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Et procédez \virage\emph{avec grand soin}, en suivant dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} l'insertion des -% fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (et -% analogues). Il y~a divers exemples dans les fichiers -% \exam{mtc-add.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}), -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}) et -% \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) -% distribués avec \upack{minitoc}. -% L'exemple \exam{mtc-ads.tex} montre combien ce problème est difficile. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\cite} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This option loads the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). -% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in -% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a -% similar style, these citations get numbered starting -% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text. -% The \pack{notoccite} package prevents this. As \upack{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem. -% See also \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. -% \or\relax -% Cette option charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). -% Elle évite des problèmes avec des commandes \com{cite} situées dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des -% captions: si vous exécutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \texttt{unsrt} (non trié), ou un -% style similaire, ces citations seront numérotées en commençant à~la page de la table des matières où se trouve la -% citation parasite, et non avec le numéro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage -% \pack{notoccite} évite ceci. Comme \upack{minitoc} imprime des tables des matières, il est sujet au même -% problème. -% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} -% The \optd{listfiles} package option creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary files into the -% file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\footnote{This package option is now (since version~\#48) the default (list created).}. -% This feature can help you to remove these auxiliary -% files which are no more necessary after the \LaTeX\ run. -% Under Unix or Linux, you can try: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ -% \end{quote} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} -% L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} crée une liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc dans le -% fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Cette option de paquetage est désormais (depuis la version~\#48) -% le choix par défaut (liste créée).}. -% Ce dispositif peut vous aider à~supprimer ces -% fichiers auxiliaires qui ne sont plus nécessaires après l'exécution de \LaTeX. -% Sous Unix ou Linux, vous pouvez essayer: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+ -% \end{quote} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \or\relax -% \fi -% ^^A \clearpage -% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes -% known as interacting with \upack{minitoc}, -% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed. -% If a known package is loaded, -% this option writes some hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and -% emits a warning. The hints written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file may suggest you to consult the -% present document or -% the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.} -% This option is activated by default, but you can inhibit it via the \opt{nohints} option. -% The following (potential) problems are currently detected: -% \or\relax -% Cette option du paquetage détecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour -% interagir avec \upack{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fréquentes. La liste des -% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est évidemment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est chargé, -% cette option écrit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} -% et émet un avertissement. Les -% indications écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} peuvent vous suggérer de consulter -% le présent document ou le -% fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette -% option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \opt{nohints}. -% Les problèmes (potentiels) suivants sont actuellement détectés: -% \fi -% \begin{itemize} -% \lneed{11} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% \begin{macro}{\spart} -% \begin{macro}{\@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character -% in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by -% another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}: -% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, -% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect}, and \com{@ssect}. -% Note that the \pack{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at -% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package, -% but these alterations seem harmless. Note that the \pack{hyperref} must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% L'altération de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caractère <<~\texttt{@}~>> -% dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois -% altérées par d'autres paquetages; reconsidérez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}: -% \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter}, -% \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect} et \com{@ssect}. -% Mais le paquetage \pack{hyperref} (voir la section~\vref{faq.17}) altère ces commandes lors de -% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, donc ce problème pourrait être signalé si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais -% ces altérations semblent bénignes. Notez que le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} -% \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Presence\virage{} of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions: -% \class{amsbook} (class), -% \class{memoir} (class), -% \pack{appendix}, -% \pack{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)), -% \class{scrbook} (class), -% \class{scrreprt} (class), -% \class{scrartcl} (class), -% \pack{tocbibind}, and -% \pack{tocloft}. -% \or\relax -% Présence\virage{} des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines précautions: -% \class{amsbook} (classe), -% \pack{appendix}, -% \pack{placeins} (attention à~ses options et à~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)), -% \class{scrbook} (classe), -% \class{scrreprt} (classe), -% \class{scrartcl} (classe), -% \pack{tocbibind} et -% \pack{tocloft}. -% \fi -% \lneed{7} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Presence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} -% of the following packages or classes, which, unfortunately, are \emph{incompatible} -% with the \upack{minitoc} package: -% \class{amsart} (class), -% \class{amsproc} (class), -% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{This package has its own system for minitocs.}, \class{jura} (class), -% \pack{titlesec}, and -% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}The \upack{titlesec} package redefines -% the sectionning commands in a way -% completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \upack{minitoc} and \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} are -% fundamentaly \emph{incompatible}, and it is very sad.}. -% \or\relax -% Présence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}} -% des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui, malheureusement, sont \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}: -% \class{amsart} (classe), -% \class{amsproc} (classe), -% \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage a son propre système de minitocs.}, \class{jura} (classe), -% \pack{titlesec} et -% \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}Le paquetage \upack{titlesec} redéfinit les -% commandes de sectionnement d'une manière complètement étrangère à~la manière standard de \LaTeX; -% donc \upack{minitoc} et \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles, -% et ceci est fort regrettable.}. -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, -% usage of \com{sectlot} without calling \com{dosectlot}; -% or the reverse. -% \or\relax -% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~, -% utilisation de \com{sectlot} sans appeler \com{dosectlot}; -% ou l'inverse. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, of \com{sectlot} -% without calling \fkcom{listoftables}. -% \or\relax -% Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, de -% \com{sectlot} sans appeler \fkcom{listoftables}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{8} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Usage of \com{sectlof} and/or \com{sectlot} without -% using the \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option of \upack{minitoc} -% (or the \pack{placeins} package without -% its \optp{section}{placeins} option). -% \or\relax -% Utilisation de \com{sectlof} et/ou \com{sectlot} sans utiliser l'option de paquetage -% \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} de \upack{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \pack{placeins} -% sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} -% you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \opt{shortext} -% package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections, -% the \optd{hints} package option displays a warning. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} -% vous utilisez des suffixes courts (à~cause de votre système d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage -% \opt{shortext}, voyez à~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-delà de la -% limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections, -% l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} signale un avertissement. -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.abstract} -% If the \pack{abstract}\imess{I0040} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its -% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, -% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. -% This is detected and you should add a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| -% command after your \env{abstract} environment. -% \or\relax\label{h.abstract} -% Si le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé -% avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou équivalente) est ajoutée -% à~la table des matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe de document définit \com{chapter}, sinon -% comme une section étoilée. Ceci est détecté et vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou -% \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sectsty} -% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. The interaction has been pointed out -% by \name{Bil}{Kleb}. -% \or\relax\label{h.sectsty} -% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. L'interaction a été signalée par -% \name{Bil}{Kleb}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.varsects} -% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} -% (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.varsects} -% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} -% (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.fncychap} -% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} -% (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.fncychap} -% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} -% (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.hangcaption} -% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} -% (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.hangcaption} -% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} -% (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.quotchap} -% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} -% (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.quotchap} -% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} -% (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.romannum} -% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} -% (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.romannum} -% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} -% (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sfheaders} -% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} -% (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.sfheaders} -% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} -% (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.alnumsec} -% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} -% (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.alnumsec} -% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} -% (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.captcont} -% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} -% (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.captcont} -% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} -% (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{4} -% \item -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} -% If one of the \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, -% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; -% now use the \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), -% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (written by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or -% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (written by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption} -% Si l'un des -% paquetages \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, -% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez -% maintenant le paquetage \upack{caption}.}, (tous deux écrits par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), -% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou -% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{4} -% \bigskip -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} -% If one of the\imess{I0053} \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, -% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, or \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages -% is used, you must remember that \emph{you can not use} the \upack{minitoc} facilities for preparing -% mini-tables of floats of the new defined types. -% \or\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat} -% Si\imess{I0053} l'un des paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, -% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} ou \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} -% est utilisé, vous devez vous souvenir que \emph{vous ne pouvez pas utiliser} les facilités -% de \upack{minitoc} pour préparer des mini-tables de flottants des types nouvellement définis. -% \fi -% \bigskip -% \lneed{4} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\imess{I0006} you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \optd{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you -% used also the \opt{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}). -% \or\relax -% Si\imess{I0006} vous essayez d'insérer des mini-tables vides, l'option \optd{hints} vous donne un avertissement -% global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilisé l'option \opt{nocheckfiles}, voyez la -% section~\vref{s+placing}). -% \fi -% \bigskip -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item -% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} -% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} -% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you use\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} one of the obsolete commands -% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris}, or \com{firstsectionis}), -% a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder. -% \or\relax -% Si vous utilisez\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} l'une des commandes obsolètes -% (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} ou -% \com{firstsectionis}), un avertissement est émis pour chaque utilisation, bien sûr, mais aussi une -% indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{2} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you invoke a same preparation command more than once, an informative hint is issued for each spurious -% invocation. -% \or\relax -% Si vous invoquez une même commande de préparation plus d'une fois, un \emph{hint} informatif est émis pour -% chaque invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \end{itemize} -% ^^A -% ^^A \clearpage -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Under\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems), -% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters. -% The \upack{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of -% extensions available and will use it. -% All other modifications will be done automatically. -% The \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} -% extensions will become \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter -% number. -% The extensions \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} become -% \suffix{.F}\meta{N} and \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. -% The \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} -% extensions become \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number. -% The extensions \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} become -% \suffix{.G}\meta{N} and \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. -% The \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} -% extensions become \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section -% number. -% The extensions \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} become -% \suffix{.H}\meta{N} and \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}. -% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a -% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an -% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for -% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical. -% The \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations. -% See also section~\vref{.8+3}. -% \begin{table}[th] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\ -% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ -% \midrule -% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ -% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ -% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ -% \midrule -% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ -% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ -% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ -% \midrule -% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ -% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ -% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% Sous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS -% (et autres vieux systèmes d'exploitation pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont -% limités à~3~caractères. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} détermine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et -% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront -% \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de chapitre. -% Les suffixes \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.F}\meta{N} et \suffix{.T}\meta{N}. -% Les suffixes \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie. -% Les suffixes \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.G}\meta{N} et \suffix{.U}\meta{N}. -% Les suffixes \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section. -% Les suffixes \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.H}\meta{N} et \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. -% Tous ces suffixes sont listés dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}. -% Bien sûr, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de -% chapitres (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des -% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait être tragique. L'option \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints}) -% signalera de telles situations. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}. -% \begin{table}[th] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\ -% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\ -% \midrule -% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\ -% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\ -% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\ -% \midrule -% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\ -% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\ -% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\ -% \midrule -% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\ -% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\ -% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?} -% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels, -% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section, -% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the -% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists -% and section-level tables and lists -% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35); -% after the second run, they appear (if not empty), -% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers -% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level -% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}). -% \or\relax -% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs exécutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles nécessaires?} -% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premières pages de -% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la numérotation des pages est altérée. Après la première exécution de -% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait sautées depuis la -% version~\#35); après la deuxième exécution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles -% modifient la numérotation des pages, les numéros des pages y~sont faux; après la troisième exécution, les -% mini-tables devraient être correctes (voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le paquetage \upack{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If a document has been prepared with the \upack{minitoc} package, -% it contains many \upack{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being -% \com{dominitoc}, -% \com{faketableofcontents}, and \com{minitoc} commands (and their -% equivalents for lists of figures and tables). -% If you want to typeset -% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the -% \upack{minitoc} package by the \pack{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these -% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references. -% It also sanitizes the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, -% \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files from \upack{minitoc} specific -% commands which are now spurious. -% \or\relax -% Si un document a été préparé avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il contient de nombreuses commandes -% spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{faketableofcontents} et -% \com{minitoc} (et leurs équivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux). -% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignorées, en -% écrivant éventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% Au moins deux exécutions -% de \LaTeX\ seront nécessaires pour avoir une numérotation des pages et des références croisées correctes. -% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} en y~éliminant les -% commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc} devenues superflues. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \cleardoublepage -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Questions fréquemment posées}\label{FAQ} -% \fi -% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \minitoc -% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} -% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} -% \mtcskip -% ^^A \lsneed{5} -% \lneed{6} -% ^^A \mtcskip -% \minilof -% \mtcskip -% \minilot -% -% \addtocounter{section}{-1} ^^A % Trick to get a section numbered zero -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Introduction} -% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} -% \or\relax -% \section{Introduction} -% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about -% the \upack{minitoc.sty} package. If the version has a number less than~60, please -% upgrade to version~\#60. This list is also given in the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file, -% in pure text form. The numbering of this list is done by date of the first occurrence of the question. -% -% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \optd{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}), -% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, which may contain pertinent -% messages. If you do not find a solution, ask a question on an adequate news group, like \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} -% (in french) or \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english) preferably, groups which I try to follow, or send me a mail -% in last ressort (please join a minimal but complete example~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{See also: -% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} -% and \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.} (or~``MCE'') -% reproducing the problem; this example should use the \opt{hints} option). -% \or\relax -% Voici une liste de problèmes et de questions fréquemment posées («~foire aux questions~») à~propos du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. Si votre version a un numéro plus petit que~60, vous êtes priés de faire une mise à~jour -% à~la version~\#60. Cette liste est aussi donnée dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}, sous -% forme de texte pur (et en anglais). La numérotation de cette liste est faite selon la date de la première occurrence -% de la question. -% -% Si un problème survient, il est souvent avisé: a)~d'utiliser l'option \optd{hints} (voir la -% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activée par défaut, et b)~de lire le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, qui -% peut contenir des messages pertinents. Si vous ne trouvez pas de solution, posez une question sur un groupe de -% discussion adéquat, tel que \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français), ou \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais) de préférence, -% que j'essaye de suivre, ou envoyez moi un courrier en dernier recours (prière de joindre un exemple complet -% minimal~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{Voir aussi: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} -% et \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.} (ou «~ECM~»\/) reproduisant -% le problème; cet exemple devrait utiliser l'option \opt{hints}). -% \fi -% -% ^^A (1) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Avoiding a page break near the rules before and after a mini-table} -% \or\relax -% \section{Éviter une coupure de page près des filets avant et après une mini-table} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 added better fixes. -% You may have to make some final tuning with \com{enlargethispage}. -% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}. -% The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} may also be useful. -% \or\relax -% Ce problème semblait résolu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 a ajouté de meilleures corrections. Vous -% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \com{enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel -% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. Il peut aussi être utile d'utiliser le paquetage -% \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (2) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Implementing others layouts for a mini-table} -% \or\relax -% \section{Implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% There are yet some examples in chapter~\vref{c+exdocs}, for some layouts, like mini-tables on two or three columns. -% \or\relax -% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% Il y~a quelques exemples dans le chapitre~\vref{c+exdocs}, pour quelques mises en page, comme des mini-tables -% sur deux ou trois colonnes. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (3) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{A ``\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}'' command in a contents line makes an error} -% \or\relax -% \section{Une commande «~\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}~» dans une entrée de contenu provoque une erreur} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\protect} -% \begin{macro}{\linebreak} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Use \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. The \verb|\\| command should be used only in tabular material (\env{tabular} -% environment and similar, or in the -% \env{tabbing} environment) and in math arrays and equations, or in the \env{quote}-like environments. -% \or\relax -% Utilisez \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. La commande \verb|\\| ne devrait être utilisée que dans du matériel -% de tableau (environnement \env{tabular} ou similaire, ou dans l'environnement \env{tabbing}) et dans les -% tableaux (\emph{arrays}) et équations mathématiques, ou dans des environnements similaires à~\env{quote}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (4) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres crée le chaos} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables -% going in wrong chapters.} -% \or\relax -% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en découle,\ldots\ -% avec les mini-tables allant dans les mauvais chapitres.} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The best way seems to make one run with the \pack{mtcoff} -% package replacing the \upack{minitoc} package, then restore -% the \upack{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times -% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}\footnote{I~used the \pack{pict2e} -% package~\cite{pict2e}, by \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} and \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, to prepare this figure.}. -% Running with the \pack{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files -% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \upack{minitoc}. -% A more radical solution is to delete the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, -% \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files relative to the document, then -% re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times. -% \or\relax -% La meilleure méthode semble d'effectuer une exécution avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} remplaçant -% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, puis de rétablir le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au -% moins trois fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le -% paquetage \pack{pict2e}~\cite{pict2e}, de \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} -% et \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, -% pour préparer cette figure.}. -% Exécuter avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} -% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purgés des commandes «~superflues~» introduites par -% \upack{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de détruire les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} -% et \suffix{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au moins trois fois. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[tp] -% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize -% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} -% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% -% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) -% \thicklines -% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} -% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} -% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} -% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} -% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} -% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} -% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} -% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} -% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} -% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} -% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} -% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} -% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} -% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} -% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} -% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} -% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} -% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} -% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} -% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} -% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} -% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} -% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} -% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} -% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} -% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} -% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} -% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} -% \end{picture}} -% \egroup -% \begin{flushleft} -% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt -% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of -% contents, which is likely inaccurate. -% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate. -% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of contents, which is accurate. -% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are accurate. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{flushleft} -% \caption{Three compilations for \upack{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[tp] -% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize -% \def\NUM{\meta{N}} -% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{% -% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0) -% \thicklines -% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}} -% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}} -% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}} -% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}} -% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}} -% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}} -% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}} -% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}} -% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}} -% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}} -% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}} -% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}} -% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}} -% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}} -% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} -% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}} -% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}} -% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}} -% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}} -% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}} -% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}} -% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} -% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}} -% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} -% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}} -% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}} -% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}} -% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}} -% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}} -% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}} -% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}} -% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}} -% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}} -% \end{picture}} -% \egroup -% \begin{flushleft} -% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt -% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement inexacte. -% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes. -% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement exacte. -% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{flushleft} -% \caption{Trois compilations pour \upack{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% -% ^^A (5) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3} -% \or\relax -% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. -% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par -% \lneed{3} -% No\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification is needed: all became automatic since -% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions, -% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package -% option \opt{shortext}. Then you will get first the -% autoconfiguration messages, then a message saying that you -% will use short extensions. But then be careful to not have more -% than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)! -% \or\relax -% \emph{Ce paquetage crée des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. Certains -% systèmes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limités à~3~caractères. Que faire?}\par -% \lneed{3} -% Aucune\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification n'est nécessaire: -% tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment -% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caractères, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. -% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'autoconfiguration, puis un message disant que vous allez -% utiliser des suffixes courts. -% Mais alors faites attention à~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du même type (même vides)! -% \fi -% -% ^^A (6) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Playing with the chapter number} -% \or\relax -% \section{Jouer avec le numéro de chapitre} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, i.e.,~do not write ugly things like: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| -% \end{verse} -% The mechanism would break. It is better to add \com{chapter} commands, -% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters. -% Since version~\#10, the \upack{minitoc} package works with appendices. -% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1. -% ^^A And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}. -% And look at~``Special Entries in the TOC'', section~\vref{special.entries}. -% -% Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08), the numbering of chapters and that of minitocs are independent, so that problem just -% vanished. -% -% The same remarks apply to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters. -% \or\relax -% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur «~\texttt{chapter}~», donc n'écrivez pas des horreurs telles que: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}| -% \end{verse} -% Ceci casserait la mécanique du paquetage. Il vaut mieux ajouter des commandes \com{chapter}, afin de -% créer des chapitres vides (mais numérotés d'une manière légale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% fonctionne avec les appendices. -% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre numéroté autrement que un. -% Et regardez «~Entrées spéciales dans la TdM~», section~\vref{special.entries}. -% -% Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08), la numérotation des chapitres et celle des minitocs sont indépendantes, -% donc ce problème a disparu. -% -% Les mêmes remarques s'appliquent aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (7) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Supported document classes}\label{s+supported+classes} -% \or\relax -% \section{Classes de document supportées}\label{s+supported+classes} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{W0017} \upack{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define -% chapters in the standard way, like ``\class{book}'' and ``\class{report}'', -% or sections in the standard way, like ``\class{article}''~\cite{classes}. -% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \com{part} command. -% Note that classes like ``\class{letter}''~\cite{letter}, which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be -% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be -% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with -% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \upack{minitoc} package relies on the -% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}. -% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \or\relax -% Le\imess{W0017} paquetage \upack{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui définissent les chapitres -% de la manière standard, comme «~\class{book}~» et «~\class{report}~», ou les sections de la manière standard, -% comme «~\class{article}~»~\cite{classes}. Il y~a des «~parttocs~» si la classe de document définit -% la commande \com{part}. Notez que des classes telles que «~\class{letter}~»~\cite{letter}, -% qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne -% peuvent pas être supportées. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont -% pas supportées\,\footnote{Ce serait très difficile: tout utilisateur peut créer de nouvelles commandes de -% sectionnement (souvent à~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limité -% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard -% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (8) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions} -% \or\relax -% \section{Compatibilité avec les versions de \LaTeX{}} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\imess{W0021} users have failed to make \upack{minitoc} to work. They got a message like: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ -% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ -% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| -% \verb|Trying to continue...| -% \end{verse} -% or:\imess{W0022} -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ -% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ -% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ -% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| -% \end{verse} -% The \com{reset@font} command has been added to \xfile{latex.tex} -% on September~29th, 1991 and the \com{@inputcheck} command -% on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \xfile{latex.tex} has been -% released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you -% have an old version of \xfile{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from -% the archives (or a recent distribution) -% and regenerate a \xfile{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool). -% \or\relax -% Certains\imess{W0021} utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus à~faire fonctionner \upack{minitoc}. -% Ils ont reçu un message tel que: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ -% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\ -% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.| -% \verb|Trying to continue...| -% \end{verse} -% ou:\imess{W0022} -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ -% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\ -% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ -% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| -% \end{verse} -% La commande \com{reset@font} a été ajoutée à~\xfile{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande -% \com{@inputcheck} le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \xfile{latex.tex} a été distribuée le 25~mars 1992. Si -% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \xfile{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version récente -% depuis les archives (ou une distribution récente) -% et régénérez un format \xfile{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration). -% \fi -% -% ^^A (9) -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Other mini-tables}\label{faq.9} -% \or\relax -% \section{Autres mini-tables}\label{faq.9} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and -% minibbl (mini-bibliographies per part, chapter or section). First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly -% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \suffix{.aux} files. Look -% at the \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, -% \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic}, and \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib} packages. -% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots. -% Minibbls are not the aim of this package\footnote{See {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. -% \or\relax -% Certains utilisateurs exigeants désirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les «~minibbls~» -% (mini-bibliographies par partie, chapitre ou section) sont un autre problème, -% fortement lié au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \suffix{.aux}. -% Regardez les paquetages \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits}, -% \pack{multibib}~\cite{bibunits}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic} et \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib}. -% La version~\#13 a implanté les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce -% paquetage{\froff\,\footnote{Voir~: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% ^^A (10) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10} -% \or\relax -% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users -% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be -% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file -% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots) -% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would -% be read for each \ucom{miniXXX} macro! -% Moreover, this would make the \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package -% option impractical to implement. -% Note that the many files \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., may be -% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the preparation commands -% (like \com{dominitoc} and siblings). -% But, since version \#35, -% \upack{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \uxfile{*.mtc*} files -% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules. -% It would not be easy to do with only one big auxiliary file. -% Since version \#44, the \optd{listfiles} package option is available to create a list of these auxiliary -% files; see section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \or\relax -% Ce paquetage crée des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argué qu'il y en avait trop. -% Une réorganisation profonde serait nécessaire pour éviter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier -% auxiliaire (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs, etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce -% fichier très lente, car il devrait être lu pour chaque commande \ucom{miniXXX}! De plus, ceci -% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \optd{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible. -% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent être détruits après l'exécution de \LaTeX. -% Ils sont reconstruits par les commandes de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc} et ses analogues). -% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \upack{minitoc} est capable de détecter et sauter les fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*} (et -% analogues) vides pour éviter des titres isolés avec seulement deux filets fins. -% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile à~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire. -% Depuis la version \#44, l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est disponible pour créer une liste de ces -% fichiers auxiliaires; voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{5} -% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files. -% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be -% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The -% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} -% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file). -% -% As an example, you can look at the \tool{rubber} tool~\cite{rubber} -% (written in Python) provided by \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: -% \begin{quote} -% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} -% \end{quote} -% \or\relax -% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. -% Ils ne sont plus utiles après l'exécution de \LaTeX. Si vous exécutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou -% d'un «~makefile~», il peut être utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait être optionnel, -% pour permettre la mise au point). Le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers -% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi créé comme fichier de travail). -% -% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder l'outil \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} -% (écrit en Python) fourni par \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}: -% {\froff\begin{quote} -% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} -% \end{quote}} -% \fi -% -% ^^A (11) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Mini-tables at levels other than chapter} -% \or\relax -% \section{Mini-tables à~des niveaux autres que le chapitre} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and -% partlots for the part level in \class{book}\texttt{\BAR}\class{report}-like and \class{article}-like documents, -% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \class{article}-like -% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter -% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make -% an almost unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of -% the document according to the size of it (e.g.,~do not write an article -% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!). -% -% \begin{center}\ttfamily -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \thickline -% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \hline -% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline -% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline -% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{center} -% \or\relax -% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a été nécessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots -% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire -% à~\class{book}, \class{report} ou \class{article}, -% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire -% à~\class{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \upack{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et -% section dans le même document, car cela produirait un monstre presque illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de -% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas écrire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est -% un rapport, ou même un livre!). -% \begin{center}\ttfamily -% \ifBT -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \midrule -% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \else -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \thickline -% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\ -% \hline -% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline -% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline -% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{center} -% \fi -% -% ^^A (12) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09} -% \or\relax -% \section{Incompatibilité avec \LaTeX2.09} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\protect} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \com{protect} before -% \com{contentsline} in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lof} -% files. The version~\#17 of \upack{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09. -% This will be the \emph{last} -% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible -% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete. -% \or\relax -% La version la plus récente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \com{protect} avant \com{contentsline} dans -% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \upack{minitoc} tente d'être compatible -% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{dernière} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et -% ultérieures sont spécifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsolète. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (13) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part} -% \or\relax -% \section{Documents ré-initialisant le numéro de chapitre pour chaque partie} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} works with document classes resetting -% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the -% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number. -% \or\relax -% Depuis la version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui ré-initialisent le numéro de -% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les -% mini-tables ont désormais un numéro \emph{absolu}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (14) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines} -% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \opt{tight} option, and -% with the \opt{k-tight} option for the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (since version~\#43). -% \or\relax -% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espacées} -% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserrées avec l'option \opt{tight}, -% avec l'option \opt{k-tight} pour les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (depuis la version~\#43). -% \fi -% -% ^^A (15) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The secttocs are wrong} -% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38). -% \or\relax -% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses} -% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrigé (version~\#38). -% \fi -% -% ^^A (16) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Removing the lines of dots} -% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \opt{undotted} -% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Retirer les points de conduite} -% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages sont retirés par -% l'option \opt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (17) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Using the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since version~\#31, \upack{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \pack{hyperref} -% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, -% using the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. -% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and should no more be used. -% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} -% If you add the loading of the \pack{hyperref} package to a document yet using \upack{minitoc}, -% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run, -% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of -% \pack{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from -% \upack{minitoc}~\#30 to \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding -% \pack{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) -% without \pack{hyperref}, then with \pack{hyperref}, because some internal commands written -% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \pack{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before} -% \upack{minitoc}. Note that the documents \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} show (not so) basic examples -% of the use of the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% Depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne enfin correctement avec le puissant paquetage -% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, grâce à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilisé les travaux de -% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. -% \emph{Donc\Virage{} le paquetage \pack{minitoc-hyper}~\cite{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être -% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} -% Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \pack{hyperref} à~un -% document utilisant déjà \upack{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en -% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'exécution de \LaTeX, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y -% aura aucun problème si vous enlevez le chargement de \pack{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce problème ne -% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \upack{minitoc} version~\#30 à~\upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) -% avec un document déjà traité et en ajoutant \pack{hyperref} en même temps! Il semble préférable de traiter le -% document avec \upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) sans \pack{hyperref}, puis avec \pack{hyperref}, -% parce que certaines commandes internes écrites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont été modifiées. S'il est utilisé, -% le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}. Notez que les documents -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} montrent des exemples (qui ne sont pas vraiment) basiques de -% l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (18) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Problem while upgrading \upack{minitoc}} -% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to -% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \suffix{.aux}, -% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} files of the document, -% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will -% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Problème lors de la mise à~jour de \upack{minitoc}} -% Lors de la mise à~jour de la version~\#30 ou inférieure vers la version~\#31 ou supérieure, vous devriez détruire -% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} du document, sinon la première exécution de \LaTeX{} avec -% la version~\#31 ou supérieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'exécution suivante devrait être correcte). Voir aussi -% la section~\vref{faq.17}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (19) -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{A local TOC for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}% -% \or\relax -% \section{Une TdM locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}% -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\protect} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices, -% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of -% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \com{part} -% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at -% the \com{part} level: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % after \begin{document}|\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \com{appendix}\\ -% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % create a part level subdivision|\\ -% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % create a local table of contents|\\ -% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\ -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ -% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\ -% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\ -% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\ -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| -% \end{verse} -% See also section~\vref{faq.25}. -% \or\relax -% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des matières pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entrées de -% cette table dans la table des matières principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision -% \com{part} du document et de demander une table des matières au niveau de cette partie: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc % après \begin{document}|\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \com{tableofcontents}\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \icom{appendix}\verb|\appendix|\\ -% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices} % crée une subdivision de niveau partie|\\ -% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc % crée une table des matières locale|\\ -% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\ -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\ -% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\ -% \verb|. . .|\\ -% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci à la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\ -% \verb|% après les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\ -% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\ -% \icom{atttocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}| -% \end{verse} -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (20) -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \begin{environment}{appendices} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you use the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} -% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \env{appendices} environment -% (and after it): they do not -% match with their respective appendices. In fact, the environnement opening \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a -% \com{addcontentsline} command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble -% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Several solutions are available. The first one is to add a -% \com{adjustmtc} or \com{adjuststc} command -% (depending on the level of the appendices, chapter or section) after \emph{each} -% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}} command. -% An other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble -% \emph{after} the loading of the \pack{appendix} package: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ -% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| -% \end{verse} -% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ -% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| -% \end{verse} -% if appendices are at the section level. -% -% These two solutions may be modified by replacing \com{adjustmtc} by the sequence: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ -% OR\\ -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| -% \end{quote} -% when it is necessary to delimit the end of the preceding chapter or section\,\footnote{In fact, the commands -% \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} and \com{sectend} should not be used directly by the user, in normal circumstances.}. -% -% A rather more elegant solution is to add an entry into the TOC via the \com{addappheadtotoc} command offered by -% the \pack{appendix} package. As this entry is a chapter-level (or section-level) entry, it delimits correctly -% the end of the preceding chapter or section. -% -% See also the \exam{mtc-amm.tex} example file (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), -% which uses the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, -% which includes itself the \pack{appendix} package functionnality (these packages and this class are from the same author). -% \or\relax -% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} vous observerez un -% sérieux problème avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \env{appendices} (et après lui): elles ne correspondent -% pas avec leurs appendices respectifs. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une -% commande \com{addcontentsline} pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la numérotation des -% minitocs ou secttocs. Plusieurs solutions sont disponibles. La première consiste à~ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} -% ou \com{adjuststc} (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) après \emph{chaque} commande -% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}}. Une autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le préambule -% \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \pack{appendix}: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ -% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}| -% \end{verse} -% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\ -% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}| -% \end{verse} -% si les appendices sont au niveau section. -% -% Ces deux solutions peuvent être modifiées en remplaçant \com{adjustmtc} par la séquence: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\ -% OU\\ -% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}| -% \end{quote} -% lorsqu'il est nécessaire de délimiter la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) précédent(e)\,\footnote{En fait, les -% commandes \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} et \com{sectend} ne devraient pas être appelées directement par -% l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales.}. -% -% Une solution plus élégante consiste à~ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières via la -% commande \com{addappheadtotoc} fournie par le paquetage \pack{appendix}. Comme cette entrée est une entrée -% au niveau chapitre (ou au niveau section), elle délimite correctement la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) -% précédent(e). -% -% Voir aussi le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex} (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}), -% qui utilise la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, -% qui inclut elle-même la fonctionnalité du paquetage \pack{appendix} (ces paquetages et cette classe sont du même auteur). -% \fi -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% ^^A (21) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% (This\imess{I0047} answer is given in the documentation of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.) -% The \pack{tocloft} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) and \upack{minitoc} packages -% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed. -% In the normal course of events, when \upack{minitoc} is used in a chaptered -% document it will typeset section -% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \pack{tocloft} is used in -% conjunction with \upack{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are -% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in -% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font. -% -% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small -% font, is to put: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| -% \end{verse} -% or: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| -% \end{verse} -% in the preamble. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| -% \end{verse} -% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then -% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section -% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font, -% put the incantation between the \com{tableofcontents} -% command and the first \com{chapter} command. -% -% As \pack{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the -% benefits of this package. See also section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \or\relax -% (Cette\imess{I0047} réponse est donnée dans la documentation du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.) -% Les paquetages \pack{tocloft} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) et \upack{minitoc} ont une fâcheuse -% interaction\,\footnote{Découverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut être corrigée. -% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \upack{minitoc} est utilisé dans un document avec chapitres, il -% composera les entrées de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \pack{tocloft} est utilisé en conjonction avec -% \upack{minitoc}, alors les entrées de sections dans les minitocs sont composées dans la fonte normale, sauf pour -% les numéros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières -% principale sont entièrement en fonte normale. -% -% Un remède, si vous voulez que toutes des entrées de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de -% placer: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}| -% \end{verse} -% ou: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}| -% \end{verse} -% dans le préambule. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Sinon, le remède est l'incantation suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}| -% \end{verse} -% Pour que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras, -% placez l'incantation dans le préambule. Pour que ces entrées soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte -% normale dans la table des matières principale, placez l'incantation entre la commande \com{tableofcontents} et -% la première commande \com{chapter}. -% -% Puisque \pack{tocloft} est un paquetage très puissant et très utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces remèdes si -% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (22) -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir} -% \fi -% \SMMZZ{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offers basically the functionnalities -% of the \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} -% and \pack{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), -% hence it has the same problems; -% see above the available solutions (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, -% \vref{special.entries}, and~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectively). -% If your version of the \class{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \com{chapter} command is -% different and the \class{memoir} class \emph{could be no more compatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, but a -% patch is inserted to fix the problem. Hopefully, if your version of the \class{memoir} class -% is more recent than 2005/09/25, the patch is no more necessary. -% -% If you are using the \class{memoir} class (or the \pack{tocloft} package), -% the \com{mtcsetfont} command has no effect (\com{mtcsettitlefont} works); you should use the font -% commands which are specific of the \class{memoir} class (or of the \pack{tocloft} package). -% -% If you still want to use the \com{mtcsetfont} commands while using the \class{memoir} class (or of the -% \pack{tocloft} package), you must disable the \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft} font commands. This is done by -% the following commands: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| -% \end{quote} -% \or\relax -% La classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalités des -% paquetages \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} et \pack{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont -% le même auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), -% et donc elle a les mêmes problèmes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles (sections~\vref{faq+appendix}, -% \vref{special.entries} et~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectivement). -% Si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente, la syntaxe de la commande \com{chapter} -% est différente et la classe \class{memoir} \emph{pourrait n'être plus compatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% mais une modification est insérée pour corriger le problème. Heureusement, si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} -% est plus récente que 2005/09/25, la correction n'est plus nécessaire. -% -% Si vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir} (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), la commande \com{mtcsetfont} -% n'a aucun effet (\com{mtcsettitlefont} fonctionne); vous devriez utiliser les commandes de fontes qui -% sont spécifiques de la classe \class{memoir} (ou du paquetage \pack{tocloft}). -% -% Si vous souhaitez quand même utiliser les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} tout en utilisant la classe \class{memoir} -% (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), vous devez désactiver les commandes de fontes de \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft}. -% Ceci peut être fait par les commandes suivantes: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\ -% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax| -% \end{quote} -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% ^^A (23) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths} -% \or\relax -% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since version \#41, the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands are available. You do not need anymore -% to know \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. -% \or\relax -% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} sont disponibles. Vous -% n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since version \#42, the \com{mtcsettitle} command is available. -% You do not need anymore to know \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. -% \or\relax -% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \com{mtcsettitle} est disponible. -% Vous n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since version \#43, the \com{mtcsetdepth} command is available. -% You do not need anymore to know the counters \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. -% \or\relax -% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \com{mtcsetdepth} est disponible. -% n'avez plus besoin de connaître les compteurs \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (24) -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]% -% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS} -% This problem has been pointed out by \name{Henri}{Massias}. -% \or\relax -% \section[Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]% -% {Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS} -% Ce problème a été signalé par \name{Henri}{Massias}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Unfortunately, the \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} -% and \class{amsproc} document classes are -% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. -% The \class{amsbook} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want -% a list of figures and/or a list of tables: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{listoffigures}\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|\\ -% \com{listoftables}\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added| -% \end{verse} -% \or\relax -% Malheureusement, les classes de document \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart} -% et \class{amsproc} sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. -% La classe de document \class{amsbook} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous désirez -% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{listoffigures}\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|\\ -% \com{listoftables}\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout| -% \end{verse} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% ^^A (25) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Hiding some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}% -% \or\relax -% \section{Cacher certaines entrées dans la table des matières principale}\label{faq.25}% -% \fi -% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}. -% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\com{minitoc}) whose entries should not appear in -% the main table of contents. Just use the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Title}\texttt{\}}\\ -% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\ -% \com{minitoc}\\ -% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sub-title}\texttt{\}}\\ -% .{}.{}.\\ -% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} -% \end{quote} -% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default: -% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding). -% You can look at the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file:\label{mtc-apx.tex} -% \or\relax -% C'est un problème similaire à~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}. -% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des matières locale pour un chapitre (\com{minitoc}) dont les entrées ne -% doivent pas apparaître dans la table des matières principale. Utilisez simplement l'environnement -% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Titre}\texttt{\}}\\ -% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\ -% \com{minitoc}\\ -% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sous-titre}\texttt{\}}\\ -% .{}.{}.\\ -% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}} -% \end{quote} -% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel numérique, qui est la profondeur de masquage dans la table des -% matières principale (par défaut: \texttt{-1}, masquage complet). Vous pouvez regarder le fichier d'exemple -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}:\label{mtc-apx.tex} -% \fi -% \end{environment} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-apx> -\documentclass[oneside]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}% - [2007/03/22]% -\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text -\usepackage{tocbibind} % adds some entries in the main TOC. -\usepackage[tight,listfiles]{minitoc} -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} \setcounter{parttocdepth}{3} -\begin{document} -\doparttoc \dominitoc % prepare the mini-tables -\tableofcontents -\mtcaddchapter % because tocbibind adds a chapter entry in the TOC -\chapter{First} -\minitoc -First chapter -\section{First section} \lipsum[1] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] -\chapter{Second} -\minitoc -Second -\section{First section of second chapter} \lipsum[3] -\section{Second section of second chapter} \lipsum[4] -\appendix % begins the appendices -\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices} % adds a part entry in the TOC -\adjustptc % fixes the parttoc counter ptc -\mtcsettitle{parttoc}{List of Appendices} % changes the parttoc title -\parttoc % adds a partial toc for the appendices -\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] % hides the details of the appendices in the main TOC, -% % but chapter-level entries would be still visible in the main TOC -% % if you use 0 in place of -1 as optional argument. -\chapter{First appendix} -\minitoc -First appendix -\section{First section} \lipsum[5] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[6] -\chapter{Second appendix} -\minitoc -Second appendix -\section{First section of second appendix} \lipsum[7] -\section{Second section of second appendix} \lipsum[8] -\end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding -\end{document} -%</mtc-apx> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Of course, the environments \env{mtchideinmainlof} -% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main -% list of figures or of tables. -% -% Note\virage{} that the position of the end of these environments must be adjusted to include a page break (like -% the one done by a \com{chapter} command), else the restore command might be inserted too early into the -% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} or \suffix{.lot} file. There is an example file -% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} -% \or\relax -% Bien sûr, les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont aussi disponibles, pour -% masquer certaines entrées dans la liste principale des figures ou des tableaux. -% -% Notez\virage{} que la position de la fin de ces environnements doit être ajustée pour inclure un saut de page -% (comme celui fait par une commande \com{chapter}), sinon la commande de restauration pourrait être insérée -% trop tôt dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} ou \suffix{.lot}. Voici un fichier d'exemple -% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex} -% \fi -% \end{environment} -% \end{environment} -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-hi1> -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}% - [2007/01/04]% -\usepackage% - [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominilof \listoffigures -\dominilot \listoftables -\chapter{First} -\minilof \minilot -\begin{figure} -\caption{AAAA1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{AAAA2} -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\caption{TAAAA1} -\end{table} -\begin{table} -\caption{TAAAA2} -\end{table} -\chapter{Second} -\minilof \minilot -%%---------------------- -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. -% In this document, we use the environment forms. -% \or\relax -% Nous commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la -% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. -% \fi -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{mtchideinmainlof} -\begin{mtchideinmainlot} -\begin{figure} -\caption{BBBB1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{BBBB2} -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\caption{TBBBB1} -\end{table} -\begin{table} -\caption{TBBBB2} -\end{table} -\chapter{Third} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. -% In this document, we use the environment forms. -% \or\relax -% Nous terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la -% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements. -% \fi -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\end{mtchideinmainlot} -\end{mtchideinmainlof} -%%---------------------- -\minilof \minilot -\begin{figure} -\caption{CCCC1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{CCCC2} -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\caption{TCCCC1} -\end{table} -\begin{table} -\caption{TCCCC2} -\end{table} -\end{document} -%</mtc-hi1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} -% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlof} -% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But\virage{} it is also possible to use \emph{commands} in place of these environments: -% you place a \com{mtchideinmainlof} -% (or \com{mtchideinmainlot}) command in the first figure (or table) to -% hide, \emph{before} its caption and a \com{endmtchideinmainlof} (or \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) command at the end of -% the last figure (or table) to hide, \emph{after} its caption, like in this example file -% (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} -% \or\relax -% Mais\virage{} il est aussi possible d'utiliser des \emph{commandes} à~la place de ces environnements: vous placez une -% commande \com{mtchideinmainlof} (ou \com{mtchideinmainlot}) dans -% la première figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{avant} son caption et une commande \com{endmtchideinmainlof} -% (ou \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) à~la fin de la dernière figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{après} son caption, -% comme dans cet exemple de fichier (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-hi2> -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage% - [tight,listfiles]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominilof \listoffigures -\dominilot \listoftables -\chapter{First} -\minilof \minilot -\begin{figure} -\caption{AAAA1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{AAAA2} -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\caption{TAAAA1} -\end{table} -\begin{table} -\caption{TAAAA2} -\end{table} -\chapter{Second} -\minilof \minilot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\virage{} begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. -% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{before} the caption of the first ``hidden'' -% entry. -% \or\relax -% Nous\virage{} commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la -% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{avant} -% le caption de la \emph{première} entrée «~masquée~». -% \fi -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{figure} -\mtchideinmainlof % <-- -\caption{BBBB1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{BBBB2} -\endmtchideinmainlof % <-- -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\mtchideinmainlot % <-- -\caption{TBBBB1} -\end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\virage{} terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables. -% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{after} the caption of the \emph{last} ``hidden'' -% entry. -% \or\relax -% Nous\virage{} terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la -% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{après} -% le caption de la \emph{dernière} entrée «~masquée~». -% \fi -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{table} -\caption{TBBBB2} -\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- -\end{table} -\chapter{Third} -\minilof \minilot -\begin{figure} -\caption{CCCC1} -\end{figure} -\begin{figure} -\caption{CCCC2} -\end{figure} -\begin{table} -\caption{TCCCC1} -\end{table} -\begin{table} -\caption{TCCCC2} -\end{table} -\end{document} -%</mtc-hi2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% \flushcolumns -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This method, recommended while more delicate to apply, is much more reliable in delimiting the hiding domain: -% it solves the problem of the asynchronism between the writing of floats and the writing of the normal text. -% \or\relax -% Cette méthode, recommandée bien que plus délicate à~appliquer, est bien plus fiable dans la délimitation du domaine de -% masquage: elle résout le problème de l'asynchronisme entre l'écriture des éléments flottants et celle du texte normal. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (26) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Defining your own \usuffix{.mld} file}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% -% \or\relax -% \section{Définir votre propre fichier \usuffix{.mld}}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}% -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. -% The simplest way to alter some -% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \com{renewcommand} or better via -% \com{mtcsettitle}. -% If you really want to have your own \suffix{.mld} file, you copy an existing \suffix{.mld} file -% into one with a new name (not -% the name of a distributed \suffix{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \suffix{.mld} file and you can use it via -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}. You can always contact me to add this new \suffix{.mld} file to the -% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \emph{language}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files. -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo} de la -% distribution. La -% manière la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de redéfinir la commande correspondante via -% \com{renewcommand} ou mieux, via \com{mtcsettitle}. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier -% \suffix{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \suffix{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom -% (pas le nom d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \suffix{.mld} et -% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \com{mtcselectlanguage}. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau -% fichier \suffix{.mld} à~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires -% \emph{langue}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de définition de langues. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (27) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{environment}{abstract} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its -% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents, -% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section. -% This problem is detected by the \optd{hints} option and you should add -% a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| -% command after your \env{abstract} environment. -% \or\relax -% Lorsque le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé avec son option -% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou similaire) est ajoutée dans la table des -% matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe du document définit \com{chapter}, sinon comme une section -% étoilée. Ce problème est détecté par l'option \optd{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}. -% \fi -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (28) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} -% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty} -% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (29) -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29} -% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.} -% \or\relax -% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29} -% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas alignés avec les sections, -% alors qu'ils le sont dans la table des matières principale.} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@part} -% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\l@section} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph} -% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax % -% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like -% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. -% -% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use -% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting. -% For the ``section'' (in the \class{report} and \class{book} classes) and lower levels, -% these commands are (\class{book} class, \xfile{book.cls}) by default: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| -% \end{quote} -% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The -% arguments of \com{@dottedtocline} are -% \begin{enumerate}[1)] -% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \dcnt{tocdepth} or \dcnt{minitocdepth}). -% \item the indentation. -% \item the width reserved for the section/subsection/\ldots\ number. -% \end{enumerate} -% In the standard \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article} classes~\cite{classes}, the dimensions -% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit -% depends on the current font. In the main table of contents, -% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence -% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries -% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in -% a non bold font (the default font choices are given in table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has -% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed. -% -% There are several solutions: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Redefine the \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} commands -% to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This -% redefinition must be performed in a package or via a command defined by a package or between \com{makeatletter} -% and \com{makeatother}, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in -% their names; you must use \com{renewcommand*} to redefine -% these commands. -% \item Use\virage{} the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} to change the indentation, with -% font independent units. But then see \emph{also} section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. -% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries -% in the minitocs, using the \com{mtcsetfont} command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or -% redefining the \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, -% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% -% Les entrées d'une table des matières sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que -% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc. -% -% Les niveaux «~partie~» et «~chapitre~» (et «~section~» pour un article) utilisent des -% commandes spécifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus élaborée. -% Pour les niveaux «~section~» (dans les classes \class{report} et \class{book}) et inférieurs, -% ces commandes sont (class \class{book}, \xfile{book.cls}) par défaut: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\ -% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}| -% \end{quote} -% qui seront appliquées dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs. Les -% arguments de \com{@dottedtocline} sont -% \begin{enumerate}[1)] -% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera comparée à~\dcnt{tocdepth} ou \dcnt{minitocdepth}); -% \item l'indentation; -% \item la largeur réservée pour le numéro de section/sous-section/\ldots -% \end{enumerate} -% Dans les classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}~\cite{classes}, les dimensions -% (deuxième et troisième arguments) sont données en unités «~em~», et cette unité -% dépend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des matières principale, les entrées de sections et de sous-sections -% sont écrites dans la \emph{même} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les -% minitocs, les entrées pour les sections sont écrites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections -% sont écrites dans une fonte non grasse (les choix par défaut pour ces fontes sont donnés dans -% le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un «~em~» a des tailles différentes -% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est altéré. -% -% Il y a plusieurs solutions: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Redéfinir les commandes \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} pour utiliser -% des unités indépendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette -% redéfinition doit être effectuée dans un paquetage ou via une commande définie dans un paquetage -% ou entre \com{makeatletter} -% et \com{makeatother}, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms; -% vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand*} pour redéfinir ces commandes. -% \item Utiliser\virage{} le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unités -% indépendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez \emph{aussi} la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. -% \item Utiliser la même fonte pour les entrées de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs, -% en utilisant la commande \com{mtcsetfont} (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou -% en redéfinissant les commandes \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont}, -% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} (voir le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Useful precautions with starred sectionning commands}\label{faq.30} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The\virage{} headers are not modified by \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} or \com{section*}; -% it is \emph{necessary} to use \com{markboth} or \com{markright} to get correct page headers for -% the current and following pages. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item If\virage{} you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{chapter*} or a \com{section*} command, you -% must use \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} or \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} -% \emph{after} the starred sectionning command. -% If you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{part*} command, the page number in the -% table of contents would be wrong, because \com{part*} implies a \com{clearpage} or a -% \com{cleardoublepage} before the first page of the part. Use the sequence -% \begin{quote}\small -% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage if openany option.|\\ -% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\ -% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]| -% \end{quote} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% \section{Précautions utiles avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées}\label{faq.30} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les\virage{} en-têtes ne sont pas modifiés par \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} ou \com{section*}; -% il est \emph{nécessaire} d'utiliser \com{markboth} ou \com{markright} pour obtenir des en-têtes de -% pages corrects pour la page courante et les suivantes. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item Si\virage{} vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande \com{chapter*} ou -% \com{section*} command, vous devez utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} ou -% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} \emph{après} la commande de sectionnement étoilée. -% Si vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande pour une commande \com{part*}, -% le numéro de page dans la table des matières serait erroné, car \com{part*} implique une commande -% \com{clearpage} ou \com{cleardoublepage} avant la première page de la partie. Utilisez la -% séquence -% \begin{quote}\small -% \com{cleardoublepage}\verb| % \clearpage si option openany.|\\ -% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\ -% \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]| -% \end{quote} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% -% ^^A (31) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with packages for captions}\label{faq.31} -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}} -% one of the \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, -% \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; now use a recent -% version of the -% \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), -% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or -% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used, -% it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package, because such packages alter (redefine) the -% commands listing figures and tables. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec des paquetages pour les captions}\label{faq.31}\ipack{caption}\ipack{caption2}\ipack{ccaption}\ipack{mcaption} -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}i -% l'un des paquetages \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}, -% \pack{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez -% maintenant une version récente du paquetage \upack{caption}.}~\cite{caption2}, (qui ont tous deux été écrits -% par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}), -% \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou -% \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car de tels paquetages altèrent (redéfinissent) -% les commandes de listage des figures et tableaux. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (32) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Bad interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} -% When the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} packages are used in a document -% of class \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, -% the chapter header ``Chapter'' does not appear on the first page of the chapter. -% -% This problem is fixed in version~\#44 of \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Mauvaise interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32} -% Lorsque les paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} sont utilisés dans un document -% dont la classe est \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, l'en-tête de chapitre «~Chapitre~» n'apparaît pas -% sur la première page du chapitre. -% -% Ce problème est corrigé dans la version~\#44 de \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (33) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{varsects} package}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} -% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects} -% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (34) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Initial font settings}\label{faq.34} -% The setting of the fonts in the mini-tables is a rather complex problem. If we take the parttocs as an example, -% there is a \com{ptcfont} font-command which is used for two purposes\footnote{The same remarks apply -% to the other mini-tables.}: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item First, to be used as default value for some other font-commands (like \com{ptcSPfont}). As its -% default value is used in the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, the value of these other -% commands is \emph{not altered} if you modify \com{ptcfont}. You must modify these commands one at a -% time. -% \item Second, it is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc, partlof or partlot to set an initial font command. -% Then each entry of the mini-table calls its own font command (like \com{ptcSPfont}). Thus, if you -% modify \com{ptcfont}, you can obtain a global effect on the fonts in the parttocs, partlofs, and -% partlots. So you can play with the various parameters of the fonts (family, shape, series, size), if -% you want fancy mini-tables; but it is rather difficult. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \lneed{6} -% In\Virage{} the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, we have a sequence of commands: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ -% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ -% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ -% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ -% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| -% \end{quote} -% to define some default fonts. But this sequence is executed only once. If you alter \com{ptcfont}, the modification is -% not applied to these font commands. The command \com{ptcfont} is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc. -% \com{ptcCfont} is invoked for each chapter entry in a parttoc (\com{ptcSfont} for each section entry, etc.). -% So \com{ptcfont} can be used to define some global characteristics for the fonts in the parttocs, while -% \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) can be used to customize the fonts for each level of entries. -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Note that if you say: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ -% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ -% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ -% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ -% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| -% \end{quote} -% after loading the \upack{minitoc} package, these font commands will be ``associated'' to \com{ptcfont}, hence if you -% modify \com{ptcfont} (by via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| or \com{renewcommand}), they will follow the -% modification. But if you modify one of these commands via \com{renewcommand} or -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} is an example), -% the association is broken. But you could be more clever by saying something like -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| -% \end{quote} -% to preserve the association and modify only some parameters of a minitoc font command. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% For levels above subsection (part, chapter and section), the fonts a more specific in general, but you can, of course, -% say something like \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| to make a similar association. -% You can even make other associations, like this: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|% for high sectionning levels:|\\ -% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ -% \verb|% for low sectionning levels:|\\ -% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ -% \verb|% then for each level:|\\ -% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| -% \end{quote} -% Then you can redefine \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| to act on several fonts in one step, but you must -% use \com{renewcommand}. You cannot act on \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| with \com{mtcsetfont}. -% -% Note that only the fonts for parttocs are used in the examples above; but, of course, the situation is the same for -% minitocs and secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| and \verb|\lowlevelsfont| are macro names that you can choice, they are not -% part of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax -% \section{Choix initiaux des fontes}\label{faq.34} -% Le choix des fontes dans les mini-tables est un problème assez compliqué. Si nous prenons par exemple les -% parttocs, il y~a une commande de fonte \com{ptcfont} qui est utilisée dans deux buts\,\footnote{Les mêmes -% remarques s'appliquent aux autres mini-tables.}: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Premièrement, pour être utilisée comme valeur par défaut pour quelques autres commandes de fontes (telles -% que \com{ptcSPfont}). Comme sa valeur par défaut est utilisée dans l'initialisation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}, la valeur de ces autres commandes \emph{n'est pas modifiée} si vous modifiez -% \com{ptcfont}. Vous devez modifiez ces commandes une à~la fois. -% \item Deuxièmement, elle est invoquée au début de chaque parttoc, partlof ou partlot pour établir une commande -% de fonte initiale. Puis chaque entrée de la mini-table appelle sa propre commande de fonte (comme -% \com{ptcSPfont}). Donc, si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont}, vous pouvez obtenir un effet global sur les -% fontes dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. Vous pouvez ainsi jouer avec les divers paramètres des -% fontes (famille, forme, graisse, taille), si vous voulez des mini-tables enjolivées; mais ceci est assez -% difficile. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \lneed{6} -% Dans\Virage{} l'initialisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, nous avons une séquence de commandes: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs)|\\ -% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures)|\\ -% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures)|\\ -% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables)|\\ -% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables)| -% \end{quote} -% pour définir quelques fontes par défaut. Mais cette séquence n'est exécutée qu'une seule fois. Si vous altérez -% \com{ptcfont}, la modification n'est pas appliquée à~ces commandes de fontes. La commande \com{ptcfont} est -% invoquée au début de chaque parttoc. \com{ptcCfont} est invoquée pour chaque entrée de chapitre dans une parttoc -% (\com{ptcSfont} pour chaque entrée de section, etc.). Ainsi \com{ptcfont} peut être utilisée pour définir -% quelques caractéristiques globales pour les fontes dans les parttocs, tandis que \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) peuvent -% être utilisées pour personnaliser les fontes pour chaque niveau d'entrées. -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Notez que si vous dites: -% \begin{quote} -% \icom{def}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections)|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs)|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs)|\\ -% \icom{plffont}\verb|\def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures)|\\ -% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures)|\\ -% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables)|\\ -% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables)| -% \end{quote} -% après avoir chargé le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ces commandes de fontes seront «~associées~» à~\com{ptcfont}, -% donc si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont} (par une commande \com{renewcommand} ou via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}|), -% elles suivront la modification. Mais si vous modifiez l'une de ces commandes via -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} est un exemple) ou \com{renewcommand}, -% l'association est rompue. Mais vous pourriez agir plus subtilement en disant quelque chose comme -% \begin{quote} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}| -% \end{quote} -% pour préserver l'association et modifier seulement quelques paramètres d'une commande de fonte minitoc. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Pour les niveaux au-dessus de la sous-section (partie, chapitre et section), les fontes sont plus spécifiques en -% général, mais vous pouvez, bien sûr, utiliser une définition telle que -% \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| pour faire une -% association similaire. Vous pouvez même faire d'autres associations, comme ceci: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|% pour les hauts niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ -% \icom{def}\verb| \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\ -% \verb|% pour les bas niveaux de sectionnement:|\\ -% \verb| \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\ -% \verb|% puis pour chaque niveau:|\\ -% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb| \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb| \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\ -% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb| \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\ -% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb| \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}| -% \end{quote} -% Puis vous pouvez redéfinir \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou \verb|\lowlevelsfont| pour agir sur plusieurs fontes en une -% seule fois, mais vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand}. Vous ne pouvez pas agir sur \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou -% \verb|\lowlevelsfont| avec \com{mtcsetfont}. -% -% Notez que seules les fontes pour les parttocs ont été utilisées dans les exemples ci-dessus; mais, bien sûr, la -% situation est la même pour les minitocs et les secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| et \verb|\lowlevelsfont| sont des -% noms de macros que vous pouvez choisir, ils ne font pas partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (35) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \KOMAScript{} classes}\label{faq.35} -% If\imess{I0043} a \KOMAScript{} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible with \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or -% \class{scrartcl}), is used, some class options may cause problems with the \upack{minitoc} package, because these -% options add chapter or section entries in the table of contents. See section~\vref{special.entries}. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec les classes \KOMAScript}\label{faq.35} -% Si\imess{I0043} une classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible avec \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} ou -% \class{scrartcl}), est utilisée, certaines options de la classe peuvent poser des problèmes avec le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}, car elles ajoutent des entrées de chapitre ou de section dans la table des matières. Voir la -% section~\vref{special.entries}. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (36) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \uclass{jura} class or the \upack{alphanum} package}\label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} -% The \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} class loads the \pack{alphanum} package, -% which redefines the sectionning structure in a -% non-standard way, after the loading of the \class{report} class. -% This class and this package are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{jura} ou le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}% -% \label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum} -% La classe \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} charge le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, -% qui redéfinit la structure de sectionnement d'une -% manière non-standard, après le chargement de la classe \class{report}. -% Cette classe et ce paquetage sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (37) -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \usuffix{.mld} files and the \upack{babel} package}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} -% If you are using the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, you can automatize the loading of the -% \suffix{.mld} file by adding some code in the preamble of your document, like this: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ -% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{language1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{language2}\verb|}}}| -% \end{quote} -% where \emph{language1} is the language name for \pack{babel} and \emph{language2} the language name for -% \upack{minitoc}; there are often identical, but there are exceptions (when you use a locally customized \suffix{.mld} -% file, for instance). -% \or\relax -% \section{Les fichiers \usuffix{.mld} et le paquetage \upack{babel}}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld} -% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, vous pouvez automatiser le chargement du -% fichier \suffix{.mld} en ajoutant du code dans le préambule de votre document, comme ceci: -% \begin{quote} -% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\ -% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb| \addto\captions|\emph{langue1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{langue2}\verb|}}}| -% \end{quote} -% où \emph{langue1} est le nom de langue pour \pack{babel} et \emph{langue2} le nom de langue pour \upack{minitoc}; -% ils sont souvent identiques, mais il y~a des exceptions (lorsque vous utilisez un fichier \suffix{.mld} adapté -% localement, par exemple). -% \fi -% -% ^^A (38) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} -% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap} -% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (39) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} -% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap} -% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (40) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{romannum} package}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} -% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the numbering of -% the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum} -% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) -% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (41) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} -% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the -% sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders} -% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) -% les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (42) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} -% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the -% numbering of the sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec} -% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) -% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (43) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{captcont} package}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} -% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the caption -% commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont} -% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) -% les commandes pour les captions. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (44) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Vertical spaces (gaps) for parttocs, partlofs, and partlots titles}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} -% These vertical gaps were hard-coded like for the chapter -% heads in the \class{book} and \class{report} document classes. -% The values were 50pt and 40pt, but some users want -% to adjust them for the titles of the part-level mini-tables. -% Since version~\#45, these gaps are defined by \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} -% and \com{mtcgapafterheads}, with these defaults values. These -% commands apply globally to parttocs, partlofs and partlots. -% They are \emph{commands}, \virage\emph{not} dimensions, so they must be -% modified via \com{renewcommand} (but \emph{not} via \com{setlength}). -% An example of use is given in the \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file:\label{mtc-gap.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Espacements verticaux (\emph{gaps}) pour les titres des parttocs, -% partlofs et partlots}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps} -% Ces sauts verticaux (\emph{gaps}) étaient codés «~en dur~» comme pour -% les têtes de chapitres dans les classes de document \class{book} -% et \class{report}. Les valeurs étaient 50pt et 40pt, mais -% certains utilisateurs désirent les ajuster pour les titres -% des mini-tables au niveau partie. -% Depuis la version~\#45, ces sauts sont définis par \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} -% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}, avec ces valeurs par défaut. -% Ces commandes s'appliquent globalement aux parttocs, partlofs et partlots. -% Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \virage\emph{pas} des dimensions, -% donc elles doivent être modifiées via \com{renewcommand} -% (mais \emph{pas} via \com{setlength}). -% Un exemple d'utilisation est donné dans le fichier document \exam{mtc-gap.tex}:\label{mtc-gap.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-gap> -\documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We use the \pack{vruler} package (by \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) to display a vertical ruler showing the position of the titles: -% \or\relax -% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{vruler} (de \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) pour placer une échelle verticale montrant la position -% des titres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang) -\usepackage[english2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\setvruler[1cm][0][10][3][0][0pt][0pt][0pt][] % with vruler package -\doparttoc \faketableofcontents -\part{First part} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A normal parttoc, with the normal gaps before and after it. -% \or\relax -% Une parttoc normale, avec des sauts verticaux normaux avant et après elle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\parttoc -\chapter{First chapter of first part} \chapter{Second chapter of first part} -\part{Second part} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We set large gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. -% \or\relax -% Nous forçons de plus grands sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{100pt} -\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{80pt} -\parttoc -\chapter{First chapter of second part} \chapter{Second chapter of second part} -\part{Third part} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We set small gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc. -% \or\relax -% Nous forçons de plus petits sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{20pt} -\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{10pt} -\parttoc -\chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part} -\end{document} -%</mtc-gap> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (45) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Vertical spacing before the bottom rule of a minitable}\label{faq.45} -% The little spacing between a minitable and its bottom rule is implemented as a vertical kern that should -% be sufficient to allow the -% descending parts of the letters of the last entry of the mini-table. The values should depend on -% the line spacing and of the font size. They are defined as macros that you can adjust by redefining them via -% \com{renewcommand}. The (empirical) default values are given in table~\vref{t+kernafters}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Espacement vertical avant le filet inférieur d'une minitable}\label{faq.45} -% Le petit espacement entre une minitable et le filet qui est en-dessous d'elle est réalisé par un crênage -% vertical qui devrait suffire pour les jambages des lettres de la dernière entrée de la -% minitable. Les valeurs devraient dépendre de l'interlignage et de la taille de la fonte. -% Elles sont définies comme des macros que vous pouvez ajuster en les redéfinissant via \com{renewcommand}. -% La table~\vref{t+kernafters} donne les valeurs par défaut (empiriques). -% \fi -% \begin{table}[!htb] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption{Kernings before minitable bottom rules}\label{t+kernafters} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default value}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \or\relax -% \caption{Crênage avant le filet inférieur des minitables}\label{t+kernafters} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Valeur par défaut}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ -% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \fi -% \end{table} -% -% ^^A (46) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Another interaction between the \upack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc} packages}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} -% \emph{I~encountered an interaction between \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}. -% I want to force \upack{minitoc} to not display the page numbers, but because -% of \pack{tocloft} it doesn't. Here is an example code:} -% \else\relax -% \section{Une autre interaction entre les paquetages \upack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft} -% \emph{J'ai rencontré une interaction entre \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}. -% Je veux forcer \upack{minitoc} à~ne pas afficher les numéros de pages, -% mais, à~cause de \pack{tocloft}, il n'y arrive pas. Voici -% un exemple de code:} -% \fi\relax -% \begin{quote} -% \com{documentclass}\verb|[12pt,a4paper]{book}|\\ -% \com{usepackage}\verb|{tocloft}|\\ -% \com{usepackage}\verb|{minitoc}|\\ -% \ienv{document}\verb|\begin{document}|\\ -% \com{frontmatter}\\ -% \com{dominitoc}\com{tableofcontents}\\ -% \com{mainmatter}\\ -% \com{chapter}\verb|{Chapter}|\\ -% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ -% \verb|\chapter{Second Chapter}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|\\ -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{minitoc}{off}|\\ -% \com{minitoc}\\ -% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\ -% \verb|\end{document}| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \emph{If I comment the line loading the \pack{tocloft} package, -% I~will get a minitoc without page numbers as I~wanted.} -% \else\relax -% \emph{Si je commente la ligne chargeant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, -% j'obtiens bien une minitoc sans numéros de pages comme désiré.} -% \fi\relax -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% When using together \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}, the \pack{tocloft} package must be -% loaded first, and its commands take precedence to format the entries -% in the TOC (and in minitocs). To suppress the page numbers, you should try -% the \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| command (from \pack{tocloft}), which is described -% in the \xfile{tocloft.pdf} documentation~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} is the level -% of entry (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). There are similar remarks about -% font related commands. -% -% The \pack{tocloft} package is more specialized in that job than \upack{minitoc}, so if it is -% loaded, \upack{minitoc} uses the \pack{tocloft} tools. -% There is the corrected example (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): -% \else\relax -% Lors de l'utilisation simultanée de \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}, -% le paquetage \pack{tocloft} doit être chargé le premier, et ses -% commandes prennent le pas pour mettre en forme les -% entrées dans la table des matières (et les minitocs). Pour -% supprimer les numéros de pages, vous devriez essayer la -% commande \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| (de \pack{tocloft}), qui est décrite dans la documentation -% \xfile{tocloft.pdf}~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} -% est le niveau de l'entrée (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). -% Il y a des remarques similaires sur les commandes concernant les fontes. -% -% Le paquetage \pack{tocloft} est davantage spécialisé dans -% ce travail que \upack{minitoc}, donc s'il est chargé, \upack{minitoc} -% se sert des outils de \pack{tocloft}. Voici l'exemple -% corrigé (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}): -% \fi\relax -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-tlo> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must load \pack{tocloft} \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous devons charger \pack{tocloft} \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi\relax -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{tocloft} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the global font for the minitoc entries: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons la fonte globale pour les entrées des minitocs: -% \fi\relax -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small} -\frontmatter -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the section entries in the minitocs, we suppress the page numbers and change the font -% by using commands from the \pack{tocloft} package: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, nous supprimons les numéros de pages et changeons la fonte en -% utilisant des commandes venant du paquetage \pack{tocloft}: -% \fi\relax -% \begin{macrocode} -\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} -\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small} -\mainmatter -\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc -\section{Section A} \section{Section B} -\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc -\section{Section A} \section{Section B} -\end{document} -%</mtc-tlo> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A (47) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} -% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) -% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, -% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption} -% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé, -% il doit être chargé -% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, -% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème. -% \fi -% -% ^^A (48) -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with the \upack{flowfram} package}\label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} -% The \pack{flowfram}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, which -% has its own system of minitocs, is hence \emph{incompatible} -% with \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}% -% \label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram} -% Le paquetage \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}}\pack{flowfram}, qui a son propre -% système de minitocs, est donc \emph{incompatible} -% avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Mémento}\label{c+memento} -% \fi -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \minilot -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[!hbtp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&Short extensions for auxiliary files.\\ -% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\ -% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ -% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Presence of leaders (dotted lines).\\ -% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting -% outside of their section. Useful if you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\ -% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \com{cite} commands -% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\ -% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Lists the minitoc auxiliary files -% into \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ -% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Adds hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} -% file. Useful to detect some problems. Option \opt{nohints} is inadvisable.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in -% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \loptd{english}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[!hbtp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\ -% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\ -% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes \KOMAScript).\\ -% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Présence de points de conduite.\\ -% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Empêche les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) de dériver en dehors de -% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\ -% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \com{cite} dans les titres de -% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\ -% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Liste les fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc -% dans \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\ -% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% Utile pour détecter certains problèmes. L'option \opt{nohints} est déconseillée.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}. -% Défaut: \loptd{english}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{General commands}\label{t+SUC} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{faketableofcontents}&Replaces \com{tableofcontents} -% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\ -% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \com{listoffigures} -% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\ -% \com{fakelistoftables}&Replaces \com{listoftables} -% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\ -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Loads \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{offset}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Changes the offset for some mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\ -% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\ -% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcskipamount}&Length of \com{mtcskip}. Default: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ -% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\ -% \com{tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\ -% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ -% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\ -% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\ -% \com{undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes générales}\label{t+SUC} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{faketableofcontents}&Remplace \com{tableofcontents} -% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des matières mais pas de table des matières principale.\\ -% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \com{listoffigures} -% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\ -% \com{fakelistoftables}&Remplace \com{listoftables} -% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\ -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Charge \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour sélectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{déplacement}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Change le déplacement pour certaines mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\ -% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de -% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Redéfinit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\ -% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ -% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ -% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{chaîne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\ -% \com{mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \com{mtcskip}. Défaut: \com{bigskipamount}.\\ -% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut.\\ -% \com{tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées.\\ -% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ -% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\ -% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page). Défaut.\\ -% \com{undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page).\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Part level commands}\label{t+SUC-P-a} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \texttt{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% -% &After each \com{part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2.\\ -% &Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ -% \com{ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{ptcoffset}&Horizontal offset for parttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{plfoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{pltoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\ -% \com{ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ -% &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ -% \com{ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \com{ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ -% &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ -% \com{ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{plfSfont}&Font for partlof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{pltSfont}&Font for partlot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ -% \com{plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ -% \com{plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ -% \com{ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ -% &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ -% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Vertical gap before part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 50pt\\ -% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Vertical gap after part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 40pt\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the -% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{partXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dopartXXX} -% commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, -% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{ptcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{partlof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une parttoc est -% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlof est -% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% -% &Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Profondeur des parttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ -% &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ -% \com{ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{ptcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les parttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{plfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{pltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\ -% \com{ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\ -% &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\ -% \com{ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées chapitres.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \com{ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sections.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\ -% &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\ -% \com{ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{plfSfont}&Fonte pour les partlofs (sous-figures). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{pltSfont}&Fonte pour les partlots (sous-tables). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\ -% \com{plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\ -% \com{plttitle}&Titre des partlots. Défaut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\ -% \com{ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\ -% &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\ -% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Saut vertical avant le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 50pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Saut vertical après le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 40pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la -% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{partXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, -% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{ptcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Chapter level commands}\label{t+SUC-C} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% -% &After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ -% \com{mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcoffset}&Horizontal offset for minitocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mlfoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mltoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\ -% \com{mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \com{mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mlfSfont}&Font for minilof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mltSfont}&Font for minilot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ -% \com{mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ -% \com{mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ -% \com{mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the -% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{miniXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, -% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{mtcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Profondeur des minitocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ -% &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ -% \com{mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minitocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mlfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\ -% \com{mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sections.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \com{mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mlfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ -% \com{mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ -% \com{mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ -% \com{mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la -% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{miniXXX}, -% global pour les commandes \ucom{dominiXXX}. -% Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, -% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{mtcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Section level commands}\label{t+SUC-S} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}% -% &After each \com{section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\ -% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ -% \com{stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{stcoffset}&Horizontal offset for secttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{slfoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{sltoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\ -% \com{stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{slfSfont}&Font for sectlof (subfigures).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{sltSfont}&Font for sectlot (subtables).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\ -% \com{slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\ -% \com{slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\ -% \com{stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\ -% &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the -% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{sectXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered, -% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{stcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes au niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une secttoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\ -% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Profondeur des secttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\ -% &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\ -% \ucom{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ -% \com{stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\ -% \com{stcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les secttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{slfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{sltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\ -% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\ -% &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\ -% \com{stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\ -% \com{slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{slfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{sltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\ -% \com{stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\ -% \com{slftitle}&Titre des sectlofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\ -% \com{slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\ -% \com{stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\ -% &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la -% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré, -% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\ -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{stcfont}.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \ncom{ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\ -% \ncom{mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\ -% \ncom{stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\ -% \ncom{plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\ -% \ncom{mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\ -% \ncom{slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\ -% \ncom{pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\ -% \ncom{mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\ -% \ncom{sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Vertical kerning between a parttoc and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Vertical kerning between a partlof and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Vertical kerning between a partlot and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Vertical kerning between a minitoc and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernafterminilof}&Vertical kerning between a minilof and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernafterminilot}&Vertical kerning between a minilot and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Vertical kerning between a secttoc and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Vertical kerning between a sectlof and its bottom rule.\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Vertical kerning between a sectlot and its bottom rule.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In -% articles, parttocs have rules.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \ncom{ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\ -% \ncom{mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\ -% \ncom{stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\ -% \ncom{plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\ -% \ncom{mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\ -% \ncom{slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\ -% \ncom{pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\ -% \ncom{mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\ -% \ncom{sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une parttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Crênage vertical entre une partlof et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Crênage vertical entre une partlot et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Crênage vertical entre une minitoc et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernafterminilof}&Crênage vertical entre une minilof et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernafterminilot}&Crênage vertical entre une minilot et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une secttoc et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlof et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlot et son filet inférieur.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par défaut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont -% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\ -% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\ -% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\ -% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\ -% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\ -% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\ -% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\ -% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\ -% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour les numéros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les parttocs.\\ -% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlofs.\\ -% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlots.\\ -% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minitocs.\\ -% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilofs.\\ -% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilots.\\ -% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les secttocs.\\ -% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\ -% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlots.\\ -% \midrule -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par défaut, les numéros de pages sont présents.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commands for mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\ -% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\ -% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\ -% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\ -% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\ -% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\ -% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a parttoc file.\\ -% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlof file.\\ -% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlot file.\\ -% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a parttoc file.\\ -% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlof file.\\ -% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlot file.\\ -% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\ -% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\ -% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\ -% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\ -% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilof.\\ -% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilot.\\ -% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\ -% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilof.\\ -% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilot.\\ -% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minitoc file.\\ -% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilof file.\\ -% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilot file.\\ -% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minitoc file.\\ -% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilof file.\\ -% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilot file.\\ -% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\ -% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\ -% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\ -% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\ -% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\ -% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\ -% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\ -% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\ -% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\ -% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a secttoc file.\\ -% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlof file.\\ -% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlot file.\\ -% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a secttoc file.\\ -% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlof file.\\ -% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlot file.\\ -% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\ -% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\ -% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ -% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \null\hspace*{-.35em}\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth+.35em}{@{}llZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\ -% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\ -% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\ -% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une parttoc.\\ -% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlof.\\ -% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlot.\\ -% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ -% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ -% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ -% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\ -% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\ -% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\ -% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\ -% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\ -% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\ -% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\ -% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\ -% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\ -% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une minitoc.\\ -% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilof.\\ -% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilot.\\ -% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ -% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ -% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ -% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\ -% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\ -% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\ -% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\ -% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\ -% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\ -% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\ -% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\ -% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\ -% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une secttoc.\\ -% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlof.\\ -% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlot.\\ -% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ -% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ -% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ -% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\ -% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\ -% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\ -% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\ -% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\ -% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\ -% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Level}}\\ -% \cmidrule(l){3-5} -% & &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\ -% \midrule -% table of contents&preparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% list of figures &preparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% list of tables &preparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% all &preparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p}, -% which specifies the position of the -% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the -% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered, -% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes de préparation et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\ -% \cmidrule(l){3-5} -% & &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\ -% \midrule -% table des matières&préparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% liste des figures &préparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% liste des tableaux &préparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% &insertion &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\ -% \midrule -% tous &préparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p}, -% qui spécifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de -% préparation, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour aligné à~gauche -% (défaut), -% \texttt{[c]}~pour centré, \texttt{[r]}~pour aligné à~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ -% \com{decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ -% \com{decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ -% \com{incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\ -% \com{incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\ -% \com{incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\ -% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{part*} in the ToC.\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{chapter*} in the ToC.\\ -% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{section*} in the ToC.\\ -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Adjusts the entry for the glossary in the ToC.\\ -% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Adjusts the entry for the index in the ToC.\\ -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Adjusts the entry for the nomenclature in the ToC.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environment to hide entries in the main ToC.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ -% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ -% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: recommended form.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\ -% \com{decrementptc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ -% \com{decrementmtc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ -% \com{decrementstc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ -% \com{incrementptc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\ -% \com{incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\ -% \com{incrementstc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\ -% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{part*} dans la TdM.\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{chapter*} dans la TdM.\\ -% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{section*} dans la TdM.\\ -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Ajuste l'entrée pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\ -% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Ajoute l'entrée pour l'index dans la TdM.\\ -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Ajoute l'entrée pour la nomenclature dans la TdM.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la TdM principale.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ -% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\ -% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ -% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}. -% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\ -% &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: forme recommandée.} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tpb] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Classes and packages needing some precautions with \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} -% \centering -% \bgroup\mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} -% \toprule -% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Names}&\textbf{Author(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Reference(s)}\\ -% \midrule -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} and\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, and \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lass.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}ackage.}\\ -% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Any class not defining the main standard sectionning commands is -% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.}\\ -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[tpb] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Classes et paquetages nécessitant quelques précautions avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs} -% \centering -% \bgroup\mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}} -% \toprule -% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Noms}&\textbf{Auteur(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Référence(s)}\\ -% \midrule -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} et \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\ -% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} et\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn} et \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ -% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\ -% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lasse.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}aquetage.}\\ -% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Toute classe ne définissant pas les principales commandes de sectionnement standard -% est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.}\\ -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[tbph] -% \capstart -% \caption{Checking if inside a minitable}\label{t+ifinside} -% \medskip -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{table}[tbph] -% \capstart -% \caption{Commands for polymorphic entries}\label{t+polym}\index{polymorphic entry} -% \medskip -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ -% \midrule -% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ -% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ -% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \else\relax -% \begin{table}[tbph] -% \capstart -% \caption{Tester si à~l'intérieur d'une minitable}\label{t+ifinside} -% \medskip -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% \begin{table}[tbph] -% \capstart -% \caption{Commandes pour des entrées polymorphes}\label{t+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} -% \medskip -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\ -% \midrule -% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\ -% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\ -% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{table}[btp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\ -% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\ -% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{These commands have no effect (except a harmless warning).} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% \begin{table}[btp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes obsolètes}\label{t+SUC-O} -% \centering -% \bgroup -% \mysize -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première partie.\\ -% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro du premier chapitre.\\ -% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première section.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Ces commandes n'ont aucun effet (excepté un avertissement bénin).} -% \end{tabularx} -% \egroup -% \end{table} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Examples of documents}\label{c+exdocs} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Exemples de documents}\label{c+exdocs} -% \fi -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \minitoc -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} -% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% -% \raggedcolumns -% \mtcskip -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This chapter shows the code of some examples of documents. -% Some are extracted or derived from real documents, others are just demonstrations to illustrate problems or features. -% The code of some specific example files has been shown earlier: -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}, -% and \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}, -% \or\relax -% Ce chapitre montre le code de quelques exemples de documents. -% Certains ont été extraits ou inspirés de documents réels, les autres sont de simples démonstrations pour illustrer -% des problèmes ou des possibilités. -% Le code de fichiers d'exemples spécifiques a déjà été montré: -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}), -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}), -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}), -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}) et -% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} is often used to provide filling text. -% \or\relax -% Notez que le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} est souvent utilisé pour fournir du texte de bourrage. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2c.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2c.tex}}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a two columns layout. -% The layout uses the \pack{multicol} standard package~\cite{multicol} and its \env{multicols} environment. -% We set \com{mtcindent} to zero. We test several combinations. If a minitoc is long enough to be splitted on -% both columns, the result may be funny. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document avec une mise en page sur deux -% colonnes. -% La mise en page utilise le paquetage standard \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} et son environnement \env{multicols}. -% Nous forçons \com{mtcindent} à~zéro. Si une minitoc est assez longue pour se répartir sur les deux colonnes, -% le résultat peut être bizarre. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-2c> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% - {report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{multicol} -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage% - [tight,latin,listfiles]{minitoc} -\usepackage[latin]{babel} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Two first chapters with a standard chapter head, a minitoc on one full width column, then the body of the chapter -% on two columns: -% \or\relax -% Deux premiers chapitres avec un en-tête standard, une minitoc sur la largeur complète, puis le corps du chapitre sur -% deux colonnes: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Primum capitulum} -\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] -\section{Prima sectio} -\lipsum[1-2] -\section{Secunda sectio} -\lipsum[3-4] -\end{multicols} -\chapter{Secundum capitulum} -\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc] -\section{Prima sectio} -\lipsum[5-6] -\section{Secunda sectio} -\lipsum[7-8] -\section{Tertia sectio} -\lipsum[9-10] -\end{multicols} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A third chapter entirely on two columns, so the chapter head and the minitoc are in the first column: -% \or\relax -% Un troisième chapitre entièrement sur deux colonnes, dont l'en-tête du chapitre et la minitoc sont -% dans la première colonne: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{multicols}{2} -\chapter{Tertium capitulum} -\minitoc -\section{Prima sectio} -\lipsum[11-12] -\section{Secunda sectio} -\lipsum[13-14] -\section{Tertia sectio} -\lipsum[15-16] -\end{multicols} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A fourth chapter, with the chapter head on one column, and the minitoc and the chapter body on two columns (the -% minitoc is in the first column): -% \or\relax -% Un quatrième chapitre, avec l'en-tête de chapitre sur une seule colonne, mais la minitoc et le corps du chapitre -% sur deux colonnes (la minitoc est dans la première colonne): -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Quadrum capitulum} -\begin{multicols}{2} -\minitoc -\section{Prima sectio} -\lipsum[16-17] -\section{Secunda sectio} -\lipsum[18-19] -\section{Tertia sectio} -\lipsum[20-21] -\end{multicols} -\end{document} -%</mtc-2c> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} -% This document tests the \xfile{french2.mld} minitoc language definition file -% (section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) and its -% supporting code in the \upack{minitoc} package. First, the preamble of the document uses the \lopt{french2} -% minitoc package language option\footnote{The \pack{franc}, \pack{frnew} and \pack{mypatches} packages are local -% additions, provided with the \upack{minitoc} package documentation sources.}: -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} -% Ce document teste le fichier minitoc de définition de langue \xfile{french2.mld} -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) et le code -% qui en assure le support dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tout d'abord, le préambule du document utilise -% l'option de langue \lopt{french2} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}\,\footnote{Les paquetages \pack{franc}, -% \pack{frnew} et \pack{mypatches} sont des additions locales, fournies avec les sources de la documentation -% française du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-2nd> -%% Test de french2.mld: -%% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie? -%% compilez 3 fois. -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-2nd.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage[french2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc} -\usepackage[french]{babel} -\usepackage{franc,frnew} -\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} -\usepackage{mypatches} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test if there is only two parts: if yes, we will use ``seconde''. -% Else (three or more parts), we will use ``deuxième''. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons s'il y a seulement deux parties: si oui, nous utiliserons «~seconde~». -% Sinon (trois parties ou plus), nous utiliserons «~deuxième~». -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifmtcsecondpart -Il n'y a que 2 parties: seconde. -\else -Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième. -\fi -\clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The body of the document, with two parts: -% \or\relax -% Le corps du document, avec deux parties: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\doparttoc -\faketableofcontents -\part{P1} -\parttoc -\chapter{P1C1} -\chapter{P1C2} -\part{P2} -\parttoc -\chapter{P2C1} -\chapter{P2C2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you want also a third part, comment out this line and recompile 3~times: -% \or\relax -% Si vous voulez aussi une troisième partie, commentez la ligne suivante et recompilez 3~fois: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% Commentez la ligne suivante puis recompilez 2 ou 3 fois. -\end{document} -\part{P3} -\parttoc -\chapter{P3C1} -\chapter{P3C2} -\end{document} -%</mtc-2nd> -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Observe the titles of the parttocs when the document has two then three parts. Note the changes after each -% compilation. You can play by adding and removing parts. It would be interesting to add a starred part, with -% starred chapters, at the beginning of the document, this part and these chapters having their entries in the TOC. -% For instance, try to add the following lines after \com{faketableofcontents}: -% \or\relax -% Observez les titres des parttocs lorsque le document a deux puis trois parties. Notez les changements après -% chaque compilation. Vous pouvez jouer en ajoutant et enlevant des parties. Il serait intéressant d'ajouter une -% partie étoilée, avec des chapitres étoilés, au début du document, cette partie et ces chapitres ayant leurs -% entrées dans la table des matières. Par exemple, essayez d'ajouter les lignes suivantes -% après \com{faketableofcontents}: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{part*}\verb|{Partie étoilée}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[Partie étoilée]|\\ -% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[-2] % IMPORTANT <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<|\\ -% \com{parttoc}\\ -% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Premier chapitre étoilé}|\\ -% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[Premier chapitre étoilé]|\\ -% \verb|\chapter*{Second chapitre étoilé}|\\ -% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[Second chapitre étoilé]| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% and you will see how the parttoc of the new starred part is titled. -% \or\relax -% et vous verrez comment la parttoc de la nouvelle partie étoilée est titrée. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-3co.tex} document file}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} -% This document shows how to prepare a minitoc on three columns, -% with some modifications of the code the \env{mtc@verse} environment. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-3co.tex}}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} -% Ce document montre comment préparer une minitoc sur trois -% colonnes, grâce à~quelques modifications du code de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we will use a wide paper format (A3) to set the text -% on two columns and the main TOC on three columns, with the -% \pack{multitoc} package~\cite{multitoc} (by \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous utiliserons un format de papier large (A3) -% pour composer le texte sur deux colonnes et la table des -% matières principale sur trois colonnes, avec le paquetage -% \pack{multitoc}~\cite{multitoc} (de \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-3co> -\documentclass[oneside]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}% - [2007/02/19] -\usepackage[a3paper]{geometry} -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage{multicol} -\usepackage[toc]{multitoc} -\renewcommand{\multicolumntoc}{3} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\endmtc@verse} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we load the \upack{minitoc} package, set some -% parameters and define the number of columns for the -% minitocs. We alter the \env{mtc@verse} environment to add a -% \env{multicols} environment\footnote{Some vertical adjustments are necessary.}: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% établissons quelques paramètres et définissons le nombre de -% colonnes pour les minitocs. -% Nous altérons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse} pour lui -% ajouter un environnement \env{multicols}\,\footnote{Quelques ajustements verticaux sont nécessaires.}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil} -\newcommand{\multicolumnmtc}{3} -\makeatletter -\let\SV@mtc@verse\mtc@verse -\let\SV@endmtc@verse\endmtc@verse -\def\mtc@verse#1{\SV@mtc@verse#1\removelastskip% - \begin{multicols}{\multicolumnmtc}\raggedcolumns\leavevmode\unskip - \vskip -1.5ex \vskip -1\baselineskip} -\def\endmtc@verse{\end{multicols}\SV@endmtc@verse} -\makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin the document, preparing the minitocs and the main TOC. -% The (first) chapter begins with its minitoc, then the text -% on two columns. We use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} to provide filling text; -% the section number is used to select a \emph{lipsum} paragraph. -% \or\relax -% Nous commençons le document, en préparant les minitocs et la -% table des matières principale. Le (premier) chapitre commence -% avec sa minitoc, puis le texte sur deux colonnes. Nous -% utilisons le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} pour -% fournir du texte de bourrage; -% le numéro de section est utilisé pour choisir un paragraphe \emph{lipsum}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc -\tableofcontents -\chapter{First chapter} -\minitoc -\begin{multicols}{2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We use a lot of sections, to have a minitoc large enough to -% use the three columns. A subsection with a long title gives -% a good result (we have used \com{mtcsetformat} to avoid hyphenations). -% \or\relax -% Nous utilisons beaucoup de sections, pour avoir une minitoc -% suffisamment grande pour utiliser les trois colonnes. Une -% sous-section avec un titre long donne un bon résultat (nous avons utilisé \com{mtcsetformat} pour éviter les -% coupures). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{First section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Tenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Eleventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twelfth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fourteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Sixteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Seventeenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Eighteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Nineteenth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twentieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\subsection{A very long subsection title, for the fun in -a multicolumn table of contents} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Twenty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirtieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Thirty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fortieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Forty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fiftieth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-first section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-second section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-third section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-fourth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-fifth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-sixth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-seventh section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-eighth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fifty-ninth section} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\end{multicols} -\clearpage -\end{document} -%</mtc-3co> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-add.tex} document file}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-add.tex}}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows how to add special entries in the table of contents, and the interaction with the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre comment ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, ainsi que l'interaction avec -% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-add> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} -%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{url} -\usepackage{tocbibind} -\usepackage{makeidx} -\makeatletter -\newif\ifscan@allowed -\scan@allowedtrue -\makeatother -\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% -\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak - \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Load the \upack{minitoc} package, or \pack{mtcoff}. -% \or\relax -% Charger le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ou \pack{mtcoff}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc} -%% \usepackage{mtcoff} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeindex -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call the mini-table preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons les commandes de préparation des mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We are using the \pack{tocbibind} package to add special entries in the table of contents, so we must take -% the precautions specified in section~\vref{special.entries}: -% \or\relax -% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, -% donc nous devons prendre les précautions spécifiées dans la section~\vref{special.entries}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\tableofcontents \mtcaddchapter -\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter -\listoftables \mtcaddchapter -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For a chapter, we want a minitoc, a minilof and a minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Pour un chapitre, nous voulons une minitoc, une minilof et une minitoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{First chapter}\index{chapter!normal} -\minitoc \mtcskip -\minilof \mtcskip -\minilot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the text of the chapter, with sections, figures and tables: -% \or\relax -% Puis le texte du chapitre, avec des figures et des tableaux: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{First section} - -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} - -\section{Second section} -A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ -\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}\index{a}% -\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}\index{cannot}% -\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}\index{I}% -\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}\index{land}% -\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}\index{to}\index{tree}% -\index{would}\index{yes}% -\textsf{A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. -But I imagine that he would, yes.}\\ -\hbox{}\hfill -Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks}~(1993),~\textsl{Against~a~dark~background.}% -\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} - -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A starred chapter requires a special treatment; three solutions are possible. -% You can test variations on -% the \com{mtcaddchapter} command. Just uncomment one (and -% only one) of the \com{mtcaddchapter} commands after -% \com{chapter*} in the source code of \exam{mtc-add.tex}. -% For each case, look at the Table of Contents -% and the involved chapter. -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre étoilé nécessite un traitement spécial; trois solutions sont possibles. Vous pouvez tester des -% variations sur la commande \com{mtcaddchapter}. Il suffit de décommenter une et une seule des trois -% commandes \com{mtcaddchapter} après \com{chapter*} dans le code source de \exam{mtc-add.tex}. Pour chaque -% cas, regardez la table des matières et le chapitre concerné. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{Second chapter, starred} -\index{chapter!starred} -%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 3 FOLLOWING LINES -\mtcaddchapter[Second chapter, starred] % OK -%% \mtcaddchapter[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. OK -%% \addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \mtcaddchapter[] % BAD SOLUTION -%% \mtcaddchapter % BAD SOLUTION -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\index{tests} - -This is a starred chapter; you can test here variations on -the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command. Just uncomment one (and -only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| commands after -\verb|\chapter*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. -For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents -and at this chapter. -\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% -\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{chapter}\index{code}% -\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}\index{each}% -\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}% -\index{index}\index{is}\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}% -\index{lot}\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% -\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% -\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% -\index{variations}\index{you}% -I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. - -\chapter{Third chapter} -\index{chapter!normal} -\minitoc \mtcskip -\minilof \mtcskip -\minilot -\section{Third section} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} - -\section{Fourth section} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} -% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As we want to add an entry for the bibliography in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package -% for that, we must add a correction with \com{adjustmtc}: -% \or\relax -% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour la bibliographie dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons -% donc le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous ajoutons une correction avec \com{adjustmtc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\nocite* -\def\noopsort#1{\relax} -\bibliographystyle{plain} -\bibliography{mtc-add} -\adjustmtc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\printindex} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As we want to add an entry for the index in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package -% for that, we must add a correction; two solutions are available: use \com{mtcfixindex} or -% the other given three lines: -% \or\relax -% Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour l'index dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons -% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour cela, nous devons ajouter une correction; deux solutions sont -% disponibles: utiliser \com{mtcfixindex} ou les trois autres lignes données: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\printindex -\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines -%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{} -%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{} -%% \mtcaddchapter -%% - -\appendix -\chapter{App.~1} -\index{chapter!appendix} -\minitoc \mtcskip -\minilof \mtcskip -\minilot -\section{Fifth section} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} - -\section{Sixth section} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The next chapter asks for a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot, but contains no tables; hence -% the \upack{minitoc} package will give some warnings. -% \or\relax -% Le chapitre suivant demande une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot, mais ne contient aucun tableau; donc le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} émettra quelques avertissements. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{App.~2} -\index{chapter!appendix} -%% contains no tables but asks for a minilot! No minilot printed. -\minitoc \mtcskip -\minilof \mtcskip -\minilot -\section{Seventh section} -\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} -\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} - -\section{Eighth section} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} - -\end{document} -%</mtc-add> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And we need also its small bibliographic data base: -% \or\relax -% Et nous avons aussi besoin de sa petite base bibliographique: -% \fi -% \begin{itemize} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% \item la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-addbib> -@MISC{minitoc, - TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}", - MONTH=jul, - YEAR=2008} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr}: -% \or\relax -% \item la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -@MISC{minitoc-fr, - TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}", - MONTH=jul, - YEAR=2008} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item the documentation of the \upack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc}: -% \or\relax -% \item la documentation du paquetage \upack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -@MISC{shorttoc, - TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package", - AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.", - ADDRESS="{\url{mailto:drucbert@onera.fr}}", - NOTE="{\url{http://www.dante.de/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}", - MONTH=aug, - YEAR=2002} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \item a novel~\cite{dark} from which a short citation is taken: -% \or\relax -% \item un roman~\cite{dark} d'où une courte citation est extraite: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -@BOOK{dark, - TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}", - AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies", - PUBLISHER="Bantam Books", - ISBN="0553292240 (pb)", - YEAR=1993} -%</mtc-addbib> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{itemize} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But the database created this way must be trimmed of some spurious lines; -% on Unix-like systems, do\footnote{Note that we should use no preamble for -% this file in \xfile{minitoc.ins}; nevertheless, some spurious lines are still generated. This -% problem is not yet corrected now, so we keep the solution.}: -% \or\relax -% Mais la base ainsi créée doit être purgée des lignes superflues; -% sur les systèmes analogues à~Unix, faites\,\footnote{Notez que nous -% ne devrions pas utiliser de préambule pour ce fichier dans \xfile{minitoc.ins}; néanmoins, des lignes -% superflues sont encore produites. Ce problème n'est pas encore corrigé, donc nous conservons cette solution.}: -% \fi -% \begin{verse}\small -% \verb"cat mtc-add.bib | grep -v '^%%' > addbib;mv addbib mtc-add.bib" -% \end{verse} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ads.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} -% This document uses the \class{article} class and shows some problems for adding special entries in the -% table of contents and some problems with floating objects. We need to use the \pack{tocbibind} -% package~\cite{tocbibind} for the first ones and the \upack{minitoc} \opt{insection} package option to avoid -% the drift if floating objects outside of their section. That gives the following document preamble: -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ads.tex}}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} -% Ce document utilise la classe \class{article} et montre quelques problèmes pour ajouter des entrées spéciales -% dans la table des matières et quelques problèmes avec les objets flottants. Il nous faut utiliser le paquetage -% \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} pour les premiers et l'option \opt{insection} du -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour éviter la dérive des objets flottants hors de leur section. Ceci donne le -% préambule suivant: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-ads> -\documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{url,tocbibind,makeidx} -\makeatletter \newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue \makeatother -\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}% -\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak - \dotfil~\ignorespaces}% -\usepackage[tight,hints,insection]{minitoc} -%% \usepackage{mtcoff} -\makeindex -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de préparation: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\doparttoc \dopartlof \dopartlot -\dosecttoc \dosectlof \dosectlot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The commands to prepare the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of tables. As we use the -% \pack{tocbibind} package, we must add some \com{mtcaddsection} commands: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes pour préparer la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. Comme nous -% utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous devons ajouter quelques commandes \com{mtcaddsection}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -\setcounter{parttocdepth}{6} -\setcounter{secttocdepth}{6} -\tableofcontents \mtcaddsection -\listoffigures \mtcaddsection -\listoftables \mtcaddsection -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The body of the document: a part with its part-level mini-tables, some sections with their section-level -% mini-tables. The document has an index and contains figures and tables. -% \or\relax -% Le corps du document: une partie avec ses mini-tables au niveau partie, quelques sections leurs mini-tables au -% niveau section. Le document a un index et contient des figures et des tableaux. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\part{Part~1} -\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot - -\section{First section} -\index{section!normal} -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{First subsection} - -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table} - -\subsection{Second subsection} -A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ -\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% -\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% -\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% -\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% -\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% -\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% -A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. -But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ -\hbox{}\hfill Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% -\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\section*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Here, we try a starred section, with its entry in the table of contents. You can try several solutions (good or bad). -% \or\relax -% Ici, nous essayons une section étoilée, avec son entrée dans la table des matières. Vous pouvez essayer plusieurs -% solutions (bonnes ou mauvaises). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section*{Second section, starred} -\index{section!starred} -%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES -\mtcaddsection[Second section, starred] % OK -%% \mtcaddsection[] % BAD -%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. -%% \mtcaddsection % BAD -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\index{tests} - -This is a starred section; you can test here variations on -the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and -only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after -\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. -For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents -and at this section. -\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% -\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% -\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}% -\index{Contents}\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}% -\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% -\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% -\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}\index{source}% -\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}\index{the}% -\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}% -\index{variations}\index{you}% -I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. - -\section{Third section} -\index{section!normal} -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{Third subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table} - -\subsection{Fourth subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table} - -\subsubsection{Even a sub-sub-section!} -\subsubsection{And yet another one} - -\part{Part~2} -\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot - -\section{Fourth section} -\index{section!normal} -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{Fifth subsection} - -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table}[tp] \caption{Fifth table} \end{table} - -\subsection{Sixth subsection} -A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\ -\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}% -\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}% -\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}% -\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}% -\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}% -\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}% -A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it. -But I imagine that he would, yes.\\ -\hbox{}\hfill -Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}% -\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background} - -\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table} - -\section*{Fifth section, starred} -\index{section!starred} -%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES -\mtcaddsection[Fifth section, starred] % OK -%% \mtcaddsection[] % OK -%% \mtcaddsection[~] % produces a (strange) correct result. -%% \mtcaddsection % OK -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\index{tests} - -This is a starred section; you can test here variations on -the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and -only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after -\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}. -For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents -and at this section.\index{a}% -\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}% -\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}% -\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}% -\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}% -\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}% -\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}% -\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}% -\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}% -\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}% -\index{uncomment}\index{variations}\index{you}% -I also added a lot of index entries, just to test. - -\section{Sixth section} -\index{section!normal} -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{Seventh subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Seventh table} \end{table} - -\subsection{Eighth subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Eighth table} \end{table} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} -% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The bibliography: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{adjuststc}: -% \or\relax -% La bibliographie: comme nous voulons une entrée pour elle dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le -% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{adjuststc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\nocite* -\def\noopsort#1{\relax} -\bibliographystyle{plain} -\bibliography{mtc-add} -\adjuststc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\printindex} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The index: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{mtcfixindex}: -% \or\relax -% L'index: comme nous voulons une entrée pour lui dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le -% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{mtcfixindex}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\printindex -\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines -%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{} -%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{} -%% \mtcaddsection - -\appendix -\section{App.~1} -\index{section!appendix} -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{Ninth subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Ninth table} \end{table} - -\subsection{Tenth subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Tenth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{table} \caption{Tenth table} \end{table} - -\section{App.~2} -\index{section!appendix} -%% contains no tables but asks for a sectlot! No sectlot printed. -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot -\subsection{Eleventh subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure} -\begin{figure} \caption{Twelfth figure} \end{figure} - -\subsection{Twelfth subsection} - -\begin{figure} \caption{Thirdteenth figure} \end{figure} -\begin{figure} \caption{Fourteenth figure} \end{figure} - -\end{document} -%</mtc-ads> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-amm.tex} document file}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-amm.tex}}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This example shows the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a \class{memoir} class document when -% the \upack{minitoc} package is loaded. First, the preamble: -% \or\relax -% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} -% lorsque le paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été chargé. Tout d'abord, le préambule: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-amm> -\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}% - [2007/08/29] -\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text -\usepackage{hyperref} -\usepackage{memhfixc} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -\adjustmtc -\chapter{First chapter} -\minitoc -\lipsum[1] -\section{First section} -\lipsum[2] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{environment}{appendices} -% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The appendices are set in an \env{appendices} environment; we can add an entry in the TOC with -% \com{addappheadtotoc} (a command from the \class{memoir} class): -% \or\relax -% Les appendices sont composés dans un environnement \env{appendices}; nous pouvons ajouter une entrée dans la table -% des matières avec \com{addappheadtotoc} (une commande fournie par la classe \class{memoir}): -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{appendices} -\addappheadtotoc -\adjustmtc %correction! -\chapter{Afterthoughts} -\minitoc -\lipsum[3] -Afterthoughts appendix -\section{Further remarks} -\lipsum[4] -\chapter{Last wills} -\minitoc -\section{Testament} -\lipsum[5] -\end{appendices} -\chapter{Conclusion} -\minitoc -\section{Bye} -\lipsum[6] -\chapter{Back from Hell} -\minitoc -\section{Not dead yet!} -\lipsum[7] -\section{I will survive} -\lipsum[8] -\end{document} -%</mtc-amm> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-apx.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} -% The \exam{mtc-apx.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-apx.tex}}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} -% Le document \exam{mtc-apx.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-art.tex} document file}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-art.tex}}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains sections but no chapters, so it must use an -% \class{article}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and -% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: -% \or\relax -% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des sections mais pas de chapitres, -% donc il doit utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\class{article}. Vous devriez travailler sur -% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec -% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-art> -%% mtc-art.tex -%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60 -%% package. You can alter most of parameters to test. -%% article (\section must be defined) -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-art.tex}% - [2007/06/06] -\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text -%% \usepackage{hyperref} % If used, load it BEFORE minitoc -\usepackage[tight,insection]{minitoc} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands -\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents -\setlength{\stcindent}{24pt} % indentation of secttocs, default -%% % font for secttocs, default -\renewcommand{\stcfont}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% -%% % font for secttocs, subsections -%% \renewcommand{\stcSSfont}{\small\sf}% -%% % you can make experiments with -%% % \stcSSSfont, \stcPfont and \stcSPfont -%% % but it is ``fontomania''... -\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you want to use sections numbered in each part (the section number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each -% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the secttoc files is -% independent on the numbering of the sections (it is absolute). -% \or\relax -% Si vous voulez utiliser des sections numérotées dans chaque partie (le numéro de section repart à~1 au début de -% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers -% secttoc est indépendante de celle des sections (elle est absolue). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test -%%% resetting section number in each part -%%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{section}{part} \makeatother -%%% END TEST -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in -% the mini-tables): -% \or\relax -% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et -% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dosecttoc -\dosectlof[c] % center titles of the sectlofs -\dosectlot -\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff -\dopartlof % added in version #15 -\dopartlot % added in version #15 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. -% \or\relax -% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\faketableofcontents % or \tableofcontents -\fakelistoffigures % to check compatibility -\fakelistoftables % to check compatibility -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands; -% we define a part, with a parttoc, a partlof (with the title on the right) and a parttoc: -% \or\relax -% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement; -% nous définissons une partie, avec une parttoc, une partlof (avec le titre sur la droite) et une parttoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\part{First Part} \parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A section, in two columns mode, with a secttoc (title on the right), and a sectlof; this section contains -% subsections to make a non-empty secttoc but no figures (to detect an empty sectlof). -% \or\relax -% Une section, en mode deux colonnes, avec une secttoc (titre sur la droite), et une sectlof; cette section contient -% des sous-sections pour que la secttoc ne soit pas vide mais pas de figures (pour détecter une sectlof vide). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\twocolumn\sloppy % the secttoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, - % but works. Ideas to make it better? -\section{AAAAA} % a section with a lot of sections -\secttoc[r] % secttoc title on the right -\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED -\lipsum[1] -\subsection{S1} \lipsum[2] -\subsection{S2} \lipsum[3] -\subsection{S3} \lipsum[4] -\subsection*{S4} -%% \addcontentsline{toc}{starsubsection}{*S4*} -\lipsum[5] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A lot of subsections: -% \or\relax -% Un tas de sous-sections: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\subsection{S5} \lipsum[6] -\subsection{S6} \lipsum[7] -\subsection{S7} \lipsum[8] -\subsection{S8} \lipsum[9] -\subsection{S9} \lipsum[10] -\subsection{S10} \lipsum[11] -\subsection{S11} \lipsum[12] -\subsection{S12} \lipsum[13] -\subsection{S13} \lipsum[14] -\subsection{S14} \lipsum[15] -\subsection{S15} \lipsum[16] -\subsection{S16} \lipsum[17] -\subsection{S17} \lipsum[18] -\subsection{S18} \lipsum[19] -\subsection{S19} \lipsum[20] -\subsection{S20} \lipsum[21] -\subsection{S21} \lipsum[22] -\subsection{S22} \lipsum[23] -\subsection{S23} \lipsum[24] -\subsection{S24} \lipsum[25] -\subsection{S25} \lipsum[26] -\subsection{S26} \lipsum[27] -\subsection{S27} \lipsum[28] -\subsection{S28} \lipsum[29] -\subsection{S29} \lipsum[30] -\subsection{S30} \lipsum[31] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} -% \begin{macro}{\section*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We return to the one column mode. Then a section with a secttoc and a sectlof (there are subsections and figures). -% The \opt{insection} package option should ensure that floating objects (like figures) do not drift outside -% their section. -% \or\relax -% Nous revenons au mode une colonne. Puis une section avec une secttoc et une sectlof (il y~a des sous-sections et -% des figures). -% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} devrait garantir que les objets flottants (tels que les figures) ne -% dérivent pas en dehors de leur section. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column -\section{BBBBB} -\secttoc -\mtcskip % put some skip here -\sectlof % a sectlof -\lipsum[32] -\subsection{T1} \lipsum[33] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} -\caption{F1} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\FloatBarrier -\subsubsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command -\lipsum[34] -\paragraph{TTT1} \lipsum[35] -\subparagraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[36] -\begin{figure}[t] -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} -\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption -\end{figure} -\FloatBarrier -\subsection{T2} \lipsum[37] -\section*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-section. should have no secttoc -%% \addstarredsection{CCCCC} -\mtcaddsection[CCCCC] -\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED -\lipsum[38] -\subsection{U1} \lipsum[39] -\subsubsection{UU1} \lipsum[40] -\paragraph{UUU1} \lipsum[41] -\subparagraph{UUUU1} \lipsum[42] -\subsection{U2} \lipsum[43] -\part{Second Part} -\parttoc -\partlof[c] -\partlot -%% % the following section should have no secttoc, -\section{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \secttoc, -%% \secttoc -\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED -% % the secttoc appears -\lipsum[44] -\subsection{V1} \lipsum[45] -\subsubsection{VV1} \lipsum[46] -\paragraph{VVV1} \lipsum[47] -\subparagraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[48] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} -\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\FloatBarrier -\lipsum[49] \subsection{V2} \lipsum[50] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We change the depth of the secttocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): -% \or\relax -% Nous changeons la profondeur des secttocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{EEEEE} % this section should have a secttoc -{% % left brace, see below -\setcounter{secttocdepth}{3} % depth of sect table of contents; - % try with different values. -\secttoc -\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED -} % right brace -%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change on secttocdepth. -\lipsum[51] -\subsection{W1} % with the given depth -\lipsum[52] -\subsubsection{WW1} \lipsum[53] -\paragraph{WWW1} \lipsum[54] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} -\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\FloatBarrier -bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla -\subparagraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[55] -\subsection{W2} \lipsum[56] -\chapter*{} -\part{Appendices} -\parttoc \mtcskip -\partlof \mtcskip -\partlot -\FloatBarrier -\appendix -\section{Comments} \lipsum[57] -\secttoc -\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED -\subsection{C1} \lipsum[58] -\subsection{C2} \lipsum[59] -\subsection{C3} \lipsum[60] -\begin{figure}[hb] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture} -\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\FloatBarrier -\subsection{C4} \lipsum[61] -\FloatBarrier -\section{Evolution} -\secttoc -\sectlof % empty -\sectlot % empty -\lipsum[62] -\subsection{D1} \lipsum[63] \subsection{D2} \lipsum[64] -\subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66] -\end{document} -%</mtc-art> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bk.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bk.tex}}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains chapters, so it must use a -% \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and -% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows: -% \or\relax -% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des chapitres, donc il doit -% utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\upack{book} ou à~\class{report}. Vous devriez travailler sur -% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec -% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-bk> -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions) -%% mtc-bk.tex -%% This file contains a set of tests for the minitoc.sty version #60 package file. -%% You can alter most of parameters to test. -%% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined). -%% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters. -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} % the report class uses less pages -%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-bk.tex}% - [2007/06/06] -\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text -%% \usepackage{hyperref} % if used, load it BEFORE minitoc -%% \usepackage{mtcoff} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} % tight option make shorter mini-tables -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands -\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} % depth of table of contents -\setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} % indentation of minitocs, default -\renewcommand{\mtcfont}{\small\rm} % font for minitocs, default -\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\small\bf} % font for minitocs, sections, default -%% \renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{\small\sf} % font for minitocs, subsections -%% you can make experiments with \mtcSSSfont, \mtcPfont and \mtcSPfont -%% but it is ``fontomania''... -\raggedbottom % or \flushbottom, at your choice -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you want to use chapters numbered in each part (the chapter number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each -% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the minitoc files is -% independent on the numbering of the chapters (it is absolute). -% \or\relax -% Si vous voulez utiliser des chapitres numérotés dans chaque partie (le numéro de partie repart à~1 au début de -% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers -% minitoc est indépendante de celle des chapitres (elle est absolue). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test resetting chapter number in each part -%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{chapter}{part} \makeatother -%%% END TEST -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in -% the mini-tables): -% \or\relax -% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et -% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables): -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\mtcpagenumbers -\noptcrule -%% \nomtcrule % suppresses minitoc rules -%% \nomtcpagenumbers % suppresses minitoc page numbers -%% \nomlfpagenumbers % ---------- minilof ---- ------- -%% \nomltpagenumbers % ---------- minilot ---- ------- -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc -\dominilof[c] % centers title of minilof's -\dominilot -\doparttoc % test of parttoc/partlof stuff -\dopartlof % added in version #15 -\dopartlot % added in version #15 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print. -% \or\relax -% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\tableofcontents % or \faketableofcontents -\listoffigures % or \fakelistoffigures -\fakelistoftables % or \listoftables -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Uncomment the following line if the first chapter must be numbered~``0'': -% \or\relax -% Décommentez la ligne suivante si le premier chapitre doit être numéroté~«~0~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % to begin with Chapter 0 -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\part{First Part} -\parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot[r] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A chapter, in two column mode, with a minitoc (title on the right): -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre, en mode deux colonnes, avec une minitoc (titre sur la droite): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\twocolumn\sloppy % the minitoc in twocolumn layout is ugly, -\chapter{AAAAA} % a chapter with a lot of sections -\minitoc[r] % minitoc title on the right -\lipsum[1] -\section{S1} \lipsum[2] -\section{S2} \lipsum[3] -\section{S3} \lipsum[4] -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\section*} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A starred section; we want an entry in the TOC, so we add it the normal way: -% \or\relax -% Une section étoilée: nous voulons une entrée dans la table des matières, donc nous l'ajoutons de la manière -% normale: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section*{S4} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}{S4}} -\lipsum[5] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A lot of subsections: -% \or\relax -% Un tas de sous-sections: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{S5} \lipsum[6] -\section{S6} \lipsum[6] -\section{S7} \lipsum[7] -\section{S8} \lipsum[9] -\section{S9} \lipsum[10] -\section{S10} \lipsum[11] -\section{S11} \lipsum[12] -\section{S12} \lipsum[13] -\section{S13} \lipsum[14] -\section{S14} \lipsum[15] -\section{S15} \lipsum[16] -\section{S16} \lipsum[17] -\section{S17} \lipsum[18] -\section{S18} \lipsum[19] -\section{S19} \lipsum[20] -\section{S20} \lipsum[21] -\section{S21} \lipsum[22] -\section{S22} \lipsum[23] -\section{S23} \lipsum[24] -\section{S24} \lipsum[25] -\section{S25} \lipsum[26] -\section{S26} \lipsum[27] -\section{S27} \lipsum[28] -\section{S28} \lipsum[29] -\section{S29} \lipsum[30] -\section{S30} \lipsum[31] -\subsection{SS1} \lipsum[32] -\section{S31} \lipsum[33] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We return to one column mode. A new chapter, with a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot: -% \or\relax -% Nous revenons au mode sur une colonne. Un nouveau chapitre, avec une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\onecolumn\fussy % back to one column -\chapter{BBBBB} -\minitoc -\mtcskip % put some skip here -\minilof % a minilof -\mtcskip % put some skip here -\minilot % a minilot -\lipsum[34] -\section{T1} \lipsum[35] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption{F1} % (tables are similar) -\end{figure} -\begin{table}[b] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption{T1} % (tables are similar) -\end{table} -\clearpage -\subsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command -\lipsum[36] -\subsubsection{TTT1} \lipsum[37] -\paragraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[38] -\begin{figure} -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption[f2]{F2} % tests optional arg. of a caption -\end{figure} -\section{T2} \lipsum[39] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\section*} -% \begin{macro}{\paragraph*} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A starred chapter with an entry added in the TOC; all subordinate (lower) -% sectionning commands must also be starred. -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée ajoutée dans la table des matières; -% toutes les commandes de sectionnement subalternes (plus basses) doivent aussi être étoilées. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{CCCCC} % tests a pseudo-chapter; could have a minitoc. -\addstarredchapter{CCCCC} -\lipsum[40] -\section*{U1} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U1} -\lipsum[41] -\subsection*{UU1} -\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{UU1} -\lipsum[42] -\subsubsection*{UUU1} -\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{UUU1} -\lipsum[43] -\paragraph*{UUUU1} -\addcontentsline{toc}{paragraph}{UUUU1} -\lipsum[44] -\section*{U2} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U2} -\lipsum[45] -\part{Second Part} -\parttoc -\partlof[c] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This chapter has no minitoc, but if you uncomment \com{minitoc}, -% the minitoc will appear. -% \or\relax -% Ce chapitre n'a pas de minitoc, mais si vous décommentez \com{minitoc}, -% la minitoc apparaîtra. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% % the following chapter should have no minitoc, -\chapter{DDDDD} % but if you uncomment \minitoc, -%% \minitoc % the minitoc appears -\lipsum[46] -\section{V1} \lipsum[47] -\subsection{VV1} \lipsum[48] -\subsubsection{VVV1} \lipsum[49] -\paragraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[50] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption{F3} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\lipsum[51] -\section{V2} \lipsum[52] -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We change the depth of the minitocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces): -% \or\relax -% Nous changeons la profondeur des minitocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{EEEEE} % this chapter should have a minitoc -{% % left brace, see below -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} % depth of mini table of contents; - % try with different values. -\minitoc -} % right brace -%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change -%% on minitocdepth. -\lipsum[53] -\section{W1} % with the given depth -\lipsum[54] -\subsection{WW1} \lipsum[55] -\subsubsection{WWW1} \lipsum[56] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption{F4} % (I have not tested tables here, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\lipsum[57] -\paragraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[58] -\subparagraph{WWWWW1} \lipsum[59] -\section{W2} \lipsum[60] -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Here, we encounter a classical problem: to make a local table of contents for a set -% of appendices, while hiding these entries in the main table of contents. First, we -% create a part, with its parttoc: -% \or\relax -% Ici, nous rencontrons un problème classique: faire une table des matières locale pour un ensemble d'appendices, -% et tout en masquant ces entrées dans la table des matières principale. Tout d'abord, nous créons une partie, avec sa -% parttoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\appendix -\part{Appendices} -\parttoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we begin a \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, with the hiding depth as optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous commençons un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, avec la profondeur de masquage requise: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] -\chapter{Comments} -\minitoc -\section{C1} \lipsum[61] -\section{C2} \lipsum[62] -\section{C3} \lipsum[63] -\begin{figure}[t] % tests compatibility with floating bodies -\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} -\begin{picture}(100,50) -\end{picture} -\caption{F5} % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar) -\end{figure} -\section{C4} -\chapter{Evolution} -\minitoc -\minilof %Empty => invisible -\minilot %Empty => invisible -\section{D1} \lipsum[64] -\section{D2} \lipsum[65] -\section{D3} \lipsum[66] -\section{D4} \lipsum[67] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% We terminate the part by adding a marker in the TOC file, then we must close this \env{mtchideinmaintoc} -% environment: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Nous terminons la partie en ajoutant un marqueur dans le fichier table des matières, puis nous devons fermer -% cet environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% this line closes the omitted part -\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} -%% this line restore the depth in the main TOC -\end{mtchideinmaintoc} -\lipsum[68] -\end{document} -%</mtc-bk> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bo.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bo.tex}}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a two column layout for some -% portions and the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. The aim is to begin a chapter with a special head and a -% preliminary block containing a minitoc and some indications, on two columns. -% The preamble loads the \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry}, which defines the global page layout, -% the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, the \pack{color} package~\cite{color}, because we want a colored -% background -% for the minitoc, the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}, to change some parameters of the minitoc, and, at -% least, the \upack{minitoc} package itself: -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant une mise en page sur -% deux colonnes pour certaines portions et le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Le but est de commencer -% un chapitre avec un en-tête spécial et un bloc préliminaire contenant une minitoc et quelques indications, sur -% deux colonnes. -% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry}, -% qui définit la mise en page globale, le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, -% le paquetage \pack{color}~\cite{color}, -% car nous voulons un fond coloré pour la minitoc, le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour changer -% quelques paramètres de la minitoc, et, enfin, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lui-même: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-bo> -\documentclass[10pt]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}% - [2007/04/17] -\usepackage[paperwidth=8.5in,paperheight=11in,% - lmargin=1.25in,rmargin=1.25in,tmargin=1in,bmargin=1in]{geometry} -\usepackage{multicol} -\usepackage{color} -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\setlength} -% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecindent} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecindent} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecnumwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We use the \pack{tocloft} package and its commands to set the indentations in the TOC and the minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocloft} et ses commandes pour établir les indentations dans la table des -% matières et la minitoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{tocloft} -\setlength{\cftsecindent}{0cm} -\setlength{\cftsecnumwidth}{15 pt} -\setlength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecindent} -\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecnumwidth} -\setlength{\cftsubsecnumwidth}{20 pt} -\setlength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecindent} -\addtolength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecnumwidth} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that if we want to suppress the page numbers in the minitoc, we must use the commands from \pack{tocloft}: -% \or\relax -% Notez que si nous voulons supprimer les numéros de page dans la minitoc, nous devons utiliser les commandes -% de \pack{tocloft}: -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -\cftpagenumbersoff{sec} -\cftpagenumbersoff{subsec} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and change the indentation, suppress the rules and change the minitoc -% title. The \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} can also be loaded (\emph{after} \upack{minitoc}). -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et changeons l'indentation, supprimons les filets et changeons le -% titre. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut aussi être chargé (\emph{après} \upack{minitoc}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[francais,tight]{minitoc} -\usepackage{hyperref} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\nomtcrule % pas de filets en haut et en bas de la mini-tdm -\nomtcpagenumbers % pas de numéro de pages -% (non fonctionnel avec tocloft) -\renewcommand{\mtctitle}{Contenu de la rencontre} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load also some packages for the french language (some are local): -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons aussi quelques paquetages pour la langue française: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[francais]{babel} -\usepackage{franc,frnew} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} -\usepackage{mypatches} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code redefines the format of the chapter head: -% \or\relax -% Ce code redéfinit le format de l'en-tête de chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% MACRO POUR AVOIR LE MOT « RENCONTRE » AU LIEU DE « CHAPITRE » % -% Sans saut de ligne (modification du code qui se trouve dans la FAQ) % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\makeatletter -\def\@makechapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{10\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \normalfont - \interlinepenalty\@M - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \Huge\bfseries\sffamily Rencontre \thechapter\\% \quad - \fi - \Huge\bfseries\sffamily #1\par\nobreak - \vskip 10\p@ -}} -\def\@makeschapterhead#1{% - \vspace*{10\p@}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont - \interlinepenalty\@M - \Huge \sffamily #1\par\nobreak - \vskip 10\p@ -}} \makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define an environment (\env{pageUn}) for the block placed at the beginning of a chapter. This block -% contains a minitoc, then a sequence of informations given by the 6~parameters of the environment. The block -% uses a \env{multicols} environment to typeset on two columns. Some decorations are added: rules, colored -% background for the minitoc. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons un environnement (\env{pageUn}) pour le bloc placé en début de chapitre. Ce bloc contient -% une minitoc, puis une séquence d'informations données par les 6~paramètres de l'environnement. Ce bloc utilise -% un environnement \env{multicols} pour composer sur deux colonnes. Quelques décorations sont ajoutées: des -% filets, un fond coloré pour la minitoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%: ENVIRONNEMENT POUR LA PAGE 1 DES RENCONTRES % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% param1: date de la rencontre -% param2: nombre de périodes -% param3: liste des documents distribués -% param4: messages -% param5: lecture -% param6: exercices -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\newenvironment{pageUn}[6]{% -\parindent = 0.0in -\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} -\begin{multicols}{2} - {\large \bfseries Math. pour médecine nucléaire\\ - \textit{(#2)}} - \vfill\columnbreak - \raggedleft\bfseries Automne 2003\\ - #1 -\end{multicols} -\vspace{-18pt} -\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} - -\setlength{\columnseprule}{.3pt} \setlength{\columnsep}{1cm} -\begin{multicols}{2}% - -%: TABLE DES MATIÈRES (col. gauche) -\colorbox[cmyk]{.1,0,0,0}{% - \parbox{\linewidth}{% - \setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}% - \minitoc% - }} -%\vfill \columnbreak ~ \vfill - -\mtcskip - -%: DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUÉS (début col. droite) - -{\large \bfseries Documents distribués} -\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$} #3 \end{itemize} - -%: MESSAGES AUX ÉTUDIANTS - -\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Messages} -\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}#4\end{itemize} - -%: LECTURE -\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Lecture}\vspace{-6pt} \par#5 \par - -% EXERCICES -\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Exercices}\vspace{-6pt}\par#6\par - -%\newpage -\end{multicols}% -} -%{\newpage} -{\hrule} - -%\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.2} %interligne - -%\pagestyle{empty} %pas de # de page -%\parindent = 0.0in -\parskip = 0.1in - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%: REDÉFINIR LES SECTIONS % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}} -%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter-\Alph{section}} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The body of the document: -% \or\relax -% Le corps du document: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%%%%%%%%%% -%: BEGIN % -%%%%%%%%%% -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \faketableofcontents -\chapter{Première étape (début)} -%\minitoc -\begin{pageUn} - {%1 Date du cours - lundi 25 août - } - {%2 Durée du cours - 2 périodes - } - {%3 Liste des documents à~distribuer - \item Plan de cours - \item Fiche d'identification - \item Grille horaire - \item Feuilles d'exercices supplémentaires - } - {%4 Ne pas oublier - \item Acheter le livre de référence - \item Apporter une disquette - } - {%5 Lecture - Lire les pages ppp à~ppp et ppp à~ppp - } - {%6 Exercice - Faire les exercices nnn de la page ppp - } -\end{pageUn} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Titre de la section} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -Texte dans la section - -%% -\subsection{Une sous-section} -%% -Bla bla bla - -%% -\subsection{Une autre sous-section} -%% -Bla bla bla - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Titre d'une autre section} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -Texte dans la section - -%% -\subsection{Une sous-section} -%% -Bla bla bla - -%% -\subsection{Une autre sous-section} -%% -Bla bla bla - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\section{Encore une autre section} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -Texte dans la section - -\end{document} -%</mtc-bo> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a starred first chapter, -% inducing the ``Chapter Zero'' problem. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant un premier chapitre -% étoilé, induisant le problème du «~Chapitre~zéro~». -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-ch0> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage[tight,english]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first chapter is starred, but contains real numbered sections. We add an entry in the TOC for this chapter -% and see that its sections are using ``0'' as chapter number: -% \or\relax -% Le premier chapitre est étoilé, mais contient de vraies sections numérotées. Nous ajoutons une entrée pour ce -% chapitre dans la table des matières et voyons que ses sections utilisent «~0~» comme numéro de chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{Chapter One (starred)} -\mtcaddchapter[Fake chapter one] -\minitoc -\section{Chap 1, section 1} -That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and -Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize -worldwide parties to celebrate. - -Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved -Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for -one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, -organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to -organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, -dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do -things by halves around here. - -\subsection{Chap 1, section 1, subsection 1} -That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and -Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize -worldwide parties to celebrate. - -Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved -Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for -one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, -organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to -organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, -dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do -things by halves around here. -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second chapter is normal: -% \or\relax -% Le second chapitre est normal: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Chapter Two (numbered one)} -\minitoc -\section{Chapter 2, section 1} -That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and -Thunderbird 1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize -worldwide parties to celebrate. - -Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved -Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for -one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0, -organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to -organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities, -dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do -things by halves around here. -\end{document} -%</mtc-ch0> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-cri.tex} document file}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-cri.tex}}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\part*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document -% with a starred part and starred chapters. Note the use of the adjustment commands. -% This example is not commented: just follow the insertion of the mini-tables in the \xfile{mtc-cri.log} file. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document -% avec une partie étoilée et des chapitres étoilés. Notez l'utilisation des commandes d'ajustement. -% Cet exemple n'est pas commenté: suivez simplement l'insertion des mini-tables dans le fichier \xfile{mtc-cri.log}. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-cri> -\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]% - {report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage[francais]{babel} -\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage% - [french2,tight]% - {minitoc} - -\mtcsetdepth{parttoc}{2} - -\begin{document} -\doparttoc \dominitoc -\tableofcontents -\part*{Présentation générale} -\mtcaddpart[Présentation générale] -\adjustptc[-2] -\parttoc - -Texte de la -présentation générale\ldots - -\chapter*{Les auteurs} -\mtcaddchapter[Les auteurs] -Présentation des auteurs\ldots - -\chapter*{Les lecteurs} -\mtcaddchapter[Les lecteurs] -Présentation des lecteurs\ldots - -\part{Première partie} -\parttoc -\chapter*{Introduction} -\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] -\chapter{Premier chapitre} -\minitoc -\section{Première section~A} -\section{Deuxième section~A} -\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} -\minitoc -\section{Première section~B} -\section{Deuxième section~B} - -\part{Deuxième partie} -\parttoc -\chapter{Premier chapitre} -\minitoc -\section{Première section~C} -\section{Deuxième section~C} -\chapter{Deuxième chapitre} -\minitoc -\section{Première section~D} -\section{Deuxième section~D} -\end{document} -%</mtc-cri> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}}% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fko.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fko.tex}}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is a document using the \class{scrbook} class. Without any precaution, some entries in the minitocs are -% not in the right font (bold sans serif) like in the main table of contents; moreover, the language of the -% minitoc titles is not correct because the options of the \pack{babel} package are not transferred to the -% \upack{minitoc} package. To solve the language problem, we just set ``\lopt{german}'' as a \emph{global} option in -% the \com{documentclass} command (\pack{babel} and \upack{minitoc} will hence use this global option). -% \or\relax -% C'est un document qui utilise la classe \class{scrbook}. Sans aucune précaution, certaines entrées dans les minitocs ne -% sont pas dans la fonte correcte (grasse et sans empattements) comme dans la table des matières principale; de -% plus, la langue des titres des minitocs n'est pas correcte car les options du paquetage \pack{babel} ne sont -% pas transmises au paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Pour résoudre ce problème de langue, nous mettons -% simplement «~\lopt{german}~» comme option \emph{globale} dans la commande \com{documentclass} (\pack{babel} -% et \upack{minitoc} utiliseront donc cette option globale). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-fko> -\documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}% - [2007/02/19] -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we load the packages and set some parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous chargeons les paquetages et établissons quelques paramètres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{babel} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \begin{macro}{\sectfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we set explicitly the fonts for the entries\footnote{Here we only gave the commands for the section entries in -% the minitocs, but analog commands may be used for lower entries.} and the font of the titles of the minitocs, -% knowing that the font command \com{sectfont} is defined in \xfile{scrbook.cls}; we change also the title for -% the minitocs: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous établissons explicitement les fontes pour les entrées\,\footnote{Nous ne donnons ici que les commandes -% pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, mais des commandes analogues peuvent être utilisées pour des -% entrées inférieures.} et la fonte des titres des minitocs, en sachant que la commande de fonte \com{sectfont} -% est définie dans \xfile{scrbook.cls}; nous changeons aussi le titre des minitocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small} -\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\sectfont\large} -\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Inhalt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the body of the document, with a chapter (with a minitoc) containing a section. The section entry did not -% appear in bold sans serif in the original document (before the corrections). -% \or\relax -% Et voici le corps du document, avec un chapitre (et sa minitoc) contenant une section. L'entrée de section -% n'apparaissait pas en gras sans empattement dans le document original (avant les corrections). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% -\chapter{Ein serifenloses Kapitel} -\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc -\section{Dieser Text ist in minitoc serifenlos} -Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will -so wie koma es definiert. -\end{document} -%</mtc-fko> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level -% entries); you can compare the results. -% \or\relax -% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau -% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-fo1> -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage{txfonts} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\doparttoc \dominitoc \tableofcontents -\part{Introduction} \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A first copy, with default fonts: -% \or\relax -% Une première copie, avec les fontes par défaut: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A second copy, roman bold font for chapter entries: -% \or\relax -% Une deuxième copie, fonte romaine grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A third copy, typewriter bold font for chapter entries: -% \or\relax -% Une troisième copie, fonte bâton grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A fourth copy, not bold typewriter font for chapter entries: -% \or\relax -% Une quatrième copie, fonte bâton non grasse pour les entrées de chapitres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -\chapter{A very short chapter} -\minitoc -\lipsum[1] -\section{First section} \lipsum[2] -\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] -\subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] -\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] -\subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] -\end{document} -%</mtc-fo1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level -% entries); you can compare the results. As the fonts are not declared the same way, compare the results -% with those of \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). -% \or\relax -% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau -% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. Comme les fontes ne sont pas déclarées de la même manière, -% comparez les résultats avec ceux de \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-fo2> -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage{txfonts} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{11} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We declare the fonts with the old method: -% \or\relax -% Nous déclarons les fontes avec l'ancienne méthode: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsections) - \def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont} % (subsubsections) - \def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont} % (paragraphs) - \def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont} % (subparagraphs) - \def\plffont{\ptcfont} % (figures) - \def\plfSfont{\ptcfont} % (subfigures) - \def\pltfont{\ptcfont} % (tables) - \def\pltSfont{\ptcfont} % (subtables) -\begin{document} -\doparttoc \dominitoc -\tableofcontents -\part{Introduction} -\clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A first version of the parttoc, with the fonts defined above: -% \or\relax -% Une première version de la parttoc, avec les fontes définies ci-dessus: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A second version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a roman bold font: -% \or\relax -% Une deuxième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte romane grasse: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A third version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a typewriter bold font: -% \or\relax -% Une troisième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton grasse: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A fourth version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a non bold typewriter font: -% \or\relax -% Une quatrième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton non grasse: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries} -\parttoc \clearpage -\chapter{A very short chapter} -\minitoc -\lipsum[1] -\section{First section} \lipsum[2] -\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] \subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[5] -\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7] -\end{document} -%</mtc-fo2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-gap.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} -% The \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-gap.tex}}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} -% Le document \exam{mtc-gap.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} -% The \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} -% Le document \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} -% The \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} -% Le document \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hia.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hia.tex}}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables -% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{article} class. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains -% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{article}. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-hia> -\documentclass% - [oneside,a4paper]{article} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage% - [tight,insection]% - {minitoc} -\dosectlot -\begin{document} -\listoftables -\section{First section} -\sectlot -\lipsum[1] -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{My first visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[2] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A second visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[3] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: -% \or\relax -% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{table}[hb] -\mtchideinmainlot -\caption{My first hidden table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[4-6] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A second hidden table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[7] -\section{Second section} -\sectlot -\lipsum[8] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: -% \or\relax -% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{My last hidden table} -\endmtchideinmainlot -\end{table} -\lipsum[9] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A third visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[10] -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{A fourth visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[11] -\end{document} -%</mtc-hia> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hir.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hir.tex}}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables -% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{report} class. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains -% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{report}. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-hir> -\documentclass[a4paper]{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\dominilot -\begin{document} -\listoftables -\chapter{First chapter} -\minilot -\lipsum[1] -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{My first visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[2] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A second visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[3] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption: -% \or\relax -% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{table}[hb] -\mtchideinmainlot % <-- -\caption{My first hidden table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[4-6] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A second hidden table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[7] -\chapter{Second chapter} -\minilot -\lipsum[8] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption: -% \or\relax -% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{My last hidden table} -\endmtchideinmainlot % <-- -\end{table} -\lipsum[9] -\begin{table}[ht] -\caption{A third visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[10] -\begin{table}[hb] -\caption{A fourth visible table} -\end{table} -\lipsum[11] -\end{document} -%</mtc-hir> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}}% -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hop.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hop.tex}}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of class \class{scrbook}. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de la classe \class{scrbook}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-hop> -\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage[hints]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We prepare the minitocs and the minilofs, we print the TOC but not the LOF (while the LOF file is prepared): -% \or\relax -% Nous préparons les minitocs et les minilofs, nous imprimons la table des matières mais pas la liste des figures -% (cependant son fichier est préparé): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -\dominilof \fakelistoffigures -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\part*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A starred part with its entry in the TOC: -% \or\relax -% Une partie étoilée avec son entrée dans la table des matières: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\part*{Part 1: Strategic Marketing} -\mtcaddpart[Part 1: Strategic Marketing] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then two chapters with their minitocs and minitocs: -% \or\relax -% Puis deux chapitres avec leurs minitocs et minilofs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Chapter 1} -\minitoc \minilof -\section{Section one of first chapter} \lipsum[1] -\begin{figure} - \centering Test - \caption{Picture one of first chapter} -\end{figure} - -\section{Section two of first chapter} \lipsum[2] -\begin{figure} - \centering Test - \caption{Picture two of first chapter} -\end{figure} - -\chapter{Chapter 2} -\minitoc \minilof - -\section{Section one of second chapter} \lipsum[3] -\begin{figure} - \centering Test - \caption{Picture one of second chapter} -\end{figure} -\cleardoublepage -\section{Section two of second chapter} \lipsum[4] -\begin{figure} - \centering Test - \caption{Picture two of second chapter} -\end{figure} -\end{document} -%</mtc-hop> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-liv.tex} document file}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-liv.tex}}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of \class{book} class, with -% customized TOC and minitocs. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{book}, avec -% une table de matières et des minitocs personnalisées. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-liv> -\documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we want that empty pages be really empty, without page number nor headers, -% so we redefine \com{cleardoublepage}: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous souhaitons que les pages vides le soient vraiment, sans numéro de page ni en-tête, donc nous -% redéfinissons \com{cleardoublepage}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeatletter -\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% -\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage - \if@twoside - \ifodd\c@page\else - \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage - \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi - \fi - \fi - }% -\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the encodings, for input and output, because the document is in french and uses accented letters: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les codages, en entrée et en sortie, car le document est en français et utilise des lettres -% accentuées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load two packages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, to customize the TOC and the minitocs, and -% \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, to customize the sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons deux paquetages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour adapter la table des matières et les minitocs, -% et \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, pour adapter les commandes de sectionnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{tocloft} -\usepackage{sectsty} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the \upack{minitoc} package then some complementary local packages for the french language: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} puis quelques paquetages locaux complémentaires pour le français: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[french,undotted,tight]{minitoc} -\usepackage[english,francais]{babel} -\usepackage{franc,frnew,mypatches} -\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\addtolength} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsetrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterfont} -% \begin{macro}{\thesection} -% \begin{macro}{\sectionfont} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We make some customizations: indentation for the subsection entries in the TOC and the minitocs, depth of the -% TOC, numerotation depth, depth of the minitocs, some fonts: -% \or\relax -% Nous faisons quelques adaptations: indentation pour les entrées de sous-sections dans la table des matières et -% les minitocs, profondeur de la table des matières, profondeur de la numérotation, profondeur des minitocs, -% quelques fontes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{1em} % for tocloft -\cftsetrmarg{2.55em plus 1fil} % to avoid hyphenations in the ToC (tocloft). -\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1} -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{4} -\chapterfont{\huge\bfseries\sffamily} % for sectsty -\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}} -\sectionfont{\Large\raggedright} % for sectsty (to avoid hyphenations in section titles) -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some informations for the title page: -% \or\relax -% Des informations pour la page de titre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\title{Systèmes d'occultation} \author{Laurent~\textsc{Bloch}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection*} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the document body\footnote{The text has been shortened, so there is an undefined reference; do not worry.}: -% \or\relax -% Et le corps de document\,\footnote{Le texte a été abrégé, donc il reste une référence non satisfaite; ne vous -% inquiétez pas.}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} - -\maketitle - -\dominitoc \tableofcontents - -\chapter{Définition et contrôle du travail à~faire}% -\label{chap+controle} -\minitoc - -\section{Le modèle de la grande industrie et le taylorisme}% -\index{taylorisme} -C'est au \textsc{xviii}\fup{e}~siècle que la vision du travail comme -marchandise est vraiment devenue dominante, pour s'imposer au -\textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle dans l'organisation type de la grande usine -industrielle. - -\subsection*{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}\index{centre d'appel} -\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel} -Aujourd'hui le taylorisme\index{taylorisme} au sens -strict est en déclin parce qu'il n'est plus guère adapté aux -besoins de la production industrielle contemporaine non plus qu'aux -nouvelles normes de comportement individuel et collectif. - -\section{Tout travail émet de la pensée} -Le travail a vocation à~produire du sens, pour son auteur comme pour -son destinataire. - -\section{Théorie et pratique de la commande publique} -En France, les prestations de service commandées par les -services publics à~des entreprises font l'objet de contrôles -de leur bonne réalisation selon des procédures et des règles -qui sont des cas particuliers d'un ensemble plus vaste, la -réglementation des marchés publics de l'État, dont nous -allons donner ci-dessous une brève description. - -\subsection{Réglementation des marchés publics} -Le dispositif juridique, réglementaire et comptable qui encadre les -actes contractuels de la puissance publique en France est très~[...] - -\subsubsection{Premier principe: séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable} -Le premier élément du dispositif est le principe de -séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable. Il a été -instauré en 1319 par l'ordonnance portant création de la~[...] - -\subsubsection{Second principe: contrôle \emph{a~priori}} -Le second élément du dispositif est le principe du contrôle -\emph{a~priori}. Lorsque le directeur de l'organisme public -de recherche pris ici comme exemple (l'ordonnateur) décide~[...] - -\subsubsection{Le Code des Marchés Publics} -Le troisième pilier de la commande publique est le Code des Marchés -Publics (CMP), qui régit tous les contrats, conclus par des organismes -publics ou des collectivités territoriales, dont le montant excède un~[...] - -\subsection{La pratique des marchés publics} -Lorsque l'administration française fait réaliser un système -informatique par un prestataire, elle est en position de maître -d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}. Elle rédige (ou fait rédiger) un -cahier des charges\index{cahier des charges} qui décrit les -spécifications du système à~réaliser. Ce cahier des charges constitue~[...] - -\subsection{Quels sont les services publics «~rentables~»?} -Pour parler comme les informaticiens, nous pouvons identifier un -« effet de bord », c'est-à-dire une conséquence non intentionnelle de -la réglementation des marchés publics: les administrations ne disposent -d'aucun moyen pour envisager la notion d'investissement. Le~[...] - -\section{Projet et cahier des charges}\index{cahier des charges} -Jean-Pierre~\textsc{Boutinet} nous guidera ici pour ce qui concerne -l'histoire de la notion de~[...] - -\subsection{La frontière entre conception et fabrication} -La vision classique de la conduite d'un projet informatique de gestion -est la suivante: le maître d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}~[...] - -\subsection{Bâtiment, mécanique, programmation} -Nous y reviendrons au chapitre~\ref{chap+travail}, mais nous savons -déjà que la mise en {\oe}uvre de l'informatique s'est beaucoup -inspirée des procédures de travail les plus élaborées du -\textsc{xx}\fup{e}~siècle~[...] - -\chapter{Le travail informatique} -\minitoc - -\section{De la nature de l'informatique} - -\subsection{Premières croyances}\label{sub+premcroyances} -Les premiers ordinateurs, qui entrèrent en fonction à~l'extrême fin -des années 1940 et durant les années 1950, étaient consacrés à~des -travaux militaires ou scientifiques puisque, à~cette époque, -on pensait~[...] - -\subsection{Comment l'informatique diffère des mathématiques} -J'aimerai à~l'occasion de cette analyse attirer l'attention du -lecteur sur une question qui est une source constante de malentendus -au sujet de la programmation. - -\subsubsection{Les preuves de programme} -L'écriture de programmes informatiques obéit à~de tout autres principes. -Il convient de préciser cette affirmation pour la préserver~[...] - -\section{Programmation dans le monde réel} -\subsection{La vraie nature de la programmation des ordinateurs} - -Alors, comment s'écrivent les programmes informatiques? Et -d'ailleurs, qu'est-ce qu'une erreur\index{erreur} de programmation? -Ces questions sont liées et elles sont, bien sûr, au c{\oe}ur de notre -préoccupation. - -\subsection{Méthodes de programmation} -Un processeur quelconque est caractérisé par le jeu des actions -élémentaires qu'il est capable d'effectuer. Ces actions élémentaires -sont appelées les \emph{primitives} du processeur, ou, si le -processeur est une machine, les «~instructions machine~». Un~[...] - -\subsection{Méthodes de construction de programmes} -Nous avons décrit ci-dessus le processus élémentaire de la -programmation, celui qui consiste à~écrire les instructions ou les -expressions qui vont composer un programme. - -\subsubsection{La programmation structurée} -Le premier courant de pensée qui associa la recherche d'une syntaxe -claire et expressive à~une organisation logique et commode des unités -de programme fut la \emph{programmation -structurée}\index{programmation!structurée} des années 1970, dont~[...] - -\subsubsection{La programmation par objets} -Après la programmation structurée vint un autre courant significatif: -la programmation par objets\index{programmation!par objets}, inventée -en Norvège à~la fin des années 1960 par l'équipe de~[...] - -\subsubsection{Excès dans la pensée} -Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du -modèle~[...] -\end{document} -%</mtc-liv> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mem.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mem.tex}}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document. -% First, the preamble: -% \or\relax -% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}. -% Tout d'abord, le préambule: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-mem> -\documentclass% - [oneside]{memoir} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} -%% \usepackage{hyperref} -%% \usepackage{memhfixc} -\usepackage% - [tight]{minitoc} -%% \usepackage{mtcoff} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We use the starred form \com{tableofcontents*} specific of the \class{memoir} class. Note that the -% the \com{chapter} command has \emph{two} optional arguments in the \class{memoir} class. -% \or\relax -% Nous utilisons la forme étoilée \com{tableofcontents*} spécifique de la classe \class{memoir}. Notez que la -% commande \com{chapter} a \emph{deux} arguments optionnels dans la classe \class{memoir}. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc -\tableofcontents* - -\chapter[oneA][oneB]{oneC} -\minitoc -\lipsum[1] \newpage \lipsum[2] -\section{S-1-one} \lipsum[3] -\section{S-1-two} \lipsum[4] - -\chapter[twoA][twoB]{twoC} -\minitoc -\lipsum[4] \newpage \lipsum[5] -\section{S-2-one} \lipsum[6] -\section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7] -\end{document} -%</mtc-mem> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document and shows some of -% the necessary adaptations for fonts. -% First, the preamble: -% \or\relax -% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} et -% montre certaines des adaptations nécessaires pour les fontes. -% Tout d'abord, le préambule: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-mm1> -\documentclass[oneside]{memoir} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} -% \begin{macro}{\empty} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We inhibit some font commands of the \class{memoir} class: -% \or\relax -% Nous inhibons certaines commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} -\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we redefine them: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous les redéfinissons: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} -\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and try to use some minitoc font -% commands, but without any success: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et essayons d'utiliser quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour -% les fontes, mais sans aucun succès: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% hyperref before minitoc, optional -%% \usepackage[linktocpage=true]{hyperref}\usepackage{memhfixc} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalsize\scshape} % <- no scshape -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}{\normalsize\scshape}% <- no scshape -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont} -% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont} -% \begin{macro}{\empty} -% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But if we use the font commands of the \class{memoir} class, it works! -% \or\relax -% Mais si nous utilisons les commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}, cela marche! -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty} -\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty} -\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} -\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But for mini-table titles (font and text), we can use the \upack{minitoc} commands: -% \or\relax -% Mais pour les titres des mini-tables (fonte et texte), nous pouvons utiliser les commandes de \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\Large\scshape} -%% this is working beautifully -> -\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Chapter Contents} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The document body: -% \or\relax -% Le corps du document: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents* - -\chapter[OneA][OneB]{OneC} -\minitoc -\section{This section} \lipsum[1] -\section{Second section} \lipsum[2] -\section{Third section} \lipsum[3] -\end{document} -%</mtc-mm1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mu.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mu.tex}}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document, -% the minitoc being inserted in the text with the \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document, -% la minitoc étant incrustée dans le texte grâce au paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-mu> -\documentclass[12pt]{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\usepackage{wrapfig} -\newcommand{\LangSig}[1]{\textsc{[#1]}} % smallcaps -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{environment}{wrapfigure} -% \begin{environment}{minipage} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\linewidth} -% \begin{macro}{\vspace} -% \begin{macro}{\baselineskip} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A chapter, with its minitoc set in a \env{minipage}, included in a \env{wrapfigure} environment on the half -% of the text width, with some vertical adjustements: -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre, avec sa minitoc composée dans une \env{minipage}, incluse dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure} -% sur la moitié de la largeur du texte, avec quelques ajustements verticaux: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Mulspren}\label{chapter+mulspren} -\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\linewidth} -\begin{minipage}{\linewidth} -\vspace{-2.\baselineskip} -\minitoc -\vspace{-1.\baselineskip} -\end{minipage} -\end{wrapfigure} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{environment} -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The remaining of the text: -% \or\relax -% Le reste du texte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -The previous chapter examined many end-user programming environments -and found that most contain cognitive programming gulfs. -These gulfs were often created when programing environments used -multiple notations, and could manifest themselves in a variety of -usability problems, ranging from users being unable to understand -a program representation, to not wanting to execute their programs. -Conversely, the previous chapter also found circumstances where multiple -notations helped users understand programs. -It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming -environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating -programming gulfs. -It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming -environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating -programming gulfs. - -This chapter introduces our programming environment, Mulspren. -Mulspren was designed to avoid these gulfs and gain the potential -benefits of multiple notations. -Users program using two notations, one similar to English and one -similar to conventional code. -Changes in one notation are immediately reflected in the other notation, -and users can move rapidly and seamlessly between the notations. -This is programming using dual notations. -When the program is executed, both notations are animated. -Mulspren's language signature is \LangSig{Re/Wr/Wa + Re/Wr/Wa + Wa}. - -Papers describing Mulspren have been published in~\cite{Wright02-2} -and~\cite{Wright03-3}. - -\section{section 1} -\section{section 2 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla -bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla} -\section{section 3} -\section{section 4} -\section{section 5 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla -bla bla bla bla bla} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} -% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% I tried to find some articles of the net to fill the citations: -% \or\relax -% J'ai essayé de trouver quelques articles pour remplir les citations: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{thebibliography}{1} -\bibitem{Wright02-2} -Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. -\newblock Mulspren: a multiple language simulation programming - environment. -\newblock In {\em HCC '02: Proceedings of the IEEE 2002 Symposia - on Human Centric Computing Languages and Environments (HCC'02)}, - page 101, Washington, DC, USA, 2002. IEEE Computer Society. - -\bibitem{Wright03-3} -Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn. -\newblock Evaluation of two textual programming notations for children. -\newblock In {\em AUIC '05: Proceedings of the Sixth Australasian - conference on User interface}, pages 55--62, Darlinghurst, Australia, - Australia, 2005. - Australian Computer Society, Inc. -\end{thebibliography} -\end{document} -%</mtc-mu> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-nom.tex} document file}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-nom.tex}}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document\,\footnote{It is derived from the example given in the documentation of \pack{nomencl}.} shows -% the interaction of the \upack{minitoc} package with the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}, -% when this package uses its option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. -% \or\relax -% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'exemple donné dans la documentation de \pack{nomencl}.} montre -% l'interaction du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}, lorsque celui-ci -% utilise son option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-nom> -\documentclass[oneside]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}% - [2007/04/02] -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\makenomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the packages and prepare the nomenclature: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons les paquetages et préparons la nomenclature: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[intoc]{nomencl} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\makenomenclature -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We prepare the minitocs and the table of contents: -% \or\relax -% Nous préparons les minitocs et la table des matières: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc -\tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A first chapter, with its minitoc, a section and some -% entries for the nomenclature: -% \or\relax -% Un premier chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section et -% quelques entrées pour la nomenclature: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Angels} -\minitoc -\section{Main equations} -\begin{equation} - a=\frac{N}{A} -\end{equation}% -\nomenclature{$a$}{The number of angels per unit area}% -\nomenclature{$N$}{The number of angels per needle point}% -\nomenclature{$A$}{The area of the needle point}% -The equation $\sigma = m a$% -\nomenclature{$\sigma$}{The total mass of angels per unit area}% -\nomenclature{$m$}{The mass of one angel} -follows easily. -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We print the nomenclature; but that adds a chapter entry in -% the TOC because of the \optp{intoc}{nomencl} option of the -% \pack{nomencl}, hence we add a correction with -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (try to remove the correction and -% look at the result: the next minitocs are wrong): -% \or\relax -% Nous imprimons la nomenclature; mais ceci ajoute une entrée -% de chapitre dans la table des matières à~cause de -% l'option \optp{intoc}{nomencl} de \pack{nomencl}, donc nous -% ajoutons une correction avec \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (essayez -% de retirer correction et regardez le résultat: les minitocs -% suivantes sont fausses): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\printnomenclature \mtcfixnomenclature -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A second chapter, with its minitoc, a section, and an entry -% in the nomenclature. This entry will be present in the -% nomenclature printed above. -% \or\relax -% Un second chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section, et une -% entrée dans la nomenclature. Cette entrée sera présente dans la -% nomenclature imprimée plus haut. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Demons} -\minitoc -\section{False equations} -\begin{equation} i=\sqrt{-1} \end{equation} -\nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}% -\end{document} -%</mtc-nom> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \feat{open} and -% \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package -% to prepare a minitoc on three columns. -% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation des dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. -% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-ocf> -\documentclass[oneside]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}% - [2007/04/02] -\usepackage{multicol} % to make multi-columns. -\usepackage[french]{babel} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{fullpage} -% to allow a page breaks before a section -\let\osection\section \def\section{\penalty-1\relax\osection} -% -\usepackage[french,tight]{minitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\feat{open}'' feature for minitocs opens a \env{multicols} -% environment, with 3~columns: -% \or\relax -% Le dispositif «~\feat{open}~» pour les minitocs ouvre un -% environnement \env{multicols}, avec 3~colonnes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{3}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\feat{close}'' feature for minitocs close the \env{multicols} environment: -% \or\relax -% Le dispositif «~\feat{close}~» pour les minitocs ferme l'environnement \env{multicols}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As the \env{multicols} environment adds some vertical spacing before and after it, we added some corrections. -% -% \or\relax -% Comme l'environnement \env{multicols} ajoute un peu d'espacement avant et après lui, nous avons ajouté quelques -% corrections. - -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} -% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As the number of sections is not a multiple of three (or some entries are long), we cannot always balance the -% columns nicely, so we use ragged columns, using the ``\feat{before}'' and ``\feat{after}'' features: -% \or\relax -% Comme le nombre de sections n'est pas un multiple de trois (ou lorsque certaines entrées sont longues), nous ne -% pouvons pas toujours équilibrer les colonnes agréablement, donc nous utilisons des colonnes inégales, grâce aux -% dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» et «~\feat{after}~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the body of the document, a chapter with many sections, -% listed in a~minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Et le corps du document, un chapitre avec beaucoup de -% sections, listées dans une minitoc: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc -\tableofcontents -\chapter{Premier chapitre} -\minitoc -% A lot of sections -\section{Alfa} -\section{Bravo} -\section{Charlie} -\section{Delta} -\section{Echo} -\section{Fox-Trot} -\section{Golf} -\section{Hotel} -\section{India} -\section{Juliet} -\section{Kilo} -\section{Lima} -\section{Mike} -\section{November} -\section{Oscar} -\section{Papa} -\section{Quebec} -\section{Romeo} -\section{Sierra} -\section{Tango} -\section{Uniform} -\section{Victor} -\section{Whiskey} -\section{X-Ray} -\section{Yankee} -\section{Zulu} -\end{document} -%</mtc-ocf> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \com{mtcsetoffset} command to shift a minitoc to the left, trying to put it -% along the left margin of the text. The \feat{open} and \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package are -% also used to prepare the minitoc on three columns. -% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler vers la gauche une minitoc, en -% essayant de la placer le long de la marge gauche du texte. Les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont aussi utilisés pour préparer la minitoc sur trois colonnes. -% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-ofs> -\documentclass[a4paper]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}% - [2007/04/17] -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage{multicol} -\usepackage{fullpage} -%\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\setlength} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns} -% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns} -% \begin{environment}{multicols} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We remove the minitoc indentation and set up the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features: -% \or\relax -% Nous retirons l'indentation de la minitoc et mettons en place les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.1ex}\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.5ex]} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\kern-2.ex} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns} -\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin the document with a chapter and its minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Nous commençons le document par un chapitre et sa minitoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \faketableofcontents -\chapter{Introduction} -\minitoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As the minitoc is not aligned on the left margin of the text, we set a negative offset and print again the minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Comme la minitoc n'est pas alignée sur la marge gauche du texte, nous établissons un décalage négatif et -% ré-imprimons la minitoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-1.75em} -\mtcskip \minitoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\setlength} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But then the minitoc does not use the full width of the text; it would be better to modify both the offset and the -% indentation, each by the half of the total correction: -% \or\relax -% Mais alors la minitoc n'utilise pas toute la largeur du texte; il serait mieux de modifier à~la fois le décalage -% et l'indentation, par moitiés de la correction nécessaire: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.875em} -\setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.875em} -\mtcskip \minitoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then a lot of sections, with some text: -% \or\relax -% Puis un tas de sections, avec du texte quelconque: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{Alfa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Bravo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Charlie} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Delta} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Echo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Fox-Trot} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Golf} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Hotel} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{India} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Juliet} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Kilo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Lima} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Mike} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{November} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Oscar} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Papa} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Quebec} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Romeo} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Sierra} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Tango} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Uniform} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Victor} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Whiskey} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{X-Ray} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Yankee} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\section{Zulu} \lipsum[\arabic{section}] -\end{document} -%</mtc-ofs> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} if you add a sub-section in this example, the corresponding entry in the minitoc -% may stick out if it appears in the last column, and the offset and the indentation should then be corrected again. -% \or\relax -% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} si vous ajoutez une sous-section dans cet exemple, l'entrée correspondante dans la minitoc -% peut dépasser si elle apparaît dans la dernière colonne, et alors le décalage et l'indentation doivent de -% nouveau être corrigés. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedxxxline} -% \begin{macro}{\ext@subfigure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the -% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. -% -% The preamble loads the \pack{subfigure} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures -% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et -% ajuster leur profondeur. -% -% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfigure} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la -% liste des figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-sbf> -\documentclass[12pt]{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{subfigure} -\makeatletter -\renewcommand{\l@subfigure}{\@dottedxxxline{\ext@subfigure}{2}{3.9em}{3.3em}} -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} package (to have nice cross-references) and the \upack{minitoc} package: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons le paquetage \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} (pour avoir de meilleures références croisées) et le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{varioref} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\newcommand} -% \begin{macro}{\goodap} -% \begin{macro}{\subfigtopskip} -% \begin{macro}{\subfigbottomskip} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define some features for the layout of the subfigures, then the depth of the list of figures: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons quelques dispositifs pour la mise en place des sous-figures, puis la profondeur de la liste des -% figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\goodap}{% - \hspace{\subfigtopskip}% - \hspace{\subfigbottomskip}} -\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the depth of the mini-lists of figures, then some fonts: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons la profondeur des mini-listes des figures, puis quelques fontes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2} -\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\mtcsetfont{partlof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} -\mtcsetfont{partlof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\mtcsetfont{minilof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} -\mtcsetfont{minilof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -%% no tables in this document -%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} -%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries} -%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We prepare the minilofs, the table of contents and the list of figures: -% \or\relax -% Nous préparons les minilofs, la table des matières et la liste des figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominilof \listoffigures \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A chapter, with is minilof, twice but with different depths: -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre, avec sa minilof, deux fois mais avec des profondeurs différentes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{First Chapter} -\minilof \mtcskip -\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} \minilof -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A figure containing three subfigures and their captions: -% \or\relax -% Une figure contenant trois sous-figures et leurs captions: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{figure} -\centering - \fbox{% - \begin{minipage}{3.5in}% - \raggedright - \begin{center} - \subfigure[First]{% - \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 15mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}% - \hspace{\subfigtopskip}\hspace{\subfigbottomskip}% - \subfigure[Second Figure]{% - \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ - \subfigure[Third]{\label{3figs-c}% - \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\ - \caption{Three subfigures.}\label{3figs}% - \end{center} - \vspace{4pt}% - This figure contains two top `subfigures' and - Figure~\ref{3figs-c}. - \end{minipage}} -\end{figure} -Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and -Figure~\vref{3figs-c}. -\end{document} -%</mtc-sbf> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-scr.tex} document file}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-scr.tex}}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} document class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, -% \class{scrreprt}. -% Some precautions are needed, because these classes have specific interfaces with the TOC (class options and -% commands). -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une classe de document -% {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, -% \class{scrreprt}. Certaines précautions sont nécessaires, car ces classes ont des interfaces spécifiques avec la -% table des matières (options de classe et commandes). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-scr> -\documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} -\setcounter{tocdepth}{4} -\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -\usepackage{longtable} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{hyperref} package, if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, s'il est utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{hyperref} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% With a {\KOMAScript} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, use the \opt{k-tight} package option in place of \opt{tight}; -% as it is a document in german, use also a language package option: -% \or\relax -% Avec une classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, utilisez l'option de paquetage \opt{k-tight} au lieu -% de \opt{tight}; comme c'est un document en allemand, utilisez aussi une option de langue pour le paquetage: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[k-tight,germanb]{minitoc} -\usepackage[germanb]{babel} -\begin{document} -\pagenumbering{Roman} % page number in Roman, reset to 1 (I) -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% In this document class, with the \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, the \com{listoftables} macro -% adds a chapter entry in -% the TOC, so we must add \com{mtcaddchapter} after \com{listoftables}: -% \or\relax -% Dans cette classe de document, avec l'option de classe \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, la macro \com{listoftables} ajoute une -% entrée de niveau chapitre dans la table des matières, donc nous devons ajouter \com{mtcaddchapter} -% après \com{listoftables}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\listoftables \mtcaddchapter -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% With the \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, it is necessary to add a \com{adjustmtc} command after \com{bibliography}. -% This problem is similar to the one of compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package. -% \or\relax -% Avec l'option de classe \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, il est nécessaire d'ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} -% après \com{bibliography}. -% Ce problème est similaire à~celui de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\clearpage -\pagenumbering{arabic} % page number in arabic digits -\setcounter{page}{1} % forced to 1 - -\chapter{Test 1}\label{cha:test-1} - -Text. - -\section{Tabelle}\label{sec:tabelle} - -\begin{table} - \centering - \begin{longtable}[l]{ll} - \underline{Ausbildungsbetrieb} \hspace{10mm} & Kommanditgesellschaft -\\ - \underline{Ausbildender} & Hammer \\ - Ausbildungsstätte & XXXXX Ort - \end{longtable} - \caption{Ausbildungsbetrieb} -\end{table} - -Text. - -\appendix -\chapter{Dokumente} -\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc - -\section{Anhang}\label{sec:anhang} -Text.\\ -Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür. -\end{document} -%</mtc-scr> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-syn.tex} document file}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-syn.tex}}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when -% the table of contents is not at the beginning of the -% document, but is preceded by some starred chapters. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% lorsque la table des matières n'est pas au début du -% document, mais est placée après quelques chapitres étoilés. -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We have the preamble, then we invoke \com{dominitoc} to -% prepare the minitocs: -% \or\relax -% Nous avons le préambule, puis nous invoquons \com{dominitoc} -% pour préparer les minitocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-syn> -\documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -\usepackage{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some starred chapters, with calls to \com{mtcaddchapter} -% to synchronize. The optional argument is used when an entry -% in the ToC is wanted: -% \or\relax -% Quelques chapitres étoilés, avec des appels -% à~\com{mtcaddchapter} pour synchroniser. L'argument -% optionnel est utilisé lorsque quune entrée dans la table des -% matières est désirée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{ } % Dedication chapter, no title -\mtcaddchapter % Added for a starred chapter - % without entry in the ToC -Dedication goes here - -\chapter*{Abstract} -\mtcaddchapter[Abstract] % Added for a starred chapter - % with an entry in the ToC -Abstract goes here - -\chapter*{Declaration} -\mtcaddchapter[Declaration] % Added for a starred chapter - % with an entry in the ToC -Declaration goes here -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The table of contents comes here. Looking at the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file shows that the minitoc files inserted -% after here are from one chapter to far: we add a correction. -% \or\relax -% La table des matières vient ici. En regardant le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, nous voyons que les fichiers minitoc insérés -% après ce point correspondent à~un chapitre de trop: nous ajoutons -% une correction: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\tableofcontents \decrementmtc % Synchro added (look at the .log file) -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The following chapters are normal (unstarred): -% \or\relax -% Les chapitres suivants sont normaux (non étoilés): -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Chapter One} -\minitoc -\section{Section 1} Some text. -\section{Section 2} Some text. - -\chapter{Chapter Two} -\minitoc -\section{Another Section 1} -Some more text. -\section{Another Section 2} -Some more text. -\end{document} -%</mtc-syn> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document using -% the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document utilisant le -% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-tbi> -\documentclass[a4paper]{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We dont want an entry for the TOC in the TOC: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} for the \pack{tocbibind} package: -% \or\relax -% Nous ne voulons pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} pour -% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -\dominitoc \tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As there is no entry for the TOC in the TOC, no correction is necessary; we comment out the usual -% correction\,\footnote{It is recommended to keep this comment; you could change your mind.}: -% \or\relax -% Puisqu'il n'y a pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières, aucune correction n'est -% nécessaire: nous mettons la correction habituelle en commentaire\,\footnote{Il est recommandé de conserver ce -% commentaire; vous pourriez changer d'avis.}: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%% tocbibind compatibility -%% not used if nottoc option : -%% \mtcaddchapter[] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A starred chapter with an entry in the TOC; we add it; -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée dans la table des matières; nous l'ajoutons: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{Introduction} -\mtcaddchapter[Introduction] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some normal chapters: -% \or\relax -% Quelques chapitres normaux: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Title of chapter~1} -\minitoc -\section{as1} \section{as2} -\chapter{Title of chapter~2} -\minitoc -\section{bs1} \section{bs2} -\chapter{Title of chapter~3} -\minitoc -\section{cs1} \section{cs2} -\chapter{Title of chapter~4} -\minitoc -\section{ds1} \section{ds2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC: -% \or\relax -% Un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{Conclusion} -\mtcaddchapter[Conclusion] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter*} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\section*} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Yet another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC, but with starred sections, also listed in the TOC: -% \or\relax -% Encore un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières, mais avec des sections étoilées, -% elles aussi listées dans la table des matières: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter*{Appendices} -\mtcaddchapter[Appendices] -\minitoc -\section*{first appendix} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% - {first appendix} -\section*{second appendix} -\addcontentsline{toc}{section}% - {second appendix} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The list of figures has an entry in the TOC (via the \pack{tocbibind} package), so a correction must be applied: -% \or\relax -% La liste des figures a une entrée dans la table des matières (via le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}), donc une -% correction doit être appliquée: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%% tocbibind compatibility -\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} -% \begin{macro}{\bibitem} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{tocbibind} package adds an entry in the TOC for the bibliography, so we must add the recommended -% correction: -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières pour la bibliographie, donc nous -% devons ajouter la correction recommandée: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{thebibliography}{3} - \bibitem {s1}{title ...} -\end{thebibliography} -%% tocbibind compatibility -\adjustmtc -\end{document} -%</mtc-tbi> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of the \class{article} class. -% It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. -% \or\relax -% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{article}. -% C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-tlc> -\documentclass{article} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}% - [2007/01/04] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\setlength} -% \begin{macro}{\textwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\textheight} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Dimensions of the text on the page: -% \or\relax -% Dimensions du texte sur la page: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength{\textwidth}% - {124.20126pt} -\setlength{\textheight}% - {19\baselineskip} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{4} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\setlength} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and set some parameters (indentation, base font and depth) for the secttocs: -% \or\relax -% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et établissons quelques paramètres (indentation, fonte de base et -% profondeur) pour les secttocs: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\usepackage{minitoc} -\setlength{\stcindent}{0pt} -\mtcsetfont{secttoc}{*}% - {\footnotesize} -\mtcsetdepth{secttoc}{3} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We prepare the secttocs, without title, and the table of contents which is not printed: -% \or\relax -% Nous préparons les secttocs, sans titre, et la table des matières qui n'est pas imprimée: -% \fi -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\dosecttoc[e] \faketableofcontents - -\section{Afghanistan} \secttoc -\subsection{Geography} -\subsubsection{Total area} - 647,500 km2 -\subsubsection{Land area} - 647,500 km2 -\subsection{History} \ldots - -\section{Albania} \secttoc -\subsection{Geography} -\subsubsection{Total area} - 28,750 km2 -\subsubsection{Land area} - 27,400 km2 -\subsection{History} \ldots -\end{document} -%</mtc-tlc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{multicols}}% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} -% The \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} -% Le document \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This document\footnote{It is derived from one of the examples distributed with -% the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.} shows -% the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the -% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth. -% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area. -% -% The preamble loads the \pack{subfig} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures: -% \or\relax -% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'un des exemples distribués avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.} -% montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures -% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et -% ajuster leur profondeur. -% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte. -% -% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfig} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la -% liste des figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-tsf> -\documentclass{report} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]% -\usepackage{fullpage} -\usepackage[config=altsf]{subfig} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is utility code to make graduated rules and a box around a figure. -% \or\relax -% Ceci est du code utilitaire pour faire un trait gradué et une boîte autour d'une figure. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\testtemp -\newcommand{\ru}[1]{% - \testtemp #1% - \advance\testtemp .5pt \divide\testtemp 2% - \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% - \vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt\hfil}\hfil}% - \hbox to 0pt{\hss\vrule height3mm depth0pt width.25pt\hss}% - \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{% - \hfil\vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt}\hfil}} -%% -\fboxsep=-\fboxrule -\newcommand{\figbox}[1]{% - \fbox{\vbox to 1in{% - \vfil\hbox to 2in{\parbox{2in}{\centering #1}}\vfil - \vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox to 2in{\hfil\ru{1.1in}\hfil}}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The body of the document. We set the depth of the list of figures and prepare the minilofs and the list of -% figures: -% \or\relax -% Le corps du document. Nous définissons la profondeur de la liste des figures et préparons les minilofs et la liste -% des figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} \dominilof \listoffigures -\newpage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A chapter containing a figure with subfigures. We print its minilof twice, with different depths: -% \or\relax -% Un chapitre contenant une figure avec des sous-figures. Nous imprimons sa minilof deux fois, avec des -% profondeurs différentes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Reference Test} -\minilof \mtcskip -\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} -\minilof - -\begin{figure}[ht]% - \centering - \subfigure{% - \label{fig+A}\figbox{SUBFIGURE ONE:\\(no opt)}} - \quad - \subfigure[]{% - \label{fig+B}\figbox{SUBFIGURE TWO:\\(empty opt)}}\\ - - \subfigure[Subfigure Three.]{% - \label{fig+C}\figbox{SUBFIGURE THREE:\\(opt)}} - \quad - \subfigure[][Subfigure Four.]{% - \label{fig+D}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FOUR:\\(empty opt and opt)}} - \quad - \subfigure[][]{% - \label{fig+E}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FIVE:\\(both empty opt)}}\\ - - \subfigure[The Sixth Subfigure.][Subfigure Six.]{% - \label{fig+F}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SIX:\\(both opt)}} - \quad - \subfigure[The Seventh Subfigure][]{% - \label{fig+G}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SEVEN:\\(opt and empty opt)}} - - \caption{Optional argument test.}% - \label{fig+main}% -\end{figure} - -The figure~\ref{fig+main} on page~\pageref{fig+main} is composed -of the seven subfigures~\subref{fig+A} (aka: \ref{fig+A}), -\subref{fig+B} (aka: \ref{fig+B}), \subref{fig+C} (aka: \ref{fig+C}), -\subref{fig+D} (aka: \ref{fig+D}), \subref{fig+E} (aka: \ref{fig+E}), -\subref{fig+F} (aka: \ref{fig+F}), and \subref{fig+G} (aka: \ref{fig+G}). - -\section{Centering Test} -Note that figures~\ref{fig+B}, \ref{fig+E} and \ref{fig+G} are centered. -This means that \verb|\subfigcapskip| has been set to zero and is not -offsetting the simple label to the left. Also the remaining captioned -subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should -have centered labels. -\end{document} -%</mtc-tsf> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \flushcolumns -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uexam{mtc-vti.tex} document file}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-vti.tex}}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \exam{mtc-vti.tex} example shows how to change the sectionnal titles when they appear in a mini-table: a -% section title (or a chapter title) can have variants in a parttoc or in a minitoc (similar effects are possible -% with figure ou table titles). Such entries are said ``polymorphic'' (section~\vref{ss+polym}). -% First, the preamble of the document, with utility packages: -% \or\relax -% L'exemple \exam{mtc-vti.tex} montre comment changer des titres de sectionnements lorsqu'ils apparaissent dans -% une mini-table: un titre de section (ou de chapitre) peut avoir des variantes dans une parttoc ou une minitoc -% (des effets similaires sont possibles avec des titres de figures ou de tableaux). -% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~» (section~\vref{ss+polym}). -% Tout d'abord, le préambule du document, avec les paquetages utilitaires: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtc-vti> -\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book} -\ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]% -\usepackage{lipsum} -\usepackage{txfonts} -\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the demonstration, we will use a parttoc and a minitoc, so we must prepare them: -% \or\relax -% Pour la démonstration, nous utiliserons une parttoc et une minitoc, donc nous devons les préparer: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\dominitoc -\doparttoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We will use a multi-form title for the first section: a form to appear in the parttoc (``Alfa in parttoc''), -% a form to appear in the minitoc of the chapter (``Alfa in minitoc''), a form to appear elsewhere (``Alfa out subtoc''), -% and a form as title at the beginning othe section (``Alfa the first section''). So we define a command -% \ucom{alfati} using the flags \com{ifinparttoc} and \com{ifinminitoc} to select which title is used in each of -% its instances. -% \or\relax -% Nous utiliserons un titre multi-forme pour la première section: une forme devant apparaître dans la parttoc -% («~Alfa in parttoc~»), une forme pour apparaître dans la minitoc du chapitre (<<~Alfa in minitoc~»), -% une forme pour apparaître ailleurs («~Alfa out subtoc~»), et une forme comme titre en début de la section -% («~Alfa the first section~»). Donc nous définissons une commande \ucom{alfati} utilisant les -% indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc} et \com{ifinminitoc} pour sélectionner le titre à~utiliser dans chacune des ses instances. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\alfati{\ifinparttoc Alfa in parttoc - \else\ifinminitoc Alfa in minitoc - \else Alfa out subtoc - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But we can define a more general macro, \ucom{varsecti}, with three arguments for the three variants -% of a section title\,\footnote{You will eventually need to define similar macros for other sectionning commands or for -% figures or table titles; proceed with care from this model.}: -% \or\relax -% Mais nous pouvons définir une macro plus générale, \ucom{varsecti}, avec trois arguments pour les trois variantes -% d'un titre de section\,\footnote{Vous aurez éventuellement besoin de définir des macros similaires pour d'autres -% commandes de sectionnement ou pour les titres de figures ou de tableaux; procédez avec soin à~partir de ce modèle.}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\varsecti}[3]% - {\ifinparttoc{#1}\relax - \else\ifinminitoc{#2}\relax - \else{#3}\relax - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the document with a table of contents, a part with its parttoc and a chapter with its minitoc. And an other -% chapter. You can verify that the entry for the ``Alfa'' section varies in the main toc, the parttoc, the -% minitoc and the effective title of the section. -% Note that the variable title (here \ucom{alfati}) should be defined \virage\emph{before} any use, like in the main -% toc or any minitable. -% \or\relax -% Puis le document avec une table des matières, une partie avec sa parttoc et un chapitre avec sa minitoc. Puis un -% autre chapitre. Vous pouvez vérifier que l'entrée pour la section «~Alfa~» change dans la table des matières -% principale, la parttoc, la minitoc et dans le titre effectif de la section. -% Notez que le titre variable (ici \ucom{alfati}) doit être défini \virage\emph{avant} toute utilisation, comme -% dans la table des matières principale ou dans une des minitables. -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\protect} -% \begin{macrocode} -\tableofcontents -\part{Part~A} -\parttoc - -\chapter{One} -\minitoc -\section[\protect\alfati]{Alfa the first section} -\lipsum[1] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We can use the more general macro \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{This macro is not part of the \upack{minitoc} package, it is -% just an example.}, with its three arguments given when the section begins; but that macro must -% be \virage\emph{protected} (or look at the \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} package by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), -% or declared ``robust'' by \com{DeclareRobustCommand} as above: -% \or\relax -% Nous pouvons utiliser la macro plus générale \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{Cette macro ne fait pas partie du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}, c'est simplement un exemple.}, avec ses trois arguments fournis lors du début de la section; -% mais cette macro doit être \virage\emph{protégée} (ou regardez le paquetage \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} -% de \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), ou déclarée «~robuste~» par \com{DeclareRobustCommand} comme plus haut: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\section[\varsecti{Bravo in parttoc}% - {Bravo in minitoc}% - {Bravo out of subtoc}]% % in maintoc and headers - {Bravo the second section} % local title -\lipsum[2] -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But is is even easier to use a ``polymorphic'' entry in the optionnal argument\,\footnote{They are no secttocs -% in a book-class document, but all the four arguments of \com{mtcpolymtoc} must be specified, even empty!}: -% \or\relax -% Mais il est encore plus facile d'utiliser une entrée «~polymorphique~» dans l'argument optionnel\,\footnote{Il -% n'y~a pas de secttocs dans un document de classe book, mais les quatre arguments de \com{mtcpolymtoc} doivent -% tous être spécifiés, même vides!}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\chapter{Two} -\minitoc -\section[\mtcpolymtoc% - {Charlie in parttoc}% - {Charlie in minitoc}% - {Charlie in secttoc}% % <- see/voir note - {Charlie out subtoc}]% - {Charlie} -\lipsum[3] -\end{document} -%</mtc-vti> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages} -% \fi -% \minitoc -% \mtcskip -% \minilot -% \mtcskip -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \def\mstrut{\rule[-5pt]{0pt}{5pt}} -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Message identifiers]{Message identifiers (click on a message identifier to see its meaning).}\label{t+allmess} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Identificateurs des messages]{Identificateurs des messages (cliquez sur un identificateur de message -% pour voir sa signification).}\label{t+allmess} -% \fi\relax -% ^^A {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}} -% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}} -% \toprule -% \mstrut\lmess{E0001}&&\lmess{E0002}&&\lmess{E0003}&&\lmess{E0004}&&\lmess{E0005}&&\lmess{E0006}&&\lmess{E0007}&&\lmess{E0008}&&\lmess{E0009}&&\lmess{E0010}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{E0011}&&\lmess{E0012}&&\lmess{E0013}&&\lmess{E0014}&&\lmess{E0015}&&\lmess{E0016}&&\lmess{E0017}&&\lmess{E0018}&&\lmess{E0019}&&\lmess{E0020}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{E0021}&&\lmess{E0022}&&\lmess{E0023}&&\lmess{E0024}&&\lmess{E0025}&&\lmess{E0026}&&\lmess{E0027}&&\lmess{E0028}&&\lmess{E0029}&&\lmess{E0030}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{E0031}&&\lmess{E0032}&&\lmess{E0033}&&\lmess{E0034}&&\lmess{E0035}&&\lmess{E0036}&&\lmess{E0037}&&\lmess{E0038}&&\lmess{E0039}&&\lmess{E0040}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{E0041}&&\lmess{E0042}&&\lmess{E0043}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \mstrut\lmess{F0001}&&\lmess{F0002}&&\lmess{F0003}&&\lmess{F0004}&&\lmess{F0005}&&\lmess{F0006}&&\lmess{F0007}&&\lmess{F0008}&&\lmess{F0009}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \mstrut\lmess{I0000}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0001}&&\lmess{I0002}&&\lmess{I0003}&&\lmess{I0004}&&\lmess{I0005}&&\lmess{I0006}&&\lmess{I0007}&&\lmess{I0008}&&\lmess{I0009}&&\lmess{I0010}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0011}&&\lmess{I0012}&&\lmess{I0013}&&\lmess{I0014}&&\lmess{I0015}&&\lmess{I0016}&&\lmess{I0017}&&\lmess{I0018}&&\lmess{I0019}&&\lmess{I0020}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0021}&&\lmess{I0022}&&\lmess{I0023}&&\lmess{I0024}&&\lmess{I0025}&&\lmess{I0026}&&\lmess{I0027}&&\lmess{I0028}&&\lmess{I0029}&&\lmess{I0030}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0031}&&\lmess{I0032}&&\lmess{I0033}&&\lmess{I0034}&&\lmess{I0035}&&\lmess{I0036}&&\lmess{I0037}&&\lmess{I0038}&&\lmess{I0039}&&\lmess{I0040}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0041}&&\lmess{I0042}&&\lmess{I0043}&&\lmess{I0044}&&\lmess{I0045}&&\lmess{I0046}&&\lmess{I0047}&&\lmess{I0048}&&\lmess{I0049}&&\lmess{I0050}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{I0051}&&\lmess{I0052}&&\lmess{I0053}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \mstrut\lmess{M0001}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \mstrut\lmess{W0001}&&\lmess{W0002}&&\lmess{W0003}&&\lmess{W0004}&&\lmess{W0005}&&\lmess{W0006}&&\lmess{W0007}&&\lmess{W0008}&&\lmess{W0009}&&\lmess{W0010}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0011}&&\lmess{W0012}&&\lmess{W0013}&&\lmess{W0014}&&\lmess{W0015}&&\lmess{W0016}&&\lmess{W0017}&&\lmess{W0018}&&\lmess{W0019}&&\lmess{W0020}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0021}&&\lmess{W0022}&&\lmess{W0023}&&\lmess{W0024}&&\lmess{W0025}&&\lmess{W0026}&&\lmess{W0027}&&\lmess{W0028}&&\lmess{W0029}&&\lmess{W0030}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0031}&&\lmess{W0032}&&\lmess{W0033}&&\lmess{W0034}&&\lmess{W0035}&&\lmess{W0036}&&\lmess{W0037}&&\lmess{W0038}&&\lmess{W0039}&&\lmess{W0040}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0041}&&\lmess{W0042}&&\lmess{W0043}&&\lmess{W0044}&&\lmess{W0045}&&\lmess{W0046}&&\lmess{W0047}&&\lmess{W0048}&&\lmess{W0049}&&\lmess{W0050}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0051}&&\lmess{W0052}&&\lmess{W0053}&&\lmess{W0054}&&\lmess{W0055}&&\lmess{W0056}&&\lmess{W0057}&&\lmess{W0058}&&\lmess{W0059}&&\lmess{W0060}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0061}&&\lmess{W0062}&&\lmess{W0063}&&\lmess{W0064}&&\lmess{W0065}&&\lmess{W0066}&&\lmess{W0067}&&\lmess{W0068}&&\lmess{W0069}&&\lmess{W0070}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0071}&&\lmess{W0072}&&\lmess{W0073}&&\lmess{W0074}&&\lmess{W0075}&&\lmess{W0076}&&\lmess{W0077}&&\lmess{W0078}&&\lmess{W0079}&&\lmess{W0080}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0081}&&\lmess{W0082}&&\lmess{W0083}&&\lmess{W0084}&&\lmess{W0085}&&\lmess{W0086}&&\lmess{W0087}&&\lmess{W0088}&&\lmess{W0089}&&\lmess{W0090}\\ -% \mstrut\lmess{W0091}&&\lmess{W0092}&&\lmess{W0093}&&\lmess{W0094}&&\lmess{W0095}&&\lmess{W0096}&&\lmess{W0097}&&\lmess{W0098}&&\lmess{W0099}&&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}} -% \end{table} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Introduction} -% This chapter lists and comments the messages given by the \upack{minitoc} package, and is associates, -% \pack{mtcoff} and \pack{mtcpatchmem}\footnote{The -% texts of the messages given in this chapter may slighty differ from the real text, because some messages contain -% variable elements and the layout may vary.}. -% The table~\vref{t+allmess} lists all messages; in this table, you can click on a message identifier to find quickly its meaning. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The first line of each message contains usually the name of the package and an unique identifier (this -% identifier may be useful to search in this chapter of the documentation, but has no special meaning, -% except the leading letter: \texttt{I}~for informative, \texttt{W}~for warning, and \texttt{E}~for error). -% \item Informative messages are written only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file; the prefix is~\texttt{F} -% for the warning messages from the \pack{mtcoff} package and~\texttt{M} for the informative message from -% the \pack{mtcpatchmem} package. -% \item Warning messages are shown on the screen (but often too quickly to be seen, because normally \LaTeX\ does not stop -% for warnings) and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% \item Error messages are shown on the screen and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, -% but \LaTeX\ stops, so you can ask for help by typing~``\texttt{h}''. -% \item In this chapter, some words in the messages are typeset in italic characters; they represent the variable -% parts of the message: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \emph{ARG1}~The first argument of the command. -% \item \emph{ARG2}~The second argument of the command. -% \item \emph{ARG3}~The third argument of the command. -% \item \emph{\CCC}~The name of the class of your document. -% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~The name of the command. -% \item \emph{\CTR}~The name of a \LaTeX\ counter. -% \item \emph{document}~The name of your document, without its \suffix{.tex} extension. -% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~The extension part of the name of a file. -% \item \emph{\FILE}~The name of a file (often a minitoc auxiliary file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} -% file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file, or the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file). -% \item \emph{\INAME}~The name of an internal macro redefined by a \verb|\mtcset...| command. -% \item \emph{\LLL}~The name of the language (for \com{mtcselectlanguage}). -% \item \emph{\NNN}~The number of the line in the source file. -% \item \emph{macro}~The name of a minitoc font command redefined by \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~The new value of a title redefined by \com{mtcsettitle}. -% \item \emph{\NB}~The number of mini-tables of the given type in your document (when you are using short -% extensions and that number is greater than~99). -% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~The new value of an offset redefined by \com{mtcsetoffset}. -% \item \emph{\PREPA}~The name of a minitoc preparation command. -% \item \emph{\SEQ}~A sequence of commands used to redefine an internal macro via a \verb|\mtcset...| command. -% \item \emph{\STRING}~A string of characters, often part of a command name. -% \item \emph{\VAL}~The new value of a counter. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% The messages are produced using macros from the \pack{mtcmess} package, described in chapter~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Introduction} -% Ce chapitre liste et commente les messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, et ses associés \pack{mtcoff} et -% \pack{mtcpatchmem}\,\footnote{Les -% textes des messages donnés dans ce chapitre peuvent être légèrement différents du texte réel, car certains -% messages contiennent des éléments variables et la mise en page peut aussi varier.}. -% Le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} liste tous les messages; vous pouvez cliquer dans ce tableau sur un identifieur de message pour -% trouver rapidement sa signification. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item La première ligne de chaque message contient normalement le nom du paquetage et un identificateur unique -% (il peut être utile pour chercher dans ce chapitre de la documentation, mais n'a aucune signification -% particulière, sauf la lettre de tête: \texttt{I}~pour informatif, \texttt{W}~pour avertissement (\emph{warning}), -% et \texttt{E}~pour erreur); le préfixe est~\texttt{F} pour les messages d'avertissement émis par le -% paquetage \pack{mtcoff} et~\texttt{M} pour le message informatif émis par le paquetage \pack{mtcpatchmem}. -% \item Les messages informatifs ne sont écrits que dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% \item Les messages d'avertissement (\emph{warning}) sont affichés sur l'écran (mais souvent trop rapidement pour -% être vus, car normalement \LaTeX\ ne s'arrête pas pour les avertissements) et sont écrits dans -% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% \item Les messages d'erreur (\emph{error}) sont affichés sur l'écran et écrits dans le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, mais \LaTeX\ s'arrête, donc vous pouvez demander de l'aide -% en tapant~«~\texttt{h}~» (\emph{help}). -% \item Dans ce chapitre, certains mots dans les messages sont écrits en italique; ils représentent les parties -% variables du message: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \emph{ARG1}~Le premier argument de la commande. -% \item \emph{ARG2}~Le deuxième argument de la commande. -% \item \emph{ARG3}~Le troisième argument de la commande. -% \item \emph{\CCC}~Le nom de la classe de votre document. -% \item \emph{\COMMAND}~Le nom de la commande. -% \item \emph{\STRING}~Une chaîne de caractères, faisant souvent partie d'un nom de commande. -% \item \emph{\CTR}~Le nom d'un compteur \LaTeX. -% \item \emph{document}~Le nom de votre document, sans son suffixe \suffix{.tex}. -% \item \emph{\FILE}~Le nom d'un fichier (Souvent un fichier auxiliaire minitoc, le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, -% ou le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}). -% \item \emph{\LLL}~Le nom de la langue (pour \com{mtcselectlanguage}). -% \item \emph{\NNN}~Le numéro de la ligne dans le fichier source. -% \item \emph{macro}~Le nom d'une commande de fonte minitoc redéfinie par \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \item \emph{\NTITLE}~La nouvelle valeur d'un titre redéfinie par \com{mtcsettitle}. -% \item \emph{\NB}~Le nombre de mini-tables du type donné dans votre document (lorsque vous utilisez des -% suffixes courts et que ce nombre dépasse~99). -% \item \emph{\INAME}~Le nom d'une macro interne redéfinie par une commande \verb|\mtcset...|. -% \item \emph{\OFFSET}~La nouvelle valeur d'un déplacement (décalage) redéfinie par \com{mtcsetoffset}. -% \item \emph{\PREPA}~Le nom d'une commande minitoc de préparation. -% \item \emph{\SEQ}~Une séquence de commandes utilisée pour redéfinir une macro interne via une commande -% \verb|\mtcset...|. -% \item \emph{\EXTEN}~La partie suffixe du nom d'un fichier. -% \item \emph{\VAL}~La nouvelle valeur d'un compteur. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% Les messages sont produits en utilisant des macros du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}, -% décrit au chapitre~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}. -% \fi -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Messages from the \upack{minitoc} package} -% \or\relax -% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Informative messages} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Messages informatifs} -% \fi -% \begin{xmessage}[I0000] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package: minitoc 2008/07/16 v60 Package minitoc (JPFD)| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is the announce message of the \upack{minitoc} package, with its name, date and version. ``JPFD'' are my -% initials. This message has no real identifier because it is emitted by \com{ProvidesPackage}, but, for indexing it, -% we use \texttt{I0000}. -% \or\relax -% Ceci est le message annonçant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec son nom, sa date et sa version. «~JPFD~» sont -% mes initiales. Ce message n'a pas d'identificateur réel car il est émis par \com{ProvidesPackage}, mais, pour -% l'indexer, nous utilisons \texttt{I0000}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0001] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0001|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) *** minitoc package, version 60 ***.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Remember the version of the package. -% \or\relax -% Rappel de la version du paquetage. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0002] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0002|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Autoconfiguration of extensions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \upack{minitoc} package tries to determine if short or long extensions for file names are used by the operating -% system. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye de déterminer si des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers ou longs sont -% utilisés par le système d'exploitation. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0003] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0003|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the chapter level, -% but \emph{not} the mini-table commands at the section level. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des -% mini-tables au niveau chapitre, \emph{mais pas} les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% \begin{xmessage}[I0004] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0004|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) chapter level macros NOT available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} available, so you cannot use the mini-table commands at the -% chapter level, but, if the \com{section} sectionning command is available, you can use mini-table commands at -% the section level. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les -% commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre, mais, si la commande de sectionnement \com{section} est -% disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0005] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0005|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) compatible with hyperref.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This version of \upack{minitoc} is compatible with the \pack{hyperref} package. -% \or\relax -% Cette version de \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0006] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0006|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb| is empty on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The auxiliary file for a mini-table is found empty (or inexistent) when \upack{minitoc} tries to insert it. If -% the \optd{checkfiles} option is active, it is skipped. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est trouvé vide (ou inexistant) lorsque \upack{minitoc} essaye de -% l'insérer. Si l'option \optd{checkfiles} est active, il est sauté. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0007] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0007|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are activated|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The horizontal rules will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. -% \or\relax -% Les filets horizontaux seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0008] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0008|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Horizontal rules are inhibited|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The horizontal rules will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. -% \or\relax -% Les filets horizontaux seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0009] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0009|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Listing minitoc auxiliary files.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Creating the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.maf file.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used the \optd{listfiles} package option. A list of the minitoc auxiliary files is written in the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. It may be helpful to delete these files. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% This option is the default since version~\#48. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. Une liste des fichiers auxiliaires pour minitoc est -% écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Ceci peut être utile pour détruire ces fichiers. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% Cette option est active par défaut depuis la version~\#48. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0010] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0010|\\ -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: The |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language is selected.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has been successfully loaded for the \emph{\LLL} language\footnote{The -% \xfile{english.mld} file is always loaded first, to have english as default language.} -% by the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command at line~\emph{\NNN}. The titles for the mini-tables are changed. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} a été correctement chargé pour la langue \emph{\LLL},\footnote{Le -% fichier \xfile{english.mld} est toujours chargé d'abord, pour avoir l'anglais comme langue par défaut.} par la commande -% \com{mtcselectlanguage} à~la ligne~\emph{\NNN}. Les titres pour les mini-tables sont changés. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0011] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0011|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language object selected.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has successfully (indirectly) loaded -% the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc object file. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a (indirectement) chargé avec succès le fichier minitoc objet de langue -% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0012] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0012|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating system is able to use long extensions; this will be the -% default. -% \or\relax -% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation est capable d'utiliser des suffixes longs; ce sera -% le choix par défaut. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0013] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0013|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth redefines the counter|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\CTR}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetdepth} macro changes the value of the specified depth counter and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsetdepth} change la valeur du compteur de profondeur spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} -% demandée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0014] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0014|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature redefines the macro| -% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetfeature} macro has redefined the internal macro \emph{\INAME} with the given \emph{\SEQ}. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsetfeature} a redéfini la macro interne \emph{\INAME} par la \emph{\SEQ} donnée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0015] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0015|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont redefines the macro|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{macro}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetfont} command redefines the (old style) \emph{macro} by the given \emph{\SEQ} of font -% commands. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} redéfinit la macro (en ancien style) par la \emph{\SEQ} de commandes de fontes -% donnée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0016] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0016|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat redefines the macro|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as "|\emph{ARG3}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{mtcsetformat} redefines an internal macro with the value given by its third argument. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsetformat} redéfinit une macro interne avec la valeur de son troisième argument. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0017] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0017|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle redefines the macro|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\NTITLE}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A mini-table title is redefined via the \com{mtcsettitle} macro. -% \or\relax -% Un titre de mini-table est redéfini via la macro \com{mtcsettitle}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0018] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0018|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont redefines the macro|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro redefines the (old style) \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} macro which the given sequence -% \emph{\SEQ}. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} redéfinit la macro \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} (ancien style) par la séquence \emph{\SEQ} -% donnée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0019] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0019|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) No hints have been written|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \optd{hints} package option has detected no potential problem. -% \or\relax -% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} n'a détecté aucun problème potentiel. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0020] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0020|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) old version of the memoir class.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The version of the \class{memoir} class is old. The \upack{minitoc} package does not need to patch this class. -% \or\relax -% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est ancienne. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas besoin de corriger -% cette classe. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0021] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0021|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are activated|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The page numbers will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. -% \or\relax -% Les numéros de pages seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0022] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0022|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Page numbers are inhibited|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The page numbers will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}. -% \or\relax -% Les numéros de pages seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0023] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0023|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) part level macros available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{part} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the part level. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des -% mini-tables au niveau partie. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0024] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0024|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINITOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dominitoc} command prepares the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files for minitocs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dominitoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minitoc} pour les minitocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0025] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0025|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{doparttoc} command prepares the \texttt{parttoc} auxiliary files for parttocs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{doparttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{parttoc} pour les parttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0026] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0026|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dosecttoc} command prepares the \texttt{secttoc} auxiliary files for secttocs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dosecttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{secttoc} pour les secttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0027] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0027| -% \verb|(minitoc) recent version of the memoir class.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The version of the \class{memoir} class is recent. The \upack{minitoc} package will try to patch it. -% \or\relax -% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va essayer de corriger cette -% classe. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0028] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0028|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{section} sectionning command is available but the \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} -% available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the section level. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} est disponible mais la commande de sectionnement -% \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au -% niveau section. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0029] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0029|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) section level macros NOT available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{section} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the section level commands of -% the \upack{minitoc} package are not available. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au -% niveau section du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0030] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0030|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) the memoir class is loaded:|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) compatibility attempted.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \class{memoir} document class is used. The \upack{minitoc} package tries to ensure compatibility. -% \or\relax -% La classe de document \class{memoir} est utilisée. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye d'assurer la compatibilité. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0031] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0031|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for UNIX-like|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (long extensions) file names.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating uses UNIX-like (long extensions) file names. -% \or\relax -% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers à~la mode UNIX -% (suffixes longs). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0032] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0032|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) This version of the memoir class uses|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) a version of \chapter which is|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) incompatible with the minitoc package.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) We try to patch.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \class{memoir} class uses a version of the \com{chapter} command which needs to be corrected because its syntax has -% been changed. A patch is loaded. -% \or\relax -% La classe \class{memoir} utilise une version de la commande \com{chapter} qui a besoin d'être corrigée car sa -% syntaxe a changé. Une correction (\emph{patch}) est chargée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0033] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0033|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Writing |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% An auxiliary file for a mini-table is written by a \upack{minitoc} preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}). -% \or\relax -% Un fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est écrit par une commande \upack{minitoc} de préparation -% (telle que \com{dominitoc}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0034] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0034|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dominilof} command prepares the \upack{minilof} auxiliary files for minilofs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dominilof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minilof} pour les minilofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0035] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0035|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dopartlof} command prepares the \texttt{partlof} auxiliary files for partlofs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dopartlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlof} pour les partlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0036] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0036|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dosectlof} command prepares the \texttt{sectlof} auxiliary files for sectlofs from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dosectlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlof} pour les sectlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0037] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0037|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING MINILOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dominilot} command prepares the \texttt{minilot} auxiliary files for minilots from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dominilot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{minilot} pour les minilots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0038] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0038|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dopartlot} command prepares the \texttt{partlot} auxiliary files for partlots from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dopartlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlot} pour les partlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0039] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0039|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \com{dosectlot} command prepares the \texttt{sectlot} auxiliary files for sectlots from \emph{\FILE}. -% \or\relax -% Une commande \com{dosectlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlot} pour les sectlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Informative messages for hints} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Messages informatifs pour les indications (\emph{hints})} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0040] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0040|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ``abstract'' package has been|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You need to look at the|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) documentation to adjust.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using the \pack{abstract} package with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, -% you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq.27}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{abstract} avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, -% vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq.27}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0041] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0041|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsbook class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using the \class{amsbook} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{amsbook}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0042] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0042|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The appendix package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using also the \pack{appendix} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+appendix}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{appendix}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+appendix}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0043] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0043|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The KOMAScript |\emph{\CCC}\verb| class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using also the \emph{\CCC} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. -% The classes involved here are \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl}, i.e., the \KOMAScript{} -% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible with \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez aussi la classe \emph{\CCC}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. -% Les classes concernées ici sont \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl}, c'est-à-dire les -% classes \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0044] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0044|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The memoir class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using the \class{memoir} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0045] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0045|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The |\texttt{\bs}\PREPA\verb| command|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) has been invoked more than once|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A minitoc preparation command has been invoked more than once. -% \or\relax -% Une commande minitoc de préparation a été invoquée plus d'une fois. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0046] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0046|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocbibind package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using also the \pack{tocbibind} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0047] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0047|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The tocloft package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) See the minitoc package documentation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) for specific precautions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you are using also the \pack{tocloft} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation -% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0048] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0048|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Using \mtcprepare may induce some|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hints about the preparation commands,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) because it invokes ALL the preparation|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) commands allowed by the document class,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without any previous check.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcprepare} command invoke all the possible preparation commands, depending only on the document class and the -% available contents files. It does not known exactly what you want, so it can prepare too many mini-tables -% files. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque toutes les commandes de préparation possibles, selon la classe du document et -% les fichiers de contenu disponibles. Elle ne sait pas exactement ce que vous désirez, donc elle peut préparer trop -% de fichiers de mini-tables. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0049] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0049|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ==> You requested the hints option.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints are eventually given below.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As you have requested the \optd{hints} package option (which is set by default), some ``hints'' are eventually -% given in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can find them easily by searching for the string -% ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' with a text editor. -% \or\relax -% Puisque vous avez demandé l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} (qui est activée par défaut), quelques -% «~indications~» (\emph{hints}) sont éventuellement écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. Vous -% pourrez les trouver facilement en recherchant la chaîne «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0050] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0050|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld" file is missing.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or -% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution -% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue \emph{\LLL} ne sera pas -% disponible. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0051] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0051|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo" file is missing.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Please install it from a recent distribution|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or -% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution -% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue ne sera pas -% disponible. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0052] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0052|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset redefines the offset|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) "|\mbox{\emph{\OFFSET}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetoffset} macro changes the value of the specified offset and forces it to \emph{\VAL}. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsetoffset} change la valeur du déplacement spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL} -% demandée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[I0053] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0053|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) You have loaded the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package;|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) please be aware that the minitoc package|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) facilities can not be used for new types|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) of floats defined by the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package|\\ -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \upack{minitoc} package does not manage new types of floats defined via the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, -% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} -% and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{As the -% \pack{trivfloat} and \pack{rotfloat} packages load the \pack{float} package, this message will then appear twice!}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne traite pas les nouveaux types de flottants définis via les -% paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, -% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{Comme les paquetages -% \pack{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat} chargent le paquetage -% \pack{float}, ce message apparaîtra alors deux fois!}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Warning messages} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0001] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0001|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixglossary without|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the -% \com{mtcfixglossary} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very -% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), -% donc la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). -% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0002] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0002|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixindex without|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the -% \com{mtcfixindex} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very -% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), -% donc la macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). -% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0003] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0003|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \firstchapteris is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0004] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0004|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \firstpartis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0005] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0005|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \firstsectionis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0006] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0006|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixglossary can only be used|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcfixglossary} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because -% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix -% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0007] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0007|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixindex can only be used|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcfixindex} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because -% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix -% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0008] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0008|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilof} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dominilof} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilof}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0009] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0009|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) MINILOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilot} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dominilot} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilot}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0010] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0010|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) MINITOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominitoc} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dominitoc} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominitoc}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dominitoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0011] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0011|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlof} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dopartlof} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlof}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0012] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0012|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlot} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dopartlot} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlot}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0013] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0013|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{doparttoc} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{doparttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{doparttoc}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{doparttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0014] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0014|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlof} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dosectlof} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlof}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0015] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0015|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlot} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dosectlot} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlot}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0016] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0016|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosecttoc} command. Please check if -% you have called \com{dosecttoc} in the correct sequence of commands. -% \or\relax -% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosecttoc}. Vérifiez si -% vous avez invoqué \com{dosecttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0017] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0017|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) no section or chapter level macros available|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{chapter} and \com{section} sectionning commands are not defined. Your document class is likely -% without any sectionning command, so the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. \emph{Verify your main -% document class.} -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. Votre classe de document -% est probablement sans aucune commande de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. \emph{Vérifiez -% la classe principale de votre document.} -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0018] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0018|\\ -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: part level macros NOT available.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{part} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the part level commands of the -% \upack{minitoc} package are not available. It is a warning message because most classes with sectionning commands -% define the \com{part} command, so you should verify which class you are using. -% \or\relax -% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au -% niveau partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. C'est un message d'avertissement -% (\emph{warning}) car la plupart des classes ayant des commandes de sectionnement définissent la commande -% \com{part}, donc vous devriez vérifier quelle classe vous utilisez. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0019] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0019|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (8+3) file names.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The autofiguration has found that the operating system uses file names with short extensions (8+3 scheme). -% \or\relax -% L'autoconfiguration a trouvé que le système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts -% (schéma 8+3). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0020] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0020|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) You have forced the use of short extensions.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used the \opt{shortext} package option to force the use of short extensions (8+3 scheme). This action -% limits the number of usable mini-tables of each kind and may be problematic if you have more that 99~mini-tables -% of the same kind. If your operating system allows for long extensions, do not use the \opt{shortext} package -% option, except for testing purposes. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez spécifié l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} pour forcer l'utilisation de suffixes courts (schéma -% 8+3). Cette action limite le nombre de mini-tables utilisables dans chaque sorte et peut poser des problèmes si -% vous avez plus de 99~mini-tables du même genre. Si votre système d'exploitation permet des suffixes longs, -% n'utilisez pas l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}, sauf à~des fins de test. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0021] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue...| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\virage{} are using an obsolete version of \LaTeX, but the \upack{minitoc} package will still try to continue. It would be -% better to update your \LaTeX\ installation. -% \or\relax -% Vous\virage{} utilisez une version obsolète de \LaTeX, mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va quand même essayer de continuer. Il -% serait préférable de mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0022] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\ -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Trying to continue... crossing fingers.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Your\Virage{} version of \LaTeX\ is very obsolete, and almost unusable with the \upack{minitoc} package. You can try to -% continue the compilation, but you are urged to update your \LaTeX\ installation as soon as possible. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez une version totalement périmée de \LaTeX, presque inutilisable avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Vous pouvez essayer de continuer la compilation, mais vous êtes instamment priés de mettre à~jour votre installation -% de \LaTeX{} dès que possible. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0093] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0093|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) in your installation.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) in the \jobname.log file.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The full list of the missing language files|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) is gigen in the W0094 warning message.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Please install the missing files from|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) a recent distribution|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) or from the CTAN archives.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. -% Search for the \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} and -% \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} info messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file to find which files are missing. -% You can retrieve them from a recent distribution or from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, -% else some language options will not be available. -% The full list of the missing language files is given in the \texttt{W0094}\imess{W0094} -% warning message. -% \or\relax -% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. Cherchez les -% messages informatifs \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} et \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} pour -% trouver quels fichiers sont manquants. Vous pouvez les récupérer depuis une distribution récente ou depuis les -% archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon certaines options de langue ne seront pas disponibles. -% La liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants est donnée dans le message d'avertissement \imess{W0094}\texttt{W0094}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0094] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0094|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Missing minitoc language file(s):|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) ...|\\ -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system. -% The list is given in the message. -% \or\relax -% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. -% Leur liste est donnée dans le message. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0095] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0095|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Cannot use \mtcfixnomenclature without|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) optional argument [part].| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very -% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document), -% donc la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|). -% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0096] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0096|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcfixnomenclature can only be used|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) with the [part] optional argument,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) which becomes the default.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because -% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix -% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0098] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0098|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) --- You have used the \nofiles command|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) in your preamble; all preparation commands|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) in the body of the document will be ignored.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used the \com{nofiles} command in the preamble of your document; hence the preparation commands will be -% ignored in your document. Please verify that the mini-table auxiliary files are in their final state. -% See page~\pageref{x+W0098}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande \com{nofiles} dans le préambule de votre document; veuillez vérifier que les -% fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-ables sont dans leur état final. Voir page~\pageref{x+W0098}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Warning messages for hints} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Messages d'avertissement pour les indications (\emph{hints})} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0023] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0023|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- It may be the consequence|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) of loading the ``hyperref'' package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some sectionning commands have been altered \emph{after} the loading of the \upack{minitoc} package. The -% \pack{hyperref} package does that, but it is harmless. For other packages or user-made alterations, it is -% recommended to alter the sectionning commands only \emph{before} loading the \upack{minitoc} package. See -% section~\vref{faq.17}. -% \or\relax -% Certaines commandes de sectionnement ont été modifiées \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref} fait cela, mais sans dommages. Pour des altérations faites par d'autres paquetages -% ou par l'utilisateur, il est recommandé de modifier les commandes de sectionnement seulement \emph{avant} le -% chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{faq.17}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0024] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0024|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Some hints have been written|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \optd{hints} package option has detected some potential problems and written hints into the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can search it for the ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' string with a text -% editor. -% \or\relax -% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} a détecté des problèmes potentiels et écrit des indications (\emph{hints}) -% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Vous pouvez l'examiner en y cherchant la chaîne -% «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0025] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0025|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The alphanum package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{alphanum} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. The -% compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{alphanum} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La -% compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0026] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0026|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsart class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsart} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsart} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0027] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0027|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The amsproc class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsproc} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsproc} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0028] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0028|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \chapter command is altered|\\ -% \verb| after minitoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{chapter}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the -% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this -% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. -% \or\relax -% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{chapter}. La plupart d'entre-eux -% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est -% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans -% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage -% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0029] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0029|\\ -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: --- The jura class is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \class{jura} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{jura} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0030] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0030|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \part command is altered|\\ -% \verb| after minitoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{part}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the -% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this -% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. -% \or\relax -% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{part}. La plupart d'entre-eux -% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est -% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans -% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage -% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0031] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0031|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) without the section option,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which implies it. Try to inverse the|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loading order and use consistent options.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You may have got a message|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are using the \pack{placeins} package, but without its \optp{section}{placeins} option, while -% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which implies it. See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, -% near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol\DBEND. -% \or\relax -% Vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}, alors que -% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui l'implique. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, -% près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~»\DBEND. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0032] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0032|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package loaded is|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) too old. You should use a version|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) dated of 2005/04/18 at least.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are using an obsolete version of the \pack{placeins} package. Please update it from the CTAN archives or a -% recent distribution. -% \or\relax -% Vous utilisez une version obsolète du paquetage \pack{placeins}. Vous devriez le mettre à~jour depuis les -% archives CTAN ou une distribution récente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0033] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0033|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{caption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{caption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0034] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0034|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The caption2 package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{caption2} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.31}. Note that the \pack{caption2} package is now obsolete; please use a recent version of -% the \pack{caption} package. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{caption2} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. Notez que le paquetage \pack{caption2} est désormais obsolète; veuillez utiliser -% une version récente du paquetage \pack{caption}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0035] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0035|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The ccaption package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{ccaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{ccaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0036] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0036|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The mcaption package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{mcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{mcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0037] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0037|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sectsty package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{sectsty} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.28}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{sectsty} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.28}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0038] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0038|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The varsects package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{varsects} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.33}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{varsects} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.33}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0039] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0039|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The \section command is altered|\\ -% \verb| after minitoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{section}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before} -% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the -% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this -% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless. -% \or\relax -% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{section}. La plupart d'entre-eux -% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est -% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans -% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage -% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0040] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0040|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titletoc package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titletoc} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with -% the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titletoc}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0041] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0041|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty minilofs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty minilofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0042] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0042|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty minilots.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty minilots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0043] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0043|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty minitocs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty minitocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minitocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0044] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0044|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty partlofs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty partlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0045] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0045|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty partlots.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty partlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0046] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0046|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty parttocs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty parttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des parttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0047] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0047|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty sectlofs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0048] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0048|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty sectlots.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty sectlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0049] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0049|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have attempted to insert|\\ -% \verb| empty secttocs.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert empty secttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will -% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles} -% package option), you will only get this harmless message. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des secttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles}, -% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut -% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0050] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0050|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb| command: \firstchapteris.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0051] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0051|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb| command: \firstpartis.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0052] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0052|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\ -% \verb| command: \firstsectionis.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0053] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0053|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 chapters (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~chapters, so the number of the auxiliary -% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective chapters in your document. See -% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~chapitres, donc le numéro du fichier -% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de chapitres effectifs dans votre document. -% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0054] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0054|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 parts (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~parts, so the number of the auxiliary -% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective parts in your document. See -% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~parties, donc le numéro du fichier -% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de parties effectives dans votre document. -% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0055] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0055|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used short extensions|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and more than 99 sections (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~sections, so the number of the auxiliary -% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective sections in your document. See -% section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~sections, donc le numéro du fichier -% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de sections effectives dans votre document. -% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0056] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0056|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You are using \dosectlof and/or|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \dosectlot, \sectlof and/or \sectlot,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) hence the ``insection'' package|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) option is recommended.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are asking for mini-lists of figures or tables at the section level. But as floats (figures and tables) could -% drift somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and sectlots can be rather strange. -% In order to have a better behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the \opt{insection} package option. -% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez demandé des mini-listes des figures ou des tables au niveau section. Mais Comme les éléments flottants -% (figures et tableaux) pourraient dériver quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression du texte de la section, -% les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur comportement de ces mini-tables, -% il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0057] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0057|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the minilofs have not been prepared -% (via \com{dominilof}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais les minilofs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dominilof}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0058] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0058|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominilot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the minilots have not been prepared -% (via \com{dominilot}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais les minilots n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dominilot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0059] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0059|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dominitoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the minitocs have not been prepared -% (via \com{dominitoc}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais les minitocs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dominitoc}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0060] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0060|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the partlofs have not been prepared -% (via \com{dopartlof}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais les partlofs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dopartlof}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0061] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0061|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dopartlot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the partlots have not been prepared -% (via \com{dopartlot}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais les partlots n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dopartlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0062] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0062|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \doparttoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the parttocs have not been prepared -% (via \com{doparttoc}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais les parttocs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{doparttoc}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0063] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0063|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the sectlofs have not been prepared -% (via \com{dosectlof}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais les sectlofs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dosectlof}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0064] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0064|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosectlot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the sectlots have not been prepared -% (via \com{dosectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais les sectlots n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dosectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0065] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0065|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \dosecttoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have attempted to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the secttocs have not been prepared -% (via \com{dosecttoc}). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais les secttocs n'ont pas été préparées -% (via \com{dosecttoc}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0066] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0066|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilof,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \listoffigures nor|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoffigures.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0067] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0067|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minilot but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables| nor\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \fakelistoftables.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0068] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0068|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \minitoc but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0069] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0069|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlof but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0070] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0070|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \partlot but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0071] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0071|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \parttoc but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0072] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0072|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlof but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoffigures|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoffigures.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures}, ni \com{fakelistoffigures}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0073] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0073|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \sectlot but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \listoftables|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \fakelistoftables.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables}, ni \com{fakelistoftables}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0074] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0074|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \secttoc but not|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) \tableofcontents|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) nor \faketableofcontents.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have tried to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not -% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est -% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents}, ni \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0075] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0075|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \doparttoc|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \parttoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0076] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0076|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlof|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0077] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0077|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dopartlot|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \partlot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0078] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0078|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominitoc|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minitoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0079] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0079|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilof|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0080] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0080|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dominilot|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \minilot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some minilots (via \com{dominilot}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des minilots (via \com{dominilot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0081] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0081|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosecttoc|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \secttoc.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0082] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0082|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlof|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlof.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0083] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0083|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) You have used \dosectlot|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but not \sectlot.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have prepared some sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), but you never used one of them. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez préparé des sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0084] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0084|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the above option,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the above option and|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) use consistent options.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{above}{placeins} option, while -% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. -% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{above}{placeins}, alors que -% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. -% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0085] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0085|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The placeins package is loaded|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the below option,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) but minitoc used the insection option|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) which is incompatible with it.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) Try to remove the below option|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) and use consistent options.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{below}{placeins} option, while -% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it. -% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{below}{placeins}, alors que -% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle. -% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~». -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0086] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0086|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The fncychap package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{fncychap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.38}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{fncychap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.38}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0087] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0087|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The quotchap package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{quotchap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.39}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{quotchap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.39}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0088] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0088|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The romannum package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{romannum} package alters the numbering of some sectionning -% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.40}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{romannum} altère la numérotation de certaines commandes -% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.40}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0089] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0089|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The sfheaders package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{sfheaders} package alters the sectionning -% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.41}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders} altère les commandes -% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.41}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0090] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0090|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The alnumsec package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{alnumsec} package alters the sectionning -% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.42}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec} altère les commandes -% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.42}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0091] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0091|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The captcont package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{captcont} package alters the caption -% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.43}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{captcont} altère les commandes pour les captions -% et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.43}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0092] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0092|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) The hangcaption package should be|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{hangcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{faq.47}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.47}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0097] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0097|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The flowfram package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{flowfram} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, -% because it has its own definitions for minitocs. The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{flowfram} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% car il a ses propres définitions pour des minitocs. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être -% insatisfaisant. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[W0099] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0099|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) --- The titlesec package is loaded.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) It is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc(hints)) with the minitoc package.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titlesec} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with -% the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. -% \or\relax -% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titlesec}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Error messages} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Messages d'erreur} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0001] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0001|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb| not usable| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro; even \com{part} is -% undefined. Verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixglossary}; -% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0002] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0002|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb| not usable| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixindex} macro; even \com{part} is -% undefined. Verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixindex}; -% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0003] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0003|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|\\ -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \env{mtchideinmainlof} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the -% hiding in the main list of figures will be strange. -% \or\relax -% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), -% donc le masquage dans la liste des figures principale sera étrange. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0004] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0004|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|\\ -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the -% hiding in the main list of tables will be strange. -% \or\relax -% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), -% donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux principale sera étrange. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0005] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0005|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|\\ -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the -% hiding in the main table of contents will be strange. -% \or\relax -% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmaintoc} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement), -% donc le masquage dans la table des matières principale sera étrange. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0006] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0006|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known language,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld not found.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ -% \verb|Press RETURN| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} minitoc language definition -% file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your -% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mld} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, -% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mld} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local -% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger le fichier minitoc de définition de langue -% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de -% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers -% \suffix{.mld} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier -% \suffix{.mld} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le -% répertoire de travail. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0007] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0007|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known minitoc|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) language object file (.mlo),|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo not found.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Command ignored.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\ -% \verb|Press RETURN| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load indirectly the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc language -% object file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your -% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mlo} files of the \upack{minitoc} package, -% at the right place. If it is a local \suffix{.mlo} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local -% hierarchy) or be in the working directory. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger (indirectement) le fichier minitoc objet de langue -% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de -% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers -% \suffix{.mlo} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier -% \suffix{.mlo} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le -% répertoire de travail. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0008] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0008|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth attempts to use|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined counter (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|depth).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are trying to set the depth for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the -% document class, and the loaded packages. -% \or\relax -% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et -% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0009] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0009|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. -% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0010] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0010|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetdepth: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0011] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0011|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0012] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0012|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong second argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a feature param|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (before, after, open, close, pagestyle).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be \feat{before}, \feat{after}, -% \feat{open}, \feat{close}, or \texttt{thispagestyle}. -% \or\relax -% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être \feat{before}, \feat{after} -% \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0013] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0013|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{arg1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; -% it should be the type of a mini-table (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un type de mini-table -% (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0014] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0014|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfont has a wrong second argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a sectionning level|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (part...subparagraph) or * .|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; it should be a sectionning level (i.e., a sectionning -% command without its backslash), like \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. -% \or\relax -% Le deuxième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un niveau de sectionnement (c'est-à-dire, -% une commande de sectionnement sans sa contre-oblique), comme \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0015] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0015|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0016] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0016|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetformat has a wrong second argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\texttt{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a formatting param choosen from:|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetformat} macro is wrong. It should be one of the following keywords: -% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin}, or \texttt{dotinterval}. -% \or\relax -% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être l'un des mots-clés suivants: -% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin} ou \texttt{dotinterval}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0017] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0017|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong first|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|)..|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} macro must be a type of minitable (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0018] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0018|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong second|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) argument (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes -% suivantes\,\FZ: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0019] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0019|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot)|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetrules} est incorrect. -% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0020] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0020|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetrules has a wrong second argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetrules} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes -% suivantes\,\FZ: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE}, -% \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, -% \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1}; -% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE}, -% \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0021] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0021|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitle has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of a \com{mtcsettitle} macro is incorrect; it should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsettitle} est incorrect; -% ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0022] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0022|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsettitlefont has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} must be a mini-table type. You likely misspelt it. -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} doit être un type de mini-table. Vous avez probablement -% fait une faute de frappe. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0023] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0023|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfeature has incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro are \emph{incompatible}. You should verify them. -% \or\relax -% Les\Virage{} premier et deuxième arguments de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} sont \emph{incompatibles}. -% Vous devriez les vérifier. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0024] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0024|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetfont has incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetfont} macro takes a mini-table type as first argument, a sectionning level as second argument (or -% a star), and a sequence of font commands as third argument. The second argument must have a lower level than the first one -% (i.e., it is meaningless to specify the font for the chapter level entries for a minitoc or a secttoc). -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtcsetfont} prend un type de mini-table comme premier argument (ou une étoile), un niveau de -% sectionnement comme deuxième argument et une séquence de commandes de fontes comme troisième argument. Le deuxième -% argument doit être de plus bas niveau que le premier (par exemple, il est absurde de spécifier la fonte pour les -% entrées de niveau chapitre dans une minitoc ou une secttoc). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0025] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0025|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsetformat has incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro are \emph{incompatible}. -% One is likely to be misspelt. -% \or\relax -% Les\Virage{} premier et second arguments d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} sont \Virage\emph{incompatibles}. -% Il est probable qu'il y~ait une faute de frappe dans l'un d'eux. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0026] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0026|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixglossary|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults -% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. -% \or\relax -% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris -% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0027] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0027|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixindex|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixindex} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults -% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. -% \or\relax -% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixindex} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris -% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0028] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0028|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Unable to patch the memoir class.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|So it remains incompatible. Sorry.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Your\Virage{} version of the \class{memoir} class is really \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package -% and cannot be automatically patched. Please update the \class{memoir} class and/or the \upack{minitoc} package -% from the CTAN archives or a recent distribution. -% \or\relax -% Votre\Virage{} version de la classe \class{memoir} est vraiment \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et ne peut pas être corrigée automatiquement. Vous êtes priés de mettre à~jour -% la classe \class{memoir} et/ou le paquetage \upack{minitoc} depuis les archives ou une distribution récente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0029] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0029|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{mtchideinmainlof} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of figures could be incorrect. -% \or\relax -% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlof} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des figures -% principale pourrait être incorrect. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0030] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0030|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{mtchideinmainlot} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of tables could be incorrect. -% \or\relax -% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlot} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux -% principale pourrait être incorrect. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0031] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0031|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main table of contents could be incorrect. -% \or\relax -% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la table des matières -% principale pourrait être incorrect. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0032] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0032|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) You are using the \mtcloadmlo command|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) outside of a .mld file.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It will be ignored| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It is \emph{forbidden} to use the \com{mtcloadmlo} macro outside of a \suffix{.mld} file (which is loaded via -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). The command is ignored. -% \or\relax -% Il est \emph{interdit} d'utiliser la macro \com{mtcloadmlo} en dehors d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} (qui est chargé via -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). La commande est ignorée. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0033] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0033|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitle uses|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like -% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, -% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme -% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, -% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0034] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0034|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The macro \mtcsettitlefont uses|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like -% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, -% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}. -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme -% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, -% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0035] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0035|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) You have used the `insection' option in|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) a document where chapters are defined.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) This is not compatible: option ignored.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Remove this option.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \opt{insection} package option is intended for \class{article}-like document classes, to prevent floats -% from drifting out of their section. It is pointless for \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document -% classes, where floats are contained in their chapter. -% \or\relax -% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} est destinée aux classes de document analogues à~\class{article}, -% pour empêcher les éléments flottants de dériver en dehors de leur section. Elle est sans objet pour les classes -% de document analogues à~\class{book} ou \class{report}, où les éléments flottants sont contenus dans leur -% chapitre. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0036] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0036|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The minitoc language object file (.mld),|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) english.mld is not found.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with default values.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ -% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| -% \verb|Type <return> to continue| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \xfile{english.mld} language definition file can not be found. You should verify your installation of the -% \upack{minitoc} package. As an interim solution, we provide the missing english titles. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier \xfile{english.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. Vous devriez vérifier votre -% installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais manquants. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0037] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0037|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The \|\emph{\COMMAND}\verb| command is incompatible|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) with the document class.|\\ -% \verb||\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb| ... |\\ -% \verb| |\\ -% \verb|l.39 \dominitoc[r]|\\ -% \verb| |\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have used a preparation or insertion command -% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) which is not available for the -% document class you are using. Please verify that the document -% class is compatible with \upack{minitoc} and if the level of -% the mini-table is available in the document class -% (section-level mini-tables are not available in \class{book}- or -% \class{report}-like classes, chapter-level mini-tables are not -% available in \class{article}-like classes, mini-tables are not -% available in \class{letter}-like classes, etc.). -% \or\relax -% Vous avez utilisé une commande de préparation ou d'insertion -% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) qui n'est pas disponible pour la -% classe de document que vous utilisez. Veuillez vérifier que -% votre classe de document est compatible avec \upack{minitoc} -% et si le niveau de mini-table est disponible dans la classe de -% document (les mini-tables au niveau section ne sont pas -% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{book} ou -% \class{report}, les mini-tables au niveau chapitre ne sont pas -% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{article}, les mini-tables -% ne sont pas disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{letter}, etc.). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0038] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0038|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) A mandatory minitoc language object file,|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld, is not found.|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) We will try to continue with|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) current/default values.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\ -% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.| -% \verb|Type <return> to continue| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The mandatory \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} language definition file can not be found. -% You should verify your installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% As an interim solution, we provide the default english titles. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier obligatoire \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. -% Vous devriez vérifier votre installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais par défaut. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0039] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0039|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) But \part is undefined.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb| not usable| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro; even \com{part} is -% undefined. Verify your document class. -% \or\relax -% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature}; -% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0040] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0040|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) The optional argument of \mtcfixnomenclature|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) is wrong.|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults -% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}. -% \or\relax -% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris -% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0041] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0041|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset attempts to use|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) an undefined mini-table type (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are trying to set the offset for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the -% document class, and the loaded packages. -% \or\relax -% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et -% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0042] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0042|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset has a wrong first argument|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) It should be a mini-table type|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) (parttoc...sectlot).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, -% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. -% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[E0043] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0043|\\ -% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetoffset: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\ -% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\ -% \verb|Type H <return> for immediate help.|\\ -% \verb|? h|\\ -% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\ -% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \or\relax -% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table -% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}). -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Messages from the \upack{mtcoff} package}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \or\relax -% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \pack{mtcoff} package gives only warning messages; their numbers begin with~\texttt{F}. -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} ne donne que des messages d'avertissement; leurs numéros commencent par~\texttt{F}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Warning messages} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0001] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0001|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{addstarredchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{addstarredchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée -% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0002] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0002|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredpart{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{addstarredpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{addstarredpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0003] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0003|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \addstarredsection{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{addstarredsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{addstarredsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée -% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0004] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0004|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcaddchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcaddchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée -% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0005] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0005|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcaddpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcaddpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0006] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0006|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcaddsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff} -% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| -% command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcaddsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée -% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0007] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0007|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) You should scan (backwards) your .log|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) file to find some commands needing|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) to be replaced if you decide to|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) document. It is more wise to keep the|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) \usepackage lines for minitoc and mtcoff|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) and to comment out only one of them.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You have replaced the use of the \upack{minitoc} package by its substitute \pack{mtcoff}. -% It is recommended to keep the \com{usepackage} lines for both \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} -% and to comment out only one of them. If you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using \upack{minitoc} for this document, -% it is wise to scan (backwards) the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file (after a compilation using \pack{mtcoff}) -% to locate some commands needing to be replaced. -% \or\relax -% Vous avez remplacé l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} par son substitut \pack{mtcoff}. -% Il est recommandé de conserver les lignes \com{usepackage} à~la fois pour \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff} -% et d'en mettre une seule en commentaire. Si vous décidez d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} d'utiliser \upack{minitoc} -% pour ce document, il est prudent d'examiner (en remontant depuis la fin) le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} -% (après une compilation utilisant \pack{mtcoff}) pour localiser quelques commandes qu'il faut remplacer. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0008] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0008|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \kernafter|\emph{\STRING}\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are using one of the \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. -% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust -% the position of the bottom rule of a type of minitables. Any other usage is -% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax -% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour -% ajuster la position du filet inférieur d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage -% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \begin{xmessage}[F0009] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0009|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) The macro \|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) should not be used out of context|\\ -% \verb|(mtcoff) on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are using one of the \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package. -% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust -% the horizontal position of a type of minitables. Any other usage is -% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax -% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour -% ajuster la position horizontale d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage -% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Message from the \upack{mtcpatchmem} package}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} -% \or\relax -% \section{Message émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcpatchmem}}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} -% \fi -% -% \begin{xmessage}[M0001] -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: M0001|\\ -% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class.| -% \end{quote} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% You are using a version of the \class{memoir} class which needs a correction. This correction has been -% automatically loaded if necessary. Very recent versions should not need it anymore. See -% chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}. -% \or\relax -% Vous utilisez une version de la classe \class{memoir} qui nécessite une correction. Cette correction a été -% chargée automatiquement si nécessaire. Les versions très récentes ne devraient plus en avoir besoin. Voir le -% chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}. -% \fi -% \end{xmessage} -% -% \def\jsection#1{\section*{\null\hspace*{-1cm}\fbox{\mbox{#1}}}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} -% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} -% \minitoc -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} -% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} -% \mtcskip -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -% \minilot -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} -% This chapter attempts to explain some terms used in this documentation, and describes some useful files and suffixes. -% Many data come from the documentations of various cited packages (often from the abstract), and -% from~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. -% \clearpage -% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \jsection{.\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{``.''} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\usuffix{.aux}]\isuffix{.aux} The suffix of the name for an \emph{auxiliary} file of a \LaTeX{} document. It carries -% some information from a \LaTeX{} run to the next. -% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.cls} The suffix for the name of a document class file, loaded via \com{documentclass}. -% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} The suffix of the name for a documented source file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. This file -% is often associated with a \suffix{.ins} file to generate the package or class. Compiling a \suffix{.dtx} -% file with \LaTeX{} generates the documentation. -% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. -% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} The suffix of the name for an installation file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. When -% compiled with \LaTeX, it extracts the files of the package or class from an \suffix{.dtx} file. -% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lof} The suffix of the name of the ``list of figures'' file. -% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} The suffix of the name of the log file (compilation report). -% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} The suffix of the name of the ``list of tables'' file. -% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\isuffix{.maf} The suffix of the name of the file generated by the \optd{listfiles} package option. This file -% contains the list of the minitoc auxiliary files. -% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language definition file. A minitoc language definition file -% contains the definitions for the mini-table titles in a given language. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language object file. For some exotic languages, the encoding -% makes not easy to put direcly the titles in a \suffix{.mld} file; -% hence the \suffix{.mld} file must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. -% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\isuffix{.ptc} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} The suffix for the name of a package file, loaded via \com{usepackage}. -% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot. -% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} The suffix of the name of a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ normal source file. -% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} The suffix of the name of the ``table of contents'' file. -% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used. -% The full suffix is \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[absolute numbering] The auxiliary files for the mini-tables have a suffix containing an \emph{absolute -% number}, i.e.,~the number is unique and always increasing from the first part, chapter or section; this has -% solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis}, -% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}. The absolute numbering has been introduced in -% version~\#23. -% \item[\upack{abstract}] The \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) needs some -% precautions if used with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[adjustment] Some \upack{minitoc} commands and environments are known as ``adjustment commands'' because -% they are used in -% some circumstances to ``adjust'' a counter or to alter the displaying of contents files. These commands and -% environments are -% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, -% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, -% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, -% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, -% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, -% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, -% \env{mtchideinmainlof}, and -% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% It is \virage\emph{strongly recommended} that the user verifies the result of such adjustments in the final document. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\feat{after}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{after} a given type of mini-table. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[\pack{afterpage}] The \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} package is used to add code to be executed \emph{after} the -% next page break. -% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] -% The \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} allows you to use alphanumeric section -% numbering, e.g. A.~Introduction; III.~International Law. It's -% output is similar to the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), -% but you can use the standard \LaTeX\ sectionning commands. Thus it is possible to switch numbering -% schemes easily. Greek letters, double letters~(bb) and different delimiters around them are supported. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.alnumsec} and -% section~\vref{faq.42}). -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{alphanum}] The \pack{alphanum}\imess{W0025} package, which is part of the specialized \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}, -% by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{3} -% \item[\AmS] The\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} -% American Mathematical Society~\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}. This society has developped some document classes: -% unfortunately, \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package; -% \class{amsbook} is compatible but needs precautions. -% \item[\uclass{amsart}, \xfile{amsart.cls}]\iclass{amsart} A\imess{W0026} document class for articles~\cite{amslatex}, -% provided by the American Mathematical -% Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\uclass{amsbook}, \xfile{amsbook.cls}]\iclass{amsbook} A\imess{I0041} document class for books~\cite{amslatex}, -% provided by the American Mathematical -% Society (\AmS). This class is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package, but needs some precautions. -% See section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \item[\uclass{amsproc}, \xfile{amsproc.cls}]\iclass{amsproc} A\imess{W0027} document class for conference -% proceedings~\cite{amslatex}, -% provided by the American Mathematical Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is -% \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% is a language support package for \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), based on the original -% \xfile{omega.sty} file of the Omega project~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). However, it provides some additional useful -% functionalities. -% Some languages definition files (\suffix{.mld}) use titles taken from \pack{Antomega}: \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, -% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, -% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld}, and \xfile{spanish3.mld}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\env{appendices}] See \upack{appendix} below. -% \item[\upack{appendix}] The\imess{I0042} \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) -% provides various ways of formatting the titles of appendices. Also (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} -% environments\ienv{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} -% are provided that can be used, for instance, for per chapter/section appendices. If this package -% is used with \upack{minitoc}, some precautions are needed (see section~\vref{faq+appendix}). -% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} is a system (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents in the -% \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{farsi} languages. The titles in \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} come from the \xfile{arabic.ldf} -% and \xfile{farsi.ldf} files of this system. -% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} is a package (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents -% in the \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{hebrew} languages. The titles in \xfile{arab.mld} (or \xfile{arabic.mld}), -% \xfile{arab2.mld} and -% \xfile{hebrew.mld} come from \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, while those of \xfile{hebrew2.mld} come -% from \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} is a package (prepared by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, -% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) to prepare \LaTeX{} -% documents in the \lopt{armenian} language. The titles in \xfile{armenian.mld} come from Arm\TeX. -% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part} -% and \com{section} (and below), but not \com{chapter}. It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package -% and you can make mini-tables at the part and section levels (but, of course, not at the unavailable chapter level). -% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] -% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the beginning of the document (if fact, at the very -% end of its preamble, but inside it, which implies some restrictions), at the point where \verb|\begin{document}| is -% processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any conflicts with other packages -% trying to do the same. -% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] -% This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the end of the document, at the point -% where \verb|\end{document}| is processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any -% conflicts with other packages trying to do the same. -% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Since version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} detects automaticaly if the extensions (suffixes) -% of the file names are limited to 3~characters (like under MS-DOS) or not. This process is named autoconfiguration. -% The package option \opt{shortext} forces the limitation to 3~characters. -% \item[auxiliary] During the preparation of a document, the \LaTeX\ system uses some \textbf{auxiliary} files to -% store information. The standard auxiliary files are \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (for cross-reference -% labels, counters, etc.), \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} for the table of contents, -% \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} for the list of figures, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} for the list of -% tables. The \upack{minitoc} package creates its own auxiliary files, to store the contents of each -% mini-table. These files are the \emph{minitoc auxiliary files}, whose names are -% \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{extension}, the table~\vref{t+suffixes} lists the possible extensions. -% See also the \suffix{.maf} extension above. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{babel}] The \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and others) is -% a large package useful to write \LaTeX\ documents in many languages, not only english. -% Many titles for mini-tables come directly from the \pack{babel} package. -% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} A package for typesetting documents in the \lopt{bangla} -% (\lopt{bengali}) language using the {\TeX/\LaTeX} systems; see~\cite{bangtex}. -% \item[\feat{before}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{before} a given type of mini-table. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[\BibTeX] A program by \name{Oren}{Patashnik} to make bibliographies in \LaTeX{} documents. Distributed with \LaTeX. -% See~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. -% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{bibtopic} for including several bibliographies in a document. -% These bibliographies might be considered to cover different topics (hence the name) or bibliographic -% material (e.g., primary and secondary literature) and the like. -% \item[\upack{bibunits}] The \pack{bibunits} package~\cite{bibunits} allows separate bibliographies for different -% units or parts of the text. The units can be chapters, sections or \env{bibunit} environments. This -% package is compatible with a wide variety of packages, including, but not limited to, \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, -% \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} and \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. -% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, -% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and -% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many -% auxiliary files). -% \item[\pack{booktabs}] This nice package~\cite{booktabs} helps to the preparation of better tables, \emph{without} -% vertical rules nor double rules. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{calc}] The \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} package makes easier the numeric computations (on counters and dimensions) -% when preparing a \LaTeX{} document. -% \item[cappuccino] See ``minutes'' below. -% \item[\upack{captcont}] The \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} provides support for retaining -% a figure or caption number across several float environments --- usually over several pages. It allows -% control over the contents of the List-of-Figures and the List-of-Tables pages. It should be compatible -% with all other packages that modify or extend the float environment and with the \pack{subfig} -% package~\cite{subfig} in particular. -% \item[\upack{caption}] The \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} provides many ways to customize the captions -% in floating environments such \env{figure} and \env{table} and cooperates with many other packages. -% \item[\upack{caption2}] The\footnote{This text comes from the documentation of the \pack{caption} package. -% The \pack{caption} and \pack{caption2} packages have the same author, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} -% \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} used to be an experimental side-version -% of the regular \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} and has been superseed by the new release of -% the regular \pack{caption} package version~\mbox{3.0} in December 2003. \pack{caption2} is still -% some kind of supported, that means it will be part of future releases and bugs will still be fixed, -% so existing documents using this package will still compile. But \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} will \emph{not} answer -% questions about this package anymore except questions on migrating to the regular version of -% the \pack{caption} package. And it will \emph{not} be adapted or enhanced in the future. -% -% So please don't use this package for new documents. It's old, it's obsolete and it starts to begin smell bad! -% -% Please ignore all hints in books or other documents which try to tell you that the \pack{caption2} package should -% be used instead of the \pack{caption} package -- these hints are outdated since December 2003. -% \item[\xfile{CATALOG}] A plain text file which contains basic infos about the \upack{minitoc} package -% (abstract, date, author, version, licence). -% \item[catcode] Short for ``category code''. In\footnote{This definition is taken from -% ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} -% the first place, it's wise to have a precise idea of what your keyboard sends to the machine. There are 256~characters -% that \TeX\ might encounter at each step, in a file or in a line of text typed directly on your terminal. These -% 256~characters are classified into 16~categories numbered~0 to~15. See table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \def?{\phantom{0}} -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Category codes}\label{t+J+catcodes} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}cll@{}} -% \toprule -% &\textbf{Category}&\textbf{Meaning}\\ -% \midrule -% ?0&Escape character&(\texttt{\bs}~usually)\\ -% ?1&Beginning of group&(\texttt{\{}~usually)\\ -% ?2&End of group&(\texttt{\}}~usually)\\ -% ?3&Math shift&(\texttt{\$}~usually)\\ -% ?4&Alignment tab&(\texttt{\&}~usually)\\ -% ?5&End of line&(\emph{return}~usually)\\ -% ?6&Parameter&(\texttt{\#}~usually)\\ -% ?7&Superscript&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~usually)\\ -% ?8&Subscript&(\texttt{\_}~usually)\\ -% ?9&Ignored character&(\emph{null}~usually)\\ -% 10&Space&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~usually)\\ -% 11&Letter&(\texttt{A}, \dots, \texttt{Z} and~\texttt{a}, \dots, \texttt{z})\\ -% 12&Other character&(none of the above or below)\\ -% 13&Active character&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~usually)\\ -% 14&Comment character&(\texttt{\%}~usually)\\ -% 15&Invalid character&(\emph{delete}~usually)\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% It's not necessary for you to learn these code numbers; the point is only that \TeX\ responds to 16~different -% types of characters. At first, ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}'' led you to believe that there were just two types --- the -% escape character and the others --- and then you were told about two more types, the grouping symbols~\texttt{\{} -% and~\texttt{\}}. The category code for any character can be changed at any time, but it is usually wise to stick to a -% particular scheme. -% \item[\upack{ccaption}] The \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} provides commands for ``continuation captions'', -% unnumbered captions, and a legend heading for any environment. Methods are provided to define captions -% for use outside float environments, and to define new float environments and subfloats. Tools are provided -% for defining your own captioning styles. -% \item[\upack{chngpage}] The \pack{chngpage} package (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) provides commands to change -% the page layout in the middle of a document, and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages. -% \item[Chapter~0] -% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter number zero (or even a weirder number). -% This caused a serious problem in old versions of the \upack{minitoc} package: the minitocs appeared in the -% wrong chapters, and a first correction was the introduction of specific commands (\com{firstchapteris} and -% co.). With the addition of the absolute numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files (see \emph{absolute} above), -% the problem was solved in \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, and these commands became obsolete. -% See section~\vref{faq.5}. -% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] The \pack{chapterbib} package~\cite{chapterbib} allows multiple bibliographies in a -% \LaTeX\ document, including items \com{cite}'d in more than one bibliography. Despite the name -% ``\pack{chapterbib}'', \emph{the bibliographies are for each included file}, not necessarily for each -% chapter. -% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} -% A package option of \upack{minitoc}. It checks every mini-table to look if it is empty; then empty mini-tables -% are \emph{not} printed. This is the default. The opposite package option (\opt{nocheckfiles}) prints even the -% empty mini-tables, which look ugly. See section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. -% \item[\upack{CJK}] The \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and others), is a set of packages and fonts to -% prepare \LaTeX\ documents in some oriental language, like chinese, japanese, korean (with Hangûl or Hanja fonts), -% and thai, plus some variants of russian. -% The titles of mini-tables for these languages come from some \pack{CJK} files and were inserted in -% \suffix{.mld} files when possible, or in \suffix{.mlo} files when the encoding is incompatible with the -% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx} mechanism; -% then the \suffix{.mld} file must input the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file. -% \pack{CJK} implements the GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8, and CNS encodings (on 16~bits, except UTF~8 on 24~bits). -% See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Encoding schemes implemented in \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{1~byte}&\textbf{2~bytes}&\textbf{3~bytes}\\ -% \midrule -% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ -% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ -% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% Some encoding schemes (Big~5, SJIS) have gaps in the range of the second byte. -% It is difficult to input Big~5 and SJIS encoding directly into \TeX\ since some of the values used for the -% encodings' second bytes are reserved for control characters: `\texttt{\{}', `\texttt{\}}', and -% `\texttt{\bs}'. Redefining them breaks a lot of things in \LaTeX; to avoid this, preprocessors are normally -% used which convert the second byte into a number followed by a delimiter character. For further details, -% please refer to~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} discusses in great detail all \pack{CJK} encodings which are -% or have been in use. -% Please note that the \upack{minitoc} package uses the \suffix{.mlo} files as a workaround for this problem; -% see section~\vref{fo+lang}. -% \item[class] The \textbf{class}\footnote{This note is extracted from~\cite{NSSL2E}, then adapted.} is the first -% information \LaTeX{} needs to know when processing an -% input file; it is the type of document the author wants to create. This -% is specified with the \com{documentclass} command. -% \begin{quote} -% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{class}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% \noindent Here \emph{class} specifies the type of document to be created. -% Table~\vref{t+documentclasses} lists the standard document classes~\cite{classes}. The \LaTeXe{} distribution provides additional -% classes for other documents, including letters and slides, but the \upack{minitoc} package has not -% been tested with all these classes. The -% \emph{options} parameters customize the behaviour of the document -% class. The options have to be separated by commas. -% The standard classes supported by the \upack{minitoc} package -% are listed in section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Standard document classes}\label{t+documentclasses} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Class}&\textbf{Usage}\\ -% \midrule -% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&For articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation, -% invitations, \ldots\\ -% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&For preparing conference proceedings; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ -% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&For preparing the documentation of a package or of a class; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ -% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&For preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release; analog to the \class{article} class.\\ -% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&For longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD theses, \ldots\\ -% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&For real books.\\ -% \class{letter}~\cite{letter}&For letters; as this class has no sectionning commands, do not use \upack{minitoc} with -% this class.\\ -% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&For slides; the class uses big sans serif -% letters. You might want to consider using Beamer\TeX{}$^a$ instead. -% Do not use \upack{minitoc} with these classes.\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}\hfill\null}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \item[\feat{close}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately after (\emph{close}) the insertion -% of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} -% An example of shell script to prepare the documentation files in PostScript format from the ones in PDF format. -% This script should be adapted to your needs. -% \item[CMR] For ``Computer Modern Roman''. The roman subset of the Computer Modern fonts. See ``Computer Modern'' -% below. -% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in english. -% \item[Computer Modern] A set of fonts~\cite{cmt} designed by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} for \TeX. Initially -% they were built with {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (a program also created by \textsc{Knuth}), but PostScript -% type~1 (vector) versions -% exist today, with extensions (for accented characters, mainly): the EC-fonts (European Computer Modern), -% the cm-super fonts, etc. -% \item[counter] A \TeX\ register containing an integer value. There are 256 counters (from~0 to~255) in \TeX, but -% \LaTeX\ uses some of them, and many packages need some counters for their own usage. An extended version -% derived from \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, allows more counters. Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) also offers more counters. -% \item[CTAN] The \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, a~set of computer archives containing most of -% the \TeX\ related resources (like fonts, sofware, documentations, packages). They are accessible via -% Internet. The participating hosts in the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network -% are\,\footnote{This list may change in the future.}: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{ftp.dante.de} (Cologne [Köln], Germany) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item rsync access on \url{rsync://rsync.dante.de/CTAN/} -% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.dante.de/} -% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:ftpmaint@dante.de} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \texttt{ftp.tex.ac.uk} (Cambridge, England, UK) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item rsync access on \url{rsync://rsync.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/} -% \item NFS mountable from \url{nfs.tex.ac.uk:/tex-archive} -% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/} -% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:ctan-uk@tex.ac.uk} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \texttt{tug.ctan.org} (Colchester, Vermont, USA) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item anonymous ftp \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item World Wide Web access on \url{http://www.ctan.org/} -% \item Administrator: \url{mailto:tex@ctan.tug.org} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% There are also many sites mirroring these main archives. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] I~needed to use the \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} package to typeset ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' -% entry~\cite{han} in the bibliography, because its author's first name contains a double -% accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. -% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in german. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Depths for sectionning commands}\label{t+j+depths} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Class:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ -% \midrule -% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ -% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ -% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ -% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ -% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ -% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ -% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ -% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \item[depth] In the standard documents classes (and in most classes) with sectionning commands, we have a notion of -% \textbf{depth}. The depth of a sectionning command determines the numbering level in its title (from the value of the -% \dcnt{secnumdepth} counter), and the entries for a given sectionning command appear in the main table of contents -% if the depth of this sectionning command is lower than or equal to the value of the \dcnt{tocdepth} counter; see -% table~\vref{t+j+depths} for the depths of the sectionning commands in the main document classes. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The mechanism is analog for the parttocs, minitocs, and secttocs, using the values of the \dcnt{parttocdepth}, -% \dcnt{minitocdepth}, and \dcnt{secttocdepth} counters. If you use sub-figures or sub-tables, the corresponding -% mini-tables use counters like \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, -% \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[descriptor] (file descriptor). A software entity describing the interface between a program and a file. -% For most programs and operating systems, the number of file descriptors is limited. For \TeX{} (and \LaTeX), -% there are 16~file descriptors for writing and 16~file descriptors for reading. -% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] The \emph{\devnag{} for \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) package~\cite{devanagari} provides a -% way to typeset high-quality \devnag{} text with \TeX{}. \devnag{} is a script used for writing and printing -% Sanskrit and a number of languages in Northern and Central India such as Hindi and Marathi, as well as Nepali. -% The \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package was originally developed in May 1991 by Frans Velthuis for the University of Groningen, -% The Netherlands, and it was the first system to provide support for the \devnag{} script for \TeX{}. -% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] A PostScript header file, which tries to activate recto-verso printing. It works -% ^^A with some HP and Canon PostScript printers. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\texttt{em}] A length unit equal (approximatively) to the width of a~``m'' letter in the current font. -% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} -% An example of shell script to prepare the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script -% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style derived from the \xfile{plain.bst}\isuffix{.bst} standard style, but -% modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst} to add an~\texttt{URL} field. Family names of authors -% and editors are in small caps, years are in old style digits. -% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the font (e.g., whether the 65th character is ``A''). -% The most common value for TeX font encoding is OT1. The other predefined option is T1 (extended \TeX). There's also -% US~ASCII (7~bit), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bit), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), -% etc. See table~\vref{t+var-encodings} and ~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Various encodings}\label{t+var-encodings} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Comment}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{ansinew}&Windows~3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1.\\ -% \texttt{applemac}&Macintosh encoding.\\ -% \texttt{ascii}&ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.\\ -% \texttt{cp1250}&Windows 1250 (Central and Eastern Europe) code page.\\ -% \texttt{cp1251}&Windows 1251 (Cyrillic) code page.\\ -% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonym for \texttt{ansinew}.\\ -% \texttt{cp1257}&Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.\\ -% \texttt{cp437}&IBM~437 code page, which is the original -% American code page and contains letters, digits, -% mathematical symbols, and some characters useful in the -% construction of pseudographics.\\ -% \texttt{cp437de}&IBM~437 code page (German version).\\ -% \texttt{cp850}&IBM~850 code page, almost the same as -% ISO~Latin~1, but character arrangement is not the same.\\ -% \texttt{cp852}&IBM~852 code page.\\ -% \texttt{cp855}&IBM~855 code page (Cyrillic).\\ -% \texttt{cp865}&IBM~865 code page.\\ -% \texttt{cp866}&IBM~866 code page (MS-DOS Cyrillic).\\ -% \texttt{decmulti}&DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.\\ -% \texttt{latin1}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed -% for most Western European languages, including Danish, -% Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, French, -% German, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, -% Spanish, and Swedish. Some non-European languages, such as -% Hawaiian and Indonesian, are also written in this -% character set.\\ -% \texttt{latin2}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed -% for most Central European languages, including Croatian, -% Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak, and Slovenian.\\ -% \texttt{latin3}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed -% for Esperanto, Maltese, Turkish, and Galicean. However, -% \texttt{latin5} is the prefered character set for -% Turkish.\\ -% \texttt{latin4}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed -% for the Baltic languages (Latvian, Estonian, and -% Lithuanian), Greenlandic, and Lappish (Sámi).\\ -% \texttt{latin5}&Is essentially the same as -% \texttt{latin1}, except that some Turkish characters replace -% less commonly used Icelandic letters.\\ -% \texttt{next}&Next encoding.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \item[environment] An environment is a delimited domain in a document, where special rules apply. Such a -% domain is delimited by \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| and may take -% arguments, like this: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ -% \verb|\end{minipage}| -% \end{quote} -% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} is an extented version of \TeX, with much more -% registers and many new primitives; it supports also left-to-right and right-to-left writing. -% \item[ethiop]\ipack{ethiop} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{ethiop} giving the \lopt{ethiopian} language support for the \pack{babel} -% package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \item[extension] The name of a file is often made of 2~parts: a \emph{base name} and an \emph{entension}, -% separated by a dot. On some old operating systems, the base name is limited to 8~characters and the extension -% to 3~characters (the ``8+3'' scheme). See also sections~\vref{MS-DOS} and~\vref{.8+3}. -% It is strongly recommended to not have more than one dot in a file name. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] See \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} below. -% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} A package~\cite{farsi} to typeset a document in the \lopt{farsi} (iranian, persian) language. -% See~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}. But this package is today available only for \LaTeX2.09. -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} and~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. -% \item[features] A feature (for the \upack{minitoc} package) is a set of actions executed at each occurrence of -% a mini-table of a given type. Five features are associated to each mini-table type: a ``\feat{before}'' feature -% (executed before the whole mini-table), an ``\feat{after}'' feature (executed after the whole mini-table), -% a ``\feat{open}'' feature, executed just before inserting the mini-table file, -% a ``\feat{close}'' feature, executed just after inserting the mini-table file, -% and a -% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature, which is executed with the mini-table to set its page style. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[\env{filecontents}] -% A special \LaTeX{} environment. It allows to create a file (whose name is passed as an argument of the -% environment) by writing the contents of the environment into that file: -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{file}\}}\\ -% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contents}~~\ldots}\\ -% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} -% \end{quote} -% This environment should be used \emph{before} \com{documentclass}. It is used in \xfile{minitoc.ins} -% to prepare the \suffix{.mlo} files (see section~\vref{fo+lang}) and some files used in the compilation -% of the documentation. -% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] An obsolete command, temporarily used as a workaround for the Chapter~0 problem; -% see~\textbf{Chapter~0} and \textbf{absolute numbering} above, and section~\vref{faq.5}. -% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. -% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above. -% \item[\pack{float}] This package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} improves the interface for defining floating -% objects such as figures and tables in \LaTeX{}. It adds the notion of a `float style' that governs appearance -% of floats. New kinds of floats may be defined using a \com{newfloat} command analogous to \com{newtheorem}. -% This package also incorporates the functionality of \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}'s package \pack{here}, -% giving floating environments a \texttt{[H]} option which means `PUT IT HERE' (as opposed to the -% standard \texttt{[h]} option which means `You may put it here if you like'). -% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] -% A macro from the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. It sets up a ``barrier'' against the drift of -% floats (like figures or tables). -% \item[\pack{floatrow}] This package~\cite{floatrow} (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} is an extension of the -% \pack{float} package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), reusing its code, with extensions from -% the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} (by \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). -% \item[\pack{flowfram}] This\imess{W0097} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} is designed to enable you -% to create text \emph{frames} -% in a document such that the contents of the \env{document} environment flow from one frame to the next in the -% order that they were defined. This is useful for creating posters or magazines or any other form of document that -% does not conform to the standard one or two column layout. As this package defines its own system of -% minitocs, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} -% An example of shell script to prepare the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script -% \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\upack{fncychap}] The \pack{fncychap}\imess{W0086} package~\cite{fncychap} provides a set of commands for changing -% the format used for some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: -% \class{book} and \class{report}. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.fncychap} and -% section~\vref{faq.38}). -% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet newsgroup about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in french. -% \item[\upack{franc.sty}]\ipack{franc} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\upack{frbib.sty}]\ipack{frbib} A small package file used to prepare the bibliography of the french documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style file used to prepare the bibliography of the french -% documentation. -% It has been updated from the standard \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} for french by \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, then I added -% some adaptations for french (like last names in small caps for authors and editors, years in old style digits), -% then modified with the \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} tool to add an \texttt{URL} field. -% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{geometry}] The \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry} provides a flexible and complete user interface to page -% dimensions. You can specify them by using intuitive parameters to get your desired page layout. For instance, -% if you want to set margins (the left, right, top and bottom margins) to 2cm from each edge of -% the paper, what you need is just: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| -% \end{quote} -% This powerful (and recommended) package is used in some example documents and in this documentation. -% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} A \LaTeX\ package to compose text in \ilopt{guarani}Guaraní, -% the main language spoken in Paraguay. -% The file \xfile{guarani.ldf}, included in this package, defines the titles. See~\cite{guarani} and -% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] The \pack{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} package~\cite{hangcaption} defines a variant of the -% \com{caption} command to produce captions with hanging indentation. This package is likely -% obsolete (1992, \LaTeX2.09). -% \item[Hindi] For the Hindi language, see the \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package~\cite{devanagari} above. The -% \upack{minitoc} package accepts the \lopt{devanagari} and \lopt{hindi} language options, which are -% synonyms. A \lopt{hindi-modern} language option is also available. -% See also~\cite{hindi99} about the Hindi language. -% \item[hint] An indication, a clue to detect a problem. It is also a message written (into the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file) by the \optd{hints} option (see below). -% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It verifies the loading order of some -% packages, the invocation order of some \upack{minitoc} commands, the consistency between main \upack{minitoc} -% commands, etc., and gaves warnings and other useful hints (mainly in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file). This is -% a default option (use the \opt{nohints} option to skip these checks). -% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} A system to write documents in the Korean language, using \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (see below). -% Written by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}. It uses special Hangûl or Hanja fonts and the UTF-8 input -% encoding. -% \item[hyperlink] In a document, a reference to another object which is dynamicaly found (via a click with the -% mouse). This requires a special type of document (PDF, PostScript with hypertext features) and a suitable -% viewer (PDF viewer, recent PS viewer). This is useful to navigate in a document or in many documents, -% which can be remote documents. -% \lneed{4} -% \item[\upack{hyperref}] The\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} -% \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} is used to emend cross-referencing commands in -% \LaTeX\ to produce some sort of \com{special} commands; there are -% backends for the \com{special} set defined for \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} \texttt{dvi} processors, -% for embedded pdfmark commands for processing by \tool{Acrobat Distiller} -% (\tool{dvips} and \tool{dvipsone}), for \tool{dviwindo}, -% for \textbf{pdf\TeX}, for \textbf{\TeX4ht}, and for \tool{VTEX}'s pdf and HTML -% backends. -% -% This package derives from, and builds on, the work of the \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} -% project, described in \cite{hypertex}. It extends -% the functionality of all the \LaTeX\ cross-referencing commands -% (including the table of contents, bibliographies, etc.) to produce -% \com{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links; -% it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc} -% hypertext links (hyperlinks), including those to external documents and URLs. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] The \pack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{ifmtarg} provides an if-then-else command -% for testing if a macro argument is empty (``empty'' meaning zero or more spaces only). -% \item[\pack{ifthen}] The \pack{ifthen} package~\cite{ifthen} implements an \com{ifthenelse} command for \LaTeXe. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} -% An example of shell script, which prepares the \upack{minitoc} package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. -% See item~\vref{IN10}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uopt{insection}] The \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} -% with adequate options to avoid the floats (like figures and tables) to drift outside of their sections. -% This package option is recommended if you use sectlofs or sectlots in your document. See -% section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. -% \item[insertion] The insertion commands of the \upack{minitoc} package insert a mini-table in the document. -% A~corresponding \emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before. The insertion commands -% are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ -% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ -% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot},\\ -% \com{mtcprepare} -% \end{tabular} -% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] A text file describing the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. See -% chapter~\vref{c+installation}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\com{jobname}] A \TeX\ primitive containing the name of the document in preparation, i.e.,~the name of -% the file read first by \TeX{} (or \LaTeX), without its extension. Very useful to build the names of other -% files. -% \item[\uclass{jura}] The \class{jura}\imess{W0029} class~\cite{jura}, by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the -% \upack{minitoc} package. It is used for german judicial documents. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] A project~\cite{kannadatex} to use \LaTeX{} for typesetting in the -% Kannada language. See section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. -% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} -% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. This option tries to set a loose line spacing in the mini-tables. -% Analog to the \optd{loose} -% package option for standard classes. -% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{} -% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. -% This option tries to set a tight line spacing in the mini-tables. Analog to the \opt{tight} -% package option for standard classes. -% \lneed{3} -% \item[\KOMAScript] -% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} is a very complex bundle. You may see this, because it -% is not only one class or one package but a bundle of many classes and -% packages. The classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, -% \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2}, and \class{scrreprt}) -% are counterparts to the standard classes but never they come with -% only the same commands, environments, options and optional possibilities -% like the standard classes nor they result in the same look-a-like. -% -% \lneed{5} -% The \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl} classes are compatible with the -% \upack{minitoc} package, with some precautions (see section~\vref{special.entries}). -% The \class{scrlettr} and \class{scrlttr2} have no sectionning commands, so -% the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless with them. -% -% \lneed{5} -% \KOMAScript{} comes with a lot of classes, packages, commands, -% environments and possibilities. Some of these you may find also at the -% standard classes, many of them you wouldn't. Some are even supplements -% to the \LaTeX{} kernel. -% -% The main classes of the {\KOMAScript} bundle are designed as -% counterparts to the standard {\LaTeX} classes. This means that the -% {\KOMAScript} bundle contains replacements for the three standard -% classes \class{book}, \class{report}, and \class{article}. -% There is also a replacement for the standard class \class{letter}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[Lambda] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of -% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) is called ``\emph{Lambda}'' ($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). -% \item[Lamed] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of -% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) is called ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). -% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} is a typesetting system that is very -% suitable for producing scientific and mathematical -% documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for -% producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters -% to complete books. \LaTeX{} uses \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} as its -% formatting engine (from~\cite{NSSL2E}). -% -% In fact, \LaTeX{} is a macro package that enables authors to typeset and print -% their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined, -% professional layout. \LaTeX{} was originally written by -% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. It uses the -% \TeX{} formatter as its typesetting engine. -% These days \LaTeX{} is maintained by \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} -% and his team. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% In 1994 the \LaTeX{} package was (deeply) updated by the -% \LaTeX3 team, led \mbox{by~\name{Frank}{Mittelbach}}, -% to include some long-requested improvements, and to re\-unify all the -% patched versions which had cropped up since the release of -% \LaTeX2.09 some years earlier. To distinguish the new version from -% the old, it is called \LaTeXe. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \LaTeX{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech'' or ``Lah-tech.'' If you refer to -% \LaTeX{} in an \texttt{ASCII} environment, you type \texttt{LaTeX}. -% \LaTeXe{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech two~e'' and typed \texttt{LaTeX2e}. -% \item[\LaTeX2.09] An obsolete version of the \LaTeX\ program, before 1994; it is no more supported. -% Do not use it\footnote{Except in the case of a very old document; if possible, try to convert -% it.}. Use the current version of \LaTeXe, which is supported and much more efficient. -% \item[\LaTeXe] The current version of the \LaTeX\ program, after 1994; it is supported. -% \item[\LaTeX3] The future version of \LaTeX, whose development is still in progress. -% \item[leaders] A repetitive sequence of dots (or of one another small character), regulary spaced, used to link -% two objects on the same line (leading from a title to a page number in a table of contents or the like). -% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} A\Virage{} standard document class~\cite{letter} to prepare letters for postal -% mail (mail on paper). As such documents have no sectionning commands nor structure, the \upack{minitoc} package -% is pointless (hence \emph{incompatible}) with them. -% \item[\upack{lipsum}] The \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} allows to easily insert sentences -% in a test file with a minimum of typing. The sentences are in latin but are modified and made nearly -% senseless. I have used this package in some of the examples of documents. -% See also~\url{http://lipsum.com} for the origin of this text (pieces of -% \emph{De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum} by Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero}). -% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary -% files (these files contains the mini-tables and may be removed after the \LaTeX\ run) in the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. Default. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \item[LOF, LoF] An acronym for ``list of figures''. -% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of figures. -% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a loose line spacing in the -% mini-tables. It is the default. The opposite option is \opt{tight}. -% \item[LOT, LoT] An acronym for ``list of tables''. -% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of tables. -% \item[LPPL] The \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, available at -% \begin{quote} -% \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt} -% \end{quote} -% Its current version is 1.3 (2003-12-01). The \upack{minitoc} package is distributed under this license. -% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltxdoc}, for preparing the documentation of a package or of a class. -% For the \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. -% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltnews}, for preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release. For the -% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{and} \com{makeatother}] Many\footnote{Informations -% from~\cite[page~843]{TLC2}.} internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of -% packages and classes contain the \texttt{@}~character in their names. This effectively prevents such names -% from being used in documents for user-defined commands. However, it also means that they cannot appear in a -% document, even in the preamble, without taking special precautions. As it is sometimes necessary to have -% such bits of ``internal code'' in the preamble, the commands \com{makeatletter} -% and \com{makeatother} make it easy to do: the difficult bit is to remember to add them, failure to do -% so can result in some strange errors. And these two commands \Virage\emph{should never be used in a package or class file}. -% \item[makefile] A special text file containing instructions describing the creation and the installation of a -% piece of software, using the ``\textbf{make}'' utility; \textbf{make} is a nice tool coming from the Unix -% operating system, but variants exists. -% \item[\upack{mcaption}] The \pack{mcaption}\imess{W0036} package~\cite{mcaption} provides a \env{margincap} -% environment for putting captions in the outer document margin with either a top or bottom alignment. -% \item[\textbf{MCE}] A minimal [complete] example is the smallest possible complete document that illustrates a problem. -% A minimal example file should not include any packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must -% include a document class and the \env{document} environment (from~\cite{talbot-mini}). See also~\cite{preusse}, -% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} and -% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices. -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uclass{memoir}, \xfile{memoir.cls}]\iclass{memoir} A very% -% \SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} -% general and powerful document class -% (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, described in~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); this class -% is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package (with some precautions) if you use a recent version. See -% section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[mini-bibliography] See \textbf{minibbl} below. -% \item[mini-list] Synonym for ``mini-table'' below. -% \item[mini-lof] See ``minilof'' below. -% \item[mini-lot] See ``minilot'' below. -% \item[mini-table] This term refers to a local table of contents (like a table of contents, a list of figures or a -% list of tables) for a sectionning unit (part, chapter or section), by opposition to a global table (the -% table of contents, the list of figures or the list of tables for the whole document). The main aim of the -% \upack{minitoc} package is the creation of such mini-tables. But the term ``minitoc'' is also used to refer -% to such mini-table, as a generic term, because the first versions of the package allowed only tables of -% contents for chapters. -% \item[mini-toc] See ``minitoc'' below. -% \item[minibbl] Short for ``mini-bibliography'', i.e.,~to have a bibliography per part, chapter or section, or -% even by theme or subject. This is out of the domain of the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{faq.9}. -% \item[minilof] A list of figures for a chapter. -% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilofs. -% \item[minilot] A list of tables for a chapter. -% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilots. -% \item[minitoc] A table of contents for a chapter. Also used as a generic term for any mini-table (see -% ``mini-table'' above). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] The source file for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. In -% fact, it just sets \com{jobname} then loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, which itself loads -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}\isuffix{.lan} to select the language used in \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contains -% both english and french documentation fragments, selected by \com{ifcase} constructs with the -% \com{LANG} variable, set to~0 by \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} or to~1 by \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (i.e.,~by -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the french documentation. It -% is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the french language in the documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] The french documentation in PDF format. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] The french documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the -% \scrp{cmk} script). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] A plain text file containing a list of problems and questions about the \upack{minitoc} -% package. See chapter~\vref{FAQ}. -% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the minitocs. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] The file containing the documentation and the commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-hyper.sty}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} A special version~\cite{minitoc-hyper} of the \upack{minitoc} package which has been -% prepared by \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, -% \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} to work with the powerful \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}; -% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} has integrated their work so since version \#31, \upack{minitoc} is compatible with -% \pack{hyperref}. -% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and -% should no more be used. -% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.} -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] The installation file for the \upack{minitoc} package. Compiling it with \LaTeX\ -% produces most of the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the english documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] A text file containing the list of all the files being included in the -% \upack{minitoc} package. Files not listed in \xfile{minitoc.l} are files used only to install the package or -% to produce its documentation. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the english language in the documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] The english documentation in PDF format. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} This file contains a \LaTeX{} preamble for the documentation. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] The english documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the -% \scrp{cmk} scripts). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] This file contains the main part of the \upack{minitoc} package, with comments removed. -% It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] A plain text file containing a commented list of the minitoc commands and environments. See -% chapter~\vref{c+memento}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] A ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy containing all files in the -% \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\upack{minutes}] The \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}) is used to prepare -% conference proceedings. The \upack{minitoc} package allows to add ``coffee breaks'' in the table of contents -% via commands like \com{addcoffeeline} and \com{coffeeline} (and internal commands) whose names contain -% the string ``\texttt{coffee}'', hence the footnote about ``cappuccino''{\myCoffeecup} in the -% installation chapter!% -% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{The little cups \myCoffeecup{} come from the \pack{marvosym} package~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} -% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} is a large package to prepare documents in various dialects -% of the Mongol language (Bicig and Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe and Manju, Buryat, Xalx and Khalkha) and in a -% dialect of Russian used in Mongolia (Russianc). Bicig is another name for Uighur. -% You can find many things about Mongolia and Mongolian at the web site~\cite{mongol-web}. -% See also: -% {\small\begin{quote} -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ -% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ -% \url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}\\ -% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ -% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} -% \end{quote}} -% -% The following description is extracted from~\cite{montex}. -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} is a package which offers support for writing documents in -% Mongolian, Manju, Buryat and Russian. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Mongolian\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,height=2.5cm]{mongoltr.png}}} -% can be represented in traditional Uighur script (also known as Classical or Traditional -% Script) and Cyrillic. Manju resembles the Traditional Mongolian script -% (from which it is derived) but uses a rich choice of diacritics in -% order to eliminate numerous ambiguities of the Mongolian script -% ancestor. Modern Buryat, like Mongolian in its present form, is written -% with a Cyrillic alphabet, -% but both Mongolian (35 letters) and Buryat\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{mongolcy.png}}} -% (36 letters) use more letters than Russian (33 letters). -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{description} -% \item[Mongolian] -% The word \emph{Mongolian} is actually an umbrella term for -% several languages rather than the precise name of a single language. -% Things become more complicated when names of ethnic groups, languages -% and writing systems are mixed. -% \begin{description} -% \item [Xalx] or Khalkha is the name of the Mongolian -% nationality residing in Mongolia proper. Their -% dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with -% Cyrillic letters. Throughout this text, \emph{Modern -% Mongolian} is used as a synonym. -% \item [Buryat] -% is the name of the Mongolian nationality -% residing in Buryatia, north of Mongolia, east of -% Lake Baikal, being a part of the Russian Federation. -% The Buryat call themselves \emph{Buryaad} while Xalx -% Mongolians call them \emph{Buriad}. The English name -% follows the Russian orthography. -% Linguistically, Xalx and Buryat Mongol are fairly -% close languages; Buryat has a slightly different -% sound system in which the phoneme /s/ partially -% shifted to /h/; the modern Buryat Cyrillic alphabet -% (virtually identical with the Cyrillic alphabet used -% for writing Modern Mongolian) has one additional -% letter (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) for marking the difference to /s/. -% %\enlargethispage*{1ex} -% \item [Bicig] (literally \emph{script} in Mongolian) denotes -% text written in the traditional Mongolian script -% which is also referred to as Uighur. Throughout this -% document, the term \emph{Bicig} will be used on an -% equal footing with \emph{Classical} and -% \emph{Traditional} Mongolian. The latter term is -% used in the names of the Unicode/ISO10646 character -% plane U1800 which contains Mongolian, Manju, Sibe -% and sets of special characters called Ali Gali or -% Galig. In order to identify Mongolian script related -% commands distinct for Mongolian and Manju, the -% Mongolian commands have the name root \lopt{bicig} -% whereas the Manju commands have the name root -% \lopt{bithe}. -% \end{description} -% -% Xalx Mongolian, or Modern Colloquial Mongolian, is about as -% different from the form written in Classical script as modern -% English in phonetical spelling (assume it be written in Shavian -% letters) from the highly historical orthography of Standard English. -% Beyond these differences, Mongolian written in Classical Script -% usually preserves a substantial amount of historical grammatical -% features which make it look a bit like Elizabethan English. -% -% \item[Manju] -% Manju is a Tungusic language closely related to Mongolian. Though -% Manju is virtually not spoken anymore, it has been the official -% language during 300 years of Manju government in Qing Dynasty China. -% Vast amounts of official documents survive, as well as some of the -% finest multilingual dictionaries ever compiled, e.\,g. the -% Pentaglot, or Mirror in Five Languages, a dictionary with 18671 -% entries in five languages (Manju, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uighur and -% Chinese). See~\cite{pentaglot} for more details. Manju writing is derived from Uighur Mongolian by adding -% diacritics in the form of dots and circles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, script with dots and -% circles). -% \end{description} -% \item[MS-DOS] (Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System) An old operating system -% for personnal computers (PCs). -% From the \upack{minitoc} point of view, -% its main drawback is the use of filenames with short extensions (the ``8+3'' scheme), which limits to~99 the number -% of mini-tables for each kind. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns -% page layout. See section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package and its \lopt{french2} -% language option. See section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} A small bibliographic data base for the \exam{mtc-add.tex} -% and \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example documents. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package to -% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddchapter} and the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddsection} and the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. -% It also shows how it is challenging to manage the mini-lists of floats at the section level. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a -% \class{memoir} class document with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment -% to hide the entries of the appendices in the main TOC and to create a part-level TOC for the appendices. See -% section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} An example of document (\class{article} class) using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} An example of document (\class{book} or \class{report} class) -% using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns -% page layout and using the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. See section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a -% starred first chapter. See section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with starred parts -% and chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} An example file showing the problem of fonts in minitocs when -% using the \class{scrbook} class. See section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Another example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and -% \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. See section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} -% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} specialized environments. See section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} An example file showing the use of the following pairs of commands: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} and \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, -% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} and \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. -% \end{itemize} -% See section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for -% some tables in the main list of tables of an \class{article} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for -% some tables in the main list of tables of a \class{report} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the -% \class{scrbook} document class. See section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{book} with -% customized table of contents and minitocs. See section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package -% with the \class{memoir} class. See section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package -% with the \class{memoir} class, if you want to change some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} A document using a minitoc set in a \env{wrapfigure} environment with the -% \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} A document swowing an interaction betwen the \upack{minitoc} -% package and the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}. See section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to -% prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to -% prepare a minitoc on three columns and \com{mtcsetoffset} to shift the minitoc to align it on the left. -% See section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the -% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}. See section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} -% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. See section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when the table of -% contents is prededed by some starred chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the -% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. See section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of -% \class{article} class. It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. See section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the -% \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} and their interaction about the page numbers in the mini-tables. -% See section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the -% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcpolymtoc} command -% and explaining \index{polymorphic entry}``polymorphic entries''. See section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} A package used to provide variants of the standard commands -% \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine}, and \com{PackageError} -% by adding an optional argument for an unique message identifier. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} A package which is used in place of the \upack{minitoc} package to -% ignore all the commands and environments of the \upack{minitoc} package. In fact, it defines them to -% do nothing. Useful if you want a version of your document without any mini-table. -% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} A\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} small package which is automatically loaded if -% necessary when you use the \class{memoir} document class with a version \emph{incompatible} with the -% \upack{minitoc} package, but correctible. It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\texttt{mu}] A length unit normaly used in math mode (\texttt{mu} means ``math unit''); 18~math units make -% \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' in the current font. So the size of \texttt{1mu} -% is font dependent. The separation between dots in the dotted lines in the mini-tables is expressed in math units. -% \item[\upack{multibib}] The \pack{multibib} package~\cite{multibib} allows to create references to multiple -% bibliographies within one document. It thus provides a complementary functionality to packages -% like \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} or \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, which allow -% to create one bibliography for multiple, but different parts of the document. -% \item[\upack{multicol}] The \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol} defines the \env{multicols} environment -% (with a~``\textbf{s}'') to typeset text on several columns. Used in some example documents. -% \item[\upack{multitoc}] This package~\cite{multitoc} allows setting only the table of contents, list of -% figures and/or list of tables in two or more columns (using the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, of course). -% The number of columns can be configured via commands; the -% multicolumn toc(s) can be selected via package options. -% The \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example document uses this package; see section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{natbib}] It is a \LaTeXe{} (but with some support for \LaTeX2.09) package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to act -% as generalized interface for standard and non-standard bibliographic style files (\BibTeX). -% \item[\upack{needspace}] The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} provides commands to reserve space -% at the bottom of a page. If there is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column) is started. -% \item[NFSS] The \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}. The \LaTeXe{} font selection system~\cite{fontsel} -% was first released as the ``New Font Selection Scheme'' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. -% \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. -% -% \lneed{7} -% Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: -% \begin{description} -% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the -% font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are -% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``\TeX{} text'' encoding (OT1), and the ``\TeX{} text extended'' -% encoding (T1) developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} -% Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name ``Cork encoding''). -% See~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. -% \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under -% a common name by the font foundry. For instance, ``Adobe Times'', ``ITC -% Garamond'', and \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``Computer Modern Roman'' are all font families. -% \item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For instance, ``medium -% weight'', ``narrow'' and ``bold extended'' are all series. -% \item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For -% instance, ``italic'', ``oblique'' and ``upright'' (sometimes called -% ``roman'') are all font shapes. -% \item[size] The design size of the font, for instance ``10pt''. -% \end{description} -% -% \lneed{2} -% The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by -% \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are given in table~\vref{t+nfss+1}. -% \begin{table}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \changeskips -% \caption{Most common font encodings}\label{t+nfss+1} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{T1} &\LaTeX{} extended text (``Cork encoding'')\\ -% \texttt{TS1} &\LaTeX{} symbols (Latin)\\ -% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C}&\LaTeX{} text (Cyrillic)\\ -% \texttt{T3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet\\ -% \texttt{TS3} &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet (extra symbols)\\ -% \texttt{T4} &\LaTeX{} text (African languages)\\ -% \texttt{T5} &\LaTeX{} text (Vietnamese)\\ -% \texttt{T7} &\LaTeX{} text (reserved for Greek)\\ -% \texttt{OT1} &\TeX{} text (as defined by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OT2} &\TeX{} text for Cyrillic languages (obsolete)\\ -% \texttt{OT3} &International phonetic alphabet (obsolete)\\ -% \texttt{OT4} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Polish language\\ -% \texttt{OT6} &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Armenian language\\ -% \texttt{OML} &\TeX{} math italic (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OMS} &\TeX{} math symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OMX} &\TeX{} math large symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{X2} &\LaTeX{} extended text (Cyrillic)\\ -% \texttt{U} &Unknown \\ -% \texttt{L}\meta{xx}&A local encoding\\ -% \texttt{L7x} &Encoding used for the Lithuanian language\\ -% \texttt{LTH} &Encoding used for the Thai language\\ -% \texttt{LV1} &Encoding used with some \texttt{VTeX} fonts\\ -% \texttt{LY1} &Alternative to \texttt{T1} encoding, for Y\&Y software\\ -% \texttt{PD1} &Implements the PDFDocEncoding for use with \LaTeXe's NFSS.\\ -% \texttt{PU} &Implements the Unicode encoding for use with \LaTeX's NFSS.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% ^^A \end{table} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{table}[!tp] -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} -% \capstart -% \caption{Most common font families}\label{t+nfss+2} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Family}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{cmr} &Computer Modern Roman \\ -% \texttt{cmss}&Computer Modern Sans \\ -% \texttt{cmtt}&Computer Modern Typewriter \\ -% \texttt{cmm} &Computer Modern Math Italic \\ -% \texttt{cmsy}&Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ -% \texttt{cmex}&Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ -% \texttt{ptm} &Adobe Times \\ -% \texttt{phv} &Adobe Helvetica \\ -% \texttt{pcr} &Adobe Courier\\ -% \texttt{lazy}&Additional \LaTeX{} symbols\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}% -% \end{minipage}% -% &&% -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} -% \capstart -% \caption{Most common font series}\label{t+nfss+3} -% \centering -% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Series}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{ul}&Ultra light\\ -% \texttt{el}&Extra light\\ -% \texttt{l}&Light\\ -% \texttt{sl}&Semi light\\ -% \texttt{m} &Medium \\ -% \texttt{sb} &Semi bold \\ -% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ -% \texttt{eb} &Extra bold \\ -% \texttt{bx}&Bold extended \\ -% \texttt{ub}&Ultra bold \\ -% \texttt{c} &Condensed\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}\hfill\null -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{table} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth} -% \capstart -% \caption{Most common font shapes}\label{t+nfss+4} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Shape}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{n} &Normal (that is ``upright'' or ``roman'') \\ -% \texttt{it}&Italic \\ -% \texttt{sl}&Slanted (or ``oblique'') \\ -% \texttt{sc}&Caps and small caps\\ -% \texttt{u}&Unslanted (upright italic)\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{minipage}% -% &&% -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} -% \capstart -% \caption{Most common font widths}\label{t+nfss+4a} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Width}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensed\\ -% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensed\\ -% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensed\\ -% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensed\\ -% \texttt{m}&50.0&Medium\\ -% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi extended\\ -% \texttt{c}&50.0&Extended\\ -% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra extended\\ -% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra extended\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% The ``local'' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only -% locally available, for instance a font containing an organisation's -% logo in various sizes. -% -% \lneed{4} -% There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common -% ones are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+2}. -% The most common values for the font series are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+3}. -% The most common values for the font shape are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4}. -% The most common values for the font width are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% -% The font size is specified as a dimension, for instance \texttt{10pt} or -% \texttt{1.5in} or \texttt{3mm}; if no unit is specified, \texttt{pt} is assumed. These five -% parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, see table~\vref{t+nfss+5}, for instance. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \caption{The five font parameters of some fonts}\label{t+nfss+5} -% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} -% \toprule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{\LaTeX{} specification}}& -% \textbf{Font}&\textbf{\TeX{} name}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{OT1}&\texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & -% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & -% \texttt{cmr10}\\ -% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & -% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & -% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ -% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & -% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & -% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ -% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & -% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & -% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \caption{Author commands for fonts}\label{t+nfss+6} -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Author command} & -% \textbf{Attribute} & -% \textbf{Value in} \uclass{article} \textbf{class} \\ -% \midrule -% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{rmfamily} & family & \texttt{cmr} \\ -% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{sffamily} & family & \texttt{cmss} \\ -% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{ttfamily} & family & \texttt{cmtt} \\ -% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{mdseries} & series & \texttt{m} \\ -% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{bfseries} & series & \texttt{bx} \\ -% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{upshape} & shape & \texttt{n} \\ -% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{itshape} & shape & \texttt{it} \\ -% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{slshape} & shape & \texttt{sl} \\ -% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{scshape} & shape & \texttt{sc} \\ -% \com{tiny} & size & \texttt{5pt} \\ -% \com{scriptsize} & size & \texttt{7pt} \\ -% \com{footnotesize} & size & \texttt{8pt} \\ -% \com{small} & size & \texttt{9pt} \\ -% \com{normalsize} & size & \texttt{10pt} \\ -% \com{large} & size & \texttt{12pt} \\ -% \com{Large} & size & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ -% \com{LARGE} & size & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ -% \com{huge} & size & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ -% \com{Huge} & size & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ -% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{normal text}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull -% box warning, for instance: -% \begin{verse} -% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ -% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} -% \end{verse} -% \lneed{6} -% The table~\vref{t+nfss+6} lists the author commands for fonts which set these five attributes\footnote{The -% values used by these commands are determined by the document class.}. -% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{checkfiles} -% package option (see above). -% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{hints} -% package option (see above). -% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It is the opposite of the -% \optd{listfiles} above. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} This option of the \upack{minitoc} package loads -% the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). -% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in sectionning commands or captions. See -% section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[Omega] The Omega typesetting system\,\footnote{Most but not all of this note is taken in the Omega documentation -% \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. -% See~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} for more information.} -% ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (by \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} and \xname{John}{Plaice}) -% is an extension of \TeX{} that is aimed primarily at improving \TeX's multilingual abilities. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% When the \TeX{} program was originally developed in the mid seventies [\emph{circa} 1975] by -% Professor \xname{Donald~E.}{Knuth} -% it was mainly aimed at typesetting mathematical texts in the english language. Since then \TeX{} has -% made inroads in broader and broader areas of scientific, literary and other scholarly activities in many -% countries all over the world. In 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} froze \TeX, mainly in the interest of stability. -% However, he allows the \TeX{} code to be used as the basis for further developments, so long as the resulting system is -% distributed under a different name. -% -% In Omega all characters and pointers into data-structures are 31-bit -% wide, instead of 8-bit, thereby eliminating many of the trivial -% limitations of \TeX. Omega also allows multiple input and output -% character sets, and uses programmable filters to translate from one -% encoding to another, to perform contextual analysis, etc. Internally, -% Omega uses the universal Unicode/ISO-10646 character set. Omega also -% includes support for multiple writing directions. -% -% These improvements not only make it a lot easier for \TeX{} users to cope -% with multiple or complex languages, like Arabic, Indic, Khmer, Chinese, -% Japanese or Korean, in one document, but also form the basis for future -% developments in other areas, such as native color support and hypertext -% features. -% -% The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of Omega is called -% ``\emph{Lambda}''~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). -% Extending Omega with the \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} extensions is a separate -% project, known as ``\pack{Aleph}'' ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} and led by \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. -% The \LaTeX\ for \pack{Aleph} is known as -% ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). -% There is an experimental system, named \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, which will regroup -% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} and other developments. -% A promising development is \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} by~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, with -% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. -% \begin{table}[tp!] -% ^^A \changeskips -% \caption{Some systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} -% \centering -% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} -% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ -% &&+&&&&+\\ -% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ -% &&&&&&\\ -% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} -% &&&&&&\\ -% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} -% \end{array} \] -% \end{table} -% \item[\feat{open}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately before -% (\emph{open}) the insertion of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[package] Packages\footnote{This info is taken from~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} and adapted.} are a very important -% feature of \LaTeX. These are extensions to the basic \LaTeX{} commands that are written to files with names -% that end with \suffix{.sty} and are loaded with the command \com{usepackage} in the preamble. Packages can be -% classified by they origin. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{Core} packages (in fact, \textbf{base} and \textbf{required} packages) are an integral part of -% the \LaTeX{} basic installation and are therefore fully standard. -% \item \textbf{Tools} packages are a set written by members of the \LaTeX3 Team and should always be in the -% installation. -% \item \textbf{Graphics} packages are a standardized set for including pictures generated by other programs -% and for handling colors; they are at the same level as the tools packages. -% \item \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX} packages, published by the American Mathematical -% Society\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}, should be in any -% installation\footnote{They are indispensable if you use a lot of mathematics.}. -% \item \textbf{Contributed} packages have been submitted by actual users; certain of these have established -% themselves as ``essential'' to standard \LaTeX{} usage, but all are useful. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed at each occurrence of -% a given type of mini-table, to force the page style to use for the current page. -% Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[partlof] A list of figures for a part. -% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlofs. -% \item[partlot] A list of tables for a part. -% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlots. -% \item[parttoc] A table of contents for a part. -% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the parttocs. -% \item[PDF] Portable Document Format~\cite{pdfspec}. A descendant of the PostScript language from Adobe, -% optimized for navigation on the Internet. It adds hypertext, font substitution, and compression features. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{placeins}] The \pack{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} -% package~\cite{placeins} keeps floats ``in their place'', -% preventing them from floating past a \com{FloatBarrier} command into another section. To use it, declare -% \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} in the preamble and -% insert \com{FloatBarrier} commands at places that floats -% should not move past, perhaps at every \com{section}. The \opt{insection} package option of the -% \upack{minitoc} package does that with adequate options, and loads also the \pack{flafter} package -% (described in~\cite{ltoutput} and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); -% see section~\vref{s+placing}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] A plain text file containing the documentation of -% the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. -% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} A\virage{} version of \LaTeX\ customized -% for the polish (\lopt{polski}) language. It has been replaced by the \pack{polski} package. See~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. -% But the \emph{same} name was referring also to a version of \LaTeX\ customized for the japanese language, -% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. -% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} -% An example of shell script to prepare the \upack{minitoc} package -% and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs. -% See item~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[polymorphic entry] An entry\index{polymorphic entry} in the TOC, LOF or LOT which changes its aspect -% depending on the place where it appears (main TOC, minitable, etc.); see section~\vref{ss+polym}. -% \item[PostScript] A page description language, by Adobe. It describes the appearance of a page, including -% elements such as text, graphics, and scanned images, to a printer or visualization device. Introduced by -% Adobe in 1985, it has become the language of choice in high quality printing. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[preamble] In the main file of a \LaTeX{} source document, the part of it between the commands -% \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} and \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. In the preamble, -% you can insert global declarations and the loading of packages via \com{usepackage} commands. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[preparation] The preparation commands of the \upack{minitoc} package prepare the auxiliary files for the -% mini-tables of a given type. A~\emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before any -% insertion command for the mini-table type. The preparation commands are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(part level)\\ -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(chapter level)\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(section level)\\ -% \com{mtcprepare}&(all levels) -% \end{tabular} -% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class, for preparing conference proceedings. For the -% \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above. -% \item[pseudo-chapter] -% Or starred chapter. A chapter introduced by a \com{chapter*} command. By default, it has no entry in -% the table of contents. \com{chapter*} needs some precautions with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% See section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{quotchap}] The \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} provides a set of commands for adding quotations to -% some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: -% \class{book}, and \class{report}. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.quotchap} and -% section~\vref{faq.39}). -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[README] is a plain text file (english) describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, -% plus some useful infos. -% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}, -% \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and -% you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many -% auxiliary files). -% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} An example of shell script, which sorts the files -% of the \upack{minitoc} package into classes (one directory -% for each class). It should be run after the scripts -% \scrp{imk} (mandatory) and \scrp{emk} and/or -% \scrp{fmk}, in that sequence. See item~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\upack{romannum}] The \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} changes the numbers (for sectionning commands) -% generated by \LaTeX{} from arabic digits to roman numerals. This package uses -% the \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv}. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.romannum} and -% section~\vref{faq.40}). -% \item[\pack{rotating}] The \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} package performs all the different sorts of -% rotation one might like, including complete figures. -% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] The pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} package provides commands to define new floats -% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, and userdefined ones); -% the \pack{rotating} package~\cite{rotating} provides new environments (\env{sidewaysfigure} -% and \env{sidewaystable}) which are rotated by $90^\circ$ or $270^\circ$. -% But what about new rotated floats, e.g.\ a rotated ruled one? -% This package makes this possible; it builds a bridge between both packages -% and extend the commands from the \pack{float} package to define rotated -% versions of the new floats, too. -% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} is a wrapper for \LaTeX\ and companion programs. -% Its purpose is, given a \LaTeX\ source to process, -% to compile it enough times to resolve all references, possibly running satellite programs such as \textbf{\BibTeX}, -% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., to produce appropriate data files. It has facilities to make -% some post-processing cleanup actions, like deleting the auxiliary files created by \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} See {\KOMAScript} above. -% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} See {\KOMAScript} above. -% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} See {\KOMAScript} above. -% \item[sectionning commands] These are the \LaTeX\ commands which specify the logical structure of your document. -% The main sectionning commands are \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, -% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph}, or \com{subparagraph}. -% Some standard document classes have not the \com{chapter} command (like the \class{article} and -% \class{proc} classes), some have no sectionning commands (like the \class{letter} class). In the later -% case, the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. If some of the \com{part}, \com{chapter}, -% or \com{section} commands are not defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands for that level are -% unavailable. If \com{chapter} is defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are not -% defined in the current and older versions of the \upack{minitoc} package, but if \com{chapter} is -% not defined and \com{section} is defined, then the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are -% defined. See section~\vref{note+sectionning}. -% In non-standard document classes, sectionning commands with non-standard names cannot be recognized by the -% \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[sectlof] A list of figures for a section. -% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlofs. -% \item[sectlot] A list of tables for a section. -% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlots. -% \item[\upack{sectsty}] The \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} provides a set of commands for changing -% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, -% \class{book}, and \class{report}. This package also works with the {\KOMAScript} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} -% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, and \class{scrreprt}. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sectsty} and -% section~\vref{faq.28}). -% \item[secttoc] A table of contents for a section. -% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the secttocs. -% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] The \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (for \LaTeXe) borrows -% some definitions from the standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} classes -% and modifies them in order to print the part, chapter, section, subsection\ldots{} headers with -% the Sans-Serif variant of the current font. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sfheaders} and -% section~\vref{faq.41}). -% \item[shell] In the Unix, Unix-like and Linux operating systems, the \textbf{shell} is a program used as an -% interface between the operating system and the user. It can also be used as a scripting language to write -% programs or scripts to prepare routinely used sequences of tasks. The main shells are the -% Bourne shell (\textbf{sh}), the C~shell (\textbf{csh}), the Korn shell (\textbf{ksh}), -% and their many successors (like \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). -% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} An\imess{W0020} option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It forces the use of short extensions -% (3~characters) in the names of the minitoc auxiliary files. This option is inactive by default, but is -% automatically activated if your operating system needs short extensions. See \textbf{autoconfiguration} -% above and the section~\vref{.8+3}. -% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] The \pack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc} allows to create an other table of -% contents in a document, with an other title and an other depth than the main table of contents. -% \item[SJIS] The SJIS character encoding (for the japanese language), also known as MS-Kanji (Kanji for -% Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), -% consists of two overlaid character sets: the so-called halfwidth Katakana (JIS X0201-1976, 1-byte characters -% encoded in the range \texttt{0xA1} to \texttt{0xDF}) and the (fullwidth) JIS character set (JIS X0208-1990, -% mapped to the remaining code points). This information is taken from~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} A version of \LaTeX\ customized for the swedish language. See~\cite{slatex}. -% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{splitbib} which allows for sorting a bibliography -% into categories and -% subcategories; this is interesting for lists of publications, for grouping references by subject, by year,~... -% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] The \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv} is intended to be used by the authors -% of \LaTeX{} packages that need to know about the sectional divisions provided by the document class. -% \item[strut] A vertical invisible rule used to force a minimal separation between two lines of text. -% \item[\upack{subfig}] The \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} provides support for the -% inclusion of small, ``sub-figures'' and ``sub-tables''. It simplifies the positioning, captioning and labeling of -% them within a single \env{figure} or \env{table} environment. In addition, this package allows -% such sub-captions to be written to the List of Figures or List of Tables if desired. -% \item[\upack{subfigure}] The \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure} is an obsolete version (by the same -% author) of the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. -% \item[suffix] See ``extension'' above. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}The \TeX~Directory Structure~\cite{ftds,tds}; a directory structure highly recommended to -% store macros, fonts, and the other implementation-independent \TeX{} system files; it also suggests how to -% incorporate the rest of the \TeX{} files in a single structure; the \index{TDS}TDS has been designed to work on all -% modern systems. -% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} is a computer program created by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. -% It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae. -% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} started writing the \TeX{} typesetting -% engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing -% equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at -% that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of -% deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own -% books and articles. \TeX{} as we use it today was released in 1982, -% with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit -% characters and multiple languages. \TeX{} is renowned for being -% extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers, -% and for being virtually bug free. The version number of \TeX{} is -% converging to $\pi$ and is now at $3.141592$. -% -% \TeX{} is pronounced ``Tech,'' with a ``ch'' as in the German word -% ``Ach'' or in the Scottish ``Loch.'' In an ASCII environment, \TeX{} -% becomes \texttt{TeX}. -% \item[\upack{thailatex}] The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} allows to typeset -% documents in the Thai language. You can also use the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a tight line spacing in the -% mini-tables. The opposite option is \optd{loose}. -% \item[\upack{titlesec}] The \pack{titlesec}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} package~\cite{titletoc} allows to change the sectioning titles. -% Amongst its many features it provides margin titles, different format in left and right pages, rules above -% and below the title, etc. Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \item[\upack{titletoc}] The\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} \pack{titletoc} package is useful for toc entries formatting, -% providing the possibility of changing the format in the middle of a document, grouping the entries -% in a single paragraph, pretty free-forms entries, partial tocs, etc. -% Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. -% -% The \xfile{titletoc.sty} file is not part of the \pack{titlesec} package; it's an independent package, -% but it's described in the \pack{titlesec} package documentation~\cite{titletoc}. -% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} A script file which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant -% hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} (to be ajusted to your system). -% \item[TOC, ToC] Acronym for ``table of contents''. -% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] The \pack{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} package~\cite{tocbibind} can be used to add the ToC -% and/or bibliography and/or the index etc., to the Table of Contents listing. But it needs some precautions -% when used with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{special.entries}. -% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the table of contents. -% \item[\upack{tocloft}] The \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} provides means of controlling the -% typographic design of the Table of Contents, List of Figures and List of Tables. -% New kinds of ``List of \ldots' can be defined. If you use the \pack{tocloft} package and the -% \upack{minitoc} package, see section~\vref{faq+tocloft} about fixing some minor compatibility issues. -% \item[\xfile{TODO}] is a plain text file (english) which lists some suggested developments of the package, -% not yet implemented. Comments and suggestions are welcome. -% \item[token] A token\footnote{This definition is taken from ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} is either -% (a)~a single character with an attached category code (see ``catcode'' above), or (b)~a control sequence. -% \virage{} You \emph{should} remember two chief things about \TeX's tokens: (1)~A~control sequence is considered to be -% a single object that is no longer composed of a sequence of symbols. Therefore long control sequence names -% are no harder for \TeX\ to deal with than short ones, after they have been replaced by tokens. Furthermore, -% spaces are not ignored after control sequences inside a token list; the ignore-space rule applies only in an -% input file, during the time that strings of characters are being tokenized. (2)~Once a category code has been -% attached to a character token, the attachment is permanent. For instance, if character `\verb|{|' were -% suddenly declared to be of category~12 instead of category~1, the characters `\verb|{|$_1$' already inside token -% lists of \TeX\ would still remain of category~1; only newly made lists would contain `\verb|{|$_{12}$' tokens. -% In other words, individual characters receive a fixed interpretation as soon as they have been read from a file, -% based on the category they have at the time of reading. Control sequences are different, since they can change -% their interpretation at any time. \TeX's digestive processes always know exactly what a character token signifies, -% because the category code appears in the token itself; but when the digestive processes encounter a control sequence -% token, they must look up the current definition of that control sequence in order to figure out what it means. -% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] The \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} (by \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} provides -% a quick method for defining new float types in \LaTeX. A single command sets up a new float in the -% same style as the \LaTeX{} kernel \env{figure} and \env{table} float types. -% \item[\pack{txfonts}] The \pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts} provides the \texttt{TX} fonts, which consist of -% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt -% \item virtual text roman fonts using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with -% some modified and additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings; -% \item \textsf{virtual text sans serif fonts using Adobe Helvetica (or URW NimbusSanL) with -% additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings}; -% \item {\smooth\texttt{monospaced typewriter fonts in the OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1\linebreak[4] encodings}}; -% \item math alphabets using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with modified metrics; -% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of Computer Modern math fonts (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX, -% and Greek letters of CMR); -% \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of AmS{} fonts (MSAM and MSBM); -% \item additional math fonts of various symbols. -% \end{enumerate} -% All fonts are in the Type~1 format (in \suffix{.afm} and \suffix{.pfb} files). -% Necessary \suffix{.tfm} and \suffix{.vf} files together with \LaTeXe\ package files and font map files -% (\suffix{.map}) for \tool{dvips} are provided. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[UNIX] A modern operating system, available on many computers and in various flavors. From the -% \upack{minitoc} point of view, it has the advantage of using filenames with long extensions (the length -% limit is too high to be a problem with the number of mini-tables). -% \item[UNIX-like] Operating systems analog to Unix, with the same advantages. Linux is a good example, but others -% exist. -% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} A PERL script, by \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, -% to add a \texttt{webpage} \BibTeX{} entry type, -% and add support for general \texttt{url} and \texttt{lastchecked} fields, to (most) \BibTeX{} \suffix{.bst} files. -% Optionally adds basic support for \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{doi} fields, and \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref} -% support, too. See \cite{hypertex,hyperref.web}. -% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), also called UTF~2 or FSS-UTF, is a special representation -% of Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). It uses multibyte sequences of various lengths, but only 2-byte and 3-byte -% sequences are implemented in \pack{CJK}. ASCII characters will be used as-is --- without this property it would be -% impossible to use UTF~8 with \TeX. See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{varsects}] The \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} provides a set of commands for changing -% the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article}, -% \class{book}, and \class{report}. -% It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.varsects} and -% section~\vref{faq.33}). -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \par\reversemarginpar -% \item[Wikipedia] The \index{Wikipedia}Wikipedia\index{Wikipedia}\ixgrf{wiki.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{0cm}[2.5cm][0cm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wiki.png}}}} -% is a free, multilingual, open content (neutral, verifiable, modifiable and improvable by anyone) -% encyclopedia project operated by the non-profit Wikimedia Foundation. -% Its name is a portemanteau of the words \emph{wiki} (a type of collaborative website) and \emph{encyclopedia}. -% Launched in 2001 by \name{Jimmy}{Wales} and \name{Larry}{Sanger}, it is the largest, fastest growing and most -% popular general reference work currently available on the Internet. -% \par\normalmarginpar -% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] The \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig} provides the \env{wrapfigure} and -% \env{wraptable} environments to place a figure or table at the side of the page and wrap text around~it. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\scrp{xmk}] An example of shell script, which typesets the example document files into PDF documents. -% \item[\upack{xr}] The \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr} implements a system for eXternal References. I wrote the -% first version of this package, but it had severe problems. \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} rewrote it in a much -% better and more robust way. With his permission, I used some of his code in the \upack{minitoc} package -% to implement the preparation commands (like \com{dominitoc}). If you use also the \pack{hyperref} -% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, use \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} in place of the \upack{xr} package. -% \end{wdesc} -% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em} -% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em} -% \minitoc -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} -% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt} -% \mtcskip -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} -% \minilot -% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty} -% Ce chapitre tente d'expliquer certains termes utilisés dans cette documentation et décrit quelques fichiers et suffixes -% utiles. -% De nombreuses informations proviennent des documentations de divers paquetages cités (souvent du résumé ou -% \emph{abstract}), et -% de~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2F,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}. -% \clearpage -% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \jsection{<<~.~>>\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{<<~.~>>} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\suffix{.aux}] Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier \emph{auxiliaire} d'un document \LaTeX{}. Il transfère -% des informations d'une exécution de \LaTeX{} à~la suivante. -% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.aux} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier classe de document, -% chargé via la commande \com{documentclass}. -% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} Le suffixe du nom pour le fichier source documenté d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. -% Ce fichier est souvent associé à~un fichier \suffix{.ins} pour engendrer le paquetage ou la classe. -% Compiler un fichier \suffix{.dtx} avec \LaTeX{} engendre la documentation. -% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. -% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier d'installation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX. -% Lorsque qu'il est compilé avec \LaTeX, il extrait les fichiers du paquetage ou de la classe depuis un -% fichier \suffix{.dtx}. -% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des figures\fg. -% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} Le suffixe du nom du fichier rapport de compilation. -% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des tableaux\fg. -% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\suffix{.maf} Le suffixe du nom du fichier engendré par l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. -% Option par défaut. -% Ce fichier contient la liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc de définition de langue. Un fichier minitoc de -% définition de langue contient les définitions des titres des mini-tables dans une langue donnée. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc objet de langue. Pour certaines langues -% exotiques, le codage rend difficile l'insertion directe des titres dans un fichier \suffix{.mld}; donc -% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. -% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. -% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\suffix{.ptc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof. -% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc. -% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier paquetage, chargé via \com{usepackage}. -% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot. -% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} Le suffixe du nom d'un fichier source \TeX\ ou \LaTeX\ normal. -% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} table des matières\fg. -% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot. -% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le -% suffixe complet est \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[absolue (numérotation)] Les fichiers auxiliaires pour les minitables ont un suffixe contenant un -% \emph{numéro absolu}, c'est-à-dire un numéro qui est unique et toujours croissant depuis la première -% partie, le premier chapitre ou la première section; ceci a résolu quelques problèmes obscurs, et aussi -% frappé d'obsolescence quelques commandes, telles que \com{firstpartis}, -% \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}. La numérotation absolue a été introduite dans -% la version~\#23. -% \item[\upack{abstract}] Le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) nécessite -% quelques précautions s'il est utilisé avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}. -% \item[\feat{after}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{après} un type donné de mini-table. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[ajustement] Quelques commandes et environnements de \upack{minitoc} sont dits \og{} commandes -% d'ajustement\fg{} car ils sont utilisés dans certaines circonstances pour \og{} ajuster\fg{} un compteur ou -% altérer l'affichage de fichiers de contenu. Ces commandes et environnements sont -% \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc}, -% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc}, -% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc}, -% \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, -% \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, -% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, -% \env{mtchideinmainlof} et -% \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% Il est \virage\emph{fortement recommandé} que l'utilisateur vérifie le résultat de tels ajustements dans le -% document final. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\pack{afterpage}] La paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} est utilisé pour ajouter du code qui sera -% exécuté \emph{après} la prochaine coupure de page. -% \item[\upack{alnumsec}] -% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} vous permet d'utiliser une numérotation alphanumérique des sections, -% c'est-à-dire: A.~Introduction; III.~Loi internationale. Ce résultat est similaire -% à~celui du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), -% mais vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de sectionnement standard de \LaTeX. Il est donc possible -% de changer facilement de schéma de numérotation. Lettres grecques, lettres doubles~(bb) et différents -% délimiteurs autour des numéros sont supportés. -% Ce paquetage doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.alnumsec} et la -% section~\vref{faq.42}). -% \item[\upack{alphanum}] Le\imess{W0025} paquetage \pack{alphanum}, qui fait partie de la -% classe spécialisée \class{jura}~\cite{jura}, -% de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \lneed{3} -% \item[\AmS] L'\emph{American Mathematical Society}~\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron.% -% \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}} -% Cette société savante a développé les classes de document suivantes: -% \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont, malheureusement, \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% \class{amsbook} est compatible mais demande des précautions. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}. -% \item[\uclass{amsart}]\iclass{amsart} Une\imess{W0026} classe de document pour des articles~\cite{amslatex}, -% fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette classe -% est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uclass{amsbook}]\iclass{amsbook} Une\imess{I0041} classe de document pour des livres~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par -% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% mais requiert des précautions. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uclass{amsproc}]\iclass{amsproc} Une\imess{W0027} classe de document pour des comptes-rendus de -% congrès~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette -% classe est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% est un paquetage de support de langues pour \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), fondé sur le -% fichier \xfile{omega.sty} original du projet Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). Cependant, il offre quelques -% fonctionnalités additionnelles utiles. -% Certains fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) utilisent des titres définis par \pack{Antomega}: -% \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, -% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, -% \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld} et \xfile{spanish3.mld}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\env{appendices}] Voir \upack{appendix} ci-dessous. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{appendix}] Le\imess{I0042} paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) -% fournit diverses manières de formater les titres des appendices. Des environnements -% nommés (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices} -% sont aussi fournis pouvant être utilisés, par exemple, pour des appendices par chapitre ou par section. Si -% ce paquetage est utilisé avec \upack{minitoc}, certaines précautions sont nécessaires (voir la -% section~\vref{faq+appendix}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} est un système (de \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) pour préparer des documents \LaTeX{} dans -% les langues arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou \lopt{farsi}. Les titres dans \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} proviennent -% des fichiers \xfile{arabic.ldf} et \xfile{farsi.ldf} de ce système. -% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} est un paquetage (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) pour préparer des -% documents en langue arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou hébraïque (\lopt{hebrew}). Les titres dans \xfile{arab.mld} (ou \xfile{arabic.mld}), -% \xfile{arab2.mld} et -% \xfile{hebrew.mld} proviennent d'\packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, mais ceux donnés par \xfile{hebrew2.mld} proviennent -% de \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} est un paquetage (réalisé par \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, -% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) pour préparer des -% documents \LaTeX{} en langue arménienne. -% Les titres dans \xfile{armenian.mld} proviennent du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}. -% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle offre des commandes de sectionnement: -% \com{part} et \com{section} (et en dessous), mais pas \com{chapter}. Elle est compatible avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et section (mais, bien -% sûr, pas au niveau chapitre indisponible). -% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}] -% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter au début du document (en fait, à~la fin exacte de -% son préambule, mais à~l'intérieur de celui-ci, ce qui implique quelques restrictions), à~l'endroit -% où \verb|\begin{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans -% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. -% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}] -% Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter à~la fin du document, à~l'endroit -% où \verb|\end{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans -% créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même. -% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Depuis la version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} détecte automatiquement si les -% suffixes des noms de fichiers sont limités à~3~caractères (comme sous MS-DOS). Ce processus se nomme -% l'autoconfiguration. L'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} force la limitation à~3~caractères. -% \item[auxiliaire] Pendant la préparation d'un document, le système \LaTeX\ utilise quelques fichiers -% \textbf{auxiliaires} pour stocker des informations. Les fichiers auxiliaires standard sont -% \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (pour les labels de références croisées, les compteurs, etc.), -% \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} pour la table des matières, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} pour la liste des figures -% et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} pour la liste des tableaux. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} crée ses propres -% fichiers auxiliaires, pour y~stocker les contenus de chaque mini-table. Ces fichiers sont les -% \emph{fichiers auxiliaires minitoc}, dont les noms sont de la forme \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{suffixe}, -% le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} liste les suffixes possibles. -% Voir aussi le suffixe \suffix{.maf} plus haut. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{babel}] Le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et autres) est un -% vaste paquetage permettant de préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans de nombreuses langues, et pas seulement en -% anglais. De nombreux titres pour les mini-tables proviennent directement du paquetage \pack{babel}. -% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} Un paquetage pour composer des documents dans la langue \lopt{bangla} -% (\lopt{bengali}) en utilisant les systèmes {\TeX/\LaTeX}; voir~\cite{bangtex}. -% \item[\feat{before}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{avant} un type donné de mini-table. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[\BibTeX] Un programme écrit par \name{Oren}{Patashnik} pour produire des bibliographies dans des documents \LaTeX. -% Distribué avec \LaTeX. Voir~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}. -% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} Un paquetage~\cite{bibtopic} \LaTeX{} pour inclure plusieurs bibliographies dans -% un document. Ces bibliographies pourraient être considérées comme couvrant des sujets différents (d'où le nom) -% ou du matériel bibliographique (par exemple, documentation de premier et second niveaux), etc. -% \item[\upack{bibunits}] Le paquetage \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} permet de faire des bibliographies -% distinctes pour différentes unités ou partie du texte. Les unités peuvent être des chapitres, des sections ou -% des environnements \env{bibunit}. Ce paquetage est compatible avec une large variété de paquetages, dont -% (mais sans y~être limité) \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} -% et les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. -% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: -% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). -% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et -% chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). -% \item[\pack{booktabs}] Ce beau paquetage~\cite{booktabs} vous aide à~préparer de plus belles tables, \emph{sans} -% filets verticaux ni filets doubles. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[cadratin] Voir «~em~» ci-dessous. -% \item[\pack{calc}] Le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} facilite les calculs numériques (sur des compteurs et -% des dimensions) lors le la préparation d'un document \LaTeX. -% \item[cappuccino] Voir «~minutes~» ci-dessous. -% \item[\upack{captcont}] Le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} fournit un support pour conserver -% un numéro de figure ou de caption pour plusieurs environnements flottants --- habituellement sur plusieurs pages. -% Il permet de contrôler le contenu des pages de la liste des figures et de la liste des tableaux. Il devrait -% être compatible avec tous les autres paquetages qui modifient ou étendent l'environnement flottant et avec -% le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} en particulier. -% \item[\upack{caption}] Le paquetage \upack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} offre de nombreuses façons d'adapter les -% captions (légendes) dans des environnements flottants tels que \env{figure} et \env{table}, et coopère -% avec de nombreux autres paquetages. -% \item[\upack{caption2}] Le paquetage\,\footnote{Ce texte provient de la documentation du paquetage \pack{caption}, -% et a été traduit. Les paquetages \pack{caption} et \pack{caption2} ont le même auteur, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.} -% \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} était considéré comme étant une version expérimentale -% parallèle du paquetage normal \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} et a été supplanté par la nouvelle version~\mbox{3.0} -% du paquetage normal \pack{caption} en décembre 2003. \pack{caption2} est encore supporté -% d'une certaine manière, ce qui signifie qu'il fera partie des prochaines distributions et que les erreurs -% seront encore corrigées, afin que les documents existants utilisant ce paquetage puissent encore être -% compilés. Mais \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} \emph{ne répondra plus} aux questions concernant ce paquetage sauf -% pour les questions sur le passage à~la nouvelle version du paquetage \pack{caption}. Et ce paquetage -% \emph{ne sera ni adapté ni amélioré} dans le futur. -% -% Vous êtes donc priés de ne pas utiliser ce paquetage pour de nouveaux documents. Il est vieux, il est -% obsolète et il commence à~sentir mauvais! -% -% Vous êtes également priés d'ignorer tous les conseils dans des livres ou autres documents qui essayent de -% vous dire que le paquetage \pack{caption2} devrait être utilisé à~la place du paquetage \pack{caption} -- ces -% conseils sont démodés depuis décembre 2003. -% \item[\xfile{CATALOG}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui contient des informations basiques sur le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} (résumé, date, auteur, version, licence). -% \item[catcode] Abréviation de «~code de catégorie~» (\emph{category code}). Tout\,\footnote{Cette définition -% est tirée du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} d'abord, il est sage d'avoir une idée précise de ce -% que votre clavier envoie à~la machine. Il y~a 256~caractères que \TeX\ peut rencontrer à~chaque étape, dans un -% fichier ou dans une ligne de texte frappé directement sur votre terminal. Ces 256~caractères sont classés en -% 16~catégories numérotées de~0 à~15. Voir la table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \def?{\phantom{0}} -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Codes de catégorie}\label{t+J+catcodes} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}clZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% &\textbf{Catégorie}&\textbf{Signification}\\ -% \midrule -% ?0&Caractère d'échappement&(\texttt{\bs}~habituellement)\\ -% ?1&Début de groupe&(\texttt{\{}~habituellement)\\ -% ?2&Fin de groupe&(\texttt{\}}~habituellement)\\ -% ?3&Début et fin de mode mathématique&(\texttt{\$}~habituellement)\\ -% ?4&Taquet d'alignement&(\texttt{\&}~habituellement)\\ -% ?5&Fin de ligne&(\emph{return}~habituellement)\\ -% ?6&Paramètre&(\texttt{\#}~habituellement)\\ -% ?7&Exposant&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~habituellement)\\ -% ?8&Indice&(\texttt{\_}~habituellement)\\ -% ?9&Caractère ignoré&(\emph{null}~habituellement)\\ -% 10&Espace&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~habituellement)\\ -% 11&Lettre&(\texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z} et~\texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z})\\ -% 12&Autre caractère&(aucun de ceux ci-dessus ou ci-dessous)\\ -% 13&Caractère actif&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~habituellement)\\ -% 14&Caractère commentaire&(\texttt{\%}~habituellement)\\ -% 15&Caractère invalide&(\emph{delete}~habituellement)\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% Il n'est pas nécessaire que vous appreniez ces numéros de code; l'important est que \TeX\ connaisse 16~types -% différents de caractères. Tout d'abord, «~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~» vous laisse croire qu'il n'y a que deux -% types --- le caractère d'échappement et les autres --- puis il vous parle de deux types de plus, les symboles de -% groupement~\texttt{\{} et~\texttt{\}}. Le code de catégorie pour tout caractère peut être changé à~tout moment, -% mais il est habituellement prudent de se conformer à~un schéma particulier. -% \item[\upack{ccaption}] Le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} fournit des commandes pour des -% \og{} captions de continuation\fg, des captions non numérotés, et un en-tête de légende pour tout -% environnement. Des méthodes sont fournies pour définir des captions à~utiliser en dehors des environnements -% flottants et pour définir de nouveaux environnements flottants et des sous-flottants. Des outils sont fournis -% pour définir vos propres styles de captions. -% \item[\upack{chngpage}] Le paquetage \pack{chngpage} (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) fournit des commandes pour changer -% la mise en page au milieu d'un document et pour tester de manière robuste la mise en page pour les pages -% paires ou impaires. -% \item[Chapter~0] -% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro un, mais par un chapitre numéroté zéro (ou même -% avec un numéro plus bizarre). Ceci posait un sérieux problème dans les anciennes versions du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}: les minitocs n'apparaissaient plus dans les bons chapitres, et une première correction -% fut l'introduction de commandes spécifiques (\com{firstchapteris} et analogues). Avec l'ajout de la -% numérotation absolue des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables (voir \emph{absolue} plus haut), le -% problème fut résolu dans \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, et ces commandes devinrent obsolètes. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.5}. -% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] Le paquetage \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib} permet d'avoir plusieurs bibliographies -% dans un document \LaTeX, y~compris des éléments cités (par \com{cite}) dans plus d'une bibliographie. -% Un dépit du nom \og{}\pack{chapterbib}\fg, \emph{les bibliographies sont pour chaque fichier inclus par -% \com{include}}, pas nécessairement pour chaque chapitre. -% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles} -% Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle teste chaque mini-table pour voir si elle est vide; puis les -% mini-tables vides \emph{ne sont pas} imprimées. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire -% (\opt{nocheckfiles}) imprime aussi les mini-tables vides, qui sont laides. Voir la -% section~\vref{o+checkfiles}. -% \item[\upack{CJK}] Le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et autres) est un ensemble de paquetages et de -% fontes pour préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans certaines langues orientales, telles que le chinois, -% le coréen (fontes Hangûl ou Hanja), le japonais et le thaï, ainsi que certaines variantes du russe. -% Les titres des mini-tables pour ces langues -% proviennent de fichiers du système \pack{CJK} et ont été insérés dans des fichiers \suffix{.mld} lorsque ceci -% était possible, ou dans des fichiers \suffix{.mlo} lorsque le codage est incompatible avec le mécanisme -% \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx}; -% le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit alors charger le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant. -% \pack{CJK} implante les codages GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8 et CNS (sur 16~bits, sauf UTF~8 sur 24~bits). -% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Schémas de codage implantés dans \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{1~octet}&\textbf{2~octets}&\textbf{3~octets}\\ -% \midrule -% GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\ -% KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\ -% CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% Certains schémas de codage (Big~5, SJIS) ont des trous dans le domaine du deuxième octet. -% Il est difficile de lire avec les codages Big~5 et SJIS directement vers \TeX\ puisque certaines des valeurs -% utilisées pour les deuxièmes octets des codages sont réservées pour des caractères de contrôle: -% «~\texttt{\{}~», «~\texttt{\}}~» et «~\texttt{\bs}~». Le fait de les redéfinir casse beaucoup de choses dans -% \LaTeX; pour éviter ceci, normalement des préprocesseurs sont utilisés pour convertir le deuxième octet en -% un nombre suivi d'un caractère délimiteur. Pour plus de détails, voir~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} -% y~présente en grand détail tous les codages \pack{CJK} qui sont ou ont été utilisés. -% Notez que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} pour contourner ce problème; -% voir la section~\vref{fo+lang}. -% \item[classe] La \textbf{classe}\,\footnote{Cette note a été extraite de~\cite{NSSL2E}, puis adaptée.} -% est la première information que \LaTeX{} a besoin de connaître lors du traitement d'un fichier d'entrée; -% c'est le type de document que l'auteur souhaite produite. Ceci est spécifié par la commande -% \com{documentclass}. -% \begin{quote} -% \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{classe}\verb|}| -% \end{quote} -% \noindent Ici \emph{classe} spécifie le type du document à~produire. -% Le tableau~\vref{t+documentclasses} liste les classes standard de documents~\cite{classes}. La distribution \LaTeXe{} -% fournit d'autres classes pour d'autres documents, y~compris des lettres et des transparents, -% mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas été testé avec toutes ces classes. -% Les paramètres \emph{options} adaptent le comportement de la classe du document. Les options doivent être -% séparées par des virgules. Les classes standard supportées par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont listées -% dans la section~\vref{s+supported+classes}. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Classes standard de documents}\label{t+documentclasses} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Classe}&\textbf{Usage}\\ -% \midrule -% \class{article}~\cite{classes}&Pour des articles dans des journaux scientifiques, des présentations, des rapports courts, -% de la documentation de programmes, des invitations, \ldots\\ -% \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&Pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ -% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&Pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; analogue à~la classe -% \class{article}.\\ -% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&Pour préparer l'annonce d'une version de \LaTeX{}; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\ -% \class{report}~\cite{classes}&Pour des rapports plus longs contenant plusieurs chapitres, de petits livres, des thèses, \ldots\\ -% \class{book}~\cite{classes}&Pour de vrais livres.\\ -% \class{letter}&Pour des lettres; comme cette classe n'a pas de commandes de sectionnement, n'utilisez pas -% \upack{minitoc} avec cette classe.\\ -% \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&Pour des transparents; cette classe utilise de grandes lettres sans empattements. Vous -% pouvez aussi envisager d'utiliser Beamer\TeX{}\,$^a$ à~la place. N'utilisez pas \upack{minitoc} avec ces classes.\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{{\froff$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}}\hfill\null}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \item[\feat{close}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement après -% (fermeture, \emph{close}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk} -% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer les fichiers de documentation -% en format PostScript à~partir de ceux en format PDF. -% Vous devriez adapter ce script à~vos besoins. -% \item[CMR] Pour «~Computer Modern Roman~». Le sous-ensemble romain des fontes «~Computer Modern~». -% Voir «~Computer Modern~» ci-dessous. -% \item[codage] Un codage (\emph{encoding}) spécifie l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la -% fonte (par exemple, si le soixante-quinzième caractère est un «~A~»). Le codage de fonte le plus courant -% pour \TeX\ est OT1. L'autre option prédéfinie est~T1 (\TeX\ étendu). Il y~a aussi -% US~ASCII (7~bits), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bits), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}), -% etc. Voir la table~\vref{t+var-encodings} et~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Codages divers}\label{t+var-encodings} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Commentaire}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{ansinew}&Codage ANSI pour Windows~3.1, extension de Latin-1.\\ -% \texttt{applemac}&Codage Macintosh.\\ -% \texttt{ascii}&Codage ASCII pour l'intervalle 32--127.\\ -% \texttt{cp1250}&Page de code Windows 1250 (Europe centrale et orientale).\\ -% \texttt{cp1251}&Page de code Windows 1251 (cyrillique).\\ -% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonyme de \texttt{ansinew}.\\ -% \texttt{cp1257}&Page de code Windows 1257 (baltique).\\ -% \texttt{cp437}&Page de code IBM~437, qui est la page de code -% américaine d'origine et contient les lettres, les -% chiffres, des symboles mathématiques et quelques -% caractères utiles pour construire des pseudo-graphiques.\\ -% \texttt{cp437de}&Page de code IBM~437 (version allemande).\\ -% \texttt{cp850}&Page de code IBM~850, presque identique à~ISO~Latin~1, -% mais la disposition des caractères n'est pas la même.\\ -% \texttt{cp852}&Page de code IBM~852.\\ -% \texttt{cp855}&Page de code IBM~855 (cyrillique).\\ -% \texttt{cp865}&Page de code IBM~865.\\ -% \texttt{cp866}&Page de code IBM~866 (MS-DOS cyrillique).\\ -% \texttt{decmulti}&Codage du jeu international de caractères DEC.\\ -% \texttt{latin1}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires -% à~la plupart des langues européennes occidentales, y~compris -% le danois, le néerlandais, l'anglais, le féroéen, le -% finnois, le flamand, le français, l'allemand, -% l'islandais, l'italien, le norvégien, le portugais, -% l'espagnol et le suédois. Certaines langues non -% européennes, comme l'hawaïen et l'indonésien, sont aussi -% écrites avec ce jeu de caractères.\\ -% \texttt{latin2}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires -% à~la plupart des langues d'Europe centrale, y~compris -% le croate, le tchèque, le hongrois, le polonais, le -% roumain, le slovaque et le slovène.\\ -% \texttt{latin3}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires -% à~l'espéranto, le maltais, le turc et le galicien. -% Cependant, \texttt{latin5} est le jeu de caractères -% préféré pour le turc.\\ -% \texttt{latin4}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires -% pour les langues baltes (latvien ou letton, estonien et -% lituanien), le groendlandais et le lapon (sâme, sámi).\\ -% \texttt{latin5}&Est essentiellement identique à~\texttt{latin1}, -% excepté que certains caractères turcs remplacent des -% lettres islandaises moins souvent utilisées.\\ -% \texttt{next}&Codage pour Next.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en anglais. -% \item[compteur] Un registre \TeX\ contenant une valeur entière. Il~y a 256 compteurs (de~0 à~255) dans \TeX, mais -% \LaTeX\ en utilise certains, et de nombreux paquetages ont besoin de quelques compteurs pour leur propre -% usage. Une version étendue, dérivée de \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, permet davantage de compteurs. -% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), lui aussi, permet davantage de compteurs. -% \item[Computer Modern] Pour \og Computer Modern\fg. Un ensemble de fontes~\cite{cmt} conçues -% par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} pour \TeX. Initialement, elles étaient construites avec -% {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (un programme lui aussi créé par \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}), -% mais aujourd'hui il en existe des versions PostScript type~1 (vectoriel), avec des extensions (pour les caractères -% accentués, principalement): les fontes EC (\emph{European Computer Modern}), les fontes cm-super, etc. -% \item[CTAN] Le \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} (réseau d'archives \TeX\ complètes), un ensemble -% d'archives informatiques contenant la plupart des ressources relatives à~\TeX{} (telles que fontes, -% logiciels, documentations, paquetages). Elles sont accessibles par Internet. Les sites participant à~ce -% réseau CTAN sont\,\footnote{Cette liste peut changer dans le futur.}: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{ftp.dante.de} (Cologne [Köln], Allemagne) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item accès \texttt{rsync} sur {\froff\url{rsync://rsync.dante.de/CTAN/}} -% \item Accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.dante.de/}} -% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:ftpmaint@dante.de}} -% \end{itemize} -% \item\texttt{ftp.tex.ac.uk} (Cambridge, Angleterre, Royaume Uni) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/tex} \texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item accès \texttt{rsync} sur {\froff\url{rsync://rsync.tex.ac.uk/CTAN/}} -% \item montage NFS depuis {\froff\url{nfs.tex.ac.uk:/tex-archive}} -% \item accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/}} -% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:ctan-uk@tex.ac.uk}} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \texttt{tug.ctan.org} (Colchester, Vermont, USA) -% \begin{itemize} -% \item FTP anonyme \texttt{/tex-archive} (\texttt{/pub/archive}) -% \item accès World Wide Web sur {\froff\url{http://www.ctan.org/}} -% \item Administrateur: {\froff\url{mailto:tex@ctan.tug.org}} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% Il y a aussi de nombreux sites \og{} miroirs \fg{} de ces archives principales. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] J'ai dû utiliser le paquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour préparer l'entrée -% <<~The pdf\TeX\ Program~>>~\cite{han} dans la bibliographie, parce que le prénom de son auteur comporte un -% accent double \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; I used it also to typeset some other vietnamese words. -% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en allemand. -% \item[\emph{depth}] Voir \textbf{profondeur} plus loin. -% \item[descripteur] (de fichier). Une entité logicielle décrivant l'interface entre un programme et un fichier. -% Pour la plupart des programmes et des systèmes d'exploitation, le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers est -% limité. Pour {\TeX} et {\LaTeX}, il y a 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture et 16~descripteurs de -% fichiers en lecture. -% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] Le paquetage \emph{\devnag{} pour \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari})\cite{devanagari} -% offre un moyen pour composer avec une haute qualité du texte \devnag{} avec \TeX{}. \devnag{} est une -% écriture utilisée pour écrire et imprimer le sanskrit et de nombreuses langues d'Inde du nord et centrale -% telles que l'hindi et le marathi, ainsi que le népalais. Le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} a été initialement -% développé en mai~1991 par \name{Frans}{Velthuis} pour l'Université de Groningen, aux Pays-Bas, et ce fut le -% premier système à~supporter l'écriture \devnag{} pour \TeX{}. -% \item[dispositifs] Un dispositif (\emph{feature}) (au sens du paquetage \upack{minitoc}) est un ensemble -% d'actions qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un certain type de mini-table. Cing dispositifs sont -% associés à~chaque type de mini-table: un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (exécuté avant la mini-table complète), un dispositif -% «~\feat{after}~» (exécuté après la mini-table complète), -% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (exécuté juste avant l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), -% un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (exécuté juste après l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable), -% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~», qui est exécuté avec la -% mini-table pour forcer son style de page. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] Un fichier d'en-tête PostScript, qui essaye d'activer l'impression en recto-verso. -% ^^A Il fonctionne avec certaines imprimantes PostScript HP et Canon. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\textbf{ECM}] Un exemple minimal complet est le plus petit document complet possible qui illustre un -% problème. Un exemple minimal ne devrait aucun paquetegage ni code qui ne contribue pas au problème, mais -% il doit contenir une classe de document et l'environnement \env{document} (d'après~\cite{talbot-mini}). -% Voir aussi~\cite{preusse}, \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} et -% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils. -% \item[\texttt{em}] Une unité de longueur égale (approximativement) à~la largeur de la lettre~\og m\fg -% dans la fonte courante. En typographie, c'est un \og cadratin\fg. -% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk} -% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] Un style bibliographique similaire au style \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} standard, mais -% modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} pour ajouter un champ \texttt{URL}. Les noms de famille -% des auteurs et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) sont en petites capitales, les années en chiffres de style ancien. -% \item[environnement] Un environnement (\emph{environment}) est un domaine délimité dans un document, où des -% règles spéciales s'appliquent. Un tel domaine est délimité -% par \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| et peut prendre des arguments, -% comme ceci: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\ -% \verb|\end{minipage}| -% \end{quote} -% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est une version étendue de \TeX, avec bien plus de -% registres et de nombreuses nouvelles primitives; elle supporte aussi l'écriture de gauche à~droite et de -% droite à~gauche. -% \item[\upack{ethiop}]\ipack{ethiop} Un paquetage~\cite{ethiop} \LaTeX\ offrant le support de la langue éthiopienne pour -% le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \item[extension] Voir «~suffixe~» plus loin. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] Voir \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} ci-dessous. -% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} Un paquetage~\cite{farsi} pour composer un document dans la langue \lopt{farsi} (iranien, persan). -% Voir~{\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}. Mais ce n'est actuellement disponible que pour \LaTeX2.09. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} et~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. -% \item[features] Voir «~dispositifs~» plus haut. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\env{filecontents}] Un environnement \LaTeX{} spécial. Il permet de créer un fichier (dont le nom est donné -% en argument de cet environnement) en écrivant le contenu de l'environnement dans ce fichier. -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{fichier}\}}\\ -% \texttt{\ldots\emph{contenu}~\ldots}\\ -% \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}} -% \end{quote} -% Cet environnement devrait être utilisé \emph{avant} \com{documentclass}. -% Il est utilisé dans \xfile{minitoc.ins} pour préparer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} (voir la -% section~\vref{fo+lang}) et quelques fichiers utilisés dans la compilation de la documentation. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] Une commande obsolète, utilisée temporairement pour contourner le problème -% du Chapitre~0; -% voir~\textbf{Chapitre~0} et \textbf{absolue (numérotation)} plus haut, et la section~\vref{faq.5}. -% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. -% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus. -% \item[\pack{float}] Ce paquetage~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} améliore l'interface de définition -% d'objets flottants tels que figures et tableaux en \LaTeX. Il ajoute la notion de <<~style de flottant~>> -% qui régit l'aspect des flottants. De nouvelles sortes de flottants peuvent être définies en utilisant une -% commande \com{newfloat} analogue à~\com{newtheorem}. Ce paquetage incorpore aussi la fonctionnalité du -% paquetage \pack{here} de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, donnant aux environnements flottants une option -% \texttt{[H]} qui signifie <<~METTEZ-LE ICI~>> (par opposition à~l'option standard \texttt{[h]} qui signifie -% <<~vous pouvez le mettre ici si vous voulez~>>). -% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}] -% Une macro du paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. Elle établit une «~barrière~» contre la dérive -% des éléments flottants (tels que figures ou tableaux). -% \item[\pack{floatrow}] Ce paquetage~\cite{floatrow} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} est une extension du paquetage -% \pack{float}~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), réutilisant son code, avec des extensions venant du -% paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} (de \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}). -% \item[\pack{flowfram}] Ce\imess{W0097} paquetage~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} est conçu pour vous permettre de créer des -% blocs (\emph{frames}) de texte dans un document de manière que le contenu de l'environnement \env{document} -% coule d'un bloc au suivant dans l'ordre où ils ont été définis. Ceci est utile pour créer des posters ou des -% magazines ou toute autre forme de document qui n'est pas conforme à~la mise en page standard sur une ou deux colonnes. -% Comme ce paquetage définit son propre système de minitocs, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk} -% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\upack{fncychap}] Le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} fournit diverses commandes pour changer -% le format utilisé pour certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes stantard de documents de \LaTeXe: -% \class{book} et \class{report}. -% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.fncychap} et la -% section~\vref{faq.38}). -% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en français. -% \item[\upack{franc}]\ipack{franc} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est -% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\upack{frbib}]\ipack{frbib} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la documentation en -% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] Un fichier de style bibliographique utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la -% documentation en français. -% Il a été amélioré pour le français par \name{Ronan}{Keryell} en partant de la version standard -% \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst}, puis j'ai ajouté quelques adaptations pour le français (comme les noms de famille en -% petites capitales pour les auteurs et les éditeurs, les années en chiffres anciens), -% puis je l'ai modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. -% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est -% produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{geometry}] Le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry} fournit une interface utilisateur flexible -% et complète pour les dimensions de la page. Vous pouvez les spécifier en utilisant des paramètres intuitifs -% pour obtenir votre mise en page désirée. Par exemple, si vous voulez établir des marges (à~gauche, à~droite, -% en haut et en bas) à~2\,cm de chaque bord du papier, il vous suffit de dire: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}| -% \end{quote} -% Ce paquetage puissant (et recommandé) est utilisé dans certains des exemples de documents et dans la présente -% documentation. -% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} Un paquetage \LaTeX\ pour composer du texte guarani, la principale langue parlée -% au Paraguay. -% Le fichier \xfile{guarani.ldf}, inclus dans ce paquetage, définit les titres. Voir~\cite{guarani} et la -% section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] Le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} définit une variante de la -% commande \com{caption} pour produire des captions (légendes) avec une indentation pendante -% (\emph{hanging indentation}), c'est-à-dire dont la première ligne déborde sur la gauche. Ce paquetage est -% sans doute obsolète (1992, \LaTeX2.09). -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[Hindi] Pour la langue hindi, voir le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}~\cite{devanagari} plus haut. Le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} accepte les options de langue \lopt{devanagari} et \lopt{hindi}, qui sont -% synonymes. Une option de langue \lopt{hindi-modern} est également disponible. -% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\emph{hint}] Une indication, un indice pour détecter un problème. C'est aussi un message écrit (dans -% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}) par l'option \optd{hints} (voir ci-dessous). -% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle vérifie l'ordre ce chargement de certains -% paquetages, l'ordre des invocations de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}, la cohérence entre les -% principales commandes de \upack{minitoc}, etc., et produit des avertissements et d'autres indications -% (\emph{hints}) utiles (principalement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}). -% C'est une option active par défaut -% (utilisez l'option \opt{nohints} pour sauter ces vérifications). -% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} Un système pour écrire des documents en langue coréenne, en utilisant \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) -% (voir plus bas). -% Écrit par \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}. Il utilise des fontes Hangûl -% ou Hanja spéciales et le codage UTF-8 en entrée. -% \item[hyperlien] (\emph{hyperlink}) Dans un document, une référence à~un autre objet qui peut être trouvé de -% manière dynamique (en cliquant avec la souris). Ceci requiert un type spécial de document (PDF, PostScript -% avec dispositifs d'hypertexte) et un visualisateur adapté (visualisateur PDF, visualisateur PostScript -% récent). Ceci est pratique pour naviguer dans un document ou plusieurs documents, qui peuvent être des -% documents distants. -% \lneed{4} -% \item[\upack{hyperref}] Le\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}} -% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} est utilisé pour modifier les commandes -% de références croisées de \LaTeX\ afin de produire une certaine sorte de commandes \com{special}; -% elles sont des prémices de l'ensemble de commandes \com{special} définis pour les processeurs de -% \texttt{dvi} vers \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, pour les commandes \texttt{pdfmark} incluses pour le traitement par -% \tool{Acrobat Distiller} (\tool{dvips} et \tool{dvipsone}), pour \tool{dviwindo}, pour \textbf{pdf\TeX}, -% pour \textbf{\TeX4ht} et pour les outils de conversion en PDF et HTML de \tool{VTEX}. -% -% Ce paquetage dérive de, et est bâti sur, le travail du projet \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, -% décrit dans~\cite{hypertex}. Il étend la fonctionnalité de toutes les commandes de -% références croisées de \LaTeX\ (y~compris la table des matières, les bibliographies, etc.) pour produire des -% commandes \com{special} qu'un programme pilote (\emph{driver}) pourra transformer en liens -% hypertextes; il fournit aussi de nouvelles commandes permettant à~l'utilisateur d'écrire des liens -% hypertextes (hyperliens) \emph{ad hoc}, y~compris ceux vers des documents externes et des URLs. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] Le paquetage \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg} fournit une commande si-alors-sinon -% (\emph{if-then-else}) pour tester si un argument de macro est vide («~vide~» signifiant seulement zéro espaces ou -% plus). -% \item[\pack{ifthen}] Le paquetage \pack{ifthen}~\cite{ifthen} définit une commande \com{ifthenelse} pour \LaTeXe. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui prépare le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% depuis \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant -% de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uopt{insection}]\iopt{insection} L'option de paquetage \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} charge le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} -% avec les options adéquates pour éviter que les éléments flottants (tels que figures et tableaux) dérivent -% en dehors de leurs sections, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} -% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}). -% Cette option de paquetage est recommandée si vous utilisez des sectlofs ou -% des sectlots dans votre document. Voir la section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}. -% \item[insertion] Les commandes d'insertion du paquetage \upack{minitoc} insèrent une mini-table dans le document. -% Une commande de \emph{préparation} correspondante doit avoir été invoquée (une seule fois) auparavant. -% Les commandes d'insertion sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} -% \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\ -% \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\ -% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot} -% \end{tabular} -% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+installation}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\com{jobname}] Une primitive \TeX\ contenant le nom du document en préparation, c'est-à-dire le nom -% du fichier lu en premier par \TeX{} (ou \LaTeX), sans son suffixe. Elle est très utile pour construire les -% noms d'autres fichiers. -% \item[\uclass{jura}] La classe \imess{W0029}\class{jura}~\cite{jura}, de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle est utilisée pour des documents juridiques en allemand. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des -% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement peu serré (\emph{loose}) -% dans les mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \optd{loose} pour les classes standard. -% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des -% classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement serré (\emph{tight}) dans les -% mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \opt{tight} pour les classes standard. -% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] Un projet~\cite{kannadatex} pour utiliser \LaTeX{} pout la composition -% dans la langue Kannada language. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}. -% \item[\KOMAScript] -% {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} est un ensemble très complexe. -% Vous pouvez le voir, car il n'y a pas seulement -% une seule classe ou un seul paquetage, mais tout un ensemble de classes et paquetages nombreux. Les -% classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2} et -% \class{scrreprt}) sont bien les contreparties des classes standard, mais elles n'ont jamais seulement les -% mêmes commandes, environnements, options et possibilités optionnelles que les classes standard et ne donnent -% pas un résultat de même aspect. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les classes \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl} sont compatibles avec le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec certaines précautions (voir la section~\vref{special.entries}). -% Les classes \class{scrlettr} et \class{scrlttr2} n'ont pas de commandes -% de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet avec elles. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \KOMAScript{} offre des tas de classes, paquetages, commandes, environnements et possibilités. Vous en -% trouverez certains aussi dans les classes standard, mais il y en a beaucoup que vous ne trouverez pas. -% Certains sont même des ajouts au noyau de \LaTeX. -% -% Les classes principales de l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} sont conçues comme des contreparties des classes -% \LaTeX{} standard. Ceci signifie que l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} contient des remplacements pour les trois -% classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}. Il y a aussi un remplacement pour la -% classe standard \class{letter}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[Lambda] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système -% Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) est appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). -% \item[Lamed] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système -% \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) est appelé «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). -% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} est un système de préparation de documents qui convient fort bien pour -% produire des documents scientifiques et mathématiques de haute qualité typographique. Il convient aussi pour -% produire toutes sortes d'autres documents, depuis de simples lettres jusqu'à des livres complets. -% \LaTeX{} utilise \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} comme moteur de composition (d'après~\cite{NSSL2E}). -% -% \LaTeX{} est en fait un ensemble de macros \TeX{} qui permet aux auteurs de -% composer et d'imprimer leur document avec la plus haute -% qualité typographique, en utilisant une mise en page -% prédéfinie professionnelle. \LaTeX{} avait été originellement -% écrit par \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. Il utilise le -% formateur \TeX{} comme moteur de composition typographique. -% Aujourd'hui, la maintenance de \LaTeX{} est faite par -% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} et son équipe. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% En 1994, le système \LaTeX{} fut (profondément) mis à~jour par l'équipe de \LaTeX3, -% conduite par \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, pour inclure certaines -% améliorations attendues depuis longtemps, et pour réunifier -% toutes les versions modifiées qui ont pullulé depuis la sortie -% de \LaTeX2.09 quelques années plus tôt. Pour distinguer la -% nouvelle version de l'ancienne, elle est appelée \LaTeXe. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \LaTeX{} se prononce \textbf{[latex]}. Si vous voulez faire référence à~\LaTeX{} dans un environnement -% \texttt{ASCII}, utilisez \texttt{LaTeX}. \LaTeXe{} se prononce \textbf{[latex d\o{}z\o{}]} et s'écrit -% \texttt{LaTeX2e}. -% -% En anglais, cela donne \textbf{[la\i{}tex]} et \usebox{\latexbox}. -% ^^A {\selectlanguage{english}\froff\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}\selectlanguage{french}}. -% \item[\LaTeX2.09] Une version obsolète du programme \LaTeX, antérieure à~1994; elle n'est plus supportée. -% Ne l'utilisez pas\,\footnote{Sauf exceptionnellement, pour un très vieux document; si possible, essayez de le -% convertir.}. Utilisez la version actuelle de \LaTeXe, qui est supportée et bien plus puissante. -% \item[\LaTeXe] La version actuelle du programme \LaTeX, après 1994; elle est supportée. -% \item[\LaTeX3] La future version de \LaTeX, toujours en cours de développement. -% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} Une\Virage{} classe de documents standard~\cite{letter} pour préparer des -% lettres postales (courrier papier). -% Comme de tels documents n'ont ni commandes ni structure de sectionnement, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est -% sans objet pour eux (et est donc \emph{incompatible} avec cette classe). -% \item[\upack{lipsum}] Le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} permet d'insérer facilement du -% texte dans un fichier de test avec un minimum de frappe. Les textes sont en latin mais ont été altérés et -% rendus incompréhensibles. J'ai utilisé ce paquetage dans certains des exemples de documents. -% Voir aussi~\url{http://lipsum.com} pour les origines du texte -% utilisé (des passages du \emph{De finibus bonorum et malorum} de Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero} (\textsc{Cicéron})). -% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle crée une liste des fichiers minitoc -% auxiliaires (ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables et peuvent être éliminés après l'exécution de \LaTeX) -% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Option par défaut. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \item[LOF, LoF] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of figures}~», ou «~liste des figures~». -% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des figures. -% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement lache des lignes dans -% les mini-tables. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire est \opt{tight}. -% \item[LOT, LoT] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of tables}~», ou «~liste des tableaux~». -% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des tableaux. -% \item[LPPL] La \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, disponible~à: -% \begin{quote} -% {\froff\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}} -% \end{quote} -% Sa version actuelle est (2003-12-01). Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est distribué sous cette licence. -% Une traduction en français de cette licence est disponible~à: -% \begin{quote} -% {\froff\url{http://www.tug.org/tex-archive/info/french-translations/macros/latex/base/f-lppl.txt}} -% \end{quote} -% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltxdoc}, -% pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une -% classe. Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est -% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. -% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltnews}, -% pour préparer l'announce d'une version de \LaTeX. -% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est -% très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{et} \com{makeatother}] De\,\footnote{Ces informations proviennent -% de~\cite[page~857]{TLC2F}.} nombreuses commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, de paquetages et de classes contiennent -% le caractère~\texttt{@} dans leurs noms. Ceci empêche efficacement que de tels noms soient utilisés dans des -% documents pour des commandes définies par l'utilisateur. Cependant, ceci signifie aussi qu'ils ne peuvent -% pas apparaître dans un document, même pas dans le préambule, sans prendre des précautions spéciales. Comme -% il est parfois nécessaire d'avoir de tels morceaux de «~code interne~» dans le préambule, -% les commandes \com{makeatletter} et \com{makeatother} permettent de le faire facilement: ce -% qui est difficile, c'est de se rappeler qu'il faut les ajouter, faute de quoi des erreurs étranges -% surviennent. Et ces deux commandes \Virage\emph{ne devraient jamais être utilisées dans un fichier de paquetage ou de classe}. -% \item[makefile] Un fichier de texte particulier contenant des instructions pour construire et installer un -% logiciel, à~l'aide de l'utilitaire «~\textbf{make}~»; \textbf{make} est un outil pratique provenant du -% système d'exploitation Unix, mais il en existe des variantes. -% \item[\upack{mcaption}] Le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption}\imess{W0036} fournit un environnement -% \env{margincap} pour placer les captions (légendes) dans la marge externe du document, avec un alignement -% par le haut ou par le bas. -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uclass{memoir}]\iclass{memoir} -% Une\SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}} -% très générale et puissante classe de document -% (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, décrite dans~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); -% cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (avec quelques précautions) si vous utilisez -% une version récente. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[mini-bibliographie] Voir \textbf{minibbl} ci-dessous. -% \item[mini-liste] Synonyme de «~mini-table~» ci-dessous. -% \item[mini-lof] Voir «~minilof~» ci-dessous. -% \item[mini-lot] Voir «~minilot~» ci-dessous. -% \item[mini-table] Ce terme désigne une table de contenu locale (comme une table des matières, une liste des -% figures ou une liste des tableaux) pour une unité de sectionnement (partie, chapitre ou section), par -% opposition à~une table globale (la table des matières, la liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux pour -% l'ensemble du document). Le but principal du paquetage \upack{minitoc} est la création de telles -% mini-tables. Mais le terme «~minitoc~» est aussi utilisé pour désigner une telle mini-table, comme un terme -% générique, car les premières versions du paquetage ne permettaient que des tables des matières par chapitre. -% \item[mini-toc] Voir «~minitoc~» ci-dessous. -% \item[minibbl] Abréviation pour «~mini-bibliographie~», c'est-à-dire avoir une bibliographie par partie, par -% chapitre ou par section, ou même par thème ou par sujet. Ceci est en dehors du domaine du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{faq.9}. -% \item[minilof] Une liste des figures pour un chapitre. -% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilofs. -% \item[minilot] Une liste des tableaux pour un chapitre. -% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilots. -% \item[minitoc] Une table des matières pour un chapitre. Aussi utilisé comme terme générique pour toute mini-table (voir -% «~mini-table~» plus haut). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en français du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] Le fichier source pour la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% En fait, il ne fait que définir \com{jobname} puis charger \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, qui lui-même charge -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan} pour choisir la langue utilisée dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contient -% à~la fois des fragments de documentation en anglais et en français, choisis par des constructions -% \com{ifcase} avec la variable \com{LANG}, forcée à~0 par \xfile{minitoc.lan} ou à~1 par -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (c'est-à-dire par \com{jobname}\suffix{.dtx}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est produit lors de la -% compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en -% français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue française dans la documentation. -% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] La documentation en français, en format PDF. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] La documentation en français, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais -% regardez le script \scrp{cmk}). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en anglais du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste de problèmes et -% de questions concernant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir le chapitre~\vref{FAQ}. -% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des minitocs. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] Le fichier contenant la documentation et le code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\upack{minitoc-hyper}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} Une version spéciale~\cite{minitoc-hyper} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% préparée par \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, -% \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} pour fonctionner avec le puissant paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}; -% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} a intégré leur travail et donc depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec -% \pack{hyperref}. -% \emph{Donc le paquetage\Virage{} \pack{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être -% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.} -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] Le fichier d'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Compiler ce fichier avec -% \LaTeX\ produit la plupart des fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en -% anglais. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] Un fichier texte contenant la liste de tous les fichiers inclus dans le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. Les fichiers non listés dans \xfile{minitoc.l} sont des fichiers utilisés seulement pour -% installer le paquetage ou produire sa documentation. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue anglaise dans la documentation. -% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] La documentation en anglais, en format PDF. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} Ce fichier contient un préambule \LaTeX{} pour la documentation. -% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] La documentation en anglais, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais -% regarde les script \scrp{cmk}). -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] Ce fichier contient la partie principale du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec ses -% commentaires retirés. -% Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste commentée des commandes -% et environnements minitoc. Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}. -% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] Une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et -% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\upack{minutes}] Le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}) est utilisé -% pour préparer des comptes-rendus de conférences. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} permet d'ajouter -% des «~pauses-café~» dans la table des matières grâce à~des commandes telles que \com{addcoffeeline} et -% \com{coffeeline} (et des commandes internes) dont les noms contiennent la chaîne «~\texttt{coffee}~», -% d'où la note de bas de page sur «~cappuccino~»{\myCoffeecup} dans le chapitre sur l'installation!% -% \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{Les petites tasses \myCoffeecup{} proviennent du paquetage \pack{marvosym}~\cite{marvosym}.}}{} -% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} est un important paquetage utilisé -% pour préparer des documents -% dans divers dialectes de la langue mongole (Bicig et Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe et Manju, Buryat, Xalx et Khalkha) et dans -% un dialecte du russe utilisé en Mongolie (Russianc). Bicig est un autre nom pour le Ouïghour. -% Vous pourrez trouver beaucoup d'informations sur la langue mongole et la Mongolie sur le site web~\cite{mongol-web}. -% Voir aussi: -% {\small\froff\begin{quote} -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\ -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\ -% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\ -% \mbox{\url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}}\\ -% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\ -% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm} -% \end{quote}} -% La description suivante a été extraite de~\cite{montex} et traduite: -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} est un paquetage qui fournit le support pour écrire des documents en mongol -% (\emph{mongolian}), mandchou (\emph{manju}), bouriate (\emph{buryat}) et russe. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Le mongol peut être représenté en écriture ouïghure (\emph{uighur}) -% traditionnelle\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,height=2.5cm]{mongoltr.png}}} -% (appelée aussi écriture classique ou traditionnelle) et en écriture cyrillique. Le mandchou -% (\emph{manju}) ressemble à~l'écriture mongole traditionnelle (dont elle dérive) mais utilise un grand choix de -% signes diacritiques afin d'éliminer de nombreuses ambiguïtés de son ancêtre l'écriture mongole. Le bouriate -% (\emph{buryat}) moderne, comme le mongol dans sa forme actuelle, -% est écrit avec un alphabet cyrillique,\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{mongolcy.png}}}% -% mais tant le mongol (35~lettres) que le bouriate (36~lettres) utilisent davantage de lettres -% que le russe (33~lettres). -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{description} -% \item[Mongol] -% Le terme \emph{mongol} (\emph{mongolian} en anglais) recouvre en fait plusieurs langues et n'est pas le nom précis -% d'une seule langue. Les choses se compliquent encore lorsque des noms de groupes ethniques, de langues et de -% systèmes d'écriture sont mélangés. -% \begin{description} -% \item [Xalx] ou Khalkha est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Mongolie proprement dite. -% Leur dialecte forme la base du mongol écrit avec des lettres cyrilliques. -% Dans le présent texte, \emph{mongol moderne} est utilisé comme synonyme. -% \item [Bouriate] (\emph{buryat}) est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Bouriatie -% (\emph{Buryatia}), au nord de la Mongolie, à~l'est du Lac Baïkal, et faisant partie de la -% Fédération Russe. Les Bouriates se nomment eux-mêmes \emph{Buryaad} tandis que les Mongols Xlax -% s'appellent \emph{Buriad}. Le nom anglais suit l'orthographe russe (tandis que le nom français -% est pris phonétiquement). -% Du point de vue linguistique, le mongol xalx et le mongol bouriate sont des langues assez proches; -% le bouriate a un système de sons légèrement différent dans lequel le phonème~\verb|/s/| est -% partiellement décalé vers~\verb|/h/|; l'alphabet moderne bouriate cyrillique (virtuellement -% identique à~l'alphabet cyrillique utilisé pour écrire le mongol moderne) a une lettre -% additionnelle (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) pour marquer la différence avec \verb|/s/|. -% \item [Bicig] (littéralement \emph{écriture} en mongol) désigne le texte écrit avec l'écriture mongole -% traditionnelle, qui est aussi dénommée Ouïghour (\emph{Uighur}). Ici, le texme \emph{bicig} sera -% utilisé sur un pied d'égalité avec le mongol \emph{classique} et \emph{traditionnel}. Ce dernier -% terme est utilisé dans les noms du plan de caractères U1800 de Unicode/ISO10646, qui contient le -% mongol (\emph{mongolian}), le mandchou (\emph{manju}), le Sibe et des ensembles de caractères -% spéciaux appelés Ali Gali ou Galig. Afin d'identifier les commandes concernant l'écriture mongole -% distinctes pour le mongol et le mandchou, les commandes mongoles (\emph{mongolian}) ont un nom -% avec le radical \lopt{bicig} tandis que les commandes manchoues (\emph{manju}) ont un nom -% avec le radical \lopt{bithe}. -% \end{description} -% -% Le Mongol Xalx, ou Mongol Moderne Courant (\emph{Modern Colloquial Mongolian}), est à~peu près aussi différent de -% la forme en écriture classique que l'anglais moderne est différent en orthographe phonétique (en supposant qu'il -% soit écrit en lettres Shaviennes) de l'orthographe hautement historique de l'Anglais Standard. -% Au-delà de ces différences. le mongol écrit en écriture classique conserve habituellement une quantité -% substantielle des aspects grammaticaux historiques qui le font ressembler un peu à~l'anglais élizabéthain. -% -% \item[Manchou] Le mandchou (\emph{mandju}) est une langue du groupe toungouze (\emph{tungusic}) étroitement -% liée au mongol. Bien que le -% mandchou ne soit virtuellement plus parlé, il a été la langue officielle pendant 300~ans de gouvernement mandchou -% sur la Chine de la dynastie Qing. De grandes quantités de documents officiels ont survécu, ainsi que certains -% des meilleurs dictionnaires multilingues jamais réalisés, par exemple le Pentaglote, ou Miroir des Cinq Langues, un -% dictionnaire avec 18671 entrées en cinq langues (mandchou, tibétain, mongol, ouïghour et chinois). -% Voir~\cite{pentaglot} pour plus de détails. L'écriture mandchoue est dérivée du mongol ouïghour par l'ajout -% de signes diacritiques sous la forme de points et de cercles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, écriture -% avec points et cercles). -% \end{description} -% \item[MS-DOS] (\emph{Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System}) Un ancien système -% d'exploitation pour ordinateurs personnels (PCs). Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, son principal -% inconvénient est l'utilisation de noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts (le schéma «~8+3~»), qui limite à~99 -% le nombre de mini-tables dans chaque sorte. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise -% en page sur deux colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et son option de -% langue \lopt{french2}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour -% préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} Une petite base de données bibliographiques pour les exemples -% de documents \exam{mtc-add.tex} et \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter} et le -% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddsection} et le -% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. -% Il montre aussi quel défi représente la gestion des mini-listes de flottants au niveau des sections. -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} -% dans un document de classe \class{memoir} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant comment utiliser l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} -% pour masquer les entrées pour les appendices dans la table des matières principale et créer une table des -% matières au niveau partie pour les appendices. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{article}) utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{book} ou \class{report}) utilisant le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise -% en page sur deux colonnes et utilisant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document -% dont le premier chapitre est étoilé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage minitoc avec des parties et des -% chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant le problème des fontes lors de -% l'utilisation de la classe \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec -% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Un autre exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec -% changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et -% \com{mtcgapafterheads}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des environnements -% spécialisés \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des paires de commandes: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} et \com{endmtchideinmainlof}, -% \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} et \com{endmtchideinmainlot}. -% \end{itemize} -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les -% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{article}. -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les -% entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{report}. -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de -% document \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un -% livre avec une table des matières et des minitocs personnalisées. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la -% classe \class{memoir}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la -% classe \class{memoir}, dans le cas où vous souhaiteriez changer quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} Un document utilisant une minitoc composée, avec le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}, -% pour être placée dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} Un document montrant une interaction entre le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% et le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} -% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} -% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes et \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler la minitoc afin de -% l'aligner sur la gauche. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le -% paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une -% classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. Voir la -% section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} lorsque -% la table des matières est précédée de quelques chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec -% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document -% de la classe \class{article}. C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le -% paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} et leur interaction pour les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables. -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le -% paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}. -% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcpolymtoc} -% et expliquant les \index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}«~entrées polymorphes~». -% Voir la section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} Un paquetage qui est utilisé pour fournir des variantes des commandes -% standard \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine} et \com{PackageError} -% en leur ajoutant un argument optionnel pour un identificateur unique de message. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} Un paquetage qui est utilisé à~la place du paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% pour ignorer toutes les commandes et tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. En fait, il les -% définit pour qu'elles/ils ne fassent rien. Utile si vous désirez une version de votre document sans aucune -% mini-table. -% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} Un\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} petit paquetage qui est chargé automatiquement si -% nécessaire lorsque vous utilisez la classe de document \class{memoir} dans une version \emph{incompatible} -% avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais corrigible. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item[\texttt{mu}] Une unité de longueur utilisée normalement en mode mathématique (\texttt{mu} signifie -% «~\emph{math unit}~»); 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un cadratin), qui est à~peu près la -% largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Donc la taille de \texttt{1mu} dépend de la fonte. -% La séparation entre les points des lignes de pointillés dans les mini-tables est exprimée en unités -% mathématiques. -% \item[\upack{multibib}] Le paquetage \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib} permet de créer des références -% à~plusieurs bibliographies à~l'intérieur d'un même document. Il fournit donc une fonctionnalité -% complémentaire à~des paquetages tels que \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} ou \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, -% qui permettent de créer une seule bibliographie pour plusieurs, mais différentes, parties du document. -% \item[\upack{multicol}] Le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} définit l'environnement \env{multicols} -% (avec un~<<~\textbf{s}~>>) pour composer du texte sur plusieurs colonnes. Utilisé dans certains exemples de documents. -% \item[\upack{multitoc}] Ce paquetage~\cite{multitoc} permet de composer seulement la table des matières, la -% liste des figures et/ou la liste des tableaux sur deux colonnes ou plus (en utilisant le paquetage -% pquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, bien sûr). -% Le nombre de colonnes peut être configuré par des commandes; les tables multi-colonnes peuvent être choisies -% par des options du paquetage. -% L'exemple de document \exam{mtc-3co.tex} utilise ce paquetage; voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\pack{natbib}] C'est un paquetage \LaTeXe{} (mais avec un certain support pour \LaTeX2.09)~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} -% qui agit comme interface généralisée pour des fichiers de styles bibliographiques standard et non-standard (\BibTeX). -% \item[\upack{needspace}] Le paquetage \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace} fournit des commandes pour réserver -% de l'espace en bas d'une page. S'il n'y a pas assez d'espace sur la page (colonne) courante, une nouvelle -% page (colonne) est commencée. -% \item[NFSS] Le «~Nouveau Schéma de Sélection de Fonte~» (\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}). -% Le système de sélection des fontes~\cite{fontsel} \LaTeXe{} -% a été publié pour la première fois sous le nom de «~\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~» (NFSS) en 1989, puis -% dans une seconde version en 1993. \LaTeXe{} inclut NFSS version~2 de manière standard. -% -% \lneed{7} -% Dans \LaTeX, chaque fonte (police) textuelle a cinq \emph{attributs}: -% \begin{description} -% \item[codage\,\footnotemark]\footnotetext{Et non \og{} encodage~\fg, qui est un anglicisme.} (\emph{encoding}) -% Un codage spécifie -% l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la fonte. Les deux codages les plus courants -% utilisés dans \LaTeX{} sont le codage «~texte \TeX~» de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} (OT1) et -% le codage «~texte \TeX{} étendu~» (T1) développé par les membres du \emph{\TeX{} Users Group} pendant une -% conférence sur \TeX{} à~Cork en~1990 (d'où son nom informel de «~codage de Cork~»). Voir~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}. -% \item[famille] (\emph{family}) Le nom d'une collection de fontes, habituellement groupées sous un nom commun -% par le fondeur de ces fontes. Par exemple, «~Adobe Times~», «~ITC Garamond~» et «~Computer Modern Roman~» -% de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} sont toutes des familles de fontes. -% \item[graisse] (\emph{series}) Elle détermine comment une fonte est épaisse (\emph{heavy}) ou -% étirée (\emph{extended}). Par exemple, «~medium weight~», «~narrow~» et «~bold extended~» sont toutes des graisses. -% \item[forme] (\emph{shape}) La forme des lettres à~l'intérieur d'une famille de fontes. Par exemple, -% «~italique~» (\emph{italic}), «~oblique~» et «~droit~» (\emph{upright}) (parfois appelé -% «~romain~» (\emph{roman})) sont toutes des formes de fontes. -% \item[taille] (\emph{size}) La taille de conception (\emph{design size}) de la fonte, par exemple «~10pt~». -% \end{description} -% -% \lneed{2} -% Dans \LaTeX, les valeurs possibles pour ces attributs ont reçu des acronymes courts. Les valeurs les plus -% courantes pour le codage d'une fonte sont données dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+1}. -% \begin{table}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \changeskips -% \caption{Codages de fontes les plus courants}\label{t+nfss+1} -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{T1} & texte \TeX{} étendu («~codage de Cork~») \\ -% \texttt{TS1} & codages des symboles pour \LaTeX{} (latin)\\ -% \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C} & texte \LaTeX{} (cyrillique)\\ -% \texttt{T3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}\\ -% \texttt{TS3} & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}, symboles supplémentaires\\ -% \texttt{T4} & texte \LaTeX{} (langues africaines)\\ -% \texttt{T5} & texte \LaTeX{} (vietnamien)\\ -% \texttt{T7} & texte \LaTeX{} (réservé pour le grec)\\ -% \texttt{OT1} & texte \TeX{} (comme défini par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OT2} & texte \TeX{} pour les langues en cyrillique (obsolète)\\ -% \texttt{OT3} & Alphabet phonétique international (obsolète)\\ -% \texttt{OT4} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue polonaise\\ -% \texttt{OT6} & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue arménienne\\ -% \texttt{OML} & italique mathématique \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OMS} & symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{OMX} & grands symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\ -% \texttt{X2} & texte \LaTeX{} étendu (cyrillique)\\ -% \texttt{U} & inconnu \\ -% \texttt{L}\meta{xx} & un codage local\\ -% \texttt{L7x} & codage utilisé pour la langue lithuanienne\\ -% \texttt{LTH} & codage utilisé pour la langue thaïe\\ -% \texttt{LV1} & codage utilisé par quelques fontes de \texttt{VTeX}\\ -% \texttt{LY1} & alternative au \texttt{T1}, pour les logiciels Y\&Y\\ -% \texttt{PD1} & réalise le codage PDFDocEncoding pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ -% \texttt{PU} & réalise le codage Unicode pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% ^^A \end{table} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{table}[!p] -% ^^A \changeskips -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.50\textwidth} -% ^^A \changeskips -% \capstart -% \caption{Familles de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+2} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Famille}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{cmr} & Computer Modern Roman \\ -% \texttt{cmss} & Computer Modern Sans \\ -% \texttt{cmtt} & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ -% \texttt{cmm} & Computer Modern Math Italic \\ -% \texttt{cmsy} & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ -% \texttt{cmex} & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ -% \texttt{ptm} & Adobe Times \\ -% \texttt{phv} & Adobe Helvetica \\ -% \texttt{pcr} & Adobe Courier\\ -% \texttt{lazy} & Symboles \LaTeX{} additionnels\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}% -% \end{minipage}% -% &&% -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth} -% ^^A \changeskips -% \capstart -% \caption{Graisses les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+3} -% \centering -% \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Graisse}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{ul}&Ultra fin\\ -% \texttt{el}&Extra fin\\ -% \texttt{l}&Fin\\ -% \texttt{sl}&Semi fin\\ -% \texttt{m} & Moyen (\emph{medium})\\ -% \texttt{sb} & Demi-gras (\emph{semi-bold}) \\ -% \texttt{b} &Bold \\ -% \texttt{eb} &Extra gras \\ -% \texttt{bx} & Gras étendu (\emph{bold extended})\\ -% \texttt{ub}&Ultra gras \\ -% \texttt{c} & Condensé (\emph{condensed})\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}\hfill\null -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{table} -% \newlength{\ww} -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} -% \setlength{\ww}{.64\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\ww}{-1.5em} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{\ww} -% \changeskips -% \capstart -% \caption{Formes de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4} -% {\begin{tabularx}{\ww}{@{}lZ{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Forme}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{n} & Normale (c'est-à-dire «~droite~» (\emph{upright}) ou «~romaine~» (\emph{roman})) \\ -% \texttt{it} & Italique \\ -% \texttt{sl} & Penchée (\emph{slanted}) (ou «~oblique~») \\ -% \texttt{sc} & Capitales et petites capitales (\emph{caps and small caps})\\ -% \texttt{u} & Italique redressée (\emph{upright italic}) \\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}} -% \end{minipage}% -% &&% -% \begin{minipage}[t]{.35\textwidth} -% \changeskips -% \capstart -% \caption{Largeurs de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4a} -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Largeur}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensé\\ -% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensé\\ -% \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensé\\ -% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensé\\ -% \texttt{m}&50.0&Normal\\ -% \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi étendu\\ -% \texttt{c}&50.0&Étendu\\ -% \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra étendu\\ -% \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra étendu\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{minipage}% -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% Les codages «~locaux~» sont destinés aux codages de fontes qui ne sont disponibles que localement, par -% exemple une fonte contenant le logo d'une organisation dans diverses tailles. -% -% \lneed{4} -% Il y a bien trop de familles de fontes pour les lister toutes, mais certaines familles courantes sont -% listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+2}. -% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour les graisses (\emph{series}) sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+3}. -% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la forme de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4}. -% Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la largeur de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% -% La taille de fonte est spécifiée comme une dimension, par exemple \texttt{10pt} ou -% \texttt{1.5in} ou \texttt{3mm}; si aucune unité n'est spécifiée, \texttt{pt} est pris par défaut. Ces cinq -% paramètres spécifient chaque fonte \LaTeX{}, voir le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+5}, par exemple. -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \capstart -% \caption{Les cinq paramètres de fontes de quelques fontes}\label{t+nfss+5} -% \centering -% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}} -% \toprule -% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{Spécification \LaTeX}} & -% \textbf{Fonte} & -% \textbf{Nom \TeX{}} \\ -% \midrule -% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} & -% Computer Modern Roman 10 point & -% \texttt{cmr10} \\ -% \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} & -% Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & -% \texttt{cmssi12} \\ -% \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} & -% Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & -% \texttt{cmmi10} \\ -% \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} & -% Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & -% \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Commandes de l'utilisateur pour les fontes}\label{t+nfss+6} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Commande utilisateur} & -% \textbf{Attribut} & -% \textbf{Valeur dans la classe} \class{article} \\ -% \midrule -% \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{rmfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmr} \\ -% \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{sffamily} & famille & \texttt{cmss} \\ -% \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{ttfamily} & famille & \texttt{cmtt} \\ -% \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{mdseries} & graisse & \texttt{m} \\ -% \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{bfseries} & graisse & \texttt{bx} \\ -% \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{upshape} & forme & \texttt{n} \\ -% \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{itshape} & forme & \texttt{it} \\ -% \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{slshape} & forme & \texttt{sl} \\ -% \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{scshape} & forme & \texttt{sc} \\ -% \com{tiny} & taille & \texttt{5pt} \\ -% \com{scriptsize} & taille & \texttt{7pt} \\ -% \com{footnotesize} & taille & \texttt{8pt} \\ -% \com{small} & taille & \texttt{9pt} \\ -% \com{normalsize} & taille & \texttt{10pt} \\ -% \com{large} & taille & \texttt{12pt} \\ -% \com{Large} & taille & \texttt{14.4pt} \\ -% \com{LARGE} & taille & \texttt{17.28pt} \\ -% \com{huge} & taille & \texttt{20.74pt} \\ -% \com{Huge} & taille & \texttt{24.88pt}\\ -% \com{textnormal} & normal & \textnormal{texte normal}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% -% Ces cinq paramètres sont affichés chaque fois que \LaTeX{} donne un avertissement de débordement de boîte, -% par exemple: -% \begin{verse} -% \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\ -% \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,} -% \end{verse} -% \lneed{6} -% Le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+6} liste les commandes de fontes que l'utilisateur peut invoquer pour établir ces -% cinq attributs\,\footnote{Les valeurs utilisées par ces commandes sont déterminées par la classe du document.}. -% -% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de -% paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir plus haut). -% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de -% paquetage \optd{hints} (voir plus haut). -% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est l'opposée de -% \optd{listfiles} ci-dessus. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}. -% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} Cette option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} charge le paquetage -% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). Elle évite des problèmes avec des -% commandes \com{cite} dans des commandes de sectionnement ou dans des captions (légendes). -% Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[Omega] Le système de typographie\,\footnote{L'essentiel (mais pas la totalité) de cette note provient de -% la documentation d'Omega \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}. -% Voir~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} pour plus d'informations.} -% Omega ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (de \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} et \xname{John}{Plaice}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Omega est une extension de \TeX{} conçue surtout afin d'améliorer les capacités multilingues de TeX. -% -% Quand le programme \TeX{} a été développé au milieu des années [mille neuf cent] soixante-dix -% par le professeur \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, -% il a surtout été conçu pour la mise en page de textes mathématiques en anglais. Depuis lors \TeX{} a fait de grandes -% avancées dans des domaines scientifiques, littéraires et autres, dans tous -% les pays du monde. En 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a gelé \TeX{} avec pour objectif la -% stabilité. Cependant, il permet que le code \TeX{} soit utilisé comme base -% pour des développements futurs, à~condition que le système résultant -% soit distribué sous un autre nom. -% -% En Omega, tous les caractères et les pointeurs dans les structures de -% données sont de 32 bits plutôt que 8 bits, éliminant ainsi beaucoup de -% limitations triviales de \TeX. Omega permet aussi l'utilisation de -% multiples jeux de caractères en entrée et en sortie, et utilise des -% filtres programmables afin de traduire d'un jeu de caractères à~un -% autre, afin de faire de l'analyse contextuelle, etc. En interne, Omega -% utilise le jeu de caractères Unicode/ISO-10646. Omega soutient aussi -% l'utilisation de multiples directions d'écriture. -% -% Ces améliorations non seulement facilitent la tâche des utilisateurs de \TeX{} -% pour gérer des langues multiples et complexes telles que l'arabe, les -% langues indiennes, le khmer, le chinois, le japonais ou le coréen, dans -% un seul document, mais aussi forment la base de développements futurs -% dans d'autres domaines, tels le soutien de la couleur et de l'hypertexte. -% -% Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales d'Omega est -% appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$). -% L'ajout à~Omega des extensions de \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est un projet -% distinct, connu sous le nom de «~\pack{Aleph}~» ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} et conduit par \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}. -% La version de \LaTeX\ pour \pack{Aleph} est connue sous le nom de -% «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/). -% Il~y~a un système expérimental, nommé \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, qui regroupera -% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} et d'autres développements. -% Une voie prometteuse est \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} par~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, avec -% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}. -% \begin{table}[tp!] -% ^^A \changeskips -% \caption{Quelques systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex} -% \centering -% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc} -% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\ -% &&+&&&&+\\ -% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\ -% &&&&&&\\ -% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7} -% &&&&&&\\ -% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}} -% \end{array} \] -% \end{table} -% \item[\feat{open}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement -% avant (ouverture, \emph{open}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un -% type donné de mini-table, pour forcer le style de page à~utiliser pour la page courante. -% Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. -% \item[paquetage] (\emph{package}) -% Les paquetages\,\footnote{Ces informations ont été extraites de~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} puis adaptées et -% traduites.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Notez que j'utilise le terme <<~paquetage~>> pour traduire -% le terme anglais \emph{package}. D'autres -% préféreront <<~extension~>> (qui signifie <<~suffixe~>> en anglais), <<~package~>> (anglicisme), ou <<~module~>>; -% c'est une question de goût et d'habitude, sans plus.} sont un dispositif très important de \LaTeX. Ce sont des -% extensions aux commandes de base de \LaTeX{} qui sont écrites dans des fichiers dont les noms se terminent par -% \suffix{.sty} et qui sont chargés via la commande \com{usepackage} dans le préambule du document. Les paquetages -% peuvent être classés selon leur origine: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item les paquetages \textbf{centraux} (\emph{core}) (en fait, les paquetages \textbf{basiques} et \textbf{requis}) -% sont une partie fondamentale de l'installation de base de \LaTeX{} et sont donc complètement standard; -% \item les paquetages \textbf{outils} (\emph{tools}) forment un ensemble écrit par les membres de l'équipe -% \LaTeX3 et devraient toujours être présents dans l'installation; -% \item les paquetages \textbf{graphiques} (\emph{graphics}) sont un ensemble standardisé pour l'inclusion de -% dessins produits par d'autres programmes et pour la gestion des couleurs; ils sont au même niveau que -% les paquetages outils; -% \item les paquetages \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX}, publiés par -% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron, devraient -% être présents dans toute installation\,\footnote{Ils sont indispensables si vous utilisez beaucoup -% de mathématiques.}; -% \item les paquetages des \textbf{contributions} (\emph{contributed}) ont été proposés par de vrais -% utilisateurs; certains de ces paquetages se sont révélés comme étant «~essentiels~» dans l'utilisation -% standard de \LaTeX, mais tous sont utiles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[partlof] Une liste des figures pour une partie. -% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlofs. -% \item[partlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une partie. -% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlots. -% \item[parttoc] Une table des matières pour une partie. -% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des parttocs. -% \item[PDF] \emph{Portable Document Format}~\cite{pdfspec}. Un descendant du langage PostScript d'Adobe, -% optimisé pour la navigation sur l'Internet. Il ajoute des dispositifs d'hypertexte, de substitution de fontes -% et de compression. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[\upack{placeins}] Le paquetage -% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}} -% permet de forcer les éléments flottants à~«~rester à~leur place~», en les empêchant de dériver au-delà d'une -% commande \com{FloatBarrier} vers une autre section. Pour l'utiliser, -% déclarez \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} dans le préambule et insérez des commandes -% \com{FloatBarrier} aux endroits que les éléments flottants ne devraient pas franchir, peut-être -% à~chaque \com{section}. L'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} le fait avec des -% options adéquates de \pack{placeins}, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}; -% voir la section~\vref{s+placing}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant la documentation du paquetage -% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. -% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} Une\virage{} version de \LaTeX\ adaptée -% à~la langue polonaise (\lopt{polski}). A~été remplacée par le paquetage \pack{polski}. Voir~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. -% Mais le \emph{même} nom désignait aussi une version de \LaTeX\ adaptée à~la langue japonaise, -% \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}. -% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk} -% Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% et sa documentation; vous devriez l'adapter à~vos besoins. -% Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[points de conduite] (\emph{leaders}) Une séquence répétive de points (ou d'un autre petit caractère), -% espacés régulièrement, utilisée pour relier deux objets sur la même ligne (conduisant d'un titre à~un -% numéro de page dans une table des matières ou analogue). -% \item[polymorphe (entrée)] Une entrée\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} dans la table des matières, la -% liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux, qui change d'aspect selon l'endroit où elle apparaît (TdM -% principale, minitable, etc.); voir la section~\vref{ss+polym}. -% \item[PostScript] Un langage de description de page, par Adobe. Il décrit l'apparence d'une page, y~compris -% d'éléments tels que texte, graphiques et images scannées, vers une imprimante ou un appareil de -% visualisation. Introduit par Adobe en 1985, il est devenu le langage de choix dans l'impression de haute -% qualité. -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \item[préambule] (\emph{preamble}) Dans le fichier principal d'un document \LaTeX{} source, la partie de ce -% fichier qui se trouve entre les commandes \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} et -% \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. Dans le préambule, vous pouvez insérer des déclarations globales et le -% chargement de paquetages par des commandes \com{usepackage}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[préparation] Les commandes de préparation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} préparent les fichiers auxiliaires -% pour les mini-tables d'un type donné. Une commande de~\emph{préparation} doit avoir été invoqué -% préalablement (et une seule fois) à~toute commande d'insertion pour le type de mini-table. Les commandes -% de préparation sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}): -% \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} -% \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(niveau partie)\\ -% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(niveau chapitre)\\ -% \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(niveau section)\\ -% \com{mtcprepare}&(tous niveaux) -% \end{tabular} -% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX, pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence. -% Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est très semblable à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir -% plus haut. -% \begin{table}[tp] -% \changeskips -% \caption{Profondeurs pour les commandes de sectionnement}\label{t+j+depths} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \textbf{Classe:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\ -% \midrule -% \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\ -% \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\ -% \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\ -% \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\ -% \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\ -% \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\ -% \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\ -% \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \end{table} -% \item[profondeur] Dans les classes de documents standard (et dans la plupart des classes) ayant des commandes se -% sectionnement, nous avons une notion de \textbf{profondeur} (\emph{depth}). La profondeur d'une commande de -% sectionnement détermine le niveau jusqu'auquel descend la numérotation dans son titre (selon la valeur du compteur -% \dcnt{secnumdepth}), et les entrées pour une commande de sectionnement données apparaissent dans la table -% des matières principale si la profondeur de cette commande de sectionnement est inférieure ou égale à~la -% valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}; consultez le tableau~\vref{t+j+depths} pour les profondeurs des commandes -% de sectionnement dans les principales classes de document. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Le mécanisme est analogue pour les parttocs, minitocs et secttocs, en utilisant les valeurs des compteurs -% \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} et \dcnt{secttocdepth}. Si vous utilisez des sous-figures ou -% des sous-tableaux, les mini-tables correspondantes utilisent des compteurs tels que -% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} -% et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \item[pseudo-chapitre] -% Ou chapitre étoilé. Un chapitre qui commence par une commande «~étoilée~» \com{chapter*}. -% Par défaut, il n'a pas -% d'entrée dans la table des matières. \com{chapter*} nécessite quelques précautions avec le paquetage -% \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{s+starred.chap}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{quotchap}] Le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} fournit des commandes pour ajouter des -% citations à~certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes standard de document \LaTeXe: -% \class{book} et \class{report}. Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% (voir le point~\vref{h.quotchap} et la section~\vref{faq.39}). -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[README] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% plus quelques informations utiles. -% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement: -% \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous). -% Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie -% et chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires). -% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui trie les fichiers -% du paquetage \upack{minitoc} en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe). -% Il devrait être exécuté après les scripts -% \scrp{imk} (obligatoire) et \scrp{emk} et/ou -% \scrp{fmk}, dans cet ordre. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}. -% \item[\upack{romannum}] Le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} change les numéros (pour les commandes de -% sectionnement) engendrés par \LaTeX{} de chiffres arabes en chiffres romains. Ce paquetage utilise le -% paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv}. -% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.romannum} et la -% section~\vref{faq.40}). -% \item[\pack{rotating}] Le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} effectue toutes les sortes de rotations -% que vous pouvez souhaiter, y~compris celles de figures complètes. -% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] Le paquetage pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} fournit des commandes pour définir de -% nouveaux flottants de divers styles -% of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, et des styles non définis); -% le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} fournit de nouveaux environnements (\env{sidewaysfigure} -% et \env{sidewaystable}) qui sont tournés de $90^\circ$ ou $270^\circ$. -% Mais qu'en est-t-il de nouveaux flottants tournés, par exemple un flottant avec filets et tourné? -% Ce paquetage rend ceci possible; il établit un pont entre les deux paquetages et étend aussi les commandes du -% paquetage \pack{float} pour définir des versions tournées des nouveaux flottants. -% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} est un programme d'emballage (\emph{wrapper}) -% pour \LaTeX\ et ses programmes associés. Son -% but est, étant donné un source \LaTeX\ à~traiter, de le compiler un nombre de fois suffisant pour résoudre -% toutes les références, en exécutant éventuellement des programmes satellites tels que \textbf{\BibTeX}, -% \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., pour produire les fichiers de données adéquats. Il a des -% dispositifs pour effectuer certaines actions de nettoyage en post-traitement, comme de détruire les fichiers -% auxiliaires produits par \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. -% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. -% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut. -% \item[sectionnement (commandes de)] Ce sont les commandes \LaTeX\ qui spécifies la structure logique de votre document. -% Les principales commandes de sectionnement sont \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section}, -% \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph} et \com{subparagraph}. -% Certaines classes standard de documents n'ont pas la commande \com{chapter} (ainsi les classes -% \class{article} et \class{proc}), certaines n'ont pas de commandes de sectionnement (ainsi la classe -% \class{letter}). Dans ce dernier cas, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. Si certaines des -% commandes \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ne sont pas définies, les -% commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour le niveau associé ne sont pas disponibles. Si \com{chapter} est définie, -% les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section ne sont pas définies dans la version courante du -% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et les antérieures, mais si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais que -% \com{section} l'est, alors les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section sont définies. -% Voir la section~\vref{note+sectionning}. -% Dans les classes non-standard de documents, les commandes de sectionnement portant des noms non-standard ne -% peuvent pas être reconnues par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[sectlof] Une liste des figures pour une section. -% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlofs. -% \item[sectlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une section. -% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlots. -% \item[\upack{sectsty}] Le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer -% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: -% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. Ce paquetage fonctionne aussi avec -% les classes {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: -% \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}. -% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sectsty} et la -% section~\vref{faq.28}). -% \item[secttoc] Une table des matières pour une section. -% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des secttocs. -% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (pour \LaTeXe) emprunte -% quelques définitions des classes standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} -% et les modifie afin d'imprimer les en-têtes de partie, chapitre, section, sous-section\ldots{} avec la -% variante Sans-Serif de la fonte courante. -% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sfheaders} et la -% section~\vref{faq.41}). -% \item[shell] Dans les systèmes d'exploitation Unix, analogues à~Unix et Linux, le \emph{shell} est un programme -% utilisé comme interface entre le système d'exploitation et l'utilisateur. Il peut aussi être utilisé comme -% un langage de programmation pour écrire des programmes ou \emph{scripts} afin de préparer de séquences de -% tâches utilisées de manière routinière. Les principaux \emph{shells} sont le \emph{shell} de Bourne (\textbf{sh}), -% le C~\emph{shell} (\textbf{csh}), le \emph{shell} de Korn (\textbf{ksh}), et leurs nombreux descendants -% (tels que \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.). -% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} Une option\imess{W0020} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle force l'utilisation de suffixes courts -% (3~caractères) dans les noms des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc. Cette option est inactive par défaut, mais -% est automatiquement activée si votre système d'exploitation requiert des suffixes courts. Voir -% \textbf{autoconfiguration} plus haut et la section~\vref{.8+3}. -% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] Le paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} permet de créer une autre table des -% matières dans un document, avec un autre titre et une autre profonteur que la table des matières principale. -% \item[SJIS] Le codage SJIS de caractères (pour le japonais), aussi connu sous le nom de MS-Kanji -% (Kanji pour Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}), -% consiste en deux jeux de caractères se recouvrant: celui surnommé Katakana demi-largeur (JIS X0201-1976, -% caractères codés sur 1~octet dans l'intervalle de \texttt{0xA1} à~\texttt{0xDF}) et le jeu de caractères JIS -% (pleine largeur) (JIS X0208-1990, associé aux points de codage restants). -% Cette information provient de~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} Une version of \LaTeX\ adaptée pour la langue suédoise. Voir~\cite{slatex}. -% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} Un paquetage~\cite{splitbib} \LaTeX\ qui permet de trier une bibliographie -% en catégories et sous-catégories; ceci est intéressant pour des listes de publications, pour grouper les -% références par sujet, par année,~... -% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] Le paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv} est destiné à~être utilisé par les -% auteurs de paquetages \LaTeX{} qui ont besoin de savoir quelles divisions de sectionnement sont fournies par -% la classe du document. -% provided by the document class. -% \item[strut] Un trait vertical invisible utilisé pour forcer une séparation minimale entre deux lignes de texte. -% Ce terme anglais signifiant «~étai~» est conservé car il fait partie du jargon \TeX{} et \LaTeX. -% \item[\upack{subfig}] Le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} permet l'inclusion de petites, -% «~sous-~» figures et tables. Il en simplifie le positionnement, l'ajout de légendes (\emph{captions}) et -% l'étiquetage à~l'intérieur d'un seul environnement \env{figure} ou \env{table}. De plus, ce paquetage -% permet que de tels sous-captions (sous-légendes) soient écrits dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des -% tableaux si vous le désirez. -% \item[\upack{subfigure}] Le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} est une version obsolète (par le même -% auteur) du paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. -% \item[suffixe] (\emph{extension}) Le nom d'un fichier est souvent constitué de 2~parties: un \emph{nom de base} -% et un \emph{suffixe}, séparées par un point. Sous certains anciens systèmes d'exploitation, le nom de base -% est limité à~8~caractères et le suffixe à~3~caractères (le schéma «~8+3~»). Voir aussi les sections~\vref{MS-DOS} -% et~\vref{.8+3}. Il est fortement recommandé d'avoir au plus un seul point dans un nom de fichier. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[TDM, TdM] Acronyme pour «~table des matières~» (\emph{TOC, ``table of contents''}). -% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}La \emph{\TeX~Directory Structure}~\cite{tds,ftds}; une structure de répertoires fortement -% recommandée pour ranger les fichiers de macros, fontes et autres fichiers systèmes \TeX{} indépendants de -% l'implantation; elle suggère aussi comment incorporer le reste des fichiers \TeX{} dans une seule structure; -% la \index{TDS}TDS a été pensée pour fonctionner sur tous les systèmes modernes. -% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} est un programme écrit par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}. -% Il est conçu pour la composition de textes et d'équations mathématiques. -% -% \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a commencé le développement de \TeX{} en 1977 parce qu'il était -% frustré par la manière avec laquelle ses articles étaient publiés par -% l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}. Il avait arrêté de soumettre des -% articles vers 1974 parce que \og{} le résultat final était trop pénible -% à~regarder \fg{}. \TeX{}, tel que nous l'utilisons aujourd'hui, est sorti en -% 1982 et a été amélioré au fil des ans. Ces dernières années \TeX{} a -% atteint une grande stabilité. Aujourd'hui \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} affirme qu'il n'y a -% virtuellement plus de \og{} bug \fg{}. Le numéro de version de \TeX{} tend -% vers $\pi$ et est actuellement $3.141592$. -% -% \TeX{} se prononce \og{} Tech \fg{}, avec un \og{} ch \fg{} comme dans le mot -% écossais \og{} Loch \fg{}. En alphabet phonétique cela donne -% \textbf{[tex]}\dots Dans un environnement \texttt{ASCII}, \TeX{} -% devient \texttt{TeX}. -% \item[\upack{thailatex}] Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex} permet de composer -% des documents en langue thaïe. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement serré des lignes dans -% les mini-tables. L'option contraire est \optd{loose}. -% \item[\upack{titlesec}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} permet de changer les titres de -% sectionnement. Parmi ses nombreux dispositifs, il permet des titres dans la marge, un format différent dans -% les pages de gauche et de droite, des filets au-dessus et en dessous du titre, etc. -% Malheureusement, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \item[\upack{titletoc}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} paquetage \pack{titletoc} est utile pour la mise -% en forme des entrées de la table -% des matières, en offrant la possibilité de changer de format au milieu du document, de regrouper des entrées -% en un seul paragraphe, d'avoir de jolies entrées en format libre, de faire des tables des matières -% partielles, etc. -% Malheureusement, il est avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% -% Le fichier \xfile{titletoc.sty} ne fait pas partie du paquetage \pack{titlesec}; c'est un paquetage -% indépendant, mais il est décrit dans la documentation~\cite{titletoc} du paquetage \pack{titlesec}. -% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} Un fichier script file qui crée une hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{tds,ftds} (à~adapter -% pour votre système). -% \item[TOC] Acronyme pour «~\emph{table of contents}~», ou «~table des matières~». -% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} peut être utilisé pour ajouter une -% entrée pour la table des matières et/ou pour la bibliographie et/ou pour l'index dans la table des matières. -% Mais il nécessite quelques précautions si vous l'utilisez avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}. -% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur de la table des matières. -% \item[\upack{tocloft}] Le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} offre des outils pour contrôler -% la conception typographique de la table des matières, de la liste des figures et de la liste des tables. De -% nouvelles sortes de «~liste des \ldots~» peuvent être définies. Si vous utilisez le paquetage -% \pack{tocloft} et le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}, sur la manière de -% traiter quelques problèmes mineurs de compatibilité. -% \item[\xfile{TODO}] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui liste quelques propositions de développement du -% paquetage, pas encore réalisées. Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. -% \item[token] Un \emph{token}\,\footnote{Cette définition est tirée -% du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Gardons cet anglicisme bien pratique!} -% est soit (a)~un seul caractère avec son code de -% catégorie attaché (voir «~catcode~» plus haut), soit (b)~une séquence de contrôle. \virage{} Vous \emph{devriez} -% vous souvenir de deux choses importantes à~propos des \emph{tokens} de \TeX: (1)~Une séquence de contrôle est -% considérée comme étant un seul objet qui n'est plus composée d'une suite de symboles. En conséquence, les noms longs -% de séquences de contrôle ne sont pas plus difficiles à~traiter par \TeX\ que les noms courts, une fois qu'ils -% ont été remplacés par des \emph{tokens}. De plus, les espaces ne sont pas ignorés après les séquences de -% contrôle à~l'intérieur d'une liste de \emph{tokens}; la règle d'ignorance des espaces ne s'applique que dans un -% fichier d'entrée, au moment où les chaînes de caractères sont découpées en \emph{tokens}. (2)~Une fois qu'un -% code de catégorie a été attaché à~un \emph{token} caractère, cet attachement est permanent. Par exemple, si le -% caractère~`\verb|{|' était soudainement déclaré comme étant de catégorie~12 au lieu de catégorie~1, les -% les caractères `\verb|{|$_1$' déjà à~l'intérieur de listes de \emph{tokens} de \TeX\ resteraient encore de -% catégorie~1; seules les listes nouvellement construites contiendraient des \emph{tokens} `\verb|{|$_{12}$'. -% En d'autres termes, les caractères individuels reçoivent une interprétation figée dès qu'ils ont été lus depuis -% un fichier, selon la catégorie qu'ils ont au moment de la lecture. Les séquences de contrôle sont différents, -% car elles peuvent changer d'interprétation à~tout moment. Les processus digestifs de \TeX\ savent toujours -% exactement ce qu'un \emph{token} signifie, parce que le code de catégorie apparaît dans le \emph{token} -% lui-même; mais lorsque les processus digestifs rencontrent un \emph{token} séquence de contrôle, ils doivent -% examiner la définition courante de cette séquence de contrôle afin d'en trouver la signification. -% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] Le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} (de \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} fournit une -% méthode rapide pour définir de nouveaux types de flottants en \LaTeX. Un seule commande définit un nouveau -% flottant dans le même style que les types de flottants \env{figure} et \env{table} du noyau \LaTeX{} kernel. -% \item[\pack{txfonts}] Le paquetage \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts} fournit les fontes \texttt{TX}, qui comprennent -% \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt -% \item des fontes romanes textuelles virtuelles utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec quelques -% symboles textuels modifiés ou additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1; -% \item {\textsf{des fontes sans empattement (sans serif) utilisant Adobe Helvetica (ou URW NimbusSanL) avec -% quelques symboles textuels additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; -% \item {\smooth\texttt{des fontes à~chasse fixe (dites <<~machine à~écrire~>>) dans\linebreak[4] les -% codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}}; -% \item des alphabets mathématiques utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec des métriques modifiées; -% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes mathématiques -% Computer Modern (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX et les lettres grecques de CMR); -% \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes \AmS{} fonts (MSAM et MSBM); -% \item des fontes mathématiques de divers symboles. -% \end{enumerate} -% Toutes ces fontes sont en format Type~1 (dans des fichiers \suffix{.afm} et \suffix{.pfb}). -% Les fichiers \suffix{.tfm} et \suffix{.vf} nécessaires ainsi que les fichiers de paquetage \LaTeXe{} et -% fichiers <<~font map~>> (\suffix{.map}) pour \tool{dvips} sont fournis. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[UNIX] Un système d'exploitation moderne, disponible sur divers types d'ordinateurs et dans diverses -% variantes. Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, il a l'avantage d'utiliser des noms de fichiers avec des -% suffixes longs (la limite est trop haute pour que le nombre de mini-tables soit un problème). -% \item[UNIX (analogues~à)] Les systèmes d'exploitation analogues à~Unix, avec les mêmes avantages. Linux en est -% un bon exemple, mais il en existe d'autres. -% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} Un script PERL script, par \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, pour ajouter un type -% d'entrée \BibTeX{} \texttt{webpage}, -% et ajouter le support des champs généraux \texttt{url} et \texttt{lastchecked}, aux fichiers \suffix{.bst} -% de \BibTeX{} (du moins à~la plupart d'entre eux). Ajoute optionnellement un support basique pour les champs -% \texttt{eprint} et \texttt{doi}, et aussi le support pour \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}. -% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), aussi appelée UTF~2 ou FSS-UTF, est une représentation -% spéciale d'Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). Elle utilise des séquences de plusieurs octets de longueurs -% diverses, mais seules les séquences d'un, de deux ou de trois octets sont implantées dans \pack{CJK}. -% Les caractères ASCII seront utilisés tels quels --- sans cette propriété, il serait impossible d'utiliser -% UTF~8 avec \TeX. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\upack{varsects}] Le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer -% la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe: -% \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. -% Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.varsects} et la -% section~\vref{faq.33}). -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \par\reversemarginpar -% \item[Wikipédia] La \ixgrf{wikif.png}Wikipédia\index{Wikipedia=Wikipédia}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{0cm}[2.87cm][0cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wikif.png}}}} -% est un projet d'encyclopédie libre, multilingue et de contenu ouvert (libre, neutre et vérifiable -% que chacun peut éditer et améliorer) géré par la \emph{Wikimedia Foundation} -% à~but non lucratif. Son nom est un assemblage des mots \emph{wiki} (un type de site Web collaboratif) et -% \emph{encyclopedia}. Lancé en 2001 par \name{Jimmy}{Wales} et \name{Larry}{Sanger}, c'est le projet de travail -% de référence général le plus vaste, celui qui croît le plus vite, et le plus populaire disponible sur l'Internet. -% \par\normalmarginpar -% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] Le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig} fournit les environnements \env{wrapfigure} et -% \env{wraptable} pour placer une figure ou un tableau sur le côté de la page et faire que le texte -% enveloppe cette figure ou ce tableau. -% \end{wdesc} -% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X} -% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX} -% \item[\scrp{xmk}] Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui compose les fichiers exemples de documents et produit -% des documents PDF. -% \item[\upack{xr}] Le paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr} met en place un système pour les références externes -% (\emph{eXternal References}). J'en ai écrit la première version, mais elle avait de graves problèmes. -% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} a réécrit ce paquetage d'une manière bien meilleure et plus robuste. Avec sa permission, -% j'ai utilisé une partie de son code dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour réaliser les commandes de -% préparation (telles que \com{dominitoc}). Si vous utilisez aussi le paquetage -% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, utilisez \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} au lieu du paquetage \upack{xr}. -% \end{wdesc} -% \end{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation} -% \fi -% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt -% \minilot -% \egroup -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This chapter describes the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package (version~\#60). -% -% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \xfile{minitoc.l}. See -% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies -% the function and the placement of its files. -% \or\relax -% Ce chapitre décrit l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} (version~\#60). -% -% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donnée dans -% \xfile{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% Les fichiers sont répartis en «~classes~» ci-dessous (un même fichier peut apparaître dans plusieurs classes). -% Chaque classe spécifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers. -% \fi -% \begin{table}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \def\CLA{class} -% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} -% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} -% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), first part}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} -% \or\relax -% \def\CLA{classe} -% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} -% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} -% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), première partie}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l} -% \fi -% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} -% \medskip -% \fboxsep=1em -% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth -% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries -% \flushleft -% \noextrasfrancais -% \smash{\vphantom{\mpfootnotemark[0]}}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}% -% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns -% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} -% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.sty} -% \item \xfile{mtcoff.sty} -% \item \xfile{mtcmess.sty} -% \item \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} -% \item \xfile{acadian.mld} -% \item \xfile{acadien.mld} -% \item \xfile{afrikaan.mld} -% \item \xfile{afrikaans.mld} -% \item \xfile{albanian.mld} -% \item \xfile{american.mld} -% \item \xfile{arab.mld} -% \item \xfile{arab2.mld} -% \item \xfile{arabi.mld} -% \item \xfile{arabic.mld} -% \item \xfile{armenian.mld} -% \item \xfile{australian.mld} -% \item \xfile{austrian.mld} -% \item \xfile{bahasa.mld} -% \item \xfile{bahasai.mld} -% \item \xfile{bahasam.mld} -% \item \xfile{bangla.mld} -% \item \xfile{basque.mld} -% \item \xfile{bengali.mld} -% \item \xfile{bicig.mld} -% \item \xfile{bicig2.mld} -% \item \xfile{bicig3.mld} -% \item \xfile{bithe.mld} -% \item \xfile{brazil.mld} -% \item \xfile{brazilian.mld} -% \item \xfile{breton.mld} -% \item \xfile{british.mld} -% \item \xfile{bulgarian.mld} -% \item \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} -% \item \xfile{buryat.mld} -% \item \xfile{buryat2.mld} -% \item \xfile{canadian.mld} -% \item \xfile{canadien.mld} -% \item \xfile{castillan.mld} -% \item \xfile{castillian.mld} -% \item \xfile{catalan.mld} -% \item \xmldo{chinese1} -% \item \xmldo{chinese2} -% \item \xfile{croatian.mld} -% \item \xfile{czech.mld} -% \item \xfile{danish.mld} -% \item \xfile{devanagari.mld} -% \item \xfile{dutch.mld} -% \item \xfile{english.mld} -% \item \xfile{english1.mld} -% \item \xfile{english2.mld} -% \item \xfile{esperant.mld} -% \item \xfile{esperanto.mld} -% \item \xfile{estonian.mld} -% \item \xfile{ethiopia.mld} -% \item \xfile{ethiopian.mld} -% \item \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} -% \item \xmldo{farsi1} -% \item \xmldo{farsi2} -% \item \xfile{farsi3.mld} -% \item \xfile{finnish.mld} -% \item \xfile{finnish2.mld} -% \item \xfile{francais.mld} -% \item \xfile{french.mld} -% \item \xfile{french1.mld} -% \item \xfile{french2.mld} -% \item \xfile{frenchb.mld} -% \item \xfile{frenchle.mld} -% \item \xfile{frenchpro.mld} -% \item \xfile{galician.mld} -% \item \xfile{german.mld} -% \item \xfile{germanb.mld} -% \item \xfile{germanb2.mld} -% \item \xfile{greek.mld} -% \item \xfile{greek-mono.mld} -% \item \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld} -% \item \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld} -% \item \xfile{guarani.mld} -% \item \xmldo{hangul1} -% \item \xmldo{hangul2} -% \item \xmldo{hangul3} -% \item \xmldo{hangul4} -% \item \xmldo{hangul-u8} -% \item \xmldo{hanja1} -% \item \xmldo{hanja2} -% \item \xmldo{hanja-u8} -% \item \xfile{hebrew.mld} -% \item \xfile{hebrew2.mld} -% \item \xfile{hindi.mld} -% \item \xfile{hindi-modern.mld} -% \item \xfile{hungarian.mld} -% \item \xfile{icelandic.mld} -% \item \xfile{indon.mld} -% \item \xfile{indonesian.mld} -% \item \xfile{interlingua.mld} -% \item \xfile{irish.mld} -% \item \xfile{italian.mld} -% \item \xfile{italian2.mld} -% \item \xmldo{japanese} -% \item \xmldo{japanese2} -% \item \xmldo{japanese3} -% \item \xmldo{japanese4} -% \item \xmldo{japanese5} -% \item \xmldo{japanese6} -% \item \xfile{kannada.mld} -% \item \xfile{khalkha.mld} -% \item \xfile{latin.mld} -% \item \xfile{latin2.mld} -% \item \xfile{latinc.mld} -% \item \xfile{latinc2.mld} -% \item \xfile{latvian.mld} -% \item \xfile{latvian2.mld} -% \item \xfile{letton.mld} -% \item \xfile{letton2.mld} -% \item \xfile{lithuanian.mld} -% \item \xfile{lithuanian2.mld} -% \item \xfile{lowersorbian.mld} -% \item \xfile{lsorbian.mld} -% \item \xfile{magyar.mld} -% \item \xfile{magyar2.mld} -% \item \xfile{magyar3.mld} -% \item \xfile{malay.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-b.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} -% \item \xmldo{malayalam-omega} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} -% \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} -% \item \xfile{manju.mld} -% \item \xfile{mexican.mld} -% \item \xfile{meyalu.mld} -% \item \xfile{mongol.mld} -% \item \xfile{mongolb.mld} -% \item \xfile{mongolian.mld} -% \item \xfile{naustrian.mld} -% \item \xfile{newzealand.mld} -% \item \xfile{ngerman.mld} -% \item \xfile{ngermanb.mld} -% \item \xfile{ngermanb2.mld} -% \item \xfile{norsk.mld} -% \item \xfile{norsk2.mld} -% \item \xfile{nynorsk.mld} -% \item \xfile{nynorsk2.mld} -% \item \xfile{occitan.mld} -% \item \xfile{occitan2.mld} -% \item \xfile{polish.mld} -% \item \xfile{polish2.mld} -% \item \xfile{polski.mld} -% \item \xfile{portuges.mld} -% \item \xfile{portuguese.mld} -% \item \xfile{romanian.mld} -% \item \xfile{romanian2.mld} -% \item \xfile{romanian3.mld} -% \item \xfile{russian.mld} -% \item \xfile{russianb.mld} -% \item \xfile{russianc.mld} -% \item \xfile{russian2m.mld} -% \item \xfile{russian2o.mld} -% \item \xmldo{russian-cca} -% \item \xmldo{russian-cca1} -% \item \xmldo{russian-lh} -% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyralt} -% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} -% \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} -% \item \xfile{samin.mld} -% \item \xfile{scottish.mld} -% \item \xfile{serbian.mld} -% \item \xfile{serbianc.mld} -% \item \xfile{slovak.mld} -% \item \xfile{slovene.mld} -% \item \xfile{spanish.mld} -% \item \xfile{spanish2.mld} -% \item \xfile{spanish3.mld} -% \item \xfile{spanish4.mld} -% \item \xfile{swahili.mld} -% \item \xfile{swedish.mld} -% \item \xfile{swedish2.mld} -% \item \xmldo{thai} -% \item \xfile{turkish.mld} -% \item \xfile{uighur.mld} -% \item \xfile{uighur2.mld} -% \item \xfile{uighur3.mld} -% \item \xfile{UKenglish.mld} -% \item \xfile{ukraineb.mld} -% \item \xfile{ukrainian.mld} -% \item \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} -% \item \xfile{USenglish.mld} -% \item \xfile{usorbian.mld} -% \item \xfile{vietnam.mld} -% \item \xfile{vietnamese.mld} -% \item \xfile{welsh.mld} -% \item \xfile{xalx.mld} -% \item \xfile{xalx2.mld} -% \item \xfile{xalx3.mld} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{INSTALL}, \xfile{README}, \xfile{TODO}, \xfile{CATALOG} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item -% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, -% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-vti.tex} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \footnotetext{See continuation in table~\vref{t+files2}.} -% \or\relax -% \footnotetext{Voir la suite dans le tableau~\vref{t+files2}.} -% \fi -% \end{minipage}} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{table} -% \begin{table}[!tp] -% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \def\CLA{class} -% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace} -% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} -% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), second part}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} -% \or\relax -% \def\CLA{classe} -% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace} -% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace} -% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), seconde partie}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l} -% \fi -% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip} -% \medskip -% \fboxsep=1em -% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth -% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries -% \flushleft -% \noextrasfrancais -% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns -% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french} -% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.bug} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.sum} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.ins} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.bib} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} -% \item \xfile{en-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL -% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax -% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. -% \or\relax -% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. -% \fi} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx} -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}\isuffix{.lan} -% \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre} -% \item \xfile{franc.sty}, \xfile{frbib.sty}, \xfile{frnew.sty} -% \item \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.pdf} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN10}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk} -% ^^A \item \xfile{duplex2v.pro} -% \end{itemize} -% \medskip -% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN11}):}}}]\NL -% \begin{itemize} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \leftmargin=0pt -% \listparindent=1em -% \item \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage}} -% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{table} -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep -% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) -% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% -% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} -% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} -% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} -% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[List of the graphic files]{List of the graphic files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Liste des fichiers graphiques]{Liste des fichiers graphiques (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1} -% \fi -% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight -% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight -% \columnseprule=.4pt -% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns -% \xgrf{acadian-m.pdf}, -% \xgrf{acadien-m.pdf}, -% \xgrf{africa-lf.png}, -% \xgrf{africa-lo.pdf}, -% \xgrf{afrsud-l.pdf}, -% \xgrf{afrsud-p.pdf}, -% \xgrf{albania.pdf}, -% \xgrf{alb2.png}, -% \xgrf{alba-eth.pdf}, -% \xgrf{allemand.jpg}, -% \xgrf{anglo1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{arab-l.jpg}, -% \xgrf{arabw.png}, -% \xgrf{armeniad.pdf}, -% \xgrf{armenian-l.png}, -% \xgrf{armeniar.jpg}, -% \xgrf{baltes.jpg}, -% \xgrf{bangla.png}, -% \xgrf{bangla1.png}, -% \xgrf{bangla2.png}, -% \xgrf{basque-de.png}, -% \xgrf{basque-df.png}, -% \xgrf{basque1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{basque2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{be-dg-f.png}, -% \xgrf{belgique.pdf}, -% \xgrf{bengali-m.jpg}, -% \xgrf{bosnia.pdf}, -% \xgrf{brazil.pdf}, -% \xgrf{brazilp.pdf}, -% \xgrf{bretagne.pdf}, -% \xgrf{bulgariar.jpg}, -% \xgrf{bulgarski.png}, -% \xgrf{bulgmap.png}, -% \xgrf{buryatia.pdf}, -% \xgrf{buryatia-l.pdf}, -% \xgrf{canada.pdf}, -% \xgrf{canada-l.pdf}, -% \xgrf{canada-pe.png}, -% \xgrf{canada-pf.pdf}, -% \xgrf{canada1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{catalan-d.pdf}, -% \xgrf{catalan-p.pdf}, -% \xgrf{caucasus.pdf}, -% \xgrf{china-ae.png}, -% \xgrf{china-af.png}, -% \xgrf{china-ch.png}, -% \xgrf{china-l.pdf}, -% \xgrf{china-w.png}, -% \xgrf{chine1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{chine2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{cplpmap.png}, -% \xgrf{croatia-un.png}, -% \xgrf{croatie2.png}, -% \xgrf{cyr-alf.png}, -% \xgrf{cz1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{cz3.png}, -% \xgrf{czechd.pdf}, -% \xgrf{danemark.jpg}, -% \xgrf{danishd.pdf}, -% \xgrf{danishg.pdf}, -% \xgrf{devanagari.png}, -% \xgrf{dutchw.pdf}, -% \xgrf{ecosse1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{ecosse2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{ecosse3.pdf}, -% \xgrf{espa-l.pdf}, -% \xgrf{espa-o.png}, -% \xgrf{estonia-a.pdf}, -% \xgrf{estonia-b.pdf}, -% \xgrf{eth2.png}, -% \xgrf{ethiolang.png}, -% \xgrf{ethiopia.pdf}, -% \xgrf{ethiopia-p.pdf}, -% \xgrf{euro-lan.png}, -% \xgrf{euro-lan1.png}, -% \xgrf{euro-lan2.png}, -% \xgrf{euskara.png}, -% \xgrf{farsi.pdf}, -% \xgrf{farsi-logo.png}, -% \xgrf{feroe.jpg}, -% \xgrf{finlande1.png}, -% \xgrf{finlande2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{finnishd.pdf}, -% \xgrf{finnishl.pdf}, -% \xgrf{france-lr.png}, -% \xgrf{franco.png}, -% \xgrf{fswahili.pdf}, -% \xgrf{gael-ft.pdf}, -% \xgrf{gaid.jpg}, -% \xgrf{galicia-m.pdf}, -% \xgrf{galicia-mp.pdf}, -% \xgrf{galician-l.png}, -% \xgrf{galles1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{galles2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{germ-w.png}, -% \xgrf{german-c.pdf}, -% \xgrf{german-d.pdf}, -% \xgrf{german-m.pdf}, -% \xgrf{grece1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{grece2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{greeka.png}, -% \xgrf{greekm.jpg}, -% \xgrf{hangul.png}, -% \xgrf{hanja.png}, -% \xgrf{hanzi.png}, -% \xgrf{hin.png}, -% \xgrf{hindi-b.png}, -% \xgrf{hindi-p.png}, -% \xgrf{hispano.png}, -% \xgrf{hrv.png}, -% \xgrf{hun1.png}, -% \xgrf{hun2.jpg}, -% \xgrf{inde1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{inde2.jpg}, -% \xgrf{indonesia1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{indonesia2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{iranian.jpg}, -% \xgrf{irish.png}, -% \xgrf{irlande.pdf}, -% \xgrf{islam-pbc.png}, -% \xgrf{islam-sw.pdf}, -% \xgrf{islande.png}, -% \xgrf{islandep.jpg}, -% \xgrf{isr1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{isr2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{italian.pdf}, -% \xgrf{italo1.png}, -% \xgrf{italysm.png}, -% \xgrf{ivrit.png}, -% \xgrf{japon1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{japon2.jpg}, -% \xgrf{kannada-n.png}, -% \xgrf{karnad1.jpg}, -% \xgrf{karnataka.jpg}, -% \xgrf{kerala.jpg}, -% \xgrf{khalkha.pdf}, -% \xgrf{korean1.png}, -% \xgrf{korean2.jpg}, -% \xgrf{kos-alb.png}, -% \xgrf{kos-ml.png}, -% \xgrf{lamed3.png}, -% \xgrf{lang-g.png}, -% \xgrf{latvian-d.png}, -% \xgrf{latvian-r1.png}, -% \xgrf{lettonie.jpg}, -% \xgrf{leur.png}, -% \xgrf{lituanie.png}, -% \xgrf{luso1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{luso2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{malayalam.pdf}, -% \xgrf{malayalam.png}, -% \xgrf{malaysia1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{malaysia2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{manchu.jpg}, -% \xgrf{manchuria.jpg}, -% \xgrf{manjuc.jpg}, -% \xgrf{manjui.png}, -% \xgrf{mex1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{mex2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{mex3.pdf}, -% \xgrf{mexip.pdf}, -% \xgrf{meyalu.png}, -% \xgrf{mondep.png}, -% \xgrf{mongasie.pdf}, -% \xgrf{mongolcy.png}, -% \xgrf{mongolian.pdf}, -% \xgrf{mongols.png}, -% \xgrf{mongoltr.png}, -% \xgrf{neder.pdf}, -% \xgrf{nihongo.png}, -% \xgrf{norvege-c.pdf}, -% \xgrf{norvege-t.pdf}, -% \xgrf{norway-p.pdf}, -% \xgrf{occdial1.jpg}, -% \xgrf{occdial2.png}, -% \xgrf{occitanie.png}, -% \xgrf{occtaur.jpg}, -% \xgrf{paraguay.png}, -% \xgrf{paraguayp.pdf}, -% \xgrf{polish-d.jpg}, -% \xgrf{polmin.jpg}, -% \xgrf{pologne.pdf}, -% \xgrf{portu-a.png}, -% \xgrf{portu-b.png}, -% \xgrf{portu-p.jpg}, -% \xgrf{portu-r.jpg}, -% \xgrf{portugal.pdf}, -% \xgrf{romanian.pdf}, -% \xgrf{rus-cyr.png}, -% \xgrf{rus-re.png}, -% \xgrf{rus-su.pdf}, -% \xgrf{russian.png}, -% \xgrf{russian-e.pdf}, -% \xgrf{russian-n.png}, -% \xgrf{russian-w.png}, -% \xgrf{same.png}, -% \xgrf{same-f.png}, -% \xgrf{serb-a.pdf}, -% \xgrf{serbia1.pdf}, -% \xgrf{slovak-ok.png}, -% \xgrf{slovakia.pdf}, -% \xgrf{slovenian.png}, -% \xgrf{slovenie.pdf}, -% \xgrf{sorabe-1.jpg}, -% \xgrf{sorabe-2.jpg}, -% \xgrf{sorben.jpg}, -% \xgrf{sorbian.jpg}, -% \xgrf{spain.png}, -% \xgrf{suede-a.pdf}, -% \xgrf{suede-fin.pdf}, -% \xgrf{svenska.png}, -% \xgrf{swahili.pdf}, -% \xgrf{swahili-m.png}, -% \xgrf{sweden.pdf}, -% \xgrf{thai.pdf}, -% \xgrf{thai.png}, -% \xgrf{turkish.png}, -% \xgrf{turquie.pdf}, -% \xgrf{uighur.pdf}, -% \xgrf{ukra.png}, -% \xgrf{ukraine.jpg}, -% \xgrf{ukrainep.pdf}, -% \xgrf{viet2.pdf}, -% \xgrf{viet3.pdf}, -% \xgrf{viet4.pdf}, -% \xgrf{viet-w.pdf}, -% \xgrf{wallonie.pdf}, -% \xgrf{wiki.png}, -% \xgrf{wikif.png}, -% \xgrf{wrs-a.png}, -% \xgrf{wrs-c.png}, -% \xgrf{xinjiang.png}, -% \xgrf{xinjiangc.png}, -% \xgrf{xyugo.png}. -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage}} -% \end{table} -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep -% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep) -% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}% -% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth} -% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep} -% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule} -% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[List of the flag files]{List of the flag files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Liste des fichiers drapeaux]{Liste des fichiers drapeaux (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2} -% \fi -% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight -% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight -% \columnseprule=.4pt -% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns -% \xgrfl{aaland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{acadie-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{afghan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{albania-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{algeria-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{alsace-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{andorra-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{argentina-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{angola-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{armenia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{aruba-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{australia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{austria-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bahamas-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bahrain-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bangladesh-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{barbados-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{belarus-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{belgium-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{belize-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{benin-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bolivia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bolzano-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bozen-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{brazil-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{brussels-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{bur-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{burkina-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{burundi-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cambodia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{california-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cameroon-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{canada-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{castille-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{catalonia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{central-africa-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{chad-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{chile-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{china-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cis-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{colombia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{comoros-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{congo-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{corsica-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{cplp-0.png}, -% \xgrfl{croatia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cuba-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{cyprus-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{czech-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{dane-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{djibouti-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{dominica-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{dominican-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{east-timor-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{egypt-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{el-salvador-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{england-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{eritrea-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{esperanto-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{estonia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ethiopia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{eusk-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{faroe-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{fiji-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{finland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{flanders-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{france-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{francophonie-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{gabon-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{galicia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{georgia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{germany-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{ghana-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{gibraltar-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{greece-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{greenland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{guinea-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{gwenn-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{haiti-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{honduras-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{hungary-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{iceland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{imongolia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{india-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{indonesia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{iran-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{iraq-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ireland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{israel-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{italy-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ivory-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{jamaica-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{japan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{jordan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{jutland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{kenya-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{kerala-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{kiribati-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{korea-n-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{korea-s-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{kosovo-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{kuwait-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{laos-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{latvia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{lebanon-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{liberia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{libya-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{liech-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{louisiana-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ls-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{lux-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{macau-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{macedonia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{madagascar-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{maine-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{malawi-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{malaysia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mali-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{malta1-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mauritania-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mauritius-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{moldova-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{monaco-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mongolia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{morocco-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{mozambique-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{namibia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ncyprus-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{netherlands-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{new-york-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{newzealand-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{nicaragua-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{nice-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{niger-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{nigeria-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{norway-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{occ-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{oman-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{opole-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{pakistan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{palestine-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{panama-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{paraguay-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{peru-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{philippines-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{poland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{polski-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{portugal-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{qatar-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{quebec-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{romania-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{russia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{rwanda-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{sami-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{samoa-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{san-marino-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{sao-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{scotland-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{senegal-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{serbia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{serbia-f2.png}, -% \xgrfl{seychelles-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{singapore-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{slovakia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{slovenia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{somalia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{south-africa-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{spain-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{spilhennig.png}, -% \xgrfl{start.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{stop.png}, -% \xgrfl{sudan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{suisse-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{suriname-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{sweden-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{syria-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{taiwan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{tajikistan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{tanzania-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{thailand-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{togo-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{tonga-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{tunisia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{turkey-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{tuvalu-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uae-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uganda-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uighur-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uk-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{ukraine-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uruguay-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{us-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{usa-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}, -% \xgrfl{venezuela-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{vermont-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{vietnam-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{vojvodina-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{wales-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{wallonia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{yemen-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{zambia-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{zanzibar-f.png}, -% \xgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}. -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage}} -% \end{table} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] -% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN0}The files \xfile{minitoc.ins} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} -% are the basic source files of this package. The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} loads -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation. -% The language selection is done by using -% \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN0}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx} -% sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} charge -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} mais sélectionne la documentation en français. La sélection de la -% langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} -% \ldots\ \com{fi}. -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN1}The files \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, -% \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, -% and \emph{all}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} -% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} and \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} files are the package -% itself\,\footnote{The large number of \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files is (partially) a consequence -% of the fact that some languages have -% aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file may load -% another one) and, if necessary, a \suffix{.mlo} file; the english and french languages are evident examples. -% For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts -% and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even -% for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk). \emph{Note that the presence of -% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.} Since version~\#50, the \upack{minitoc} package signals the -% missing \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files and gives their list in a warning message.}. -% -% The table~\vref{t+languages} lists the available languages; for each of these languages, a -% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file is available; the languages in parentheses are aliases of a main language -% and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file of that main language. -% -% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. -% -% The files of this class must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \suffix{.sty} files. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, -% \xfile{mtcmess.sty} -% et \emph{tous}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} -% les fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} et \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} constituent le -% paquetage lui-même\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} est (en partie) -% une conséquence du fait que certaines -% langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier -% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} peut en charger un autre) et, si nécessaire, un fichier \suffix{.mlo}; -% les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples évidents. -% Pour certaines langues, la multiplicité des fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} correspond à~une multiplicité de fontes -% et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, coréen, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou même à~des -% réformes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norvégien). \emph{Notez que la présence du fichier -% \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.}. Depuis la version~\#50, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} signale les -% fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} manquants et en donne une liste dans un message d'avertissement.}. -% -% Le tableau~\vref{t+languages} liste les langues disponibles; pour chacune de ces langues, un fichier -% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} est disponible; les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue -% principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de cette langue principale. -% -% \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. -% -% Les fichiers de cette classe doivent être \emph{tous} installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve -% les fichiers \suffix{.sty}. -% \fi -% \lneed{4} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN2}Informative text files: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \xfile{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package. -% You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter). -% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \upack{minitoc} distribution. See -% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% \item \xfile{README} is a file describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package, -% plus some useful infos. -% \item \xfile{CATALOG} contains basic infos about the \upack{minitoc} package (abstract, date, -% author, version, licence). -% \item \xfile{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented. -% Comments and suggestions are welcome. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \xfile{INSTALL} est un fichier décrivant l'installation du paquetage. À~part la langue, -% vous êtes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court). -% \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de -% \upack{minitoc}. Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% \item \xfile{README} est un fichier décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, -% plus quelques informations utiles. -% \item \xfile{CATALOG} contient des informations basiques sur le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% (résumé, date, auteur, version, licence). -% \item \xfile{TODO} liste quelques propositions de développement du paquetage, pas encore réalisées. -% Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN3}Examples of documents: -% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, -% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, -% are example files, to play with. -% The associated \suffix{.pdf} files are provided. -% Another (\emph{short}) examples are welcome. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN3}Exemples de documents: -% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, -% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}, -% sont des exemples de fichiers, avec lesquels vous pouvez jouer. -% Les fichiers \suffix{.pdf} associés sont fournis. -% D'autres exemples (\emph{courts}) sont les bienvenus. -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} -% are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands -% (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}). -% \or\relax -% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum} -% sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des problèmes (questions fréquemment posées, voir le -% chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}). -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, and -% \xfile{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english. -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} is the common preambule code for the documentation. -% \else\relax -% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et -% \xfile{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque). -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} est le code de préambule commun pour la documentation. -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN6} -% {\rmfamily\slshape The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; -% they are images to include.} -% \or\relax -% \label{IN6} -% {\rmfamily\slshape La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}; -% ce sont des images à~inclure.} -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, -% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, -% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, -% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} are the source -% (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and -% french documentations are both contained in the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file. \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sets -% a flag then -% loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is much smaller than \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. -% Thus, \xfile{minitoc.ins} contains also some utilitary files which are automatically created (some -% \suffix{.sty} files, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, -% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). -% The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file, and this helps the maintenance.}. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, -% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, -% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, -% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} sont les codes sources -% (et les outils) pour la documentation en français\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez étrange. En fait, les -% documentations en anglais et en français sont toutes deux contenues dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} établit un indicateur puis charge \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; en conséquence, le fichier -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est bien plus petit que \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \xfile{minitoc.ins} -% contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont créés automatiquement (quelques fichiers -% \suffix{.sty}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}, -% \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}). -% Les versions anglaise et française ne sont pas des traductions mot-à-mot, mais elles sont en -% parallèle dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.}. -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf}, -% is the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF format. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf} -% forme la documentation en anglais (ou presque), en format PDF. -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} -% is the documentation in french, in PDF format. The french documentation and its source -% files must not be left out. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} -% forme la documentation en français, en format PDF. La documentation en français -% et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas être omis. -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a big cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} -% while this script is running! Be patient.} -% to prepare the package and its documentation; -% the \scrp{pmk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} -% and \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} directories to not waste disk space under your home directory; -% there are also six partial scripts\footnote{In fact, \scrp{pmk} assembles the scripts -% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk}, and \scrp{tmk} (but \emph{not} \scrp{cmk}).} -% and a supplementary one, \scrp{cmk} (all to be adapted): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \scrp{imk}, which prepares the package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running -% \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}; it creates also some \suffix{.sty} files necessary to prepare -% the documentation but that are to be installed with it; -% the \scrp{imk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} directory to not waste disk space -% under your home directory; -% \item \scrp{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; -% \item \scrp{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; -% \item \scrp{xmk}, which typesets the example files (in PDF format); -% \item \scrp{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class); -% \item \scrp{tmk}, which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} -% (to be tailored to your system); see table~\vref{t+TDS}; this hierarchy is saved -% in \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; -% \item \scrp{cmk}, which converts the PDF documentation files into PostScript files. -% \end{itemize} -% These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but they are very simple, and should be easy to -% convert in another classic shell. The documentation in PostScript format is no more distributed on -% the CTAN archives, but the \scrp{cmk} script can prepare it from the documentation in PDF format -% (recto-verso printing). -% \or\relax -% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de déguster un -% grand cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} pendant que ce script s'exécute! Soyez patients.} pour préparer le paquetage -% et sa documentation; -% le script \scrp{pmk} utilise les répertoires \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} -% et \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour ne pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; -% il y~a aussi six scripts partiels\,\footnote{En fait, \scrp{pmk} regroupe les scripts -% \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (mais \emph{pas} -% \scrp{cmk}).} et un supplémentaire, \scrp{cmk} (tous à~adapter): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \scrp{imk}, qui prépare le paquetage en partant de -% \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; -% notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}; -% il crée aussi quelques fichiers \suffix{.sty} nécessaires pour préparer la documentation et -% ils doivent être installés avec elle; -% le script \scrp{imk} utilise le répertoire \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} pour ne pas gâcher -% de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; -% \item \scrp{emk}, qui prépare la documentation anglaise en partant de -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; -% \item \scrp{fmk}, qui prépare la documentation française en partant de -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; -% \item \scrp{xmk}, qui compose les fichiers d'exemples (en format PDF); -% \item \scrp{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe); -% \item \scrp{tmk}, qui crée une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{ftds,tds} -% (à~adapter pour votre système); voir le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}; cette hiérarchie est sauvegardée -% dans \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}; -% \item \scrp{cmk}, qui convertit les fichiers PDF de la documentation en fichiers PostScript. -% \end{itemize} -% Ces scripts sont actuellement écrits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont très simples et devraient être -% faciles à~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique. La documentation en format PostScript -% n'est plus distribuée sur les archives CTAN, mais le script \scrp{cmk} peut la préparer à~partir de -% celle en format PDF (impression recto-verso). -% \fi -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} is a ZIP-archive file containing a -% \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy with all the files of the \upack{minitoc} package. -% \or\relax -% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} est un fichier archive ZIP contenant une -% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS avec tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some remarks about the \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} and \scrp{pmk} scripts (which you should tailor to your needs): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{with \scrp{rmk}:} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item the hierarchy is \emph{not} \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; -% \item the files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.dtx} -% and \suffix{.ins} files; -% \item the files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.sty} files; -% \item the files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN10}) -% must be installed in a separate directory, but must not be left out; -% \item the files of~(\ref{IN8}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed as on-line documentation; -% \item the directories created by the \scrp{rmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} to not waste disk space -% under your home directory. -% \end{enumerate} -% \item \textbf{with \scrp{tmk}:} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item the hierarchy is \index{TDS}TDS-compliant; -% \item each file appears only once in the hierarchy; -% \item the installation is much easier: you only need a \suffix{.zip} or a \suffix{.tar} (or \suffix{.tgz}) -% dump file\footnote{The \scrp{tmk} script creates the \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} file.} of the hierarchy -% to be deployed into the installed \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy; you should examine \emph{very carefully}\Virage{} (by -% comparison with your \index{TDS}TDS installation) and tailor the \scrp{tmk} script before using it; -% \item the directories created by the \scrp{tmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space -% under your home directory; -% \item the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) should not be installed; it is just a method to help making -% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant installation. -% \end{enumerate} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% \item \textbf{with \scrp{pmk}:} -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item the \scrp{pmk} script performs the actions of \scrp{imk} (preparation of the basic files), \scrp{emk} and -% \scrp{fmk} (preparation of the english and french documentation), \scrp{xmk} (preparation of the -% examples of documents), \scrp{rmk} and \scrp{tmk} (repartition of files into classes and in -% a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy);\par -% \begin{RaggedRight} -% \item the directories created by the \scrp{pmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and -% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory; -% ^^A \item the \scrp{pmk} script creates its directories under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and -% ^^A \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory. -% \par\end{RaggedRight} -% \item the \emph{same precautions}\Virage{} as for \scrp{tmk} are needed. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% Quelques remarques sur les scripts \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} et \scrp{pmk} (que vous devriez adapter à~vos besoins): -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{rmk}:} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item la hiérarchie \emph{n'est pas} conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; -% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} -% et \suffix{.ins}; -% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les -% fichiers \suffix{.sty}; -% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN10}) -% doivent être installés dans un répertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas être omis; -% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN8}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent être installés comme documentation en ligne; -% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{rmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} pour de pas gâcher de -% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base. -% \end{enumerate} -% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{tmk}:} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item la hiérarchie est conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS; -% \item chaque fichier n'apparaît qu'une seule fois dans la hiérarchie; -% \item l'installation est plus facile: il vous suffit d'un fichier de sauvegarde \suffix{.zip} ou \suffix{.tar} -% (ou \suffix{.tgz}) de la hiérarchie\,\footnote{Le script \scrp{tmk} crée le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.} -% pour le déployer dans la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS installée; -% vous devriez examiner \emph{très soigneusement}\Virage{} (par -% comparaison avec votre installation de la \index{TDS}TDS) et adapter le script \scrp{tmk} avant de l'utiliser; -% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{tmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de -% l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; -% \item le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) ne devrait pas être installé; c'est juste une méthode -% pour aider à~faire une installation conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS. -% \end{enumerate} -% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{pmk}:} -% \nopagebreak[4] -% ^^A \begin{RaggedRight} -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item le script \scrp{pmk} effectue les actions de \scrp{imk} (préparation des fichiers de base), \scrp{emk} et -% \scrp{fmk} (préparation de la documentation en anglais et en français), \scrp{xmk} (préparation des -% exemples de documents), \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (répartition des fichiers en classes et dans une -% hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS); -% \item le script \scrp{pmk} crée ses répertoires sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} et -% \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base; -% \item les \emph{mêmes précautions}\Virage{} que pour \scrp{tmk} sont nécessaires. -% \end{enumerate} -% ^^A \end{RaggedRight} -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \begin{table}[!t] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \def\TDSPH{\vphantom{\'TDSj}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption{A TDS-compliant hierarchy for the \upack{minitoc} files}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} -% \def\tdstitle{TDS~Root~Directory\TDSPH} -% \or\relax -% \caption{Une hiérarchie conforme à~la TDS pour les fichiers de \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS} -% \def\tdstitle{Répertoire~racine~TDS\TDSPH} -% \fi -% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{\large\textbf{\tdstitle}}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c|}{\texttt{bibtex/}}&\texttt{doc/}&\texttt{makeindex/}&\texttt{scripts/}&\texttt{source/}&\texttt{tex/}\\ -% \cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} -% \texttt{bib/}&\texttt{bst/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{latex/}\\ -% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7} -% \texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\textbf{(D)}&\textbf{(E)}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}\\ -% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}% -% \textbf{(A)}&\textbf{(B)}&\textbf{(C)}&\multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(F)}&\textbf{(G)}\\ -% ^^A \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% -% \cmidrule{3-4}% -% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\texttt{examples/}&\texttt{images/}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ -% \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}% -% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(H)}&\textbf{(I)}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\ -% \morecmidrules\cmidrule[\heavyrulewidth]{1-7} -% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{% -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \raggedright -% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt} -% \begin{multicols}{2} %^^A \raggedcolumns\setcounter{unbalance}{5} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=2em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{description} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em -% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\textbf{(H)}} -% \parindent=0pt -% \def\sepitem{\vspace*{-1.5\baselineskip}\item[]\null\hspace*{-2em}\hrulefill\pagebreak[1]} -% \item[(A)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, \xfile{minitoc.bib}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(B)\hfill\null]~\unskip\isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(C)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{INSTALL}, -% \xfile{README}, -% \xfile{TODO}, -% \xfile{CATALOG}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}, -% \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}, -% \xfile{minitoc.bug}, -% \xfile{minitoc.l}, -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, -% \xfile{minitoc.pdf}, -% \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre}, -% \xfile{minitoc.sum}, -% \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, -% \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty}, -% \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(D)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(E)\hfill\null]~\unskip\scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, -% \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(F)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.ins}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(G)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty}, -% \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld}, \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(H)\hfill\null]~\unskip\exam{mtc-2c.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-2c.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-2nd.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-3co.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-3co.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-add.bib}, -% \exam{mtc-add.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-add.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ads.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-ads.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-amm.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-apx.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-art.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-art.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bk.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-bk.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-bo.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-bo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ch0.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-cri.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-cri.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fko.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-fko.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo1.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-fo2.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-gap.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hia.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-hia.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hir.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-hir.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-hop.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-hop.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-liv.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-liv.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mem.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-mem.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mm1.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-mu.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-mu.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-nom.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-nom.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ocf.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-ofs.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-sbf.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-scr.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-scr.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-syn.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-syn.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tbi.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlc.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tlo.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-tsf.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}, -% \exam{mtc-vti.pdf}, -% \exam{mtc-vti.tex}; -% \sepitem -% \item[(I)\hfill\null] -% {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax -% The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. -% \or\relax -% La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}. -% \fi} -% \end{description} -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}} -% \smash{% -% \ixfile{acadian.mld}% -% \ixfile{acadien.mld}% -% \ixfile{afrikaan.mld}% -% \ixfile{afrikaans.mld}% -% \ixfile{albanian.mld}% -% \ixfile{american.mld}% -% \ixfile{arabic.mld}% -% \ixfile{arabi.mld}% -% \ixfile{arab.mld}% -% \ixfile{arab2.mld}% -% \ixfile{armenian.mld}% -% \ixfile{australian.mld}% -% \ixfile{austrian.mld}% -% \ixfile{bahasai.mld}% -% \ixfile{bahasa.mld}% -% \ixfile{bahasam.mld}% -% \ixfile{bangla.mld}% -% \ixfile{basque.mld}% -% \ixfile{bengali.mld}% -% \ixfile{bicig.mld}% -% \ixfile{bicig2.mld}% -% \ixfile{bicig3.mld}% -% \ixfile{bithe.mld}% -% \ixfile{brazilian.mld}% -% \ixfile{brazil.mld}% -% \ixfile{breton.mld}% -% \ixfile{british.mld}% -% \ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}% -% \ixfile{bulgarian.mld}% -% \ixfile{buryat.mld}% -% \ixfile{buryat2.mld}% -% \ixfile{canadian.mld}% -% \ixfile{canadien.mld}% -% \ixfile{castillan.mld}% -% \ixfile{castillian.mld}% -% \ixfile{catalan.mld}% -% \ixmldo{chinese1}% -% \ixmldo{chinese2}% -% \ixfile{croatian.mld}% -% \ixfile{czech.mld}% -% \ixfile{danish.mld}% -% \ixfile{devanagari.mld}% -% \ixfile{dutch.mld}% -% \ixfile{english.mld}% -% \ixfile{english1.mld}% -% \ixfile{english2.mld}% -% \ixfile{esperant.mld}% -% \ixfile{esperanto.mld}% -% \ixfile{estonian.mld}% -% \ixfile{ethiopia.mld}% -% \ixfile{ethiopian.mld}% -% \ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}% -% \ixmldo{farsi1}% -% \ixmldo{farsi2}% -% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}% -% \ixfile{finnish.mld}% -% \ixfile{finnish2.mld}% -% \ixfile{francais.mld}% -% \ixfile{french.mld}% -% \ixfile{french1.mld}% -% \ixfile{french2.mld}% -% \ixfile{frenchb.mld}% -% \ixfile{frenchle.mld}% -% \ixfile{frenchpro.mld}% -% \ixfile{galician.mld}% -% \ixfile{german.mld}% -% \ixfile{germanb.mld}% -% \ixfile{germanb2.mld}% -% \ixfile{greek.mld}% -% \ixfile{greek-mono.mld}% -% \ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}% -% \ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}% -% \ixfile{guarani.mld}% -% \ixmldo{hangul1}% -% \ixmldo{hangul2}% -% \ixmldo{hangul3}% -% \ixmldo{hangul4}% -% \ixmldo{hangul-u8}% -% \ixmldo{hanja1}% -% \ixmldo{hanja2}% -% \ixmldo{hanja-u8}% -% \ixfile{hebrew.mld}% -% \ixfile{hebrew2.mld}% -% \ixfile{hindi.mld}% -% \ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}% -% \ixfile{hungarian.mld}% -% \ixfile{icelandic.mld}% -% \ixfile{indonesian.mld}% -% \ixfile{indon.mld}% -% \ixfile{interlingua.mld}% -% \ixfile{irish.mld}% -% \ixfile{italian.mld}% -% \ixfile{italian2.mld}% -% \ixmldo{japanese}% -% \ixmldo{japanese2}% -% \ixmldo{japanese3}% -% \ixmldo{japanese4}% -% \ixmldo{japanese5}% -% \ixmldo{japanese6}% -% \ixfile{kannada.mld}% -% \ixfile{khalkha.mld}% -% \ixfile{latin.mld}% -% \ixfile{latin2.mld}% -% \ixfile{latinc.mld}% -% \ixfile{latinc2.mld}% -% \ixfile{latvian.mld}% -% \ixfile{latvian2.mld}% -% \ixfile{letton.mld}% -% \ixfile{letton2.mld}% -% \ixfile{lithuanian.mld}% -% \ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}% -% \ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}% -% \ixfile{lsorbian.mld}% -% \ixfile{magyar.mld}% -% \ixfile{magyar2.mld}% -% \ixfile{magyar3.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}% -% \ixmldo{malayalam-omega}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}% -% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}% -% \ixfile{malay.mld}% -% \ixfile{manju.mld}% -% \ixfile{mexican.mld}% -% \ixfile{meyalu.mld}% -% \ixfile{mongol.mld}% -% \ixfile{mongolb.mld}% -% \ixfile{mongolian.mld}% -% \ixfile{naustrian.mld}% -% \ixfile{newzealand.mld}% -% \ixfile{ngermanb.mld}% -% \ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}% -% \ixfile{ngerman.mld}% -% \ixfile{norsk.mld}% -% \ixfile{norsk2.mld}% -% \ixfile{nynorsk.mld}% -% \ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}% -% \ixfile{occitan.mld}% -% \ixfile{occitan2.mld}% -% \ixfile{polish.mld}% -% \ixfile{polish2.mld}% -% \ixfile{polski.mld}% -% \ixfile{portuges.mld}% -% \ixfile{portuguese.mld}% -% \ixfile{romanian.mld}% -% \ixfile{romanian2.mld}% -% \ixfile{romanian3.mld}% -% \ixfile{russian.mld}% -% \ixfile{russian2m.mld}% -% \ixfile{russian2o.mld}% -% \ixfile{russianb.mld}% -% \ixmldo{russian-cca1}% -% \ixmldo{russian-cca}% -% \ixfile{russianc.mld}% -% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}% -% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% -% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}% -% \ixmldo{russian-lh}% -% \ixfile{samin.mld}% -% \ixfile{scottish.mld}% -% \ixfile{serbianc.mld}% -% \ixfile{serbian.mld}% -% \ixfile{slovak.mld}% -% \ixfile{slovene.mld}% -% \ixfile{spanish.mld}% -% \ixfile{spanish2.mld}% -% \ixfile{spanish3.mld}% -% \ixfile{spanish4.mld}% -% \ixfile{swahili.mld}% -% \ixfile{swedish.mld}% -% \ixfile{swedish2.mld}% -% \ixmldo{thai}% -% \ixfile{turkish.mld}% -% \ixfile{uighur.mld}% -% \ixfile{uighur2.mld}% -% \ixfile{uighur3.mld}% -% \ixfile{UKenglish.mld}% -% \ixfile{ukraineb.mld}% -% \ixfile{ukrainian.mld}% -% \ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}% -% \ixfile{USenglish.mld}% -% \ixfile{usorbian.mld}% -% \ixfile{vietnamese.mld}% -% \ixfile{vietnam.mld}% -% \ixfile{welsh.mld}% -% \ixfile{xalx.mld}% -% \ixfile{xalx2.mld}% -% \ixfile{xalx3.mld}% -% }% -% \end{table} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contains a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of the -% \upack{minitoc} package. It has been prepared by the \scrp{pmk} or \scrp{tmk} scripts. -% \or\relax -% Le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contient une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS de tous les -% fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il a été préparé par l'un des scripts \scrp{pmk} ou \scrp{tmk}. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and hence \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \upack{minitoc} -% with \pack{hyperref}. They show how the combinaison of these two packages may be useful. -% \or\relax -% Notez que \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et donc \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de -% \upack{minitoc} avec \pack{hyperref}. Ils montrent combien la combinaison de ces deux paquetages peut être -% utile. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface} -% \fi -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt -% \minitoc -% \egroup -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This chapter summarizes the evolution of the \upack{minitoc} package, year by year. A more detailed history is -% available in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. Many minor changes are skipped here. -% -% In fact, this chapter is for the average user of the package, who wants to have an overview ot its evolution; -% the chapter ``Changes History'' is more oriented towards peoples interested in the code of the package and the -% problems encountered during its development. -% \or\relax -% Ce chapitre résume l'évolution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, année par année. Un historique plus détaillé est -% disponible dans «~Historique des modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. De nombreuses modifications mineures ne -% sont pas citées ici. -% -% En fait, le présent chapitre s'adresse à~l'utilisateur normal du paquetage, qui voudrait avoir une idée générale -% de son évolution; le chapitre «~Historique des modifications~» s'adresse par contre aux personnes qui seraient -% intéressées par le code du paquetage et les problèmes rencontrés lors de son développement. -% \fi -% -% \begin{RaggedRight} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The origins} -% The \upack{minitoc} package was initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} in~1990 and~1991, with major contributions -% by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. But \upack{minitoc} suffered of a major weakness: when the number of chapters -% exceeded~9 or~10, you got a rather mysterious error message: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|No room for a new \write.| -% \end{quote} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les origines} -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fut initialement écrit par \name{Nigel}{Ward}, en~1990 et~1991, avec des contributions -% majeures de \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. Mais \upack{minitoc} souffrait d'une faiblesse majeure: lorsque le nombre de chapitres -% dépassait~9 ou~10, vous obteniez un message d'erreur assez mystérieux: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|No room for a new \write.| -% \end{quote} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As I needed the basic fonctionnality of this package (printing mini-tables of contents for each chapter), I looked further -% in its code and finally found the culprit: \upack{minitoc} used a \com{newwrite} command to create a new file for the -% contents table of each chapter, allocating a new file descriptor each time. But the number of file descriptors for -% writing is limited to~16 under \LaTeX\ (in fact, by the underlying \TeX\ program itself). As some descriptors are already -% used by \LaTeX, writing more than 9~or~10~chapters was too much. Such errors are difficult to find when testing on -% too small documents: with few chapters, everything goes fine. But on a real document, with many chapters, the mysterious -% error happens. -% \or\relax -% Comme j'avais besoin de la fonctionnalité basique de ce paquetage (imprimer une mini-table des matières pour chaque -% chapitre), j'ai regardé de plus près son code et finalement trouvé le maillon faible: \upack{minitoc} utilisait -% une commande \com{newwrite} pour créer un nouveau fichier pour la table de manières de chaque chapitre, -% en allouant un nouveau -% descripteur de fichier chaque fois. Mais le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers en écriture est limité à~16 sous -% \LaTeX\ (en fait, par le programme \TeX\ sous-jacent lui-même). Comme quelques descripteurs sont déjà utilisés par -% \LaTeX, écrire plus de 9~ou~10~chapitres allait trop loin. De telles erreurs sont difficiles à~trouver lors de tests -% sur de trop petits documents: avec peu de chapitres, tout se passe bien. Mais sur un document réel, avec de nombreux -% chapitres, l'erreur mystérieuse survient. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{New design in~1993} -% So I~decided (June~1993, when I took the maintenance of the package) to change the allocation method to always -% use the same file descriptor for all the -% mini-table of contents files. Some major improvements happened in 1993: the addition of the \pack{mtcoff} -% (\pack{minitocoff} at this time) -% package and a rewrite of \upack{minitoc} to extract the data from the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file, with a -% selection mechanism. -% Then a first solution for the short extension problem was added (still manual). An elementary system for the fonts -% in the mini-tables was added. In December 1993, the minilofs and minilots were added. -% \or\relax -% \section{Nouvelle conception en~1993} -% Donc je décidai (en juin~1993, lorsque je repris le support du paquetage) de changer la méthode d'allocation -% pour toujours utiliser le même descripteur de fichier pour tous les fichiers des mini-tables des matières. -% Quelques améliorations majeures furent faites en 1993: l'addition du paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (\pack{minitocoff} -% à~cette époque) et une ré-écriture -% de \upack{minitoc} pour extraire les données depuis le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, avec un mécanisme de -% sélection. Puis une première solution -% pour le problème des suffixes courts fut ajoutée (encore manuelle). Un système élémentaire pour les fontes dans -% les mini-tables fut ajouté. En décembre~1993, les minilofs et minilots furent ajoutées. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~1994} -% The first improvements in 1994 were about the formating of the mini-tables: spacing was improved and the position -% of the title became ajustable (with the optional parameter of \com{minitoc} or \com{dominitoc}). But a major -% addition was done: part-level mini-tables (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) and, for articles, section-level -% mini-tables (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). -% -% With the emergence of \LaTeXe, replacing the ageing \LaTeX2.09, some work was necessary to support the -% compatibility with this new version. This was not easy, but \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} and \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} gave -% me many helpful hints. -% -% Another major addition is the language option feature, with the concept of the \emph{minitoc language definition -% file} (or \suffix{.mld} file), coming from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, -% by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. -% But at this time, these files were still named as \suffix{.sty} files. -% -% An important simplification is introduced by the notion of ``absolute numbering'', with avoids many problems when the -% chapters are not numbered the standard way (consecutively, starting from~1, with arabic digits). -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~1994} -% Les premières améliorations en 1994 concernaient la mise en forme des mini-tables: l'espacement fut ajusté et la -% position du titre devient adaptable (avec le paramètre optionnel de \com{minitoc} ou \com{dominitoc}). Mais -% une addition majeure fut faite: les mini-tables au niveau partie (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) et, pour les articles, -% les mini-tables au niveau section (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots). -% -% Avec l'émergence de \LaTeXe, remplaçant \LaTeX2.09 vieillissant, un certain travail était nécessaire pour -% supporter la compatibilité avec la nouvelle version. Ce ne fut pas facile, mais \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} et -% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} m'apportèrent bien des conseils utiles. -% -% Une autre addition majeure est le système des options de langue, avec le concept de fichier minitoc de définition de -% langue (\emph{minitoc language definition file} ou fichier \suffix{.mld}), provenant du paquetage -% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}. -% Mais à~cette époque, ces fichiers étaient encore nommés comme des fichiers \suffix{.sty}. -% -% Une simplification importante est introduite par la notion de «~numérotation absolue~», qui évite de nombreux -% problèmes lorsque les chapitres ne sont pas numérotés de manière standard (consécutivement, en commençant à~1, avec -% des chiffres arabes). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{No developments in~1995} -% Sorry, I was busy with an other project. -% \or\relax -% \section{Pas de développements en~1995} -% Désolé, j'étais très occupé par un autre projet. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~1996} -% The very annoying problem with the starred sectionning commands received some (rather primitive) solutions, but it -% is very complex, so manual interventions are often required. -% -% The names of the minitoc language definition files take now the extension \suffix{.mld}, more specific, and english -% is the default language. Some new languages are added. -% -% The work on the starred sectionning commands continues. -% -% The \pack{minitocoff} companion package is renamed \pack{mtcoff} to keep its name short. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~1996} -% Le très gênant problème avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées a reçu quelques solutions (assez primitives), -% mais il est très complexe, donc des interventions manuelles sont souvent nécessaires. -% -% Les noms des fichiers minitoc de définition de langue prennent maintenant le suffixe \suffix{.mld}, -% plus spécifique, et l'anglais (\loptd{english}) est la langue par défaut. Quelques nouvelles langues sont -% ajoutées (ceci continue autant que possible). -% -% Le travail sur les commandes de sectionnement étoilées continue. -% -% Le paquetage compagnon \pack{minitocoff} est renommé \pack{mtcoff} pour que son nom reste court. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~1997} -% The problem of short extensions for files names under some operating systems is addressed via the -% new \opt{shortext} package option and by the new autoconfiguration feature. -% -% For the starred sectionning commands, the \com{addstarredchapter} command is added (with analog commands for starred -% parts and sections). -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~1997} -% Le problème des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers sous certains systèmes d'exploitation est résolu via la -% nouvelle option de paquetage \opt{shortext} et le nouveau système d'autoconfiguration. -% -% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées, la commande \com{addstarredchapter} est ajoutée (avec des -% commandes analogues pour les parties et sections étoilées). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~1998} -% The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are added to improve the line spacing in the mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~1998} -% Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont ajoutées pour changer l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~1999} -% The \optd{dotted} and \opt{undotted} package options are added to add or suppress some lines of dots -% (leaders) in the mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~1999} -% Les options de paquetage \optd{dotted} et \opt{undotted} sont ajoutées pour activer ou inhiber certaines lignes de -% points (points de conduite) dans les mini-tables. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2000} -% A major addition is the compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}, and I~ought to thank -% loudly \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. -% -% Some corrections about the starred sectionning commands are added by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. -% -% The mini-tables features (\com{beforeparttoc} and co.) commands are added. -% -% Some adjustment commands, like \com{mtcaddchapter}, are added, again about the problem with the starred -% sectionning commands. -% -% The\imess{I0046} compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} is documented. -% -% Aliases for some languages are added. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2000} -% Un ajout majeur est la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, et je dois -% remercier chaleureusement \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et -% \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}. -% -% Quelques corrections concernant les commandes de sectionnement étoilées ont été apportées par \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}. -% -% Les commandes relatives aux dispositifs pour les (\com{beforeparttoc} et co.) ont été ajoutées. -% -% Quelques commandes d'adjustement, telles que \com{mtcaddchapter}, sont ajoutées, encore pour le problème des -% commandes de sectionnement étoilées. -% -% La\imess{I0046} compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} est documentée. -% -% Des alias pour certaines langues sont ajoutés. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2001} -% Added the \optd{checkfiles} and \opt{nocheckfiles} package options, to avoid the insertion of (ugly) empty -% mini-tables. -% -% Added the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command to change more easily the language of the mini-tables titles. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2001} -% Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} et \opt{nocheckfiles}, pour éviter d'insérer des minitables -% vides (et laides). -% -% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage} pour changer plus facilement la langue des titres des mini-tables. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2002} -% Correction of an interaction between \com{tableofcontents} (creating a hidden \com{chapter*} or -% \com{section*} command) and the numbering of the mini-table files. -% -% Added the \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount} commands. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Développements en~2002} -% Correction d'une interaction entre \com{tableofcontents} (qui crée une commande \com{chapter*} ou -% \com{section*} cachée) et la numérotation des fichiers mini-tables. -% -% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2003} -% Added the \opt{insection} package option (which was temporarily done by the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} -% package options) -% to deal with floats drifting out of their section. The \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} (by -% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) is used. -% -% The font commands are made compatible with the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. -% -% Added compatibility with the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2003} -% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{insection} (qui était temporairement réalisée par les options -% de paquetage \opt{flsection} -% et \opt{flsectionb}) pour traiter les éléments flottants dérivant hors de leur section. Le paquetage -% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) est utilisé. -% -% Les commandes de fontes sont rendues compatibles avec la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. -% -% Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2004} -% Added comments in the \suffix{.mld} files needing special fonts. Better documentation about languages. -% -% Added an explanation about making a local table of contents for an appendix, eventually masking it in the main -% table of contents. Compatibility\imess{I0042} with the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}. -% -% A major addition is the \optd{hints} package option, to detect some programming and compatibility problems. -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2004} -% Amélioration de la documentation sur les langues. -% -% Ajout d'une explication sur la manière de faire une table des matières locale pour un appendice, éventuellement en -% la masquant dans la table des matières principale. Compatibilité\imess{I0042} avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}. -% -% Un ajout majeur est l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}, pour détecter certains problèmes de programmation et de -% compatibilité. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Developments in~2005} -% All messages are now written via the standard interface commands (\com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, and -% \com{PackageError}), so the \upack{minitoc} package is less verbose on the terminal. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Added the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands (from a suggestion by \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) to -% replace many font commands by only one command with a better user interface. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Comments about the \AmS\ classes (some ones are incompatible with \upack{minitoc}). -% -% Added the \com{mtcsetformat} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. -% -% Added various hints (\opt{insection} package option, order of minitoc basic commands, short extensions). -% -% Added the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} commands, again to have a simpler user interface. -% -% Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, to hide a group of entries in the main table of contents; added -% also the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% -% Added the \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands. -% -% Added the description of the installation of the package (a new chapter and the file \xfile{INSTALL}). -% -% Improved and added hints about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. -% -% Added the \com{mtcsetfeature} command (very complex). -% -% Added a hint about the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}. -% -% The \upack{minitoc} package is now written using the \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins} system. -% Some cleanup is done in the code. -% -% Added the \com{mtcfixglossary} command, like \com{mtcfixindex}. -% -% Some improvements are made to print the documentation. -% -% Some new hints are added (\pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package~\cite{sectsty}, empty mini-tables, obsolete commands). -% -% Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. Added the \com{mtcsetdepth} command. -% -% The \optd{hints} package option is now the default. -% -% Added a method for making a bilingual documentation in one file (the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file). This method could be used -% for more languages. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Added or improved some adjustement commands (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, \com{decrementptc}, etc.). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options, for the \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} document classes. -% -% Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. -% -% Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. -% -% Added the \com{mtcloadmlo} command to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. The -% extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}; such files contains characters not easily -% manipulated in a \suffix{.dtx} file. -% -% The history of changes is now displayed in a much simpler way (using a glossary was too cumbersome). -% -% Added the \optd{listfiles} package option, to create a list of the minitoc auxiliary files, which can be removed after -% the \LaTeX\ compilation of the document. It is the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. -% -% Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred -% sectionning commands. -% -% Added hints about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages -% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% -% A ``Jargon'' chapter is added. It will grow slowly. -% -% Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir} used together. -% -% Some bugs in the \verb|\mtcset...| commands are fixed. -% -% Added a hint about the \pack{varsects}\imess{W0038} package~\cite{varsects}. -% -% Added a hint on the number of mini-tables when short extensions are used. -% -% Added a chapter with all the (explained) messages. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Développements en~2005} -% Tous les messages sont désormais écrits via les commandes de l'interface standard (\com{PackageInfo}, -% \com{PackageWarning} et \com{PackageError}), donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est moins bavard sur le terminal. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} (d'après une suggestion de \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) -% pour remplacer de nombreuses commandes de fontes par une seule commande avec une meilleure interface avec -% l'utilisateur. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Commentaires sur les classes de l'\AmS\ (certaines sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}). -% -% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetformat} et \com{mtcsettitle}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface avec -% l'utilisateur. -% -% Ajout de divers \emph{hints} (option de paquetage \opt{insection}, ordre des commandes minitoc basiques, suffixes -% courts). -% -% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface -% avec l'utilisateur. -% -% Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, pour masquer un groupe d'entrées dans la table des matières -% principale; ajout aussi des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% -% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcsettitle}. -% -% Ajout d'une description de l'installation du paquetage (un nouveau chapitre et le fichier \xfile{INSTALL}). -% -% \emph{Hints} améliorés et ajoutés sur la cohérence des commandes \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. -% -% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature} (très complexe). -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}. -% -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est maintenant écrit en utilisant le système \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins}. Un peu de -% nettoyage a été fait dans le code. -% -% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, analoque à~\com{mtcfixindex}. -% -% Quelques améliorations sont faites pour l'impression de la documentation. -% -% Ajout de quelques nouveaux \emph{hints} (paquetage\imess{I0043} \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, mini-tables vides, commandes -% obsolètes). -% -% Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-tables des figures/tableaux. Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}. -% -% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} est maintenant le choix par défaut. -% -% Ajout d'une méthode pour faire une documentation bilingue en un seul fichier (le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}). -% Cette méthode pourrait être utilisée pour plusieurs langues. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Ajout ou amélioration de quelques commandes d'ajustement (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, -% \com{decrementptc}, etc.). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}, pour les classes de document -% \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. -% -% Ajout d'une correction (\emph{patch}) pour une version récente de la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}. -% -% Utilisation de \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} -% «~secondaires~». -% -% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger un fichier -% \suffix{.mlo}. Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage minitoc); de -% tels fichiers contiennent des caractères qui ne sont pas faciles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}. -% -% L'historique des modifications est maintenant imprimé d'une manière bien plus simple (utiliser un glossaire était -% trop pénible). -% -% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}, pour créer une liste des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc, qui -% peuvent être éliminés après la compilation \LaTeX\ du document. C'est le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. -% -% Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (et dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}) -% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. -% -% Ajout de \emph{hints} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et \pack{mcaption} -% (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% -% Un chapitre «~Jargon~» est ajouté. Il grossira lentement. -% -% Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir} utilisés ensemble. -% -% Quelques erreurs dans les commandes \verb|\mtcset...| sont corrigées. -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}. -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le nombre de mini-tables lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. -% -% Ajout d'un chapitre avec tous les messages (expliqués). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Developments in~2006} -% Added the ``\texttt{*}'' keyword as first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} -% command, to get an action on all kinds of mini-tables. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% Corrections in the \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary}, and \com{mtcfixindex} commands. -% -% In the PDF documentation, the panel of bookmarks shows initialy only the bookmarks for parts and chapters, but you -% can open them to show deeper entries. -% -% Added a comment about the initialization of fonts in the FAQ (point~34). It is still an open domain and I am -% working on it. -% -% Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter -% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). -% -% Added the ``Postface'' chapter. -% -% Added the \com{mtcprepare} command. -% -% Added an~\texttt{URL} field in the bibliography (the styles are modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst}). -% -% Added the \pack{mtcmess} package to add unique identifiers to the messages. -% -% Suppressed the PostScript documentation files from the distribution (no more accepted on CTAN archives), but the -% scripts still creates them. -% -% Corrections in the \opt{insection} package option. -% -% Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). -% -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2006} -% Ajout du mot-clé «~\texttt{*}~» comme premier argument des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, -% pour avoir une action sur toutes les sortes de mini-tables. -% -% \begin{raggedright} -% Corrections dans les commandes \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary} et \com{mtcfixindex}. -% -% \end{raggedright} -% Dans la documentation en PDF, le panneau des signets (panneau de gauche) ne montre initialement que les signets -% pour les parties et les chapitres, mais vous pouvez les ouvrir pour accéder aux entrées plus profondes. -% -% Ajout d'un commentaire sur l'initialisation des fontes dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (point~34). -% C'est encore un sujet ouvert et je travaille dessus. -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, et d'une note dans le chapitre des questions -% fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}). -% -% Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». -% -% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcprepare}. -% -% Ajout d'un champ \texttt{URL} dans la bibliographie (les styles ont été modifiés à~l'aide de l'outil -% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}). -% -% Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess} pour ajouter des identificateurs uniques aux messages. -% -% Suppression des fichiers de documentation en format PostScript dans la distribution (ils ne sont plus acceptés -% sur les archives CTAN), mais les scripts les créent encore. -% -% Corrections dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. -% -% Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2007} -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2007} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Removed the preparation of documentation in PostScript format. -% -% Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format to PostScript format. -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{raggedright} -% Added hints about the\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} -% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, -% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, -% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, -% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, -% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}, -% and -% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} packages. -% -% \end{raggedright} -% -% \begin{raggedright} -% Added FAQ~44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} formatting commands. -% -% \end{raggedright} -% Added the chapter~\ref{c+exdocs}, ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. -% -% Added FAQ~45 and the \com{kernafterparttoc} and co. commands for the vertical space between a minitable and -% its bottom rule. -% -% Increased the text width and adjusted the format of the entries in the TOC in the documentation. -% -% Correction of the preamble in the generated files (spurious lines have been eliminated, at least). -% -% Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. -% Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% -% The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and -% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. -% -% All example documents are renamed with names beginning with ``\uexam{mtc-}''. -% -% The ``\optd{listfiles}'' package option is active by default. -% -% Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. -% -% Added \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. -% -% Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}. -% -% Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with -% \upack{minitoc}. -% -% Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. -% -% Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant structure for \upack{minitoc}. -% -% Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. -% -% Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of -% the package) to the distribution. -% -% Improving the index (entries for: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, option, -% language options). -% -% The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. -% -% Indexing the environments and the files. -% -% Indexing the counters and depth counters. -% -% The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy. -% -% Indexing referenced commands (begin). -% -% Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. -% -% Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new T2 and X2 cyrillic encodings in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% -% Added the \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example file. -% -% Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} (loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% -% Improved the layout of the index. -% -% Indexing the names of authors. -% -% Added the \exam{mtc-fko.tex} example file. -% -% Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. -% -% Features in the index. -% -% Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. -% -% Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. -% -% Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. -% -% Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. -% -% Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. -% -% Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. -% -% Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. -% -% Added internal hyperlinks for messages. -% -% Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. -% -% Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. -% -% Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. -% -% Added flagging of macros in example files. -% -% Added a clickable table of all messages. -% -% Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% -% Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% -% Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. -% -% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} -% package (incompatible). -% -% Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, -% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. -% -% Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. -% -% Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. -% -% Changed the color of hyperlinks. -% -% Revised the format of headers. -% -% Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. -% -% Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. -% -% Added stuff (files) for maps of areas of some languages. -% -% Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. -% -% Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). -% -% Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid -% erasing (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). -% -% Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). -% -% The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. -% -% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. -% -% Complete indexing of the messages. -% -% Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% -% Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to make increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. -% -% Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. -% -% Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. -% -% Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. -% -% Graphic files are indexed separately. -% -% Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. -% -% Updated \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% -% Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld}, -% and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. -% -% Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% -% Suppressed parasite entries from the index. -% -% Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. -% -% Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, -% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, -% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. -% -% \or\relax -% Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. -% -% Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. -% -% \begin{raggedright} -% Ajout de \emph{hints}\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} sur les paquetages -% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}, -% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}, -% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}, -% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}, -% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} -% et -% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}. -% -% \end{raggedright} -% -% \begin{raggedright} -% Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes de mise en page \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} -% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. -% -% \end{raggedright} -% Ajout du chapitre~\ref{c+exdocs}, «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}. -% -% Ajout du point~45 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{kernafterparttoc} et analogues pour l'espacement vertical -% entre une minitable et son filet inférieur. -% -% Augmentation de la largeur du texte et ajustement du format des entrées dans la table des matières pour la -% documentation. -% -% Correction du préambule des fichiers engendrés (les lignes superflues ont été enfin éliminées). -% -% Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. -% Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% -% Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et -% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. -% -% Tous les exemples de documents sont renommés avec des noms commençant par «~\uexam{mtc-}~». -% -% L'option de paquetage «~\optd{listfiles}~» est active par défaut. -% -% Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{japanese6.mld} et \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}. -% -% Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de -% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. -% -% Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. -% -% Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. -% -% Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». -% -% Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et contenant tous -% les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. -% -% Amélioration de l'index (entrées pour: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, -% options de langue). -% -% Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. -% -% Indexation des environnements et fichiers. -% -% Indexation des compteurs et compteurs de profondeur. -% -% Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). -% -% Indexation des commandes référencées (début). -% -% Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. -% -% Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% -% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. -% -% Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} (charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% -% Indexation des noms des auteurs. -% -% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. -% -% Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. -% -% Dispositifs dans l'index. -% -% Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». -% -% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% -% Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». -% -% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. -% -% Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. -% -% Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. -% -% Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. -% -% Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. -% -% Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. -% -% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. -% -% Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. -% -% Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. -% -% Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le -% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, -% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. -% -% Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. -% -% Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. -% -% Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. -% -% Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer correctement \com{mtc@toks}. -% -% Changement du format des en-têtes. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. -% -% Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) de régions où certaines langues sont parlées. -% -% Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. -% -% Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). -% -% Remplacement du suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter -% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). -% -% Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). -% -% Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». -% -% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} -% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. -% -% Indexation complète des messages. -% -% Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% -% Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. -% -% Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. -% -% Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. -% -% Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. -% -% Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. -% -% Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. -% -% Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et -% \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. -% -% Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% -% Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. -% -% Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. -% -% Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, -% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, -% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. -% -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Developments in~2008} -% Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. -% -% Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% -% Added many maps about languages and dialects, etc. -% -% Better captions for maps. -% -% Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. -% -% Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. -% -% The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% -% Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% -% Corrected an error of message number. -% -% Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. -% -% Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. -% -% Added flags for many countries. -% -% Added a figure about lusophonia (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}). -% -% Added a figure about germanophonia (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}). -% -% Added a figure about hispanophonia (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}). -% -% Added a figure about italophonia (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}). -% -% Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult (not trivial). -% -% Added figures about francophones countries (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}). -% -% Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}). -% -% Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}). -% -% Added a figure about russian-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}). -% -% Added a figure about english-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}). -% -% Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, -% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, -% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. -% -% Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% -% Added commands for polymorphic entries: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof}, and \com{mtcpolymlot}. -% -% Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}). -% -% Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. -% -% Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). -% -% Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file -% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but -% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} -% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. -% -% Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. -% -% ^^A MAJ-E -% \or\relax -% \section{Développements en~2008} -% Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. -% -% Ajout de nombreuses cartes pour les langues et les dialectes, etc. -% -% Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% -% Amélioration des légendes des cartes. -% -% Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. -% -% Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. -% -% Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% -% Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% -% Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. -% -% Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. -% -% Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. -% -% Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation (pas trivial). -% -% Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}). -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}). -% -% Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, -% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, -% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. -% -% Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% -% Ajout de commandes pour les entrées polymorphes: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof} et \com{mtcpolymlot}. -% -% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}). -% -% Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. -% -% Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). -% -% Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) -% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} -% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); -% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. -% -% Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. -% -% ^^A MAJ-F -% \fi -% \par\end{RaggedRight} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID} -% \or\relax -% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID} -% \fi -% ^^A FIX INDEX? -% \let\macro\svmacro -% \let\endmacro\svendmacro -% \let\environment\svenvironment -% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment -% \makeatletter -% \def\macro{\begingroup -% \catcode`\\12 -% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue} -% \def\environment{\begingroup -% \catcode`\\12 -% \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse} -% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist -% \let\endenvironment\endmacro -% \makeatother -% ^^A FIX INDEX? -% \parttoc -% ^^A \partlof -% ^^A \partlot -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc} -% \fi -% \minitoc -% \mtcskip -% \lneed{4} -% \minilof -% \mtcskip -% -% \lneed{6} -% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This very long chapter presents the code of the \upack{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it. -% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the -% conversion of the package to \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx-.ins} format. -% Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.} -% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history). -% -% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading -% easier. -% -% Most of the \upack{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the -% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names. -% Most of the \upack{minitoc} internal commands -% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or -% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages. -% \or\relax -% Ce très long chapitre présente le code du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer. -% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-à-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La -% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx/.ins}. -% La version~\#42 n'a pas été distribuée pour cette raison.} sont sautés, -% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'être examinés davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des -% modifications). -% -% Le code est éclaté en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois réordonnées, dans ce même -% but. -% -% La plupart des commandes externes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc} -% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart -% des commandes internes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, -% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient être -% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages. -% \fi -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident} -% \or\relax -% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident} -% \fi -% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.375mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The code\ixgrfl{start.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{start.jpg}}} -% of \xfile{minitoc.sty} starts here: -% \or\relax -% Le code\ixgrfl{start.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{start.jpg}}} -% de \xfile{minitoc.sty} commence ici: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*minitoc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} -% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} -% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date. -% A trace is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09. -% \or\relax -% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son numéro de version -% et sa date. Une trace est écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/02]% -\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}% - [2008/07/16 v60 Package minitoc (JPFD)] % message I0000 -\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] -\mtcPackageInfo[I0001]{minitoc}% - {*** minitoc package, version 60 ***\@gobble} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write} -% \or\relax -% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour écrire}\label{s+code+fd-write} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \com{tf@mtc}. -% The \upack{minitoc} package uses only one file descriptor for writing. See section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. -% \or\relax -% Un descripteur de fichier est nécessaire pour écrire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \com{tf@mtc}. -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise un seul descripteur de fichier en écriture. Voir la -% section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newwrite\tf@mtc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip} -% \or\relax -% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\addvspace} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the indentation \com{mtcindent} (both sides) of the mini-tables and the -% command \com{mtcskip} to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \com{mtcskipamount} -% (default: \com{bigskipamount}). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons l'indentation \com{mtcindent} (des deux côtés) des mini-tables et la commande -% \com{mtcskip} pour faire un saut vertical avant une mini-table, sa valeur est \com{mtcskipamount} -% (défaut: \com{bigskipamount}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\mtcindent -\newskip\mtcskipamount -\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount} -\def\mtcskip{{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that \com{mtcskip} uses a local group to avoid the influence of \com{parskip}. -% \or\relax -% Notez que \com{mtcskip} utilise un groupe local pour éviter l'influence de \com{parskip}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the default values for the vertical gaps before and after titles part level mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les valeurs par défaut pour les sauts verticaux avant et après les titres des mini-tables au -% niveau partie. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} -\def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. -% The names of these macros is rather explicit. The values are empirical and can be changed via \com{renewcommand}. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets horizontaux inférieurs. -% Les noms de ces macros sont assez explicites. Les valeurs sont empiriques et peuvent être changées -% via \com{renewcommand}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{part}{}{% - \def\kernafterparttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterpartlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterpartlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - }% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {% - \def\kernaftersecttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernaftersectlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernaftersectlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - }% - }% - {% - \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterminilof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% - \def\kernafterminilot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\pfloffset} -% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\sfloffset} -% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We defines horizontal offets by which the margins in the mini-tables are corrected (added to the right margin and -% substracted from the left margin). These are \emph{commands}, \emph{not} lengths\,\footnote{We avoid to -% allocate a precious length register.}, to be redefined by \com{renewcommand}. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les décalages horizontaux servant à~corriger les marges dans les mini-tables (ajout à~la marge -% gauche et retrait à~la marge droite). Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \emph{pas} des longueurs\,\footnote{Nous -% évitons d'allouer un précieux registre de longueur.}, à~redéfinir via \com{renewcommand}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{part}{}{% - \def\ptcoffset{0pt}% - \def\plfoffset{0pt}% - \def\pltoffset{0pt}% - }% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {% - \def\stcoffset{0pt}% - \def\slfoffset{0pt}% - \def\sltoffset{0pt}% - }% - }% - {% - \def\mtcoffset{0pt}% - \def\mlfoffset{0pt}% - \def\mltoffset{0pt}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We defines flags which will be true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui seront vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux -% à~l'extérieur. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% -\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% -\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% -\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% -\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% -\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% -\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% -\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% -\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags} -% \or\relax -% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters -% rather than flags, -% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\ucom{iffoo}, \ucom{foofalse} and \ucom{footrue}), -% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with -% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today. -% And a code programmed with flags (\texttt{\ucom{iffoo} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) is easier to structure -% and debug than a code programmed with counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \com{newif}) to detect -% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the -% \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \upack{minitoc} commands). -% \or\relax -% Nous avons besoin de déclarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'années, certains auteurs -% préféraient utiliser des compteurs plutôt que des indicateurs, car un indicateur coûte 3~séquences de contrôle -% (\ucom{iftoto}, \ucom{totofalse} et \ucom{tototrue}), qui consomment de la mémoire. Mais le -% nombre de registres compteurs est limité à~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec -% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, mais encore en nombre limité), tandis que le coût de la mémoire a beaucoup baissé -% aujourd'hui. Et un code programmé avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\ucom{iftoto} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) est -% plus facile à~structurer et à~mettre au point qu'un code programmé à~l'aide de compteurs, à~mon humble avis.} -% (via \com{newif}) pour détecter le chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilité de certaines -% commandes (ceci sera utilisé par l'option \optd{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou -% pour autoriser la définition de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Flags for the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Indicateurs pour l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But first, we define some flags for the \optd{hints} option: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \optd{hints} option is required (default). -% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been -% altered since the loading of the document class. -% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \optd{hints} option detects something curious -% and writes messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. It will be used at the end of the document to signal that -% you should look for hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% Mais tout d'abord, nous définissons quelques indicateurs pour l'option \optd{hints}: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \optd{hints} est demandée (défaut). -% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} est forcé à~vrai si nous détectons que certaines commandes de -% sectionnement ont été altérées depuis le chargement de la classe de document. -% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} est forcé à~vrai si l'option \optd{hints} détecte quelque -% chose de curieux et écrit des messages dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% Il sera utilisé en fin de document -% pour signaler que vous devriez chercher des \emph{hints} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true -\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false -\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'éléments flottants, au niveau \texorpdfstring{\mbox{section}}{section}} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We will check if the commands \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} are used: -% \or\relax -% Nous testerons si les commandes \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} ont été utilisées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} %% ^^A 25 -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Présence de certains paquetages et classes} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We will check if the \pack{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \class{memoir} -% is loaded (and if it is a recent enough version), then if the \pack{sectsty} package is loaded -% (before or after \upack{minitoc}). -% \or\relax -% Nous testerons si le paquetage \pack{placeins} est chargé, puis si la classe -% \class{memoir} est chargée (et si c'est une version suffisamment récente), puis si le -% paquetage \pack{sectsty} est chargé (avant ou après \upack{minitoc}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false -\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We do the same for some caption-related packages: -% \else\relax -% Nous faisons de même pour quelques paquetages relatifs aux captions: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the \pack{varsects} package and other packages altering the sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Et pour le paquetage \pack{varsects} et -% d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And yet other packages altering the sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Et encore d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@false -\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Flags for packages dealing with floats} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Indicateurs pour des paquetages traitant des flottants} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must warn about a limitation with the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, -% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons signaler une limitation avec les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, -% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@floatLoaded@ \@mtc@floatLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@ \@mtc@floatrowLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Insertion of empty mini-tables} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Insertion de mini-tables vides} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Nous testerons si vous avez tenté d'insérer des mini-tables vides: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false -\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Présence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with -% these commands). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la présence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait, -% celle des compteurs associés à~ces commandes). -% -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{part} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{part}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false - \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{chapter} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false - \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{section} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{section}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false - \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{part} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{part}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true - \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{chapter} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true - \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \cnt{section} counter: -% \or\relax -% Le compteur \cnt{section}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true - \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Flags to check if some commands are used} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Indicateurs pour tester si certaines commandes ont été utilisées} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation -% command (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \optd{hints} package option -% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-même et un -% pour la commande de préparation (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilisés par l'option de -% paquetage \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the part level: -% \or\relax -% Pour le niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false -\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false -\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false -\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false -\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false -\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the chapter level: -% \or\relax -% Pour le niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false -\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false -\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false -\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false -\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false -\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the section level: -% \or\relax -% Pour le niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false -\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false -\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false -\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false -\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false -\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands: -% \or\relax -% Nous détectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsolètes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false -\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false -\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the document has exactly 2~parts}\label{ss+2parts} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le document a exactement 2~parties}\label{ss+2parts} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% In french, the ordinal adjective is ``deuxième'' if the second object is not the last object, but ``second'' -% (masculine) or ``seconde'' (feminine) when it is also the last one (see~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). So we define a specific flag: -% \or\relax -% En français, l'adjectif ordinal est \og deuxième \fg si le deuxième objet n'est pas le dernier objet, mais -% \og second \fg (masculin) ou \og seconde \fg (féminin) si c'est le dernier (voir~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). -% Donc nous définissons un indicateur -% spécifique: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% At the beginning of the document, we test this flag and make it global: -% \or\relax -% Au début du document, nous testons cet indicateur et le rendons global: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifmtcsecondpart - \global\mtcsecondparttrue - \else - \global\mtcsecondpartfalse - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% At the end of the document, we set and memorize the value of the flag in the \suffix{.aux} file: -% \or\relax -% À~la fin du document, nous établissons et mémorisons la valeur de l'indicateur dans le fichier \suffix{.aux}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% -\ifnum\value{part}=2\relax - \mtcsecondparttrue -\else - \mtcsecondpartfalse -\fi -\if@filesw - \ifmtcsecondpart - \immediate\write\@mainaux - {\string\global\string\mtcsecondparttrue}% - \else - \immediate\write\@mainaux - {\string\global\string\mtcsecondpartfalse}% - \fi -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So we need two \LaTeX\ runs to get a correct result. The \xfile{french2.mld} language definition file -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) uses this trick to form the titles of part level mini-tables. -% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \or\relax -% Il nous faut donc deux exécutions de \LaTeX\ pour obtenir un résultat correct. Le fichier de définition de -% langue \xfile{french2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) utilise cette astuce pour former les titres -% des mini-tables au niveau partie. -% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} -% \or\relax -% \section{Préparation pour l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal ``hook'' command -% (redefinable command) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}, -% used by this option (this has been requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \pack{notoccite} -% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. -% \or\relax -% Nous déclarons un indicateur pour la présence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne «~\emph{hook}~» -% (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} utilisée par cette option -% (ceci a été demandé par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage -% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false -\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}% - {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{tight} and \uopt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} -% \or\relax -% \section{Préparation pour les options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\optd{loose} and -% \optd{k-loose} options): -% \or\relax -% Nous déclarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par défaut (options \optd{loose} -% et \optd{k-loose}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse -\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Preparation to work with \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} -% \or\relax -% \section{Préparation pour travailler avec \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\imess{I0005} code prepares the interface with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}. -% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block if this package is loaded. -% This action defines some commands for the \pack{hyperref} package. -% \or\relax -% Ce\imess{I0005} code prépare l'interface avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}. -% Un indicateur est défini, puis cette préparation est effectuée dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} si ce -% paquetage est chargé. Cette action définit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \pack{hyperref}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcPackageInfo[I0005]{minitoc}{compatible with hyperref\@gobble} -\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% - \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true - \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}% - \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}% - \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}% - \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part - \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter - \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section - \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection - \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection - \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph - \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph - }{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{8} -% \section{Checking the presence of some packages} -% \or\relax -% \section{Tester la présence de certains paquetages} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sectsty} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{varsects} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{varsects} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{varsects}%{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@true}{} - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{varsects}{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{fncychap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{fncychap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{hangcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{hangcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{quotchap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{quotchap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{romannum} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{romannum} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sfheaders} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sfheaders} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{alnumsec} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{alnumsec} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{captcont} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{captcont} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h2}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption2} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption2} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{ccaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{ccaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{mcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{mcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{mcaption} package~\cite{mcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we -% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been -% loaded. See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc}, -% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois -% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@true}{}% - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{float} package is loaded}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{float} est chargé}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} is loaded -% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. -% See section~\vref{s+float.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float} est chargé dans le préambule, -% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{float}{\@mtc@floatLoaded@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{floatrow} package is loaded}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{floatrow} est chargé}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow} is loaded -% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. -% See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow} est chargé dans le préambule, -% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{floatrow}{\@mtc@floatrowLoaded@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{trivfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{trivfloat} est chargé}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} is loaded -% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. -% See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, -% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{trivfloat}{\@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Check if the \upack{rotfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{rotfloat} est chargé}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must test if the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} is loaded -% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block. -% See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} est chargé dans le préambule, -% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{rotfloat}{\@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@true}{}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Is the \uclass{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} -% \or\relax -% \section{La classe \uclass{memoir} est-elle chargée?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} -% test if the \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} class is loaded. -% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be \emph{incompatible} if too recent. -% In the later case, a patch -% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}). This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version -% of \xfile{memoir.cls}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} testons si la -% classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée. -% Cette classe nécessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilité ou peut être \emph{incompatible} si -% elle est trop récente. -% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est insérée (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}). Cette correction n'est -% plus nécessaire après la version de \xfile{memoir.cls} datée 2005/09/25. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false -\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0030]{minitoc}% - {the memoir class is loaded: - \MessageBreak - compatibility attempted\@gobble}}% - {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false} -\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ - \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}% - {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\mtcPackageInfo[I0020]{minitoc}% - {old version of the memoir class\@gobble}} - {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\mtcPackageInfo[I0027]{minitoc}% - {recent version of the memoir class\@gobble} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0032]{minitoc}% - {This version of the memoir class uses - \MessageBreak - a version of \string\chapter\space which is - \MessageBreak - incompatible with the minitoc package. - \MessageBreak - We try to patch\@gobble}% - \@mtcpatchmemoir@true} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\imess{E0028} now the patch: -% \or\relax -% Et\imess{E0028} voici cette correction: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ -\IfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{% - \@ifclasslater{memoir}{2005/09/25}{}{\RequirePackage{mtcpatchmem}}}{% - \mtcPackageError[E0028]{minitoc}% - {Unable to patch the memoir class}% - {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness} -% \or\relax -% \section{Tester la vacuité d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package -% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} and -% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \uxfile{while.tip}, -% by \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode -% change of ``Q'', hence a \com{gdef} is needed for \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. -% \or\relax -% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tirées du paquetage -% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} et -% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \uxfile{while.tip}, -% de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). Le groupe est nécessaire pour garder local le -% changement de «~\emph{catcode}~» de «~Q~», il faut donc utiliser un \com{gdef} pour définir \com{mtc@ifmtarg}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\catcode`\Q=3 -\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{% -\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} -\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} -\endgroup -\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi -\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{% - \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}% - \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}% - \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}% - \mtc@@While -} -\def\mtc@@While{% - \mtc@WhilePreCondition - \mtc@WhileCondition - \def\mtc@WhileNext{% - \mtc@WhileBody - \mtc@@While - }% - \else - \def\mtc@WhileNext{}% - \fi - \mtc@WhileNext -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{file}\verb|}| returns \com{@mtc@FEtrue} if the file -% is empty, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white -% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty. -% \or\relax -% Quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{fichier}\verb|}| -% rend \com{@mtc@FEtrue} si le fichier est vide, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} si le fichier n'est pas vide. -% Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un -% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \noindent -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \com{mtc@While} loop may be -% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for -% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop. -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is used as scratch file. Its contents is erased after use. -% \or\relax -% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \com{mtc@While} peut prendre du temps, mais pas une -% éternité (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la première ligne non vide arrête la boucle. -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est utilisé comme fichier de travail. Son contenu est effacé après usage. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue -\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue -\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue -\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to \mtc@Rline\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi - \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax - \def\mtc@Rline{} - \else - \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi - \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}{\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse} - \fi} -\def\mtc@CkFile#1{% - \@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue - \if@mtc@checkfiles - \IfFileExists{#1}{% - \immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax - \mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}{\mtc@Body}\mtc@EndWhile}% - {\@mtc@FEtrue}% - \else - \@mtc@FEfalse% - \fi} -\closein\@inputcheck\relax -\def\mtc@CkStr#1{% - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc - \immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}% - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}% - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Internal macros to decrement \upack{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count} -% \or\relax -% \section{Macros internes pour décrémenter les compteurs de \upack{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \upack{minitoc} counter (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} or \cnt{stc}) by one. -% These macros are: -% \or\relax -% Il est parfois nécessaire de décrémenter un compteur de \upack{minitoc} (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} ou \cnt{stc}) -% de un. Ces macros sont: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} -\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} -\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} -% \begin{macro}{\@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the \com{part} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), -% we cannot patch it and a warning is -% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \com{part} command are likely non -% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches, -% \com{@part} (for the unstarred version) or -% \com{@spart} (for the starred version, \com{part*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| to increment the parttoc -% counter \cnt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. -% -% \lneed{5} -% The code\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \com{part} is not defined. -% \or\relax -% Si la commande \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas la -% modifier et un avertissement est émis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais -% pas de commande \com{part} est probablement non standard, d'où l'avertissement affiché sur le terminal.}. -% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@part} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@spart} (pour la -% version étoilée, \com{part*}): nous ajoutons \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de parttocs -% \cnt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}. -% -% \lneed{5} -% Le\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi sauté si \com{part} n'est pas -% définie. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{part}{% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0018]{minitoc}% - {part level macros NOT available} -}{%% else undefined part (\part defined) - \mtcPackageInfo[I0023]{minitoc}% - {part level macros available\@gobble} - \let\mtc@svspart\@spart - \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart} - \let\mtc@svpart\@part - \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} -% \or\relax -% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} -% \begin{macro}{\l@part} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \com{mtcaddpart} macro, -% which has an optional -% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC. -% -% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty -% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) -% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the -% \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the -% \cnt{ptc} counter, via \com{adjustptc} -% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). -% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of -% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xpart} will be invoked in place of -% \com{l@part} to print the entry in -% the TOC, but \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed -% (except if you cheat). -% \or\relax -% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une partie étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro -% \com{mtcaddpart}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la table -% des matières. -% -% Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou omis, nous ajoutons -% une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une -% ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous -% incrémentons le compteur \cnt{ptc}, via \com{adjustptc} (définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}). -% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xpart} sera invoquée -% au lieu de \com{l@part} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xpart} utilise une très -% grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{% - \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}% - {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}% - \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}% - \adjustptc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands. -% \or\relax -% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} -% \or\relax -% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} -% section level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined, i.e.,~in -% document classes like \class{article}, but not in document classes -% like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we -% test if \com{chapter} is defined and if \com{section} is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are -% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \upack{minitoc} package with the class of your document. -% \or\relax -% Les\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}} -% macros au niveau section sont définies si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais \com{section} est définie, -% c'est-à-dire dans les classes de document telles que \class{article}, mais pas dans les classes de -% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} -% est définie et si \com{section} est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes -% n'est définie, vous avez un sérieux problème pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de votre -% document. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0004]{minitoc}% - {chapter level macros NOT available\@gobble}% - \@ifundefined{section}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0029]{minitoc}% - {section level macros NOT available\@gobble}% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0017]{minitoc}% - {no section or chapter level macros available - \MessageBreak - PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS}}% - {\mtcPackageInfo[I0028]{minitoc}% - {section level macros available\@gobble}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} -% \or\relax -% \section{Corrections pour la numérotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter -% (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these -% commands. -% \or\relax -% Comme la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont considérées comme des sections -% (étoilées), il nous faut décrémenter le compteur de secttocs (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} -% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont exécutées. Donc nous modifions ces commandes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents - \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures - \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables - \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect} - \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect} - \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modification de la commande \ucom{section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss} -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the \com{section} command is not defined (by the document class, usually), -% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed. -% Else, we patch its two branches, \com{@sect} (for the unstarred version) -% or \com{@ssect} (for the starred version, \com{section*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| to increment -% the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}, -% only in the unstarred case\footnote{Version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter.}. -% \or\relax -% Si la commande \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas -% la modifier et un avertissement est affiché. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@sect} (pour la version -% non étoilée) ou \com{@ssect} (pour la version étoilée, \com{section*}): nous ajoutons -% \com{stepcounter}\verb}|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}, seulement dans le cas non -% étoilé\,\footnote{La version~\#25 a éliminé une décrémentation superflue de ce compteur.}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\mtc@svsection\section - \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection} - \let\mtc@svss\@ssect -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} -% \or\relax -% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une section étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} -% \begin{macro}{\l@section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \com{mtcaddsection} macro, which has an optional -% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty -% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) -% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| -% line in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. -% Then we increment the -% \cnt{stc} counter, via \com{adjuststc} (this command is defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). -% Using \texttt{xsect} as first argument of -% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xsect} will be invoked -% in place of \com{l@section} to print the entry in -% the TOC, but \com{l@xsect} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed -% (except if you cheat). -% \or\relax -% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une section étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro -% \com{mtcaddsection}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit apparaître dans la -% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou -% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|xsect}{}...| dans le fichier -% \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| -% dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| dans les -% fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{stc}, -% via \com{adjuststc} (cette commande est définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). -% Le fait d'utiliser -% \texttt{xsect} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xsect} sera invoquée au -% lieu de \com{l@section} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xsect} utilise une -% très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc elle ne sera jamais réellement imprimée (sauf si vous -% trichez). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{% - \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsect}{}}% - {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}% - \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}% - \adjuststc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros. -% \or\relax -% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - }}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} -% \or\relax -% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{I0003} chapter level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is defined, i.e.,~in -% document classes like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we -% test if \com{chapter} is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the -% ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. -% \or\relax -% Les\imess{I0003} macros au niveau chapitre sont définies si \com{chapter} est définie, c'est-à-dire, dans les classes de -% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter} -% est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Ce test a déjà été fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche -% «~sinon~» de \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0003]{minitoc}{chapter level macros available\@gobble} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{chapter} command is defined (by the document class, usually). -% We patch its two branches, \com{@chapter} (for the unstarred version) or \com{@schapter} (for the -% starred version, \com{chapter*}): we add call to \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| to increment the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}. -% Only the unstarred branch (\com{@chapter}) is patched here. -% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{chapter} est définie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux -% branches, \com{@chapter} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@schapter} (pour la version étoilée, -% \com{chapter*}): nous ajoutons un appel à~\com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}. -% Seule la branche non étoilée est modifiée ici. L'autre branche sera modifiée plus loin (voir la -% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter \def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} -% \or\relax -% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour un chapitre étoilé}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \com{mtcaddchapter} macro, which has an optional -% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty -% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) -% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line -% in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the -% \cnt{mtc} counter, via \com{adjustmtc} -% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). -% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of -% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xchapter} will be invoked in place of -% \com{l@chapter} to print the entry in -% the TOC, but \com{l@xchapter} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed -% (except if you cheat). -% \or\relax -% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour un chapitre étoilé, nous avons besoin de la macro -% \com{mtcaddchapter}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la -% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou -% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. -% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. -% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et -% \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, via \com{adjustmtc} (définie dans la -% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument -% de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xchapter} sera invoquée au lieu de \com{l@chapter} pour imprimer -% l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xchapter} utilise une très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette -% entrée, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{% - \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}% - {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}% - \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}% - \adjustmtc}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands, -% i.e.,~terminates the \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| at the beginning of -% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. -% \or\relax -% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-à-dire termine la construction -% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| du début de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls} -% \or\relax -% \section{Déclarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\newread} -% \begin{macro}{\newtoks} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{newread} command must be redeclared as being \com{outer} (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me). -% We need a token register (\com{mtc@toks}), a temporary string (\com{mtc@string}), struts (two kinds, each -% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all -% dimensions equal to zero (\com{mtc@zrule}) and a command discouraging page breaks (\com{mtc@BBR}, for ``bad -% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units, -% to follow the current font. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{newread} doit étre redéclarée comme étant \com{outer} (comme me l'a conseillé -% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}). -% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\com{mtc@toks}), d'une chaîne temporaire (\com{mtc@string}), -% d'étais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une boîte contenant un filet vertical invisible) -% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont à~zéro (\com{mtc@zrule}) et d'une commande pour décourager les -% coupures de page (\com{mtc@BBR}, pour «~\emph{bad break}~»). Pour les étais, qui sont des boîtes contenant un -% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unités «~\texttt{ex}~», pour suivre la fonte courante. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n} -\newtoks\mtc@toks -\def\mtc@string{\relax} -\newbox\mtc@strutbox -\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}} -\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox - \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi} -\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox -\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}} -\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox - \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi} -\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut} -\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}} -\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf} -% \or\relax -% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code is a trick to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters) -% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\com{tf@mtc}) to write files\footnote{\samepage It is -% the \emph{only} new -% file descriptor created by the \upack{minitoc} package. All files written by \upack{minitoc} use this -% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g., for the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% In fact, \upack{minitoc} writes also in the -% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands -% like \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} and \com{listoftables}. We can conclude that -% \upack{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter -% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing), -% because they called the standard internal \com{@starttoc} macro, which invokes \com{newwrite}, -% for each mini-table. As \upack{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} -% file, and in the standard contents files, -% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem (which was present in the -% original version of the package). -% The \upack{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command -% (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, or \com{section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table -% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, -% \com{dosectlot}), once at a time. -% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}. -% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot -% be used, else the messages are only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% The sequencing of these operations is vital. The table~\vref{t+code+8.3} shows this sequence. -% A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3. -% \end{macro} -% \begin{table}[t] -% \centering -% \changeskips -% \caption{Trick to detect the limitation to short extensions}\label{t+code+8.3} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} -% \toprule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (time runs from left to right):}}&1&2&3\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\ -% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \end{table} -% \or\relax -% Ce code est une astuce pour déterminer si le système d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes -% longs (${}>3$~caractères) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous définissons un descripteur de fichier (\com{tf@mtc}) -% pour écrire des fichiers\,\footnote{C'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier créé par -% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tous les -% fichiers écrits par \upack{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. En fait, \upack{minitoc} écrit aussi dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} -% et \suffix{.lot}, -% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers déjà utilisés par des commandes standard telles que \com{tableofcontents}, -% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \upack{minitoc} lui-même -% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'écriture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des -% matières par chapitre ont échoué en conduisant rapidement à~un épuisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\ -% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard -% \com{@starttoc}, qui invoque \com{newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \upack{minitoc} écrit -% dans seulement un seul fichier à~la fois (et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, -% et dans les fichiers standard de -% contenus, bien sûr), nous pouvons réutiliser le même descripteur de fichier et éviter ce sérieux problème (qui -% était présent dans la version originale du paquetage). -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} écrit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de -% sectionnement majeure (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, ou \com{section}), si nécessaire. Il écrit -% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de préparation des mini-tables -% (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, \com{dosectlot}), un à~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau -% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas être utilisés, sinon les -% messages sont écrits seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Le séquencement de ces opérations est vital. -% Le tableau~\vref{t+code+8.3} montre ce séquencement. Un astérisque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3. -% \end{macro} -% \begin{table}[t] -% \changeskips -% \centering -% \caption{Astuce pour détecter la limitation à~des suffixes courts}\label{t+code+8.3} -% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc} -% \toprule -% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (le temps s'écoule de gauche à~droite):}}&1&2&3\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes longs}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\ -% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\ -% \midrule -% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes courts}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}} -% \end{table} -% \fi -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\newif} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\immediate} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \begin{macro}{\write} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\input} -% \begin{macro}{\jobname} -% \begin{enumerate}[(1)] -% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, a message and a new flag:\imess{I0002} -% \or\relax -% D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:\imess{I0002} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtcPackageInfo[I0002]{minitoc}% - {Autoconfiguration of extensions\@gobble} -\newif\if@mtc@longext@\@mtc@longext@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@true}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the -% real name of the file will be truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \or\relax -% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@true}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système -% d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 -\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@true} -\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc -% \end{macrocode} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@false}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \or\relax -% Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@false}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc -\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@false} -\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc -% \end{macrocode} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We read \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be -% truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \or\relax -% Nous lisons \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du -% fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\input{\jobname.mtc0} -% \end{macrocode} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Hence,\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} the flag is true if we read really -% from \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, but false if we read from -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. The text and the severity of the messages are different. -% \or\relax -% En\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} conséquence, -% l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, mais faux -% si nous lisons depuis \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. Le texte et la sévérité des messages sont différents. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@longext@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0012]{minitoc}% - {Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used\@gobble} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0031]{minitoc}% - {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like - \MessageBreak - \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}% -\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0019]{minitoc}% - {Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used - \MessageBreak - ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like - \MessageBreak - \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \item -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We erase the contents of the two files (because \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is also used later as a~scratch file, -% see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). -% \or\relax -% Nous effaçons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi utilisé comme fichier de -% travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc -\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc -\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0 -\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} -% \or\relax -% \section{Détection des versions obsolètes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{macro}{\reset@font} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and -% with which the \upack{minitoc}% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some -% internal \LaTeX\ commands, \com{@inputcheck} and \com{reset@font}. -% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \emph{urgently} update your -% \LaTeX\ installation, which is just rusting since\ldots\ a~lot of years! -% \or\relax -% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code détecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues -% et avec lesquelles le paquetage \upack{minitoc} aura beaucoup de mal à~fonctionner. -% L'astuce est de détecter l'absence de certaines commandes -% internes de \LaTeX, \com{@inputcheck} et \com{reset@font}. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous êtes -% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX, -% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'années! -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0021]{minitoc}% - {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete. - \MessageBreak - Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{} -\@ifundefined{reset@font}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0022]{minitoc}% - {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete. - \MessageBreak - Trying to continue... crossing fingers}% - \let\reset@font\relax}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Adding a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} -% \or\relax -% \section{Ajouter une entrée dans la TdM sans points de conduite ni numéro de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\undottedmtcfalse} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The (internal) macro \com{@undottedtocline} is a modified version of the standard command \com{@dottedtocline}. -% It will be used in customization macros. -% \or\relax -% La macro (interne) \com{@undottedtocline} est une version modifiée de la commande standard \com{@dottedtocline}. -% Elle sera utilisée dans les macros de personnalisation. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse -\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% - \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else - \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@ - {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}% - \hskip -\leftskip - #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak - \null\par}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Default values for the page-number customizations}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} -% \or\relax -% \section{Valeurs par défaut pour les personnalisations des numéros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or -% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \class{memoir} -% class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded, -% it does the job. So, we test first \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} -% to use the commands of \class{memoir} when they are available. -% \or\relax -% Cette section définit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la présence ou l'absence des numéros de -% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée, elle -% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de -% \class{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries in minitocs: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées dans les minitocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumberson{section} - \cftpagenumberson{subsection} - \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} - \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} -\def\nomtcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumbersoff{section} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries in secttocs: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées dans les secttocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\stcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumberson{subsection} - \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} - \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} -\def\nostcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries in parttocs: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées dans les parttocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ptcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumberson{chapter} - \cftpagenumberson{section} - \cftpagenumberson{subsection} - \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumberson{paragraph} - \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}} -\def\noptcpagenumbers{% - \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter} - \cftpagenumbersoff{section} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection} - \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph} - \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} - \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} - \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} - \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} - \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}} - \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} - \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} - \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} - \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} - \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}} - \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Else, \upack{minitoc} will use its own commands. -% \or\relax -% Sinon, \upack{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs: -% \or\relax -% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null} - \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax} - \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null} - \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax} - \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null} - \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs: -% \or\relax -% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null} - \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax} - \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null} - \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax} - \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null} - \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots: -% \or\relax -% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null} - \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax} - \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null} - \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax} - \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null} - \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present: -% \or\relax -% Et enfin, les valeurs par défaut sont établies; les numéros de pages sont présents: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\ptcpagenumbers -\plfpagenumbers -\pltpagenumbers -\mtcpagenumbers -\mlfpagenumbers -\mltpagenumbers -\stcpagenumbers -\slfpagenumbers -\sltpagenumbers -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A \need{.85\textheight} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} -% \or\relax -% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each kind of mini-table has five ``features'': a ``\feat{before}'' feature, an ``\feat{after}'' feature, -% an ``\feat{open}'' feature, an ``\feat{close}'' feature, -% and a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature. -% -% A ``\feat{before}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{beforeparttoc} which contains code to be executed -% before any mini-table of a given type: \com{beforeparttoc} is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features -% contain only trivial commands like \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, or \com{empty}. -% -% An ``\feat{after}'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type. -% -% An ``\feat{open}'' feature contains code to be executed just before the insertion of the file containing the -% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either prepare some basic formatting (like multi-column). -% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. -% -% An ``\feat{close}'' feature contains code to be executed just after the insertion of the file containing the -% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either finish some basic formatting (like multi-column). -% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules. -% -% A ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{thispageparttocstyle} which contains code to define the page -% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \com{thispageparttocstyle} can be defined as -% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Usually, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables, -% which use page breaks in their \feat{before} and \feat{after} features. For chapter- and section-level -% mini-tables, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is usually defined as \com{empty}. -% -% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command, as -% \class{article}-like documents are different from the \class{book}- or \class{report}-like documents for the -% layout of part-level mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% À~chaque type de mini-table sont associés cinq «~dispositifs~» (\emph{features}): un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» -% (avant), un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (après), -% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (ouverture), un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (fermeture), -% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (style de cette page). -% -% Un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» est défini par une macro telle que \com{beforeparttoc} qui contient du code à~exécuter -% avant toute mini-table d'un type donné: \com{beforeparttoc} est exécutée avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement, -% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| ou \com{empty}. -% -% Un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» est analogue mais son code est exécuté après chaque mini-table d'un type donné. -% -% Un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste avant l'insertion du fichier contenant la -% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit préparent une mise en forme basique -% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. -% -% Un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste après l'insertion du fichier contenant la -% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit achèvent une mise en forme basique -% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs. -% -% Un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est défini par une macro comme \com{thispageparttocstyle} qui contient du -% code pour définir le style de page impliqué par les mini-tables d'un type donné: la commande \com{thispageparttocstyle} -% peut être définie comme étant \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» n'est -% défini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» -% et «~\feat{after}~». Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est -% habituellement défini comme étant \com{empty}. -% -% Nous établissons les valeurs par défaut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la présence de la commande -% \com{chapter}, car les documents du genre \class{article} sont différents des documents du genre \class{book} -% ou \class{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (par défaut): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \let\beforeparttoc\empty - \let\beforepartlof\empty - \let\beforepartlot\empty}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{before}'' feature: -% \or\relax -% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{before}~» par défaut -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage - \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage - \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\beforeminitoc\empty -\let\beforeminilof\empty -\let\beforeminilot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\beforesecttoc\empty -\let\beforesectlof\empty -\let\beforesectlot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (par défaut): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \let\afterparttoc\empty - \let\afterpartlof\empty - \let\afterpartlot\empty}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{after}'' feature: -% \or\relax -% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{after}~» par défaut -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage - \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage - \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\afterminitoc\empty -\let\afterminilof\empty -\let\afterminilot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default): -% \or\relax -% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\aftersecttoc\empty -\let\aftersectlof\empty -\let\aftersectlot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, the ``\feat{open}'' features do nothing: -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{open}'' ne font rien: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\openparttoc\empty -\let\openpartlof\empty -\let\openpartlot\empty -\let\openminitoc\empty -\let\openminilof\empty -\let\openminilot\empty -\let\opensecttoc\empty -\let\opensectlof\empty -\let\opensectlot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, ``\feat{close}'' features do nothing: -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{close}'' ne font rien: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\closeparttoc\empty -\let\closepartlof\empty -\let\closepartlot\empty -\let\closeminitoc\empty -\let\closeminilof\empty -\let\closeminilot\empty -\let\closesecttoc\empty -\let\closesectlof\empty -\let\closesectlot\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, all the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style. -% It affects only the first page of the mini-table. If \com{chapter} is not defined, there is no default -% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features at the part level. -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, tous les dispositifs «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}. -% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, il n'y a pas de dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» au niveau partie. -% Ceci affecte seulement la première page de la mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \def\thispageparttocstyle{\empty} - \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\empty} - \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\empty}}% -{\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} - \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}} - \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}} -\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty} -\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty} -\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty} -\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty} -\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty} -\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro which is -% a~much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''. -% \or\relax -% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous définirons la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} qui est une -% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les «~dispositifs~» des mini-tables. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake} -% \or\relax -% \section{Tables des matières invisibles}\label{s+code+fake} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} -% \begin{macro}{\newwrite} -% \begin{macro}{\immediate} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs, -% you need to create the \suffix{.toc} file, without inserting it -% into your document. This \com{faketableofcontents} command is a stripped off version -% of the standard command \com{tableofcontents}. -% We define in the same way the analog commands \com{fakelistoffigures} and \com{fakelistoftables}, -% using in fact just a stripped version \com{fake@starttoc} of \com{@starttoc}. But it is nice to reset to zero the -% \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc}, and \cnt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous -% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}. -% \or\relax -% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des matières, mais avoir quand même des minitocs, il vous faut créer le -% fichier \suffix{.toc}, sans l'insérer dans votre document. Cette commande -% \com{faketableofcontents} est une version restreinte de la commande \com{tableofcontents} standard. Nous -% définissons de la même manière les deux autres commandes analogues \com{fakelistoffigures} et \com{fakelistoftables}, -% en utilisant en fait simplement une version restreinte \com{fake@starttoc} de \com{@starttoc}. -% Mais il est bon de remettre à~zéro -% maintenant les compteurs \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} et \cnt{stc}, s'ils sont définis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous -% de l'infâme erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}. -% \fi -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}% - \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% - \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}% - \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}% - } -\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}} -\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}} -\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup \makeatletter - \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname - \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname - \jobname.#1\relax \fi - \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands. -% \or\relax -% Ce code utilise les mêmes descripteurs de fichier (en écriture) que les commandes d'origine. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots} -% \or\relax -% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, -% we create the necessary new counters: -% \dcnt{minilofdepth} and \dcnt{minilofdepth}. -% These counters are initialized to~2. -% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons -% les nouveaux compteurs nécessaires: -% \dcnt{minilofdepth} et \dcnt{minilofdepth}. -% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. -% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}% - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% From here, we define the chapter-level commands. -% \or\relax -% À~partir d'ici, nous définissons les commandes au niveau chapitre. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} -% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots): -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous mémorisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilisé, mais\ldots): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth -\global\let\@mkboth\markboth -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} -% \or\relax -% \section{Parties, chapitres et section étoilés}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} and \com{section*}. -% The section-level is different depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command. -% Eventually, a counter is incremented. -% A~contents line is added in the \suffix{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later, -% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} -% et \com{section*}. Le niveau section est différent selon que \com{chapter} est définie ou non. Éventuellement, -% un compteur est incrémenté. Une ligne de contenu est ajoutée dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, avec la bonne -% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\addst@rred#1#2{% - \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}% - \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax - \stepcounter{ptc}% - \fi - }% - \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax - \stepcounter{mtc}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix\relax - \stepcounter{mtc}% - \fi - }% - \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax -%% \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}% - \stepcounter{stc}% - \fi - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is not defined, we just define \com{addstarredsection}: -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, nous définissons simplement \com{addstarredsection}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% -\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Sinon, nous commençons à~définir le matériel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche «~sinon~» de -% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0003} define now: the internal format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{The@mtc}), the obsolete command -% \com{firstchapteris} (it just emits a harmless warning), the \cnt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0), -% the \com{adjustmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter, by~1 by default), -% the \com{decrementmtc} command (decrements the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), -% the \com{incrementmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1), -% the format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{themtc}), -% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc -% (analog to the standard \dcnt{tocdepth} counter). -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0003} définissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{The@mtc}), la commande -% obsolète \com{firstchapteris} (elle ne fait qu'émettre un avertissement bénin), le compteur \cnt{mtc} (initialisé -% à~0), la commande \com{adjustmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc}, de~1 par défaut), -% la commande \com{decrementmtc} (décrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), -% la commande \com{incrementmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1), -% le format du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{themtc}), -% le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialisé à~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue -% au compteur standard \dcnt{tocdepth}). -% \fi -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\def\firstchapteris#1% - {\mtcPackageWarning[W0003]{minitoc}% - {\string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command}% - \@firstchapteris@used@true} -\newcounter{mtc} -\setcounter{mtc}{0} -\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}} -\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}} -\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}} -\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}} -\newcounter{minitocdepth} -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\com{mtc@rule}), and we copy -% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of -% \com{mtcindent}, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via -% \com{hrule} to stay in vertical mode for the final \com{kern}. -% \or\relax % -% Nous définissons les filets horizontaux à~tracer avant et après les minitocs -% (\com{mtc@rule}), puis nous copions cette définition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de -% mini-tables. Nous établissons aussi la valeur par défaut (24pt) de \com{mtcindent}, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des -% deux côtés). Les filets sont épais de 0.4pt. Ils sont définis via \com{hrule} pour rester en mode vertical -% pour le \com{kern} final. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@} -\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule -\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule -\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule -\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule -\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule -\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule -\mtcindent=24\p@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{14} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \com{chapter} is -% defined. -% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \com{mtcsetfont} macro -% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro later -% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} complètes. Ces définitions sont effectives -% si \com{chapter} -% est définie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi définies ici. Voir aussi la macro \com{mtcsetfont} -% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} plus loin -% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} -\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont -\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont -\let\mlffont\mtcfont \let\mlfSfont\mtcfont -\let\mltfont\mtcfont \let\mltSfont\mtcfont -\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And \com{coffeefont} is used for ``coffee breaks{\myCoffeecup}'' in the \pack{minutes} -% package~\cite{minutes}. -% \or\relax -% Et \com{coffeefont} est utilisée pour les «~pauses café{\myCoffeecup}~» dans le -% paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center, -% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified. -% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \com{df@mtitc}, \com{df@mtilf} or -% \com{df@mtilt}; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \com{do@mtitc}, -% \com{do@mtilf} or \com{do@mtilt}. See the \com{minitoc@} macro later -% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \or\relax -% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier à~gauche, -% centrer, justifier à~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par défaut, ces titres sont -% justifiés à~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et mémorisé dans \com{df@mtitc}, -% \com{df@mtilf} ou \com{df@mtilt}; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rangé dans -% \com{do@mtitc}, \com{do@mtilf} ou \com{do@mtilt}. Voir la macro \com{minitoc@} plus loin -% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide nécessite une correction verticale -% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles: -% \or\relax -% Titres centrés, justifiés à~gauche, justifiés à~droite ou vides: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} -\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} -\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} -\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} -\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Default: titles on left: -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sont justifiés à~gauche: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\do@mtitc\l@mti -\let\df@mtitc\l@mti -\let\do@mtilf\l@mti -\let\df@mtilf\l@mti -\let\do@mtilt\l@mti -\let\df@mtilt\l@mti -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env} -% \fi -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\list} -% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} -% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} -% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} -% \begin{macro}{\topsep} -% \begin{macro}{\parsep} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each minitoc is placed inside a \env{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the -% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{mtc@verse} and \com{endmtc@verse}. -% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \com{list}\verb|{}| and set some -% dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. -% \com{parsep} is set to zero if the \opt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines). -% \com{parskip} is set to zero if the \opt{k-tight} option is active -% (to reduce the spacing of the lines). -% Both margins are set to \com{mtcindent}. \com{endmtc@verse} terminates the list and discourages a page break. -% The \env{mtc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{mtcoffset}). -% \or\relax -% Chaque minitoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue -% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et donc il est défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: \com{mtc@verse} et -% \com{endmtc@verse}. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord (de manière locale) \verb|\\|, -% puis nous appelons \com{list}\verb|{}| et établissons quelques dimensions telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, -% \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}. -% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{tight} est active -% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). -% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{k-tight} est active -% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes). -% Les deux marges sont établies à~\com{mtcindent}. -% L'environnement \env{mtc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{mtcoffset}). -% \com{endmtc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{% - \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \partopsep=\z@ - \listparindent=\itemindent \topsep=1ex - \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi - \leftmargin=\mtcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% - \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% - }% - \item[]} -\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof}, and \ucom{minilot} commands}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} -% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences. -% \or\relax -% \section{Les commandes \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof} et \ucom{minilot}}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot} -% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires, avec seulement des différences de détail. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{minitoc} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{minitoc} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de -% minitoc automatique). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a -% \com{dominitoc} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. -% \com{dominitoc} has itself an -% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. The default value of -% the optional argument of the \com{dominitoc} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: -% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of -% \com{dominitoc}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par -% une commande \com{dominitoc}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominitoc} a elle-même -% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. La valeur par -% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominitoc} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais -% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via -% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominitoc}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So we define \com{minitoc} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in -% the \com{minitoc@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a -% left bracket for the optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Donc nous définissons \com{minitoc} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis -% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minitoc@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce -% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The real code of \com{minitoc} is in \com{minitoc@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) -% specifying the position of the title. -% \or\relax -% Le véritable code de \com{minitoc} est dans \com{minitoc@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les -% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we set the global flag \com{@minitoc@used@true} to note that \com{minitoc} has been called (this will be -% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \or\relax -% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minitoc@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minitoc} a été -% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minitoc@[#1]{% -\global\@minitoc@used@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \com{jobname} and a -% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mtc} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.M} (short extensions) -% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc. -% \or\relax -% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, -% qui est \suffix{.mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.M} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu -% de la minitoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@longext@ - \def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. -% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minitoc has been -% requested). -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le -% fichier est % vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide -% a été demandée). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{thispageminitocstyle} to set the page style -% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc). -% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{thispageminitocstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par -% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, -% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \thispageminitocstyle -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{beforeminitoc}, -% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc) -% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the -% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), -% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page -% break between the title and the top rule). -% The font is set to \com{mtcfont}. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{beforeminitoc}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de -% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est -% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut -% de la minitoc (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une -% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mtcfont}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforeminitoc - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\mtcfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent %% - \ifx\mtc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin -% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: -% \or\relax -% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres -% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{mtc@verse}{\mtcoffset}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minitocdepth}), -% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} -% has been forced to \dcnt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, -% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. -% \or\relax -% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée -% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où -% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que -% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire -% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file. -% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his -% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro -% \com{mtc@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via -% some \com{mtcsetformat} commands). -% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en insérant le -% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) -% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mtc@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page -% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). -% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \mtc@setform% - \openminitoc \global\inminitoctrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inminitocfalse\closeminitoc - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the -% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminitoc}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), -% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminitoc}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) -% est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kernafterminitoc - \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc: -% \or\relax -% Et nous définissons le filet inférieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@bottom@rule{% - \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else - \vskip -2.5ex - \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{minilof} command is very similar to the \com{minitoc} command. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{minilof} est très similaire à~la commande \com{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{minilof} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{minilof} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de -% minilof automatique). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a -% \com{dominilof} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. -% \com{dominilof} has itself an -% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilof}. The default value of -% the optional argument of the \com{dominilof} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: -% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of -% \com{dominilof}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilof}. -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par -% une commande \com{dominilof}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilof} a elle-même -% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. La valeur par -% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilof} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais -% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via -% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilof}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So we define \com{minilof} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in -% the \com{minilof@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a -% left bracket for the optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Donc nous définissons \com{minilof} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis -% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilof@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce -% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The real code of \com{minilof} is in \com{minilof@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) -% specifying the position of the title. -% \or\relax -% Le véritable code de \com{minilof} est dans \com{minilof@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les -% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilof@used@true} to note that \com{minilof} has been called (this will be -% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \or\relax -% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilof@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilof} a été -% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minilof@[#1]{% -\global\@minilof@used@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \com{jobname} and a -% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlf} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.F} (short extensions) -% followed by the absolute number of the minilof. -% \or\relax -% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, -% qui est \suffix{.mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.F} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu -% de la minilof. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. -% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilof has been -% requested). -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis -% si le fichier est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof -% vide a été demandée). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@minilof@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{thispageminilofstyle} to set the page style -% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof). -% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilofstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par -% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, -% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \thispageminilofstyle -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{beforeminilof}, -% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof) -% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the -% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), -% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit -% a page break between the title and the top rule). -% The font is set to \com{mlffont}. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilof}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de -% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est -% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut -% de la minilof (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher -% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mlffont}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforeminilof - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@ - \reset@font\mlffont - \parindent=\z@ - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\mlf@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin -% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: -% \or\relax -% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres -% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{mtc@verse}{\mlfoffset}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilofdepth}), -% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth} -% has been forced to \dcnt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, -% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. -% \or\relax -% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée -% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où -% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que -% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire -% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\c@lofdepth=\c@minilofdepth - \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file. -% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his -% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro -% \com{mlf@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some -% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). -% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en insérant le -% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) -% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlf@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page -% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). -% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \mlf@setform - \global\openminilof\inminiloftrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inminiloffalse\closeminilof - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the -% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), -% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) -% est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kernafterminilof - \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \com{minilof} command: -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{minilot} est absolument similaire à~la commande \com{minilof}: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{minilot} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{minilot} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de -% minilot automatique). -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a -% \com{dominilot} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value. -% \com{dominilot} has itself an -% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilot}. The default value of -% the optional argument of the \com{dominilot} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use: -% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of -% \com{dominilot}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilot}. -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par -% une commande \com{dominilot}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilot} a elle-même -% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. La valeur par -% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilot} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais -% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via -% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilot}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% So we define \com{minilot} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in -% the \com{minilot@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a -% left bracket for the optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Donc nous définissons \com{minilot} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis -% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilot@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce -% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The real code of \com{minilot} is in \com{minilot@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets) -% specifying the position of the title. -% \or\relax -% Le véritable code de \com{minilot} est dans \com{minilot@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les -% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilot@used@true} to note that \com{minilot} has been called (this will be -% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \or\relax -% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilot@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilot} a été -% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\minilot@[#1]{% -\global\@minilot@used@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \com{jobname} and a -% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlt} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.T} (short extensions) -% followed by the absolute number of the minilot. -% \or\relax -% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile}, -% qui est \suffix{.mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.T} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu -% de la minilot. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file. -% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilot has been -% requested). -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le fichier -% est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a été demandée). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@minilot@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{thispageminilotstyle} to set the page style -% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot). -% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilotstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par -% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement, -% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \thispageminilotstyle -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We call \com{beforeminilot}, -% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot) -% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the -% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}), -% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment -% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule). -% The font is set to \com{mltfont}. -% \or\relax -% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilot}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de -% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilot) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est -% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut -% de la minilot (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} -% (pour empêcher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mltfont}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforeminilot - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti - \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti - \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti - \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti - \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti - \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\mltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\mlt@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin -% an \env{mtc@verse} environment: -% \or\relax -% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres -% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% - \begin{mtc@verse}{\mltoffset}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilotdepth}), -% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{lotdepth} -% has been forced to \dcnt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough, -% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation. -% \or\relax -% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée -% (\com{c@minilotdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où -% \dcnt{lotdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que -% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire -% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\c@lotdepth=\c@minilotdepth - \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file. -% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his -% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro -% \com{mlt@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some -% \com{mtcsetformat} commands). -% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en insérant le -% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook}) -% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}) -% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlt@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page -% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}). -% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \mlt@setform - \global\openminilot\inminilottrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inminilotfalse\closeminilot - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the -% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page), -% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) -% est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \end{mtc@verse}% - \kernafterminilot - \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars. -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{continued}}{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{suite}}{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}% -% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}% -% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we define \com{l@xchapter} which is like \com{l@chapter}, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its -% printing (except if you cheat): -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous définissons \com{l@xchapter} qui est semblable à~\com{l@chapter}, mais avec une profondeur -% très grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}} -\def\xchapter{xchapter} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}% -% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}% -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we patch \com{@chapter} (the non-starred branch of \com{chapter}) -% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by -% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices). -% \or\relax -% Puis nous modifions \com{@chapter} (la branche non étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des entrées de -% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entrées seront utilisées par les -% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour découper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\sv@chapter\@chapter -\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax% - \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}% - \ignorespaces} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We also patch \com{@schapter} (the starred branch of \com{chapter}) -% to add marks in the TOC to delimit -% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as -% they are defined as \com{relax}, they should not perturbate other packages. -% \or\relax -% Nous modifions aussi \com{@schapter} (la branche étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des marques dans la -% table des matières afin de délimiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilisées par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| -% pour prélever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont définies comme -% étant \com{relax}, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter -\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter} -\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter} -\let\chapterbegin\relax -\let\chapterend\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the command \com{chapter} is undefined, we define the command \com{addstarredsection} -% (only if \com{section} is defined). If the command \com{chapter} is defined, we define the command -% \com{addstarredchapter}. If the command \com{part} is defined, we define the command \com{addstarredpart}. -% We use the utility command \com{addst@rred} defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. -% \or\relax -% Si la commande \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, alors nous devons définir la commande \com{addstarredsection} (mais -% seulement si \com{section} est définie). Si la commande \com{chapter} est définie, nous définissons la -% commande \com{addstarredchapter}. Si la commande \com{part} est définie, nous définissons la commande -% \com{addstarredpart}. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \com{addst@rred} définie dans la -% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\@ifundefined{section}% - {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}% - {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}} -\@ifundefined{part}% - {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} -% \or\relax -% \section{Entrées de TdM sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro -% \com{@Undottedtocline} prints no page number, but \com{@Undottedtoclinep} prints~it. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entrées de table des matières sans points de -% conduite. La macro \com{@Undottedtocline} n'imprime pas de numéro de page, mais \com{@Undottedtoclinep} -% l'imprime. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{% - \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax - \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip - {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak \nobreak\null - \par}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The same but with the page number: -% \or\relax -% La même chose, mais avec le numéro de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{% - \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip - \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \leavevmode - \@tempdima #3\relax - \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip - {#4}\nobreak \hfill \nobreak\null - \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}% - \par}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} -% \or\relax -% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof@} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot@} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This code sets the flag to false, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part). -% We alter the commands \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., to test the flag \com{ifundottedmtc} and, -% if true, replace locally \com{@dottedtocline} by its dotless version \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. Of course, -% we must also test the availability of the \com{chapter}, \com{part} and \com{section} commands, to avoid to -% define many unnecessary commands. -% \or\relax -% Ce code force l'indicateur à~faux, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions -% les commandes \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc} et, s'il -% est vrai, remplacer localement \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version sans points de conduite \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. -% Bien sûr, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilité des commandes \com{chapter}, \com{part} et \com{section}, -% pour éviter de définir de nombreuses commandes non nécessaires. -% \fi -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% - \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@ - \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@ - \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@minilof@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@ - \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@minilot@[#1]}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the part level: -% \or\relax -% Pour le niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{% - \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@ - \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@ - \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@partlof@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@ - \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@partlot@[#1]}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the section level: -% \or\relax -% Pour le niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}{% - \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@ - \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@ - \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}% - \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@ - \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi - \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande \ucom{dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The three commands \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} are, of course, very similar. -% They take the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} file (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot} files) -% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and -% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files -% (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), using specific -% lines in the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (resp. \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) file. These lines are -% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the -% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters. -% \or\relax -% Les trois commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} sont, bien sûr, très similaires. -% Elles prennent le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (respectivement les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) -% produit par l'exécution précédente de \LaTeX\ et l'éclatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre -% étoilé) vers les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et -% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes spécifiques dans le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} -% (respectivement, \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour -% des entrées au niveau chapitre (telles que \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|, -% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) délimitant les chapitres dans la table des matières (ou -% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie délimitent les -% parties, donc aussi les chapitres. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% As \com{dominitoc} has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \com{dominitoc@} -% with a argument delimited by brackets. -% -% The macros are \com{dominitoc} (user interface), which calls \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (or with the optional argument -% of \com{dominitoc}). -% Then \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| processes its argument and calls \com{@@dominitoc}. -% \com{@@dominitoc} calls \com{@dominitoc} (passing \com{jobname} as argument) then close the minitoc file -% written. \com{@dominitoc} reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where -% \verb|#1| is the value of \com{jobname}), then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to -% \com{dominitoc@} (i.e.,~to \com{dominitoc}) sets the flag \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. This will be used later -% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \com{minitoc} \emph{after} \com{dominitoc} and that both -% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. -% The code is similar for \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot}. -% \or\relax -% Puisque \com{dominitoc} a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut est~«~\texttt{l}~» (gauche), elle -% appelle \com{dominitoc@} avec un argument délimité par des crochets. -% -% Les macros sont \com{dominitoc} (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (ou avec l'argument -% optionnel de \com{dominitoc}). Puis \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| traite son argument et appelle \com{@@dominitoc}. -% \com{@@dominitoc} appelle \com{@dominitoc} (en passant \com{jobname} comme argument) puis ferme le fichier -% minitoc écrit. \com{@dominitoc} remet à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (où -% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \com{jobname}), puis remet encore à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel -% à~\com{dominitoc@} (c'est-à-dire, à~\com{dominitoc}) établit l'indicateur \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. Ceci -% sera utilisé plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui détecte si vous avez appelé correctement \com{minitoc} -% \emph{après} \com{dominitoc} et que les deux ont été appelées). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}. -% Le code est similaire pour \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dominitoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the -% adequate extension. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dominitoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers minitocs, -% avec le suffixe adéquat. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dominitoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} - \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} -\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dominilof} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the -% adequate extension. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dominilof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers minilofs, -% avec le suffixe adéquat. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dominilof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} - \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} -\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dominilot} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the -% adequate extension. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dominilot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers minilots, -% avec le suffixe adéquat. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dominilot#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{mtc}{0} - \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}} -\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title; -% a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minitoc; -% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dominitoc@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dominitoc@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dominitoc \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dominitoc@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominitoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title; -% a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilof; -% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dominilof@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dominilof@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dominilof \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dominilof@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominilof} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt} -% \begin{macro}{\e@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@mti} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title; -% a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilot; -% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dominilot@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dominilot@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dominilot \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dominilot@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dominilot} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file -% descriptor. -% \or\relax -% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le -% descripteur de fichier. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier TdM}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the -% \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission. -% Some modifications were made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, -% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \pack{hyperref}, essentially by adding an -% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}: -% \or\relax -% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est dérivé du paquetage -% \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission. -% Des modifications ont été faites par -% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \pack{hyperref}, -% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument à~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de -% contenu.}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MTC@list{#2}% - \MTC@loop{#1}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Teste si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@toc{% - \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{chapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute) -% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des matières et détecte les -% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{chapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de -% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier minitoc est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter - \stepcounter{mtc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after -% closing the file descriptor): -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, -% puis l'ouvrir (après avoir fermé le descripteur de fichier): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} need a similar code to detect TOC entries for appendices in the \class{memoir} class\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} -% has signaled the problem; thanks!}: -% \or\relax -% Il\imess{I0033} nous faut un code similaire pour détecter les entrées dans la TdM pour les appendices dans -% la classe \class{memoir}\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} a signalé le problème; merci!}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix - \stepcounter{mtc}% - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \com{mtc@toks} is used as a verbatim memory. -% \or\relax -% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} étant utilisé -% comme mémoire \emph{verbatim}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} -% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standard -% sectionning commands, below \com{chapter}: -% \or\relax -% Chaque ligne de contenu intéressante est copiée, avec une commande de fonte ajoutée devant -% elle. Nous commençons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \com{chapter}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\coffee} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A coffee break contents line{\myCoffeecup} is written for \com{coffee}: -% \or\relax -% Une ligne de contenu de pause-café{\myCoffeecup} est écrite pour \com{coffee}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee - \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcname} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\imess{I0033} it is \com{starchapter} (for a starred chapter), we increment the \cnt{mtc} counter, -% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file. -% \or\relax -% Si\imess{I0033} c'est \com{starchapter} (pour un chapitre étoilé), nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, -% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le ré-ouvrons avec ce -% nouveau fichier. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter - \stepcounter{mtc}% - \if@mtc@longext@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For starred sectionning commands lower than \com{chapter}, a contents line is written into the minitoc file, -% with a font command added: -% \or\relax -% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées plus basses que \com{chapter}, une ligne de contenu est écrite -% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \com{MTC@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle -% \com{MTC@next} pour traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\openin} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entrées -% intéressantes. Sinon, on traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0010]{minitoc}% - {No file #1. - \MessageBreak - MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\MTC@toc - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0024]{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MTC@read - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} -% \begin{macro}{\read} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MTC@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{MTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to -% delimit chapters\footnote{The macro \com{MTC@test} has been patched to call \com{MTC@contentsline} with -% four parameters~instead of three (thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and -% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). The same remark applies to similar macros.}: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, -% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres\,\footnote{La macro \com{MTC@test} a été modifiée pour -% appeler \com{MTC@contentsline} avec quatre paramètres ~au lieu de trois -% (merci à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). -% La même remarque s'applique aux macros similaires.}: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\@input} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. -% Finally process the next file in the list. -% ^^A Thanks to \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. -% \or\relax -% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. -% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si -% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% ^^A Merci à~\name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \expandafter\MTC@toc - \else - \expandafter\MTC@read - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf} -% \or\relax -% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. -% \or\relax -% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des figures} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: -% \or\relax -% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MLF@list{#2}% - \MLF@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Checks if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Teste si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@lof{% - \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{xchapter} is found, the counter \cnt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et détecte les mots-clés -% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et -% un nouveau fichier minilof est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter - \stepcounter{mtc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfname} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilof file is built from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: -% \or\relax -% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble} - \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble} - \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\figure} -% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% If we found a \com{figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{figure} ou \com{subfigure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlfS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLF@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle -% \com{MLF@next} pour traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\openin} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lof} file: -% \or\relax -% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lof}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0008]{minitoc}% - {No file #1. - \MessageBreak - MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\MLF@lof - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0034]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MLF@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} -% \begin{macro}{\read} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lof} file: -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLF@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{MLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to -% delimit chapters. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, -% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\@input} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. -% Finally process the next file in the list. -% \or\relax -% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. -% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si -% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof - \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt} -% \or\relax -% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize. -% \or\relax -% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des tableaux} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros: -% \or\relax -% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes: -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\MLT@list{#2}% - \MLT@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Checks if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Teste si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@lot{% - \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{xchapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter is incremented and a new minilot file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les mots-clés -% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et -% un nouveau fichier minilot est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter - \stepcounter{mtc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\themtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mltname} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilot file it build from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension: -% \or\relax -% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}% - \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\table} -% \begin{macro}{\subtable} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% If we found a \com{table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mltS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLT@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle -% \com{MLT@next} pour traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\openin} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lot} file: -% \or\relax -% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lot}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0009]{minitoc}% - {No file #1. - \MessageBreak - MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\MLT@lot - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0037]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\MLT@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} -% \begin{macro}{\read} -% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lot} file: -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLT@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{MLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to -% delimit chapters. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, -% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{13} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\@input} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. -% Finally process the next file in the list. -% \or\relax -% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons. -% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si -% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\chapterend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin - \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot - \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a -% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| alternative). -% \or\relax -% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la -% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \or\relax -% \section{Macro pour écrire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param} -% \begin{macro}{\write} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} macro makes the definition of \com{MTC@contentsline} shorter. An extra \com{edef} -% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} rend la définition de \com{MTC@contentsline} plus courte. Un niveau -% supplémentaire de \com{edef} est retiré (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}): -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The arguments of \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} are: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; -% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlink). -% \end{itemize} -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% \or\relax -% Les arguments de \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} sont: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname}; -% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlien). -% \end{itemize} -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@dot{.} -\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \def\mtc@param{#4}% - \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% - {\string\reset@font - \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname - \string\mtc@string - \string\contentsline{#1}% - {\the\mtc@toks}% - {\string\reset@font - \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname - \space #3% - }% - \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param - \else - {#4}% - \fi - }% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\write} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the same for a ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} line. The arguments of the macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} are: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}. -% \end{itemize} -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. -% \or\relax -% Et la même chose pour une ligne de «~pause café~»{\myCoffeecup}. Les arguments de -% la macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} sont: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline}; -% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}. -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{% - \immediate\write\tf@mtc{% - {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \string\mtc@string - {\the\mtc@toks}% - {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \space #3% - }% - }% - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots} -% \or\relax -% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters: -% \dcnt{partlofdepth} and \dcnt{partlotdepth}. -% These counters are initialized to~2. -% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons les nouveaux compteurs -% correspondants: \dcnt{partlofdepth} et \dcnt{partlotdepth}. -% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. -% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}% - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\xpart} -% \begin{macro}{\theptc} -% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} -% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\imess{W0004} \com{part} is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter (\cnt{ptc}) -% for the parttocs and related commands (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, \com{decrementptc}, -% \com{incrementptc}), the -% obsolete command \com{firstpartis}, and the depth counter \dcnt{parttocdepth}. -% \or\relax -% Si\imess{W0004} \com{part} est définie, nous définissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur (\cnt{ptc}) -% pour les parttocs et les commandes associées (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, -% \com{decrementptc}, \com{incrementptc}), la commande -% obsolète \com{firstpartis} et le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{parttocdepth}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{part}{}% -{% -\def\xpart{xpart} -\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}} -\def\firstpartis#1% - {\mtcPackageWarning[W0004]{minitoc}% - {\string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command}% - \@firstpartis@used@true} -\newcounter{ptc} -\setcounter{ptc}{0} -\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}} -\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}} -\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}} -\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}} -\newcounter{parttocdepth} -\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \com{chapter} defined?), to -% have a different layout: the definition of \com{ptc@rule} is empty except if \com{chapter} is undefined. -% By default, there is no rule before/after parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare -% \com{ptc@rule} if you want these rules. -% \or\relax -% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une différence entre les classes \class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report} et \class{article} -% (\com{chapter} est-elle définie?), pour avoir une présentation différente: -% la définition de la macro \com{ptc@rule} est -% vide sauf si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie. Par défaut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et après les parttocs, -% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez redéclarer \com{ptc@rule} si vous voulez ces filets. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}% - {\let\ptc@rule\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs: -% \or\relax -% Et nous déclarons l'indentation (des deux côtés) par défaut des parttocs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\ptcindent -\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} -% \or\relax -% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \com{chapter} is defined -% (\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}-like -% document classes) than when it is not (\class{article}-like document classes): -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \com{chapter} est définie -% (classes de document analogues à~\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}) que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de -% document analogues à~\class{article}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc - \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections) - \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) - \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) - \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) - \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) - \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) - \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) - \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) - \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) - \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is defined, the fonts are larger and \com{ptcCfont} must be defined: -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} est définie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \com{ptcCfont} doit être définie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -{% - \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc - \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters) - \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections) - \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont % (subsections) - \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont % (subsubsections) - \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont % (paragraphs) - \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont % (subparagraphs) - \let\plffont\ptcfont % (figures) - \let\plfSfont\ptcfont % (subfigures) - \let\pltfont\ptcfont % (tables) - \let\pltSfont\ptcfont % (subtables) - \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} -% \or\relax -% \section{Titres par défaut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\com{parttoc}, -% \com{partlof} and \com{partlot}). This formating is different if \com{chapter} is defined or undefined. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons la position par défaut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau -% partie (\com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot}). Cette mise en page est différente selon que -% \com{chapter} est définie ou non. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for -% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles. -% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les définitions sont très simples, pour des titres centrés, cadrés -% à~gauche, cadrés à~droite, ou vides. -% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} - \def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} - \def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} - \def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} - \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But, if \com{chapter} is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex. -% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \or\relax -% Mais, si \com{chapter} est définie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une tête de chapitre, qui est plus -% complexe. -% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -{% -\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} -% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} -% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns: -% \or\relax -% Pour un titre cadré à~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]% - \else \@makephead@l{#1}\@afterheading \fi} -\def\@makephead@l#1{% - \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \ptifont #1\par \nobreak - \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} - }} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} -% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} -% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r} -% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: -% \or\relax -% Pour un titre cadré à~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}] - \else \@makephead@r{#1}\@afterheading \fi} -\def\@makephead@r#1{% - \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% - {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \ptifont #1\par \nobreak - \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} - }} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn} -% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage} -% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c} -% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns: -% \or\relax -% Pour un titre centré, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]% - \else \@makephead@c{#1}\@afterheading \fi} -\def\@makephead@c#1{% - \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}% - {\parindent \z@ \centering \ptifont #1\par \nobreak - \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{} - }}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, titles are on left: -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sont à~gauche: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\do@ptitc\l@pti \let\df@ptitc\l@pti -\let\do@ptilf\l@pti \let\df@ptilf\l@pti -\let\do@ptilt\l@pti \let\df@ptilt\l@pti -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env} -% \fi -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\\} -% \begin{macro}{\@centercr} -% \begin{macro}{\list} -% \begin{macro}{\itemsep} -% \begin{macro}{\itemindent} -% \begin{macro}{\listparindent} -% \begin{macro}{\topsep} -% \begin{macro}{\parsep} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\partopsep} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each parttoc is placed inside a \env{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the -% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{ptc@verse} and -% \com{endptc@verse}. -% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} and -% set some dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, -% \com{itemindent}, \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. -% \com{parsep} is set to zero if -% the \opt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). -% \com{parskip} is set to zero if -% the \opt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines). -% Both margins are set to \com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages -% a page break. -% The \env{ptc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{ptcoffset}). -% \or\relax -% Chaque parttoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue -% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et est donc défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: -% \com{ptc@verse} et \com{endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord -% (de manière locale)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} et établissons quelques dimensions -% telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{itemindent}, -% \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}. -% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si -% l'option \opt{tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). -% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si -% l'option \opt{k-tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes). -% Les deux marges sont -% forcées à~\com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page. -% L'environnement \env{ptc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{ptcoffset}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ptc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{% - \topsep=1ex \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ - \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ - \leftmargin=\ptcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin - \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi - \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1} - \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1} - }% - \item[]} -\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{raggedright} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The part level mini-tables: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof}, and \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof} et \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot} -% \fi -% \end{raggedright} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands are essentially similar to the \com{minitoc} command, except that they should be placed after a -% \com{part} command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends on -% the availability of the -% \com{chapter} command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \com{partlof} -% and \com{partlot} commands are siblings of the \com{parttoc} command. -% Note that \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and -% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence -% \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| must be called. -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires à~la commande \com{minitoc}, sauf qu'elles devraient être placées -% après une commande \com{part} pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est -% différente et dépend de la disponibilité de la commande \com{chapter} (pour les fontes et les filets -% horizontaux). Le code est très similaire. Les commandes \com{partlof} et \com{partlof} sont les cousines -% de la commande \com{parttoc}. Notez que \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} utilisent des styles -% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande -% \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| doit être appelée. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{parttoc} command}\icom{parttoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{parttoc}}\icom{parttoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc). -% First, \com{parttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{parttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc -% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{parttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur -% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{parttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme -% argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{parttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@parttoc@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{parttoc@} fait le véritable travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@parttoc@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire -% le nom du fichier parttoc): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\parttoc@[#1]{% -\global\@parttoc@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here: -% \or\relax -% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: -% \fi -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforeparttoc}, of course: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; -% d'abord, \com{beforeparttoc}, bien sûr: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforeparttoc -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} -% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style: -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et -% établissons le style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% - \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispageparttocstyle - \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of -% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la -% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc, -% puis établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright \reset@font\ptcfont \parskip=\z@ \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]\kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent \nopagebreak[4]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between -% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the parttoc. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la parttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure -% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la parttoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\ptc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position close the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@ \labelwidth=\z@ \labelsep=\z@ \listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to -% \dcnt{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is -% necessary to avoid a negative indentation. -% \or\relax -% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table -% des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est -% nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une indentation négative. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{ptc@verse}{\ptcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \com{l@chapter} ignoring the page number argument. -% A hook (redefinissable command) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated -% via \com{ptc@setform}. -% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa -% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en -% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et -% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{ptc@setform}. Puis le fichier parttoc est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}% - {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter% - \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \ptc@setform - \openparttoc\global\inparttoctrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inparttocfalse\closeparttoc - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is -% not defined), and \com{afterparttoc}. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page -% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterparttoc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernafterparttoc - \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - \afterparttoc\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{partlof} command}\icom{partlof} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlof}}\icom{partlof} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof). -% First, \com{partlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{partlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof -% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur -% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme -% argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{partlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlof@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{partlof@} fait le véritable travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlof@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire -% le nom du fichier partlof): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\partlof@[#1]{% -\global\@partlof@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here: -% \or\relax -% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@partlof@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforepartlof}, of course: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; -% d'abord, \com{beforepartlof}, bien sûr: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforepartlof -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} -% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style: -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et -% établissons le style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% - {\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth - \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispagepartlofstyle - \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of -% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la -% position du titre de la partlof. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof, -% puis établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\plffont% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the -% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlof. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la partlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure -% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlof. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\plf@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline - \mtc@hstrut\\ - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof. -% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlofdepth}. -% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation. -% \or\relax -% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof. -% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlofdepth}. -% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une -% indentation négative. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{ptc@verse}{\plfoffset}% - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\c@lofdepth=\c@partlofdepth - \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plf@setform}. -% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa -% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en -% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et -% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plf@setform}. Puis le fichier partlof est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \plf@setform - \openpartlof\global\inpartloftrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inpartloffalse\closepartlof - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is -% not defined), and \com{afterpartlof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page -% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernafterpartlof - \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - \afterpartlof\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{partlot} command}\icom{partlot} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlot}}\icom{partlot} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot). -% First, \com{partlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{partlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot -% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur -% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme -% argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\Thepart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{partlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlot@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{partlot@} fait le véritable travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlot@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire -% le nom du fichier partlot): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -% -\def\partlot@[#1]{% -\global\@partlot@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here: -% \or\relax -% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@partlof@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforepartlot}, of course: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation; -% d'abord, \com{beforepartlot}, bien sûr: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforepartlot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth} -% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style: -% \or\relax -% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et -% établissons le style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{% - \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth - \global\let\@mkboth\markboth - \thispagepartlotstyle - \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of -% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la -% position du titre de la partlot. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti - \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti - \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti - \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti - \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti - \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot, -% puis établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\pltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The partlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between -% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlot. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la partlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher -% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlot. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\plt@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline - \mtc@hstrut\\ - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. -% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlotdepth}. -% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. -% \or\relax -% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot. -% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlotdepth}. -% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une -% indentation négative. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{ptc@verse}{\pltoffset}% - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\c@lotdepth=\c@partlotdepth - \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plt@setform}. -% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa -% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en -% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et -% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plt@setform}. Puis le fichier partlot est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \plt@setform - \openpartlot\global\inpartlottrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\inpartlotfalse\closepartlot - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{ptc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is -% not defined), and \com{afterpartlot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page -% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernafterpartlot - \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}% - \afterpartlot\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\l@psect} -% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\psect} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth -% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These commands are similar to -% \com{l@subsection}, only the arguments have been altered: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilisées dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \com{l@xpart} -% utilise une profondeur énorme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces -% commandes sont similaires à~\com{l@subsection}, seuls les arguments ont été altérés: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@psect{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\pchapter{pchapter} -\def\psect{psect} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\sv@part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\partend} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We patch both branches of the \com{part} command: \com{@part} (unstarred \com{part}) and \com{@spart} -% (\com{part*}). We add the incrementation of the \cnt{ptc} counter to both branches. -% In the unstarred branch, -% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \com{partbegin} -% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\com{relax}). -% \or\relax -% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{part}: \com{@part} (\com{part} non étoilée) et \com{@spart} -% (\com{part*}). Nous ajoutons l'incrémentation du compteur \cnt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans -% la branche non étoilée, nous ajoutons des entrées -% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des matières, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche -% étoilée, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{partbegin} dans le fichier table des matières. Cette commande est juste un -% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\com{relax}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart -\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax -\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}% -\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}% -\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}% -\stepcounter{ptc}} -\let\sv@spart\@spart -\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart} -\let\ptc@spart\@spart -\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart} -\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart} -\let\partend\relax -\let\partbegin\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande \ucom{doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{doparttoc} command works like the \com{dominitoc} command, \com{dopartlof} like \com{dominilof} -% and \com{dopartlot} like \com{dominilot}. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{doparttoc} fonctionne comme la commande \com{dominitoc}, \com{dopartlof} comme \com{dominilof} -% et \com{dopartlot} comme \com{dominilot}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{doparttoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and creates the -% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.ptc} becomes \suffix{.P} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{doparttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.ptc} devient \suffix{.P} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@doparttoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{ptc}{0}% - \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dopartlof} command extracts information from the -% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plf} becomes \suffix{.G} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dopartlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plf} devient \suffix{.G} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dopartlof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{ptc}{0}% - \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dopartlot} command extracts information from the -% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plt} becomes \suffix{.U} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dopartlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plt} devient \suffix{.U} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dopartlot#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{ptc}{0}% - \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui détectent l'argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}} -\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}} -\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{doparttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs) -% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{doparttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les -% titres des parttocs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\doparttoc@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@doparttoc@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\doparttoc \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@doparttoc@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@doparttoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) -% and flag this macro as used, a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les -% titres des partlofs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dopartlof@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dopartlof@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dopartlof \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dopartlof@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dopartlof} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt} -% \begin{macro}{\e@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@pti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@pti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs) -% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres -% des partlots) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dopartlot@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dopartlot@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dopartlot \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dopartlot@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dopartlot} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These macros invoke the \verb|@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file -% descriptor. -% \or\relax -% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de -% fichier. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la tête de liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PTC@list{#2}% - \PTC@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@toc{% - \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\theptc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. -% \or\relax -% La\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières et détecte les -% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier parttoc -% est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part - \stepcounter{ptc}% - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}% - \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}% - \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax - \stepcounter{ptc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, -% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}% - \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}% - \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\coffee} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} -% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées; ce code extrait et écrit les informations pour les -% chapitres, sections, etc.: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee - \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\starchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And for the starred sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PTC@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PTC@next} pour -% traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées -% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0013]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\PTC@toc - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0025]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PTC@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PTC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PTC@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{PTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to -% delimit parts: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{PTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, -% principalement pour délimiter les parties: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read} -% \begin{macro}{\partend} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the -% list. -% \or\relax -% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si -% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la -% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc - \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PLF@list{#2}% - \PLF@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@lof{% - \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\theptc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\plfname} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et détecte les -% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlof -% est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart - \stepcounter{ptc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\plfname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, -% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}% - \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}% - \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\figure} -% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plfS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLF@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLF@next} pour -% traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées -% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0011]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\PLF@lof - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0035]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PLF@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLF@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{PLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to -% delimit parts: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{PLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, -% principalement pour délimiter les parties: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read} -% \begin{macro}{\partend} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the -% list. -% \or\relax -% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si -% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la -% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof - \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\PLT@list{#2}% - \PLT@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@lot{% - \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\theptc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\pltname} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords. -% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlot file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les -% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlot -% est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart - \stepcounter{ptc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\pltname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, -% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}% - \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}% - \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\table} -% \begin{macro}{\subtable} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}% - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{pltS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLT@next} to process the -% first one: -% \or\relax -% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLT@next} pour -% traiter la première: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées -% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0012]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\PLT@lot - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0038]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\PLT@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. -% \or\relax -% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\PLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLT@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{PLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to -% delimit parts: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{PLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, -% principalement pour délimiter les parties: -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read} -% \begin{macro}{\partend} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the -% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the -% list. -% \or\relax -% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si -% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la -% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\partend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\partbegin - \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot - \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): -% \or\relax -% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (débuté dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots} -% \or\relax -% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\newcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of -% the corresponding mini-tables: -% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% These counters are initialized to~2. -% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons de nouveaux compteurs pour les -% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes: -% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. -% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2. -% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}% - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The section-level commands are defined only if \com{chapter} is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like -% document classes, and only if \com{section} is defined: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes au niveau section sont définies seulement si \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} définie, donc dans -% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \com{section} est définie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \if@mtc@section@def@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0005} define the obsolete command \com{firstsectionis} (with its harmless warning), the counter \cnt{stc} -% of secttocs, the \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} and \com{incrementstc} commands, -% the depth counter \dcnt{secttocdepth} and its default -% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \com{stc@rule} (rule before/after -% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \com{stcindent} for the secttocs (with its default -% values). -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0005} définissons la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis} (avec son avertissement bénin), -% le compteur \cnt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} -% et \com{incrementstc}, -% le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{secttocdepth} et sa valeur par défaut~2 (pour inclure au moins -% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \com{stc@rule} (filet avant/après la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation -% (des deux côtés) \com{stcindent} pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par défaut). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\firstsectionis#1{\mtcPackageWarning[W0005]{minitoc}% - {\string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command}% - \@firstsectionis@used@true} -\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}% -\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}% -\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}% -\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}% -\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}% -\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}% -\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\slffont} -% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % secttoc -\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % (subsections) -\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont % (subsubsections) -\let\stcPfont\stcfont % (paragraphs) -\let\stcSPfont\stcfont % (subparagraphs) -\let\slffont\stcfont % sectlof (figures) -\let\slfSfont\stcfont % sectlof (subfigures) -\let\sltfont\stcfont % sectlot (tables) -\let\sltSfont\stcfont % sectlot (subtables) -\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries} % titles -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} -% \or\relax -% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \com{dosecttoc} and \com{secttoc} -% commands (and siblings). -% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles, -% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): -% \or\relax -% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des -% commandes \com{dosecttoc} et \com{secttoc} (et leurs cousines). -% Titres centrés, cadrés à~gauche, cadrés à~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides, -% d'après \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null} -\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null} -\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null} -\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} -\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% By default, titles are flushleft. -% \or\relax -% Par défaut, les titres sur cadrés à~gauche. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\do@stitc\l@sti -\let\df@stitc\l@sti -\let\do@stilf\l@sti -\let\df@stilf\l@sti -\let\do@stilt\l@sti -\let\df@stilt\l@sti -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse} -% \fi -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \env{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \env{verse} environment. -% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} -% and \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} package options -% are honored. -% The \env{stc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{stcoffset}). -% \or\relax -% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste très simple, analogue à~l'environnement -% standard \env{verse}. Certains paramètres de mise en page sont ajustés. Les options de paquetage -% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} et \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honorées. -% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{stcoffset}). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\stc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr - \list{}{% - \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \topsep=1ex - \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@ - \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi - \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi - \leftmargin=\stcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin - \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}% - \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}% - }% - \item[]}% -\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof}, and \ucom{sectlot} commands}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} -% These three commands are very similar. -% \or\relax -% \section{Les commandes \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof} et \ucom{sectlot}}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} -% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{secttoc} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc). -% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minitoc} (but simpler). -% First, \com{secttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{secttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{secttoc} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc -% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minitoc} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, -% \com{secttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il -% est omis. Puis, \com{secttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{secttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@secttoc@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{secttoc@} effectue le vrai travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@secttoc@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour -% construire le nom du fichier secttoc): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\secttoc@[#1]{% -\global\@secttoc@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{S\thestc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou -% est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforesecttoc}, of course, and the page style feature: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier secttoc est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du -% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesecttoc}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \beforesecttoc - \thispagesecttocstyle -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we -% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est -% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}% - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous -% établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\stcfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The secttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between -% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the secttoc. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la secttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher -% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la secttoc. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \nopagebreak[4]% - \ifx\stc@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{5} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to -% \dcnt{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des -% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire -% pour ajuster le positionnement. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{stc@verse}{\stcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth% - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{stc@setform}. -% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version -% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix -% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{stc@setform}. Puis le fichier secttoc est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \stc@setform% - \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \stc@setform% - \opensecttoc\global\insecttoctrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\insecttocfalse\closesecttoc - \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip} - \leavevmode\mtc@strut - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersecttoc}. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersecttoc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernaftersecttoc - \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{sectlof} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof). -% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilof} (but simpler). -% First, \com{sectlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlof@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{sectlof} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof -% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilof} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, -% \com{sectlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il -% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{sectlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlof@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{sectlof@} effectue le vrai travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlof@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour -% construire le nom du fichier sectlof): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sectlof@[#1]{% -\global\@sectlof@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{H\thestc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou -% est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforesectlof}, of course, and the page style feature: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier sectlof est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du -% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlof}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \thispagesectlofstyle -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}% - \beforesectlof -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{11} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we -% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est -% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\slffont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous -% établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\slffont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The sectlof title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between -% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlof. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la sectlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher -% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlof. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\slf@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \mtc@hstrut - \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to -% \dcnt{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des -% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire -% pour ajuster le positionnement. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{stc@verse}{\slfoffset}% - \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}% - {\c@lofdepth=\c@sectlofdepth - \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slf@setform}. -% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version -% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix -% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slf@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlof est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \slf@setform% - \opensectlof\global\insectloftrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\insectloffalse\closesectlof - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlof}. -% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlof}. -% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernaftersectlof - \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{sectlot} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot). -% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilot} (but simpler). -% First, \com{sectlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if -% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlot@} is called with the effective position as argument: -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{sectlot} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot -% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilot} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord, -% \com{sectlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il -% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{sectlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlot@used@} (for a consistency -% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file): -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{sectlot@} effectue le vrai travail. -% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlot@used@} -% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour -% construire le nom du fichier sectlot): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sectlot@[#1]{% -\global\@sectlot@used@true -\if@mtc@longext@% - \def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}% -\else - \def\@tocfile{I\thestc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty: -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou -% est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile} - \if@mtc@FE - \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}% - {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty} - \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first, -% \com{beforesectlot}, of course, and the page style feature: -% \or\relax -% Si le fichier sectlot est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du -% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlot}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \thispagesectlotstyle -%% \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}% - \beforesectlot -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\df@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we -% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est -% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~». -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \relax\begin{samepage}% - \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti - \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti - \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti - \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti - \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti - \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\raggedright} -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font: -% \or\relax -% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous -% établissons la fonte: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \raggedright - \parskip=\z@% - \reset@font\sltfont% - \parindent=\z@% - \nopagebreak[4]% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{environment}{tabular} -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\hline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The sectlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break -% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary. -% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlot. -% \or\relax -% Le titre de la sectlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher -% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si -% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlot. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]% - \par\noindent - \ifx\slt@rule\relax - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\ - \end{tabular}% - \else - \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}} - \mtc@hstrut - \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline - \end{tabular}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques -% paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR - \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent - \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@% - \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to -% \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. -% \or\relax -% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des -% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire -% pour ajuster le positionnement. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \begin{stc@verse}{\sltoffset}% - \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}% - {\c@lotdepth=\c@sectlotdepth - \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi} - \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version. -% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slt@setform}. -% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated. -% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file. -% \or\relax -% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version -% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix -% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slt@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlot est -% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé. -% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup - \makeatletter - \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}% - {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{} - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} - \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile - \slt@setform% - \opensectlot\global\insectlottrue - \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}% - \global\insectlotfalse\closesectlot - \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup - \end{stc@verse}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule} -% \begin{environment}{samepage} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlot}. -% \or\relax -% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlot}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \kernaftersectlof - \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\% - \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}% - \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} -% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\xsect} -% \begin{macro}{\schapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files). -% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilisées pour les mini-tables et comme délimiteurs dans le -% fichier table des matières (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux). -% La profondeur de \texttt{xsect} est énorme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous -% trichez). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@xsection{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}} -\def\xsect{xsect} \def\schapter{schapter} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} -% \or\relax -% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We patch the both branches of the \com{section} command: \com{@sect} for the unstarred version and -% \com{@ssect} for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\com{@sect}), we add a -% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restricts the action to the -% section level macros (because \com{@sect} is also used by \com{subsection} and below, which have no -% mini-tables). -% \or\relax -% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{section}: \com{@sect} pour la version non étoilée et -% \com{@ssect} pour la version étoilée. Tout d'abord, pour la version non étoilée (\com{@sect}), nous ajoutons -% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. -% Le test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \com{@sect} est -% aussi utilisée par \com{subsection} et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\sv@sect\@sect -\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% -\ifnum #2=1\relax - \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% -\fi -\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \com{starsection}), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry -% in the LOF and in the LOT. -% \or\relax -% Si c'est une section (non étoilée ou étoilée via \com{starsection}), nous ajoutons une entrée \texttt{xsect} -% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{ -\expandafter -\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax - \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% -\fi -\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax - \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@svsec} -% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa} -% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\numberline} -% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd} -% \begin{macro}{\@xsect} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the remainder of the section header formatting: -% \or\relax -% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-tête de section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax - \let\@svsec\@empty -\else - \refstepcounter{#1}% - \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}% -\fi -\@tempskipa #5\relax -\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup #6\relax - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}% - {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline - {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax - \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}% -\else - \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax - \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname - {#7}\addcontentsline - {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax - \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname} - \fi - #7}}% -\fi -\@xsect{#5}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\sectend} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we patch the unstarred branch (\com{@sect}). We define also the delimiting commands \com{sectbegin} and -% \com{sectend} commands. We do not add \com{sectbegin} if it is a subsection or deeper. -% \or\relax -% Puis nous modifions la branche non étoilée (\com{@sect}). Nous définissons aussi les commandes de délimitation -% \com{sectbegin} et \com{sectend}. Nous n'ajoutons pas \com{sectbegin} si c'est une sous-section ou plus -% profond. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\stc@sect\@sect -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2<1 \relax - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin} - \fi - \stc@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}} -\let\sectend\relax -\let\sectbegin\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande \ucom{dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dosecttoc} command is very similar to \com{dominitoc}. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dosecttoc} est très similaire à~\com{dominitoc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dosecttoc} command extracts information from the -% \suffix{.toc} file and creates the \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.stc} becomes \suffix{.S} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dosecttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.stc} devient \suffix{.S} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dosecttoc#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{stc}{0} - \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dosectlof} command extracts information from the -% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slf} becomes \suffix{.H} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dosectlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slf} devient \suffix{.H} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dosectlof#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{stc}{0} - \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{dosectlot} command extracts information from the -% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slt} becomes \suffix{.V} on MS-DOS). -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{dosectlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers -% \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slt} devient \suffix{.V} sous MS-DOS). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dosectlot#1{{% - \makeatletter - \setcounter{stc}{0} - \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui détectent l'argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}} -\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}} -\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosecttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs) -% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosecttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des secttocs) -% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dosecttoc@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dosecttoc \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dosecttoc@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosecttoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) -% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlofs) -% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosectlof@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dosectlof@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dosectlof \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dosectlof@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosectlof} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt} -% \begin{macro}{\e@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\n@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\c@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\l@sti} -% \begin{macro}{\r@sti} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs) -% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlots) -% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosectlot@[#1]{% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \if@dosectlot@used@ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The \string\dosectlot \space command - \MessageBreak - has been invoked more than once - \MessageBreak} - \global\@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -\global\@dosectlot@used@true -\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti% -\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti% -\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti% -\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti% -\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti% -\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi% -\@@dosectlot} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file -% descriptor. -% \or\relax -% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour créer le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le -% descripteur de fichier. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\STC@list{#2}% - \STC@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@toc{% - \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\stcname} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file. -% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new secttoc file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières. -% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier secttoc est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section - \stepcounter{stc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\stcname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis -% nous l'ouvrons: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% - \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% - \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\coffee} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} -% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} or \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline} ou -% \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}. -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee - \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\stcname} -% \begin{macro}{\closeout} -% \begin{macro}{\openout} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A\imess{I0033} starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file: -% \or\relax -% Une\imess{I0033} section étoilée termine la section courante et crée un nouveau fichier secttoc: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection - \stepcounter{stc}% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}% - \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}% - \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons les entrées pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@next} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{STC@next} to process the -% first one. -% \or\relax -% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des matières; nous expansons la liste des entrées et -% appelons \com{STC@next} pour traiter la première. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les -% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0016]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\STC@toc - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0026]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\STC@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file. -% \or\relax -% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\STC@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{STC@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{STC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@test} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@list} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc} -% \begin{macro}{\STC@read} -% \begin{macro}{\sectend} -% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{STC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections; -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{STC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières, -% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc - \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\SLF@list{#2}% - \SLF@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@lof{% - \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\slfname} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file. -% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlof file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures. -% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlof est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect - \stepcounter{stc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\slfname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis -% nous l'ouvrons: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}% - \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}% - \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\figure} -% \begin{macro}{\subfigure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slfS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLF@next} to process the -% first one. -% \or\relax -% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entrées et -% appelons \com{SLF@next} pour traiter la première. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les -% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0014]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\SLF@lof - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0036]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\SLF@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file. -% \or\relax -% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}. -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLF@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLF@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line - \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof} -% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read} -% \begin{macro}{\sectend} -% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{SLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections; -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{SLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures, -% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof - \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list: -% \or\relax -% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{% - \edef\SLT@list{#2}% - \SLT@loop{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Check if the list is empty: -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si la liste est vide: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@lot{% - \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\thestc} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\sltname} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file. -% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlot file is created. -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux. -% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlot est créé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% - \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect - \stepcounter{stc}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\sltname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis -% nous l'ouvrons: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@mtc@longext@% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}% - \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}% - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}% - {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}% - \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}% - \fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\table} -% \begin{macro}{\subtable} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines: -% \or\relax -% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}. -% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}% - \fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable - \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{sltS}{#3}{#4}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLT@next} to process the -% first one. -% \or\relax -% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entrées et -% appelons \com{SLT@next} pour traiter la première. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. -% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les -% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax - \ifeof\@inputcheck - \mtcPackageWarning[W0015]{minitoc}% - {No file #1 - \MessageBreak - SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}% - \expandafter\SLT@lot - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0039]{minitoc}% - {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}% - \expandafter\SLT@read\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file. -% \or\relax -% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}. -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLT@test} has enough arguments: -% \or\relax -% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SLT@read{% - \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line - \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot} -% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read} -% \begin{macro}{\sectend} -% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{SLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections; -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{SLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux, -% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{% - \ifx#1\contentsline - \let\mtc@string\string - \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% - \let\mtc@string\relax - \else\ifx#1\@input - \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}% - \else\ifx#1\sectend - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc - \else\ifx#1\sectbegin - \addtocounter{stc}{-1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi - \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot - \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the -% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to that test: -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du -% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide à~ce test: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@ -\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{16} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{mtcprepare} command}\icom{mtcprepare} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcprepare}}\icom{mtcprepare} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\jobname} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\imess{I0048} command tests the availability of the \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} minitoc preparation commands and -% of the contents files, then calls as much as possible of these preparation commands. A hint is given. -% \or\relax -% Cette\imess{I0048} commande teste la disponibilité des commandes minitoc de préparation \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} et des -% fichiers de contenu, puis appelle autant de ces commandes de préparation que possible. Un \emph{hint} est -% émis. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\mtcprepare@}{\mtcprepare@[l]}}% -\def\mtcprepare@[#1]{% -\@ifundefined{part}{}{% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\doparttoc[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dopartlof[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dopartlot[#1]}{}% -}% -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dosecttoc[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dosectlof[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dosectlot[#1]}{}% - }% -}{% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dominitoc[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dominilof[#1]}{}% -\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dominilot[#1]}{}% -}% -\if@mtc@hints@ - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0048]{minitoc(hints)}% - {Using \string\mtcprepare\space may induce some - \MessageBreak - hints about the preparation commands, - \MessageBreak - because it invokes ALL the preparation - \MessageBreak - commands allowed by the document class, - \MessageBreak - without any previous check\@gobble}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Use with \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} -% \or\relax -% \section{Utilisation avec \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\nofiles} -% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% In case the document uses the \com{nofiles} command (in its preamble), the auxiliary files for the mini-tables -% should not be overwritten by the preparation commands, so these ones must be just faked; as these commands may -% have an optional argument, they will be faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get -% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. Problem signaled by \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. -% \or\relax -% Dans le cas où le document utilise la commande \com{nofiles} (dans son préambule), les fichiers auxiliaires pour -% les mini-tables ne doivent pas être ré-écrits par les commandes de préparation, donc celles-ci doivent seulement être -% simulées; comme ces commandes peuvent avoir un argument optionnel, elles seront simulées en utilisant la -% macro interne de \LaTeX\ \com{@ifnextchar} (pour obtenir l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande -% utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. Problème signalé par \name{Andreas}{Deininger}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A test is placed in a \com{AtBeginDocument} and gives a warning if \com{nofiles} is used: -% \or\relax -% Un test est placé dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et donne un avertissement si \com{nofiles} est utilisée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{\if@filesw\relax\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0098]{minitoc}% - {--- You have used the \string\nofiles\space command - \MessageBreak - in your preamble; all preparation commands - \MessageBreak - in the body of the document will be ignored} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since \com{nofiles} has been used, we must disable all the -% preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Puisque \com{nofiles} a été utilisée, nous devons inhiber -% toutes les commandes de préparation: -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for part level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for section level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Command \com{mtcprepare}: -% \or\relax -% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% End of the inhibition of the preparation commands and of the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Fin de l'inhibition des commandes de préparation et du bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Necessary \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} -% \or\relax -% \section{Commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} nécessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \com{l@section} or \com{l@paragraph}) are required to format some -% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially: -% \or\relax -% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues à~\com{l@section} ou \com{l@paragraph}) sont requises pour -% mettre en page certaines entrées dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement -% étoilées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} -\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} -\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} -\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} -\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par défaut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of -% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are -% .4\,pt high horizontal rules. We begin with rules for mini-tables of contents. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses -% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une définition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant. -% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux épais de 0.4\,pt. Nous commençons par les filets pour les mini-tables des matières. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax} -\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax} -\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax} -\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, the rules for mini-lists of figures: -% \or\relax -% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax} -\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax} -\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax} -\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule} -% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, the rules for mini-lists of tables: -% \or\relax -% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de tableaux: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax} -\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax} -\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax} -\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}} -\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed -% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces -% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax. -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept général des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} a été proposé par -% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont été introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune -% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifiée et logique. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Keywords for the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Mots-clés pour les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via -% the \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} mechanism the following way: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros, -% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and -% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...| -% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost -% of few keyword families. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons quelques mots-clés communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-clé est créé via le -% mécanisme \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} de la manière suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abréviation}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% où \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-clés concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|, -% \emph{nom} est le mot-clé que l'utilisateur donne comme argument à~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et -% \emph{abréviation} est une chaîne utilisée pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilisée. Comme -% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs paramètres mots-clés, cette méthode peut réduire le nombre de -% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-clés. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-clés pour les types de mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plf} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plt} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf} -\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti} -\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their -% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (deliberately extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently -% used keywords. Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with -% \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} \com{endcsname}.} -% and meaning false or true\FZ: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-clés pour reconnaître les mots-clés «~\texttt{off}~» et -% «~\texttt{on}~», avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (délibérément extrême) montre la facilité de création de -% synonymes pour des mots-clés fréquemment utilisés. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-clé contient un caractère qui -% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} -% \com{endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai\,\FZ: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@-}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@-\endcsname{no} -% -\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@V{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@YN@+}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@+\endcsname{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}), -% because no contents line for a -% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'', -% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons les mots-clés pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de -% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut apparaître dans une -% mini-table, la partie étant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~représente <<~tout -% niveau~>>, et est utilisée pour établir la fonte globale par défaut pour un genre donné de mini-table. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@figure}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@figure{} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@table}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@table{} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subfigure}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subfigure{S} -\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subtable}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subtable{S} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetfont} command has the following syntax: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} a la syntaxe suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like -% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic -% commands usually. -% \or\relax -% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de -% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une spécification -% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we declare a flag, set true: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis, nous commençons la commande, qui a trois arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{E0013} two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings. -% We process the first argument, a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in -% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \cnt{mtc}. -% \or\relax -% Les\imess{E0013} deux premiers arguments sont des mots-clés. Ils doivent être traduits en chaînes effectives. -% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé dans -% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \cnt{mtc}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setfont@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setfont@false - \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0013]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{E0014} second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and -% the result is stored into a macro \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. -% Example: if \verb|#2| is the \verb|subparagraph| keyword, we get~\verb|SP|. -% \or\relax -% Le\imess{E0014} deuxième argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est traité de la même manière -% et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est le mot-clé \verb|subparagraph|, -% nous obtenons~\verb|SP|. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setfont@false - \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0014]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument - \MessageBreak - (#2). - \MessageBreak - It should be a sectionning level - \MessageBreak - (part...subparagraph) or * }% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliquée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the -% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use -% a \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pair to apply the constructed command). -% \or\relax -% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui -% est le nom de la commande pour la fonte d'une entrée de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la -% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pour appliquer la -% commande construite). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table, and -% the kind\,\footnote{``Kind'' being sectionning, (sub-)figure, or (sub-)table.} of the entry must be consistent -% with that of the mini-table), -% so we must test. Special care must be taken for testing via internal defined commands (\emph{quarks}) -% with \texttt{@mtcqk} at the end of their names). -% \or\relax -% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas légales (le niveau de l'entrée doit être plus bas que celui de la -% mini-table et le genre\,\footnote{Le <<~genre~>> étant sectionnement, (sous-)figure ou (sous)-table.} de -% l'entrée doit être cohérent avec celui de la mini-table),), donc nous devons tester. -% Un soin particulier doit être pris pour tester en utilisant -% des commandes internes définies (\emph{quarks} avec \texttt{@mtcqk} à~la fin de leurs noms). -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\parttoc@mtcqk{parttoc@mtcqk} -\def\minitoc@mtcqk{minitoc@mtcqk} -\def\secttoc@mtcqk{secttoc@mtcqk} -\def\partlof@mtcqk{partlof@mtcqk} -\def\minilof@mtcqk{minilof@mtcqk} -\def\sectlof@mtcqk{sectlof@mtcqk} -\def\partlot@mtcqk{partlot@mtcqk} -\def\minilot@mtcqk{minilot@mtcqk} -\def\sectlot@mtcqk{sectlot@mtcqk} -\def\part@mtcqk{part@mtcqk} -\def\chapter@mtcqk{chapter@mtcqk} -\def\appendix@mtcqk{appendix@mtcqk} -\def\section@mtcqk{section@mtcqk} -\def\subsection@mtcqk{subsection@mtcqk} -\def\subsubsection@mtcqk{subsubsection@mtcqk} -\def\paragraph@mtcqk{paragraph@mtcqk} -\def\subparagraph@mtcqk{subparagraph@mtcqk} -\def\figure@mtcqk{figure@mtcqk} -\def\table@mtcqk{table@mtcqk} -\def\subfigure@mtcqk{subfigure@mtcqk} -\def\subtable@mtcqk{subtable@mtcqk} -\@mtc@setfont@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\parttoc@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlof@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlot@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minitoc@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilof@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilot@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\secttoc@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlof@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlot@mtcqk\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi - \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} the combinaison is legal, -% we apply it, i.e.,~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence -% of commands given as third argument of \com{mtcsetfont} and we log that event (we store the third argument in a -% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim}); -% if the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} la combinaison est légale, -% nous l'appliquons, c'est-à-dire que nous redéfinissons la signification de la -% macro construite comme étant la séquence de commandes donnée en troisième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} et nous -% notons cet événement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} (nous rangeons le troisième argument dans un registre -% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'écrire \emph{verbatim}); -% si la combinaison n'est pas légale, un message d'erreur est affiché. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@setfont@ - \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font} - \mtc@toks{#3} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0015]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@tmp@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0024]{minitoc}% - {The macro \string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible - \MessageBreak - first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsetfont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \or\relax -% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsetfont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using -% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because -% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind. -% -% First, we declare a flag, set true: -% \or\relax -% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une -% spécification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La différence est -% l'absence du deuxième argument mot-clé, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliquées au titre de chaque -% mini-table du genre donné. -% -% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And we begin the definition of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command, which has two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Et nous commençons la définition de la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}, qui a deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0022} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into -% \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0022} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le résultat est -% rangé dans \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@settitlefont@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@settitlefont@false - \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0022]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} we build the name of the effective command and apply this command: -% \or\relax -% Puis\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@settitlefont@ - \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font} - \mtc@toks{#2}% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0018]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@tmptf@name" as - \MessageBreak - "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0034]{minitoc}% - {The macro \string\\mtcsettitlefont\space uses - \MessageBreak - an illegal type of table (#1)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command. Its syntax is almost identical: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \or\relax -% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title. -% \or\relax -% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre -% de mini-table. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we declare a flag, set true: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we define the \com{mtcsettitle} command, which has two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsettitle}, qui a deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0021} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in -% \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0021} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé -% dans \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@settitle@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@settitle@false - \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0021]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it: -% \or\relax -% Et\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@settitle@ - \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}% - \mtc@toks{#2}% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0017]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@tmpti@name" as - \MessageBreak - "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0033]{minitoc}% - {The macro \string\mtcsettitle\space uses - \MessageBreak - an illegal type of table (#1)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@namedef} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command -% can alter: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons d'abord les mots-clés (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois paramètres de mise en page -% que cette commande peut altérer: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}% -\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep} -\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}% -\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin} -\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}% -\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth} -%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available -%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetformat} command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the -% defaults values of the formatting parameters: -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcsetformat} a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en début de document pour établir les -% valeurs par défaut des paramètes de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@pnumwith} for each type of mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@pnumwith} pour chaque type de mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg} -% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@tocrmarg} for each type of mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@tocrmarg} pour chaque type de mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep} -% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@dotsep} for each type of mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@dotsep} pour chaque type de mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{4} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And we terminate the \com{AtBeginDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Et nous terminons le bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \env{mtc@verse}-like -% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \or\relax -% La partie exécutive est effectuée via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoquées dans les environnements analogues -% à~\env{mtc@verse} pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregistrées par -% \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{ptc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{ptc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ptc@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mtc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{stc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{stc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\stc@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{plf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{plf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\plf@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mlf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mlf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mlf@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{slf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{slf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\slf@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform} -% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{plt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{plt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\plt@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform} -% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mlt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{mlt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mlt@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform} -% \begin{environment}{stc@verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{slt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters: -% \or\relax -% La macro \com{slt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\slt@setform{% -\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax -\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax -\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We now define a flag and the \com{mtcsetformat} command, with has the following syntax: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of -% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Puis nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetformat}, avec syntaxe suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-paramètre} est un mot-clé de la -% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce paramètre pour le genre de mini-table donné. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true -\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0021} now process the first argument and store the result in \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{E0021} nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} -\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setformat@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setformat@false - \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0015]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{E0016} we process the second argument and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{E0016} le deuxième argument est traité et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setformat@false - \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0016]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument - \MessageBreak - (#2). - \MessageBreak - It should be a formatting param choosen from: - \MessageBreak - pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% -\else - \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} name of the storage macro is built and it receives the third parameter -% as value (\emph{via}~\com{edef} because it can contain some complex code): -% \or\relax -% Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle reçoit le troisième paramètre -% comme valeur (\emph{via}~\com{edef} car il peut contenir du code complexe): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@setformat@ - \mtc@toks{#3}% - \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0016]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines the macro - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@tmpfm@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"} - \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0025]{minitoc}% - {The macro \string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible - \MessageBreak - first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ -% \end{verse} -% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), -% or \texttt{on} and -% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and -% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. -% \or\relax -% Cette commande active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donné. Sa syntaxe est la -% suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ -% \end{verse} -% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) -% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les numéros de -% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define some flags: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false -\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro -% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, -% for the specified type of mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro -% interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro -% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. -% -% \lneed{5} -% \fi % -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax - \@ifundefined{part}{}% - {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{parttoc}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlof}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlot}{#2}} - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% - {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{minitoc}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilof}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilot}{#2}} - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{secttoc}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlof}{#2} - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlot}{#2}} - \else - \mtcsetpagenumbers@{#1}{#2}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} internal macro, with two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@}, avec deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0017} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in -% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0017} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le résultat dans -% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true -\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{} -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false - \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} - \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0017]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first - \MessageBreak - argument (#1)}% - {It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot) - \MessageBreak - Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, -% and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. -% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. -% \or\relax -% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, -% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}. -% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro exécutée. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@mtc@spn@ok@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@spn@ok@false - \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X} - \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} - \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false - \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0018]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second - \MessageBreak - argument (#2)}% - {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) - \MessageBreak - Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} - \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X} - \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} - \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers} - \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX - \mtcPackageInfo[I0022]{minitoc}% - {Page numbers are inhibited - \MessageBreak - for the #1s} - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0021]{minitoc}% - {Page numbers are activated - \MessageBreak for the #1s} - \fi - \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This macro is very similar to \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and its syntax is the same: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ -% \end{verse} -% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}), -% or \texttt{on} and -% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and -% \texttt{off} have many synonyms. -% -% Hence the code is similar. -% \or\relax -% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup à~\com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et sa syntaxe est la même: -% \begin{verse} -% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+ -% \end{verse} -% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}) -% et \texttt{on} ou -% \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et -% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes. -% -% Donc le code est similaire. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define some flags: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false -\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro -% \com{mtcsetrules@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once, -% for the specified type of mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro -% interne \com{mtcsetrules@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro -% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié. -% \fi % -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax - \@ifundefined{part}{}% - {\mtcsetrules@{parttoc}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{partlof}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{partlot}{#2}} - \@ifundefined{chapter}{}% - {\mtcsetrules@{minitoc}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{minilof}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{minilot}{#2}} - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {\mtcsetrules@{secttoc}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{sectlof}{#2} - \mtcsetrules@{sectlot}{#2}} - \else - \mtcsetrules@{#1}{#2}% - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then the \com{mtcsetrules@} internal macro, which has two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetrules@}, qui a deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetrules@}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0019} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in a macro -% \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0019} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le résultat -% dans \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setrules@true -\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{} -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setrules@false - \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} - \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0019]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1)}% - {It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot) - \MessageBreak - Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, -% and store the result in a macro \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. -% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed. -% \or\relax -% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN}, -% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}. -% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est exécutée. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@mtc@sru@ok@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@sru@ok@false - \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X} - \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X} - \@mtc@setrules@false - \mtcPackageError[E0020]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument - \MessageBreak - (#2)}% - {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...) - \MessageBreak - Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}} - \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X} - \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX} - \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule} - \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX - \mtcPackageInfo[I0008]{minitoc}% - {Horizontal rules are inhibited - \MessageBreak - for the #1s} - \else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0007]{minitoc}% - {Horizontal rules are activated - \MessageBreak - for the #1s} - \fi - \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word -% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\feat{pagestyle}'' is used. -% -% \or\relax -% Pour cette commande, nous devons définir trois familles de mots-clés, mais la troisième ne sert qu'à~ajouter le mot -% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>> est utilisé. -% -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A family (\texttt{ltypetable}) for the long names of the types of mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Une famille (\texttt{ltypetable}) pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof} -\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A family (\texttt{featureparam}) for the type of feature: -% \or\relax -% Une famille (\texttt{featureparam}) pour le type de dispositif: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}% - \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before} -\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}% - \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after} -\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@open}{open}% - \def\mtc@featureparam@open{open} -\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@close}{close}% - \def\mtc@featureparam@close{close} -\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}% - \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage} -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And a family (\texttt{ft3}) to add ``style'' if it is a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature: -% \or\relax -% Et une famille (\texttt{ft3}) pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>>: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@ft3@open}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@open\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@ft3@close}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@close\endcsname{} -\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}% - \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \com{mtcsetfeature} command has the following syntax: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of -% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which -% constitute the selected feature. -% \or\relax -% La commande \com{mtcsetfeature} a la syntaxe suivante: -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% où \emph{mini-table} est une mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-clé -% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les -% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We define a flag and the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, with three arguments: -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, qui a trois arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true -\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0011} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, and store -% the result in \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0011} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}, et rangeons le résultat -% dans \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} -\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setfeature@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setfeature@false - \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0011]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\imess{E0012} second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in -% \com{mtc@featparam@}; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the -% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \com{mtc@featparam@third}. -% \or\relax -% Le\imess{E0012} deuxième argument est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le résultat est rangé dans -% \com{mtc@featparam@}; et le complément est calculé d'après le premier argument, interprété comme un mot-clé de -% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@featparam@third}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setfeature@false - \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X} - \def\mtc@featparam@third{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0012]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument - \MessageBreak - (#2). - \MessageBreak - It should be a feature param - \MessageBreak - (before, after, open, close, pagestyle)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}} - \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three -% pieces (named \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},\space -% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev},\space and \com{mtc@featparam@third}\space respectively), then this macro is executed: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Le\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} nom de la macro effective est construit en concaténant ces trois -% morceaux (nommés \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev}, -% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} et \com{mtc@featparam@third} respectivement), puis cette macro est exécutée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@setfeature@ - \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name% - {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}% - \mtc@toks{#3}% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0014]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro - \MessageBreak - "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as - \MessageBreak - "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0023]{minitoc}% - {The macro \string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible - \MessageBreak - first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% -% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table. -% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be -% available}, i.e.,~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \pack{subfig} -% package~\cite{subfig}). -% \or\relax -% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% -% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur -% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur -% correspondant \virage\emph{doit être disponible}, c'est-à-dire qu'il doit avoir été créé (souvent par un paquetage -% adéquat, tel que le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we declare a flag, set true: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we define the \com{mtcsetdepth} command, with two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}, avec deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0009} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in -% \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0009} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le résultat est rangé -% dans \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setdepth@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setdepth@false - \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0009]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} we construct the name of the effective counter -% and gave it the value: -% \or\relax -% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif -% et lui donnons la valeur: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@setdepth@ - \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth} - \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0008]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetdepth \space attempts to use - \MessageBreak - an undefined counter (#1depth).}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{% - \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. - \mtcPackageInfo[I0013]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@tmpde@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\csname c@\mtc@tmpde@name\endcsname=#2}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0010]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% -\fi}% end of \mtcsetdepth -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetoffset} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetoffset}}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% -% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{value} is the offset value for a mini-table. -% \or\relax -% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique: -% \begin{verse} -% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}| -% \end{verse} -% -% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{valeur} est celle du déplacement -% latéral pour une mini-table. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we declare a flag, set true: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@setoffset@\@mtc@setoffset@true -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we define the \com{mtcsetoffset} command, with two arguments: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetoffset}, avec deux arguments: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcsetoffset}[2]{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} -% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{E0042} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in -% \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{E0042} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé -% dans \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} -\@mtc@setoffset@true -\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax - \@mtc@setoffset@false - \def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X} - \mtcPackageError[E0042]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetoffset \space has a wrong first argument - \MessageBreak - (#1). - \MessageBreak - It should be a mini-table type - \MessageBreak - (parttoc...sectlot)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} -\else - \edef\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpof@name} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} we construct the name of the effective offset and gave it the value: -% \or\relax -% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} nous construisons le nom du déplacement effectif -% et lui donnons la valeur: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@setoffset@ - \def\mtc@tmpof@name{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset.} - \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0041]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetoffset \space attempts to use - \MessageBreak - an undefined offset (\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset).}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{% - \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the. - \mtcPackageInfo[I0052]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetoffset\space redefines - \MessageBreak - "\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset" as "\the\mtc@toks"}% - \expandafter\def\csname \mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset\endcsname{#2}}% -\else - \mtcPackageError[E0043]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcsetoffset:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}% -\fi}% end of \mtcsetoffset -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Polymorphic entries}\label{s+code+polym} -% \or\relax -% \section{Entrées polymorphes}\label{s+code+polym} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% A toc entry should be able to have variants when it appears in the normal text (like the mandatory argument of -% a sectionning command), in a page header or in the main TOC (like the optionnal argument of a sectionning -% command), in a minitable (parttoc, minitoc or secttoc). Similar behaviour should be available for entries in th -% LOF or the LOT. So we define three commands to be used inside the optionnal argument of a sectionning command or -% of \com{caption} for a figure or a table. These commands must be robust (because used in optionnal arguments) -% and have 4~arguments: (1)~the variant to appear in a parttoc (or partlof or partlof), -% (2)~the variant to appear in a minitoc (or minilof or minilof), -% (3)~the variant to appear in a secttoc (or sectlof or sectlof). -% (4)~the variant to appear in the main TOC (or LOF or LOT). -% The variant to appear locally as title of the sectionning unit or as local caption of the figure or table is -% the mandatory argument of the sectionning command or of the caption command (see section~\vref{ss+polym}). -% We use the \verb|\ifin...| flags. -% \or\relax -% Une entrée de table des matières devrait disposer de variantes selon qu'elle apparaît dans le texte normal -% (comme l'argument obligatoire d'une commande de sectionnement), dans un en-tête de page ou dans la table des -% matières principale (comme l'argument optionnel d'une commande de sectionnement), dans une minitable (parttoc, minitoc -% ou secttoc). Un comportement similaire devrait être possible pour les entrées de la liste des figures ou des -% tableaux. Donc nous définissons trois commandes à~utiliser à~l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel d'une commande -% de sectionnement ou de celui de \com{caption} pour une figure ou un tableau. Ces commandes doivent être robustes -% (car utilisées à~l'intérieur d'un argument optionnel) et ont 4~arguments: (1)~la variante apparaissant dans une -% parttoc (ou partlof ou partlof), -% (2)~la variante apparaissant dans une a minitoc (ou minilof ou minilof), -% (3)~la variante apparaissant dans une secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlof). -% (4)~la variante apparaissant la la table des matières (ou liste des figures ou liste des tableaux) principale. -% La variante apparaissant localement comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement ou comme légende locale de la figure -% ou du tableau est l'argument obligatoire de la commande de sectionnement ou de la commande de caption (voir la -% section~\vref{ss+polym}). -% Nous utilisons les indicateurs \verb|\ifin...|. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{% - \ifinparttoc\relax{#1}% - \else\ifinminitoc\relax{#2}% - \else\ifinsecttoc\relax{#3}% - \else\relax{#4} - \fi - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries of the list of figures: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées le la liste des figures: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{% - \ifinpartlof\relax{#1}% - \else\ifinminilof\relax{#2}% - \else\ifinsectlof\relax{#3}% - \else\relax{#4} - \fi - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For entries of the list of tables: -% \or\relax -% Pour les entrées le la liste des tableaux: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{% - \ifinpartlot\relax{#1}% - \else\ifinminilot\relax{#2}% - \else\ifinsectlot\relax{#3}% - \else\relax{#4} - \fi - \fi - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment and siblings}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} et ses comparses}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The flag \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment: -% \or\relax -% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilisé pour détecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{9} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} define a macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} to save the current value -% of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}. -% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file this command and commands of the -% form \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. Note that \com{xdef} is necessary! -% It also save and restore the value of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of -% the entries in the main TOC. -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} définissons une macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} pour sauvegarder la valeur -% courante du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}. -% Notez que \com{xdef} est nécessaire! -% Puis nous définissons cet environnement, qui écrit dans le fichier table des matières cette commande et -% des commandes de la -% forme \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. -% Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}, car -% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entrées dans la table des matières principale. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtc@savetocdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}}% -\newcommand{\mtc@restoretocdepth}{\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}% -\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]% -{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\mtcPackageError[E0005]{minitoc}% - {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}% - {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% -{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\mtcPackageError[E0031]{minitoc}% - {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}% - {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false - \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\empty} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the -% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments. -% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages. -% -% First, for the list of figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} -% \or\relax -% Les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons -% véfifier la présence du compteur de profondeur associé, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements. -% Ceci doit être fait \emph{après} le chargement des paquetages. -% -% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false -\AtBeginDocument{% -\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{% - \providecommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\empty} - \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% - {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% - {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% - {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlof@true - \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% - \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% - {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% - {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% - {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlof@false - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% -}}% -{% - \newcommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{lofdepth}}}% - \newcommand{\mtc@restorelofdepth}{\setcounter{lofdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}% - \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]% - {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}% - {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}% - {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlof@true - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savelofdepth}% - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% - {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}% - {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}% - {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlof@false - \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\empty} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\arabic} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then for the list of tables:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} -% \or\relax -% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false -\AtBeginDocument{% -\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{% - \providecommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\empty} - \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% - {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% - {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% - {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlot@true - \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% - \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% - {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% - {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% - {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlot@false - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}% -}}% -{% - \newcommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{lotdepth}}}% - \newcommand{\mtc@restorelotdepth}{\setcounter{lotdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}% - \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]% - {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}% - {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}% - {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlot@true - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savelotdepth}% - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}% - {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}% - {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}% - {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi - \global\@mtc@Himlot@false - \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} -% \or\relax -% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: -% \or\relax -% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ -% \end{verse} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} on the document class, -% the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred -% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then -% stored in the macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning -% message: -% \or\relax -% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} la classe du document, -% l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé -% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La -% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui -% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0001]{minitoc}% - {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% - \MessageBreak - Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary \space without - \MessageBreak - optional argument [part]}% - \@ifundefined{part}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0001]{minitoc}% - {But \string\part\space is undefined}% - {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0006]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used - \MessageBreak - with the [part] optional argument, - \MessageBreak - which becomes the default}% - \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}% - }}% - {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}% -{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{E0026} we define a flag (\com{if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \com{mtcfixglossary}, which adds -% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{E0026} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, qui ajoute les lignes -% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false -\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{% - \@mtcfixglossary@false - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi - \if@mtcfixglossary@ - \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}% - \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax - \else - \mtcPackageError[E0026]{minitoc}% - {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary - \MessageBreak - is wrong}% - {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: -% \or\relax -% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ -% \end{verse} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} on the document class, -% the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred -% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then -% stored in the macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: -% \or\relax -% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} la classe du document, -% l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé -% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La -% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui -% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0002]{minitoc}% - {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% - \MessageBreak - Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex \space without - \MessageBreak - optional argument [part]}% - \@ifundefined{part}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0002]{minitoc}% - {But \string\part\space is undefined}% - {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0007]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with - \MessageBreak - the [part] optional argument, - \MessageBreak - which becomes the default}% - \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}% - }}% - {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}% -{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{E0027} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixindex}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF -% and the LOT. -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{E0027} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixindex}, qui ajoute les lignes nécessaires dans -% la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false -\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{% - \@mtcfixindex@false - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi - \if@mtcfixindex@ - \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}% - \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax - \else - \mtcPackageError[E0027]{minitoc}% - {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex - \MessageBreak - is wrong}% - {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Fixing the ``Nomenclature'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+ature} -% \or\relax -% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+ature} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This macro is complex. Its syntax is: -% \or\relax -% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+ -% \end{verse} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@nomenclfix@level} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} on the document class, -% the ``Nomenclature'' entry\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or -% \pack{nomentbl} package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} calls \pack{nomentbl}).} -% in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred -% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then -% stored in the macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. -% This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message: -% \or\relax -% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} la classe du document, -% l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>>\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le -% paquetage \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} appelle \pack{nomentbl}).} -% dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé -% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La -% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui -% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0095]{minitoc}% - {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.% - \MessageBreak - Cannot use \string\mtcfixnomenclature \space without - \MessageBreak - optional argument [part]}% - \@ifundefined{part}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0039]{minitoc}% - {But \string\part\space is undefined}% - {\string\mtcfixnomclature\space not usable}}% - {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0096]{minitoc}% - {\string\mtcfixnomenclature\space can only be used with - \MessageBreak - the [part] optional argument, - \MessageBreak - which becomes the default}% - \def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{part}% - }}% - {\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{section}}}% -{\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{chapter}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixnomclature@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\imess{E0040} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, -% the LOF and the LOT. -% \or\relax -% Puis\imess{E0040} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixnomclature}, qui ajoute les lignes -% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtcfixnomenclature@ \@mtcfixnomenclature@false -\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][\mtc@nomenclfix@level]{% - \@mtcfixnomenclature@false - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi - \expandafter% - \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi - \if@mtcfixnomenclature@ - \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% - \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}% - \csname mtcadd\mtc@nomenclfix@level\endcsname\relax - \else - \mtcPackageError[E0040]{minitoc}% - {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixnomenclature - \MessageBreak - is wrong}% - {It must be omitted (\mtc@nomenclfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\@input} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} command loads a minitoc language definition -% file \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to set the language-dependent -% titles for the mini-tables. -% But first, we verify that this file exists. -% The flag \com{if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro. -% \or\relax -% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} commande charge un fichier minitoc de définition -% de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour établir les -% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables. -% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier existe. -% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous sommes dans cette macro. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false -\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{% - \@mtc@insellang@true - \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}% - {\mtcPackageInfo[I0010]{minitoc}{The #1 language is selected.% - \MessageBreak - }}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0006]{minitoc}% - {#1 is not a known language, - \MessageBreak - #1.mld not found. - \MessageBreak - Command ignored}% - {See the minitoc documentation. - \MessageBreak - Correct the source using a valid language name. - \MessageBreak - Press RETURN}}% - \@mtc@insellang@false -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \ucom{mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} -% \or\relax -% \section{La commande interne \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\@input} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} to set the language-dependent -% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed. -% This command is used only in some \suffix{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal -% processing of \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. The \suffix{.mlo} files are generated by \env{filecontents} environments in the -% \xfile{minitoc.ins} file. -% But first, we verify that this \suffix{.mlo} file exists. -% -% \emph{This command}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} -% \emph{should not be invoked directly by the user. This is verified via the flag -% \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} -% \or\relax -% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} pour établir les -% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caractères exotiques sont nécessaires. -% Cette commande n'est utilisée que dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld}, lorsque les chaînes de titres ne peuvent -% pas être produites par le traitement normal de \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} sont produits -% par des environments \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier \suffix{.mlo} existe. -% -% \emph{Cette commande}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}} -% \emph{ne devrait pas être invoquée directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est vérifié grâce -% à~l'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcloadmlo#1{% - \if@mtc@insellang@ - \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}% - {\mtcPackageInfo[I0011]{minitoc}% - {#1 minitoc language object selected. - \MessageBreak}}% - {\mtcPackageError[E0007]{minitoc}% - {#1 is not a known minitoc - \MessageBreak - language object file (.mlo), - \MessageBreak - #1.mlo not found. - \MessageBreak - Command ignored}% - {See the minitoc documentation. - \MessageBreak - Correct the source using a valid language name. - \MessageBreak - Press RETURN}}% - \else - \mtcPackageError[E0032]{minitoc}% - {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command - \MessageBreak - outside of a .mld file}% - {It will be ignored} - \@mtc@insellang@false - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les <<~pauses café~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special -% entries, undotted, in the -% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks''{\myCoffeecup} in a conference. -% Hence we define \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} and -% \com{l@coffee}, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC. -% \or\relax -% Pour le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques -% commandes pour insérer des entrées spéciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des matières pour marquer les -% <<~pauses café~>>{\myCoffeecup} dans une conférence. Donc nous définissons \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} et -% \com{l@coffee}, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la -% table des matières. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{% - \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}} -\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname} -\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters} -% \or\relax -% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\setcounter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they -% are defined. -% \or\relax -% Au début du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils -% sont définis. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% -\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}} -\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}} -\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options} -% \or\relax -% \section{Déclarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These options are just setting a flag. -% \or\relax -% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} and \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} and \uopt{k-loose}}% -% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} et \uopt{k-loose}}% -% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue} -\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default -\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue} -\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} and \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} et \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files. -% \or\relax -% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuité sur les fichiers des mini-tables. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default -\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} and \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} et \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue} -\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This option will later load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}. -% \or\relax -% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\imess{W0020} option forces the use of short extensions. -% \or\relax -% Cette\imess{W0020} option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{shortext}{% - \@mtc@longext@false - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0020]{minitoc}% - {You have forced the use of short extensions}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'option \uopt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This\imess{E0035} option is available only if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined. -% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future, -% with a lot of luck (and work)\footnote{Please, do not dream too much!}. -% \or\relax -% Cette\imess{E0035} option n'est disponible que si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie et \com{section} est définie. -% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont éventuellement permises -% ensemble, peut-être dans un avenir lointain, avec beaucoup de chance (et de travail)\,\footnote{Ne révez pas trop -% quand même!}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false -\@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{\DeclareOption{insection}{% - \mtcPackageError[E0035]{minitoc}% - {You have used the `insection' option in - \MessageBreak - a document where chapters are defined. - \MessageBreak - This is not compatible: option ignored.}% - {Remove this option. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX} - }}% - {% - \DeclareOption{insection}% - {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}% - }% -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} -% \or\relax -% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \optd{listfiles} option creates a file containing a list of the auxiliary files created -% by the \upack{minitoc} package. This is the default. -% This file is named \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. -% The \opt{nolistfiles} option inhibits this listing. -% \or\relax -% L'option \optd{listfiles} crée un fichier contenant une liste des fichiers auxiliaires créés par -% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est le choix par défaut. -% Ce fichier est nommé \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. -% L'option \opt{nolistfiles} inhibe ce listage. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@listfiles@ \@mtc@listfiles@true -\DeclareOption{listfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@true} -\DeclareOption{nolistfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options} -% \or\relax -% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@LML} -% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we define an utility macro (\com{@gobblethree}), a list of the missing files -% (accumulated in the \com{mtc@listmisslanguages} macro), -% and a macro (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}) to add a file name to the list: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous définissons une macro utilitaire (\com{@gobblethree}), une liste des fichiers manquants -% (accumulée dans la macro \com{mtc@listmisslanguages}), et une macro pour ajouter un nom de fichier à~la liste -% (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{\empty} -\def\mtc@listmisslanguages{} -\def\mtc@addmisslanguage#1{% - \let\mtc@LML\mtc@listmisslanguages - \edef\mtc@listmisslanguages{\mtc@LML \MessageBreak #1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Before\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} defining a language option, -% we must verify that the corresponding \suffix{.mld} file exists, and, if -% necessary, that the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file exists. -% Hence, we must first define a flag \com{if@mtc@misslang} and -% two macros to test the presence of these files; if the files are available, we define the language option. -% \or\relax -% Avant\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} de définir une option de langue, -% nous devons vérifier si le fichier \suffix{.mld} existe, et, si -% nécessaire, que le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant existe. Donc, nous devons d'abord définir un indicateur -% \com{if@mtc@misslang} et deux macros pour tester la présence de ces fichiers; si les fichiers sont -% disponibles, nous définissons l'option de langue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@misslang\@mtc@misslangfalse -\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopt}[1]{% - \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% - {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% - {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% - {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. - \MessageBreak - The "#1" language option will not be available. - \MessageBreak - Please install it from a recent distribution - \MessageBreak - or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}}% -}% -\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopto}[1]{% - \IfFileExists{#1.mlo}% - {\mtc@setlangopt{#1}}% - {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mlo} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0051]{minitoc}% - {The required "#1.mlo" file is missing. - \MessageBreak - The "#1" language option will not be available. - \MessageBreak - Please install it from a recent distribution - \MessageBreak - or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% - \IfFileExists{#1.mld}{}% - {\@mtc@misslangtrue - \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} - \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}% - {The required "#1.mld" file is missing. - \MessageBreak - The "#1" language option will not be available. - \MessageBreak - Please install it from a recent distribution - \MessageBreak - or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} \suffix{.mld} files are mandatory (\xfile{english.mld} because english is the default language), -% so their absence is a serious error: -% \or\relax -% Certains\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} fichiers \suffix{.mld} sont obligatoires (\xfile{english.mld} car l'anglais est la langue -% par défaut), donc leur absence est une erreur sévère): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtc@setlangoptm}[1]{% - \IfFileExists{#1.mld}% - {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}% - {\@mtc@misslangtrue - \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld} - \mtcPackageError[E0038]{minitoc}% - {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. - \MessageBreak - A mandatory minitoc language object file, - \MessageBreak - #1.mld, is not found. - \MessageBreak - We will try to continue with - \MessageBreak - current/default values}% - {See the minitoc documentation. - \MessageBreak - Please fix your minitoc installation. - \MessageBreak - Press <return> to continue}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must define the default titles (english): -% \or\relax -% Nous devons définir les titres par défaut (anglais): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% - \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% - \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% - \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% - \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% - \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% - \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% - \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% - \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% -}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} -% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages} -% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, -% we signal that at the end of the document, with also the full list of the missing language files: -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} est manquant, -% nous le signalons en fin de document, avec aussi liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndDocument{% - \if@mtc@misslang - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0093]{minitoc}% - {Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing - \MessageBreak - in your installation. - \MessageBreak - Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages - \MessageBreak - in the \string\jobname.log file. - \MessageBreak - The full list of the missing language files - \MessageBreak - is given in the W0094 warning message. - \MessageBreak - Please install the missing files from - \MessageBreak - a recent distribution - \MessageBreak - or from the CTAN archives}% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0094]{minitoc}% - {Missing minitoc language file(s)\string: - \MessageBreak - \mtc@listmisslanguages\@gobblethree}% - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file via -% the specialized macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}, after verification by \com{mtc@setlangopt} or -% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (when a \suffix{.mlo} file is required), by \com{mtc@setlangoptm} when the language is -% mandatory. If the file -% does not exist, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order -% (to make maintenance easier). -% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file for -% each language option, given that this file may load another one (as \xfile{american.mld} loads \xfile{english.mld}). -% \or\relax -% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} correspondant via -% la macro spécialisée \com{mtcselectlanguage}, après vérification par \com{mtc@setlangopt} ou -% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (lorsqu'un fichier \suffix{.mlo} est requis), par \com{mtc@setlangoptm} lorsque la -% langue est obligatoire. Si le fichier -% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affiché. Les options de langue sont (devraient) être par ordre -% alphabétique (pour faciliter la maintenance). Plusieurs options pourraient charger le même fichier, mais, -% par convention, il devrait y~avoir un -% fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, étant donné que ce fichier peut en charger un autre -% (ainsi \xfile{francais.mld} charge-t-il \xfile{french.mld}). -% \fi -% \raggedcolumns -% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macrocode} -\mtc@setlangopt{acadian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{acadien}% -\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaan}% -\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaans}% -\mtc@setlangopt{albanian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{american}% -\mtc@setlangopt{arab}% -\mtc@setlangopt{arab2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{arabi}% -\mtc@setlangopt{arabic}% -\mtc@setlangopt{armenian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{australian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{austrian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bahasa}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bahasai}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bahasam}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bangla}% -\mtc@setlangopt{basque}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bengali}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bicig}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bicig2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bicig3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bithe}% -\mtc@setlangopt{brazil}% -\mtc@setlangopt{brazilian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{breton}% -\mtc@setlangopt{british}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarianb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{buryat}% -\mtc@setlangopt{buryat2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{canadian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{canadien}% -\mtc@setlangopt{castillan}% -\mtc@setlangopt{castillian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{catalan}% -\mtc@setlangopto{chinese1}% -\mtc@setlangopto{chinese2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{croatian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{czech}% -\mtc@setlangopt{danish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{devanagari}% -\mtc@setlangopt{dutch}% -\mtc@setlangoptm{english}% -\mtc@setlangopt{english1}% -\mtc@setlangopt{english2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{esperant}% -\mtc@setlangopt{esperanto}% -\mtc@setlangopt{estonian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopia}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{farsi1}% -\mtc@setlangopto{farsi2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{farsi3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{finnish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{finnish2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{francais}% -\mtc@setlangopt{french}% -\mtc@setlangopt{french1}% -\mtc@setlangopt{french2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{frenchb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{frenchle}% -\mtc@setlangopt{frenchpro}% -\mtc@setlangopt{galician}% -\mtc@setlangopt{german}% -\mtc@setlangopt{germanb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{germanb2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{greek}% -\mtc@setlangopt{greek-mono}% -\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polydemo}% -\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polykatha}% -\mtc@setlangopt{guarani}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hangul1}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hangul2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hangul3}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hangul4}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hangul-u8}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hanja1}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hanja2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{hanja-u8}% -\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew}% -\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{hindi}% -\mtc@setlangopt{hindi-modern}% -\mtc@setlangopt{hungarian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{icelandic}% -\mtc@setlangopt{indon}% -\mtc@setlangopt{indonesian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{interlingua}% -\mtc@setlangopt{irish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{italian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{italian2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese3}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese4}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese5}% -\mtc@setlangopto{japanese6}% -\mtc@setlangopt{kannada}% -\mtc@setlangopt{khalkha}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latin}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latin2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latinc}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latinc2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latvian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{latvian2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{letton}% -\mtc@setlangopt{letton2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{lowersorbian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{lsorbian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{magyar}% -\mtc@setlangopt{magyar2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{magyar3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malay}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-b}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-mr}% -\mtc@setlangopto{malayalam-omega}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{manju}% -\mtc@setlangopt{mexican}% -\mtc@setlangopt{meyalu}% -\mtc@setlangopt{mongol}% -\mtc@setlangopt{mongolb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{mongolian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{naustrian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ngerman}% -\mtc@setlangopt{newzealand}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{norsk}% -\mtc@setlangopt{norsk2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk}% -\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{occitan}% -\mtc@setlangopt{occitan2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{polish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{polish2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{polski}% -\mtc@setlangopt{portuges}% -\mtc@setlangopt{portuguese}% -\mtc@setlangopt{romanian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{romanian2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{romanian3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{russian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{russianb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{russianc}% -\mtc@setlangopt{russian2m}% -\mtc@setlangopt{russian2o}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca1}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lh}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyralt}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrkoi}% -\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrwin}% -\mtc@setlangopt{samin}% -\mtc@setlangopt{scottish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{serbian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{serbianc}% -\mtc@setlangopt{slovak}% -\mtc@setlangopt{slovene}% -\mtc@setlangopt{spanish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{spanish2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{spanish3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{spanish4}% -\mtc@setlangopt{swahili}% -\mtc@setlangopt{swedish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{swedish2}% -\mtc@setlangopto{thai}% -\mtc@setlangopt{turkish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{uighur}% -\mtc@setlangopt{uighur2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{uighur3}% -\mtc@setlangopt{UKenglish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ukraineb}% -\mtc@setlangopt{ukrainian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{uppersorbian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{USenglish}% -\mtc@setlangopt{usorbian}% -\mtc@setlangopt{vietnam}% -\mtc@setlangopt{vietnamese}% -\mtc@setlangopt{welsh}% -\mtc@setlangopt{xalx}% -\mtc@setlangopt{xalx2}% -\mtc@setlangopt{xalx3}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \end{multicols}} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} -% \or\relax -% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We declare the \optd{hints} (default) and \opt{nohints} options: -% \or\relax -% Nous déclarons les options \optd{hints} (défaut) et \opt{nohints}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true} -\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \optd{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, is executed via -% \com{AtBeginDocument} and looks if some packages or classes are loaded, then gives warnings about their compatibility -% with \upack{minitoc}. -% \or\relax -% L'option \optd{hints} est constituée de trois parties: la première, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, est exécutée -% via \com{AtBeginDocument} et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont chargés, puis donne des -% avertissements à~propos de leur compatibilité avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \upack{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros -% are called in the right order. -% \or\relax -% La deuxième partie est faite de petits fragments de code insérés dans le code de \upack{minitoc}, pour vérifier -% que certaines macros sont appelées dans le bon ordre. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The third and last part, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, is executed via \com{AtEndDocument} and examines the flags set -% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} -% file and/or warnings on the screen and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% The \optd{hints} option \virage\emph{does not signal errors}, only infos -% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run. -% \or\relax -% La troisième et dernière partie, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument} et examine -% les indicateurs positionnés par les première et deuxième parties. Puis, si nécessaire, elle écrit quelques -% informations dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'écran -% et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% L'option \optd{hints} \virage\emph{ne signale pas d'erreurs}, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et -% donc n'interrompt pas l'exécution de \LaTeX. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{First part: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Première partie: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0049} declare some flags and the first part of the \optd{hints} option (for an \com{AtBeginDocument} block): -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0049} déclarons quelques indicateurs et la première partie de l'option \optd{hints} -% (pour un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@ \@mtc@abstract@loaded@false -\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false -\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false -\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false -\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{% -\mtcPackageInfo[I0049]{minitoc(hints)}% - {==> You requested the hints option. - \MessageBreak - Some hints are eventually given below\@gobble}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{alphanum} package}\ipack{alphanum} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}\ipack{alphanum} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} test the presence of the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}), -% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la -% classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} -% avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{alphanum}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0025]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The alphanum package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0042} test the presence of the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0042} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{% -\@mtc@hints@given@true -\mtcPackageInfo[I0042]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The appendix package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocbibind} package}\ipack{tocbibind} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocbibind}}\ipack{tocbibind} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0046} test the presence of the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0046} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0046]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The tocbibind package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \KOMAScript{} classes} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \KOMAScript} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0043} test the presence of each \upack{minitoc}-compatible \KOMAScript{} -% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0043} testons la présence de chaque classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible -% avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The KOMAScript scrbook class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The KOMAScript scrreprt class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The KOMAScript scrartcl class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0047} test the presence of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0047} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0047]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The tocloft package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titlesec} package}\ipack{titlesec} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titlesec}}\ipack{titlesec} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} test the presence of the \pack{titlesec} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, -% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}, -% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0099]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The titlesec package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titletoc} package}\ipack{titletoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titletoc}}\ipack{titletoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} test the presence of the \pack{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, -% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc}, -% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0040]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The titletoc package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{placeins} package}\ipack{placeins} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{placeins}}\ipack{placeins} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} test if the \pack{placeins} -% package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check if the selected options are correct (see section~\vref{rem+FB}): -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} testons si le paquetage -% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est chargé et, si oui, nous regardons si les options choisies -% sont correctes (voir la section~\vref{rem+FB}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% - {\if@mtc@ss@insection@ - \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section}{}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0031]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The placeins package is loaded - \MessageBreak - without the section option, - \MessageBreak - but minitoc used the insection option - \MessageBreak - which implies it. Try to inverse the - \MessageBreak - loading order and use consistent options. - \MessageBreak - You may have got a message - \MessageBreak - ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}% - }% - \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{above}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0084]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The placeins package is loaded - \MessageBreak - with the above option, - \MessageBreak - but minitoc used the insection option - \MessageBreak - which is incompatible with it. - \MessageBreak - Try to remove the above option - \MessageBreak - and use consistent options}% - }{}% - \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{below}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0085]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The placeins package is loaded - \MessageBreak - with the below option, - \MessageBreak - but minitoc used the insection option - \MessageBreak - which is incompatible with it. - \MessageBreak - Try to remove the below option - \MessageBreak - and use consistent options}% - }{}% - \fi - \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{% - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0032]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The placeins package loaded is - \MessageBreak - too old. You should use a version - \MessageBreak - dated of 2005/04/18 at least}% - }% - }{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0044} test if the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0044} testons si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{memoir}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0044]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The memoir class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% - }{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsart} and \uclass{amsproc} classes}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \uclass{amsart} et \uclass{amsproc}}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} test if the \class{amsart} or \class{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning, -% because these classes are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} regardons si l'une des classes \class{amsart} ou \class{amsproc} a été chargée -% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ces classes sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{amsart}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0026]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The amsart class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the minitoc package}}{}% -\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0027]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The amsproc class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsbook} class}\iclass{amsbook} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{amsbook}}\iclass{amsbook} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0041} test if the \class{amsbook} class is loaded: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0041} testons si la classe \class{amsbook} est chargée: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0041]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The amsbook class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - See the minitoc package documentation - \MessageBreak - for specific precautions\@gobble}{}% - }{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{abstract} package}\ipack{abstract} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\ipack{abstract} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0040} test the presence of the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options: -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0040} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}% - {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true% - \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageInfo[I0040]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The ``abstract'' package has been - \MessageBreak - loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option. - \MessageBreak - You need to look at the - \MessageBreak - documentation to adjust. - \MessageBreak} - }}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{jura} class}\iclass{jura} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{jura}}\iclass{jura} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} test if the \class{jura} class is loaded and emit a warning, because this class is -% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} regardons si la classe \class{jura} a été chargée et émettons un -% avertissement, puisque cette classe est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifclassloaded{jura}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0029]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The jura class is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{flowfram} package}\ipack{flowfram} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}\ipack{flowfram} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} test the presence of the \pack{flowfram} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, -% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, -% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifpackageloaded{flowfram}% - {\@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0097]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The flowfram package is loaded. - \MessageBreak - It is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the minitoc package}}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'altération des commandes de sectionnement} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To check if the sectionning commands \com{part}, \com{chapter} or \com{section} have been altered by some -% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing an \com{AtBeginDocument} block) with their saved -% versions (saved by the -% \upack{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \com{mtc@hints@part}, \com{mtc@hints@chapter} and -% \com{mtc@hints@section}. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself, -% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} may interfere, -% hence the formal precautions in the messages. -% \or\relax -% Pour vérifier si les commandes de sectionnement \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ont été altérées -% par un paquetage ou dans le préambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'exécution d'un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}) -% avec leurs versions sauvegardées (par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \com{mtc@hints@part}, -% \com{mtc@hints@chapter} et \com{mtc@hints@section}. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous -% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-même, sa branche non étoilée et sa branche étoilée. Mais le -% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} peut interférer, d'où les précautions formelles dans les messages. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{part}}\icom{part} -% \or\relax -% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{part}}\icom{part} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} -% \begin{macro}{\@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart} ont été altérées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@mtc@hints@w@false -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} -\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0030]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The \string\part\space command is altered - \MessageBreak - after minitoc} - \if@mtc@hyper@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- It may be the consequence - \MessageBreak - of loading the ``hyperref'' package} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} -% \or\relax -% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter} ont été altérées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@mtc@hints@w@false -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax - \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}% -\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0028]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered - \MessageBreak - after minitoc} - \if@mtc@hyper@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- It may be the consequence - \MessageBreak - of loading the ``hyperref'' package} - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{section}}\icom{section} -% \or\relax -% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{section}}\icom{section} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect}: -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect} ont été altérées: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@mtc@hints@w@false -\@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else - \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} - \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else - \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} - \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else - \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi} -\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0039]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- The \string\section\space command is altered - \MessageBreak - after minitoc} - \if@mtc@hyper@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}% - {--- It may be the consequence - \MessageBreak - of loading the ``hyperref'' package} - \fi - \relax\else\fi}{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about the consistency of the calling sequences of the commands} -% And finally, we prepare the consistency tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands -% like \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} and \fkcom{tableofcontents}, and similar: to be able to use -% \com{parttoc}, a table of contents file must have been -% created via \fkcom{tableofcontents} and splitted into parttoc files via \com{doparttoc}. -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la cohérence des séquences d'appel des commandes} -% Et enfin, nous préparons les tests de cohérence sur les séquences d'appel de triplets de commandes associées -% telles que \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} et \fkcom{tableofcontents}, et similaires: pour pouvoir -% utiliser \com{parttoc}, un fichier table des matières doit avoir été créé via \fkcom{tableofcontents} et -% éclaté en fichiers parttocs via \com{doparttoc}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Hence we initialize some flags: -% \or\relax -% Donc nous initialisons quelques indicateurs: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@hints@ -\global\@mtc@toc@used@false -\global\@mtc@lof@used@false -\global\@mtc@lot@used@false -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\listoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for -% the main summaries: -% \or\relax -% Puis nous modifions les commandes concernées pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont -% utilisées. Nous commençons par les commandes des sommaires principaux: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents -\def\tableofcontents% - {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents} -\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures -\def\listoffigures% - {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures} -\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables -\def\listoftables% - {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, their ``fake'' siblings: -% \or\relax -% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents\faketableofcontents -\def\faketableofcontents% - {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents} -\let\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures\fakelistoffigures -\def\fakelistoffigures% - {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures} -\let\mtc@sv@fklistoftables\fakelistoftables -\def\fakelistoftables% - {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoftables} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} definition is finished (it begins in -% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): -% \or\relax -% Et la définition de \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} est terminée (elle avait commencé à~la -% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Final part: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Partie finale: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The final part of the \optd{hints} option is executed via \com{AtEndDocument}. Its code is in the -% \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set -% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro: -% \or\relax -% La partie finale de l'option \optd{hints} est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument}. Son code est dans la -% macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}. C'est une séquence de tests sur les paquetages et classes chargés et sur les -% indicateurs positionnés durant les première et deuxième parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous déclarons -% la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Hint about \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested. -% \or\relax -% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont été demandées au niveau section. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi -\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi -\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi -\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi -\if@mtc@section@def@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\imess{W0056} yes, we verify that the -% \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \opt{insection} -% option of the \upack{minitoc} package has been invoked. -% If not, a warning is given. -% \or\relax -% Si\imess{W0056} oui, nous -% vérifions que le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a été chargé avec les options correctes ou que -% l'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été invoquée. -% Sinon, un avertissement est émis. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \else - \if@mtc@sect@floats@% - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0056]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or - \MessageBreak - \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot, - \MessageBreak - hence the ``insection'' package - \MessageBreak - option is recommended}% - \@mtc@hints@w@true \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the consistency tests}\label{ss+final.coh} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de cohérence}\label{ss+final.coh} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test if \com{parttoc} has been used without \com{doparttoc}, etc., for each pair -% of preparation/insertion commands. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons si \com{parttoc} a été utilisée \com{doparttoc}, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes -% préparation/insertion. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} the part level commands: -% \or\relax -% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} les commandes au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@part@def@ - \if@parttoc@used@ - \if@doparttoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0062]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\parttoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\doparttoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@partlof@used@ - \if@dopartlof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0060]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\partlof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dopartlof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@partlot@used@ - \if@dopartlot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0061]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\partlot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dopartlot} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} the chapter level commands: -% \or\relax -% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} les commandes au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@chapter@def@ - \if@minitoc@used@ - \if@dominitoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0059]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minitoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dominitoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@minilof@used@ - \if@dominilof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0057]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minilof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dominilof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@minilot@used@ - \if@dominilot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0058]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minilot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dominilot} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} the section level commands: -% \or\relax -% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} les commandes au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@section@def@ - \if@secttoc@used@ - \if@dosecttoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0065]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\secttoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dosecttoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@sectlof@used@ - \if@dosectlof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0063]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\sectlof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dosectlof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@sectlot@used@ - \if@dosectlot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0064]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\sectlot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\dosectlot} - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (première partie)?} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Now, we test if a \com{doparttoc} macro has been called but without any matching \com{parttoc}, hence it is a -% vain call. We do the same for each analog command. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \com{doparttoc} a été appelée sans aucune commande \com{parttoc} -% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de même pour chaque commande analogue. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@part@def@ - \if@doparttoc@used@ - \if@parttoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0075]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\doparttoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\parttoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dopartlof@used@ - \if@partlof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0076]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dopartlof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\partlof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dopartlot@used@ - \if@partlot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0077]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dopartlot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\partlot} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@chapter@def@ - \if@dominitoc@used@ - \if@minitoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0078]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dominitoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\minitoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dominilof@used@ - \if@minilof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0079]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dominilof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\minilof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dominilot@used@ - \if@minilot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0080]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dominilot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\minilot} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@section@def@ - \if@dosecttoc@used@ - \if@secttoc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0081]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dosecttoc, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\secttoc} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dosectlof@used@ - \if@sectlof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0082]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dosectlof, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\sectlof} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@dosectlot@used@ - \if@sectlot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0083]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\dosectlot, - \MessageBreak - but not \string\sectlot} - \fi - \fi -\fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (seconde partie)?} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Another consistency test verifies that if the macro \com{parttoc} has been called, -% then the macro \com{tableofcontents} or \com{faketableofcontents} has also been called -% (to create the necessary contents file); similar tests are made -% for the other mini-table commands. -% \or\relax -% Un autre test de cohérence vérifie que si la macro \com{parttoc} a été appelée, -% alors la macro \com{tableofcontents} ou -% \com{faketableofcontents} a aussi été appelée (créant le fichier de contenu nécessaire); des tests -% analogues sont faits pour les autres commandes de mini-tables. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@part@def@ - \if@parttoc@used@ - \if@mtc@toc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0071]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\parttoc\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\tableofcontents - \MessageBreak - nor \string\faketableofcontents} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@partlof@used@ - \if@mtc@lof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0069]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\partlof\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoffigures - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoffigures} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@partlot@used@ - \if@mtc@lot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0070]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\partlot\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoftables - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoftables} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@chapter@def@ - \if@minitoc@used@ - \if@mtc@toc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0068]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minitoc\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\tableofcontents - \MessageBreak - nor \string\faketableofcontents} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@minilof@used@ - \if@mtc@lof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0066]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minilof\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoffigures - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoffigures} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@minilot@used@ - \if@mtc@lot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0067]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\minilot\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoftables - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoftables} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} level commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@section@def@ - \if@secttoc@used@ - \if@mtc@toc@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0074]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\secttoc\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\tableofcontents - \MessageBreak - nor \string\faketableofcontents} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@sectlof@used@ - \if@mtc@lof@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0072]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\sectlof\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoffigures - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoffigures} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi - \if@sectlot@used@ - \if@mtc@lot@used@\else - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0073]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used \string\sectlot\space but not - \MessageBreak - \string\listoftables - \MessageBreak - nor \string\fakelistoftables} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\value} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} short extensions are used, -% you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary -% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| has its name truncated to -% \com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The -% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On -% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document. -% \or\relax -% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} les suffixes courts sont utilisés, -% vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de -% mini-tables sont créées, les fichiers auxiliaires seront écrasés; le centième fichier minitoc \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| -% a son nom tronqué à\com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, qui est déjà le dixième fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une -% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le remède est amer et -% coûteux: soit utiliser un meilleur système d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.}, -% soit revoir la conception du document. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{% -\if@mtc@longext@ -\else - \if@mtc@part@def@ - \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0054]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used short extensions - \MessageBreak - and more than 99 parts (\arabic{ptc})} - \fi - \fi - \if@mtc@chapter@def@ - \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0053]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used short extensions - \MessageBreak - and more than 99 chapters (\arabic{mtc})} - \fi - \else - \if@mtc@section@def@ - \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0055]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have used short extensions - \MessageBreak - and more than 99 sections (\arabic{stc})} - \fi - \fi - \fi -\fi} -\mtc@hints@checklongext -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0037} test if \pack{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0037} testons si \pack{sectsty} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0037]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The sectsty package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{varsects} package}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0038} test if \pack{varsects} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0038} testons si \pack{varsects} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0038]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The varsects package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0086} test if \pack{fncychap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0086} testons si \pack{fncychap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0086]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The fncychap package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0092} test if \pack{hangcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0092} testons si \pack{hangcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0092]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The hangcaption package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0087} test if \pack{quotchap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0087} testons si \pack{quotchap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0087]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The quotchap package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{romannum} package}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0088} test if \pack{romannum} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0088} testons si \pack{romannum} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0088]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The romannum package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0089} test if \pack{sfheaders} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0089} testons si \pack{sfheaders} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0089]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The sfheaders package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0090} test if \pack{alnumsec} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0090} testons si \pack{alnumsec} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0090]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The alnumsec package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{captcont} package}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0091} test if \pack{captcont} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0091} testons si \pack{captcont} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0091]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The captcont package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption} package}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption}}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0033} test if \pack{caption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0033} testons si \pack{caption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@captionLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0033]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The caption package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption2} package}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption2}}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0034} test if \pack{caption2} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0034} testons si \pack{caption2} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@\else - \if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0034]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The caption2 package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{ccaption} package}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{ccaption}}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0035} test if \pack{ccaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0035} testons si \pack{ccaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0035]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The ccaption package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{mcaption} package}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{mcaption}}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{W0036} test if \pack{mcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{W0036} testons si \pack{mcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@\else - \if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0036]{minitoc(hints)}% - {The mcaption package should be - \MessageBreak - loaded BEFORE the minitoc package} - \@mtc@hints@given@true - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{float} package}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{float}}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{float} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+float.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{float} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@floatLoaded@\ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have loaded the float package; - \MessageBreak - please be aware that the minitoc package - \MessageBreak - facilities can not be used for new types - \MessageBreak - of floats defined by the float package\@gobble} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{floatrow} package}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{floatrow}}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{floatrow} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{floatrow} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@\ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have loaded the floatrow package; - \MessageBreak - please be aware that the minitoc package - \MessageBreak - facilities can not be used for new types - \MessageBreak - of floats defined by the floatrow package\@gobble} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{trivfloat} package}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{trivfloat}}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{trivfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{trivfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@\ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have loaded the trivfloat package; - \MessageBreak - please be aware that the minitoc package - \MessageBreak - facilities can not be used for new types - \MessageBreak - of floats defined by the trivfloat package\@gobble} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{rotfloat} package}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{rotfloat}}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{rotfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{rotfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@\ - \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have loaded the rotfloat package; - \MessageBreak - please be aware that the minitoc package - \MessageBreak - facilities can not be used for new types - \MessageBreak - of floats defined by the rotfloat package\@gobble} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont été détectées} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We test for each kind of mini-tables. -% \or\relax -% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For parttocs:\imess{W0046} -% \or\relax -% Pour les parttocs:\imess{W0046} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0046]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty parttocs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For partlofs:\imess{W0044} -% \or\relax -% Pour les partlofs:\imess{W0044} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0044]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty partlofs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For partlots:\imess{W0045} -% \or\relax -% Pour les partlots:\imess{W0045} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0045]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty partlots} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For minitocs:\imess{W0043} -% \or\relax -% Pour les minitocs:\imess{W0043} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0043]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty minitocs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For minilofs:\imess{W0041} -% \or\relax -% Pour les minilofs:\imess{W0041} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0041]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty minilofs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For minilots:\imess{W0042} -% \or\relax -% Pour les minilots:\imess{W0042} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0042]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty minilots} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For secttocs:\imess{W0049} -% \or\relax -% Pour les secttocs:\imess{W0049} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0049]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty secttocs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For sectlofs:\imess{W0047} -% \or\relax -% Pour les sectlofs:\imess{W0047} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0047]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty sectlofs} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For sectlots:\imess{W0048} -% \or\relax -% Pour les sectlots:\imess{W0048} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0048]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have attempted to insert - \MessageBreak - empty sectlots} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG -% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsolètes ont été utilisées} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG -% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled -% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. -% \or\relax -% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas où vous auriez utilisé des commandes obsolètes, qui sont aussi -% signalées dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Obsolete macro \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} -% \or\relax -% Macro obsolète \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@firstpartis@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0051]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command: \string\firstpartis} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Obsolete macro \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} -% \or\relax -% Macro obsolète \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@firstchapteris@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0050]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command: \string\firstchapteris} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Obsolete macro \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} -% \or\relax -% Macro obsolète \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052} -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@firstsectionis@used@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0052]{minitoc(hints)}% - {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored) - \MessageBreak - command: \string\firstsectionis} - \@mtc@hints@given@true -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written} -% \or\relax -% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont été écrits} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} come at the end of the third part of the \optd{hints} option: -% if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed; -% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file if no problems have been detected. -% And we terminate the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro by a closing brace. -% \or\relax -% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} arrivons à~la fin de la troisième partie de l'option \optd{hints}: -% si des problèmes ont été détectés, un -% avertissement est affiché; cet avertissement n'est pas affiché mais seulement écrit dans le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} si aucun problème n'a été détecté. Et nous terminons la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} -% par une accolade fermante. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@hints@given@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0024]{minitoc(hints)}% - {Some hints have been written - \MessageBreak - in the \jobname.log file} -\else - \mtcPackageInfo[I0019]{minitoc(hints)}% - {No hints have been written - \MessageBreak - in the \jobname.log file.\@gobble} -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options} -% \or\relax -% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, if possible, we apply the default language option, \loptd{english}: -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, si possible, nous exécutons l'option de langue par défaut, \loptd{english}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \InputIfFileExists{english.mld}% - {\ExecuteOptions{english}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} -% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Else,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} we signal a severe error and provide the missing default titles: -% \else\relax -% Sinon,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} nous signalons une erreur sévère et fournissons les titres par défaut manquants: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - {\mtcPackageError[E0036]{minitoc}% - {Your minitoc installation is incomplete. - \MessageBreak - The minitoc language object file (.mld), - \MessageBreak - english.mld is not found. - \MessageBreak - We will try to continue with default values}% - {See the minitoc documentation. - \MessageBreak - Please fix your minitoc installation. - \MessageBreak - Press <return> to continue}% - \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}% - \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}% - \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}% - \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}% - \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}% - \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}% - \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}% - \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}% - \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the -% language options. -% \or\relax -% Puis nous exécutons toutes les options demandées; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement -% à~positionner un indicateur, ou à~charger un fichier pour les options de langue. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions* -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions. -% \or\relax -% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et exécutons les actions nécessaires. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@} -% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \opt{insection} option, we load the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options -% \optp{verbose}{placeins} and \optp{section}{placeins}, after the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput} -% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); the correct loading is verified: -% \or\relax -% Pour l'option \opt{insection}, nous chargeons -% le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options -% \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}, après le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput} -% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}); le chargement correct est vérifié: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@ss@insection@ - \RequirePackage{flafter}[2000/07/23]% - \RequirePackage[section,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]% - \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}% - {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}{\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{notoccite} option}\iopt{notoccite} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@} -% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \opt{notoccite} option, we just load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}: -% \or\relax -% Pour l'option \opt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@notoccite@ - \RequirePackage{notoccite}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{listfiles} option}\ioptd{listfiles} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{listfiles}}\ioptd{listfiles} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@long} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@short} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addtomaf} -% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists} -% \begin{macro}{\jobname} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{I0009} define the \com{mtc@maf} macro which closes \com{tf@mtc} -% and reopens it to write into the file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. -% It calls \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} (long or short extensions), then -% closes \com{tf@mtc}. \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} writes the names of the existing auxiliary -% files using decrementing loops on the associated counters, and includes \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} in the list -% (but \emph{not} the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Some users could made a cleanup using this file as a list of -% files to delete, so it must not be in the list.} file). -% We must also check the existence of \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} if long extensions are used. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{I0009} définissons la macro \com{mtc@maf} qui ferme \com{tf@mtc} -% puis le ré-ouvre pour écrire dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. -% Elle appelle \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} (suffixes longs ou courts), puis ferme \com{tf@mtc}. -% \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} écrit les noms des fichiers auxiliaires existants en utilisant des boucles -% par ordre décroissant sur les compteurs associés, et inclut \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} dans la liste -% (mais \emph{pas} le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Certains utilisateurs pourraient faire un nettoyage -% en utilisant ce fichier comme liste des fichiers à~détruire, donc il ne doit pas être dans la liste.}). -% Nous devons aussi tester l'existence de \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} si les suffixes longs sont utilisés. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@maf{% - \mtcPackageInfo[I0009]{minitoc}% - {Listing minitoc auxiliary files. - \MessageBreak - Creating the \jobname.maf file\@gobble} - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc - \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.maf - \if@mtc@longext@\mtc@maf@long\else\mtc@maf@short\fi - \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc} -\def\mtc@addtomaf#1{% - \IfFileExists{#1}{\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}}{}} -\def\mtc@maf@long{% - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc0} -\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.ptc\arabic{ptc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plf\arabic{ptc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plt\arabic{ptc}} - \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} -\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{% - \loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc\arabic{mtc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlf\arabic{mtc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlt\arabic{mtc}} - \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} -\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.stc\arabic{stc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slf\arabic{stc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slt\arabic{stc}} - \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} -\def\mtc@maf@short{% - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc} -\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.P\arabic{ptc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.G\arabic{ptc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.U\arabic{ptc}} - \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat} -\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.M\arabic{mtc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.F\arabic{mtc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.T\arabic{mtc}} - \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat} -\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.S\arabic{stc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.H\arabic{stc}} - \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.V\arabic{stc}} - \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% If this option is active, we call \com{mtc@maf} in an \com{AtEndDocument} block. -% \or\relax -% Si cette option est active, nous appellons \com{mtc@maf} dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@listfiles@{\AtEndDocument{\mtc@maf}}\else\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc} -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \optd{hints} option, we set its first part in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block and its third (last) part -% in an \com{AtEndDocument} block: -% \or\relax -% Pour l'option \optd{hints}, nous plaçons sa première partie dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et sa -% troisième (dernière) partie dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\if@mtc@hints@ - \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}% - \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}% -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands} -% \or\relax -% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches), -% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \optd{hints} option executed in the preamble): -% \or\relax -% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les définitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non étoilées et -% étoilées), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \optd{hints} exécutée dans le préambule). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part} -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part} -% \begin{macro}{\@part} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart} -% \begin{macro}{\@spart} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \com{part} command: -% \or\relax -% Pour la commande \com{part}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part - \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part - \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \vspace{3\baselineskip} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@chapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter} -% \begin{macro}{\@schapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \com{chapter} command: -% \or\relax -% Pour la commande \com{chapter}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter - \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter - \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \vspace{3\baselineskip} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section} -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect} -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For the \com{section} command: -% \or\relax -% Pour la commande \com{section}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section - \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect - \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Trapping the undefined preparation and insertion commands}\label{s+undef+trap} -% \or\relax -% \section{Interception des commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies}\label{s+undef+trap} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@classck} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% It\imess{E0037} may happen that you use a preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}) or an insertion command -% (like \com{dominitoc}) in a document using a class where that command is not available (like -% \class{article}). To get a better diagnostic for such errors, we intercept such commands by providing a default -% definition which just emits an error message. These default definitions are made in an \com{AtBeginDocument} -% block. -% \or\relax -% Il\imess{E0037} peut arriver que vous utilisiez une commande de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc}) ou une commande -% d'insertion (comme \com{dominitoc}) dans un document utilisant une classe pour laquelle cette commande n'est pas -% disponible (comme \class{article}). Pour obtenir un meilleur diagnostic pour ce type d'erreurs, nous interceptons de -% telles commandes en fournissant une définition par défaut qui émet simplement un message d'erreur. Ces définitions -% par défaut sont faites dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtc@classck#1{% - \mtcPackageError[E0037]{minitoc}% - {The \csname #1\endcsname\space command is incompatible - \MessageBreak - with the document class}% - {Correct the source code. - \MessageBreak - Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% An \com{AtBeginDocument} bloc: -% \or\relax -% Un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\providecommand} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Part-level preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes de préparation au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\doparttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{doparttoc}}% - \providecommand{\dopartlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlof}}% - \providecommand{\dopartlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter-level preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes de préparation au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\dominitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominitoc}}% - \providecommand{\dominilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilof}}% - \providecommand{\dominilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section-level preparation commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes de préparation au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\dosecttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosecttoc}}% - \providecommand{\dosectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlof}}% - \providecommand{\dosectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Part-level insertion commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes d'insertion au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\parttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{parttoc}}% - \providecommand{\partlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlof}}% - \providecommand{\partlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Chapter-level insertion commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes d'insertion au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\minitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minitoc}}% - \providecommand{\minilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilof}}% - \providecommand{\minilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilot}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Section-level insertion commands: -% \or\relax -% Commandes d'insertion au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand{\secttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{secttoc}}% - \providecommand{\sectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlof}}% - \providecommand{\sectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlot}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% ^^A \vspace{3\baselineskip} -% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{19.45525292mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.727626459mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And\ixgrfl{stop.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{stop.png}}} -% the package is terminated. -% \or\relax -% Et\ixgrfl{stop.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{stop.png}}} -% le paquetage est terminé. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{macrocode} -%</minitoc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{The \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} file}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} -% \or\relax -% \section{Le fichier \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\jobname} -% \begin{macro}{\input} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its rôle is to -% set \com{jobname} to \texttt{minitoc-fr} in place of \texttt{minitoc}. As \xfile{minitoc.ins} -% generates the \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} and \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} files which set a language number \com{LANG}, -% and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} reads then the \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan} file, the documentation can be in several languages -% (english and french here) in -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} -% \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. The \com{relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises. -% \or\relax -% Ce court fichier est nécessaire pour créer la documentation en français. Son rôle est de forcer \com{jobname} -% à~\texttt{minitoc-fr} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \xfile{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers -% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} et \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} qui établissent un numéro de langue \com{LANG}, et comme -% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} lit alors le fichier \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut être en plusieurs langues -% (anglais et français ici) dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, la langue étant choisie par des constructions -% \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{fi}. Les primitives -% \com{relax} sont nécessaires pour éviter de mauvaises surprises. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*minitoc-fr> -\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}% - [2008/07/16 minitoc v60 french documentation start file] -\input{minitoc.dtx} -%</minitoc-fr> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \fi -% \minitoc -% \mtcskip -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Why \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \or\relax -% \section{Pourquoi \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source -% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement -% package, \pack{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the -% \upack{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing -% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \upack{minitoc} package, -% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like: -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur insère de nombreuses commandes -% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le préambule du document. D'où le concept d'un -% paquetage de remplacement, \pack{mtcoff} (c'est-à-dire, «~\emph{minitoc off}~»), qui substitue à~toutes les -% commandes et à~tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant -% les mêmes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf émettre quelques avertissements bénins, dans des cas -% spéciaux). De cette manière, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'écrire, -% dans le préambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ -% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% then the \upack{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way: -% \or\relax -% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est activé avec les options spécifiées. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de -% la manière suivante: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\ -% \com{usepackage}\verb|{mtcoff}| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% then the \upack{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much -% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \upack{minitoc}. Moreover, -% this operation is reversible. -% \or\relax -% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est désactivé et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignorés. Ceci -% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et sûr que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements -% de \upack{minitoc}. De plus, cette opération est réversible. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} -% \or\relax -% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat} -% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for -% the \pack{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to -% support \upack{minitoc}.}; we need the \pack{mtcmess} package to write messages with unique identifiers. -% \or\relax -% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et vérifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette vérification -% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} lui-même, mais il est bon de vérifier que votre -% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \upack{minitoc}.}; nous avons besoin du paquetage -% \pack{mtcmess} pour écrire des messages avec des identificateurs uniques. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtcoff> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% -\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2008/07/16 v60 The mtcoff package] -\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} -% \or\relax -% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\count@} -% \begin{macro}{\dimen@} -% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent} -% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\stcindent} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% As \upack{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \com{count@} or -% \com{dimen@}. For \com{mtcskipamount}, we must use its default definition, \com{bigskipamount}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Puisque \upack{minitoc} déclare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant -% \com{count@} ou \com{dimen@}. Pour \com{mtcskipamount}, nous utilisons sa définition par défaut, -% \com{bigskipamount}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\c@minitocdepth\count@ -\let\mtcindent\dimen@ -\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount -\let\c@parttocdepth\count@ -\let\ptcindent\dimen@ -\let\c@secttocdepth\count@ -\let\stcindent\dimen@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc} -% \begin{macro}{\c@stc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The basic mini-table counters are provided by \com{count@}: -% \or\relax -% Les compteurs de mini-tables basiques sont fournis par \com{count@}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\c@mtc\count@ \let\c@ptc\count@ \let\c@stc\count@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The gaps before and after parttoc heads receive their default values: -% \or\relax -% Les intervalles avant et après les têtes de parttocs reçoivent leurs valeurs par défaut: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@} \def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{F0008} must define the macros for the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule. -% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{F0008} devons définir les macros pour les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets -% horizontaux inférieurs. Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Nous devons émettre un avertissement si l'une de ces -% macros est utilisée. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{part}{}{% - \def\kernafterparttoc{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterparttoc - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterpartlof{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterpartlof - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterpartlot{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterpartlot - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - }% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {% - \def\kernaftersecttoc{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernaftersecttoc - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernaftersectlof{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernaftersectlof - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernaftersectlot{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernaftersectlot - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - }% - }% - {% - \def\kernafterminitoc{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterminitoc - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}% - \def\kernafterminilof{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterminilof - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% - \def\kernafterminilot{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\kernafterminilot - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We\imess{F0009} must define the macros for the horizontal offsets of the mini-tables. -% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used. -% \or\relax -% Nous\imess{F0009} devons définir les macros pour les corrections horizontales des mini-tables. -% Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Un avertissement sera émis si l'une de ces macros est utilisée. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{part}{}{% - \def\ptcoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\ptcoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\plfoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\plfoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\pltoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\pltoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - }% - \@ifundefined{chapter}{% - \@ifundefined{section}{}% - {% - \def\stcoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\stcoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\slfoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\slfoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\sltoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\sltoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - }% - }% - {% - \def\mtcoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\mtcoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\slfoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\slfoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - \def\mltoffset{% - \mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}% - {The macro \string\mltoffset - \MessageBreak - should not be used out of context - \MessageBreak}% - 0pt}% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Faking simple commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Simuler les commandes simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures} -% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some user commands are easy to fake: -% \or\relax -% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles à~simuler: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\faketableofcontents\relax -\let\fakelistoffigures\relax -\let\fakelistoftables\relax -\let\mtcskip\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc} -% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Basic adjustment commands are also easy: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes d'ajustement de base sont aussi faciles: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax} -\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax} -\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax} -\let\decrementptc\relax \let\incrementptc\relax -\let\decrementmtc\relax \let\incrementmtc\relax -\let\decrementstc\relax \let\incrementstc\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\partend} -% \begin{macro}{\partbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterend} -% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin} -% \begin{macro}{\sectend} -% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked: -% \or\relax -% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appelées directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales, -% mais il faut les simuler: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\partend\relax \let\partbegin\relax -\let\chapterend\relax \let\chapterbegin\relax -\let\sectend\relax \let\sectbegin\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Faking commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} -% \or\relax -% \section{Simulation des commandes ayant un \texorpdfstring{\mbox{argument}}{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get -% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. -% \or\relax -% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simulées en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{} -% \com{@ifnextchar} (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\parttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\partlof} -% \begin{macro}{\partlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for part level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilof} -% \begin{macro}{\dominilot} -% \begin{macro}{\minitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\minilof} -% \begin{macro}{\minilot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\secttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\sectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for section level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Command \com{mtcprepare}: -% \or\relax -% Commande \com{mtcprepare}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Faking flags}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} -% \or\relax -% \section{Simulation d'indicateurs}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We defines flags which were true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside. -% \or\relax -% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui étaient vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux -% à~l'extérieur. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse% -\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse% -\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse% -\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse% -\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse% -\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse% -\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse% -\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse% -\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} -% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string} -% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\xchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\pchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\psect} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart} -% \begin{macro}{\xpart} -% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect} -% \begin{macro}{\xsect} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We need also to disable some \upack{minitoc} commands, with \com{relax} (macros with no argument) or -% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros with two arguments): -% \or\relax -% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc}, avec \com{relax} (macros sans argument) ou -% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros avec arguments): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\tf@mtc\count@ -\let\mtc@string\relax -\let\appendixmtc\relax -\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo -\let\xchapter\relax -\let\pchapter\relax -\let\psect\relax -\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo -\let\xpart\relax -\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo -\let\xsect\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Désactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\empty} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We disable the \upack{minitoc} font commands (like \com{mtcSSfont}) with \com{empty}, because some users -% might have used: -% \or\relax -% Nous désactivons commandes de fonte de \upack{minitoc} (telles que \com{mtcSSfont}) avec \com{empty}, car -% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilisé: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{mtcSSfont}\verb|}{...}| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. -% \or\relax -% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\plffont} -% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\ptifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Fonts for part level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ptcfont\empty -\let\ptcCfont\empty -\let\ptcSfont\empty -\let\ptcSSfont\empty -\let\ptcSSSfont\empty -\let\ptcPfont\empty -\let\ptcSPfont\empty -\let\plffont\empty -\let\plfSfont\empty -\let\pltfont\empty -\let\pltSfont\empty -\let\ptifont\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlffont} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtcfont\empty -\let\mtcSfont\empty -\let\mtcSSfont\empty -\let\mtcSSSfont\empty -\let\mtcPfont\empty -\let\mtcSPfont\empty -\let\mlffont\empty -\let\mlfSfont\empty -\let\mltfont\empty -\let\mltSfont\empty -\let\mtifont\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\stcfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont} -% \begin{macro}{\slffont} -% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltfont} -% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont} -% \begin{macro}{\stifont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Fonts for section level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\stcfont\empty -\let\stcSSfont\empty -\let\stcSSSfont\empty -\let\stcPfont\empty -\let\stcSPfont\empty -\let\slffont\empty -\let\slfSfont\empty -\let\sltfont\empty -\let\sltSfont\empty -\let\stifont\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Font for ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} lines: -% \or\relax -% Fonte pour les lignes de «~pause-café~»{\myCoffeecup}: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\coffeefont\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments: -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo -\let\mtcsetoffset\@gobbletwo -\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty} -\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo -\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo -\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty} -\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty} -\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo -\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcpolymXXX.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetpolym.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We simulate these commands by keeping only the fourth argument; they must still be robust. -% \or\relax -% Nous simulons ces commandes en ne gardant que le quatrième argument; elles doivent encore être robustes. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{{#4}} -% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{{#4}} -% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{{#4}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the new \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph} -% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \upack{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning -% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary: -% \or\relax -% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} définit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entrées de la -% table des matières pour des commandes de sectionnement étoilées. Nous revenons à~la version non étoilée, lorsque -% cela est nécessaire: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part} -\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter} -\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section} -\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection} -\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection} -\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph} -\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsolètes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} -% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis} -% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris} -% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument): -% \or\relax -% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsolètes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\firstpartis\@gobble \let\firstchapteris\@gobble \let\firstsectionis\@gobble -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} and \ucom{mtcloadmlo} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} et \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These command have one mandatory argument: -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes ont un seul argument, obligatoire: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble \let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{16} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\stcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule} -% \begin{macro}{\plfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\slfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule} -% \begin{macro}{\pltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\mltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\sltrule} -% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule} -% % \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands have no argument: -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ptcrule\relax -\let\noptcrule\relax -\let\mtcrule\relax -\let\nomtcrule\relax -\let\stcrule\relax -\let\nostcrule\relax -\let\plfrule\relax -\let\noplfrule\relax -\let\mlfrule\relax -\let\nomlfrule\relax -\let\slfrule\relax -\let\noslfrule\relax -\let\pltrule\relax -\let\nopltrule\relax -\let\mltrule\relax -\let\nomltrule\relax -\let\sltrule\relax -\let\nosltrule\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{15} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les numéros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers} -% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These commands have no argument: -% \or\relax -% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax -\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax -\let\stcpagenumbers\relax -\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax -\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax -\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax -\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax -\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax -\let\slfpagenumbers\relax -\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax -\let\plfpagenumbers\relax -\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax -\let\mltpagenumbers\relax -\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax -\let\sltpagenumbers\relax -\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax -\let\pltpagenumbers\relax -\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We disable the commands for features (like \com{beforeparttoc}) with \com{empty}, because some users may have -% used: -% \or\relax -% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \com{beforeparttoc}) avec \com{empty}, car -% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait: -% \fi -% \begin{verse} -% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{beforeparttoc}\verb|}{...}| -% \end{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. These commands have no argument, -% \or\relax -% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument, -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for part level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\beforeparttoc\empty -\let\beforepartlof\empty -\let\beforepartlot\empty -\let\afterparttoc\empty -\let\afterpartlof\empty -\let\afterpartlot\empty -\let\openparttoc\empty -\let\openpartlof\empty -\let\openpartlot\empty -\let\closeparttoc\empty -\let\closepartlof\empty -\let\closepartlot\empty -\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty -\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty -\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\openminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof} -% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for chapter level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\beforeminitoc\empty -\let\beforeminilof\empty -\let\beforeminilot\empty -\let\afterminitoc\empty -\let\afterminilof\empty -\let\afterminilot\empty -\let\openminitoc\empty -\let\openminilof\empty -\let\openminilot\empty -\let\closeminitoc\empty -\let\closeminilof\empty -\let\closeminilot\empty -\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty -\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty -\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof} -% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle} -% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Commands for section level mini-tables: -% \or\relax -% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\beforesecttoc\empty -\let\beforesectlof\empty -\let\beforesectlot\empty -\let\aftersecttoc\empty -\let\aftersectlof\empty -\let\aftersectlot\empty -\let\opensecttoc\empty -\let\opensectlof\empty -\let\opensectlot\empty -\let\closesecttoc\empty -\let\closesectlof\empty -\let\closesectlot\empty -\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty -\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty -\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@} -% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc} -% \begin{macro}{\l@listof} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare: -% \or\relax -% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de déclarer: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@mtc@longext@ \@mtc@longext@true -\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse -\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse -\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse -\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse -\let\l@listof\chapter -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Caution for some commands}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} -% \or\relax -% \section{Précaution pour certaines commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+caution} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Some\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} \upack{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely} -% stop using the \upack{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and an \com{AtEndDocument} block to signal -% that you have used these commands: -% \or\relax -% Certaines\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} commandes de \upack{minitoc} devraient éventuellement être remplacées si vous décidez -% d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous déclarons un -% indicateur et un bloc \com{AtEndDocument} pour signaler que vous avez utilisé ces commandes: -% \fi -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false -\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@ - \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[F0007]{mtcoff}% - {You should scan (backwards) your .log - \MessageBreak - file to find some commands needing - \MessageBreak - to be replaced if you decide to - \MessageBreak - DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this - \MessageBreak - document. It is more wise to keep the - \MessageBreak - \string\usepackage\space lines for minitoc and mtcoff - \MessageBreak - and to comment out only one of them} -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Then\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} these commands are disabled -% and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number): -% \or\relax -% Puis\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} ces commandes sont inhibées -% de manière qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce -% qui est utile pour avoir le numéro de ligne): -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0004]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced - \MessageBreak - by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} - \MessageBreak} -\def\mtc@ck{#1} -\ifx\mtc@ck\empty -\else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% -\fi} -\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0006]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced - \MessageBreak - by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} - \MessageBreak} -\def\mtc@ck{#1} -\ifx\mtc@ck\empty -\else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% -\fi} -\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0005]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced - \MessageBreak - by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} - \MessageBreak} -\def\mtc@ck{#1} -\ifx\mtc@ck\empty -\else - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}% -\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-café~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline} -% \begin{macro}{\@gobble} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline} -% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders -% of dots: -% \or\relax -% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les «~pauses-café~», ainsi que la version -% spécifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax} -\let\coffeeline\@gobble -\let\l@coffee\relax -\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} -\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} -% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs} -% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} -% \fi -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof} -% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These environments accept one optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} -\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} -\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% \end{environment} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} and \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth} internal commands} -% \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth} internal commands} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} et \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth}} -% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth}} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelofdepth} -% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelotdepth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% We must inhibit these commands, inserted in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files by the -% hiding commands. So we will not have to delete these files when switching from the \upack{minitoc} package to -% the \pack{mtcoff} package. -% \or\relax -% Nous devons inhiber ces commandes, insérées dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} par -% les commandes de masquage. Ainsi nous n'aurons pas à~détruire ces fichiers lors du passage du paquetage -% \upack{minitoc} au paquetage \pack{mtcoff}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\mtc@savetocdepth\empty -\let\mtc@savelofdepth\empty -\let\mtc@savelotdepth\empty -\let\mtc@restoretocdepth\empty -\let\mtc@restorelofdepth\empty -\let\mtc@restorelotdepth\empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts one optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts one optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This command accepts one optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][]{\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Disabling the \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} -% \or\relax -% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter} -% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection} -% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commands should be replaced by standard commands, -% but \pack{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which will be reminded at the end of document: -% \or\relax -% Ces\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commandes devraient être remplacées par des commandes standard, -% mais \pack{mtcoff} les simule et donne un avertissement, qui sera rappelé en fin de document: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0002]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by - \MessageBreak - \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...} - \MessageBreak} - \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}} -\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0001]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by - \MessageBreak - \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...} - \MessageBreak} - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}} -\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true - \mtcPackageWarning[F0003]{mtcoff}% - {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by - \MessageBreak - \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...} - \MessageBreak} - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% And the \pack{mtcoff} package is terminated. -% \or\relax -% Et le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} est terminé. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%</mtcoff> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcmess} package}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcmess}}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo} -% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo} -% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarning} -% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine} -% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError} -% \begin{macro}{\PackageError} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% To make easier the search of a message in the documentation\footnote{For instance, using the search facility of some PDF -% reader utility.}, we will assign an unique identifier to each -% message of the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} packages. As the standard commands for such messages do not -% include this feature, we make extended versions, with the same syntax, plus a first optional argument: -% \or\relax -% Pour faciliter la recherche d'un message dans la documentation\,\footnote{Par exemple, en utilisant le système de -% recherche d'un utilitaire de lecture de fichier PDF.}, nous attribuerons un identificateur unique à~chaque -% message des paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}. Puisque les commandes standard pour de tels messages -% n'offrent pas ce dispositif, nous en faisons des versions étendues, avec la même syntaxe, plus un premier argument -% optionnel: -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtcmess> -\ProvidesPackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]% -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% -\newcommand{\mtcPackageInfo}[3][]% - {\PackageInfo{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% -\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarning}[3][]% - {\PackageWarning{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% -\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}[3][]% - {\PackageWarningNoLine{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}% -\newcommand{\mtcPackageError}[4][]% - {\PackageError{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}{#4}}% -%</mtcmess> -% \end{macrocode} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Hence the first line of the message will contain the package name and the unique identifier of the message. -% \or\relax -% Donc la première ligne du message contiendra le nom du paquetage et l'identificateur unique du message. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% These macros are defined in a separate package because they are used by at least two packages -% (\upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}) and because they could be useful for other packages. -% \or\relax -% Ces macros sont définies dans un paquetage distinct car elles sont utilisées par au moins deux paquetages -% (\upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}) et parce qu'elles pourraient être utiles pour d'autres paquetages. -% \fi -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Patch for the \uclass{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} -% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code must be loaded to fix an \emph{incompatibility} of the \upack{minitoc} package -% with some recent versions of the \class{memoir} class. -% This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version of \class{memoir}. -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \uclass{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem} -% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code doit être chargé pour corriger une \emph{incompatibilité} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% avec certaines versions récentes de la classe \class{memoir}. -% Cette correction n'est plus nécessaire après la version datée 2005/09/25 de \class{memoir}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mtcpatchmem> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]% -\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}% - [2008/07/16 v60 Package mtcpatchmem] -\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14] -\mtcPackageInfo[M0001]{mtcpatchmem}% - {mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class\@gobble} -\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{% - \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg - \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}% -} -\def\@chapter[#1]#2{% -% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as -% entry for all fields. - \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty - \def\f@rtoc{#2}% - \def\f@rhdr{#2}% - \else -% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only -% one was found. - \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c - \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c - \else - \def\f@rhdr{#1}% - \fi - \fi - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax - \if@mainmatter - \refstepcounter{chapter}% - \fi - \fi - \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}% - \ifartopt - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \@afterheading - \else - \insertchapterspace - \if@twocolumn - \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]% - \else - \@makechapterhead{#2}% - \fi - \@afterheading - \fi - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax - \if@mainmatter - \ifanappendix - \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{% - \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{% - \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}% - \fi - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% - \fi - \else - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}% - \fi - \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi -} -%</mtcpatchmem> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter{Language definition (\usuffix{.mld}) and object (\usuffix{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}% -% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} -% \or\relax -% \chapter{Fichiers de définition (\usuffix{.mld}) et objets (\usuffix{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}% -% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo} -% \fi -% \minitoc -% \mtcskip -% \lneed{7} -% ^^A MINILOF BLOCK WAS HERE -% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \mtcindent=0pt -% \minilof -% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\empty} -% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}% -% \raggedcolumns -% \mtcskip -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{lang-g.png}\ixgrf{lang-g.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Language families in the world]{Language families in the world (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Language_family}; see also \url{http://www.dicts.info/img/speakers.png})\hfill\null}\label{f+lang-fam} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Familles de langues dans le monde]{Familles de langues dans le monde (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Language_family}; voir aussi \url{http://www.dicts.info/img/speakers.png})\hfill\null}\label{f+lang-fam} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[th] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{mondep.png}\ixgrf{mondep.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The political world]{The political world (\url{http://www.populationdata.net/cartes/monde/monde-politique-moyen.php})\hfill\null}\label{f+polw} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Le monde politique]{Le monde politique (\url{http://www.populationdata.net/cartes/monde/monde-politique-moyen.php})\hfill\null}\label{f+polw} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}} -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{wrs-c.png}\ixgrf{wrs-c.png}\\{}% -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\small\RaggedRight -% \itemsep=0pt -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{wdesc}{Alphabets:X}\itemsep=0pt -% \item[Alphabets:] latin (grey), cyrillic (blue-green), greek (blue), georgian (dark blue), armenian (darker blue); -% \item[Abjads\,\protect\footnote{An \index{abjad}abjad is a segmental script containing symbols for consonants only, -% or where vowels are optionally written with diacritics (``pointing'') or only written word-initially.}:] -% arabic (green), arabic and latin (light green), hebrew and arabic (lighter green); -% \item[Abugidas\,\protect\footnote{An \index{abugida}abugida, or \emph{alphasyllabary}, is a segmental script in which vowels are denoted -% by diacritical marks or other systematic modification of the consonants.}:] north indic (light orange), -% south indic (orange), ethiopic (maroon), thaana or t\=ana (Dhivehi language in Maldives) (olive), canadian syllabic (yellow); -% \item[Logographic\,\protect\footnote{In logographic\index{logographic} systems, glyphs represent words or morphemes (meaningfull -% components of words, as in \emph{mean-ing-ful}, rather than phonetic elements).}$+$syllabic:] pure logographic (red), -% mixed logographic and \index{syllabary}syllabaries\,\footnote{In syllabaries, graphemes represent syllables.} (dark red), -% featural-alphabetic: hangûl (dark mauve)$+$limited logographic: -% hanja (light mauve); -% \end{wdesc} -% \or\relax -% \begin{wdesc}{Alphabets:X}\itemsep=0pt -% \item[Alphabets:] latin (gris), cyrillique (bleu-vert), grec (bleu), géorgien (bleu foncé), arménien (bleu plus foncé); -% \item[Abjads\,\protect\footnote{Un \index{abjad}abjad est une écriture segmentale contenant des symboles uniquement pour les consonnes, -% ou dans laquelle les voyelles sont (sur option) écrites avec des diacritiques (\og pointantes\fg) ou seulement -% écrites en début de mot.}:] arabe (vert), arabe et latin (vert clair), hébreu et arabe (vert très clair); -% \item[Abugidas\,\protect\footnote{Un \index{abugida}abugida, ou \emph{alphasyllabaire}, est une écriture segmentale dans -% laquelle les voyelles sont indiquées par des marques diacritiques ou une autre modification systématique des -% consonnes.}:] indien du nord (orange clair), indien du sud (orange), éthiopien (marron), thaana ou t\=ana -% (langue Dhivehi aux Maldives)(olive), -% syllabique canadien (jaune); -% \item[Logographique\,\protect\footnote{Dans les systèmes \index{logographique}logographiques, les glyphes représentent des mots ou -% des morphèmes (composants de mots ayant un sens propre, comme dans \emph{mean-ing-ful}, plutôt que des -% éléments phonétiques).}$+$syllabique:] logographique pur (rouge), mélange logographique et \index{syllabaire}syllabaires\,\footnote{Dans -% les syllabaires, les graphèmes représentent des syllabes.}(rouge foncé), -% alphabétique modifié: hangûl (mauve foncé)$+$logographique limité: hanja (mauve clair); -% \end{wdesc} -% \fi -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Writing systems by country]{Writing systems by country (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-c} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Écritures~--~par~pays]{Écritures~--~par~pays (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-c} -% \fi -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{wrs-a.png}\ixgrf{wrs-a.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Areas of writing systems]{Areas of writing systems (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-a} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Écritures~--~par~régions]{Écritures~--~par~régions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_alphabets})\hfill\null}\label{f+wrs-a} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{africa-lf.png}\ixgrf{africa-lf.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{africa-lo.pdf}\ixgrf{africa-lo.pdf}% -% ^^A \IVC{\bwidth}{africa-lo.pdf}\ixgrf{africa-lo.pdf}% bad alignment -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Language families and official languages in Africa]{Language families and official languages in Africa -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Africa})\hfill\null}\label{f+africa} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Familles de langues et langues officielles en Afrique]{Familles de langues et langues officielles en Afrique -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Africa})\hfill\null}\label{f+africa} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!p] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in Europe]{Languages in Europe (by \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_the_European_Union})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Les langues en Europe]{Les langues en Europe (par \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_the_European_Union})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan1.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan1.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages families in Europe]{Languages families in Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan1} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Familles de langues en Europe]{Familles de langues en Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan1} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!th] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{euro-lan2.png}\ixgrf{euro-lan2.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in Europe]{Languages in Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan2} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Europe]{Langues en Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_languages_in_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+euro-lan2} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{leur.png}\ixgrf{leur.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Simplified Linguistic Map of Europe]{Simplified Linguistic Map of Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+leur} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe]{Carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Europe})\hfill\null}\label{f+leur} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{Overview} -% This chapter shows the code of each \suffix{.mld} file. A \suffix{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language -% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some -% comments about its origin, if you need further details. -% -% \lneed{6} -% For some languages, I~have added a map (and a flag) of the country or area where the language is spoken, if it is not -% trivial. The origin of each map is given by an URL to the graphic file or to the WEB page where I~found it. -% Note that the~\cite{tlfq} and~\cite{LMP} Web sites are useful sources. Maps from~\cite{LMP} are under the -% Creative Commons License, see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB}. -% The site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} allows to look at the maps of many countries (but not of France!). -% The Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection~\cite{texasmaps} (The University of Texas at Austin, -% \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contains countless maps. -% -% \reversemarginpar -% Many\ixgrf{wiki.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{2cm}[4.5cm][-2cm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wiki.png}}}} -% free maps were also found by a search in the vast Wikipedia -% (i.e. \url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, -% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.). -% If you are curious and brave, you can also find many -% maps and documents about Eastern Europa and about Asia at \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; that site give many -% historical informations. -% -% \lneed{8} -% \normalmarginpar -% A \suffix{.mld} file is loaded either via a -% package option in the \com{usepackage} command -% for the \upack{minitoc} package (or a global option for the document), either via the command: -% \or\relax -% \section{Généralités} -% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \suffix{.mld}. Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est un fichier -% de définition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui définit les titres des -% mini-tables pour une langue donnée. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez -% besoin de plus de détails. -% -% \lneed{6} -% \reversemarginpar -% Pour certaines langues, j'ai ajouté une carte (et un drapeau) du pays ou des zones où la langue est parlée, si ce n'est pas trivial. -% L'origine de chaque carte est donnée par un URL vers le fichier graphique ou vers la page où je l'ai trouvée. -% Notez que les sites Web~\cite{tlfq} et~\cite{LMP} sont des sources utiles. Les cartes de~\cite{LMP} sont sous la -% \emph{Creative Commons License}, voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr}. -% -% Le site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} permet de regarder les cartes de nombreux -% pays (mais pas de la France!). La \emph{Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection}~\cite{texasmaps} (Université du Texas -% à~Austin, \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contient d'innombrables cartes. -% -% \lneed{7} -% De\ixgrf{wikif.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill\raisebox{2.87cm}[2.87cm][0.cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{wikif.png}}}} -% nombreuses cartes publiques proviennent aussi de la Wikipédia ({\froff\url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org}, -% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.}). -% Si vous êtes curieux et courageux, vous pourrez aussi trouver de nombreux documents et cartes concernant l'Europe de -% l'Est et l'Asie sur le site \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; il donne de nombreuses informations historiques. -% -% \lneed{8} -% \normalmarginpar -% Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est chargé soit via une option du paquetage -% dans la commande \com{usepackage} pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% (ou une option globale pour le document), -% soit via la commande: -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \begin{verse} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{language} -% \or\relax -% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{langue} -% \fi -% \end{verse} -% \end{macro} -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\plttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\stctitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slftitle} -% \begin{macro}{\slttitle} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Each \suffix{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents, -% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels): -% \or\relax -% Chaque fichier \suffix{.mld} doit définir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des -% matières, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section): -% \fi -% \begin{multicols}{3} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \com{ptctitle} -% \item \com{plftitle} -% \item \com{plttitle}\columnbreak -% \item \com{mtctitle} -% \item \com{mlftitle} -% \item \com{mlttitle}\columnbreak -% \item \com{stctitle} -% \item \com{slftitle} -% \item \com{slttitle} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Many \suffix{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a -% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using -% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, the -% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}, the \pack{Antomega} -% system~\cite{antomega}, the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, -% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, -% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, -% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, -% or \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} packages. -% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding -% \suffix{.mld} file. -% \or\relax -% De nombreux fichiers \suffix{.mld} ont besoin de fontes spéciales adéquates pour la langue -% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte -% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage -% \pack{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, le système -% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}, le système \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}, -% les paquetages \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex}, -% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari}, -% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, -% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} -% et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}. -% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilisé pour nommer le fichier \suffix{.mld} -% correspondant. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{environment}{filecontents} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian), hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese, -% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai, and russian variants.}, the source of the titles -% use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to manipulate -% in a \suffix{.dtx} file, the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading -% a \suffix{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension -% \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the -% \suffix{.dtx} files in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package. -% To go around this limitation, the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file uses -% \env{filecontents} environments to generate the \suffix{.mlo} files. -% The adequate input encoding must be set up -% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \suffix{.mld} file via the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command. -% \or\relax -% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi -% (iranien), du coréen (hangûl et hanja), du japonais, du \lopt{malayalam-omega}, du thaï et du russe.}, le code source des -% titres utilise quelques \virage\emph{codages exotiques}, -% difficiles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge -% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object}, -% objet minitoc de langue.}, qui n'est pas engendré par les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. -% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins} utilise simplement des -% environnements \env{filecontents} pour engendrer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. -% Le codage d'entrée adéquat doit être mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le -% chargement du fichier \suffix{.mld} via la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage}. -% \fi -% \end{macro} -% \end{environment} -% -% \lneed{4} -% {\bfseries -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Since\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} version~\#49, -% the \upack{minitoc} package checks the presence of the -% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file -% (and of the \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} file if necessary) for each language option of the package, -% before validating the option. If a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, the corresponding language option -% is not enabled and a warning message is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. But the presence of -% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language. -% If some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files are missing, -% the list of this files is given in the \suffix{.log} file. You should find these files on CTAN. -% \or\relax -% À~partir\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} de la version~\#49, -% le paquetage \upack{minitoc} vérifie la présence du fichier -% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (et du fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} si nécessaire) pour -% chaque option de langue du paquetage, avant de valider l'option. Si un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} -% est manquant, l'option de langue correspondante n'est pas validée et un message d'avertissement est écrit dans -% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Mais la présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car -% l'anglais est la langue par défaut. -% Si certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} sont manquants, -% la liste de ces fichiers est écrite dans le fichier \suffix{.log}. Vous devriez pouvoir les trouver sur CTAN. -% \fi -% \par} ^^A %BF> -% ^^A \clearpage ^^A %% BEGIN OF LANGUAGE SECTIONS -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Acadian'' language: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{acadian-m.pdf}\ixgrf{acadian-m.pdf}% -% \caption[Acadia today]{Acadia today (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia})}\label{f+acadien} -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{acadien-m.pdf}\ixgrf{acadien-m.pdf}% -% \caption[Acadie actuelle]{Acadie actuelle (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie})}\label{f+acadien} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}} -% \lopt{acadian} language\,\FAC{} -% is just french, so we load the \xfile{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}} -% langue \lopt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du français, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*acadian> -\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</acadian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Acadien'' language: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadia}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}} -% ``\lopt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{} -% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \xfile{french.mld} -% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{acadie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acadie}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{acadie-f.png}}}}} -% <<~\lopt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{} -% est simplement du français (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme français pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais), -% donc nous chargons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*acadien> -\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</acadien> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.382958802\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.617041199\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{afrsud-l.pdf}\ixgrf{afrsud-l.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{afrsud-p.pdf}\ixgrf{afrsud-p.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Afrikaans language areas]{Afrikaans language areas (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afriquesud.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+afrsud} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue afrikaans]{Régions de la langue afrikaans (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afriquesud.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+afrsud} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{33.33333333mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}\ixgrfl{namibia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Africa}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Namibia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{namibia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa and Namibia, it has dutch origins; compare with -% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. -% See also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}. See figure~\vref{f+afrsud}.} -% come from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \lneed{5} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}\ixgrfl{namibia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afrique_du_Sud}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Namibie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{namibia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée en Afrique du Sud et en Namibie, elle a des origines -% néerlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}. -% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}. Voir la -% figure~\vref{f+afrsud}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*afrikaan> -\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Afrikaan(s) titles from dutch.dtx (babel) by Braams, Johannes~L. -\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% -\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}% -\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% -\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}% -\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}% -\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}% -\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}% -\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}% -%</afrikaan> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The term ``\lopt{afrikaans}'' is a synonym of ``\lopt{afrikaan}'', so we just load \xfile{afrikaan.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): -% \or\relax -% Le terme <<~\lopt{afrikaans}~>> est un synonyme de <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>, -% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*afrikaans> -\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}% -%</afrikaans> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.25352113mm} -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Albanian'' language: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~albanian~>>: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{albania-f.png}\ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macedonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% albanian language (\emph{shqip}) is spoken in Albania and some regions of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Kosovo; -% see figures~\vrefrange{f+albania}{f+alb2}. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{albanian}'' language are taken from the \xfile{albanian.dtx} file -% (with a contribution of \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{albania-f.png}\ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macédonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue albanaise (\emph{shqip}) est parlée en Albanie et quelques régions de Macédoine, du Montenegro, -% de Serbie et du Kosovo; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+albania}{f+alb2}. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{albanian}~>> (albanais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{albanian.dtx} -% (avec une contribution de \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}: -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.468652038\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.531347962\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{albania.pdf}\ixgrf{albania.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{alba-eth.pdf}\ixgrf{alba-eth.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Albanian language areas]{Albanian language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/carte_albanophone.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/albaniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+albania} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue albanaise]{Régions de la langue albanaise -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/carte_albanophone.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/albaniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+albania} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kos-alb.png}\ixgrf{kos-alb.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kos-ml.png}\ixgrf{kos-ml.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Language areas in Kosovo]{Language areas in Kosovo -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/Kosovo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+kosovo} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Les langues au Kosovo]{Les langues au Kosovo -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/Kosovo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+kosovo} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{alb2.png}\ixgrf{alb2.png} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Albanian dialects]{Albanian dialects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+alb2} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes albanais]{Dialectes albanais (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+alb2} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*albanian> -\ProvidesFile{albanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Albanian titles from albabian.dtx (babel). -%% Adi Zaimi (zami1st at yahoo.com / adizaimi at yahoo.com). -\def\ptctitle{P\"ermbajta}% -\def\plftitle{Figurat}% -\def\plttitle{Tabelat}% -\def\mtctitle{P\"ermbajta}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurat}% -\def\mltitle{Tabelat}% -\def\stctitle{P\"ermbajta}% -\def\slftitle{Figurat}% -\def\slttitle{Tabelat}% -%</albanian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``American'' language: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~american~>>: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{american}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' -% (the languages themselves have some differences, -% like the hyphenation rules, some spellings and phonetics), -% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{american}~>> (américain) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> -% (les langues elles-mêmes ont quelques différences, -% par exemple les règles de coupure des mots, l'orthographe et la prononciation), -% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} (voir -% la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*american> -\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</american> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Arab'' language: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{arabw.png}\ixgrf{arabw.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Countries where the arabic language is official]{Countries where the arabic language is official -% (green: sole official language, blue: one of several official languages) -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabic} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Pays où la langue arabe est officielle]{Pays où la langue arabe est officielle -% (vert: seule langue officielle, bleu: une langue officielle parmi d'autres) -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabic} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tpb] -% ^^A \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islam-pbc.png}\ixgrf{islam-pbc.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Percentage of muslims by country]{Percentage of muslims by country -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-pbc} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Pourcentage de musulmans par pays]{Pourcentage de musulmans par pays -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-pbc} -% \fi -% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islam-sw.pdf}\ixgrf{islam-sw.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The status of Islam by country]{The status of Islam by country -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-sw} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Statut de l'Islam par pays]{Statut de l'Islam par pays -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Muslim_world})\hfill\null}\label{f+islam-sw} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A (ARAB -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% ^^A Asia -% \ixgrfl{bahrain-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{iraq-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jordan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kuwait-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{palestine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{qatar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sudan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{syria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uae-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{yemen-f.png}% -% ^^A Africa -% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{djibouti-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nigeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahrain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahrain-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iraq}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iraq-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jordan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jordan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bahrain}&\textbf{Iraq}&\textbf{Israel}&\textbf{Jordan}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kuwait}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kuwait-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lebanon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lybia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Kuwait}&\textbf{Lebanon}&\textbf{Lybia}&\textbf{Oman}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palestinian_National_Authority}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{palestine-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qatar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{qatar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saudi_Arabia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saudi-arabia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sudan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sudan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Palestine}&\textbf{Qatar}&\textbf{Saudi~Arabia}&\textbf{Sudan}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Syria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{syria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_Arab_Emirates}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uae-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yemen}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{yemen-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Syria}&\textbf{United~Arab~Emirates}&\textbf{Yemen}&\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Algeria}&\textbf{Chad}&\textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Djibouti}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eritrea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Egypt}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Morocco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Eritrea}&\textbf{Egypt}&\textbf{Mauritania}&\textbf{Morocco}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nigeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nigeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Nigeria}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}&\textbf{Tunisia}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Arabophone countries in Asia and Africa]{Arabophone countries in Asia and Africa -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arab} and~\cite[page~664]{comrie1990})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabo-sp-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% ^^A Asia -% \ixgrfl{bahrain-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{iraq-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jordan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kuwait-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{palestine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{qatar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{saudi-arabia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sudan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{syria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uae-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{yemen-f.png}% -% ^^A Africa -% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nigeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahrain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahrain-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irak}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iraq-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jordanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jordan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bahrain}&\textbf{Irak}&\textbf{Israël}&\textbf{Jordanie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Koweït}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kuwait-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liban}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libye}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Koweït}&\textbf{Liban}&\textbf{Libye}&\textbf{Oman}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palestine_(État_revendiqué)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{palestine-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qatar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{qatar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabie_saoudite}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saudi-arabia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Soudan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sudan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Palestine}&\textbf{Qatar}&\textbf{Arabie~saoudite}&\textbf{Soudan}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Syrie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{syria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Émirats_arabes_unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uae-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yémen}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{yemen-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Syrie}&\textbf{Émirats~arabes~unis}&\textbf{Yémen}&\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algérie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Algérie}&\textbf{Tchad}&\textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Djibouti}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Érythrée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Égypte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maroc}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Érythrée}&\textbf{Égypte}&\textbf{Mauritanie}&\textbf{Maroc}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nigéria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nigeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Nigéria}&\textbf{Somalie}&\textbf{Tanzanie}&\textbf{Tunisie}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays arabophones en Asie et Afrique]{Pays arabophones en Asie et Afrique -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liste_des_pays_de_langue_arabe} et~\cite[page~664]{comrie1990})\hfill\null}\label{f+arabo-sp-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A ARAB) -% \par\reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{arab-l.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{16mm}[28.15mm][-16mm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{arab-l.jpg}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{arab}'' language (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) are taken -% from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} -% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{arab-l.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{16mm}[28.15mm][-16mm]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arabic_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{arab-l.jpg}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab}~>> (arabe) (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) sont tirés -% du paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} -% (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The arabic language is spoken in: -% Algeria, Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya, Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestinian territories, -% Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Western Sahara, Yemen by a majority; it is also -% the liturgical language of Islam (see figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}). -% \or\relax -% La langue arabe est parlée dans les pays suivants: -% Algérie, Bahrain, Égypte, Irak, Jordanie, Koweït, Liban, Libye, Mauritanie, Maroc, Oman, Territoires Palestiniens, -% Qatar, Arabie Saoudite, Soudan, Syrie, Tunisie, Émirats Arabes Unis, Sahara Occidental, Yémen par une -% majorité de la population; c'est aussi la langue liturgique de l'Islam -% (voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}).\looseness=-1 -% \fi -% \par\normalmarginpar -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*arab> -\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Arabic titles. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) -\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% -\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% -\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% -\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% -\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% -\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% -\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}% -\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}% -\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}% -%</arab> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Arab2'' language: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~arab2~>>: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcArabTok} -% \begin{macro}{\tcArabTok} -% \begin{macro}{\a@tok} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{arab2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} -% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts. -% It is a variant of the ``\lopt{arab}'' language. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> (arabe, variante) sont tirés du -% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), -% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*arab2> -\ProvidesFile{arab2.mld}[2006/03/31]% -%% Arabic titles. Variant. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex) -{\makeatletter\global\let\mtcArabTok\a@tok}% -\def\ptctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% -\def\plftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% -\def\plttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% -\def\mtctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% -\def\mlftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% -\def\mlttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% -\def\stctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}% -\def\slftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}% -\def\slttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}% -%</arab2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Arabi'' language: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~arabi~>>: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\R} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{arabi}'' language are taken from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi} -% (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), -% which should be used, with the associated fonts. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} -% (par \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*arabi> -\ProvidesFile{arabi.mld}[2006/07/27]% -%% Arabic titles (strings taken from arabi.ldf; to be used with arabi) -%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of the Arabi package, by Youssef Jabri) -\def\ptctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% -\def\plftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\plttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -\def\mtctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% -\def\mlftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\mlttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -\def\stctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}% -\def\slftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\slttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -%</arabi> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Arabic'' language: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{arabic}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{arab}'', so we just load \xfile{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{arabic}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{arab}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{arab.mld} -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*arabic> -\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/10]\mtcselectlanguage{arab}% -%</arabic> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Armenian'' language: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{armeniar.jpg}\ixgrf{armeniar.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{caucasus.pdf}\ixgrf{caucasus.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Armenia and languages of Caucasus]{Armenia and languages of Caucasus -% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/armenia.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% and -% \url{http://linguistics.buffalo.edu/people/faculty/dryer/dryer/dryer.htm} by \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer}, -% link found from \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Caucasian_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+armenia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Arménie et langues du Caucase]{Arménie et langues du Caucase -% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/armenia.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% et -% \url{http://linguistics.buffalo.edu/people/faculty/dryer/dryer/dryer.htm} par \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer}, -% lien trouvé dans \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Caucasian_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+armenia} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{armeniad.pdf}\ixgrf{armeniad.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The Armenian diaspora]{The Armenian diaspora (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenian_diaspora})\hfill\null}\label{f+armeniad} -% \or\relax -% \caption[La diaspora arménienne]{La diaspora arménienne (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diaspora_arménienne})\hfill\null}\label{f+armeniad} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{6.213285133mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{armenian-l.png}\ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenian_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenian-l.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{armenian}'' language (\emph{hayeren}) are taken from the \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} package~\cite{armtex} -% (by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), which should be -% used, with the associated fonts. -% The armenian language is spoken in Armenia, in a part of Azerbaidjan and in the armenian diaspora; -% see figures~\vrefrange{f+armenia}{f+armeniad}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{armenian-l.png}\ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménien}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenian-l.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{armenian}~>> (arménien, \emph{hayeren}) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} -% (de \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), -% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées. -% La langue arménienne est parlée en Arménie, dans une partie de l'Azerbaïdjan et dans la diaspora arménienne; -% voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+armenia}{f+armeniad}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*armenian> -\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]% -%% Armenian titles from ArmTeX. Sergueï Dachian (Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr), -%% Arnak Dalalyan & Vartan Akopian -\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% -\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}% -\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% -\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% -\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}% -\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% -\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}% -\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}% -\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}% -%</armenian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Australian'' language: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~australian~>>: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{australian}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{australia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{australian}~>> (australien) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*australian> -\ProvidesFile{australian.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</australian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Austrian'' language: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% For\ixgrfl{austria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}}} -% the mini-table titles, the ``\lopt{austrian}'' language is like the ``\lopt{german}'' language, so we load -% \xfile{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}): -% \or\relax -% Pour\ixgrfl{austria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}}} -% les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~\lopt{austrian}~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> -% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \xfile{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*austrian> -\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{german}% -%</austrian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{bahasa}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{bahasa}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bahasa> -\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% -%</bahasa> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bahasai'' language: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bahasai~>>: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.321112516\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.678887484\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{indonesia1.pdf}\ixgrf{indonesia1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{indonesia2.pdf}\ixgrf{indonesia2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Indonesia]{Indonesia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} and -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-3_Pol_ling.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+indonesia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Indonésie]{Indonésie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} et -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-3_Pol_ling.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+indonesia} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{indonesia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indonesia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{indonesia-f.png}}}}} -% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasai}'' language\,\footnote{Bahasa is spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, -% with different pronunciations and titles but the same writing. Bahasai is the indonesian variant. See -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}.} (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) are -% taken from the file \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen} and \name{Terry}{Mart}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. -% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. The word ``bahasa'' means ``language'' in bahasa. -% For other names for this language, see sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} and \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{indonesia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indonésie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{indonesia-f.png}}}}} -% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>\,\footnote{Le bahasa est parlé en Indonésie et en Malaisie, -% avec des prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasai est la variante indonésienne. -% Voir \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} -% (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen} -% et \name{Terry}{Mart}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}. -% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. Le mot «~bahasa~» signifie -% «~langage~» en bahasa. Pour d'autres noms pour cette langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} et -% \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bahasai> -\ProvidesFile{bahasai.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Bahasa Indonesia titles from bahasa.dtx in the babel package. -%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry -\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}% -\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}% -\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}% -\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}% -\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}% -\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}% -\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}% -\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}% -\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}% -%</bahasai> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{18} -% \section{``Bahasam'' language: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} -% \or\relax -% \lneed{20} -% \section{Langue <<~bahasam~>>: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.293413174\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.706586826\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!hb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malaysia1.pdf}\ixgrf{malaysia1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malaysia2.pdf}\ixgrf{malaysia2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Malaysia]{Malaysia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/malaysia.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+malaysia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Malaisie]{Malaisie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/malaysia.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+malaysia} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{4} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{meyalu.png}\ixgrfl{malaysia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malay_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{meyalu.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malaysia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malaysia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasam}'' language (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with -% different pronunciations and titles -% but the same writing. Bahasam is the malaysian variant.} are taken from the file \xfile{bahasam.dtx} -% (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} and \name{Bob}{Margolis}) -% in the -% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. -% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. For other names for this language, see -% sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} and~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{meyalu.png}\ixgrfl{malaysia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malais}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{meyalu.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malaisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malaysia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>> (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Parlée en Indonésie et en Malaisie, avec des -% prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasam est la variante malaisienne.} sont -% tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasam.dtx} -% (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} et \name{Bob}{Margolis}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}. -% Des -% fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. Pour d'autres noms pour cette -% langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} et~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bahasam> -\ProvidesFile{bahasam.mld}[2006/12/19]% -%% Bahasa Malaysia titles from bahasam.dtx in the babel package -%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry & Margolis, Bob -\def\ptctitle{Kandungan}% -\def\plftitle{Senarai Gambar}% -\def\plttitle{Senarai Jadual}% -\def\mtctitle{Kandungan}% -\def\mlftitle{Senarai Gambar}% -\def\mlttitle{Senarai Jadual}% -\def\stctitle{Kandungan}% -\def\slftitle{Senarai Gambar}% -\def\slttitle{Senarai Jadual}% -%</bahasam> -% \end{macrocode} -% \lneed{4} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bangla'' language: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} -% \suppressfloats -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}% -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}% -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}% -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}% -% \begin{figure}[!ht] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bangla1.png}\ixgrf{bangla1.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bangla2.png}\ixgrf{bangla2.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Bangla (bengali) language areas]{Bangla (bengali) language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/Bangladesh.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+bangla} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue bânglâ (bengalî)]{Régions de la langue bânglâ (bengalî) -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/Bangladesh.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+bangla} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bengali-m.jpg}\ixgrf{bengali-m.jpg}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The bengalî diaspora]{The bengalî diaspora -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengali_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+bengali-m} -% \or\relax -% \caption[La diaspora bengalî]{La diaspora bengalî -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengali_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+bengali-m} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0pt} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \noindent\begin{samepage} -% The titles\ixgrf{bangla.png}\ixgrfl{bangladesh-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengalî}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangla.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bangladesh}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangladesh-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' (\lopt{bengali}) language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India, -% like Occidental Bengal~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) and Tripura~(16); -% see figures~\vrefrange{f+bangla}{f+bengali-m}.} are taken from -% the \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} package~\cite{bangtex} (by \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); they need specific fonts -% (the bengali alphabet is derived from sanskrit). -% \par\end{samepage} -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{bangla.png}\ixgrfl{bangladesh-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bengalî}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangla.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bangladesh}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bangladesh-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de -% l'Inde, comme le Bengale Occidental~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) et Tripura~(16); -% voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+bangla}{f+bengali-m}.} (\lopt{bengali}) sont simplement tirés -% du paquetage \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex} (de \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); -% ils ont besoin de fontes spécifiques (l'alphabet bengalî est dérivé du sanskrit). -% \fi -% \par\normalmarginpar -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bangla> -\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2006/03/31]% -%% Bangla titles from BangTeX. Needs specific fonts. -\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*ipotRo}% <----- -\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% -\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% -\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}% -\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% -\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% -\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}% -\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}% -\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}% -%</bangla> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Basque'' language: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque1.pdf}\ixgrf{basque1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque2.pdf}\ixgrf{basque2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The Basque country]{The Basque country -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnebasque.htm} and -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnenavarre.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+basque} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Pays Basque]{Pays Basque (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnebasque.htm} et -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnenavarre.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+basque} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque-de.png}\ixgrf{basque-de.png}% -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{basque-df.png}\ixgrf{basque-df.png}% -% \fi -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{euskara.png}\ixgrf{euskara.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The Basque dialects]{The Basque dialects -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basque_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+euskara} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes basques]{Dialectes basques -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_basque})\hfill\null}\label{f+euskara} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{14mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{eusk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basque_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eusk-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{basque}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the basque country, in the north of Spain and -% south-west of France; see figure~\vref{f+basque}.} (\emph{euskara}) are taken from the \xfile{basque.dtx} file -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, by \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} -% and \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, with help from \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. -% It seems that 8~bits fonts are preferable. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{eusk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_basque}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eusk-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{basque}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Pays Basque, qui est situé dans le nord de l'Espagne -% et le sud-ouest de la France; voir la figure~\vref{f+basque}.} (\emph{euskara}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{basque.dtx} dans le paquetage -% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, par \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} et \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, avec -% l'aide de \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}. -% Il semble que des fontes 8-bits soient préférables. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*basque> -\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Basque titles from basque.dtx (babel). -%% Aguirregabiria, Juan M. <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html -%% & Sanchez, Julio <jsanchez at gmv.es>, -%% and help from Izaola Azkona, Zunbeltz <wmbizazz at lg dot ehu> -%% Needs special fonts. -\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% -\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% -\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% -\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% -\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% -\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% -\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}% -\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}% -\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}% -%</basque> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bengali'' language: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bengali~>>: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{bengali}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' language, so we load -% the file \xfile{bangla.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{bengali}~>> (bengalî) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>> (bânglâ), -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{bangla.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bengali> -\ProvidesFile{bengali.mld}[2007/07/23]\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}% -%</bengali> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bicig'' language: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\bcg} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig} is a written form of the mongolian language. -% It is also known as Uighur or Bichig. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} are taken -% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> est une forme écrite de la langue mongole. -% Il est aussi connu sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{uighur} en anglais) ou bichig. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bicig> -\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Mongol (Bicig) titles needs mongol fonts -\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% -\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% -\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}% -\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -%</bicig> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bicig2'' language: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig2}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, -% \lopt{bicig2} is a variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} are taken -% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also -% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, and~\vref{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bicig2~>>: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, -% \lopt{bicig2} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} sont -% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, \vref{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bicig2> -\ProvidesFile{bicig2.mld}[2005/11/16]% -%% Mongol (Bicig2) titles (needs mongol fonts) -\def\ptctitle{garcag}% -\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -\def\mtctitle{garcag}% -\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -\def\stctitle{garcag}% -\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -%</bicig2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bicig3'' language: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig3}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, \lopt{bicig3} is a -% variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur3}.} are taken -% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~bicig3~>>: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole, -% \lopt{bicig3} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont -% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bicig3> -\ProvidesFile{bicig3.mld}[2006/03/31]% -%% Mongol (Bicig3) titles (needs mongol fonts) -\def\ptctitle{aguulag=a}% -\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -\def\mtctitle{aguulag=a}% -\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -\def\stctitle{aguulag=a}% -\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}% -\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}% -%</bicig3> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{41.11842105mm} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bithe'' language: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} -% The titles\ixgrf{manjui.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchu_alphabet}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{manjui.png}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{bithe}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bithe} is a written form of the \lopt{manju} variant of the mongolian language.} are taken -% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% The Manju writing, or \emph{bithe} system is a close relative -% of the Mongolian system; the basical letter shapes are the -% same. Yet for Manju, a set of diacritics (\emph{dots and circles}) -% was designed to eliminate all the ambiguities of Mongolian. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bithe~>>: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld} -% Les titres\ixgrf{manjui.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchu_alphabet}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{manjui.png}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bithe}~>> est une forme écrite de la -% variante <<~\lopt{manju}~>> de la langue mongole.} sont -% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% L'écriture Manju (Manchou), ou le système \emph{bithe}, est une proche -% parente du système Mongol; les formes de base des lettres sont les mêmes. Mais pour le Manju, un -% ensemble de signes diacritiques (\emph{points et cercles}) a -% été conçu pour éliminer toutes les ambiguïtés du Mongol. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.386473430\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.613526570\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manchuria.jpg}\ixgrf{manchuria.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manjuc.jpg}\ixgrf{manjuc.jpg}% -% \\ -% -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{manchu.jpg}\ixgrf{manchu.jpg}} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Manchuria]{Manchuria (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchuria} -% and \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org/turan/manchu/manchuria.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+manju} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Mandchourie]{Mandchourie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manchuria} -% et \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org/turan/manchu/manchuria.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+manju} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Figure\vref{f+manju} shows the extent of Manchuria according -% to definition~1 (dark red) -% below, definition~3 (dark plus medium red) and definition~4 (dark -% plus medium plus light red): -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item Northeast China: generally defined as the three -% provinces of Heilongjiang, Jilin and Liaoning. -% \item The above, plus part of northeastern Inner Mongolia. -% \item The above, plus the Jehol region of Hebei -% province. The part of Manchuria in China is called -% Inner Manchuria to contrast it with -% Outer Manchuria (see below). -% \item The above, plus Outer Manchuria or Russian Manchuria, -% a region in Russia that stretches from the Amur and -% Ussuri rivers to the Stanovoy Mountains and the -% Sea of Japan. Russian Far East comprises Primorsky Krai, -% southern Khabarovsk Krai, the Jewish Autonomous Oblast -% and Amur Oblast. These were part of Manchu China -% according to the Treaty of Nerchinsk of 1689, but were -% ceded to Russia by the Treaty of Aigun (1858). -% \item The above, plus Sakhalin Oblast, which is generally -% included on Chinese maps as part of Outer Manchuria, -% even though it is not explicitly mentioned in the -% Treaty of Nerchinsk. -% \end{enumerate} -% Outer Manchuria is in light red on this map. Some also -% consider the island of Sakhalin to be part of Outer -% Manchuria. -% \or\relax -% La figure~\vref{f+manju} montre l'étendue de la Mandchourie -% selon la définition~1 (rouge -% sombre) ci-dessous, la définition~3 (rouge sombre plus rouge -% moyen) et la définition~4 (rouge sombre plus rouge moyen plus -% rouge clair): -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item Chine du Nord-Est: généralement définie comme étant -% formée des trois provinces de Heilongjiang, Jilin et Liaoning. -% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus une partie du nord-est de la -% Mongolie Intérieure. -% \item Comme ci-dessus, plud la région de Jehol de la province -% de Hebei. La partie de la Mandchourie située en Chine -% est appelée Mandchourie Intérieure par opposition à~la -% Mandchourie Extérieure (voir ci-dessous). -% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus la Mandchourie Extérieure ou -% Mandchourie Russe, une région située en Russie et qui -% s'étend des rivières Amur et Ussuri jusqu'aux Monts -% Stanovoy et à~la Mer du Japon. L'Extrême Orient Russe -% comprent le Primorsky Krai, le Khabarovsk Krai du sud, -% l'Oblast Juif Autonome et l'Oblast de l'Amur. Ces -% régions faisaient partie de la Chine Mandchoue selon le -% Traité de Nerchinsk de 1689, mais furent cédées à~la -% Russie par le Traité de Aigun (1858); -% \item Comme ci-dessus, plus l'Oblast de Sakhalin, qui est -% généralement inclus sur la cartes de Chine comme faisant -% partie de la Mandchourie Extérieure, même s'il n'est pas -% mentionné explicitement dans le Traité de Nerchinsk. -% \end{enumerate} -% La Mandchourie Extérieure est en rouge clair sur cette carte. -% Certains considèrent l'île de Sakhalin comme faisant partie de la -% Mandchourie Extérieure. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bithe> -\ProvidesFile{bithe.mld}[2005/11/16]% -%% Manju (bithe) titles (needs mongol fonts) -\def\ptctitle{garcag}% -\def\plftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% -\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% -\def\mtctitle{garcag}% -\def\mlftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% -\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% -\def\stctitle{garcag}% -\def\slftitle{zirug-un? afaha}% -\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}% -%</bithe> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Brazil'' language: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \raisebox{-3.5mm}{\includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{brazilp.pdf}}\ixgrf{brazilp.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{brazil.pdf}\ixgrf{brazil.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Brazil]{Brazil (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/brazil.jpg} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/bresimapa-lingua.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})i\hfill\null}\label{f+brazil} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Brésil]{Brésil (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/brazil.jpg} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/bresimapa-lingua.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+brazil} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}% -% \IVC{\awidth}{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \RaggedRight -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Caipira -- States of São Paulo (countryside; -% the city of São Paulo and the eastern areas of the -% state have their own dialect, called paulista); -% southern Minas Gerais, northern Paraná, Goiás and -% Mato Grosso do Sul. -% \item Cearense -- Ceará. -% \item Baiano -- Bahia. -% \item Fluminense -- Variants spoken in the states of Rio de -% Janeiro and Espírito Santo (excluding the -% city of Rio de Janeiro and its adjacent -% metropolitan areas, which have their own -% dialect, called carioca). -% \item Gaúcho -- Rio Grande do Sul. (There are many distinct accents -% in Rio Grande do Sul, mainly due to the heavy -% influx of European immigrants of diverse origins, those which have -% settled several colonies throughout the state.) -% \item Mineiro -- Minas Gerais (not prevalent in the Triângulo Mineiro, -% southern and southeastern Minas Gerais). -% \item Nordestino -- northeastern states -% of Brazil (Pernambuco and Rio Grande do Norte have a -% particular way of speaking). -% \item Nortista -- Amazon Basin states. -% \item Paulistano -- Variants spoken around São Paulo -% city and the eastern areas of São Paulo state. -% \item Sertanejo -- States of Goiás and Mato Grosso -% (the city of Cuiabá has a particular way of speaking). -% \item Sulista -- Variants spoken in the areas between the northern -% regions of Rio Grande do Sul and southern -% regions of São Paulo state. (The cities of Curitiba, -% Florianópolis, and Itapetininga have fairly distinct accents -% as well.) -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialects of Portuguese in Brazil]{Dialects of Portuguese in Brazil -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-b} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}% -% \IVC{\awidth}{portu-b.png}\ixgrf{portu-b.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% \RaggedRight -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Caipira -- États de São Paulo (campagne; -% la cité de São Paulo et les zones de l'est de l'état ont -% leur propre dialecte, appelé \emph{paulista}); -% le sud de Minas Gerais, le nord du Paraná, de Goiás et -% le Mato Grosso do Sul. -% \item Cearense -- Ceará. -% \item Baiano -- Bahia. -% \item Fluminense -- Des variantes parlées dans les étas de Rio de -% Janeiro et Espírito Santo (sauf la cité de Rio de Janeiro -% et ses zones métropolitaines adjacentes, qui ont leur -% propre dialecte, appelé \emph{carioca}). -% \item Gaúcho -- Rio Grande do Sul. (Il y~a de nombreux -% accents différents dans Rio Grande do Sul, surtout -% à~cause du fort afflux d'immigrants européens de -% diverses origines, ceux qui établi plusieurs colonies -% dans tout cet état.) -% \item Mineiro -- Minas Gerais (ne domine pas dans le -% \emph{Triângulo Mineiro} ou «~Triangle Minier~», au sud -% et au sud-est de Minas Gerais). -% \item Nordestino -- États du nord-est du Brésil (Pernambuco -% et Rio Grande do Norte ont une manière de parler -% particulière). -% \item Nortista -- États du bassin de l'Amazone. -% \item Paulistano -- Des variantes sont parlées autour de -% la cité de São Paulo et dans les régions de l'est de -% l'état de São Paulo. -% \item Sertanejo -- États de Goiás et du Mato Grosso -% (la cité de Cuiabá a une manière de parler particulière). -% \item Sulista -- Des variantes sont parlées dans les -% zones entre les régions du nord de Rio Grande do Sul et -% celles du sud de l'état de São Paulo. (Les cités de Curitiba, -% Florianópolis et Itapetininga ont aussi des accents -% assez distincts.) -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialectes du portugais au Brésil]{Dialectes du portugais au Brésil -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-b} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.5mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazilian_Portuguese}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{brazil}'' language (\emph{português brasileiro} or -% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{It is the main portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. Note that these titles are -% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} contributed to brazilian translations. -% See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file (for portugese titles by -% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) in the \pack{babel} -% package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazilian_Portuguese}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{brazil}~>> (brésilien, \emph{português brasileiro} ou -% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais principal parlé au Brésil. -% Notez que ces -% titres sont \emph{différents} au Brésil et au Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} a contribué aux -% traductions brésiliennes. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} -% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete} pour les titres portugais) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*brazil> -\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Portugues (brazil) titles, from portuges.dtx (babel) -%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro & "de Lima", Arnaldo Viegas -\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}% -\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}% -\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}% -\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -%</brazil> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Brazilian'' language: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{brazilian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{brazil}'', so we just load \xfile{brazil.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{brazilian}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{brazil}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*brazilian> -\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}% -%</brazilian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Breton'' language: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bretagne.pdf}\ixgrf{bretagne.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Brittany]{Brittany (\url{http://www.bretagnenet.com/scb/fgeo.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+bretagne} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Bretagne]{Bretagne (\url{http://www.bretagnenet.com/scb/fgeo.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+bretagne} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{spilhennig.png}\ixgrfl{gwenn-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Breton_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spilhennig.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Britanny}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gwenn-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{breton}'' language (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany; see -% figure~\vref{f+bretagne}. -% See also \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} and -% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} are taken from the -% \xfile{breton.dtx} file (by \name{Christian}{Rolland}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: -% \or\relax -% \lneed{2} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{spilhennig.png}\ixgrfl{gwenn-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Breton}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spilhennig.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bretagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gwenn-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{breton}~>> (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Parlée comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France); -% voir la figure~\vref{f+bretagne}. Voir aussi \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, -% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} et -% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} -% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{breton.dtx} (de \name{Christian}{Rolland}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*breton> -\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Breton titles from breton.dtx (babel) by Rolland, Christian -\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}% -\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% -\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% -\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}% -\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% -\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% -\def\stctitle{Taolenn}% -\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}% -\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}% -%</breton> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``British'' language: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Great_Britain}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}}} -% ``\lopt{british}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grande_Bretagne}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{british}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*british> -\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</british> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.317738791\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.682261209\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bulgmap.png}\ixgrf{bulgmap.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bulgariar.jpg}\ixgrf{bulgariar.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Bulgaria]{Bulgaria (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Bulgaria} -% and \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/bulgaria.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--)\hfill\null}\label{f+bulgaria} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Bulgarie]{Bulgarie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Bulgaria} -% et \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/bulgaria.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~--)\hfill\null}\label{f+bulgaria} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{bulgarski.png}\ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarian_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgarski.png}}\\*[2mm]% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{bulgarian}'' language (\emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) are taken from the \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} -% (adapted from russian by \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) file in the -% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; they require -% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{bulgarski.png}\ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgare}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgarski.png}}\\*[2mm]% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarian}~>> (bulgare, \emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} (adapté du russe par \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) dans le -% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; ils ont -% besoin de fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bulgarian> -\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2007/03/08]% -%% Bulgarian titles from bulgarian.dtx (babel) (needs special cyrillic fonts) -%% by Boshnakov, Georgi N. <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk> -\def\ptctitle{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -\def\mtctitle{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -\def\stctitle{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ % - \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}% -%</bulgarian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{bulgarianb}'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) -% of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; -% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarianb}~>> (haut bulgare) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} -% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}; -% ils requièrent des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bulgarianb> -\ProvidesFile{bulgarianb.mld}[2006/03/06]% -%% Upper bulgarian titles from russianb.dtx. Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian. -\def\ptctitle{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\plftitle{% Figuri - {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% -\def\plttitle{% Tablici - {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% -\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\mlftitle{% Figurite - {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% -\def\mlttitle{% Tablici - {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% -\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie - {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\def\slftitle{% Figuri - {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}% -\def\slttitle{% Tablici - {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}% -%</bulgarianb> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{13} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Buryat'' language: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}[b]{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=.54054054\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 300 203]{buryatia.pdf}\ixgrf{buryatia.pdf}% -% &&% -% \includegraphics[width=.45945946\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 255 216]{buryatia-l.pdf}\ixgrf{buryatia-l.pdf}% -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Republic of Buryatia]{Republic of Buryatia (\url{http://russiatrek.org/rp_buryatia.shtml})}\label{f+buryat} -% \or\relax -% \caption[République de Buryatie]{République de Buryatie (\url{http://russiatrek.org/rp_buryatia.shtml})}\label{f+buryat} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \begin{macro}{\mnr} -% \begin{macro}{\sh} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{bur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Buryat_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bur-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia and in the Buryatia republic, near -% Lake Baikal. See figure~\vref{f+buryat}.} are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. -% This language requires specific fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{bur.pdf}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Buryat_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bur-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée dans certaines régions de la Mongolie et dans la république -% de Buryatie, près du lac Baïkal. Voir la figure~\vref{f+buryat}.} (bouriate) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*buryat> -\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Buryat titles. Needs special fonts. -\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% -\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}% -\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -%</buryat> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Buryat2'' language: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~buryat2~>>: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mnr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{buryat2}'' language (a variant for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language, see section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) -% are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat2}~>> (une variante du langage «~\lopt{buryat}~», voir la section~\vref{s+mld+buryat}) -% sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue -% requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*buryat2> -\ProvidesFile{buryat2.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Buryat2 titles. Needs special fonts. -\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}% -%</buryat2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Canadian'' language: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \begin{tabularx}{\awidth}[c]{@{}Z{1}Z{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% Province&Official\\ -% &language(s)\\ -% \midrule -% Alberta&english\\ -% British-Columbia&english\\ -% Island-of-Prince-Edward&english\\ -% Manitoba&english\\ -% New-Brunswick&english-french\\ -% New-Scotland&english\\ -% Ontario&english\\ -% Québec&french\\ -% Satkatchewan&english\\ -% Newfoundland&english\\ -% Federal territories&english-french\\ -% Federal government&english-french\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf} -% \IVC{\awidth}{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Official languages in Canada]{Official languages in Canada -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amnord/canada.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada} -% \or\relax -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \begin{tabularx}{\awidth}[c]{@{}Z{1}Z{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% Province&Langue(s) officielle(s)\\ -% \midrule -% Alberta&anglais\\ -% Colombie-britannique&anglais\\ -% Île-du-Prince-Édouard&anglais\\ -% Manitoba&anglais\\ -% Nouveau-Brunswick&anglais-français\\ -% Nouvelle-Écosse&anglais\\ -% Ontario&anglais\\ -% Québec&français\\ -% Satkatchewan&anglais\\ -% Terre-Neuve&anglais\\ -% Territoires fédéraux&anglais-français\\ -% Gouvernement fédéral&anglais-français\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf} -% \IVC{\awidth}{canada.pdf}\ixgrf{canada.pdf} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Langues officielles au Canada]{Langues officielles au Canada -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amnord/canada.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure} -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada1.pdf}\ixgrf{canada1.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Canada]{Canada (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/cia07/canada_sm_2007.gif} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada1} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Canada]{Canada (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/cia07/canada_sm_2007.gif} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada1} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \afterpage{\clearpage} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-pe.png}\ixgrf{canada-pe.png} -% \caption[Political map of Canada]{Political map of Canada -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Provinces_and_territories_of_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-p} -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-pf.pdf}\ixgrf{canada-pf.pdf} -% \caption[Carte politique du Canada]{Carte politique du Canada -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-p} -% \fi -% -% \vspace*{\baselineskip} -% -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{canada-l.pdf}\ixgrf{canada-l.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Linguistic map of Canada]{Linguistic map of Canada -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bilinguisme_au_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-l} -% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Carte linguistique du Canada]{Carte linguistique du Canada -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bilinguisme_au_Canada})\hfill\null}\label{f+canada-l} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \vspace*{-3\baselineskip} -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{canadian}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'')} is just the \loptd{english} language spoken -% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{canadian}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise} -% (\loptd{english}) parlée au Canada. -% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*canadian> -\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</canadian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Canadien'' language: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{canadien}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'')} is just the \lopt{french} language spoken -% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{canada-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Canada}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{canadien}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{française} -% (\lopt{french}) parlée au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la -% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*canadien> -\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</canadien> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{19.14587332mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Castillan'' language: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{castillan}'' language is better known as ``\lopt{spanish}'',\ixgrfl{castille-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Castille}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{castille-f.png}}}}} -% but is spoken mainly in Castile, -% a part of central Spain. We -% just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> est mieux connue sous le nom de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> -% (espagnol),\ixgrfl{castille-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Castille}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{castille-f.png}}}}} -% mais est parlée principalement -% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*castillan> -\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% -%</castillan> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Castillian'' language: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ``Castillian'' is just the english name for ``castillan'', so -% we just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): -% \or\relax -% <<~Castillian~>> est juste le nom anglais du castillan, donc -% nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*castillian> -\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}% -%</castillian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Catalan'' language: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.502354788\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.497645212\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{catalan-d.pdf}\ixgrf{catalan-d.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{catalan-p.pdf}\ixgrf{catalan-p.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Catalan language areas]{Catalan language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnecatalogne.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+catalan} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue catalane]{Régions de la langue catalane -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnecatalogne.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+catalan} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{3} -% The titles\ixgrfl{catalonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{catalonia-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{catalan}'' language (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain, -% around Barcelona, and in Roussillon, in France. See figure~\vref{f+catalan}.} -% are taken from the \xfile{catalan.dtx} file (adapted from spanish by \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{catalonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Catalan_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{catalonia-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Parlée en Catalogne, -% la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour -% de Barcelone, et dans le Roussillon, en France. Voir la figure~\vref{f+catalan}.} sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{catalan.dtx} (adapté de l'espagnol par \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} -% et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*catalan> -\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Catalan titles from catalan.dtx (babel) (Badenes, Gonçal) -\def\ptctitle{\'Index}% -\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}% -\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{\'Index}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Taules}% -\def\stctitle{\'Index}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Taules}% -%</catalan> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hanzi.png}\ixgrf{hanzi.png}% -% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{hanzi.png}\ixgrf{hanzi.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c][4\baselineskip]{\bwidth}\small\RaggedRight -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Left: "Chinese character" in hànzì (Traditional Chinese);\newline -% Right: "Chinese character" in Simplified Chinese. -% \or\relax -% Gauche: \og Caractère chinois\fg en hànzì (chinois traditionnel);\newline -% Droite: \og Caractère chinois\fg en chinois simplifié. -% \fi -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Traditional and simplified Chinese versions of the Chinese word hànzì]{Traditional and simplified -% Chinese versions of the Chinese word hànzì -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hanzi} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Versions en chinois traditionnel et simplifié du mot chinois hànzì]{Versions en chinois traditionnel et -% simplifié du mot chinois hànzì -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hanzi} -% \fi -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-ch.png}\ixgrf{china-ch.png}\\{}\small -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Areas using only Chinese characters in green; in conjunction with other scripts, dark green;\ABK maximum -% extent of historic % usage, light green (does not include other territories annexed by Japan in World War~II). -% \or\relax -% Régions n'utilisant que des caractères chinois: en vert; en conjonction avec d'autres écritures: en vert foncé; -% extension maximale de l'utilisation historique: en vert clair (n'inclut pas d'autres territoires annexés par le -% Japon pendant la seconde guerre mondiale). -% \fi -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Areas using Chinese characters]{Areas using Chinese characters -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_character})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-ch} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions utilisant des caractères chinois]{Régions utilisant des caractères chinois -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_character})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-ch} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.651554404\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.348445596\iwidth} -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{chine1.pdf}\ixgrf{chine1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{chine2.pdf}\ixgrf{chine2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in China]{Languages in China (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-map-langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+chine} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Chine]{Langues en Chine (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-map-langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+chine} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-ae.png}\ixgrf{china-ae.png} -% \caption[People's Republic of China (PRC)]{People's Republic of China (PRC) -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PRC})\hfill\null}\label{f+PRC} -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-af.png}\ixgrf{china-af.png} -% \caption[République Populaire de Chine (RPC)]{République Populaire de Chine (RPC) -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_populaire_de_Chine})\hfill\null}\label{f+PRC} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{china-l.pdf}\ixgrf{china-l.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Dialects in China]{Dialects in China -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-l} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes en Chine]{Dialectes en Chine -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+china-l} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.25mm} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There\ixgrf{china-w.png}\ixgrfl{taiwan-f.png}\ixgrfl{china-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{china-w.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/China}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{china-f.png}}}\\ -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_China}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{taiwan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% are several variants for the chinese language. -% The ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cap} file -% in the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. -% See~\cite{china-h} about the history of China and the chinese language. -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}% -% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Il y~a\ixgrf{china-w.png}\ixgrfl{china-f.png}\ixgrfl{taiwan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chinese_written_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{china-w.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{china-f.png}}}\\ -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_de_Chine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{taiwan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise. -% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> (chinois première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cap} du -% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}. -% Voir~\cite{china-h} sur l'histoire de la Chine et de la langue chinoise. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese1.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*chinese1> -\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}% -%% From file Bg5.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5 -%</chinese1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \uxmldo{chinese2}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \uxmldo{chinese2.mld}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cpx} file in the \pack{CJK} -% system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cpx} dans -% le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la -% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese2.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*chinese2> -\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}% -%% From file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5, preprocessed -%</chinese2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Croatian'' language: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~\lopt{croatian}~>>: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.556818182\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443181818\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{croatia-un.png}\ixgrf{croatia-un.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{croatie2.png}\ixgrf{croatie2.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Croatia and minorities in Croatia]{Croatia and minorities in Croatia -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Croatia} and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/croatieinfos.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+croatie} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Croatie et minorités en Croatie]{Croatie et minorités en Croatie -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Croatia} et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/croatieinfos.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+croatie} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% ^^A \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xyugo.png}\ixgrf{xyugo.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Main nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia in 1998]{Main nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia in 1998 -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croate})\hfill\null}\label{f+xyugo} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Principales nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie en 1998]{Principales nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie en 1998 -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croate})\hfill\null}\label{f+xyugo} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{25mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{hrv.png}\ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatian_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hrv.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{croatian}'' language (\emph{hrvatski}) are taken from the file \xfile{croatian.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian} (see figures~\vrefrange{f+croatie}{f+xyugo}): -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{hrv.png}\ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatian_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hrv.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate, \emph{hrvatski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{croatian.dtx} -% (de \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian} (voir les -% figures~\vrefrange{f+croatie}{f+xyugo}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*croatian> -\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Croatian titles from croatian.dtx (babel). Pai\'{c}, Alan. -\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\plftitle{Popis slika}% -\def\plttitle{Popis tablica}% -\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\mlftitle{Popis slika}% -\def\mlttitle{Popis tablica}% -\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\slftitle{Slike}% -\def\slttitle{Tablice}% -%</croatian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Czech'' language: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{cz1.pdf}\ixgrf{cz1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{cz3.png}\ixgrf{cz3.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Czech Republic]{Czech Republic (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/reptcheque.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_the_Czech_Republic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cz} -% \or\relax -% \caption[République Tchèque]{République Tchèque (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/reptcheque.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_the_Czech_Republic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cz} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1\baselineskip} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb] -% ^^A \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}% -% \IVC[40mm]{\awidth}{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[1.~] Czech group: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[1.a~] north-east czech subgroup, -% \item[1.b~] center czech subgroup. -% \item[1.c~] south-west czech subgroup, -% \item[1.d~] morave czech subgroup. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[2.~] Group of central Moravia. -% \item[3.~] Group of eastern Moravia. -% \item[4.~] Group of Silesia: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[4.a~] subgroup of moravian Silesia, -% \item[4.b~] subgroup of polish Silesia. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[5.~] Miscellaneous dialects. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Czech dialects]{Czech dialects (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchèque})\hfill\null}\label{f+czechd} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}% -% \IVC[40mm]{\awidth}{czechd.pdf}\ixgrf{czechd.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[1.~] Groupe tchèque: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[1.a~] sous-groupe tchèque du nord-est, -% \item[1.b~] sous-groupe tchèque du centre, -% \item[1.c~] sous-groupe tchèque du sud-ouest, -% \item[1.d~] sous-groupe du tchèque morave. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[2.~] Groupe de la Moravie centrale. -% \item[3.~] Groupe de la Moravie de l'est. -% \item[4.~] Groupe de la Silésie: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item[4.a~] sous-groupe de la Silésie morave, -% \item[4.b~] sous-groupe de la Silésie polonaise. -% \end{itemize} -% \item[5.~] Dialectes divers. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialectes tchèques]{Dialectes tchèques (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchèque})\hfill\null}\label{f+czechd} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{czech-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{czech}'' language (\emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the file \xfile{czech.dtx} -% (contributions by \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{czech-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{czech}~>> (tchèque, \emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{czech.dtx} -% (contributions de \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*czech> -\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[2007/12/04]% -%% Czech titles from czech.dtx (babel). Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek, Milo\v{s} V. -\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% -\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% -\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}% -\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% -\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% -\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}% -\def\stctitle{Obsah}% -\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}% -\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}% -%</czech> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Danish'' language: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.362204724\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.637795276\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danemark.jpg}\ixgrf{danemark.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{feroe.jpg}\ixgrf{feroe.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Denmark and Faeroe Islands]{Denmark and Faeroe Islands -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/danemarkcarte.htm} and -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/feroe_carte1.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+denmark} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Danemark et Îles Féroé]{Danemark et Îles Féroé -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/danemarkcarte.htm} et -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/feroe_carte1.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ddenmark} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishd.pdf}\ixgrf{danishd.pdf}}\\% -% \\*[1\baselineskip]% -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}% -% \IVC[80mm]{\awidth}{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% The distribution of one, two, and three grammatical genders in Danish dialects. -% In Zealand (\emph{Sjælland}) the transition from three to two genders has happened fairly recently. -% West of the red line the definite article goes before the word as in English or German; -% east of the line it takes the form of a suffix. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Danish dialects]{Danish dialects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+danishd} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishd.pdf}\ixgrf{danishd.pdf}}\\% -% \\*[1\baselineskip]% -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}% -% \IVC[80mm]{\awidth}{danishg.pdf}\ixgrf{danishg.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% La distribution d'un, deux et trois genres grammaticaux dans les dialectes danois. En Sealand (\emph{Sjælland}) la -% transition de trois à~deux genres s'est produite assez récemment. À~l'ouest de la ligne rouge, l'article défini -% se place avant le mot comme en anglais ou en allemend; à~l'est de la ligne, il prend la forme d'un suffixe. -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialectes danois]{Dialectes danois (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+danishd} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.9189892mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{dane-f.png}\ixgrfl{faroe-f.png}\ixgrfl{greenland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danish_Language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dane-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Faroe_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{faroe-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greenland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greenland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{danish}'' language\,\footnote{The danish (\emph{dansk}) language is spoken in Denmark, in the Faeroe -% Islands and in Greenland.} are taken from the \xfile{danish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Henning}{Larsen}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{dane-f.png}\ixgrfl{faroe-f.png}\ixgrfl{greenland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Danois}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dane-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Îles_Féroé}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{faroe-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Groenland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greenland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{danish}~>> (danois\,\footnote{Le danois (\emph{dansk}) est parlé au Danemark, dans les Îles -% Féroé et au Groenland.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{danish.dtx} -% (de \name{Henning}{Larsen}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*danish> -\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Danish titles from danish.dtx (babel). Larsen, Henning (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch) -\def\ptctitle{Indhold}% -\def\plftitle{Figurer}% -\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\mtctitle{Indhold}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\stctitle{Indhold}% -\def\slftitle{Figurer}% -\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% -%</danish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Devanagari'' language: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~devanagari~>>: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.845238095mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{devanagari.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Devanagari}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{devanagari.png}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{devanagari}'' language are taken from the \xfile{devanagari.sty} and \xfile{captions.dn} files -% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, -% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) -% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} -% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{devanagari.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Devanagari}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{devanagari.png}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>> (hindi) sont tirés des fichiers \xfile{devanagari.sty} et \xfile{captions.dn} -% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, -% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) -% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dn} -% \begin{macro}{\qva} -% \begin{macro}{\re} -% \begin{macro}{\rs} -% \begin{macro}{\8} -% \begin{macro}{\2} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Specific fonts are required. -% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. See also~\cite{hindi99} about the hindi language. -% \or\relax -% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. -% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. -% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*devanagari> -\ProvidesFile{devanagari.mld}[2006/08/25]% -%% Devanagari (hindi) titles from devanagari.sty by -%% Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & -%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik -\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -%</devanagari> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Dutch'' language: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld} -% \fi -% ^^A (DU -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!bhp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{netherlands-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{flanders-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suriname-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{aruba-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Netherlands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Flanders}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{flanders-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brussels-Capital_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}\\ -% \textbf{Netherlands}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Flanders}&\textbf{Brussels}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suriname}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suriname-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aruba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aruba-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Netherlands_Antilles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-antilles-f.png}}}&\\ -% \textbf{Suriname}&\textbf{Aruba}&\textbf{Netherlands~Antilles}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Dutch speaking countries]{Dutch speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dutch})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tphb] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{netherlands-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{flanders-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suriname-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{aruba-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{netherlands-antilles-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pays-Bas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portail:Flandre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{flanders-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Région_de_Bruxelles-Capitale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}\\ -% \textbf{Pays-Bas}&\textbf{Belgique}&\textbf{Flandre}&\textbf{Bruxelles}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suriname}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suriname-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aruba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aruba-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Antilles_néerlandaises}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{netherlands-antilles-f.png}}}&\\ -% \textbf{Suriname}&\textbf{Aruba}&\textbf{Antilles~néerlandaises}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays néerlandophones]{Pays néerlandophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A DU) -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.381017882) -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.618982118) -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{neder.pdf}\ixgrf{neder.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{belgique.pdf}\ixgrf{belgique.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in the Nederlands and in Belgium]{Languages in the Nederlands and in Belgium -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysbas_lng_Map.htm} and -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/belgique_lng-regionales.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues aux Pays-Bas et en Belgique]{Langues aux Pays-Bas et en Belgique -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysbas_lng_Map.htm} et -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/belgique_lng-regionales.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutch} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{dutchw.pdf}\ixgrf{dutchw.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The dutch language in the world]{The dutch language in the world -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutchw} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Le néerlandais dans le monde]{Le néerlandais dans le monde -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Néerlandais})\hfill\null}\label{f+dutchw} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{3} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles -% for the ``\lopt{dutch}'' language\,\footnote{The dutch language (\emph{nederlands}) is spoken in -% the Netherlands and a part of Belgium; see figures~\vrefrange{f+dutch-c}{f+dutchw}.} are taken from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{dutch}~>> (néerlandais, \emph{nederlands})\,\footnote{La langue néerlandaise -% est parlée aux Pays-Bas et dans une partie de la Belgique; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+dutch-c}{f+dutchw}.} sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) dans le -% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*dutch> -\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Dutch titles from dutch.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) -\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% -\def\plftitle{L"yst van figuren}% -\def\plttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% -\def\mlftitle{L"yst van figuren}% -\def\mlttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% -\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}% -\def\slftitle{L"yst van figuren}% -\def\slttitle{L"yst van tabellen}% -%</dutch> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \normalmarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``English'' language: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\loptd{english}'' language are taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. -% \emph{The\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% See\ixgrfl{england-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/England}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{england-f.jpg}}}}} -% also sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK -% \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},\ABK -% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\loptd{english}~>> (anglais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}. -% \emph{Notez que la\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car l'anglais est la langue par défaut.} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% Voir\ixgrfl{england-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angleterre}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{england-f.jpg}}}}} -% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK -% \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}\ABK et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*english> -\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.) -\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}% -\def\plftitle{List of Figures}% -\def\plttitle{List of Tables}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Contents}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tables}% -\def\stctitle{Contents}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tables}% -%</english> -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{anglo1.pdf}\ixgrf{anglo1.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Anglophone areas]{Anglophone areas -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+english} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions anglophones]{Régions anglophones -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+english} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A (ENG -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{liberia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jamaica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bahamas-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{barbados-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{fiji-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{singapore-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{philippines-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{samoa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kiribati-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{india-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{pakistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tonga-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tuvalu-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_Kingdom}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ireland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/USA}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{United~Kingdom~(1)}&\textbf{Ireland~(1)}&\textbf{USA}&\textbf{Canada~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Zealand}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liberia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liberia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Australia~(1)}&\textbf{New~Zealand~(1)}&\textbf{Ghana~(1)}&\textbf{Liberia~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zimbabwe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zimbabwe-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jamaica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jamaica-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahamas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahamas-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Uganda~(1)}&\textbf{Zimbabwe~(1)}&\textbf{Jamaica~(1)}&\textbf{Bahamas~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barbados}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{barbados-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fiji}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{fiji-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Barbados~(1)}&\textbf{Dominica~(1)}&\textbf{Vanuatu~(1)}&\textbf{Fiji~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Solomon_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{solomon-islands-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Africa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Solomon~Islands~(1)}&\textbf{Tanzania~(2)}&\textbf{Cameroon~(2)}&\textbf{South~Africa~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Singapore}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{singapore-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Philippines}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{philippines-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Samoa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{samoa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kiribati}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kiribati-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Singapore~(2)}&\textbf{Philippines~(2)}&\textbf{Samoa~(2)}&\textbf{Kiribati~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pakistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{pakistan-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tonga}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tonga-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuvalu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tuvalu-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{India~(2)}&\textbf{Pakistan~(2)}&\textbf{Tonga}&\textbf{Tuvalu}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{See~\cite[page~77]{comrie1990}~and~\cite[page~137]{LOE}}.\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~English~is~the~only~official~language.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~English~is~one~of~the~official~languages.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[English-speaking countries]{English-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+eng-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{australia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{liberia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zimbabwe-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jamaica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bahamas-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{barbados-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{fiji-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{solomon-islands-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{south-africa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{singapore-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{philippines-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{samoa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kiribati-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{india-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{pakistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tonga-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tuvalu-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Royaume-Uni}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/États-Unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Royaume-Uni~(1)}&\textbf{Irlande~(1)}&\textbf{États-Unis}&\textbf{Canada~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Australie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{australia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouvelle-Zélande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libéria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liberia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Australie~(1)}&\textbf{Nouvelle-Zélande~(1)}&\textbf{Ghana~(1)}&\textbf{Libéria~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zimbabwe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zimbabwe-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jamaïque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jamaica-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bahamas}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bahamas-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Ouganda~(1)}&\textbf{Zimbabwe~(1)}&\textbf{Jamaïque~(1)}&\textbf{Bahamas~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barbade}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{barbados-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fidji}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{fiji-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Barbade~(1)}&\textbf{Dominique~(1)}&\textbf{Vanuatu~(1)}&\textbf{Fidji~(1)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Salomon_(pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{solomon-islands-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroun}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afrique~du~Sud}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{south-africa-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Îles~Salomon~(1)}&\textbf{Tanzanie~(2)}&\textbf{Cameroun~(2)}&\textbf{Afrique~du~Sud~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Singapour}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{singapore-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Philippines}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{philippines-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Samoa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{samoa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kiribati}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kiribati-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Singapour~(2)}&\textbf{Philippines~(2)}&\textbf{Samoa~(2)}&\textbf{Kiribati~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pakistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{pakistan-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tonga}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tonga-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tuvalu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tuvalu-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Inde~(2)}&\textbf{Pakistan~(2)}&\textbf{Tonga}&\textbf{Tuvalu}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Voir~\cite[page~77]{comrie1990}~et~\cite[page~137]{LOE}}.\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~L'anglais~est~la~seule~langue~officielle.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~L'anglais~est~l'une~des~langues~officielles.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays anglophones]{Pays anglophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Anglais})\hfill\null}\label{f+eng-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A ENG) -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``English1'' language: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~english1~>>: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} -% \begin{macro}{\value} -% \begin{macro}{\Roman} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{english1}'' language come from the \xfile{english.dtx} file -% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} -% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres -% au niveau partie. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*english1> -\ProvidesFile{english1.mld}[2006/03/30]% -%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. -%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) -\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - Table of Contents of the First Part\relax - \else Table of Contents of Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% -\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - List of Figures in the First Part\relax - \else List of Figures in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% -\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - List of Tables in the First Part\relax - \else List of Tables in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Contents}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tables}% -\def\stctitle{Contents}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tables}% -%</english1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``English2'' language: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~english2~>>: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcEnglishIIpart} -% \begin{macro}{\ifcase} -% \begin{macro}{\value} -% \begin{macro}{\Roman} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{english2}'' language are again taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file -% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with adaptations at the part level. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx} -% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec adaptations au niveau partie. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*english2> -\ProvidesFile{english2.mld}[2006/03/30]% -%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L. -%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) -\def\mtcEnglishIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% -\or the First Part\or the Second Part\or the Third Part -\or the Fourth Part\or the Fifth Part\or the Sixth Part -\or the Seventh Part\or the Eighth Part\or the Ninth Part -\or the Tenth Part\or the Eleventh Part\or the Twelfth Part -\or the Thirteenth Part\or the Fourteenth Part \or the Fifteenth Part -\or the Sixteenth Part \or the Seventeenth Part \or the Eighteenth Part -\or the Nineteenth Part\or the Twentieth Part \else Part~\Roman{part}\fi} -\def\ptctitle{Contents of \mtcEnglishIIpart} -\def\plftitle{List of Figures in \mtcEnglishIIpart} -\def\plttitle{List of Tables in \mtcEnglishIIpart} -%% -\def\mtctitle{Contents}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tables}% -\def\stctitle{Contents}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tables}% -%</english2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Esperant'' language: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} -% The titles\ixgrfl{esperanto-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Esperanto}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{esperanto-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{esperant}'' (espéranto) language are taken from the \xfile{esperanto.dtx} file -% (by \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. -% The esperanto artificial language was created in the 1877--1885 years -% by Doctor~\namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\footnote{See -% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L.L._Zamenhof}, -% \url{http://uea.org/} and \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} for more information; his first names are -% sometimes spelled ``Ludvic Lazarus'' or ``Louis-Lazare'', with small variations.} (1859--1917) of Warsaw, Poland. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{esperanto-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Esperanto}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{esperanto-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> (espéranto) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{esperanto.dtx} -% (de \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}. -% La langue artificielle esperanto a été créée dans les années 1877--1885 par le docteur -% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\,{\froff\footnote{Voir -% \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zamenhof}, -% \url{http://uea.org/} et \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} pour plus d'informations. Ses prénoms sont -% parfois écrits \og~Ludvic Lazarus~\fg{} ou \og~Louis-Lazare~\fg, avec quelques variantes.}} (1859--1917) de -% Varsovie en Pologne. -% \fi -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*esperant> -\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[2006/12/19]% -%% Esperanto titles from esperanto.dtx (babel) Ruiz-Altaba, Marti & Knappen, Jörg -\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}% -\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}% -\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% -\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}% -\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}% -\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% -\def\stctitle{Enhavo}% -\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}% -\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}% -%</esperant> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{esperanto}'' and ``\lopt{esperant}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the -% \xfile{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): -% \or\relax -% Les langues <<~\lopt{esperanto}~>> et <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*esperanto> -\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}% -%</esperanto> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Estonian'' language: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{estonia-a.pdf}\ixgrf{estonia-a.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{estonia-b.pdf}\ixgrf{estonia-b.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Estonia]{Estonia (\url{http://www.estonica.org/eng/maps/index-eng.html}, -% under the Creative Commons License, -% see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB})\hfill\null}\label{f+estonia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Estonie]{Estonie (\url{http://www.estonica.org/eng/maps/index-eng.html}, -% sous la \emph{Creative Commons License}, -% voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr})\hfill\null}\label{f+estonia} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{estonian}'' language\,\footnote{Estonian (\emph{eesti keel}) is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a -% language from the uralian family.} are taken from the \xfile{estonian.dtx} file -% (by \name{Enn}{Saar}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{estonian}~>> (estonien\,\footnote{L'estonien (\emph{eesti keel}) \emph{n'est pas} une langue -% balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{estonian.dtx} -% (de \name{Enn}{Saar}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}: -% \fi -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!p] -% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% ^^A \centering -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltic-s.jpg}\ixgrf{baltic-s.jpg}% -% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \caption[Baltic Sea]{Baltic Sea (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic_peoples})\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-s} -% ^^A \or\relax -% ^^A \caption[Mer Baltique]{[Mer Baltique (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic_peoples})\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-s} -% ^^A \fi -% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*estonian> -\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Estonian titles from estonian.dtx (babel) Saar, Enn -\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}% -\def\plftitle{Joonised}% -\def\plttitle{Tabelid}% -\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}% -\def\mlftitle{Joonised}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}% -\def\stctitle{Sisukord}% -\def\slftitle{Joonised}% -\def\slttitle{Tabelid}% -%</estonian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.447761194\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.552238806\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ethiopia.pdf}\ixgrf{ethiopia.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ethiopia-p.pdf}\ixgrf{ethiopia-p.pdf}\\*[\bigskipamount] -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{ethiolang.png}\ixgrf{ethiolang.png}} -% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Ethiopian languages areas]{Ethiopian languages areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie-prov.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Ethiopia})\hfill\null}\label{f+ethiopia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions des langues éthiopiennes]{Régions des langues éthiopiennes -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie-prov.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/ethiopie.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq} -% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geography_of_Ethiopia})\hfill\null}\label{f+ethiopia} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.642441860mm} -% \begin{macro}{\eth@doaltchar} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrf{eth2.png}\ixgrfl{ethiopia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Amharic}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eth2.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethiopa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ethiopia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language (amharic, \emph{\=amari\"{n}\"{n}a}) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} -% (written by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). Specific -% fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. See figure~\vref{f+ethiopia} for the repartition of -% the various ethiopian dialects. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{eth2.png}\ixgrfl{ethiopia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Amharic}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eth2.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethiopa}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ethiopia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>> (éthiopien, amarique, \emph{amaregna}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} -% (écrit par \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). -% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. -% Voir la figure~\vref{f+ethiopia} pour la répartition des divers dialectes éthiopiens. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ethiopia> -\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Ethopian titles. Needs special fonts. -\def\ptctitle{yezate}% -\def\plftitle{% - ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -\def\plttitle{% - yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -\def\mtctitle{yezate}% -\def\mlftitle{% - ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -\def\mlttitle{% - yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -\def\stctitle{yezate}% -\def\slftitle{% - ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -\def\slttitle{% - yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}% -%</ethiopia> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{ethiopian}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language, so we just load the -% \xfile{ethiopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian}~>> (éthiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>>, -% donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{ethiopia.mld} -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ethiopian> -\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}% -%</ethiopian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ethiopian2'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{ethiopian2}'' language (for Omega) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop} -% (by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). -% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian2~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian2}~>> (éthiopien pour Omega) sont tirés -% du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop} -% (de \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). -% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ethiopian2> -\ProvidesFile{ethiopian2.mld}[2006/01/30]% -%% Ethopian titles with Omega. Needs special fonts -\def\ptctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% -\def\plftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -\def\plttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 - ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -\def\mtctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% -\def\mlftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -\def\mlttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 - ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -\def\stctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}% -\def\slftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -\def\slttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5 - ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}% -%</ethiopian2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% There are\ixgrf{farsi-logo.png}\ixgrfl{iran-f.png}\ixgrfl{afghan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iran}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iran-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afghanistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{afghan-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://www.farsitex.org}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{farsi-logo.png}}\end{tabular}}} -% several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% The ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the -% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} system{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, -% \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, -% \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. -% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 365 402]{farsi.pdf}\ixgrf{farsi.pdf}% -% \caption[Farsi language areas]{Farsi language areas (\url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi}; -% see also \url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi/linguistic_composition_of_iran.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+farsi} -% \end{figure} -% -% \or\relax -% \lneed{8} -% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1} -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip,viewport= 0 0 365 402]{farsi.pdf}\ixgrf{farsi.pdf}% -% \caption[Régions de la langue farsi]{Régions de la langue farsi (\url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi}; -% voir aussi \url{http://www.farsinet.com/farsi/linguistic_composition_of_iran.html})\hfill\null}\label{f+farsi} -% \end{figure} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm} -% Il y~a\ixgrf{farsi-logo.png}\ixgrfl{iran-f.png}\ixgrfl{afghan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iran}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iran-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Afghanistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{afghan-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://www.farsitex.org}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=2.5cm]{farsi-logo.png}}\end{tabular}}} -% plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> (farsi première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du -% système -% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, -% par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}. -% -% \normalmarginpar -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi1.mlo}. -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{iranian.jpg}\ixgrf{iranian.jpg}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Iranian tongues]{Iranian tongues (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Persan})\hfill\null}\label{f+iranian} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues iraniennes]{Langues iraniennes -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Persan})\hfill\null}\label{f+iranian} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*farsi1> -\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}% -%% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, -%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. -%% http://www.farsitex.org -%</farsi1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} -% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% The ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}} -% system~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, -% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. -% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2} -% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la -% figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> (farsi deuxième variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du -% système \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, développé par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, -% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al. -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}. -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, -% hence we load \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*farsi2> -\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}% -%% From farsi.sty (FarsiTeX project: http://www.farsitex.org). Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, -%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others. -%</farsi2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Farsi3'' language: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% -% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~farsi3~>>: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}% -% \ixfile{farsi3.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\FR} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan (see figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% The ``\lopt{farsi3}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.ldf} file in the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system\cite{arabi}, -% by \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. Special fonts are needed, of course. -% \or\relax -% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan (voir la figure~\vref{f+farsi}). -% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.ldf} du -% système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, par \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*farsi3> -\ProvidesFile{farsi3.mld}[2006/07/27]% -%% From farsi.ldf of the Arabi system by Youssef Jabri. -\def\ptctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% -\def\plftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\plttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -\def\mtctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% -\def\mlftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\mlttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -\def\stctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}% -\def\slftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}% -\def\slttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}% -%</farsi3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Finnish'' language: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.437269373\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.562730627\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.505\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.495\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finlande1.png}\ixgrf{finlande1.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finlande2.pdf}\ixgrf{finlande2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Finland]{Finland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande_regions.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic-Finnic_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+finland} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Finlande]{Finlande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande_regions.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Baltic-Finnic_languages})\hfill\null}\label{f+finland} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finnishl.pdf}\ixgrf{finnishl.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Areas of the Finnish language]{Areas of the Finnish language -- blue: official language; dark green: -% spoken by a minority -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishl} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue finnoise]{Régions de la langue finnoise -- bleu: langue officielle; vert foncé: -% langue parlée par une minorité -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishl} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{finnishd.pdf}\ixgrf{finnishd.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Finnish dialects]{Finnish dialects -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishd} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes finnois]{Dialectes finnois -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+finnishd} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15.28125mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnish_Language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{finnish}'' language (\emph{suomi}) are taken from the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finnois}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish}~>> (finnois, \emph{suomi}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} -% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*finnish> -\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[2006/03/20]% -%% Finnish titles from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen -\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% -\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% -\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% -\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% -\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}% -\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% -%</finnish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{finnish2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed by the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish2}~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tirés d'une variante proposée -% par le fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx} -% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*finnish2> -\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Finnish titles (variant) from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen -\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}% -\def\plftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\plttitle{Taulukot}% -\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}% -\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}% -\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}% -\def\slftitle{Kuvat}% -\def\slttitle{Taulukot}% -%</finnish2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Francais'' language: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{francais}'' (\emph{français}) -% language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see -% section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{francais}~>> (\emph{français}) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, -% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*francais> -\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</francais> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``French'' language: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1425 631,clip]{franco.png}\ixgrf{franco.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Francophone areas]{Francophone areas -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/French_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+french} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions francophones]{Régions francophones -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/French_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+french} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[htb!] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{france-lr.png}\ixgrf{france-lr.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Regional dialects in France]{Regional dialects in France -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_régionales_de_France})\hfill\null}\label{f+france-lr} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues régionales de France]{Langues régionales de France -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_régionales_de_France})\hfill\null}\label{f+france-lr} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A (FRANCO-EU -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{wallonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{france-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{greece-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorra}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Walloon_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wallonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Albania}&\textbf{Andorra}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Walloon~Region}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greece}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bulgaria}&\textbf{France}&\textbf{Greece}&\textbf{Luxembourg}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macedonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldova}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Macedonia}&\textbf{Moldova}&\textbf{Monaco}&\textbf{Romania}\\% -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Switzerland}&\textbf{Cyprus~(a)}&\textbf{Austria~(o)}&\textbf{Croatia~(o)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lithuania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Hungary}~(o)&\textbf{Lithuania}~(o)&\textbf{Poland}~(o)&\textbf{Czech~Rep.}~(o)\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Serbia~(o)}&\textbf{Slovakia~(o)}&\textbf{Slovenia~(o)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(o)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brussels-Capital_Region}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Vatican~(v)}&\textbf{Brussels}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Associated member.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(v)~Vatican uses french as its official diplomatic language.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in Europe]{Francophone countries in Europe (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-eu-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belgium-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{wallonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{france-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{greece-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{macedonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{brussels-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belgium-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_française_de_Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wallonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Albanie}&\textbf{Andorre}&\textbf{Belgique}&\textbf{Wallonie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grèce}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bulgarie}&\textbf{France}&\textbf{Grèce}&\textbf{Luxembourg}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macédoine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macedonia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldavie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Macédoine}&\textbf{Moldavie}&\textbf{Monaco}&\textbf{Roumanie}\\% -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Suisse}&\textbf{Chypre~(a)}&\textbf{Autriche~(o)}&\textbf{Croatie~(o)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hongrie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lituanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_tchèque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Hongrie}~(o)&\textbf{Lituanie}~(o)&\textbf{Pologne}~(o)&\textbf{Rép.~tchèque}~(o)\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Serbie~(o)}&\textbf{Slovaquie~(o)}&\textbf{Slovénie~(o)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(o)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Région_de_Bruxelles-Capitale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brussels-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Vatican~(v)}&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Membre associé.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(v)~Le Vatican utilise le français comme langue diplomatique officielle.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Europe]{Pays francophones en Europe (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-eu-c} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-EU) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AM -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{quebec-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{haiti-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{california-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{louisiana-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{maine-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrf{new-york-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vermont-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Brunswick}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nbrunswick-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quebec}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{quebec-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Canada}&\textbf{New~Brunswick}&\textbf{Quebec}&\textbf{Dominica}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Haiti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{haiti-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saint_Lucia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saint-lucia-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Haiti}&\textbf{Saint~Lucia}&&\\% -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/California}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{california-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Louisiana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{louisiana-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{maine-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_York}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{new-york-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Califorbia~(u)}&\textbf{Louisiana~(u)}&\textbf{Maine~(u)}&\textbf{New~York~(u)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vermont}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vermont-f.png}}}&&&\\% -% \textbf{Vermont~(u)}&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(u)~State of the USA; not member because of federal restrictions.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in Americas and the Caribbean]{Francophone countries in -% Americas and the Caribbean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-amc-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{canada-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nbrunswick-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{quebec-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominica-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{haiti-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{saint-lucia-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{california-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{louisiana-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{maine-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrf{new-york-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vermont-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canada}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{canada-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouveau_Brunswick}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nbrunswick-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Québec}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{quebec-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominique_(Pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominica-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Canada}&\textbf{Nouveau~Brunswick}&\textbf{Québec}&\textbf{Dominique}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Haïti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{haiti-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sainte-Lucie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{saint-lucia-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Haïti}&\textbf{Sainte-Lucie}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Californie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{california-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Louisiane}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{louisiana-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maine_(État)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{maine-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Etat_de_New_York}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{new-york-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Californie~(u)}&\textbf{Louisiane~(u)}&\textbf{Maine~(u)}&\textbf{New~York~(u)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vermont}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vermont-f.png}}}&&&\\% -% \textbf{Vermont~(u)}&&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(u)~État des États-Unis: non membre pour cause de restrictions fédérales.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones aux Amériques et dans les Caraïbes]{Pays francophones aux -% Amériques et dans les Caraïbes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-amc-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AM) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AFN -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Egypt}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lebanon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Morocco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Egypt}&\textbf{Lebanon}&\textbf{Morocco}&\textbf{Mauritania}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algeria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Tunisia}&\textbf{Algeria~(p)}&\textbf{Israel~(p)}&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(p)~Not member for political motives.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in North~Africa and Middle~East]{Francophone countries in -% North~Africa and Middle~East (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afn-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{egypt-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lebanon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{morocco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tunisia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{algeria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Égypte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{egypt-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liban}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lebanon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Maroc}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{morocco-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Égypte}&\textbf{Liban}&\textbf{Maroc}&\textbf{Mauritanie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tunisie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tunisia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Algérie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{algeria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Tunisie}&\textbf{Algérie~(p)}&\textbf{Israël~(p)}&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(p)~Non membre pour des motifs politiques.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique du Nord et au Moyen~Orient]{Pays francophones en -% Afrique du Nord et au Moyen~Orient (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afn-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AFN) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AFW -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{benin-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{burkina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ivory-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mali-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{niger-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{senegal-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{togo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Benin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{benin-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burkina_Faso}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burkina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cape_Verde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ivory_Coast}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ivory-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Benin}&\textbf{Burkina~Faso}&\textbf{Cape~Verde}&\textbf{Ivory~Coast}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mali}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mali-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niger}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{niger-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Guinea}&\textbf{Guinea-Bissau}&\textbf{Mali}&\textbf{Niger}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Senegal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{senegal-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Togo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{togo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Senegal}&\textbf{Togo}&\textbf{Ghana~(a)}&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Associated member.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in West~Africa]{Francophone countries in -% West~Africa (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afw-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{benin-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{burkina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ivory-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mali-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{niger-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{senegal-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{togo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ghana-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bénin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{benin-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burkina_Faso}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burkina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap-Vert}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Côte_d'Ivoire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ivory-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bénin}&\textbf{Burkina~Faso}&\textbf{Cap-Vert}&\textbf{Côte~d'Ivoire}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée-bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mali}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mali-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niger}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{niger-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Guinée}&\textbf{Guinée-bissau}&\textbf{Mali}&\textbf{Niger}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sénégal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{senegal-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Togo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{togo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghana}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ghana-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Sénégal}&\textbf{Togo}&\textbf{Ghana~(a)}&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(a)~Membre associé.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique de l'Ouest]{Pays francophones en Afrique de l'Ouest -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afw-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AFW) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AC -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{central-africa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{gabon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Central_African_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{central-africa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Cameroon}&\textbf{Central-African-Rep.}&\textbf{Congo}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Democratic_Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gabon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gabon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}\\ -% \textbf{Dem.~Rep.~of~the~Congo}&\textbf{Gabon}&\textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Rwanda}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/S%C3%A3o_Tomé_and_Príncipe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}& -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&&\\ -% \textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé~and~Príncipe}&\textbf{Chad}&&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in Central~Africa]{Francophone countries in -% Central~Africa (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afc-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cameroon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{central-africa-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{gabon-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chad-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cameroun}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cameroon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_centrafricaine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{central-africa-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Cameroun}&\textbf{Rép.~Centrafricaine.}&\textbf{Rép.~du~Congo}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_démocratique_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gabon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gabon-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_équaroriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}\\ -% \textbf{Rép.~Dém.~du~Congo}&\textbf{Gabon}&\textbf{Guinée~équaroriale}&\textbf{Rwanda}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tomé-et-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}& -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tchad}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chad-f.png}}}&&\\ -% \textbf{Sao~Tomé-et-Principe}&\textbf{Tchad}&&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique~Centrale]{Pays francophones en Afrique~Centrale -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-afc-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AC) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AEOI -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritius-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{seychelles-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mauritius}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritius-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Djibouti}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Mauritius}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Seychelles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{seychelles-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Seychelles}&\textbf{Mozambique~(o)}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in East~Africa and Indian~Ocean]{Francophone countries in -% East~Africa and Indian~Ocean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-aeoi-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{djibouti-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mauritius-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{seychelles-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Djibouti}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{djibouti-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Île_Maurice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mauritius-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Djibouti}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Île~Maurice}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Seychelles}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{seychelles-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Seychelles}&\textbf{Mozambique~(o)}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Afrique~de~l'Est et dans l'Océan~Indien]{Pays francophones -% en Afrique~de~l'Est et dans l'Océan~Indien (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-aeoi-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AEOI) -% ^^A (FRANCO-AS -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{cambodia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{laos-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cambodia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cambodia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laos}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{laos-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Cambodia}&\textbf{Laos}&\textbf{Vanuatu}&\textbf{Vietnam}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Georgia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Armenia~(o)}&\textbf{Georgia~(o)}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observer.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Francophone countries in Asia and Pacific~Ocean]{Francophone countries in -% Asia and Pacific~Ocean (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-asp-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{cambodia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{laos-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vanuatu-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cambodge}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cambodia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laos}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{laos-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanuatu}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vanuatu-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Cambodge}&\textbf{Laos}&\textbf{Vanuatu}&\textbf{Vietnam}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Géorgie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&&\\% -% \textbf{Arménie~(o)}&\textbf{Géorgie~(o)}&&\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(o)~Observateur.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays francophones en Asie et dans l'Océan Pacifique]{Pays francophones en Asie et -% dans l'Océan Pacifique (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+franco-asp-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A FRANCO-AS) -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{4} -% The titles\ixgrfl{france-f.png}\ixgrfl{francophonie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Francophonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{francophonie-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{french}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. See also -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais}, -% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. -% \or\relax -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{france-f.png}\ixgrfl{francophonie-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/France}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{france-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Francophonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{francophonie-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>> (c'est-à-dire le français) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} -% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. Voir aussi -% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+francais},\ABK -% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*french> -\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2006/03/21]% -%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel -\def\ptctitle{Table des mati\`eres}% -\def\plftitle{Liste des figures}% -\def\plttitle{Liste des tableaux}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% -\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% -%</french> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``French1'' language: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~french1~>>: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} -% \begin{macro}{\value} -% \begin{macro}{\Roman} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{french1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} -% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} -% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres -% au niveau partie. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*french1> -\ProvidesFile{french1.mld}[2006/03/29]% -%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel -%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) -\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - Sommaire de la premi\`ere partie\relax - \else Sommaire de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% -\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - Liste des figures de la premi\`ere partie\relax - \else Liste des figures de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% -\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax - Liste des tableaux de la premi\`ere partie\relax - \else Liste des tableaux de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% -\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% -%</french1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``French2'' language: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~french2~>>: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcFrenchIIpart} -% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart} -% \begin{macro}{\ifnum} -% \begin{macro}{\value} -% \begin{macro}{\Roman} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{french2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles\footnote{This -% is an example of a \suffix{.mld} file needing some support from code in the \upack{minitoc} package.}. -% See also section~\vref{ss+2parts}, for the subtle distinction between ``deuxième'' and ``seconde''. -% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx} -% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres -% au niveau partie\,\footnote{C'est un exemple de fichier \suffix{.mld} ayant besoin de code de support dans le -% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{ss+2parts}, pour la subtile nuance entre «~deuxième~» et «~seconde~». -% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*french2> -\ProvidesFile{french2.mld}[2006/07/07]% -%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel -%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD) -\def\mtcFrenchIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}% -\or premi\`ere partie\or -{\ifmtcsecondpart seconde\else deuxi\`eme\fi} partie\or -troisi\`eme partie\or quatri\`eme partie\or cinqui\`eme partie\or -sixi\`eme partie\or septi\`eme partie\or huiti\`eme partie\or -neuvi\`eme partie\or dixi\`eme partie\or onzi\`eme partie\or -douzi\`eme partie\or treizi\`eme partie\or quatorzi\`eme partie\or -quinzi\`eme partie\or seizi\`eme partie\or dix-septi\`eme partie\or -dix-huiti\`eme partie\or dix-neuvi\`eme partie\or -vingti\`eme partie\else partie~\Roman{part}\fi}% -\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax - Sommaire \else Sommaire de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% -\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax - Liste des figures\else - Liste des figures de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}% -\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax - Liste des tableaux\else - Liste des tableaux de la \mtcFrenchIIpart}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\mlftitle{Figures}% -\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}% -\def\stctitle{Sommaire}% -\def\slftitle{Figures}% -\def\slttitle{Tableaux}% -%</french2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{frenchb}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the -% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchb}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier -% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchb> -\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</frenchb> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{frenchle}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the -% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchle}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchle}~» est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier -% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchle}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchle> -\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</frenchle> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{frenchpro}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the -% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchpro}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier -% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*frenchpro> -\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}% -%</frenchpro> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Galician'' language: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.556048835\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443951165\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galicia-m.pdf}\ixgrf{galicia-m.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galicia-mp.pdf}\ixgrf{galicia-mp.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Galician language areas]{Galician language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice_carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue galicienne]{Régions de la langue galicienne -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice_carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[htb!] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galician-l.png}\ixgrf{galician-l.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Linguistic map of Galician]{Linguistic map of Galician -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia_(Spain)}; see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician-l} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Carte linguistique du galicien]{Carte linguistique du galicien -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia_(Spain)}; voir aussi -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagnegalice.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+galician-l} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galician_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{galician}'' language (\emph{galego})\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part -% of Spain, around Santiago de Compostela; see figure~\vref{f+galician}.} are taken from the \xfile{galician.dtx} file, -% (by \name{Manuel}{Carriba} and \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}) derived from the -% \xfile{spanish.dtx} file (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galician_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien, \emph{galego})\,\footnote{Parlée en Galice, -% dans la partie nord-ouest de l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle; voir la figure~\vref{f+galician}.} -% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{galician.dtx} (de \name{Manuel}{Carriba} et -% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}), dérivé du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}), -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*galician> -\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Galician titles from galician.dtx (babel). -%% Carriba, Manuel (mcarriba@eunetcom.net) -%% Javier A. Múgica de Rivera (jmugica@digi21.net) -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\mtctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% -\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\stctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\stctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi% -\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\slttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}% -%</galician> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``German'' language: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{allemand.jpg}\ixgrf{allemand.jpg}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Germanophone areas in Europa]{Germanophone areas in Europa -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemand-aire-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_dialectes.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+german} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions germanophones en Europe]{Régions germanophones en Europe -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemand-aire-lng.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_dialectes.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq}.)i\hfill\null}\label{f+german} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{germ-w.png}\ixgrf{germ-w.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Germanophone areas]{Germanophone areas -% (\url{http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deutsche_Sprache})\hfill\null}\label{f+germ-world} -% \else\relax -% \caption[Régions germanophones]{Régions germanophones -% (\url{http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Deutsche_Sprache})\hfill\null}\label{f+germ-world} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrf{be-dg-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jutland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{liech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bolzano-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{alsace-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{opole-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germany}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German-speaking_Community_of_Belgium}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{be-dg-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Germany}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Luxembourg}&\textbf{Switzerland}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jutland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jutland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liechtenstein}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liech-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolzano}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolzano-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Austria}&\textbf{Jutland}&\textbf{Liechtenstein}&\textbf{Bolzano}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alsace}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{alsace-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lorraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lorraine-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opole}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{opole-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Alsace}&\textbf{Lorraine}&\textbf{Opole}&\\% -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Germanophone countries and regions]{Germanophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+germano-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrf{be-dg-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lux-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{austria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{jutland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{liech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bozen-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{alsace-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lorraine-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{opole-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_germanophone_de_Belgique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{be-dg-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Luxembourg}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lux-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Germany}&\textbf{Belgium}&\textbf{Luxembourg}&\textbf{Switzerland}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autriche}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{austria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jutland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{jutland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Liechtenstein}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{liech-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolzano}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bozen-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Autriche}&\textbf{Jutland}&\textbf{Liechtenstein}&\textbf{Bolzano}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alsace}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{alsace-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lorraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lorraine-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opole}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{opole-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Alsace}&\textbf{Lorraine}&\textbf{Opole}&\\% -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays et régions germanophones]{Pays et régions germanophones(\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemand})\hfill\null}\label{f+germano-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-d.pdf}\ixgrf{german-d.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[German dialects]{German dialects -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-d} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% By the High German consonant shift, the map of German dialects is divided into Upper German (green), Central German (blue), -% and Low German (yellow). The main isoglosses and the Benrath and Speyer lines are black. -% \end{minipage} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes allemands]{Dialectes allemands -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-d} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% Depuis la modification des consonnes du Haut allemand, la carte des dialectes allemands se divise entre Haut -% Allemand (vert), Allemand Central (bleu) et Bas Allemand (jaune). En noir: isoglosses principaux et lignes Benrath -% et Speyer. -% \end{minipage} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!htbp] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-m.pdf}\ixgrf{german-m.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The spread of the German language until ca.~1945 in Central Europe]{The spread of the German language -% until ca.~1945 in Central Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-m} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% Orange marks Lower German, blue Middle German and green Upper German dialects. -% \end{minipage} -% \or\relax -% \caption[L'étendue de la langue allemande jusque vers~1945 en Europe centrale]{L'étendue de la langue allemande -% jusque vers~1945 en Europe centrale -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-m} -% \begin{minipage}[t]{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% Orange: Bas Allemand, bleu: Bas Allemand, vert: dialectes du Haut Allemand. -% \end{minipage} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth,clip]{german-c.pdf}\ixgrf{german-c.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Distribution of the major West-Germanic dialectal varieties]{Distribution of the major West-Germanic -% dialectal varieties -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-c} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Distribution des principaux dialectes germaniques occidentaux]{Distribution des principaux dialectes germaniques occidentaux -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/German_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+german-c} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{germany-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germany}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{german}'' language (\emph{deutsch}) are taken from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% See also the section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{germany-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allemagne}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{germany-f.jpg}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> (allemand, \emph{deutsch}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*german> -\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% German titles -\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% -\def\plftitle{Figuren}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% -\def\mlftitle{Figuren}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}% -\def\slftitle{Figuren}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% -%</german> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Germanb'' language: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} -% The ``\lopt{germanb}'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles come from -% \xfile{germanb.dtx} -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld} -% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*germanb> -\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% German titles (variant) from germanb.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Raichle, Bernd -\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% -\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% -\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% -%% -\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% -%</germanb> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Germanb2'' language: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} -% The ``\lopt{germanb2}'' language is a variant for the ``\lopt{german}'' language, with short titles. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. -% The titles are taken from the file \xfile{germanb.dtx} -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}: -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~germanb2~>>: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld} -% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb2}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>, avec des titres courts. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}. -% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*germanb2> -\ProvidesFile{germanb2.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% German titles (variant) -\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% -%</germanb2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Greek'' language: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.6273522572\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.372647428\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{grece1.pdf}\ixgrf{grece1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{grece2.pdf}\ixgrf{grece2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Greece]{Greece (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece-admin-map.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+greece} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Grèce]{Grèce (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece-admin-map.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/grece.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+greece} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure} -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,width=\textwidth]{greekm.jpg}\ixgrf{greekm.jpg} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Dialects of modern Greek]{Dialects of modern Greek -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modern_Greek})\hfill\null}\label{f+greekdia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes du grec moderne]{Dialectes du grec moderne -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modern_Greek})\hfill\null}\label{f+greekdia} -% \fi -% \vspace*{-2\baselineskip} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}\reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{greeka.png}\ixgrfl{greece-f.png}\ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Greek_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greeka.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grece}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}\\ -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{greek}'' language (modern greek, -% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) are taken from the \xfile{greek.dtx} file -% (by \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) in the -% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. -% Greek fonts are required. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{greeka.png}\ixgrfl{greece-f.png}\ixgrfl{cyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grec_moderne}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greeka.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grèce}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{greece-f.png}}}\\ -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek}~>> (grec moderne, -% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{greek.dtx} -% (de \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}. -% Des fontes grecques sont requises. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*greek> -\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Greek titles from greek.dtx (babel) by Syropoulos, Apostolos. Needs greek fonts. -\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}% -\def\plftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% -\def\plttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% -\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}% -\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% -\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% -\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}% -\def\slftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}% -\def\slttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}% -%</greek> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-mono}'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly -% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-mono}~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une récente -% (1982) mais fortement contestée -- et contestable -- réforme de la langue grecque.}) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*greek-mono> -\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. -%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\plftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\plftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\stctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\slftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\slftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -%</greek-mono> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polydemo}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.} -% are taken from the file \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polydemo}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~démotique~>> (populaire), -% pour le grec classique.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*greek-polydemo> -\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. -%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\plftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\plttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\stctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\slftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9% - ^^^^03bd}}% -\def\slttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -%</greek-polydemo> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localgreek} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polykatha}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style, -% a form of the Greek language created during the early \textsc{xix}-th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, -% to purify the language from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary. -% It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it -% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are -% taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polykatha}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifié), -% une forme de la langue grecque créée au début du \textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier -% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant été démodé par le grec démotique (populaire), -% mais a laissé d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.} -% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}: -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*greek-polykatha> -\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega. -%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\plftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\plttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\stctitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc% - ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}% -\def\slftitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -\def\slttitle{\localgreek% -{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf% - ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}% -%</greek-polykatha> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Guarani'' language: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{paraguayp.pdf}\ixgrf{paraguayp.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{paraguay.png}\ixgrf{paraguay.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Paraguay]{Paraguay (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/paraguay_pol98.pdf} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/paraguay.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+paraguay} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Paraguay]{Paraguay (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/americas/paraguay_pol98.pdf} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}~-- -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/amsudant/paraguay.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+paraguay} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}}} -% ``\lopt{guarani}'' (guaraní) language is the main language spoken in Paraguay. -% Very often, a mixture of Guaraní and Spanish, known as Jopará or Yopará, is spoken. -% The titles are taken from the \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. -% A special input encoding (\xfile{win-gn.def}) is needed. -% These files are available on the CTAN archives. -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}}} -% langue «~\lopt{guarani}~» (guaraní) est la langue principale parlée au Paraguay. -% Très souvent, un mélange de guaraní et d'espagnol, appelé «~jopará~» ou «~yopará~», est utilisé. -% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. -% Un codage d'entrée spécial (\xfile{win-gn.def}) est nécessaire. -% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*guarani> -\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]% -%% Guaraní titles from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos. Input encoding win-gn.def needed. -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}% -\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -%</guarani> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} -% \else\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.426693630\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.573306370\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{korean1.png}\ixgrf{korean1.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{korean2.jpg}\ixgrf{korean2.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Korean language areas]{Korean language areas -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Korean_Language} -% and \url{http://www.korea.net/korea/kor_loca.asp?code=A0102})\hfill\null}\label{f+korean} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue coréenne]{Régions de la langue coréenne -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Korean_Language} -% et \url{http://www.korea.net/korea/kor_loca.asp?code=A0102})\hfill\null}\label{f+korean} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} -% -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.677187948\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.322812052\iwidth} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hangul.png}\ixgrf{hangul.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hanja.png}\ixgrf{hanja.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Hangûl and hanja characters]{Hangûl and hanja characters -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hangul} -% and \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Hanja}; see also \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Korean})\hfill\null}\label{f+kor-chars} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Caractères hangûl et hanja]{Caractères hangûl et hanja -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hangul} -% et \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Hanja}; voir aussi \url{http://wiki.galbijim.com/Korean})\hfill\null}\label{f+kor-chars} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{korea-n-f.png}\ixgrfl{korea-s-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/North_Korea}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-n-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/South_Korea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-s-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% Korean language was originally written using the Chinese characters; it is now mainly written in Hangûl, the -% Korean writing system, optionally incorporating Hanja to write Sino-Korean words~\cite{venkatesan}. -% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. -% See figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}. -% -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language (korean in hangûl script, first variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hangul.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% -% \lneed{2} -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{korea-n-f.png}\ixgrfl{korea-s-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_populaire_démocratique_de_Corée}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-n-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corée_du_Sud}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{korea-s-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue coréenne était originellement écrite en caractères chinois; elle est actuellement principalement -% écrite en caractères hangûl, en incorporant éventuellement des caractères hanja pour écrire des mots -% sino-coréens~\cite{venkatesan}. Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. -% Voir la figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}. -% -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl première variante) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{hangul.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. -% -% \lneed{2} -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul1.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hangul1> -\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}% -%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions -%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -%</hangul1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language (korean in hangûl script, second variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hangul.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% -% \lneed{3} -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{hangul.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Voir aussi les variantes dans les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul2.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hangul2> -\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}% -%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003), Hangul captions -%% char. set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed -%</hangul2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{11} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixmldo{hangul3} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixfile{hangul3} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language (korean in hangûl script, third variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hangul2.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{hangul2.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul3.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hangul3> -\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}% -%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2 -%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -%</hangul3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{11} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language (korean in hangûl script, fourth variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul4.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hangul4> -\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}% -%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2, -%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), -%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed -%</hangul4> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{9} -% \section{``Hangul-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} -% \or\relax -% \lneed{8} -% \section{Langue <<~hangul-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language (korean in hangûl script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken -% from the file \xfile{u8hangul.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. -% Special fonts are needed, of course. Input encoding is UTF-8. -% -% \lneed{3} -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{u8hangul.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. -% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. -% -% \lneed{4} -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hangul-u8> -\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hangul-u8}% -%% Hangul captions for Lambda. From the file u8hangul.tex -%% of the HLaTeX package by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) -%</hangul-u8> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \uxmldo{hanja1.mld}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \uxmldo{hanja1}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hanja.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, première variante) sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{hanja.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi -% Voir la figure~\vref{f+kor-chars}. -% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja1.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hanja1> -\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}% -%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>, Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), -%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed -%</hanja1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file -% \xfile{hanja.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{hanja.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi -% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}. -% \fi -% \end{SMOOTH} -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja2.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hanja2> -\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}% -%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs -%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions. -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>. -%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), -%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung). Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997) -%</hanja2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{11} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hanja-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hanja-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language (korean in hanja script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken from the file -% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% Input encoding is UTF-8. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. -% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}. -% -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hanja, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}. -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. -% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hanja-u8> -\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hanja-u8}% -%% Hanja captions for Lambda. From the file hanja-u8.tex of the HLaTeX package -%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) -%</hanja-u8> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{ivrit.png}\ixgrfl{israel-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hebrew_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{ivrit.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{hebrew}'' language (\emph{ivrit}) are taken from -% the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), -% with the associated fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. -% See the hebrew alphabet (\emph{alefbet}): \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{ivrit.png}\ixgrfl{israel-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hebrew_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{ivrit.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew}~>> (hébreu, \emph{ivrit}) sont tirés du -% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), -% avec les fontes associées. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}. -% Voir l'alphabet (\emph{alefbet}) hébreu: \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hebrew> -\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]% -%% Hebrew titles. Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation) -\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% -\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% -\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% -\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% -\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% -\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% -\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}% -\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}% -\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}% -%</hebrew> -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{isr1.pdf}\ixgrf{isr1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{isr2.pdf}\ixgrf{isr2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Israël]{Israël (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/israel_carte1.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+israel} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Israel]{Israel (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/israel_carte1.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+israel} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hebrew2'' language: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hebrew2~>>: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{hebrew2}'' language are taken from the file \xfile{hebrew.dtx} -% (by \xname{Boris}{Lavva} and \name{Rama}{Porrat}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, which should be -% used, with the associated fonts and encodings. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew2}~>> (hébreu, une variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{hebrew.dtx} -% (de \name{Boris}{Lavva} et \name{Rama}{Porrat}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, qui -% devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes et codages associés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hebrew2> -\ProvidesFile{hebrew2.mld}[2006/01/11]% -%% From hebrew.dtx in the Babel package. Boris Lavva (lavva@tx.technion.ac.il) -%% Need hebrew fonts. -\def\ptctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % - \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\plftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\plttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ - \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% -\def\mtctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % - \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\mlftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\mlttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ - \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% -\def\stctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ % - \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\slftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ % - \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}% -\def\slttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ - \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}% -%</hebrew2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hindi'' language: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hindi~>>: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{hindi}'' language is just like ``\lopt{devanagari}'', -% so we just load \xfile{devanagari.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{hindi}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>>, donc nous -% chargeons \xfile{devanagari.mld} simplement (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hindi> -\ProvidesFile{hindi.mld}[2006/08/24]\mtcselectlanguage{devanagari}% -%</hindi> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hindi-modern'' language: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hindi-modern~>>: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.417475728\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.582524272\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{inde1.pdf}\ixgrf{inde1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{inde2.jpg}\ixgrf{inde2.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in India]{Languages in India -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde-carte-etats2.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_linguistique.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_cartepol.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+india} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Inde]{Langues en Inde -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde-carte-etats2.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_linguistique.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/inde_cartepol.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+india} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}l@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hindi-p.png}\ixgrf{hindi-p.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hindi-b.png}\ixgrf{hindi-b.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Hindi proper and the hindi belt]{Hindi proper (east and west Hindi dialects) and the hindi belt (1991 -% census) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi})\hfill\null}\label{f+hindi} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Hindi proprement dit et la ceinture hindi]{Hindi proprement dit (dialectes hindi de l'est et de l'ouest) et -% la ceinture hindi (recensement de 1991) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi})\hfill\null}\label{f+hindi} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{6} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrf{hin.png}\ixgrfl{india-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{hin.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{hindi-modern}'' language are taken from the \xfile{captions.dn} file -% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, -% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) -% in the Devan\=agar\={\i} -% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) after conversion. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. Specific fonts are required. -% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrf{hin.png}\ixgrfl{india-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindi}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{hin.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{india-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hindi-modern}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{captions.dn} -% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith}, -% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}) -% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}), après conversion. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. -% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. -% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macro}{\dn} -% \begin{macro}{\qva} -% \begin{macro}{\re} -% \begin{macro}{\rs} -% \begin{macro}{\2} -% \begin{macro}{\8} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hindi-modern> -\ProvidesFile{hindi-modern.mld}[2006/08/29]% -%% Hindi modern titles from captions.dn in ``Devanagari for TeX'' -%% by Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k & -%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik -\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}% -\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}% -\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}% -%</hindi-modern> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{hungarian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language, -% so we load \xfile{magyar.mld}. -% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>, donc nous chargeons -% \xfile{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*hungarian> -\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}% -%</hungarian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islande.png}\ixgrf{islande.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{islandep.jpg}\ixgrf{islandep.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Iceland]{Iceland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/islandecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq} -% and \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/europe/iceland_pol81.jpg} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}); -% see also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iceland})\hfill\null}\label{f+icelandic} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Islande]{Islande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/islandecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq} -% et \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/europe/iceland_pol81.jpg} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}; -% voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iceland})\hfill\null}\label{f+icelandic} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{iceland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Icelandic_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iceland-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{icelandic}'' language (\emph{íslenska}) are taken from the \xfile{icelandic.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. See also~\cite{icelandic2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{iceland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Icelandic_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{iceland-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{icelandic}~>> (islandais, \emph{íslenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{icelandic.dtx} -% (par \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. Voir aussi~\cite{icelandic2}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*icelandic> -\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% From icelandic.dtx (babel). Needs inputenc with 8-bits encoding. Árnason, Einar -\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% -\def\plftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% -\def\plttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% -\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% -\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% -\def\mlttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% -\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}% -\def\slftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}% -\def\slttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}% -%</icelandic> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Indon'' language: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~indon~>>: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{indon}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{indon}~>> (indon) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*indon> -\ProvidesFile{indon.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% -%</indon> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Indonesian'' language: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~indonesian~>>: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{indonesian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{indonesian}~>> (indonésien) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*indonesian> -\ProvidesFile{indonesian.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}% -%</indonesian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{interlingua}'' language are taken from the \xfile{interlingua.dtx} file -% (by \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. -% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common -% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French, -% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy, -% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages\footnote{The site -% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua -% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want to read some sample of it.}. -% See also: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, -% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} -% \item interlingua-english dictionnary: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} -% \item interlingua grammar (in french): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} -% \item somes sites in interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} -% \item other sites about interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} -% \end{itemize} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{interlingua}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{interlingua.dtx} -% (de \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}. -% Interlingua est une langue auxiliaire, construite à~partir du vocabulaire commun de l'espagnol/portugais, de -% l'anglais de l'italien et du français, avec une certaine normalisation de l'orthographe. La grammaire est très -% facile, plus similaire à~celle de l'anglais qu'à celles des langues néo-latines\,\footnote{Le site -% {\froff\url{http://www.interlingua.com}} est écrit principalement en interlingua -% (comme l'est {\froff\url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}}), au cas où vous souhaiteriez en lire un exemple.}. -% Voir aussi: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, -% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/} -% \item dictionnaire interlingua-anglais: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/} -% \item grammaire de l'interlingua (en français): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html} -% \item quelques sites en interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua} -% \item d'autres sites sur interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm} -% \end{itemize} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*interlingua> -\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Interlingua titles from interlingua.dtx (babel). Kleiweg, Peter -\def\ptctitle{Contento}% -\def\plftitle{Lista de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{Lista de tabellas}% -\def\mtctitle{Contento}% -\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}% -\def\stctitle{Contento}% -\def\slftitle{Figuras}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellas}% -%</interlingua> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Irish'' language: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{irlande.pdf}\ixgrf{irlande.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{irish.png}\ixgrf{irish.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Ireland]{Ireland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/irlande-comtes.htm} in~\cite{tlfq} -% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+ireland} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Irlande]{Irlande (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/irlande-comtes.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq} -% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+ireland} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{gael-ft.pdf}\ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irish_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gael-ft.pdf}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ireland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{irish}'' language (\emph{gaeilge}) come from the \xfile{irish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} and \name{Fraser}{Grant}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrf{gael-ft.pdf}\ixgrfl{ireland-f.png}\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlandais}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gael-ft.pdf}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éire}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ireland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Irlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{irish}~>> (irlandais, \emph{gaeilge}) viennent du fichier \xfile{irish.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} et \name{Fraser}{Grant}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*irish> -\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[2006/02/28]% -%% From irish.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Gunn, Marion & Grant, Fraser -\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% -\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% -\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% -\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% -\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% -\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% -\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}% -\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}% -\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}% -%</irish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Italian'' language: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.55\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.45\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{italysm.png}\ixgrf{italysm.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{italian.pdf}\ixgrf{italian.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Italy]{Italy (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/italy.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~-- -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/italieetat.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+italy} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Italie]{Italie (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/italy.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~-- -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/italieetat.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+italy} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1357 628,clip]{italo1.png}\ixgrf{italo1.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Italophone areas in Europa]{Italophone areas in Europa -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions italophones en Europe]{Régions italophones en Europe -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{italy-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{malta1-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{san-marino-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{corsica-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nice-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italy}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Eritrea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Italy}&\textbf{Argentina}&\textbf{Croatia}&\textbf{Eritrea}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malta}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malta1-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/San_Marino}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{san-marino-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Malta}&\textbf{San~Marino}&\textbf{Slovenia}&\textbf{Somalia}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Switzerland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corsica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{corsica-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Switzerland}&\textbf{Corsica}&\textbf{Vatican}&\textbf{Monaco}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nice-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \textbf{Albania}&\textbf{Nice}&\textbf{Montenegro}&\textbf{Libya}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Italophone countries and regions]{Italophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italian_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{italy-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{croatia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{eritrea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{malta1-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{san-marino-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{suisse-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{corsica-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{monaco-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{albania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{nice-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{libya-f.jpg}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Croatie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{croatia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Éritrée}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{eritrea-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Italie}&\textbf{Argentine}&\textbf{Croatia}&\textbf{Éritrée}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malte}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malta1-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Saint-Marin}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{san-marino-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Malte}&\textbf{Saint-Marin}&\textbf{Slovénie}&\textbf{Somalie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suisse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{suisse-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{corsica-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vatican}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monaco}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{monaco-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Suisse}&\textbf{Corse}&\textbf{Vatican}&\textbf{Monaco}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Albanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{albania-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nice-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Libye}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{libya-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \textbf{Albanie}&\textbf{Nice}&\textbf{Monténégro}&\textbf{Libye}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays et régions italophones]{Pays et régions italophones(\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italien})\hfill\null}\label{f+italo-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{italy-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italy}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language (\emph{italiano}) come from the file \xfile{italian.dtx} -% (by \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} and \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{italy-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Italie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{italy-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian}~>> (italien, \emph{italiano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{italian.dtx} -% (de \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} et \name{Claudio}{Beccari}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*italian> -\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Italian titles from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. -%% Maurizio Codogno (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it) & Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it) -\def\ptctitle{Indice}% -\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -\def\mtctitle{Indice}% -\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -\def\stctitle{Indice}% -\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -%</italian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Italian2'' language: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{italian2}'' language are the same as for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language, except at the part -% level (``Contenuto''). See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~italian2~>>: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian2}~>> (italien, variante) sont les mêmes que pour la langue «~\lopt{italian}~», -% sauf au niveau partie («~Contenuto~»). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*italian2> -\ProvidesFile{italian2.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Italian titles. Variant, from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors. -\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}% -\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}% -\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -\def\stctitle{Contenuto}% -\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}% -\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}% -%</italian2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{7} -% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese'' language: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.516379310\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.483620690\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{japon1}\ixgrf{japon1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{japon2.jpg}\ixgrf{japon2.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Japan]{Japan (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/japoncarte.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/famjapon.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+japon} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Japon]{Japon (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/japoncarte.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/famjapon.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+japon} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% There\ixgrf{nihongo.png}\ixgrfl{japan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japanese_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{nihongo.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{japan-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}} -% are several variants for the japanese titles. -% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language have been found (by a Google search) on -% the Web site of -% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. -% -% \normalmarginpar -% But see also other variants in sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \or\relax -% Il y~a\ixgrf{nihongo.png}\ixgrfl{japan-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japonais}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{nihongo.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Japon}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{japan-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais. -% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> (japonais) ont été trouvés -% (par une recherche avec Google) sur le site Web du Professeur -% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. -% -% Mais il faut aussi regarder les autres variantes dans les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese> -\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese}% -%% Japanese titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. -%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp> -%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html -%</japanese> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file -% \xfile{JIS.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> (japonais, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cap} du -% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese2.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese2> -\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}% -%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package -%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC -%</japanese2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from -% file \xfile{JIS.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% -% \lneed{3} -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> (japonais, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cpx} du -% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont bien sûr nécessaires. -% -% \lneed{3} -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Notez que les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas -% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese3.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{6} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese3> -\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}% -%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package -%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC, preprocessed -%</japanese3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cap} of the -% \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> (japonais, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cap} -% du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les -% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese4.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese4> -\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}% -%% From SJIS.cap in CJK package for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) -%% with LaTeX2e. Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28/03/2003). -%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS -%</japanese4> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cpx} of -% the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Special fonts are needed, of course. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> (japonais, cinquième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cpx} du -% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Regardez aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4} -% et~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese5.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese5> -\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}% -%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package -%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. -%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS, preprocessed -%</japanese5> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{11} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Japanese6'' language: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' (japanese, sixth variant) language have been found (by a Google search) -% on the Web site of -% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}. -% ^^A \lneed{4} -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~japanese6~>>: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6} -% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{japanese6}~» (japonais, sixième variante) ont été trouvés (par une recherche avec -% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur -% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}. -% ^^A \lneed{4} -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese6}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*japanese6> -\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mld}[2006/10/31]\mtcloadmlo{japanese6}% -%% Japanese6 titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. -%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp> -%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html -%</japanese6> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Kannada'' language: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixfile{kannada.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue «~kannada~»: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixgrf{kannada.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{karnataka.jpg}\ixgrf{karnataka.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{karnad1.jpg}\ixgrf{karnad1.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Kannada language areas]{Kannada language areas (\url{http://www.pinkmoose.ic24.net/india/kabini.htm} -% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}; -% see also \url{http://kstdc.nic.in/pix/krnatmap.jpg} -% and figure~\vref{f+india})\hfill\null}\label{f+kannada} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue kannada]{Régions de la langue kannada -% (\url{http://www.pinkmoose.ic24.net/india/kabini.htm} -% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}; -% voir aussi \url{http://kstdc.nic.in/pix/krnatmap.jpg} -% et la figure~\vref{f+india})\hfill\null}\label{f+kannada} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{7.180851064mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrf{kannada-n.png}\ixgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannada_script}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{kannada-n.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{karnataka-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}} -% Kannada (``\lopt{kannada}'') (or Kannara) language is a dravidian language spoken in the Karnataka state -% (main town: Bangalore) of India. -% Titles are taken in the \xfile{kanlel.sty} package file from the -% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX} project~\cite{kannadatex}\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}} by \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} and \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. -% Specific fonts are required. See the alphabet here: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. -% \or\relax -% Le\ixgrf{kannada-n.png}\ixgrfl{karnataka-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kannara}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{kannada-n.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Karnataka}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{karnataka-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}} -% «~\lopt{kannada}~» (ou kannara) est une langue dravidienne parlée dans l'état Karnataka (capitale Bangalore) de l'Inde. Les textes pour les -% titres sont tirées du fichier paquetage \xfile{kanlel.sty} du projet -% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}~\cite{kannadatex}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}}} de \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} et \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}. -% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir l'alphabet ici: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*kannada> -\ProvidesFile{kannada.mld}[2007/02/22]% -%% From kanlel.sty of Kannadatex -%% (C. S. Yogananda yoga@math.iisc.ernet.in yogacs@users.sarovar.org) -%% (K. K. Subramaniam subbukk@users.sarovar.org) -\def\ptctitle{pariviDi}% -\def\plftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% -\def\plftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% -\def\mtctitle{pariviDi}% -\def\mlftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% -\def\mlftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% -\def\stctitle{pariviDi}% -\def\slftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}% -\def\slftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}% -%</kannada> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Khalkha'' language: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~khalkha~>>: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ``\lopt{khalkha}'' is a synomym for ``\lopt{xalx}'', -% so we just load \xfile{xalx.mld} (see sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): -% \or\relax -% Le <<~\lopt{khalkha}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{xalx}~>>, -% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{xalx.mld} -% (voir les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*khalkha> -\ProvidesFile{khalkha.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{xalx}% -%</khalkha> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Latin'' language: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin}'' language (medieval) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file -% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. -% The latin\ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://www.vatican.va/latin/latin_index.html}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}}} -% language is still used by the Catholic Church and the Vatican for archives and some texts. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin}~>> (médiéval) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}. -% La langue latine\ixgrfl{vatican-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://www.vatican.va/latin/latin_index.html}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vatican-f.jpg}}}}} -% est encore utilisée par l'Église Catholique et le Vatican pour des archives et certains textes. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latin> -\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Latin (medieval) titles from latin.dtx (babel) -%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad -\def\ptctitle{Index}% -\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% -\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% -\def\mtctitle{Index}% -\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% -\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% -\def\stctitle{Index}% -\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% -\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% -%</latin> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Latin2'' language: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\ae} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin2}'' language (latin, medieval, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin2}~>> (latin, médiéval, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latin2> -\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2007/04/06]% -%% Latin (medieval) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) -%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad -\def\ptctitle{Index}% -\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}% -\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}% -\def\mtctitle{Index}% -\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% -\def\mlttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% -\def\stctitle{Index}% -\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% -\def\slttitle{{Tabul\ae}}% -%</latin2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Latinc'' language: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc}'' language (classical latin) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file -% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~latinc~>>: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc}~>> (latin classique) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latinc> -\ProvidesFile{latinc.mld}[2007/04/13]% -%% Latin (classical) titles from latin.dtx (babel) -%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad -\def\ptctitle{Index}% -\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% -\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% -\def\mtctitle{Index}% -\def\mlftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% -\def\mlttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% -\def\stctitle{Index}% -\def\slftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% -\def\slttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% -%</latinc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Latinc2'' language: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc2}'' language (classical latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~latinc2~>>: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc2}~>> (latin classique, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx} -% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latinc2> -\ProvidesFile{latinc2.mld}[2007/04/06]% -%% Latin (classical) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel) -%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad -\def\ptctitle{Index}% -\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}% -\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}% -\def\mtctitle{Index}% -\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabvlae}% -\def\stctitle{Index}% -\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}% -\def\slttitle{Tabvlae}% -%</latinc2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{``Latvian'' language: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.3649022507\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.635097493\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltes.jpg}\ixgrf{baltes.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{lettonie.jpg}\ixgrf{lettonie.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Baltic languages and Latvia]{Baltic languages and Latvia -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lettoniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% note that the estonian language is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a language from the -% uralian family.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-le} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues baltes et Lettonie]{Langues baltes et Lettonie -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lettoniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% notez que l'estonien \emph{n'est pas} une langue balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-le} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{latvian-d.png}\ixgrf{latvian-d.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{latvian-r1.png}\ixgrf{latvian-r1.png}% -% \\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{% -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Dialects of the Latvian language. Main dialects are titled -% grey, subdialects are titled black, subdivisons of subdialects -% are given in brackets. L\={\i}biskais or Livonian dialect is in -% bluish shades, Vidus (Vidzemes) or Middle dialect is in green shades, -% Aug\v{s}zemnieku or Highlander/Latgalian dialect is yellow-orange. -% \or\relax -% Dialectes de la langue lettone. Les dialectes principaux -% sont titrés en gris, les sous dialectes sont titrés en noir, -% les sub-divisions des sous-dialectes sont donnés entre -% crochets. Le dialecte L\={\i}biskais ou Livonien est en tons -% bleus. Le dialecte Vidus (Vidzemes) ou dialecte médian -% est en tons verts, le dialecte Aug\v{s}zemnieku ou -% dialecte des hauteurs ou Latgalien est en jaune orangé. -% \fi -% \end{minipage}} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Dialects and administrative regions in Latvia]{Dialects and administrative regions in Latvia -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvian_language} and -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/Europe/lettonie-1gnrl.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+latvian-d} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes et régions administratives de Lettonie]{Dialectes et régions administratives de Lettonie -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvian_language} et -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/Europe/lettonie-1gnrl.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+latvian-d} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language\,\footnote{Note that ``\lopt{latvian}'' is the original name for -% ``\lopt{letton}''.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>\,\footnote{Notez que <<~\lopt{latvian}~>> (latvien) est -% l'autre nom du <<~\lopt{letton}~>>.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latvian> -\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% From latvian.ldf (Antomega project). -%% Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% -\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% -\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% -\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% -\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% -\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% -\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}% -\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}% -\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}% -%</latvian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{``Latvian2'' language: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file -% (by \name{Andris}{Lasis} and \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) -% at~\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~latvian2~>>: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>> viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf} -% (de \name{Andris}{Lasis} et \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}) -% à~{\froff\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*latvian2> -\ProvidesFile{latvian2.mld}[2007/06/05]% -% Andris Lasis (andris_lisis@simms.lv) Ivars Drikis (drikis@lanet.lv) -% http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf -\def\ptctitle{Saturs}% -\def\plftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -\def\plttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -\def\mtctitle{Saturs}% -\def\mlftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -\def\stctitle{Saturs}% -\def\slftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -\def\slttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}% -%</latvian2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Letton'' language: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{letton}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language, so we just load -% \xfile{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{letton}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*letton> -\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}% -%</letton> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Letton2'' language: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~letton2~>>: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{letton2}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language, so we just load -% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{letton2}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*letton2> -\ProvidesFile{letton2.mld}[2007/06/05]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian2}% -%</letton2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.442069741\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.557930259\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{baltes.jpg}\ixgrf{baltes.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{lituanie.png}\ixgrf{lituanie.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Baltic languages and Lithuania]{Baltic languages and Lithuania -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lituaniecarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}; -% see also~\url{http://samogitia.mch.mii.lt/KALBA/girdstr.en.htm} by \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis}; -% note that estonian is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a language from the uralian family.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-li} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues baltiques et Lithuanie]{Langues baltiques et Lithuanie -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/langues_baltes.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/lituaniecarte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}; -% voir aussi~\url{http://samogitia.mch.mii.lt/KALBA/girdstr.en.htm} par \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis}; -% notez que l'estonien \emph{n'est pas} une langue balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.)\hfill\null}\label{f+baltic-li} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{lithuanian}'' language (\emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} -% file\footnote{Found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}.} -% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) -% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian}~>> (lituanien, \emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) sont simplement tirés du fichier -% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}\,\footnote{Trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}}}.} -% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) -% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lithuanian> -\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[2007/12/04]% -%% Lithuanian titles from lithuanian.ldf -%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip -%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) -\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% -\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% -\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% -\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% -\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% -\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% -\def\stctitle{Turinys}% -\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}% -\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}% -%</lithuanian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Lithuanian2'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{lithuanian2}'' language (variant) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf} -% file, found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}, -% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) -% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. -% The L7x encoding and the Latin Modern fonts are needed. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian2~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian2}~>> (lituanien, variante) sont simplement tirés du fichier -% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}, trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}}}, -% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}) -% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}. -% Le codage L7x et les fontes Latin Modern sont nécessaires. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lithuanian2> -\ProvidesFile{lithuanian2.mld}[2007/12/04]% -%% Lithuanian titles (variant) from lithuanian.ldf -%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20060928.tar.gz -%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt) -\def\ptctitle{Turinys}% -\def\plftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% -\def\plttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% -\def\mtctitle{Turinys}% -\def\mlftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% -\def\mlttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% -\def\stctitle{Turinys}% -\def\slftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}% -\def\slttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}% -%</lithuanian2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \par -% -% \lneed{9} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Lowersorbian'' language: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~lowersorbian~>>: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{ls-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lower_Sorbian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ls-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, -% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german -% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes -% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during -% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century). -% See figures~\vrefrange{f+lusace}{f+sorben}.} (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) are taken from the \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. -% A shorter language name is \lopt{lsorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{ls-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lower_Sorbian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ls-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{% -% ^^A \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\interlinepenalty=10000\relax -% Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, -% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} -% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves -% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale -% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle). Voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+lusace}{f+sorben}.} -% (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} -% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. -% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{lsorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{figure}[!tbh] -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}cXc@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorabe-1.jpg}\ixgrf{sorabe-1.jpg}&% -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorabe-2.jpg}\ixgrf{sorabe-2.jpg}\\ -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Lusace and the Sorbians]{Lusace and the Sorbians -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_sorabe.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+lusace} -% \or\relax -% \caption[La Lusace et les sorabes]{La Lusace et les sorabes -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/allemagne_sorabe.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+lusace} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorbian.jpg}\ixgrf{sorbian.jpg}% -% ^^A `p' option to keep the figure from drifting -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Sorbian dialects areas]{Sorbian dialects areas -% (\url{http://www.people.ex.ac.uk/pjoyce/dialects/sorbisch.html}~(University of Exeter), -% \url{http://www.mdr.de/sorbisches-programm/rundfunk/1913590.html}, -% \url{http://www.mdr.de/I/1940181.gif}; Niedersorbish: lower sorbian, Übergangsdialekte: transitional dialects, -% Obersorbish: upper sorbian.)\hfill\null}\label{f+sorbian} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions des dialectes sorabes]{Régions des dialectes sorabes -% (\url{http://www.people.ex.ac.uk/pjoyce/dialects/sorbisch.html}~(Université d'Exeter), -% \url{http://www.mdr.de/sorbisches-programm/rundfunk/1913590.html}, -% \url{http://www.mdr.de/I/1940181.gif}; Niedersorbish: bas sorabe, Übergangsdialekte: dialectes de transition, -% Obersorbish: haut sorabe.)\hfill\null}\label{f+sorbian} -% \fi -% ^^A \vspace*{-2pt} % ^^A ``Float too large'' -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!tb] -% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sorben.jpg}\ixgrf{sorben.jpg}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Sorbs]{Sorbs (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sorbs})\hfill\null}\label{f+sorben} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Sorabes]{Sorabes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sorbs})\hfill\null}\label{f+sorben} -% \fi -% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lowersorbian> -\ProvidesFile{lowersorbian.mld}[2006/02/28]% -%% Lower sorbian titles from lsorbian.dtx (babel) by Werner, Eduard -\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% -\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% -\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}% -\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -%</lowersorbian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{lsorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'', so we just need to load \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. -% See section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{lsorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lsorbian> -\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{lowersorbian}% -%</lsorbian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Magyar'' language: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.588235294\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.411764706\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hun2.jpg}\ixgrf{hun2.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{hun1.png}\ixgrf{hun1.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Hungaria and magyar speaking areas]{Hungaria and magyar speaking areas -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungaria} -% and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary_Language}; -% the magyar language is also spoken in some regions in Romania, -% Slovakia, Serbia-Voivodina and Ukraine)\hfill\null}\label{f+hongrie} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Hongrie et régions de langue magyar]{Hongrie et régions de langue magyar -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungaria} -% et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungary_language}; -% la langue hongroise est aussi parlée dans quelques régions de Roumanie, -% de Slovaquie, de Serbie-Voïvodine et d'Ukraine)\hfill\null}\label{f+hongrie} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungarian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language are taken from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} -% (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} and \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, with help from \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) -% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. A synonym of ``\lopt{magyar}'' is -% ``\lopt{hungarian}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} for variants. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{hungary-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hungarian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{hungary-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} -% (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} et \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, avec l'aide de \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. Un synonyme de <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> -% est <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} pour des variantes. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*magyar> -\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2006/03/08]% -%% Magyar titles from magyar.dtx (babel). Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József -\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% -\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% -\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% -\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% -\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}% -\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}% -%</magyar> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed -% in the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, -% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} and~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar2}~>> sont tirés d'une variante proposée -% dans le fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, -% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} et~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*magyar2> -\ProvidesFile{magyar2.mld}[2008/04/03]% -%% Magyar2 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). -%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József -\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% -\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% -\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% -\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% -\def\stctitle{Tartalom}% -\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}% -\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}% -%</magyar2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Magyar3'' language: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar3}'' language (third variant of magyar) are taken -% from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{The situation of the magyar language in -% the \pack{babel} package is not clear; some experimental versions exist.}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~magyar3~>>: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar3}~>> (troisième variante de la langue magyar) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}). -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{La situation de la langue magyar dans -% le paquetage \pack{babel} n'est pas claire; il existe des versions expérimentales.}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*magyar3> -\ProvidesFile{magyar3.mld}[2006/03/08]% -%% Magyar3 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel). -%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József -\def\ptctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% -\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% -\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% -\def\mtctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% -\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% -\def\stctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}% -\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}% -\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}% -%</magyar3> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malay'' language: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malay~>>: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{malay}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{malay}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malay> -\ProvidesFile{malay.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% -%</malay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-b'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-b~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.528700906\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.471299094\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{malayalam.pdf}\ixgrf{malayalam.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{kerala.jpg}\ixgrf{kerala.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Malayalam language areas]{Malayalam language areas -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=92&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP} -% and \url{http://keralalife.com/})\hfill\null}\label{f+malayalam} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue malayalam]{Régions de la langue malayalam -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=92&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP} -% et \url{http://keralalife.com/})\hfill\null}\label{f+malayalam} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-b}'' language -% are taken from the -% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of -% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly -% bound to the Tamil language. -% The\ixgrf{malayalam.png}\ixgrfl{kerala-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malayalam_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malayalam.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kerala}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kerala-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}} -% alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries. -% This language option requires specific fonts (depending on the -% option of the \pack{malayalam} package). -% It should be used with the following options of the -% \pack{malayalam} package\,\footnote{There is a great variety of fonts for malayalam; hence I have attempted to limit -% the number of \suffix{.mld} files.}: -% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, -% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, -% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, -% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, -% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, -% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, -% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, -% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, -% \optp{malavika}, -% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, -% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, -% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, -% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam}, and -% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-b}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% La langue Malayalam est -% parlée de la côte occidentale de Malabar jusqu'à l'extrême sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'état de Kerala. -% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement liées au Tamoul. L'alphabet% -% \ixgrf{malayalam.png}\ixgrfl{kerala-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malayalam}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malayalam.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kerala}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kerala-f.jpg}}\end{tabular}}} -% et l'écriture datent du \textsc{viii}\fup{e} ou -% \textsc{ix}\fup{e}~siècle. -% Cette option de langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (selon l'option -% du paquetage \pack{malayalam}). -% Elle devrait être utilisée avec les options suivantes du paquetage -% \pack{malayalam}\,\footnote{Il y~a une grande variété de fontes pour le malayalam; j'ai donc essayé de limiter -% le nombre de fichiers \suffix{.mld}.}: -% \optp{aathira}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ambili}{malayalam}, -% \optp{anahka}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam}, -% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam}, -% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam}, -% \optp{chippi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{gauri}{malayalam}, -% \optp{gopika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{jaya}{malayalam}, -% \optp{karthika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam}, -% \optp{makam}{malayalam}, -% \optp{malavika}{malayalam}, -% \optp{mridula}{malayalam}, -% \optp{payippad}{malayalam}, -% \optp{periyar}{malayalam}, -% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam}, -% \optp{revathi}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sabari}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sarada}{malayalam}, -% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam} et -% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-b> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-b.mld}[2007/12/04]% -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -%</malayalam-b> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -%% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli}'' language, -% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \pack{malayalam} -% package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. This language requires specific fonts. -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} and \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli}~>> (malayalam, écriture \emph{keli}), avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>, -% sont tirés du paquetage -% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} et \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-keli> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Malayalam: Keli fonts -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -%</malayalam-keli> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-keli2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli2}'' language -% are taken from the -% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% This language requires specific fonts (keli second variant). -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} -% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli2}~>> sont -% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (keli seconde variante).\ABK -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli} -% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-keli2> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli2.mld}[2007/12/04]% -% Keli fonts (mkl) -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}% -%</malayalam-keli2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-mr'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-mr~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-mr}'' language -% are taken from the -% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% This language requires specific fonts (traditional rachana). -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} -% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-mr}~>> sont -% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana traditionnel).\ABK -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2} -% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-mr> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-mr.mld}[2007/12/04]% -% mr fonts (rachana: mr1,...,mr6) -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>} -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}} -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}} -%</malayalam-mr> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-omega'' language: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue «~malayalam-omega~»: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is the Malayalam language implementation ``\lopt{malayalam-omega}'' -% based on \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (the version of \LaTeX\ for -% Omega) via the \pack{omal} package~\cite{malayalam-o} (by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}) of the Malayalam-Omega -% project\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}. As the titles contain characters in a special encoding, -% we must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. A lot of fonts are available via options of the \pack{omal} package. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} -% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% C'est l'implantation «~\lopt{malayalam-omega}~» de la langue malayalam lorsque vous utilisez -% \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (la version de \LaTeX\ pour -% Omega) via le paquetage \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o} (de \name{A.J.}{Alex}) du projet -% Malayalam-Omega\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}}. Comme les titres contiennent des -% caractères dans un codage spécial, nous devons charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. De nombreuses fontes sont disponibles -% via des options du paquetage \pack{omal}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr} -% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-omega> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcloadmlo{malayalam-omega}% -%% from omal.sty (Alex A.J. indicTeX@gmail.com) -%</malayalam-omega> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\C} -% \begin{macro}{\F} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana}'' language, -% with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from -% the \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% This language requires specific fonts. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} -% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana}~>>, -% avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}), -% sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega} -% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-rachana> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]% -%% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal. -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -%</malayalam-rachana> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}'' language, -% with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the -% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% This language requires specific fonts. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}~>>, -% avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> réformées (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont -% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-rachana2> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2006/01/13]% %% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed. -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -%</malayalam-rachana2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{9} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Malayalam-rachana3'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana3~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}% -% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macro}{\mm} -% \begin{macro}{\X} -% \begin{macro}{\<>} -% \begin{macro}{\C} -% \begin{macro}{\F} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}'' language -% are taken from the -% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% This language requires specific fonts (rachana). -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}~>> sont -% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana). -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}. -% \fi -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*malayalam-rachana3> -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}[2007/12/04]% % Rachana fonts (mr2,...,mr6) -\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}% -\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}% -\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}% -%</malayalam-rachana3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Manju'' language: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~manju~>>: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{manju}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{bithe}'', -% so we just load \xfile{bithe.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{manju}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>, donc nous chargeons -% simplement \xfile{bithe.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*manju> -\ProvidesFile{manju.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{bithe}% -%</manju> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{14.28125mm}\reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Mexican'' language: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} -% The titles\ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexican_Spanish}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{mexican}'' language (\emph{español mexicano}) are taken from the \xfile{mexican.ldf} file -% (by \name{Luis}{Rivera}) in \url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. -% Mexican is a spanish (castillan) dialect. -% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. -% See figures~\vrefrange{f+mexico}{f+mexl}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~mexican~>>: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexican_Spanish}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mexican}~>> (mexicain, \emph{español mexicano}) sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{mexican.ldf} (de \name{Luis}{Rivera}) -% dans \url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. Le mexicain est un dialecte de l'espagnol -% (castillan). -% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}. -% Voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+mexico}{f+mexl}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \def\LBAS{Less than 20\,000 speakers.} -% \def\LMED{From 20\,000 to 100\,000 speakers.} -% \def\LHAUT{More than 100\,000 speakers.} -% \else\relax -% \def\LBAS{Moins de 20\,000 locuteurs.} -% \def\LMED{De 20\,000 à~100\,000 locuteurs.} -% \def\LHAUT{Plus de 100\,000 locuteurs.} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[htb!] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mexip.pdf}\ixgrf{mexip.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[México]{México (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexico})}\label{f+mexico} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Mexique]{Mexique (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexique})}\label{f+mexico} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.3333333333\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex1.pdf}\ixgrf{mex1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex2.pdf}\ixgrf{mex2.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mex3.pdf}\ixgrf{mex3.pdf}\\ -% {\footnotesize\LBAS}&&{\footnotesize\LMED}&&{\footnotesize\LHAUT} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Indigenous languages of México]{Indigenous languages of México -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Mexico})\hfill\null}\label{f+mexl} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues indigènes du Mexique]{Langues indigènes du Mexique -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Languages_of_Mexico})\hfill\null}\label{f+mexl} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mexican> -\ProvidesFile{mexican.mld}[2008/04/03]% -%% Spanish titles (from mexican.ldf) Rivera, Luis (jlrn77@gmail.com) -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi % <---- -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -%</mexican> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Meyalu'' language: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~meyalu~>>: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{meyalu}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld} -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{meyalu}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*meyalu> -\ProvidesFile{meyalu.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}% -%</meyalu> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Mongol'' language: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongolian.pdf}\ixgrf{mongolian.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Mongol language areas]{Mongol language areas -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=79&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+mongolian} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue mongole]{Régions de la langue mongole -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=79&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+mongolian} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongasie.pdf}\ixgrf{mongasie.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Linguistic map of the mongol language]{Linguistic map of the mongol language -% (\url{http://www.lexilogos.com/mongol_dictionnaire.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+lmap-mongol} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Carte linguistique du mongol]{Carte linguistique du mongol -% (\url{http://www.lexilogos.com/mongol_dictionnaire.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+lmap-mongol} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{mongols.png}\ixgrf{mongols.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Mongolia and Mongol autonomous regions in the People's Republic of China (PRC)]{Mongolia and Mongol autonomous regions in the People's Republic of China (PRC) -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongol}, see also -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-Mongolie.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Mongolie et régions mongoles autonomes en République Populaire de Chine (RPC)]{Mongolie et régions mongoles -% autonomes en République Populaire de Chine (RPC) (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongol}, voir aussi -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-Mongolie.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{22.8125mm} -% \begin{macro}{\mnr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\ixgrfl{imongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{mongoltr.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inner_Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{imongolia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{mongol}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, -% \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2}, and \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. -% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrf{mongoltr.png}\ixgrfl{imongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{mongoltr.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie-Intérieure}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{imongolia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongol}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2} et -% \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}. -% ^^A \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{8} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mongol> -\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Mongol (xalx) titles. Needs mongol fonts -\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -%</mongol> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Mongolb'' language: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} -% This\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolcy.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolia-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}} -% is an other variant for the mongolian titles, -% taken from the \xfile{mongolian.dtx} file~\cite{mongolian} (by \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) -% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (hence the final ``\texttt{b}'' in ``\texttt{mongolb}''). -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~mongolb~>>: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld} -% Ceci\ixgrf{mongolcy.png}\ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolcy.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mongolia-f.png}}}\\\strut\end{tabular}}} -% est une autre variante pour les titres en mongol. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongolb}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{mongolian.dtx}~\cite{mongolian} -% (de \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}) -% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (d'où le «~\texttt{b}~» final dans «~\texttt{mongolb}~»). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{mongolb}'' language use cyrillic characters and the X2 and T2 encodings and are derived -% from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{mongolb}~» utilisent des caractères cyrilliques et les codages X2 et T2 -% sont dérivés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et -% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mongolb> -\ProvidesFile{mongolb.mld}[2007/01/29]% -%% Mongolian titles from mongolian.dtx for the babel package -%% Dorjgotov Batmunkh (batmunkh@num.edu.mn) -%% Needs some cyrillic fonts and special cyrillic encoding T2 and X2. -%% Vladimir Volovich (TeX@vvv.vsu.ru) & Werner Lemberg (wl@gnu.org) -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax - \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% -\else\relax - \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% -\fi -\def\plftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax - \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% -\else\relax - \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% -\fi -\def\mlftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax - \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax% -\else\relax - \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax% -\fi -\def\slftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn - \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}% -%</mongolb> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Mongolian'' language: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~mongolian~>>: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% This is an other name for the ``mongolb'' language, because -% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} uses the name ``\lopt{mongolian}''. -% We just load \xfile{mongolb.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. -% \or\relax -% C'est un autre nom pour la langue «~mongolb~», car le paquetage -% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} utilise le nom «~\lopt{mongolian}~» -% Nous chargeons simplement \xfile{mongolb.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*mongolian> -\ProvidesFile{mongolian.mld}[2007/02/05]\mtcselectlanguage{mongolb}% -%</mongolian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{naustrian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language -% (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language), -% so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{naustrian}~>> (néo-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>> (néo-allemand) (une -% version réformée de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*naustrian> -\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% -%</naustrian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Newzealand'' language: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~newzealand~>>: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Zealand}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}}} -% ``\lopt{newzealand}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', -% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} -% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{newzealand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nouvelle_Zélande}% -% {\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{newzealand-f.png}}}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{newzealand}~>> (néo-zélandais) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*newzealand> -\ProvidesFile{newzealand.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</newzealand> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{ngerman}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the -% \lopt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{ngerman}~>> (néo-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue -% <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une version réformée -% de la variante \lopt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ngerman> -\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}% -%</ngerman> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are -% taken from the file \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. -% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe -% réformée.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} -% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian} -% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ngermanb> -\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% New german (B) titles from ngermanb.dtx (babel). Raichle, Bernd & Schmidt, Walter -\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt % <----- -\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% -\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}% -%</ngermanb> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ngermanb2'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb2}'' language (revised spelling and -% short titles) are taken from the \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, and abbreviated. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb2~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb2}~>> (orthographe réformée et titres courts) sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} -% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, et abrégés. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ngermanb2> -\ProvidesFile{ngermanb2.mld}[2005/09/27]% -%% New german (B) short (2) titles -\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}% -\def\stctitle{Inhalt}% -\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellen}% -%</ngermanb2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{``Norsk'' language: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.591188475\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.408811475\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norvege-c.pdf}\ixgrf{norvege-c.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norvege-t.pdf}\ixgrf{norvege-t.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in Norway]{Bokm{\aa}l and nynorsk languages in Norway -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege-communes-lng.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Norvège]{Langues <<~bokm{\aa}l~>> et <<~nynorsk~>> en Norvège -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege-communes-lng.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/norvege.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.1875mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{norway-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norwegian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{norway-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{norsk}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the -% \xfile{norsk.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, -% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help -% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{norway-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norwegian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{norway-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés du -% fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} -% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, -% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, -% avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{norway-p.pdf}\ixgrf{norway-p.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Norway]{Norway (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norway})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway-p} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Norvège]{Norvège (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Norway})\hfill\null}\label{f+norway-p} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*norsk> -\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Norsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard -%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset -%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) -\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% -\def\plftitle{Figurer}% -\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\stctitle{Innhold}% -\def\slftitle{Figurer}% -\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% -%</norsk> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Norsk2'' language: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{norsk2}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the -% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help -% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, and abbreviated. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~norsk2~>>: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk2}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés -% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, et abrégés. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*norsk2> -\ProvidesFile{norsk2.mld}[2005/09/27]% -%% Short norsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) -\def\ptctitle{Innhold}% -\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% -\def\mtctitle{Innhold}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% -\def\stctitle{Innhold}% -\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% -%</norsk2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800 -% by \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} to make a real -% independent and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialects spoken in the -% country. But nynorsk has never gained much popularity outside rural regions.} are taken -% from the \xfile{norsk.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, -% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help from -% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>> -% (néo-norvégien)\,\footnote{Créée vers 1800 par \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} -% pour construire une vraie langue norvégienne indépendante et nationale, en réaction au danois, à~partir des -% divers dialectes parlés dans le pays. Mais le néo-norvégien n'a jamais beaucoup gagné en popularité en dehors des régions -% rurales.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx} -% (par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, -% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de -% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nynorsk> -\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Nynorsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard -%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset -%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) -\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurar}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}% -\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% -\def\plftitle{Figurar}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellar}% -\def\stctitle{Innhald}% -\def\slftitle{Figurar}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellar}% -%</nynorsk> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Nynorsk2'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk2}'' language are variants of the titles of the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk2~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk2}~>> sont des variantes des titres de la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nynorsk2> -\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Nynorsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no) -\def\mtctitle{Innhald}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}% -\def\ptctitle{Innhald}% -\def\plftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}% -\def\stctitle{Innhald}% -\def\slftitle{Figurliste}% -\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}% -%</nynorsk2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Occitan'' language: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~occitan~>>: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htbp] -% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.599812559\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.400187441\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occitanie.png}\ixgrf{occitanie.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occtaur.jpg}\ixgrf{occtaur.jpg}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Occitan in France]{Occitan in France (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi1} -% \or\relax -% \caption[L'occitan en France]{L'occitan en France -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi1} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{1.\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.709152542\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.290847458\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.6\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.4\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occdial1.jpg}\ixgrf{occdial1.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{occdial2.png}\ixgrf{occdial2.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Occitan dialects]{Occitan dialects (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi2} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Les dialectes occitans]{Les dialectes occitans (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitan})\hfill\null}\label{f+occi2} -% \fi -% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{occ-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitanie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{occ-f.png}}}}} -% \lopt{occitan} language\,\footnote{I~used the site {\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} -% for the translations.} is still spoken in the south of France, -% from Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) and Toulouse -% (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) to Marseille (Marselha) and Nice (Niça), with many local variants. -% This bilingual street sign in Toulouse (Tolosa), like many -% such signs found in historical parts of the city, is maintained -% primarily for its antique charm; it is typical of what little -% remains of the ``lenga d'oc'' in southern French cities (see -% figures~\vrefrange{f+occi1}{f+occi2}). -% See also~\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}. -% See also~\cite{occi}. -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{occ-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Occitanie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{occ-f.png}}}}} -% langue occitane (\lopt{occitan} ou langue d'oc)\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le site -% {\froff\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} pour les traductions.} -% est encore parlée dans le sud de la France, -% de Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) et Toulouse (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) -% à~Marseille (Marselha) et Nice (Niça), avec de nombreuses variantes locales. -% Ces plaques de rue en deux langues dans Toulouse (Tolosa), -% comme de nombreux signes analogues dans les parties -% historiques de la cité, sont conservées essentiellement pour -% leur charme ancien; ceci est typique de ce qui subsiste de la -% <<~lenga d'oc~>> dans les cités du Midi de la France (voir -% les figures~\vrefrange{f+occi1}{f+occi2}). -% Voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}}. -% Voir aussi~\cite{occi}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*occitan> -\ProvidesFile{occitan.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Occitan titles (translations using http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx) -\def\ptctitle{Ensenhador}% -\def\plftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% -\def\plttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% -\def\mtctitle{Ensenhador}% -\def\mlftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% -\def\mlttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% -\def\stctitle{Ensenhador}% -\def\slftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}% -\def\slttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}% -%</occitan> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Occitan2'' language: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~occitan2~>>: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \lopt{occitan2} language provides an example of variants for the occitan titles. -% \or\relax -% La langue \lopt{occitan2} donne un exemple de variantes des titres occitans. -% \fi -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*occitan2> -\ProvidesFile{occitan2.mld}[2008/04/03]% -% Occitan titles (variants) -\def\ptctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% -\def\plftitle{Lista de las figuras}% -\def\plttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% -\def\mtctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% -\def\mlftitle{Lista de las figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% -\def\stctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}% -\def\slftitle{Lista de las figuras}% -\def\slttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}% -%</occitan2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Polish'' language: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{pologne.pdf}\ixgrf{pologne.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{polmin.jpg}\ixgrf{polmin.jpg} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Poland and minorities in Poland]{Poland and minorities in Poland (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/pologne-1demo.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+pologne} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Pologne et les minorités en Pologne]{Pologne et minorités en Pologne (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/pologne-1demo.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+pologne} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{polish-d.jpg}\ixgrf{polish-d.jpg}\\{} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \small This map shows a division of Polish dialects onto four branches: the Lesser Polish~(B1) in the south and -% southeast, Greater Polish~(B2) in west, Mazovian~(B3) in central and eastern parts and the \emph{New Mixed Dialects} -% group~(B4) in southwest. Silesian~(G) and Kashubian~(F) are treated as languages rather than dialects. -% \or\relax -% Cette carte montre une division des dialectes polonais en quatre branches: le polonais mineur~(B1) au sud et au -% sud-est, le polonais majeur~(B2) à~l'ouest, le mazovien~(B3) au centre et à~l'est, et le groupe des -% \emph{nouveaux dialectes mixtes}~(B4) au sud-ouest. Le silésien~(G) et le kashubien~(F) -% sont considérés comme des langues plutôt que comme des dialectes. -% \fi -% \end{tabularx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Polish dialects]{Polish dialects -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_dialects})\hfill\null}\label{f+polish-d} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Dialectes polonais]{Dialectes polonais -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_dialects})\hfill\null}\label{f+polish-d} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{poland-f.png}\ixgrfl{polski-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}% -% {\flagboxu{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polish_Language}{\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{polski-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{polish}'' language (\emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) are taken from the \xfile{polish.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} and \name{Michael}{Janich}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{poland-f.png}\ixgrfl{polski-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}% -% {\flagboxu{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{poland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polonais}{\flagboxa{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{polski-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish}~>> (polonais, \emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polish.dtx} -% (de \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} et \name{Michael}{Janich}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*polish> -\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Polish titles from polish.dtx (babel). Schalück, Elmar & Janich, Michael -\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}% -\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}% -\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}% -%</polish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Polish2'' language: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localpolish} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{polish2}'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``\lopt{polish}''.} are taken from -% the \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} and~\vref{s+mld+polski}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish2}~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{omega-polish.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} et~\vref{s+mld+polski}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*polish2> -\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega). Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov, Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% -\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% -\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% -\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}% -\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}% -\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}% -%</polish2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Polski'' language: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{polski}'' language (variant for polish) are taken from the \xfile{polski.dtx} file -% (by \name{Mariusz}{Olko} and \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) -% in the \pack{polski} package~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~polski~>>: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polski}~>> (autre nom du polonais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polski.dtx} -% (de \name{Mariusz}{Olko} et \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*polski> -\ProvidesFile{polski.mld}[2008/01/15]% -%% Polski titles from polski.dtx. Olko, Mariusz & Woli\'nski, Marcin. -\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\plttitle{Spis tabel}% -\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\mlttitle{Spis tabel}% -\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}% -\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}% -\def\slttitle{Spis tabel}% -%</polski> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Portuges'' language: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>>: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The name ``\lopt{portuges}'' is another spelling for ``\lopt{portuguese}'' -% (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load \xfile{portuguese.mld}: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Le nom «~\lopt{portuges}~» est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>> -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{portuguese.mld}: -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*portuges> -\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/07]\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}% -%</portuges> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-r.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-r.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portugal.pdf}\ixgrf{portugal.pdf}\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Portugal]{Portugal (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/portugal.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/portugal.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+portugal} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Portugal]{Portugal (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/portugal.html} -% --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/portugal.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+portugal} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% ^^A \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{luso1.pdf}\ixgrf{luso1.pdf}% -% \caption[Lusophone areas]{Lusophone areas -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso} -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{luso2.pdf}\ixgrf{luso2.pdf}% -% \caption[Régions lusophones]{Régions lusophones -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugais})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso}\ixgrf{luso2.pdf}% -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A \def\ctextbf#1{\null\hfill\textbf{#1}\hfill\null} -% ^^A \let\ctextbf\textbf -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{angola-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{east-timor-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{macau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{cplpmap.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brazil}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap_Verde}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/East_Timor}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{east-timor-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Angola}&\textbf{Brazil}&\textbf{Cap~Verde}&\textbf{East~Timor}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galicia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinea-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macau-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Galicia}&\textbf{Guinea-Bissau}&\textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Macaù}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tome-and-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Mozambique}&\textbf{Portugal}&\textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé-and-Príncipe}&% -% ^^A \\\bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cplpmap.png}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \caption[Lusophone countries and regions]{Lusophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{angola-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{brazil-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{cap-verde-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{east-timor-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{galicia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guinea-bissau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{macau-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{sao-f.png}% -% \ixgrf{cplpmap.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Brésil}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{brazil-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cap_Vert}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cap-verde-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://n.wikipedia.org/wiki/Timor_Oriental}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{east-timor-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Angola}&\textbf{Brésil}&\textbf{Cap~Vert}&\textbf{Timor~Oriental}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galice}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{galicia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée-Bissau}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guinea-bissau-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_Équatoriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Macao}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{macau-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Galice}&\textbf{Guinée-Bissau}&\textbf{Guinée~Équatoriale}&\textbf{Macao}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sao_Tome-et-Principe}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sao-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Mozambique}&\textbf{Portugal}&\textbf{Sa\~o~Tomé-and-Príncipe}&% -% ^^A \\\bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cplpmap.png}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx} -% \caption[Pays et régions lusophones]{Pays et régions lusophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP})\hfill\null}\label{f+luso-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.35\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.65\iwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!ht] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}% -% \IVC[60mm]{\awidth}{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \RaggedRight -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Açoriano (Azorean) -- Azores. -% \item Alentejano -- Alentejo. -% \item Algarvio -- Algarve (there is a particular dialect -% in a small part of western Algarve). -% \item Alto-Minhoto -- North of Braga (hinterland). -% \item Baixo-Beirão; Alto-Alentejano -- Central Portugal (hinterland). -% \item Beirão -- Central Portugal. -% \item Estremenho -- Regions of Coimbra and Lisbon (the Lisbon dialect -% has some peculiar features not shared with the one of Coimbra). -% \item Madeirense (Madeiran) -- Madeira. -% \item Nortenho -- Regions of Braga and Porto. -% \item Transmontano -- Trás-os-Montes. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}% -% \IVC[60mm]{\awidth}{portu-p.jpg}\ixgrf{portu-p.jpg}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% \RaggedRight -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Açoriano (Azorean) -- Açores. -% \item Alentejano -- Alentejo. -% \item Algarvio -- Algarve (il y~a un dialecte particulier -% dans une petite partie de l'Algarve occidental). -% \item Alto-Minhoto -- Nord de Braga (arrière-pays). -% \item Baixo-Beirão; Alto-Alentejano -- Portugal central (arrière-pays). -% \item Beirão -- Portugal central. -% \item Estremenho -- Régions de Coimbra et Lisbonne (le dialecte -% de Lisbonne a quelques particuliarités que ne partage -% pas celui de Coimbra). -% \item Madeirense (Madeiran) -- Madère. -% \item Nortenho -- Régions de Braga et Porto. -% \item Transmontano -- Trás-os-Montes. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \fi -% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% ^^A \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}% -% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize\selectlanguage{french} -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Benguelense -- Benguela province. -% \item Luandense -- Luanda province. -% \item Sulista -- South of Angola. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialects of Portuguese in Portugal and in Angola]{Dialects of Portuguese in Portugal -% and in Angola (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-a} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% ^^A \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}% -% \IVC[55mm]{\awidth}{portu-a.png}\ixgrf{portu-a.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\footnotesize -% \begin{enumerate}[1.~] -% \item Benguelense -- Province de Benguela. -% \item Luandense -- Province de Luanda. -% \item Sulista -- Sud de l'Angola. -% \end{enumerate} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Dialectes portugais au Portugal et en Angola]{Dialectes du portugais au Portugal -% et en Angola (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portuguese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+portu-a} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \reversemarginpar -% ^^A http://www.gastronomias.com/lusofonia/ -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{angola-f.png}\ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}\ixgrfl{cplp-0.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}\\% -% ^^A \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.or/wiki/CPLP}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cplp-0.png}}% -% \end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{portuguese}'' language (\emph{português}) are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file -% (by \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. -% The portuguese language is spoken in Portugal (with the islands of Azores and Madeira) , in Brazil, and in -% former portuguese colonies like Angola, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique, Cape Verde Islands, Sa\~o~Tomé and Príncipe Islands, -% East Timor, and some old trading posts like Macao and Goa; see figures~\vrefrange{f+luso}{f+luso-c}. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{angola-f.png}\ixgrfl{portugal-f.png}\ixgrfl{cplp-0.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portugal}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{portugal-f.png}}}\\% -% ^^A \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Angola}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{angola-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/CPLP}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cplp-0.png}}% -% \end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{portuguese}~>> (portugais, \emph{português}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx} -% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}. -% Le portugais est parlé au Portugal (avec les Îles des Açores et Madère) , au Brésil, et dans les anciennes -% colonies telles que l'Angola, la Guinée-Bissau, le Mozambique, les Îles du Cap-Vert, les Îles de Sa\~o~Tomé-et-Príncipe, -% le Timor Oriental et quelques anciens comptoirs comme Macao et Goa; voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+luso}{f+luso-c}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont différents au Brésil, -% même si l'on y parle aussi le portugais. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*portuguese> -\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Portuguese titles from portuges.dtx (babel). -%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro -\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}% -\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}% -\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}% -\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}% -\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}% -%</portuguese> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Romanian'' language: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{romanian.pdf}\ixgrf{romanian.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Romanian language areas]{Romanian language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/roumain_aires-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+romanian} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue roumaine]{Régions de la langue roumaine -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/roumain_aires-lng.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+romanian} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{romania-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{romanian}'' language (\emph{român\u{a}}) come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file -% (by \name{Umstatter}{Horst} and \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{romania-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{romania-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian}~>> (roumain, \emph{român\u{a}}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} -% (de \name{Umstatter}{Horst} et \name{Robert}{Juhasz}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*romanian> -\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Romanian titles from romanian.dtx (babel). -%% Horst, Umstatter & Juhasz, Robert -\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% -\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% -\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% -\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% -\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}% -\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}% -%</romanian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{9} -% \section{``Romanian2'' language: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian2}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} and~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. -% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~romanian2>>: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian2}~>> (roumain, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} -% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} -% et~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}. -% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*romanian2> -\ProvidesFile{romanian2.mld}[2006/08/03]% -%% Titles in RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx). Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl), -%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) -\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\plftitle{Lista de figuri}% -\def\plttitle{Lista de tabele}% -\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\mlftitle{Lista de figuri}% -\def\mlttitle{Lista de tabele}% -\def\stctitle{Cuprins}% -\def\slftitle{Lista de figuri}% -\def\slttitle{Lista de tabele}% -%</romanian2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Romanian3'' language: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian3}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. -% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian2}. -% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~romanian3>>: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian3}~>> (roumain, autre variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx} -% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) -% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. -% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian3}. -% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*romanian3> -\ProvidesFile{romanian3.mld}[2006/08/03]% -%% Romanian titles from RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx) variant. -%% Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl) -%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de) -\def\ptctitle{Tabla de materii}% -\def\plttitle{Indice de figuri}% -\def\plttitle{Tabele}% -\def\mtctitle{Tabla de materii}% -\def\mlttitle{Indice de figuri}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% -\def\stctitle{Tabla de materii}% -\def\slttitle{Indice de figuri}% -\def\slttitle{Tabele}% -%</romanian3> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian'' language: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \toprule -% {\IVC{\awidth}{rus-cyr.png}}\ixgrf{rus-cyr.png}&\hspace*{5mm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\parskip=.7\baselineskip -% \footnotesize As in any slavic language, the russian is characterized -% by its alphabet. Let us remember that the catholic legacy has -% favorized the latin alphabet with croatian, polish, czech, -% slovak, slovene and sorbian, while the legacy of the orthodox -% world has favorized the cyrillic alphabet with russian, -% belarusian, ukrainian, serbish (Serbia), bulgarian and -% macedonian. However, in Russia, we speak of the russian -% alphabet, the ``cyrillic'' appellation denoting only the -% slavonic writing used in Russian until the beginning of the -% \textsc{xviii}\textsuperscript{th}~century. -% \par -% The russian alphabet contains 33~letters, the bulgarian and -% the serbian ~0, the ukrainian~33. The modern russian alphabet -% has also been adapted to several non slavic languages in -% countries of the ex-USSR by adding letters, like for ouralians -% (votiak, erzia, ostiak, vogul), altaic languages -% (turkmen, azeri), iranian (ossetic, kurdish, tadik), caucasian -% (abkhaz, adyghe, ingush, avar, circassian, chechen, etc.), -% turkish (azeri, bashkir, karakalpak, kyrgyz, nogai, tatar, turkmen, uzbek, etc.), -% finno-ougrian (kshanti, komi, etc.), -% samoyed (nenets, selkup), -% mongol (mongol, buryat, etc.), -% tunghunze (even, evenki, nanai), -% paleo-siberian (eskimo, koryak, nivkh, chukchi), -% roman (moldavian/moldovan, romanian), -% and other (dungan) languages. -% \end{minipage}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{% -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% Today, it seems that most of the non slavic languages are tending to leave the cyrillic script and to go back to -% their traditional script or to replace it by the latin alphabet. This is the case for kazakh, uzbek, mongol, -% azeri, etc. The cyrillic script seems to survive mainly in countries of orthodox tradition (central and eastern -% Europe): russian, ukrainian, belarusian, macedonian and serbian. -% See also~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillic}. -% \end{minipage}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Russian alphabet russe]{Russian alphabet -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq} and -% \url{http://ras-poutine1916.blogspot.com/2007/05/lalphabet-cyrilique.html} by \name{Cezare}{Tomczak})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-cyr} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cyr-alf.png}\ixgrf{cyr-alf.png} -% \caption[Distribution of the cyrillic alphabet]{Distribution of the cyrillic alphabet: this map shows in dark -% green the countries that adopt the cyrillic alphabet as the official main script; and in light green, -% the countries that uses officially the cyrillic alongside another script -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillic})\hfill\null}\label{f+cyr-alf} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-5mm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \toprule -% {\IVC{\awidth}{rus-cyr.png}}\ixgrf{rus-cyr.png}&\hspace*{5mm}&% -% \begin{minipage}[c]{\bwidth}\parskip=.7\baselineskip -% \footnotesize Comme dans toutes les langues slaves, le russe se distingue -% par son alphabet. Rappelons que l'héritage catholique a -% favorisé l'alphabet latin avec le croate, le polonais, le -% tchèque, le slovaque, le slovène et le sorabe, alors que -% l'héritage du monde orthodoxe a favorisé l'alphabet -% cyrillique avec le russe, le biélorusse, l'ukrainien, le -% serbe (Serbie), le bulgare et le macédonien. Cependant, -% en Russie, on parle d'alphabet russe, l'appellation de -% cyrillique servant à désigner seulement la graphie du slavon -% utilisée en Russie jusqu'au début du \textsc{xviii}\textsuperscript{e}~siècle. -% \par -% L'alphabet russe comprend 33~lettres, le bulgare et le serbe~30, -% l'ukrainien~33. L'alphabet russe moderne a également été -% adapté à plusieurs langues non slaves des pays de l'ex-URSS -% par l'adjonction de lettres, que ce soit pour certaines -% langues ouraliennes (votiak, mordve, ostiak, vogoul), -% altaïques (turkmène, azéri), iraniennes (ossète, -% kurde, tadjik), caucasiennes (abkhaz, adyguien, ingouche, avar, circassien, tchétchène, etc.), -% turques (azéri, bachkir, karakalpak, kirghiz, nogaï, tatar, turkmène, ouzbek, etc.), -% finno-ougriennes (khanti, komi, etc.), -% samoyèdes (nenets, selkup), -% mongoles (mongol, bouriate, etc.), -% toungouzes (even, evenki, nanaï), -% paléo-sibériennes (eskimo, koriake, nivkhe, tchouktche), -% romanes (moldave, roumain), -% et autres (dungan). -% \end{minipage}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{% -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% Il semble qu'aujourd'hui la plupart des langues non slaves aient tendance à~abandonner peu à~peu l'écriture cyrillique -% pour revenir à~leur écriture traditionnelle ou à~la remplacer par l'alphabet latin. C'est le cas par exemple pour -% le kazakh, l'ouzbek, le mongol, l'azéri, etc. L'écriture cyrillique semble persister surtout dans les pays de -% tradition orthodoxe (Europe centrale et orientale): russe, ukrainien, biélorusse, macédonien et serbe. -% Voir aussi~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillique}. -% \end{minipage}}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular} -% \caption[Alphabet russe]{Alphabet russe -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq} et -% \url{http://ras-poutine1916.blogspot.com/2007/05/lalphabet-cyrilique.html} de \name{Cezare}{Tomczak})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-cyr} -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=\textwidth]{cyr-alf.png}\ixgrf{cyr-alf.png} -% \caption[Distribution de l'alphabet cyrillique]{Distribution de l'alphabet cyrillique: le vert foncé désigne -% les pays où il est utilisé en tant qu'écriture principale; le vert clair désigne les pays où il est utilisé -% en même temps qu'une autre écriture officielle -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyrillique})\hfill\null}\label{f+cyr-alf} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \vspace*{1\bigskipamount} -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian.png}\ixgrf{russian.png}% -% -% \vspace*{-1\bigskipamount} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Russian language areas]{Russian language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue russe]{Régions de la langue russe -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/russie-2demo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian-e.pdf}\ixgrf{russian-e.pdf}% -% \caption[Areas where the russian language is official or spoken]{Areas where the russian language is official or spoken -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian-e} -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{russian-w.png}\ixgrf{russian-w.png}% -% \caption[Régions où la langue russe est officielle ou parlée]{Régions où la langue russe est officielle ou parlée -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_russe})\hfill\null}\label{f+russian-f} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A (RUSS -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{cis-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{russia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belarus-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{finland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tajikistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commonwealth_of_Independent_States}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cis-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Armenia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Azerbaijan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{azerbaijan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{CIS~(1)}&\textbf{Russia~(2)}&\textbf{Armenia~(2)}&\textbf{Azerbaijan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belarus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belarus-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgaria}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Czech_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Belarus~(2)}&\textbf{Bulgaria}&\textbf{Czech~Rep.}&\textbf{Estonia}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Georgia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israel}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kazakhstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kazakhstan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Finland}&\textbf{Georgia~(4)}&\textbf{Israel}&\textbf{Kazakhstan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kyrgyzstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kyrgyzstan-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latvia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lithuania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldova}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Kyrgyzstan~(2)}&\textbf{Latvia}&\textbf{Lithuania}&\textbf{Moldova~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{mongolia-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{poland-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Romania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{romania-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{slovakia-f.png}}}}\\% -% \textbf{Mongolia}&\textbf{Poland}&\textbf{Romania}&\textbf{Slovakia}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tajikistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{tajikistan-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkmenistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{turkmenistan-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{ukraine-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uzbekistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{uzbekistan-f.png}}}}\\% -% \textbf{Tajikistan~(2)}&\textbf{Turkmenistan~(3)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(2)}&\textbf{Uzbekistan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{See~\cite[page~329]{comrie1990} and~\cite[page~395]{LOE}}.\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~CIS:~Commonwealth~of~Independent~States.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\phantom{(1)~}Charter:~\url{http://www.therussiasite.org/legal/laws/CIScharter.html}}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~Member~of~CIS.\qquad(3)~Associated~member~(observer)~of~CIS.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(4)~Withdrew~of~the~Council~of~Defense~in~February~2006.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Russian-speaking countries]{Russian-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+russ-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{cis-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{russia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{armenia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{azerbaijan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belarus-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bulgaria-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{czech-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{estonia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{finland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{georgia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{israel-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kazakhstan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kyrgyzstan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{latvia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{lithuania-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{moldova-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mongolia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{poland-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{romania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tajikistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{turkmenistan-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uzbekistan-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Communauté_des_États_indépendants}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cis-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arménie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{armenia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Azerbaïdjan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{azerbaijan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{CEI~(1)}&\textbf{Russie~(2)}&\textbf{Arménie~(2)}&\textbf{Azerbaïdjan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biélorussie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belarus-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bulgarie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bulgaria-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_tchèque}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{czech-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Estonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{estonia-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Biélorussie~(2)}&\textbf{Bulgarie}&\textbf{Rép.~tchèque}&\textbf{Estonie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Géorgie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{georgia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Israël}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{israel-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kazakhstan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kazakhstan-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Finlande}&\textbf{Géorgie~(4)}&\textbf{Israël}&\textbf{Kazakhstan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kirghizistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kyrgyzstan-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lettonie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{latvia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lituanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{lithuania-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moldavie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{moldova-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Kirghizistan~(2)}&\textbf{Lettonie}&\textbf{Lituanie}&\textbf{Moldavie~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{mongolia-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pologne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{poland-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roumanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{romania-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{slovakia-f.png}}}}\\% -% \textbf{Mongolie}&\textbf{Pologne}&\textbf{Roumanie}&\textbf{Slovaquie}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tadjikistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{tajikistan-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkménistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{turkmenistan-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{ukraine-f.png}}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouzbékistan}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{{uzbekistan-f.png}}}}\\% -% \textbf{Tadjikistan~(2)}&\textbf{Turkménistan~(3)}&\textbf{Ukraine~(2)}&\textbf{Ouzbékistan~(2)}\\ -% \midrule -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Voir~\cite[page~329]{comrie1990} et~\cite[page~395]{LOE}}.\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(1)~CEI:~Communauté~des~États~indépendants.}\\ -% ^^A \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Charte:~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Charte_de_la_CEI&action=edit&redlink=1}}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\phantom{(1)~}Charte:~\url{http://www.therussiasite.org/legal/laws/CIScharter.html}}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(2)~Membre~de~la~CEI.\qquad(3)~Membre~associé~(observateur)~de~la~CEI.}\\ -% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{(4)~S'est~retirée~du~Conseil~de~Défense~en~février~2006.}\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays russophones]{Pays russophones (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russe})\hfill\null}\label{f+russ-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A RUSS) -% \begin{figure}[!ht] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{rus-re.png}\ixgrf{rus-re.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Regions of Russia]{Regions of Russia (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-re} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de Russie]{Régions de Russie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-re} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!ht] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{rus-su.pdf}\ixgrf{rus-su.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Russian subjects]{Russian subjects (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}; -% see also~\url{http://www.monde-diplomatique.fr/IMG/artoff619.jpg})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-su} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Sujets russes]{Sujets russes (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}; -% voir aussi~\url{http://www.monde-diplomatique.fr/IMG/artoff619.jpg})\hfill\null}\label{f+rus-su} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \begin{macro}{\cz} -% \begin{macro}{\mz} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles -% \ixgrf{russian-n.png}\ixgrfl{russia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russian_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russian-n.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{russian}'' language (\emph{russkiy yazyk}) are taken from -% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% Specific cyrillic fonts are required; see figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{russian-n.png}\ixgrfl{russia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russe}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russian-n.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{russia-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian}~>> (russe, \emph{russkiy yazyk}) sont tirés -% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. -% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises; voir la figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian> -\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Russian titles -\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}% -\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% -\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% -\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}% -\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% -\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% -\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}% -\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}% -\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}% -%</russian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2m}'' language (``\lopt{russian2m}'' is a modern variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') -% are taken from the \xfile{russian2m.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. -% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2m}~>> (une variante moderne de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{russian2m.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. -% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian2m> -\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern) -%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% -\def\plftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% - ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% -\def\plttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% - ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% - ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% - ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% -\def\stctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}% -\def\slftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b% - ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}% -\def\slttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430% - ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}% -%</russian2m> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localrussian} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2o}'' language (``\lopt{russian2o}'' is an old variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') -% are taken from the \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> (<<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> est une ancienne variante -% de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} -% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}) -% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. -% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian2o> -\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]% -%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old) -%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov -\def\ptctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% -\def\plftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% - ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% -\def\plttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% - ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% - ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% - ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% -\def\stctitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}% -\def\slftitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438% - ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}% -\def\slttitle{\localrussian% -{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442% - ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}% -%</russian2o> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russianb'' language: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianb}'' language (``\lopt{russianb}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'') -% are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. -% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. The parttoc title varies depending -% on the presence of chapters defined or not by the document class. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianb}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianb}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) -% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} -% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}. -% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. Le titre des -% parttocs dépend de l'existence de chapitres dans la classe de document. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russianb> -\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[2006/02/15]% -%% Russian (russianb) titles from russianb.dtx (babel) -%% Lapko, Olga & Volovitch, Vladimir & Lemberg, Werner -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\ptctitle{% - {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}% -\else\def\ptctitle{% - {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% -\fi -\def\plftitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% -\def\plttitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% -\def\mtctitle{% - {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% -\def\mlftitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% -\def\mlttitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% -\def\stctitle{% - {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}% -\def\slftitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}% -\def\slttitle{% - {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space - \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}% -%</russianb> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russianc'' language: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\xalx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianc}'' language (``\lopt{russianc}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'', -% used in the part of Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \xfile{russian.def} in the -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est une variante du russe <<~\lopt{russian}~>>, -% utilisée dans la partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.def} dans le paquetage -% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la -% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russianc> -\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]% -%% Russian titles (Mongolia). Needs cyrillic fonts. -\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}% -\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% -\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% -\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -%</russianc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-cca'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. -% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} -% (by \name{Victor}{Boyko} and \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) -% file in the \pack{cmcyralt} package~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. -% \or\relax -% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. -% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} -% (de \name{Victor}{Boyko} de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-cca> -\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca}% -%% Russian-cca titles. From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package -%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu) -%% Needs cmcyralt fonts and special input encoding. -%</russian-cca> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-cca1'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca1~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} file -% (by \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} and \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) -% in the \pack{cmcyralt} package\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. -% \or\relax -% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} -% (de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} et \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-cca1> -\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca1}% -%% Russian-cca1 titles. From cmcyralt.sty in the cmcyralt package -%% with cmcyr fonts in alt encoding. -%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Alexander Harin (harin@lourie.und.ac.za) -%% & Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@phy.ncu.edu.tw) -%</russian-cca1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-lh'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-lh~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The russian titles for the LH fonts (``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language) are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} file -% (by \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) -% in the \pack{LH} package~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LH (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty} -% (de \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{LH}~\cite{LH/russian.sty}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-lh> -\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lh}% -%% Russian-lh titles from russian.sty in the LH package -%% LH fonts in special encoding. By Sergei O. Naumov (serge@astro.unc.edu) -%</russian-lh> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-lhcyralt'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyralt~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The russian titles for the LHCYRALT fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language) are taken -% from the \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRALT (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>>) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. The input encoding is ALT (code page CP866). -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être -% générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est ALT (page de code CP866). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-lhcyralt> -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}[2006/03/10]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyralt}% -%% Russian-lhcyralt titles from lhcyralt.sty in the LHCYR package -%% LHCYRALT fonts in special encoding ALT (CP866). -%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -%</russian-lhcyralt> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-lhcyrkoi'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrkoi~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The russian titles for the LHCYRKOI fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language) are taken -% from the \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRKOI (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>>) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. The input encoding is KOI-8. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement, -% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est KOI-8. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-lhcyrkoi> -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrkoi}% -%% Russian-lhcyrkoi titles from lhcyrkoi.sty in the LHCYR package -%% LHCYRKOI fonts in special encoding KOI-8. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -%</russian-lhcyrkoi> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Russian-lhcyrwin'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrwin~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin} -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The russian titles for the LHCYRWIN fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language) are taken -% from the \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRWIN (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>>) sont tirés -% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. The input encoding is CP1251. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas -% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. -% Le codage en entrée est CP1251. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*russian-lhcyrwin> -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrwin}% -%% Russian titles from lhcyrwin.sty in the LHCYR package -%% LHCYRWIN fonts in encoding CP1251. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -%</russian-lhcyrwin> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Samin'' language: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{same.png}\ixgrf{same.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{same-f.png}\ixgrf{same-f.png}% -% \end{tabular}\\*[1\baselineskip] -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Sámi dialects areas]{Sámi dialects areas\,\mpfootnotemark{} -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages} and \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_same})\hfill\null}\label{f+same} -% \footnotetext{Sámi: 1.~Southern; 2.~Ume; 3.~Pite; 4.~Lule; 5.~Northern; 6.~Skolt; 7.~Inari; 8.~Teri. Darkened -% area represents municipalities that recognize Sámi as an official language.} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions des dialectes sâmes]{Régions des dialectes sâmes\,\mpfootnotemark{} -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages} et \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langue_same})\hfill\null}\label{f+same} -% \footnotetext{Sâme: 1.~du Sud; % 2.~Ume; 3.~Pite; 4.~Lule; 5.~du Nord; 6.~Skolt; 7.~Inari; 8.~Ter. La zone -% foncée représente les municipalités qui reconnaissent le Sâme comme une langue officielle.} -% \fi -% \end{minipage} -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{sami-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sami_languages}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sami-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{samin}'' language come from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Specific fonts are required. -% ^^A -% ^^A \lneed{3} -% Note that several Sámi dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden, -% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \suffix{.dtx} -% files for, e.g., Lule and South Sámi. -% Hence the (artificial) name \xfile{samin.dtx} (and not \uxfile{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sámi -% case\,\footnote{Adapted from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file.}. These dialects and languages are part of -% the Finnic group. See also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{sami-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Langues_Sames}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sami-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{samin}~>> (Sámi (ou Sâme) du Nord) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{samin.dtx} -% (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Des fontes spécifiques sont requises. -% ^^A -% ^^A \lneed{3} -% Notez que plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sámi/Sâme sont parlés en Finlande, Norvège, Suède et dans la péninsule -% de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont différents, donc il y~aurait éventuellement besoin de plusieurs -% fichiers \suffix{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sámi (ou Sâme) du Sud. -% D'où le nom (artificiel) \xfile{samin.dtx} (et non pas \uxfile{sami.dtx} ou analogue) dans le cas du -% Sámi (Sâme) du Nord\,\footnote{D'après le fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}.}. Ces dialectes et langues font partie -% du groupe finnois. Voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*samin> -\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% North Sámi (samin) titles from samin.dtx (babel). Jernsletten, Regnor -\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}% -\def\plftitle{Govvosat}% -\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}% -\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}% -\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}% -\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}% -\def\slftitle{Govvosat}% -\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}% -%</samin> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Scottish'' language: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.275526742\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.358184765\iwidth} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{.366288493\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=90 0 430 500,clip]{ecosse1.pdf}\ixgrf{ecosse1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ecosse2}\ixgrf{ecosse2.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ecosse3}\ixgrf{ecosse3.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Scotland and the scottish gaelic language]{Scotland and the scottish gaelic language -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecossecarte.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse-lng-carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ecosse} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Écosse et la langue gaélique écossaise]{Écosse et la langue gaélique écossaise -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecossecarte.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ecosse-lng-carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ecosse} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{5.508474576mm} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{gaid.jpg}\ixgrfl{scotland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scottish_Language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gaid.jpg}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scotland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{scotland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{scottish}'' language (gaelic scottish, \emph{gàidhlig}) come from the \xfile{scottish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Fraser}{Grant}) -% in the \pack{babel} language~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrf{gaid.jpg}\ixgrfl{scotland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Écossais}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gaid.jpg}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Écosse}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{scotland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{scottish}~>> (gaélique écossais, \emph{gàidhlig}) sont tirés du fichier \uxfile{scottish.dtx} -% (de \name{Fraser}{Grant}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*scottish> -\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Scottish titles from scottish.dtx (babel). Grant, Fraser -\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% -\def\plftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% -\def\plttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% -\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% -\def\mlftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% -\def\mlttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% -\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}% -\def\slftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}% -\def\slttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}% -%</scottish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Serbian'' language: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.500713267\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.499286733\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{serbia1}\ixgrf{serbia1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{bosnia}\ixgrf{bosnia.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Serbia and Bosnia-Herzegovina]{Serbia and Bosnia-Herzegovina -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/serbie.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/bosnieherzcarte_1.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+serbia} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Serbie et Bosnie-Herzégovine]{Serbie et Bosnie-Herzégovine -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/serbie.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/bosnieherzcarte_1.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+serbia} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{serb-a.pdf}\ixgrf{serb-a.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Serbian alphabets]{Serbian alphabets (cyrillic and latin) compared to other european alphabets -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+serb-a} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Alphabets serbes]{Alphabets serbes (cyrillique et latin) comparés aux autres alphabets européens -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+serb-a} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrf{serbia-f.png}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{vojvodina-f.png}\ixgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbian_Language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vojvodina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vojvodina-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bosnia-herzegovina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bosnia-hz-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montenegro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{serbian}'' (serbocroatian) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) language are taken from the \xfile{serbian.dtx} file -% (by \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} and \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. -% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet -% (a variant) (see figure~\vref{f+serb-a}). -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} and figure~\vref{f+kosovo}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{serbia-f.png}\ixgrfl{serbia-f2.png}\ixgrfl{vojvodina-f.png}\ixgrfl{bosnia-hz-f.png}\ixgrfl{montenegro-f.jpg}\ixgrfl{kosovo-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbe}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serbie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{serbia-f2.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Voïvodine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vojvodina-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bosnie-Herzégovine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bosnia-hz-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monténégro}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{montenegro-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kosovo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kosovo-f.png}}}\\\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbian}~>> (serbocroate) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{serbian.dtx} -% (de \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} et \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}. -% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores -% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante) (voir la figure~\vref{f+serb-a}). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} et la figure~\vref{f+kosovo}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*serbian> -\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Serbian titles in serbian.dtx (babel). Muhamedagi\'{c}, Dejan & Slobodan, Jankovic -\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\plftitle{Slike}% -\def\plttitle{Tabele}% -\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\mlftitle{Slike}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% -\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}% -\def\slftitle{Slike}% -\def\slttitle{Tabele}% -%</serbian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{6} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language\,\footnote{The ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language is written -% with cyrillic characters.} have been gently provided by \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} and \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. -% Cyrillic fonts are required. -% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet -% (a variant). -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> est -% écrite en caractères cyrilliques.} ont été aimablement fournis par \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} et -% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. -% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores -% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}. -% \fi -% ^^A %% Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie | Küster -% \lneed{14} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*serbianc> -\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Serbian cyrillic titles. Marko Èehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org -%% Frank Küster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch -\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% -\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% -\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% -\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% -\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% -\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}% -\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}% -\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}% -%</serbianc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Slovak'' language: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!hbt] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[c]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovakia.pdf}\ixgrf{slovakia.pdf}% -% \IVC[46mm]{\awidth}{slovakia.pdf}\ixgrf{slovakia.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% ^^A \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovak-ok.png}\ixgrf{slovak-ok.png} -% \IVC[35mm]{\bwidth}{slovak-ok.png}\ixgrf{slovak-ok.png} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Slovakia]{Slovakia -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/slovaquiecarte.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Districts_of_Slovakia}; -% see also~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_traditional_regions_of_Slovakia} -% by~\name{Kristian}{Slimak})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovak} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Slovaquie]{Slovaquie -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/slovaquiecarte.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Districts_of_Slovakia}; -% voir aussi~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_traditional_regions_of_Slovakia} -% par~\name{Kristian}{Slimak})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovak} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovakia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{slovak}'' language (\emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the \xfile{slovak.dtx} file -% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} and \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{slovakia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovaquie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovakia-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovak}~>> (slovaque, \emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovak.dtx} -% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} et \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3}% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*slovak> -\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Slovak titles from slovak.dtx (babel). Chlebîková, Jana & Schlemmer, Tobias. T1 encoding. -\def\ptctitle{Obsah}% -\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% -\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% -\def\mtctitle{Obsah}% -\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% -\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% -\def\stctitle{Obsah}% -\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}% -\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}% -%</slovak> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Slovene'' language: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovenie.pdf}\ixgrf{slovenie.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{slovenian.png}\ixgrf{slovenian.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Slovenia]{Slovenia (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/sloveniecarte.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq} and \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovene_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovene} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Slovénie]{Slovénie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/sloveniecarte.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovene_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+slovene} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovenia}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}}} -% slovene language (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) is spoken in Slovenia, but somewhat also in Italy (Frioul), in Austria (Carinthia and Styria), in -% Hungary (Szlovénviék and Porabje), in West Germany and Sweden. -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{slovenia-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Slovénie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{slovenia-f.png}}}}} -% langue slovène (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) est parlée en Slovénie, mais un peu aussi en Italie (Frioul), en Autriche (Carinthie et Styrie), en -% Hongrie (Szlovénviék et Porabje), en Allemagne de l'Ouest et en Suède. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{slovene}'' language come from the \xfile{slovene.dtx} file -% (by \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} and \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovene}~>> (slovène) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovene.dtx} -% (de \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} et \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*slovene> -\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Slovene titles from slovene.dtx (babel). Zavrtanik, Danilo & \v{Z}lajpah, Leon -\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}% -\def\plftitle{Slike}% -\def\plttitle{Tabele}% -\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}% -\def\mlftitle{Slike}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabele}% -\def\stctitle{Kazalo}% -\def\slftitle{Slike}% -\def\slttitle{Tabele}% -%</slovene> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{10} -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Spanish'' language: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[p!] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{spain.png}\ixgrf{spain.png}% -% -% \vspace*{\bigskipamount} -% -% \noindent\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\small\columnseprule=.4pt\relax -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Spain comprises 17~autonomous communities (see figure~\ref{f+17spain} above) in the whole country, including the -% Canary Islands, near Morocco\footnote{Ceuta and Melilla are spanish enclaves on the northern coast of Morocco.}: -% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns -% \begin{itemize}\raggedright -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt -% \listparindent=0em -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-2em -% \item[--] Andalusia (\emph{Andalucía}): castillan; -% \item[--] Aragon (\emph{Aragón}): castillan ; -% \item[--] Principality of Asturias (\emph{Principado de Asturias}): castilan; -% \item[--] Balearic Islands (\emph{Islas Baleares}): castilan and catalan; -% \item[--] Basque Country (\emph{Pais Vasco, Euskadi}): castilan and basque; -% \item[--] Canary Islands (\emph{Canarias}): castillan; -% \item[--] Cantabria (\emph{Cantabria}): castillan; -% \item[--] Castile-La~Mancha (\emph{Castilla y La Mancha}): castilan; -% \item[--] Castile~and~León (\emph{Castilla y León}): castilan; -% \item[--] Catalonia (\emph{Cataluña / Catalunya}): castilan and catalan; -% \item[--] Estremadura (\emph{Estremadura}): castilan; -% \item[--] Galicia (\emph{Galicia}): castilan and galician; -% \item[--] La~Rioja: castilan; -% \item[--] Madrid (\emph{Madrid}): castilan; -% \item[--] Region of Murcia (\emph{Region de Murcia}): castilan. -% \item[--] Foral Community of Navarre (\emph{Comunidad Foral de Navarra}): castilan and basque; -% \item[--] Valencian Community (\emph{Comunidad Valenciana}): castilan and catalan (valencian); -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \or\relax -% L'Espagne compte 17~Communautés autonomes (voir la figure~\ref{f+17spain} ci-dessus) réparties dans l'ensemble du pays -% et incluant les îles Canaries, au large du Maroc\,\footnote{Ceuta et Melilla sont des enclaves espagnoles sur la -% côte nord du Maroc.}: -% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns -% \begin{itemize}\raggedright -% \item Andalousie (\emph{Andalucía}): castillan; -% \item Aragon (\emph{Aragón}): castillan ; -% \item Principauté des Asturies (\emph{Principado de Asturias}): castillan; -% \item Îles Baléares (\emph{Islas Baleares}): castillan et catalan; -% \item Pays basque (\emph{Pais Vasco, Euskadi}): castillan et basque; -% \item Canaries (\emph{Canarias}): castillan; -% \item Cantabrie (\emph{Cantabria}): castillan; -% \item Vieille-Castille (\emph{Castilla y La Mancha}): castillan; -% \item Castille-et-Léon (\emph{Castilla y León}): castillan ; -% \item Catalogne (\emph{Cataluña / Catalunya}): castillan et catalan; -% \item Estrémadure (\emph{Estremadura}): castillan; -% \item Galice (\emph{Galicia}): castillan et galicien; -% \item La Rioja: castillan; -% \item Communauté de Madrid (\emph{Comunidad de Madrid}): castillan; -% \item Région de Murcie (\emph{Region de Murcia}): castillan. -% \item Communauté forale de Navarre (\emph{Comunidad Foral de Navarra}): castillan et basque; -% \item Communauté valencienne (\emph{Comunidad Valenciana}): castillan et catalan (valencien); -% \end{itemize} -% \end{multicols} -% \fi -% \end{minipage}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The 17~autonomous communities in Spain]{The 17~autonomous communities in Spain -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autonomous_communities_of_Spain} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+17spain} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Les 17~communautés autonomes en Espagne]{Les 17~communautés autonomes en Espagne -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Autonomous_communities_of_Spain} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+17spain} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{espa-l.pdf}\ixgrf{espa-l.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in Spain]{Languages in Spain -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte-lng.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+esp} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Espagne]{Langues en Espagne -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/espagne_carte-lng.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+esp} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,viewport=0 0 1427 628,clip]{hispano.png}\ixgrf{hispano.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Hispanophone areas]{Hispanophone areas (\url{http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_language} -% by~\name{Onofre}{Bonvila})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispa} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions hispanophones]{Régions hispanophones -% (\url{http://simple.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_language} par~\name{Onofre}{Bonvila})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispa} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{espa-o.png}\ixgrf{espa-o.png}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[States where spanish (castillan) is an official language]{States where spanish (castillan) is an -% official language (red: the only one, blue: co-official) (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Idioma_español})\hfill\null}\label{f+espa-o} -% \or\relax -% \caption[États où l'espagnol (castillan) est une langue officielle]{États où l'espagnol (castillan) est une -% langue officielle (rouge: la seule, bleu: co-officielle) -% (\url{http://es.wikipedia.org/wiki/Idioma_español})\hfill\null}\label{f+espa-o} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{spain-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belize-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bolivia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chile-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{colombia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{cuba-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominican-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{el-salvador-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{gibraltar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{honduras-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{nicaragua-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{panama-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{peru-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uruguay-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{venezuela-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spain}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorra}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentina}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belize}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belize-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Spain}&\textbf{Andorra}&\textbf{Argentina}&\textbf{Belize}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolivia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolivia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chile}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chile-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colombia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{colombia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Costa-Rica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{costa-rica-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bolivia}&\textbf{Chile}&\textbf{Colombia}&\textbf{Costa-Rica}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cuba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cuba-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dominican_Republic}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominican-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ecuador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ecuador-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/El_Salvador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{el-salvador-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Cuba}&\textbf{Dominican~Republic}&\textbf{Ecuador}&{El~Salvador}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Equatorial_Guinea}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gibraltar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gibraltar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guatemala}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guatemala-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Honduras}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{honduras-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Equatorial~Guinea}&\textbf{Gibraltar}&\textbf{Guatemala}&\textbf{Honduras}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mexico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nicaragua}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nicaragua-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Panama}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{panama-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Mexico}&\textbf{Nicaragua}&\textbf{Panama}&\textbf{Paraguay}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Peru}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{peru-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Puerto-Rico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{puerto-rico-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uruguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uruguay-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Venezuela}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{venezuela-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Peru}&\textbf{Puerto-Rico}&\textbf{Uruguay}&\textbf{Venezuela}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/USA}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&&&\\% -% \textbf{USA}&&&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Hispanophone countries and regions]{Hispanophone countries and regions (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spanish_Language})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispano-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{spain-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{andorra-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{argentina-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{belize-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{bolivia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{chile-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{colombia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{costa-rica-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{cuba-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{dominican-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{ecuador-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{el-salvador-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{equa-guinea-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{gibraltar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{guatemala-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{honduras-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mexico-f.jpg}% -% \ixgrfl{nicaragua-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{panama-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{paraguay-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{peru-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{puerto-rico-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uruguay-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{venezuela-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{usa-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espagne}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Andorre}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{andorra-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argentine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{argentina-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Belize}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{belize-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Espagne}&\textbf{Andorre}&\textbf{Argentine}&\textbf{Belize}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bolivie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{bolivia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chili}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{chile-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colombie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{colombia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Costa-Rica}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{costa-rica-f.jpg}}}\\% -% \textbf{Bolivie}&\textbf{Chili}&\textbf{Colombie}&\textbf{Costa-Rica}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cuba}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{cuba-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_Dominicaine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{dominican-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Équateur_(pays)}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ecuador-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Salvador}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{el-salvador-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Cuba}&\textbf{République~Dominicaine}&\textbf{Équateur}&{Salvador}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guinée_Équatoriale}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{equa-guinea-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gibraltar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{gibraltar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Guatemala}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{guatemala-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Honduras}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{honduras-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Guinée~Équatoriale}&\textbf{Gibraltar}&\textbf{Guatemala}&\textbf{Honduras}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Méxique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mexico-f.jpg}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nicaragua}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{nicaragua-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Panama}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{panama-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Paraguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{paraguay-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Méxique}&\textbf{Nicaragua}&\textbf{Panama}&\textbf{Paraguay}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pérou}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{peru-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Porto-Rico}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{puerto-rico-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uruguay}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uruguay-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vénézuela}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{venezuela-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Pérou}&\textbf{Porto-Rico}&\textbf{Uruguay}&\textbf{Vénézuela}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/États-Unis}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}&&&\\% -% \textbf{États-Unis}&&&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays et régions hispanophones]{Pays et régions hispanophones (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/espagnol})\hfill\null}\label{f+hispano-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{spain-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Spain}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{spanish}'' (\emph{español, castellano}) language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialy by \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. -% Note that the ``\lopt{spanish}'' language is in -% fact ``\lopt{castillan}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). But note also that other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque'' -% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``\lopt{catalan}'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``\lopt{galician}'' -% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}); see figure~\vref{f+esp}. Note that ``\lopt{spanish2}'' is a version of ``\lopt{spanish}'' -% with shorter titles (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). -% And ``\lopt{spanish3}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for -% the \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are -% differents. -% And ``\lopt{spanish4}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{spanish}'' where \com{ptctitle} is shorter for -% articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{spain-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espagne}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{spain-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) (\emph{español, castellano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} -% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialement par \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}. -% Notez que le <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). -% Mais notez aussi que d'autres langues sont parlées en Espagne: <<~\lopt{basque}~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> -% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}), voir la -% figure~\vref{f+esp}. -% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> avec des titres plus courts -% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}). -% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le -% projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont différents. -% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> où \com{ptctitle} est plus court -% pour les articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}). -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanish> -\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[2008/04/03]% -%% Spanish titles from spanish.dtx (babel) by Bezos, Javier & CervanTeX -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}\fi -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -%</spanish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file in -% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, -% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> (espagnol deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}, -% mais abrégés pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanish2> -\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2008/04/03]% -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}% -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}% -\def\mtctitle{Contenido}% -\def\mlftitle{Figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{Tablas}% -\def\stctitle{Contenido}% -\def\slftitle{Figuras}% -\def\slttitle{Tablas}% -%</spanish2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\localspanish} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish3}'' language are taken from the \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} file -% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) -% of the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (espagnol troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier -% \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) du projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanish3> -\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]% -%% Spanish titles from omega-spanish.ldf of the Antomega project. -\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% -\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% -\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% -\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% -\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% -\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% -\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}% -\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}% -\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}% -%</spanish3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Spanish4'' language: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish4}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) -% from the \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} package~\cite{spanish4}. -% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~spanish4~>>: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} -% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}) -% du paquetage \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}~\cite{spanish4}. -% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*spanish4> -\ProvidesFile{spanish4.mld}[2006/01/19]% -%% Spanish titles (from spanish.dtx in CervanTeX) Bezos, Javier -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi -\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -\def\stctitle{\'Indice}% -\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}% -\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}% -%</spanish4> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Swahili'' language: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~swahili~>>: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}l@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{swahili-m.png}\ixgrf{swahili-m.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{swahili.pdf}\ixgrf{swahili.pdf}% -% \or\relax -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{fswahili.pdf}\ixgrf{fswahili.pdf}% -% \fi\\ -% \multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The areas where Swahili is spoken as a native language (dark green), official or national language (medium green), -% and trade language (light green). As a trade language, it extends some distance further to the northwest. -% \or\relax -% Les zones où le swahili est parlé comme langue native (vert foncé), comme langue officielle ou nationale (vert -% moyen) et comme langue commerciale (vert clair). Comme langue commerciale, il s'étend un peu plus loin vers le nord-ouest. -% \fi -% \end{minipage}} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Swahili language areas]{Swahili language areas (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swahili_language} and \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili})}\label{f+swahili} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue swahilie]{Régions de la langue swahilie (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swahili_language} et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})}\label{f+swahili} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% ^^A (SWA -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kenya-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{malawi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zambia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zanzibar-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comoros}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Democratic_Republic_of_the_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Comoros}&\textbf{Rep.~of~the~Congo}&\textbf{Dem.~Rep.~of~the~Congo}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kenya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kenya-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malawi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malawi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Kenya}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Malawi}&\textbf{Mozambique}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzania}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Oman}&\textbf{Rwanda}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zambia}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zambia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zanzibar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zanzibar-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Uganda}&\textbf{Zambia}&\textbf{Zanzibar}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Swahili-speaking countries]{Swahili-speaking countries (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/swahili_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+swa-c} -% \end{figure} -% \or\relax -% \begin{figure}[!tp] -% \centering -% \ixgrfl{burundi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{comoros-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{congo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rdcongo-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{kenya-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{madagascar-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{malawi-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{mozambique-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{oman-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{rwanda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{somalia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{tanzania-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{uganda-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zambia-f.png}% -% \ixgrfl{zanzibar-f.png}% -% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}cccc@{}} -% \toprule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Burundi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{burundi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Comores}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{comoros-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{congo-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/République_Démocrarique_du_Congo}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rdcongo-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Burundi}&\textbf{Comores}&\textbf{Rép.~du~Congo}&\textbf{Rép.~dém.~du~Congo}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kenya}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{kenya-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Madagascar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{madagascar-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Malawi}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{malawi-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mozambique}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{mozambique-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Kenya}&\textbf{Madagascar}&\textbf{Malawi}&\textbf{Mozambique}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oman}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{oman-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rwanda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{rwanda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Somalie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{somalia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tanzanie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{tanzania-f.png}}}\\% -% \textbf{Oman}&\textbf{Rwanda}&\textbf{Somalia}&\textbf{Tanzania}\\ -% \midrule -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouganda}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uganda-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zambie}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zambia-f.png}}}&% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zanzibar}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{zanzibar-f.png}}}&\\% -% \textbf{Ouganda}&\textbf{Zambie}&\textbf{Zanzibar}&\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabular}} -% \caption[Pays où est parlé le Swahili]{Pays où est parlé le Swahili (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/swahili_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+swa-c} -% \end{figure} -% \fi -% ^^A SWA) -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{swahili}'' language (\emph{kiswahili}) are taken from the \emph{obsolete} -% \xfile{swahili.tex} file\,\footnote{\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}}, -% with adaptations and corrections given on the -% \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group (messages 57662, 57713, and 57717) by \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} -% and \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swahili}~>> (\emph{kiswahili}) sont tirés -% du fichier \emph{obsolète} \xfile{swahili.tex}\,\footnote{\url{http://www.dante.de/tex-archive/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}\,.}, -% avec des adaptations et des corrections données sur le groupe de discussion \texttt{comp.text.tex} (messages -% 57662, 57713 et 57717) par \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} et \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}. -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% Swahili is the main Bantu language and is spoken in East Africa: Tanzania, Kenya, -% Uganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar and in the area of the Great Lakes in the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, -% formerly Zaire) and in the Republic of Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), in -% the north of Mozambique and the south of Somalia\,\footnote{\RaggedRight See -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}, -% \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html}, and -% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}\,.}. See~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} and figure~\vref{f+swahili}. -% \or\relax -% Le swahili (ou «~souaéli~») est la plus importante langue bantoue et est parlée dans l'Afrique de l'Est: Tanzanie, Kenya, -% Ouganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar et la région des grands lacs dans la République Démocratique du Congo (Congo-Kinshasa, -% ex-Zaïre) et dans la République du Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), au -% nord du Mozambique et dans le sud de la Somalie\,\footnote{\RaggedRight Voir -% \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq}, \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html} et -% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}}. Voir~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} et la figure~\vref{f+swahili}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*swahili> -\ProvidesFile{swahili.mld}[2007/07/02]% -%% Swahili titles from swahili.tex in articles: 57662,57713,57717 -%% in comp.text.tex by Giancarlo Bassi <g.bassi@iperbole.bologna.it> -%% & Enrico Gregorio <gregorio@math.unipd.it> -\def\ptctitle{Yaliyomo}% -\def\plftitle{Picha zilizomo}% -\def\plttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% -\def\mtctitle{Yaliyomo}% -\def\mlftitle{Picha zilizomo}% -\def\mlttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% -\def\stctitle{Yaliyomo}% -\def\slftitle{Picha zilizomo}% -\def\slttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}% -%</swahili> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Swedish'' language: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.450276243\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.549723757\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.42\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.58\iwidth} -% \setlength{\cwidth}{.323437500\iwidth} -% \setlength{\dwidth}{.676562500\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}} -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{sweden.pdf}\ixgrf{sweden.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{svenska.png}\ixgrf{svenska.png}% -% \end{tabular}\\*[\baselineskip] -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\cwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{suede-fin.pdf}\ixgrf{suede-fin.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\dwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{suede-a.pdf}\ixgrf{suede-a.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Swedish language areas]{Swedish language areas -% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/sweden.html} --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, -% The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_language}, -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande-2demo_lng.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/EtatsNsouverains/aland.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+suede} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue suédoise]{Régions de la langue suédoise -% (\url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/sweden.html} --~\emph{Courtesy of the University of Texas Libraries, -% The University of Texas at Austin}~\cite{texasmaps}, \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_language}, -% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/finlande-2demo_lng.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/EtatsNsouverains/aland.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+suede} -% \fi -% \vspace*{-2\baselineskip} -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{sweden-f.png}\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swedish_Language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sweden-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland_Islands}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{swedish}'' (\emph{svenska}) language come from the \xfile{swedish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Sten}{Hellman} and \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, with a correction by \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. -% The swedish language is spoken in Sweden and in some regions of Finland like -% the \r{A}land Islands (see figure~\vref{f+suede}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{sweden-f.png}\ixgrfl{finland-f.png}\ixgrfl{aaland-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suédois}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{sweden-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Finlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{finland-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Åland}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{aaland-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish}~>> (suédois, \emph{svenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{swedish.dtx} -% (de \name{Sten}{Hellman} et \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, avec une correction de \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}. -% ^^A -% La langue suédoise est parlée en Suède et dans certaines régions de Finlande, -% dont les Îles \r{A}land (voir la figure~\vref{f+suede}). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{7} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*swedish> -\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[2006/01/13]% -%% Swedish titles from swedish.dtx (babel). Hellman, Sten & Östhols, Erik -\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\plftitle{Figurer}% -\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% -\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\slftitle{Figurer}% -\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% -%</swedish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Swedish2'' language: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} -% The titles for the ``\lopt{swedish2}'' language (variant for swedish) are taken -% from the \xfile{rapport.doc} file (by \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) in the \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} package~\cite{slatex}. -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~swedish2~>>: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld} -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish2}~>> (suédois, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{rapport.doc} -% (de \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) -% dans le paquetage \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*swedish2> -\ProvidesFile{swedish2.mld}[2006/04/04]% -%% Swedish2 titles from rapport.doc (slatex). Mattisson, Sven (sven@tde.lu.se) -\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\plftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% -\def\plttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% -\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\mlftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% -\def\mlttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% -\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}% -\def\slftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}% -\def\slttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}% -%</swedish2> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Thai'' language: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!ht] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{thai.pdf}\ixgrf{thai.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Thai language areas]{Thai language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/fam_tai-kadai.htm} -% and \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/thailande.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+thai} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue thaïe]{Régions de la langue thaïe -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/monde/fam_tai-kadai.htm} -% et \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/thailande.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+thai} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrf{thai.png}\ixgrfl{thailand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thai_alphabet}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{thai.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thailand}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{thailand-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language come from the \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} file -% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) -% and use fonts -% of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, -% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) provides the same titles in its \xfile{thai.ldf} file. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrf{thai.png}\ixgrfl{thailand-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alphabet_thaï}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=12.5mm]{thai.png}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thaïlande}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{thailand-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> (thaï) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} -% (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) -% et utilisent des fontes du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}. -% Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex}% (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, -% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) fournit les mêmes titres dans son -% fichier \xfile{thai.ldf}. Voir aussi~\cite{thaistd}. -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo} -% \normalmarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load -% \xfile{thai.mlo}. See also~\cite{thaistd}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, donc -% nous chargeons \xfile{thai.mlo}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*thai> -\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{thai}% -%% From thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system -%% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -%</thai> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Turkish'' language: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld} -% \fi -% \newcommand{\TUL}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% {\large -% ^^A \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}c@{}} -% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}} -% \toprule -% a&b&c&\TUL{ç}&d&e&f&g&\TUL{\u{g}}&h&\TUL{\i}&\TUL{i}&j&k&l&m&n&o&\TUL{ö}&p&r&s&\TUL{\c{s}}&t&u&\TUL{ü}&v&y&z\\ -% \midrule -% A&B&C&\TUL{Ç}&D&E&F&G&\TUL{\u{G}}&H&\TUL{I}&\TUL{\.I}&J&K&L&M&N&O&\TUL{Ö}&P&R&S&\TUL{\c{S}}&T&U&\TUL{Ü}&V&Y&Z\\ -% \bottomrule -% \end{tabularx}} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption{The turkish alphabet}\label{f+turc-alpha} -% \or\relax -% \caption{L'alphabet turc}\label{f+turc-alpha} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{turquie.pdf}\ixgrf{turquie.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Turkey]{Turkey (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/turquie_1general.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+turc} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Turquie]{Turquie (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/turquie_1general.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+turc} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% \vspace*{2\baselineskip} -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{turkish.png}\ixgrf{turkish.png}\\ -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize\columnseprule=.4pt -% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns\RaggedRight -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \bgroup -% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt -% \partopsep=0pt -% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em -% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt -% \begin{wdesc}{mediumMblueM} -% \item[black] Official language: -% Turkey, Cyprus, Republic of Macedonia (at municipal -% level), Kosovo (a former part of Serbia administered by United -% Nations as of 2006 and who proclamed independance on February~17, 2008; see figure~\vref{f+kosovo}). -% \item[dark blue] More than 1,000,000 speakers: -% Germany. -% \item[blue] Between 500,000 -- 1,000,000 speakers: -% Bulgaria. -% \item[medium blue] Between 100,000 -- 500,000 speakers: -% France, Netherlands, Belgium, Austria, United States, -% Uzbekistan. -% \item[sky blue] Between 25,000 -- 100,000 speakers: -% Greece, United Kingdom, Australia, Canada, Russia, -% Sweden, Denmark, Switzerland, Romania, Azerbaijan. -% \item[white] Less than 25,000 speakers / none. -% \end{wdesc} -% \egroup -% \or\relax -% \begin{wdesc}{bleuMmoyenM} -% \item[noir] Langue officielle: -% Turquie, Chypre, République de Macédoine (au niveau municipal), -% Kosovo (une ancienne partie de la Serbie administrée par les -% Nations Unies depuis 2006 et qui a proclamé son indépendance le 17~février~2008; voir la figure~\vref{f+kosovo}). -% \item[bleu foncé] Plus de 1\,000\,000 locuteurs: -% Allemagne. -% \item[bleu] Entre 500\,000 et 1\,000\,000 locuteurs: -% Bulgarie. -% \item[bleu moyen] Entre 100\,000 et 500\,000 locuteurs: -% France, Pays-Bas, Belgique, Autriche, États-Unis, Ouzbékistan. -% \item[bleu ciel] Entre 25\,000 et 100\,000 locuteurs: -% Grèce, Royaume Uni, Australie, Canada, Russie, Suède, -% Danemark, Suisse, Roumanie, Azerbaïdjan. -% \item[blanc] Moins de 25\,000 locuteurs / aucun. -% \end{wdesc} -% \fi -% \end{multicols} -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Turkish language in the world]{Turkish language in the world -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+turkish} -% \or\relax -% \caption[La langue turque dans le monde]{La langue turque dans le monde -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkish_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+turkish} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The -% The\ixgrfl{turkey-f.png}\ixgrfl{ncyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turkey}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{turkey-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Northern_Cyprus}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ncyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% turkish language (\emph{türkçe}) is spoken mainly in Turkey and in Cyprus. -% The titles for the ``\lopt{turkish}'' language are taken from the \xfile{turkish.dtx} file -% (by \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{turkey-f.png}\ixgrfl{ncyprus-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[c]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Turquie}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{turkey-f.png}}}\\% -% \href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chypre_du_Nord}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ncyprus-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue turque (\emph{türkçe}) est parlée principalement en Turquie et à~Chypre. -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{turkish}~>> (turc) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{turkish.dtx} -% (de \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \name{Turgut}{Uyar}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*turkish> -\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[2007/12/18]% -%% Turkish titles from turkish.dtx (babel). Burc, Mustafa -\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% -\def\plftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% -\def\plttitle{Tablo Listesi}% -\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% -\def\mlftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% -\def\mlttitle{Tablo Listesi}% -\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}% -\def\slftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}% -\def\slttitle{Tablo Listesi}% -%</turkish> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{8} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \lneed{7} -% \section{``Uighur'' language: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~uighur~>>: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!thb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=.5\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{uighur.pdf}\ixgrf{uighur.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Uighur language areas]{Uighur language areas -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=69&menu=004} in~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+uighur} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue ouïghoure]{Régions de la langue ouïghoure -% (\url{http://www.lmp.ucla.edu/Profile.aspx?LangID=69&menu=004} dans~\cite{LMP})\hfill\null}\label{f+uighur} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.308755760\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.691244240\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xinjiangc.png}\ixgrf{xinjiangc.png}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{xinjiang.png}\ixgrf{xinjiang.png}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region]{Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/?title=Xinjiang} -% and \url{http://www.tourroundchina.com/map/xinjiang.htm}; see also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-ouigoure-Xinjiang.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+xinjiang} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Région autonome du Xinjiang ouïghour]{Région autonome du Xinjiang ouïghour -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/?title=Xinjiang} -% et \url{http://www.tourroundchina.com/map/xinjiang.htm}; voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/chine-region-auto-ouigoure-Xinjiang.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+xinjiang} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \lneed{3} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{20mm} -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{uighur}'' and ``\lopt{bicig}'' languages\ixgrfl{uighur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uyghur_people}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uighur-f.png}}}}} -% are synonyms, so we just load the -% \xfile{bicig.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): -% \or\relax -% Les langues\ixgrfl{uighur-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ouïghour}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uighur-f.png}}}}} -% <<~\lopt{uighur}~>> (ouïghour) et <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{bicig.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*uighur> -\ProvidesFile{uighur.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}% -%</uighur> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Uighur2'' language: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~uighur2~>>: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{uighur2}'' and ``\lopt{bicig2}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the -% \xfile{bicig2.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): -% \or\relax -% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur2}~>> (ouïghour deuxième variante) -% et <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{bicig2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*uighur2> -\ProvidesFile{uighur2.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig2}% -%</uighur2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Uighur3'' language: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~uighur3~>>: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{uighur3}'' and ``\lopt{bicig3}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the -% \xfile{bicig3.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): -% \or\relax -% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur3}~>> (ouïghour troisième variante) -% et <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier -% \xfile{bicig3.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*uighur3> -\ProvidesFile{uighur3.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig3}% -%</uighur3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The \ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UK_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{UKenglish}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' (``UK'' is for ``United Kingdom''), so we just -% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{uk-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UK_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{uk-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{UKenglish}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> («~UK~» signifie \emph{United Kingdom}, -% le «~Royaume Uni~»), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} -% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3}\normalmarginpar -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*UKenglish> -\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</UKenglish> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{ukraineb}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{ukrainian}'', so we just load \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% See section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{ukraineb}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ukraineb> -\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{ukrainian}% -%</ukraineb> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Ukrainian'' language: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~ukrainian~>>: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ukraine.jpg}\ixgrf{ukraine.jpg}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Languages in Ukraine]{Languages in Ukraine -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ukraine-1demo.htm} in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukraine} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Langues en Ukraine]{Langues en Ukraine -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/ukraine-1demo.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukraine} -% \fi -% ^^A \end{figure} -% -% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount} -% -% ^^A \begin{figure}[!htb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{ukrainep.pdf}\ixgrf{ukrainep.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Ukraine]{Ukraine -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:WikiProject_Ukraine/Subdivisions})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukrainep} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Ukraine]{Ukraine -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:WikiProject_Ukraine/Subdivisions})\hfill\null}\label{f+ukrainep} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \setlength{\wkdim}{6mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \lneed{2} -% \begin{macro}{\cyr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% The titles\ixgrf{ukra.png}\ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukrainian_language}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukra.png}}\\% -% \href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% for the ``\lopt{ukrainian}'' language (\emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) come from the \xfile{ukraineb.dtx} file -% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Cyrillic fonts are required. -% Another language name is \lopt{ukraineb} (see section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% Les titres\ixgrf{ukra.png}\ixgrfl{ukraine-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}c@{}}\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukrainien}% -% {\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukra.png}}\\% -% \href{http://ft.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ukraine}{\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{ukraine-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>> (ukrainien, \emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ukrainian.dtx} -% (de \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et \name{Werner}{Lemberg}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises. -% Un autre nom pour cette langue est \lopt{ukraineb} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ukrainian> -\ProvidesFile{ukrainian.mld}[2006/01/33]% -%% Ukrainian titles from ukraineb.dtx (babel). Shvaika, Andrij & Lapko, Olga -%% Needs cyrillic fonts -\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% -\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% -\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% -\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}% -\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk - \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}% -%</ukrainian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{12} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Uppersorbian'' language: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} -% The titles\ixgrfl{us-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Upper_Sorbian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{us-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, -% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german -% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes -% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during -% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) -% are taken from the \xfile{usorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. -% A shorter language name is \lopt{usorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). -% \or\relax -% \begin{SMOOTH} -% \section{Langue <<~uppersorbian~>>: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld} -% Les titres\ixgrfl{us-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Upper_Sorbian_language}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{us-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, -% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{länder} -% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves -% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale -% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{usorbian.dtx} -% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}. -% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{usorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}). -% \end{SMOOTH} -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*uppersorbian> -\ProvidesFile{uppersorbian.mld}[2006/02/38]% -%% Upper sorbian titles from usorbian.dtx (babel). Needs cyrillic fonts. Werner, Eduard -\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}% -\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}% -\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -\def\stctitle{Wobsah}% -\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}% -\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}% -%</uppersorbian> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \reversemarginpar -% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``USenglish'' language: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% ``\lopt{USenglish}'' language (``US'' is for ``United States (of America))'' is just like -% ``\loptd{english}''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the -% languages themselves have some differences, like the hyphenation rules, -% see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, so we just -% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \or\relax -% La\ixgrfl{usa-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}\strut\\\strut\\\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{usa-f.png}}}\end{tabular}}} -% langue <<~\lopt{USenglish}~>> (américain, «~US~» signifiant «~\emph{United States (of America)}~») est -% comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait être vrai pour les titres des mini-tables; les langues elles-mêmes -% ont quelques différences, dont les règles de coupure des mots, -% voir~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}): -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*USenglish> -\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}% -%</USenglish> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{usorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'', so we just have -% to load \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{usorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement -% \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. -% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}. -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*usorbian> -\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{uppersorbian}% -%</usorbian> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{figure}[!htbp] -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \setlength{\iwidth}{.5\iwidth} -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}c@{}c@{}c@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet2.pdf}\ixgrf{viet2.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\iwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet3.pdf}\ixgrf{viet3.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Vietnam]{Vietnam (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/vietnam_carte2-prov.htm} -% in~\cite{tlfq})\hfill\null}\label{f+vietnam} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Vietnam]{Vietnam (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/vietnam_carte2-prov.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq})}\label{f+vietnam} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \begin{figure}[!htbp] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet-w.pdf}\ixgrf{viet-w.pdf}\\ -% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The creation of the vietnamese alphabet is officially -% attributed to the Jesuit -% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes} in~1623. -% Born at Avignon on March~15th, 1591, died on -% November~5th, 1660, at Ispahan, he was a Jesuit priest who spent six years in Vietnam (1624~--~1630) for his -% catholic missions and systematized the -% \index{quoc ngu=\protect\leavevmode\protect\mbox{\quocngu}\hfil\null|hyperpage}% -% ``(Ch\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}) Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}\,'', -% or ``script for the natianal language'', the romanized script of the vietnamese language -% (see~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alexandre_de_Rhodes}). It is a latin alphabet with the addition of many -% diacritic marks to note the phonetic value of some letters and the tunes of the language -% (see~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qu%E1%BB%91c_ng%E1%BB%AF}). -% \par \vspace*{\baselineskip} -% See also~\url{http://rarfaxp.riken.go.jp/~dang/rhodes_motive.html} for a resume of the modern story and -% \url{http://www.cjvlang.com/Writing/writviet.html} for an introduction to this writing system. -% See also~\cite{ppvl} about the portuguese predecessors of \uname{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes}. -% \or\relax -% La création de l'alphabet vietnamien est officiellement attribuée au -% jésuite \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes} en~1623. -% Celui-ci, né en Avignon le 15~mars 1591, -% mort le 5~novembre 1660 à Ispahan, est un prêtre jésuite qui passa six années au Vietmam (1624~--~1630) et à~qui -% l'on doit la systématisation du -% \index{quoc ngu=\protect\leavevmode\protect\mbox{\quocngu}\hfil\null|hyperpage}% -% «~(Ch\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}) Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}~», -% ou «~écriture de langue nationale~», -% l'écriture romanisée du vietnamien -% (voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alexandre_de_Rhodes}). C'est un alphabet latin augmenté de nombreux -% signes diacritiques servant à~noter tant la valeur phonétique de certaines lettres que les tons de la langue -% (voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Qu%E1%BB%91c_ng%E1%BB%AF}). -% \par\vspace*{\baselineskip} -% Voir aussi~\url{http://rarfaxp.riken.go.jp/~dang/rhodes_motive.html} pour un résumé de l'histoire récente (en anglais) -% et \url{http://www.cjvlang.com/Writing/writviet.html} pour une introduction à~ce système d'écriture (en anglais aussi). -% Voir aussi~\cite{ppvl} à~propos des prédécesseurs portugais d'\uname{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes}. -% \fi -% \end{minipage} -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[The vietnamese language in the world]{The vietnamese language in the world -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnamese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet-w} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Le vietnamien dans le monde]{Le vietnamien dans le monde -% (\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnamese_language})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet-w} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language (\emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) are taken from the \pack{vietnam} package~\cite{vietnam} -% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). -% Vietnamese fonts are required; see~\cite{han2003,han2008}. The vietnamese language is spoken in Vietnam -% and in the vietnamese diaspora (see figures~\vrefrange{f+vietnam}{f+viet4}). -% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{vietnam-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vietnam}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{vietnam-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien, \emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) sont -% tirés du paquetage \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}). -% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises; voir~\cite{han2003,han2008}. Le vietnamien est parlé au Vietnam -% et dans la diaspora vietnamienne (voir les figures~\vrefrange{f+vietnam}{f+viet4}). -% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}. -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \begin{figure}[!p] -% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{viet4.pdf}\ixgrf{viet4.pdf} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Provinces of Vietnam]{Provinces of Vietnam -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Administration_du_Viêt_Nam})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet4} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Provinces du Viêtnam]{Provinces du Viêtnam -% (\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Administration_du_Viêt_Nam})\hfill\null}\label{f+viet4} -% \fi -% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*vietnam> -\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]% Vietnamese titles -\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% -\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% -\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% -\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% -\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% -\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% -\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}% -\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}% -\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}% -%</vietnam> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The ``\lopt{vietnamese}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language. -% So we just load \xfile{vietnam.mld}. -% Vietnamese fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. -% \or\relax -% La langue <<~\lopt{vietnamese}~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien). Donc nous -% chargeons simplement \xfile{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi -% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}. -% \fi -% \lneed{4} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*vietnamese> -\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}% -%</vietnamese> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Welsh'' language: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld} -% \fi -% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth} -% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm} -% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.346020761\iwidth} -% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.653979239\iwidth} -% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth} -% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth} -% \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}c@{}r@{}} -% \includegraphics[width=\awidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galles1.pdf}\ixgrf{galles1.pdf}% -% &\hspace*{.5cm}&% -% \includegraphics[width=\bwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{galles2.pdf}\ixgrf{galles2.pdf}% -% \end{tabular} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Wales]{Wales (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysgallescarte.htm} in~\cite{tlfq} -% and \url{http://homepage.ntlworld.com/geogdata/ngw/map.htm} -% in the \emph{National Gazetter of Wales})\hfill\null}\label{f+wales} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Pays de Galles]{Pays de Galles (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/europe/paysgallescarte.htm} -% dans~\cite{tlfq} et \url{http://homepage.ntlworld.com/geogdata/ngw/map.htm} -% dans la \emph{National Gazetter of Wales})\hfill\null}\label{f+wales} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm} -% \reversemarginpar -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles\ixgrfl{wales-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wales}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wales-f.png}}}}} -% for the ``\lopt{welsh}'' language (\emph{cymraeg}) come from the \xfile{welsh.dtx} file -% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: -% \or\relax -% Les titres\ixgrfl{wales-f.png}\marginpar{\null\hfill% -% \raisebox{2\wkdim}[3\wkdim][-\wkdim]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pays_de_Galles}% -% {\flagbox{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=25mm]{wales-f.png}}}}} -% pour la langue <<~\lopt{welsh}~>> (gallois, \emph{cymraeg}) proviennent du fichier \xfile{welsh.dtx} -% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) -% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}: -% \fi -% -% \normalmarginpar -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*welsh> -\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]% -%% Welsh titles from welsh.dtx (babel), by Braams, Johannes~L. -\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}% -\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% -\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% -\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}% -\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% -\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% -\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}% -\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}% -\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}% -%</welsh> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \lneed{7} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Xalx'' language: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~xalx~>>: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mnr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% Xalx (Khalkha) is the name of the Mongolian nationality residing in Mongolia proper. -% See figure~\vref{f+khalkha}. -% Their dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with -% Cyrillic letters. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% Xalx (Khalkha) est le nom de la nationalité Mongole qui -% vit en Mongolie proprement dite. Voir la figure~\vref{f+khalkha}. -% Son dialecte forme la base du Mongol écrit en lettres cyrilliques. -% Voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}. -% \fi -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*xalx> -\ProvidesFile{xalx.mld}[2005/11/16]% -%% Mongol (xalx) titles -\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}% -\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -%</xalx> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{figure}[!tb] -% \centering -% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,keepaspectratio,clip]{khalkha.pdf}\ixgrf{khalkha.pdf}% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \caption[Khalkha language areas]{Khalkha language areas -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/asie/Mongolie.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+khalkha} -% \or\relax -% \caption[Régions de la langue khalkha]{Régions de la langue khalkha -% (\url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/asie/Mongolie.htm})\hfill\null}\label{f+khalkha} -% \fi -% \end{figure} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Xalx2'' language: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~xalx2~>>: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\mnr} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% This is a variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx2}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% C'est une variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*xalx2> -\ProvidesFile{xalx2.mld}[2006/03/31]% -%% Mongol (xalx2) titles -\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}% -\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}% -\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}% -%</xalx2> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \lneed{5} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \section{``Xalx3'' language: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} -% \or\relax -% \section{Langue <<~xalx3~>>: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld} -% \fi -% \begin{macro}{\xalx} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx3}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% This is an other variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). -% \or\relax -% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx3}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} -% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}). -% C'est une autre variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}). -% \fi -% -% \lneed{3} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*xalx3> -\ProvidesFile{xalx3.mld}[2006/03/31]% -%% Mongol (xalx3) titles -\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% -\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% -\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}% -\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}% -\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}% -%</xalx3> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \cleardoublepage -% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin} -% \let\NC\relax -% -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \part{Complements}\label{p+complements} -% \or\relax -% \part{Compléments}\label{p+complements} -% \fi -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns} -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}} -% \parttoc -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty} -% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty} -% -% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax -% ^^A \backrefenglish -% ^^A \or\relax -% ^^A \backreffrench -% ^^A \fi -% -% \nocite* -% \def\noopsort#1{\relax} -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \FTRfalse -% \bibliographystyle{en-mtc} -% \begin{raggedright} -% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS -% \let\name\oname -% \let\iname\oiname -% \let\inameA\oinameA -% \let\inameB\oinameB -% \let\xname\oxname -% \let\vname\ovname -% \bibliography{minitoc} -% -% \end{raggedright} -% \or\relax -% \FTRtrue -% \bibliographystyle{fr-mtc} -% \begin{raggedright} -% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS -% \let\name\oname -% \let\iname\oiname -% \let\inameA\oinameA -% \let\inameB\oinameB -% \let\xname\oxname -% \let\vname\ovname -% \bibliography{minitoc-fr} -% -% \end{raggedright} -% \fi -% \adjustmtc -% ^^A NEW HISTORY BEGIN -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter*{Changes history\markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}}\label{c+history} -% \markboth{Changes history}{Changes history} -% \mtcaddchapter[Changes history] -% \or\relax -% \chapter*{Historique des modifications\markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}}\label{c+history} -% \markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications} -% \mtcaddchapter[Historique des modifications] -% \fi -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \bgroup -% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} -% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} -% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} -% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} -% \begin{RaggedRight} -% % -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{00} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1990/10/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1991/11/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Revised to reuse \com{chapter}, \com{section}, -% \com{subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically, -% assorted other cleanup (by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{01} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor, -% for each chapter (a deadly sin!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). -% \item Added \com{chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc. -% (\emph{If you forgot putting} \com{chapterend} at the end -% of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter -% will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}). -% \item Replaced the \env{minipage} environment by a \env{verse} -% environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages. -% \item All the layout of the minitoc is in the -% command, so if someboby wants -% to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it). -% \item You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter -% by preceding it with \ucom{minitocno}. (\ucom{minitocyes} -% is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after} -% the \com{chapter*} pseudo-chapters). -% \item Problems: you \emph{must} have \com{chapterend} to terminate each -% chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint? -% \item The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with -% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similar to \dcnt{tocdepth} for the table of contents). -% \item At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to -% get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the -% \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may -% contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them, -% the third should be ok). -% \item Works with \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies. -% Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in -% one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?). -% \item Some mods added to work with \pack{xr} (external -% references). \upack{xr} version~5 is much more tolerant. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{02} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added compatibility with \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (the package -% \pack{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package). -% \emph{Beware} to options modifying \com{@caption}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version 3 not released (buggy). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{04} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \ucom{if@realch} to avoid contents lines from pseudo-chapters to go into the toc. -% \item The package \pack{mtcoff} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document -% with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the \upack{minitoc} package by -% \pack{mtcoff}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{05} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{06} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \com{caption} stuff -% (filters are much better) added compatibility with \pack{toch} -% (\pack{toch} makes a table of chapters; -% if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}; in fact, it is the ancestor of -% the \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} package). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{07} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item (\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \pack{xr} (the version~5, by -% \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from the \suffix{.toc} file. -% \com{chapterend} and \ucom{minitocno} are suppressed, \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} -% and \com{faketableofcontents} added. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{08} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Spacing adjustements. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{09} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment; search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows -% only 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{10} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \xfile{latex.tex} -% (\com{@inputcheck} or \com{reset@font} not defined). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{11} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \com{mtcSSfont} for subsection entries, -% \com{mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \com{mtcPfont} for paragraph entries, -% \com{mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{12} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/12/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Use \com{kern} in place of \com{vspace*}, and added penalties (\com{nopagebreak}) -% to avoid a page break just before last \com{mtc@rule}. -% \item Also added a \env{samepage} environnement. -% \item Removed old commented out lines from previous versions. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{13} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/12/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{minilof} and \com{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \com{SHORTEXT}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{14} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/01/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \com{raggedright} -% setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings. -% \item Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). -% \com{mtifont} is changed from \ucom{normalsize\bs bf} to \ucom{large\bs bf}. -% \item Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks): -% \ucom{@newread} becomes \com{newread}, not outer version of \com{newread}; -% \com{empty} replaced by \com{relax} in the spare definition of \com{reset@font}. -% \item Removed the setting of \com{clubpenalty} and \com{widowpenalty} -% to \texttt{10\,000} (done by \com{samepage}), and \com{noindent}. -% \item Simplified processing of optional argument in \com{minitoc}, -% \com{minilof} and \com{minilot}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{15} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/01/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, \com{secttoc}, -% \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, with some commands and parameters parallel to those -% for mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1994/01/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, -% \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, -% with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{16} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Bug fixes (typos). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{17} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item `\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional argument of \com{minitoc}, -% \com{dominitoc}, and siblings. -% \item Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (who found the problem) and -% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{18} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/06/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Make \upack{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe. -% \item Introduce the language files as options. Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens} -% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of the \pack{babel} package -% (by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{19} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/08/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1. \com{firstchapteris} etc. -% commands added. -% \item \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule} etc. commands added. -% \item Corrected a bug in \com{c@mti}. -% \item Corrected \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). -% \item Corrected appendix in articles. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{20} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings. -% \item Added the \com{mtcpagenumbers} and \com{nomtcpagenumbers} commands -% (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers. -% \item Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles. -% \item Corrected vertical spacing. -% \item Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{21} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/09/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc} and \xfile{minitoc.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{22} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/10/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{23} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/11/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a missing line in \com{sectlof}. -% \item Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part -% (thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). -% \item Added the notion of ``absolute numbering'' for the mini-tables. -% \item Removed stuff for \com{firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete. -% \item Removed appendix stuff. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{24} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/12/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The \com{protect} commands have been removed from -% the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} and \suffix{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been -% corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to -% \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} who did the work. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{25} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{26} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/11/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Language specific files are now named \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} (replacing names of the form -% \texttt{mtc}\emph{language}\suffix{.sty}) because they are not packages and it makes shorter names. -% \item Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; renamed -% ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \pack{babel} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{27} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections for starred sectionning commands. -% \item \xfile{english.mld} loaded as default language. -% \item Added \xfile{vietnam.mld} and \xfile{arab.mld}. -% \item Renamed \pack{minitocoff} into \pack{mtcoff} to keep the name short. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{28} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1997/10/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages. -% \item Added autoconfiguration of extensions. -% \item Added the \opt{shortext} package option. -% \item Added \emph{coffee} stuff. -% \item Added \com{addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff). -% \item Fixed bug in parttocs. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1998/06/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} -% \end{quote} -% should probably be -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} -% \end{quote} -% (a backslash was missing after \com{let}). Thanks to him. -% \item Added the bahasa language. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1998/12/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{29} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1999/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/06/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the armenian language (from \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/07/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} package options (default: \optd{dotted}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/07/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{30} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1999/12/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages. -% \item Corrected a bug in \com{sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should be \texttt{slt}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{31} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/04/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package, thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, -% who has also simplified some code and fixed the infamous \com{chapter*} bug. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{32} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/08/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features: -% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK -% \com{afterparttoc},\ABK \com{afterpartlof},\ABK \com{afterpartlot},\ABK -% \com{thispageparttocstyle},\goodbreak \com{thispagepartlofstyle},\ABK and \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. -% \item Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. -% \item \com{nomtcrule} corrected. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{33} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added new adjustment commands: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection}, -% and \com{mtcaddpart}. -% These commands add stuff in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files for the -% \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} and \com{part*}) problem. From a suggestion by -% \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected a feature in \com{mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a blank optional argument. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{34} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added\imess{I0046} in the documentation a section for use with the \pack{tocbibind} package. -% \item Added \suffix{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so, \xfile{american.mld} just loads -% \xfile{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{35} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2001/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (i.e.,~empty, blank or -% inexistent) or ``non empty'' (i.e.,~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. -% \item Added the \optd{checkfiles}/\opt{nocheckfiles} package options. -% \item Replaced \ucom{The@chapter} by \com{The@mtc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/02/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld}, and -% \xfile{samin.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcselectlanguage}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed the \lopt{estonian} package option (missing). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/07/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the interlingua language. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{36} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected an interaction with \com{tableofcontents} which creates a \com{chapter*} or -% a \com{section*}, perturbing \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} counters (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \item Workaround for the \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*} problem. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed test for empty files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/03/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \lopt{bangla} language. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/03/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Reduced depth of \com{mtc@strutbox}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~\#37 dropped. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{38} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{pt} becomes \ucom{@pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \ucom{z@}. -% \item \ucom{hrule} and \ucom{vrule} replaced by \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). -% \item Added \com{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules. -% \item Added the frenchb language (synonym of french). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changed the test for empty titles. -% \item Added the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} package options. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are applied to -% \com{parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Package options \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} removed and -% replaced by the \opt{insection} package option (like \opt{flsectionb}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \lopt{frenchle} and \lopt{frenchpro} language options (synonyms of \lopt{french}). -% \item Corrected secttocs, at least. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/03/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected some vertical spacings and struts -% (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.). -% A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{39} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/04/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Modern font commands for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class. -% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} and \class{memoir} class. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/06/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{@fileswfalse} and \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} -% for the \pack{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the -% \opt{notoccite} package option (loads the \pack{notoccite} package). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added language options and \suffix{.mld} files for dialects: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), \lopt{acadian}, -% \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). -% \item Added comments in \suffix{.mld} files using special fonts. -% \item Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for -% appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/09/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{40} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the japanese and castillan languages. -% \item Removed the test on the presence of the \pack{multicol} package in -% \xfile{minitoc.tex}, because \pack{multicol} is a required package. -% \item Added a figure in \xfile{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations. -% \item Added some infos in \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \item Added\imess{I0042} a paragraph about a problem with the \pack{appendix} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} and \xfile{minitoc.bib}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \optd{hints} package option. This option is still experimental; your advice is welcome. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{41} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in documentation. -% \item Message added if some sectionning commands are not available. -% \item Replaced \ucom{typeout} commands in \upack{minitoc} -% by the \com{PackageInfo} or \com{PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful -% (\com{@gobble} if no line number). Hence, the package is less verbose -% (\com{PackageInfo} writes only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, not on the terminal). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands, -% with a much simpler syntax. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \AmS\ classes: \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are incompatible with -% \upack{minitoc}, \class{amsbook} needs precautions. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}. -% \item Added a hint for recommending the \opt{insection} package option. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about the presence of \com{dominitoc} and co. -% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. -% \item Improved documentation about hints. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about using short extensions with more that 99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added many new language files: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, -% \xfile{chinese2.mld}, \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, -% \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, -% \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsetrules}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, -% \com{nomlfrule}, \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, -% \com{nopltrule}, \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, -% \com{nosltrule}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, -% \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, and \xfile{russian2o.mld} -% as new language files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added tests on the \uenv{mtchideinmain*}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot} -% environments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~42 not released. -% \item Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed a minor typo. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Upgraded \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{43} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed a big bug in \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{mtcoff.sty} about \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed the \ucom{mtcset}\texttt{.{}.{}.}\ macros. -% \item Moved history to the end of package code. -% \item Added the \xfile{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). -% \item Completed the hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{minitoc} and \com{tableofcontents}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added comments about fonts. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcsetfeature}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule of each part level mini-table. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the arguments of \com{mtcsetfeature}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Removed \com{markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{spanish2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint for the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected the \env{stc@verse} environment. -% \item Added \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renamed \xfile{portuges.mld} as \xfile{portugues.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction in \com{mtcskip}. -% \item First version in \suffix{.dtx} format. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Removed \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, and stuff; unused. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected a typo in \com{@dosectlot}. -% \item Added \com{mtcfixglossary}. -% \item Print the documentation with ``\optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{many classes}}'' to have all marginal notes on left. -% Added the (extended to 54 floats) code of \pack{morefloats} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars -% and floats. -% \item Added \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the index correctly. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed. -% \item Added a hint about the \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables. -% \item Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands. -% \item The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. -% \item Added \com{mtcsetdepth}. -% \item The \optd{hints} option is the default and no more considered as experimental. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added an error message in \com{mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{portuges.mld}, which loads \xfile{portugues.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added three variants for the malayalam language: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, -% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added method for bilingual documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format correctly the index in french. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \xfile{french.mld}, and in the french documentation, -% to stick to the choices of the \pack{babel} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is now generated by \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as true/false keywords. -% \item Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as true/false keywords. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correctly set the \com{ifFTR} flag to have the names of months in the right language in the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Set the flag \com{mtcoffwarn@true} in \pack{mtcoff} if a command \ucom{mtcadd...} is found. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{castillian.mld}. -% \item Renamed \xfile{portugues.mld} as \xfile{portuguese.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld}, and \xfile{USenglish.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Replaced some \com{PackageWarning} commands by \com{PackageInfo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \suffix{.mld} file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improving the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Removing unused some flags \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. -% \item Added the \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, and \com{decrementstc} commands. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Improved some messages in \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Added a test on the version of the \pack{placeins} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a note about \com{FloatBarrier}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs. Updated \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \item Made two versions of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments, -% depending on the presence of the corresponding depth counter. -% \item The \class{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a comment about the position of the \ucom{do.{}.{}.} preparation commands. -% \item Corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{guarani.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}. -% \item Added an optional argument to \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, and \com{adjuststc}. -% \item Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{spanish3.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a test to forbid direct calls of \com{mtcloadmlo} by the user. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld}, and \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. -% \item Added a note about the \tool{rubber} tool. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the glossary. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the \texttt{*mk} scripts. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{44} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changes history (glossary) typeset in \texttt{RaggedRight}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld}, and \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item New method for history: embedded lists on 3~levels. -% \item Removed \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Cleaned the \texttt{*mk} scripts. -% \item Added the \optd{listfiles} package option. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected typos. -% \item Added the name of the \suffix{.maf} file in the message of the \optd{listfiles} package option. -% \item Improved the cleaning in the \texttt{*mk} scripts, using a~\suffix{.maf} file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Load the patch for the \class{memoir} class only if necessary; do not load it if \class{memoir} -% is dated after 2005/09/25. -% \item Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred -% sectionning commands. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \opt{nolistfiles} package option. -% \item Added a hint about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages -% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \item Fixed some marginal notes in the commented code. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. -% \item Use the \tool{xargs} Unix command in the \texttt{*mk} scripts to remove the auxiliary files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added a short intro to the ``Frequently Asked Questions'' chapter and to \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Begin adding the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the french \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Adding \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} in \xfile{minitoc.l}. -% \item Adding a note about the need of running \scrp{imk} before \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \item Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir}. -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class. -% \item Added \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, -% \com{slfSfont}, and \com{sltSfont} for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Fixed a bug about fonts for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables. -% \item Added \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld}, and -% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Added testing via internal \emph{quarks} commands in \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Updating the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Changed ``table'' into ``tableau'' in the french doc, where necessary. -% \item Updating the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \item Fixed typos in the bibliography. -% \item Updating the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Avoid some warnings ``Token not allowed'' from \texttt{pdftex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Reordering a long sequence of citations. -% \item Added \og{} {\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} in the mailing URLs. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed typos in the documentation. -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Correcting an hyperlink in the bibliography (for the \pack{xr} package). -% \item Attempting to avoid broken URLs, using \env{quote}, footnotes and \com{par}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Updating the bibliography. -% \item Corrections of layout (some headers, a table). -% \item In the warning message of the hint about a number of mini-tables greater than~99 (if short extensions), -% give the effective number. -% \item Reduce the width of some info, warning or error messages. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections of layout (some headers). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections of french quotes. -% \item Added some PDF options. -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Corrected an URL to the \AmS\ in the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Made some messages shorter (mainly by removing stars). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction of typos. -% \item Added some labels. -% \item Added a chapter with the (explained) messages. Not yet sorted. -% \item The documentation needs 4~\LaTeX\ runs. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Made some messages shorter. -% \item Corrections in the list of messages. -% \item Updating the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improving the placement of floats on pages of floats: to the top. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation (thanks to \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). -% \item Added \oexam{addsec.tex} -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected the flag \com{ifundottedmtc}. -% \item Correction to make \oexam{addsec.tex} work. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added ``\texttt{*}'' as keyword for the first argument of \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and -% \com{mtcsetrules} (asked by \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). -% \item Removed ``\com{MessageBreak}'' from the index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Corrected the bibliography entry about \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Used the \pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage} in the documentation to fix a float positionning problem. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Fixing a float positionning problem. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added the bahasam language. -% \item Added the albanian language. -% \item Added the hebrew2 language. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Updated the documentation for the albanian, bahasa, bahasam, and hebrew2 languages. -% \item Updated \xfile{french.mld} (removing abusive uppercase letters). -% \item Corrected the \xfile{italian.mld} file. Added the italian2 language. -% \item Added the australian and newzealand languages (english). -% \item Renamed the bahasa language as bahasai; bahasa is synonym of bahasai. -% \item Added the malay and meyalu languages, synonyms of bahasam. -% \item Added the indon and indonesian languages, synonyms of bahasai. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Updated the acknowledgements. -% \item Added references to the new bibliographic entries. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed an instability in page breaks in the documentation of \xfile{japanese3.mld}. -% \item Added comments in some \suffix{.mld} files. -% \item Added \xfile{magyar3.mld}. -% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction in \com{mtcaddsection}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction in \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcfixglossary}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Limitation of the initial depth of displayed bookmarks. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added some comments in point~34 of the FAQ (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about the initialization of fonts. -% \item Added \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Load some packages before \pack{hyperref}. -% \item Added \xfile{spanish4.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected the table about default titles. -% \item Corrected the keywords for \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \item Added \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated documentation for \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} -% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter -% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added a note in documentation of \xfile{serbian.mld} and \xfile{serbianc.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (for Omega). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Simplifications in the ``Messages'' chapter. -% \item Corrections in the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added the ``Postface'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the ``Postface'' chapter. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added package \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} for the ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' entry in the bibliography. -% Its author's first name needs a double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; je l'ai aussi -% utilisé pour composer d'autres mots vietnamiens. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} and \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{kannada.mld}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in \xfile{russianb.mld} and \xfile{spanish.mld}. -% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. -% \item Place \com{mtcfixglossary} before \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Updated the acknowlegments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Updated the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld}, and \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renamed languages \texttt{u8hangul} and \texttt{u8hanja} into \xmldo{hangul-u8} and \xmldo{hanja-u8}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint about repeated preparation commands. -% \item Moved up the declaration of some flags relative to the \optd{hints} option. -% \item Added \com{mtcprepare}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} to class~6. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Corrected the position of tables in the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Corrected \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% \item Added \xfile{polski.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Hints about the \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} class and the \pack{alphanum} package, -% incompatible with \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Use bibliographic styles with an~\texttt{URL} field, built with the help of \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar3.mld}. -% \item Added \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, with their -% \suffix{.mlo} files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Added \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, with their -% \suffix{.mlo} files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \pack{mtcmess} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The messages are now numbered. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Update the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added FAQ~37 about \suffix{.mld} files and \pack{babel}. -% \item Added \xfile{french1.mld} and \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \item Update the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{english1.mld} and \xfile{english2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{45} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppression of the PostScript versions of the documentation. -% \item Added \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld}, and \xfile{xalx3.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{swedish2.mld}. -% \item The \opt{insection} package option loads also the \pack{flafter} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added \uxgrf{lamed.eps} and \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} as images for the \emph{Lamed} logo (built from \uxfile{lamed.tex}). -% \item Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Use \pack{sectsty} to better format section titles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added \com{ifmtcsecondpart} to check if the document has exactly 2~parts. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item In the \opt{insection} package option, load the \pack{flafter} package \emph{before} the -% \pack{placeins} package. -% \item Added a figure about the float barriers (figure~\vref{f+barrier}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added notes in FAQ~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. -% \item Added comments about the \opt{insection} option. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Begin correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added notes in \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package. -% \item End correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment. -% \item Analogous corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added notes about the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments. -% \item Added \oexam{hide1.tex} and \oexam{hide2.tex}. -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hide.tex} to \oexam{hide1.tex}. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Use \com{MakeUpperCase} in \com{markboth} for page styles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Added a hint about the \pack{captcont} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld}, and \xfile{uighur3.mld} (as synonyms for the bicig variants). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Added description of \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} in the jargon. -% \item Added a comment about the \scrp{imk} script in \xfile{INSTALL} and the ``Installation'' chapter. -% \item Added an entry about ``package'' in the jargon. -% \item Added the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file. -% \item Added FAQ 44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Added the \oexam{gaps.tex} example file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item Spacing correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{46} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Comment about the \pack{thailatex} package. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Generate some example files with \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item Added chapter ``Example files''. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renamed chapter ``Example files'' as ``Examples of documents''. -% \item Use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} in some of the examples of documents. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the examples of documents. -% \item Added the \oexam{second.tex} example file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{amem.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} and \oexam{mem1.tex} example files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} and \oexam{scr.tex} example files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{subf.tex} example file. -% \item Corrections about the depth of minilofs, minilots and siblings. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{tsfc.tex} and \oexam{tbi.tex} example files. -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections of typos. -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \item Added the \oexam{2c.tex} and \exam{mtc-bo.tex} example files. -% \item Correction in \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction in minilots and minilofs (and siblings) about depth. -% \item Added the \oexam{hop.tex} and \oexam{cri.tex} example files. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} and \oexam{mu.tex} example files. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation. -% \item The not released versions are flagged by~\textbf{\textreferencemark} in place of~\ensuremath{\star}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The ``About this document'' section becomes a starred first chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \oexam{hir.tex} and \oexam{hia.tex} example files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Corrections in \oexam{add.tex} and \oexam{addsec.tex} for the index. -% \item Added the \scrp{xmk} script to typeset the examples into PDF documents. -% \item Updated the scripts to treat the examples. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Do not forget \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} in the list of files. -% \item In the scripts, the backup directory (\xfile{OLD}) is now \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. -% \item In the scripts, the repartition directories (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) are -% now \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{47} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} (from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system~\cite{arabi}). -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed \com{l@xsection}. -% \item Fixed some spacings in mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a \verb|\kernafter...| vertical kern between each minitable and its bottom rule. -% \item Added point~45 of the FAQ. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor correction in warning message \texttt{F0008}. -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}. -% \item Shortened the result of some example documents by using the \class{report} class in place of the -% \class{book} class (hence using one side printing). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{48} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fixed typos. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item No preamble in \oexam{add.bib}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the TOC formatting. -% \item Increasing \com{textwidth}. -% \item Correction of the preamble problem in \oexam{add.bib} and all generated files. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Remove comments about spurious lines in preamble of generated files. -% \item Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% \item Corrected the \com{name} macro (for the documentation). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \item Correction (conversion) in \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added error \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} if \xfile{english.mld} is not found to set the default titles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Modified the \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} to have family names of authors and editors in small caps and years in -% old style digits. Titles are in emphasis. The \xfile{frplain1.bst} style is also updated. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and -% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Update the bibliography. -% \item Renamed \oexam{add.bib} to \exam{mtc-add.bib}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{add.tex} to \exam{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{addsec.tex} to \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{2c.tex} to \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. -% \item The \optd{listfiles} package option is now active by default. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renamed \oexam{app-mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{apx.tex} to \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{bo.tex} to \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{ch0.tex} to \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{cri.tex} to \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{fo1.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{fo2.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{gaps.tex} to \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hia.tex} to \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hir.tex} to \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hide1.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hide2.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{hop.tex} to \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{livre.tex} to \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{mem1.tex} to \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{mini-art.tex} to \exam{mtc-art.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} to \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{mu.tex} to \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{scr.tex} to \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{second.tex} to \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{subf.tex} to \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{tbi.tex} to \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{tlc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. -% \item Renamed \oexam{tsfc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography (added the Pentaglot). -% \item Corrected the format of two tables about NFSS. -% \item Example documents in alphabetical order in their chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a figure about systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \exam{mtc-syn.tex} example document file. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{49} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Slightly modified the layout of the list of files (``Installation'' chapter). -% \item Simplifications in the scripts. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added point~46 in the FAQ and example file \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Corrections in the bibliography and the bibliographic styles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added ``\textbf{+}'' and ``\texttt{-}'' as synonyms for ``\texttt{on}'' and ``\texttt{off}'', respectively. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/10/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \item Fixed typos. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added a table of some encodings. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/10/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppressed the ``Summary'' entry in the summary, but added it in the Table of Contents. -% \item Improving some tables. -% \item Added the \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo} files. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \item Corrections in formatting a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. -% \item Combine four figures in one (with sub-figures). -% \item Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with -% \upack{minitoc}. -% \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Completed the list of the standard classes. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files. -% \item Added\imess{E0036} notes about the mandatory presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item The validation of the language options writes only informative messages in the -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and, if necessary, gives only one warning message. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{50} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Removed old examples of documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, -% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex}, and \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS structure for \upack{minitoc}. -% \item Added an item about the \index{TDS}TDS in the jargon. -% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the warning message \texttt{W0094} with the list of the missing minitoc languages files (\suffix{.mld} -% and \suffix{.mlo}). -% \item Corrections in the bibliography. -% \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter. -% \item Changed the names of the scratch directories in some scripts. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of -% the package) to the distribution. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{51} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/12/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improving the index: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, options, -% language options. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improving the index: names. -% \item Updated some \suffix{.mld} files with names of the authors of titles. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Miscellaneous corrections. -% \item The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin. -% \item Added a \com{ProvidesFile} command to the example files. -% \item Indexing the environments (not perfect). -% \item Indexing the files. -% \item Renamed the file ``\texttt{catalog}'' into ``\xfile{CATALOG}''. -% \item Indexing the counters and depth counters. -% \item The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{52} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction of index ordering. -% \item Default option in boldface in the index. -% \item Adding some informations about authors for language specific titles. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added fake sections in the ``Examples of documents'' chapter. -% \item Removed the preparation of the documentation in PostScript format. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format into PostScript format. -% \item Removed \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Indexing the referenced commands. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected the name \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (first name before last name, the english way). -% \item Corrected some other names. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. -% \item Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new cyrillic encodings T2 and X2 in \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \item Trying to use a recent version of the \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} package (2003/11/04, 4.01) to allow -% sorting, but still clashes with \pack{hyperref}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Balancing the columns in the index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction of the indexing of the environments. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improving the index layout. -% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} which loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Indexing the names of authors. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the acknowledgements. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{53} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. -% \item Corrected \com{kernafterminitoc} and siblings. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a header to the index, to explain notations. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Changed the style of page and line numbers in the index. -% \item Updated \xfile{kannada.mld}. -% \item Dangerous bend symbols are now in the right margin. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Improved the presentation of example files. -% \item Using the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to sort the sequences of citations. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction in table~\vref{t+TDS}. -% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} into \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Use the \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} option of the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to compress the -% sequences of citations; the \pack{hypernat} package must also be loaded (after \pack{natbib} and -% \pack{hyperref}). -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added changing the title of the parttoc for appendices in \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{54} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features. -% \item Indexing the features. -% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/04/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command. -% \item Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}. -% \item Some mini-tables are set on two columns in the manual. -% \item Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin. -% \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added internal hyperlinks for messages. -% \item Load the \pack{hypcap} package for hyperlinks in the documentation. -% ^^A \item Modification of \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, and \scrp{pmk} to remove \verb*|\ | from the index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table. -% \item Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type. -% \item Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file. -% \item Added flagging of macros in example files. -% \item The 2007 section in the ``Postface'' chapter was garbled. -% \item More internal links in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added a clickable table of all messages. -% \item Improved column breaks in the index. -% \item Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter. -% \item Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% \item Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}. -% \item Grouped \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} pairs in tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{55} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} package (incompatible). -% \item Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, -% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions. -% \item Improve page breaks in the documentation. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changed the color of hyperlinks. -% \item Revised the format of the headers. -% \item Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{56} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/07/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Added \xfile{swahili.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/08/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Page headers modified in documentation. -% \item Added stuff (files) for figures (maps) for many language areas. -% \item Removed the \suffix{.eps} files. -% \item Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}. -% \item Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Many minor typo fixes. -% \item Darker colors for hyperlinks. -% \item Updated and corrected the bibliography. -% \item Corrected a typo in the \env{ptc@verse} environment (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% \item Corrections of typos in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments -% (thanks to \name{Andrew}{Bowden}). -% \item Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid -% erasing the (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file). -% \item Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). -% \item The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part. -% \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package. -% \item Complete indexing of the messages. -% \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% \item Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to increase the width of the pages of the bibliography. -% \item Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}. -% \item Updated \xfile{czech.mld}. -% \item Removed \ucom{l@xsection}. -% \item Graphic files are indexed separately. -% \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}. -% \item Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy. -% \item Updated \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% \item Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},\ABK and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. -% \item Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% \item Suppressed parasite entries from the index. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{57} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections in examples of documents. -% \item Added \xfile{occitan.mld}. -% \item Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, -% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, -% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2008/01/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% \item Added maps of Manchuria (figure~\vref{f+manju}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2008/04/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Better captions for maps. -% Added maps for Italy, Karnataka, Germany, Mongols and China. -% \item Added \xfile{occitan2.mld} and \xfile{mexican.mld}. -% \item Added a map of czech dialects (figure~\vref{f+czechd}). -% \item Added maps of danish dialects (figure~\vref{f+danishd}). -% \item Added a map of the dutch language (figure~\vref{f+dutchw}). -% \item Added a map of french dialects (figure~\vref{f+france-lr}). -% \item Added a map of galician dialects (figure~\vref{f+galician-l}). -% \item Added maps of german dialects (figures~\vrefrange{f+german-d}{f+german-c}). -% \item Added maps of hindi dialects (figure~\vref{f+hindi}). -% \item Added maps of portugese dialects (figures~\vref{f+portu-b} and~\vref{f+portu-a}). -% \item Added a map of the turkish language (figure~\vref{f+turkish}). -% \item Added a map of the vietnamese language (figure~\vref{f+viet-w}). -% \item Added a map of the armenian diaspora (figure~\vref{f+armeniad}). -% \item Added a map of the sami dialects (figure~\vref{f+same}). -% \item Added a map of the nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia (figure~\vref{f+xyugo}). -% \item Added a map of countries where spanish is an official language (figure~\vref{f+espa-o}). -% \item Added a map of the sorbian area (figure~\vref{f+sorben}). -% \item Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon. -% \item Added a map of the minorities in Poland (figure~\vref{f+pologne}). -% \item Added a map of the bengali diaspora (figure~\vref{f+bengali-m}). -% \item Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. -% \item Added maps of the basque dialects (figure~\vref{f+euskara}). -% \item Added maps of the latvian dialects (figure~\vref{f+latvian-d}). -% \item Added a map for the swahili language (figure~\vref{f+swahili}). -% \item Added the turkish alphabet (figure~\vref{f+turc-alpha}). -% \item The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% \item Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% \item Added maps of the languages in Europe (figure~\vrefrange{f+euro-lan1}{f+euro-lan2}). -% \item Added maps of Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}). -% \item Added a map of the languages in Africa (figure~\vref{f+africa}). -% \item Corrected an error of message number. -% \item Added maps for Russia (figures~\vrefrange{f+rus-re}{f+rus-su}). -% \item Added a map of the districts of Slovakia (figure~\vref{f+slovak}). -% \item Added maps about Islam (figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}). -% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters (figure~\vref{f+hanzi}). -% \item Added a figure about chinese characters usage in the world (figure~\vref{f+china-ch}). -% \item Added a figure about chinese dialects ((figure~\vref{f+china-l}). -% \item Added maps about writing systems (figures~\vrefrange{f+wrs-c}{f+wrs-a}). -% \item Added a map of the regions where Finnish is spoken (figure~\vref{f+finnishl}). -% \item Shortened the ``Installation'' chapter. -% \item Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16. -% \item Files \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} and \uxfile{lamed.tex} replaced by \xgrf{lamed3.png}. -% \item Added maps of the indigenous languages of México (figure~\vref{f+mexl}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{58} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2008/06/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} into \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. -% \item Added a simplified linguistic map of Europe (figure~\vref{f+leur}). -% \item Added a map of polish dialects (figure~\vref{f+polish-d}). -% \item Added a figure about the russian alphabet (figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}). -% \item Added a map about the russian alphabet (figure~\vref{f+cyr-alf}). -% \item Added a figure about the serbian alphabets (figure~\vref{f+serb-a}). -% \item Added a map of the provinces of Vietnam (figure~\vref{f+viet4}). -% \item Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references. -% \item Added a map of albanian dialects (figure~\vref{f+alb2}). -% \item Added a map of Norway (figure~\vref{f+norway-p}). -% \item Added flags for many countries. Added a light gray frame around the flags. -% \item Added a figure about lusophonia (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}). -% \item Added a figure about germanophonia (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}). -% \item Added a figure about hispanophonia (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}). -% \item Added a figure about italophonia (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}). -% \item Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult. -% \item Added figures about francophones countries (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}). -% \item Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}). -% \item Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}). -% \item Added a figure about russian-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}). -% \item Added a figure about english-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}). -% \item Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}. -% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, -% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}. -% \item Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% \item Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}). -% \item Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~corrupted PDF files. -% \item \textbf{60} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2008/07/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Minor correction in figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}. -% \item Updated the bibliography. -% \item Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). -% \item Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file -% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but -% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} -% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. -% \item Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{RaggedRight} -% \egroup -% ^^A MAJ-E -% \or\relax -% ^^A FRENCH -% \bgroup -% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}} -% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet} -% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet} -% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered} -% \begin{RaggedRight} -% % -% \lneed{5} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{00} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1990/10/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1991/11/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Révision pour réutiliser de manière transparente les commandes -% \com{chapter}, \com{section}, \com{subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement -% le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (par \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{01} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Nouvelle conception, pour éviter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de fichier, pour chaque chapitre -% (un péché mortel!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}). -% \item Ajout de \com{chapterend} pour terminer la portée d'une minitoc. (\emph{Si vous oubliez de -% mettre} \com{chapterend} à~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une entrée pour le chapitre suivant -% apparaîtra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci à~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}). -% \item Remplacement de l'environnement \env{minipage} par un environnement \env{verse}, pour qu'une -% minitoc puisse se répartir sur plusieurs pages. -% \item Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un souhaite redéfinir cette -% mise en page, il a juste à~la réécrire (et seulement elle). -% \item Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant précéder par \ucom{minitocno}. -% (\ucom{minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle est implicite \emph{après} -% les pseudo-chapitres \com{chapter*}). -% \item Problèmes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \com{chapterend} pour terminer chaque chapitre ayant une -% minitoc. Comment éviter cette contrainte? -% \item La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similaire -% à~\dcnt{tocdepth} pour la table des matières.). -% \item Au moins trois passes~(3) de \LaTeX{} sont nécessaires pour obtenir des minitocs correctes (la première -% passe crée les fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxième les utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des -% numéros de pages faux) et les recrée, la troisième devrait être bonne). -% \item Fonctionne avec \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les éléments flottants. Fonctionne en mode deux -% colonnes (mais la minitoc est composée sur une colonne; comment faire pour qu'elle s'étende sur les deux -% colonnes?). -% \item Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \pack{xr} (références externes). -% \upack{xr} version~5 est bien plus tolérant. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{02} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} (s'il est présent) -% doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}). \emph{Attention} aux options modifiant -% \com{@caption}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~3 non distribuée (erronée). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{04} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \ucom{if@realch} pour éviter que des lignes de contenu provenant de pseudo-chapitres -% aillent dans la table des matières. -% \item Le fichier paquetage \pack{mtcoff} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des -% commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer le paquetage \upack{minitoc} -% par \upack{mtcoff}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{05} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un mécanisme de sélection pour ne pas écrire des choses superflues dans les minitocs. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{06} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de problèmes sur les chapitres dans la table des matières, retrait de code obsolète pour -% \com{caption} (les filtres sont bien meilleurs), ajout de la compatibilité -% avec \pack{toch} -% (\pack{toch} crée une table des chapitres; si utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}; -% en fait, c'est l'ancêtre du paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{07} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item (\emph{différences majeures}) Réécriture complète, en utilisant des astuces de \pack{xr} -% (la version~5, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs sont directement prélevées dans -% le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Suppression de \com{chapterend} et \ucom{minitocno}, ajout de -% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} et \com{faketableofcontents}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{08} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/07/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajustements d'espacement. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{09} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et décommenter; rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire). -% MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caractères pour les suffixes dans les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{10} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Fonctionne avec les appendices. Détecte maintenant les versions obsolètes de \xfile{latex.tex}: -% (\com{@inputcheck} ou \com{reset@font} non définies). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{11} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/08/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entrées de section, \com{mtcSSfont} pour les entrées -% de sous-section, \com{mtcSSSfont} pour les entrées de sous-sous-section, \com{mtcPfont} pour -% les entrées de paragraphe, \com{mtcSPfont} pour les entrées de sous-paragraphe. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{12} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/12/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Utilisation de \com{kern} au lieu de \com{vspace*} et ajout de pénalités -% (\com{nopagebreak}) pour éviter une coupure de page juste avant la dernière \com{mtc@rule}. -% \item Ajout aussi d'un environnement \env{samepage}. -% \item Retrait de vieilles lignes mises en commentaire dans des versions précédentes. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{13} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1993/12/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de code pour \com{minilof} et \com{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS, décommenter la définition -% de \com{SHORTEXT}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{14} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/01/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et ajout de \com{raggedright} -% pour éviter des avertissements \og{} underfull \fg. -% \item Correction de quelques problèmes d'espacement (en évitant des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s). -% \com{mtifont} est changée de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}. -% \item Quelques modifications suggérées par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci): \ucom{@newread} devient -% \com{newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \com{newread}; \com{empty} remplacée -% par \com{relax} dans la définition par défaut de \com{reset@font}. -% \item Retrait du forçage de \com{clubpenalty} et \com{widowpenalty} à~\texttt{10\,000} (fait -% par \com{samepage}) et \com{noindent}. -% \item Traitement simplifié de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof} -% et \com{minilot}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{15} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/01/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} pour la classe \class{book}, -% de \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} et \com{sectlot} pour les articles, avec des commandes -% et paramètres en parallèle avec ceux pour les mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{16} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections d'erreurs (typos). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{17} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \og{} \texttt{n} \fg{} (nul) synonyme de \og{} \texttt{e} \fg{} (\emph{empty}, vide) dans l'argument optionnel -% \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}, et analogues. -% \item Compatibilité avec \og{} \LaTeXe \fg. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (qui a trouvé le problème) -% et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donné les indications pour le résoudre). -% \item Ajout de la notion de \og{} numérotation absolue\fg{} pour les the mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{18} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/06/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Rendu \upack{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe. -% \item Introduction des fichiers de langue comme options. Grand merci à~\xname{Michel}{Goossens} -% (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a été inspiré par le code du paquetage \pack{babel} -% (de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{19} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/08/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de code pour numéroter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans commencer à~1. -% Ajout des commandes \com{firstchapteris}, etc. -% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule}, etc. -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \com{c@mti}. -% \item Correction dans \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}). -% \item Correction de l'appendice dans les articles. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{20} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'espacement avant et après les minitocs et analogues. -% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcpagenumbers} et \com{nomtcpagenumbers} (et analogues) pour faire -% des minitocs avec ou sans numéros de pages. Défaut: avec numéros de pages. -% \item Correction du problème (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles. -% \item Correction de l'espacement vertical. -% \item Correction d'un problème avec des chapitres numérotés avec des chiffres romains majuscules. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{21} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/09/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc} et \xfile{minitoc.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{22} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/10/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{23} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/11/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \com{sectlof}. -% \item Fonctionne avec les classes de document réinitialisant le numéro de chapitre (ou de section) -% à~chaque partie (merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}). -% \item Retrait du code pour \com{firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes sont obsolètes. -% \item Retrait du code pour l'appendice. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{24} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1994/12/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les commandes \com{protect} ont été retirées des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} et -% \suffix{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes on t été corrigées pour être compatibles avec la version -% de \LaTeXe\ de décembre 1994. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} qui a fait le travail. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{25} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} sur une suggestion -% de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{26} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/11/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les fichiers spécifiques des langues sont maintenant nommés \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (remplaçant les -% noms de la forme \texttt{mtc}\emph{langue}\suffix{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des paquetages -% et que cela fait des noms plus courts. -% \item Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower- et upper-sorbian; -% renommage de \og{} esperanto \fg{} en \og{} esperant \fg{} comme dans le paquetage \pack{babel}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{27} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1996/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. -% \item \xfile{english.mld} chargé comme langue par défaut. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{vietnam.mld} et \xfile{arab.mld}. -% \item Renommage de \pack{minitocoff} en \pack{mtcoff} pour que le nom reste court. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{28} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1997/10/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n). -% \item Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes. -% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}. -% \item Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses café). -% \item Ajout du code de \com{addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre étoilé). -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs. -% \end{itemize} -% \item -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Un typo corrigé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}: -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} -% \end{quote} -% devrait probablement être -% \begin{quote} -% \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}} -% \end{quote} -% (une contre-oblique manquait après \com{let}). Merci à~lui. -% \item Ajout de la langue bahasa. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1998/12/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{29} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1999/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/06/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la langue armenian (d'après \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/07/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} (défaut: \optd{dotted}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 1999/07/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{30} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 1999/12/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh. -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans la définition de \com{sltname} (\texttt{mlt} devrait être \texttt{slt}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{31} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/04/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, merci à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, -% qui a aussi simplifié certains morceaux de code et corrigé l'infâme erreur sur \com{chapter*}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{32} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/08/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de très (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs associés aux mini-tables: -% \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK \com{afterparttoc},\ABK -% \com{afterpartlof},\goodbreak \com{afterpartlot},\ABK \com{thispageparttocstyle},\ABK -% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}\ABK et \com{thispagepartlotstyle}. -% \item Documentation améliorée par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}. -% \item Correction de \com{nomtcrule}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{33} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection} et -% \com{mtcaddpart}. Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} -% et \suffix{.lot} pour le problème de \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} et \com{part*}). -% D'après une suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'un problème dans \com{mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un argument optionnel blanc. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{34} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2000/12/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout\imess{I0046} dans la documentation d'une section sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. -% \item Ajout de fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi, \xfile{american.mld} ne fait -% que charger \xfile{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies définitions. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{35} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2001/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og{} vide\fg{} (c'est-à-dire vide, blanc ou inexistant) -% ou \og{} non vide \fg{} (c'est-à-dire utile). J'ai utilisé du code de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}. -% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}\\opt{nocheckfiles}. -% \item Remplacement de \ucom{The@chapter} par \com{The@mtc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/02/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld} et -% \xfile{samin.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcselectlanguage}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'option de paquetage \lopt{estonian} (manquante). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2001/07/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la langue interlingua. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{36} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'une interaction avec \com{tableofcontents} qui crée un \com{chapter*} ou -% une \com{section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} (problème signalé par -% \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'un problème d'espacement avec des titres vides (problème signalé par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}). -% \item Contournement du problème \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/02/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction du test sur les fichiers vides. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/03/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bangla}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2002/03/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Réduction de la profondeur de \com{mtc@strutbox}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~\#37 sautée. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{38} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \texttt{pt} devient \ucom{@pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \ucom{z@}. -% \item \ucom{hrule} et \ucom{vrule} remplacées par \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX). -% \item Ajout de \com{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles. -% \item Ajout de la langue frenchb (synonyme de french). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changement du test pour les titres vides. -% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont appliquées à~\com{parttoc} -% (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb} retirées et remplacées par l'option -% de paquetage \opt{insection} (comme \opt{flsectionb}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de la numérotation des SLF, SLT. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/02/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french). -% \item Correction des secttocs, enfin. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/03/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'étais (j'ai ajouté quelques modifications -% de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci à~lui.). Il reste pas mal de nettoyage à~faire, mais il semble -% nécessaire de publier la distribution maintenant. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{39} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2003/04/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}. -% \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \class{memoir}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2003/06/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{@fileswfalse} et \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} pour le paquetage -% \pack{notoccite} (demandé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de paquetage -% \opt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les dialectes: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), -% \lopt{acadian}, \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}). -% \item Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} utilisant des fontes spéciales. -% \item Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire une table des matières pour -% les appendices, éventuellement non listés dans la table des matières principale. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/09/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{40} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des langues japanese et castillan. -% \item Retrait du test sur la présence du paquetage \pack{multicol} dans \xfile{minitoc.tex}, -% puisque \pack{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure dans \xfile{minitoc.tex} sur la nécessité de trois compilations. -% \item Ajout de quelques informations dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} d'un paragraphe sur un problème avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} et \xfile{minitoc.bib}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}. Cette option est encore expérimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2004/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (documentation en français en format PDF). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{41} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Message ajouté si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas disponibles. -% \item Remplacement des commandes \ucom{typeout} dans \upack{minitoc} par les commandes -% \com{PackageInfo} ou \com{PackageWarning}; avec le numéro de ligne lorsqu'il est utile -% (\com{@gobble} si pas de numéro de ligne). En conséquence, le paquetage est moins bavard -% (\com{PackageInfo} écrit seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, pas sur le terminal). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) et \com{mtcsettitlefont}, -% avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Classes \AmS: \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}, -% \class{amsbook} demande des précautions. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la présence de \com{dominitoc} et co. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. -% \item Amélioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de 99~parties ou 99~chapitres -% ou 99~sections. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/01/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, \xfile{chinese2.mld}, -% \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, -% \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, -% \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetrules}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, \com{nomlfrule}, -% \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, \com{nopltrule}, -% \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, \com{nosltrule}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de nouvelles langues: \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, -% \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, -% \xfile{russian2o.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de tests sur les environnements \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\env{mtchideinmain*}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~42 non distribuée. -% \item Remplacement de \og{} language \fg{} par \og{} langue \fg{} dans la documentation française. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'un typo mineur. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}, oubliée dans v41. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{43} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/02/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \com{mtcsetformat}. -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} à~propos de \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction des macros \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} -% \item Déplacement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage. -% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}). -% \item Compléter le \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence entre \com{minitoc} et \com{tableofcontents}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetfeature}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} après le \texttt{\bs\bs} après le filet supérieur de chaque -% mini-table au niveau partie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans les arguments de \com{mtcsetfeature}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Retrait de \com{markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'environnement \env{stc@verse}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld} et \xfile{magyar2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renommage de \xfile{portuges.mld} en \xfile{portugues.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction dans \com{mtcskip}. -% \item Première version en format \suffix{.dtx}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/04/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Retrait de \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, etc., inutilisées. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'un typo dans \com{@dosectlot}. -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixglossary}. -% \item Impression de la documentation avec \og{} \optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{nombreuses classes}} \fg{} pour -% avoir toutes les notes marginales -% sur la gauche. Ajout du code (étendu à~54 éléments flottants) de \pack{morefloats} -% (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre -% davantage de notes marginales et d'éléments flottants. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/05/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction des entrées de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les numéros de pages doivent être omis. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsolètes. -% \item Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas être imprimées vides même si \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux. -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetdepth}. -% \item L'option \optd{hints} est le choix par défaut et elle n'est plus considérée comme expérimentale. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \com{mtcsetdepth} si le compteur n'est pas disponible. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{portuges.mld}, qui charge \xfile{portugues.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}, -% \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une méthode pour documentation bilingue. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en français. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changement de \og{} Liste des Tables \fg{} en \og{} Liste des Tableaux \fg{} dans \xfile{french.mld} et -% dans la documentation française, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \pack{babel}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est maintenant engendré par \xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{o} -% pour vrai/faux. -% \item Condensation du code de détection des suffixes courts ou longs. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{V} et~\texttt{v} -% pour vrai/faux. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Établir correctement l'indicateur \com{ifFTR} pour avoir les noms des mois dans la langue correcte dans -% la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Établir l'indicateur \com{mtcoffwarn@true} par \pack{mtcoff} si une commande -% \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouvée. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{castillian.mld}. -% \item Renommage de \xfile{portugues.mld} en \xfile{portuguese.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld} et \xfile{USenglish.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppression de \og{} Général: \fg{} dans l'historique des modifications. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Remplacement de quelques commandes \com{PackageWarning} par \com{PackageInfo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un fichier \suffix{.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et -% \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}. -% \item Ajout des commandes \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc} et \com{decrementstc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/07/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'une bourde dans \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Amélioration de quelques messages dans \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \pack{placeins}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une note sur \com{FloatBarrier}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème d'alignement dans les minitocs. Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \item Fait deux versions des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}, -% selon la présence du compteur de profondeur correspondant. -% \item La classe \class{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop récente. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} de préparation. -% \item Corrections dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{guarani.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/08/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}. -% \item Ajout d'un argument optionnel à~\com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc} et \com{adjuststc}. -% \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un patch pour la version récente de la classe \class{memoir}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish3.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Utiliser \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers -% \suffix{.mld} \og{} secondaires\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger -% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \com{mtcloadmlo} par l'utilisateur. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld} et \xfile{farsi2.mlo}. -% \item Ajout d'une note sur l'outil \tool{rubber}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour formater le glossaire. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Retrait des numéros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts \texttt{*mk}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{44} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Historique (glossaire) composé en \texttt{RaggedRight}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld} et \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Nouvelle méthode pour l'historique: listes imbriquées sur 3~niveaux. -% \item Retrait de \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Nettoyage des scripts \texttt{*mk}. -% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/09/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos. -% \item Ajout du nom du fichier \suffix{.maf} dans le message de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. -% \item Amélioration du nettoyage dans les scripts \texttt{*mk}, en utilisant un fichier \suffix{.maf}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Charger la correction pour la classe \class{memoir} seulement si nécessaire; ne pas la charger si -% \class{memoir} est datée après 2005/09/25. -% \item Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre \og{} Questions Fréquemment Posées\fg{} (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) -% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{nolistfiles}. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et -% \pack{mcaption} (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \item Correction de quelques notes marginales dans le code commenté. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. -% \item Utiliser la commande Unix \tool{xargs} dans les scripts \texttt{*mk} pour détruire les fichiers -% auxiliaires. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/10/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout d'une courte introduction dans le chapitre \og{} Questions fréquemment posées\fg{} et -% dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Début de l'ajout du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la version française du \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} dans \xfile{minitoc.l}. -% \item Ajout d'une note sur la nécessité d'exécuter \scrp{imk} avant \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir}. -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}. -% \item Ajout de \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont}, -% \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans -% les mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction d'une erreur sur les fontes pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans les -% mini-tables. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld} et -% \xfile{khalkha.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Ajout de vérifications par des commandes \emph{quarks} internes dans \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Changement de \og{} table\fg{} en \og{} tableau\fg{} dans la documentation en français, là où c'est nécessaire. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \item Correction de typos dans la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/11/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Éviter quelques avertissements \og{} Token not allowed\fg{} émis par \texttt{pdftex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Réordonné une longue séquence de citations. -% \item Ajout de \og{} {\froff\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} pour les URLs de courrier. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos dans la documentation. -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction d'un hyperlien dans la bibliographie (pour le paquetage \pack{xr}). -% \item Tentative pour éviter des URLs cassés, en utilisant \env{quote}, des notes infrapaginales et \com{par}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes, un tableau). -% \item Dans le message d'avertissement du \emph{hint} concernant un nombre de mini-tables dépassant~99 (idans -% le cas de suffixes courts), imprimer le nombre effectif. -% \item Réduction de la largeur de certains messages d'information, d'avertissement ou d'erreur. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections sur les guillemets français. -% \item Ajout de quelques options pour PDF. -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction d'un URL vers l'\AmS\ dans la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages (essentiellement en enlevant des étoiles). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos. -% \item Ajout de quelques labels. -% \item Ajout d'un chapitre avec les messages (expliqués). Pas encore triés. -% \item La documentation a besoin de 4~compilations par \LaTeX. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages. -% \item Corrections dans la liste des messages. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2005/12/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de la position des flottants dans les pages de flottants: en haut. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation (merci à~\name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). -% \item Ajout de \oexam{addsec.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc}. -% \item Correction pour faire marcher \oexam{addsec.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \og \texttt{*}\fg comme mot-clé pour le premier argument de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et -% \com{mtcsetrules} (demandé par \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}). -% \item Retrait de \og \com{MessageBreak}\fg de l'index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Correction de l'entrée bibliographique sur \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} dans la documentation pour résoudre -% un problème de placement de flottants. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Résoudre un problème de placement de flottants. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de la langue bahasam. -% \item Ajout de la langue albanian. -% \item Ajout de la langue hebrew2. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour les langues albanian, bahasa, bahasam et hebrew2. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{french.mld} (retrait de majuscules abusives). -% \item Correction du fichier \xfile{italian.mld} language. Ajout de la langue italian2. -% \item Ajout des langues australian et newzealand (english). -% \item La langue bahasa est renommée en bahasai; bahasa est synonyme de bahasai. -% \item Ajout des langues malay et meyalu, synonymes de bahasam. -% \item Ajout des langues indon et indonesian, synonymes de bahasai. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. -% \item Ajout de références aux nouvelles entrées bibliographiques. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction d'une instabilité dans les coupures de page dans la documentation de \xfile{japanese3.mld}. -% \item Ajout de commentaires dans quelques fichiers \suffix{.mld}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{magyar3.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction dans \com{mtcaddsection}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction dans \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcfixglossary}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Limitation de la profondeur initiale d'affichage des signets. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de quelques commentaires dans le point~34 des questions fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}) -% à~propos de l'initialisation des fontes. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Chargement de certains paquetages avant \pack{hyperref}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish4.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction du tableau sur les titres par défaut. -% \item Correction dans les mots-clés de \com{mtcsetfont}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} -% et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} et -% d'un point dans les questions fréquemment posées (et dans in \xfile{minitoc.bug}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout d'une note dans la documentation de \xfile{serbian.mld} et \xfile{serbianc.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (pour Omega). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Simplifications dans le chapitre «~Messages~». -% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~». -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Postface~». -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout du pacquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour l'entrée «~The pdf\TeX\ Program~» dans la bibliographie. -% Le prénom de son auteur a besoin d'un double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{kannada.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans \xfile{russianb.mld} et \xfile{spanish.mld}. -% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. -% \item Mettre \com{mtcfixglossary} avant \com{mtcfixindex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld} et \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Les langues \texttt{u8hangul} et \texttt{u8hanja} sont renommées \xmldo{hangul-u8} et \xmldo{hanja-u8}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour des commandes de préparation répétées. -% \item Déplacement vers le haut de la déclaration de certains indicateurs concernant l'option \optd{hints}. -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcprepare}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} à~la classe~6. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/02/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Correction de la position des tableaux dans le chapitre «~Jargon~». -% \item Correction de \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{polski.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \emph{Hints} sur la classe \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} et le paquetage \pack{alphanum}, -% incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Utilisation de styles bibliographiques avec un champ \texttt{URL}, construits à~l'aide de -% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld} et \xfile{magyar3.mld}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld} et \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, avec leurs -% fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld} et \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, avec -% leurs fichiers \suffix{.mlo}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Désormais, les messages sont numérotés. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la question~37 sur les fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \pack{babel}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{french1.mld} et \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{english1.mld} et \xfile{english2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{45} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/03/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppression des versions PostScript de la documentation. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld} et \xfile{xalx3.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{swedish2.mld}. -% \item L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout de \uxgrf{lamed.eps} et \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} comme images pour le logo de \emph{Lamed} (construit depuis -% \uxfile{lamed.tex}). -% \item Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Utilisation de \pack{sectsty} pour mieux mettre en forme les titres des sections. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout de \com{ifmtcsecondpart} pour tester si le document a exactement 2~parties. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}, charger le paquetage \pack{flafter} \emph{avant} le -% paquetage \pack{placeins}. -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les barrières de flottants (figure~\vref{f+barrier}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/04/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans la question~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. -% \item Ajout de commentaires pour l'option \opt{insection}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Début de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}. -% \item Fin de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}. -% \item Corrections analogues dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de notes à~propos des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. -% \item Ajout de \oexam{hide1.tex} et \oexam{hide2.tex}. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Renommé \oexam{hide.tex} en \oexam{hide1.tex}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Utilisation de \com{MakeUpperCase} dans \com{markboth} pour les styles de page. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/05/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{captcont} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld} et \xfile{uighur3.mld} (comme synonymes pour les -% variantes de la langue bicig). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout d'une description de \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} dans le jargon. -% \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur le script \scrp{imk} dans \xfile{INSTALL} et le chapitre «~Installation~». -% \item Ajout d'une entrée «~paquetage~» dans le jargon. -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \item Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et \com{mtcgapafterheads}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \oexam{gaps.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \end{itemize} -% \item Correction d'espacement dans \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{46} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/21 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Commentaire sur le paquetage \pack{thailatex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Engendrer certains fichiers d'exemples avec \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}. -% \item Ajout du chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~». -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renommé le chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~» en «~Exemples de documents~». -% \item Utiliser le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} dans certains des exemples de documents. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour des exemples de documents. -% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{second.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} et \oexam{mem1.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/06/30 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} et \oexam{scr.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{subf.tex}. -% \item Corrections sur la profondeur des minilofs, minilots et similaires. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{tsfc.tex} et \oexam{tbi.tex}. -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections de typos. -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{2c.tex} et \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. -% \item Correction dans \xfile{french2.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/10 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction dans les minilots et minilofs (et analogues) sur la profondeur. -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hop.tex} et \oexam{cri.tex}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} et \oexam{mu.tex}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation. -% \item Les versions non distribuées sont marquées par~\textbf{\textreferencemark} au lieu de~\ensuremath{\star}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item La section «~À~propos de ce document~» devient un premier chapitre étoilé. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hir.tex} et \oexam{hia.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Corrections dans \oexam{add.tex} et \oexam{addsec.tex} pour l'index. -% \item Ajout du script \scrp{xmk} pour composer les exemples en documents PDF. -% \item Mise à~jour des scripts pour traiter les exemples. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ne pas oublier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} dans la liste des fichiers. -% \item Dans les scripts, le répertoire de \emph{backup} (\ixfile{OLD}) est -% désormais \ixfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}. -% \item Dans les scripts, les répertoires de répartition (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) sont -% désormais \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{47} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} (d'après le système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}). -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour du jargon. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de \com{l@xsection}. -% \item Correction d'espacements dans les mini-tables. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/07/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un crênage vertical \verb|\kernafter...| entre chaque minitable et son filet inférieur. -% \item Ajout du point~45 des questions fréquemment posées. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction mineure dans le message d'avertissement \texttt{F0008}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}. -% \item Raccourcissement du résultat de certains exemples de documents en utilisant la classe \class{report} -% au lieu de la classe \class{book} (d'où une impression en recto seul). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{48} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de typos. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Pas de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/23 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans le format de la table des matières. -% \item Augmentation de \com{textwidth}. -% \item Correction du problème de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib} et tous les fichiers générés. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/24 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Retrait des commentaires sur les lignes superflues dans le préambule des fichiers générés. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/25 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% \item Correction de la macro \com{name} (pour la documentation). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/28 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \item Correction (conversion) dans \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de l'erreur \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} si \xfile{english.mld} n'est pas trouvé pour établir les titres par défaut. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/08/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Modification du style bibliographique \xfile{plainurl.bst}\isuffix{.bst} pour avoir les noms de famille des auteurs -% et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) en petites capitales et les années en chiffres de style ancien. Les -% titres sont mis en emphase. Le style \xfile{frplain1.bst} est aussi mis à~jour. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/01 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et -% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.bib} en \exam{mtc-add.bib}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{add.tex} en \exam{mtc-add.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{addsec.tex} en \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{2c.tex} en \exam{mtc-2c.tex}. -% \item L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est désormais active par défaut. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/07 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renommage de \oexam{app-mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-amm.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{apx.tex} en \exam{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{bo.tex} en \exam{mtc-bo.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{ch0.tex} en \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{cri.tex} en \exam{mtc-cri.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo1.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{fo2.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{gaps.tex} en \exam{mtc-gap.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{hia.tex} en \exam{mtc-hia.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{hir.tex} en \exam{mtc-hir.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide1.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{hide2.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{hop.tex} en \exam{mtc-hop.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{livre.tex} en \exam{mtc-liv.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-mem.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{mem1.tex} en \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{mini-art.tex} en \exam{mtc-art.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} en \exam{mtc-bk.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{mu.tex} en \exam{mtc-mu.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{scr.tex} en \exam{mtc-scr.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{second.tex} en \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{subf.tex} en \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{tbi.tex} en \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{tlc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}. -% \item Renommage de \oexam{tsfc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/08 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie (ajout du Pentaglot). -% \item Correction du format de deux tableaux sur NFSS. -% \item Exemples de documents par ordre alphabétique dans leur chapitre. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple de document \exam{mtc-syn.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{49} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/14 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Légère modification de la mise en forme de la liste des fichiers (chapitre «~Installation~»). -% \item Simplifications dans les scripts. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout du point~46 dans les questions fréquemment posées et du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie et les styles bibliographiques. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/09/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de «~\textbf{+}~» et «~\texttt{-}~» comme synonymes pour «~\texttt{on}~» et «~\texttt{off}~», -% respectivement. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/10/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \item Corrections de typos. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout d'un tableau de quelques codages. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/10/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppression de l'entrée «~Sommaire~» dans le sommaire, mais elle est ajoutée dans la table des matières. -% \item Amélioration de quelques tableaux. -% \item Ajout des fichiers \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \item Corrections dans la mise en page d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}. -% \item Combinaison de quatre figures en une (avec des sous-figures). -% \item Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de -% précautions avec \upack{minitoc}. -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Complété la liste des classes standard. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}. -% \item Ajout\imess{E0036} de notes sur la présence obligatoire du fichier \xfile{english.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item La validation des options de langue n'écrit que des messages informatifs dans le fichier -% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et, si nécessaire, donne un seul message d'avertissement. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{50} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Suppression des anciens exemples de documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex}, -% \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex} et \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}. -% \item Ajout d'un item sur la \index{TDS}TDS dans le jargon. -% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/11/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du message d'avertissement \texttt{W0094} avec la liste des fichiers minitoc de langue manquants -% (\suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}). -% \item Corrections dans la bibliographie. -% \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~». -% \item Changement des noms des répertoires \emph{scratch} dans certains scripts. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et -% contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{51} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2006/12/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de l'index: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options, -% options de langue. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2006/12/20 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de l'index: noms. -% \item Mise à~jour de certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} avec les noms des auteurs des titres. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections diverses. -% \item Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge. -% \item Ajout d'une commande \com{ProvidesFile} aux fichiers exemples. -% \item Indexation des environnements (pas parfaite). -% \item Indexation des fichiers. -% \item Renommage du fichier «~\texttt{catalog}~» en «~\xfile{CATALOG}~». -% \item Indexation des compteurs et des compteurs de profondeur. -% \item Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{52} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'ordre dans l'index. -% \item Options par défaut en gras dans l'index. -% \item Ajout d'informations sur les auteurs pour les titres spécifiques aux langues. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de sections bidons dans le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~». -% \item Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript. -% \item Retrait de \xfile{duplex2v.pro}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/17 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Indexation des commandes référencées. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction du nom \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (le prénom avant le nom de famille, à~la française). -% \item Correction de quelques autres noms. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}. -% \item Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}). -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}. -% \item Essai d'utilisation d'une version récente du paquetage \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} (2003/11/04, 4.01) pour permettre le tri, -% mais reste en conflit avec \pack{hyperref}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Équilibrage des colonnes de l'index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de l'indexation des environnements. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/01/31 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/05 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} qui charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Indexation des noms des auteurs. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour des remerciements. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{53} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/13 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}. -% \item Correction de \com{kernafterminitoc} et consorts. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/02/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un en-tête à~l'index, pour expliquer les notations. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Changement du style des numéros de pages et de lignes dans l'index. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{kannada.mld}. -% \item Les symboles de virages dangereux sont maintenant dans la marge de droite. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration de la présentation des exemples de fichiers. -% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour trier les séquences de citations. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/09 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction dans le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}. -% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} en \uxfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/19 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Utilisation de l'option \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour -% compresser les séquences de citations; le paquetage \pack{hypernat} doit aussi être chargé (après \pack{natbib} et -% \pack{hyperref}). -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout du changement de titre de la parttoc des appendices dans \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{54} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/03/27 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~». -% \item Indexation des dispositifs. -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/04/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~». -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}. -% \item Certaines mini-tables sont composées sur deux colonnes dans le manuel. -% \item Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite. -% \item Correction d'une erreur dans \pack{mtcoff}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/04/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages. -% \item Charger le paquetage \pack{hypcap} pour les hyperliens dans la documentation. -% ^^A \item Modification de \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk} et \scrp{pmk} pour retirer \verb*|\ | de l'index. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/06 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table. -% \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table. -% \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}. -% \item Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples. -% \item La section 2007 du chapitre «~Postface~» était en pagaille. -% \item Plus de liens internes dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages. -% \item Amélioration des coupures de colonnes dans l'index. -% \item Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}. -% \item Groupement des paires \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \lneed{5} -% \item \textbf{55} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/12 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le -% paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible). -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, -% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/22 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement. -% \item Amélioration des coupures de page dans la documentation. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/06/29 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Changement de la couleur des hyperliens. -% \item Changement du format des en-têtes. -% \item Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer -% correctement \com{mtc@toks}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{56} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/07/02 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/08/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item En-têtes de pages modifiés dans la documentation. -% \item Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) des régions où sont parlées diverses langues. -% \item Retrait des fichiers \suffix{.eps}. -% \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}. -% \item Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/04 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Nombreuses corrections typographiques mineures. -% \item Couleurs plus sombres pour les hyper-liens. -% \item Mise à~jour et correction de la bibliographie. -% \item Correction d'un typo dans l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} (\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% \item Corrections de typos dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} (merci -% à~\name{Andrew}{Bowden}). -% \item Remplacer le suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter -% d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}). -% \item Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}). -% \item Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~». -% \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} -% à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}. -% \item Indexation complète des messages. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}. -% \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie. -% \item Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}. -% \item Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}. -% \item Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}. -% \item Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et\ABK \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}. -% \item Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{57} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/11 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2007/12/18 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Corrections dans les exemples de documents. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld}, -% \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld}, -% \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}. -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2008/01/15 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}. -% \item Ajout de cartes de la Mandchourie (figure~\vref{f+manju}). -% \end{itemize} -% \item 2008/04/03 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Amélioration des légendes des cartes. -% Ajout de cartes pour l'Italie , le Karnataka, l'Allemagne, les Mongols et la Chine. -% \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan2.mld} et \xfile{mexican.mld}. -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes tchèques (figure~\vref{f+czechd}). -% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes danois (figure~\vref{f+danishd}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte du néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutchw}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes français (figure~\vref{f+france-lr}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes galiciens (figure~\vref{f+galician-l}). -% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes allemands (figures~\vrefrange{f+german-d}{f+german-c}). -% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes hindi (figure~\vref{f+hindi}). -% \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes portugais (figures~\vref{f+portu-b} et~\vref{f+portu-a}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue turque (figure~\vref{f+turkish}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue vietnamienne (figure~\vref{f+viet-w}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora arménienne (figure~\vref{f+armeniad}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes sâmes (figure~\vref{f+same}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie (figure~\vref{f+xyugo}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des pays où l'espagnol est une langue officielle (figure~\vref{f+espa-o}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la région sorabe (figure~\vref{f+sorben}). -% \item Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon. -% \item Ajout d'une carte des minorités en Pologne (figure~\vref{f+pologne}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora bengalî (figure~\vref{f+bengali-m}). -% \item Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}. -% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes basques (figure~\vref{f+euskara}). -% \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes lettons (figure~\vref{f+latvian-d}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte pour la langue swahilie (figure~\vref{f+swahili}). -% \item Ajout de l'alphabet turc (figure~\vref{f+turc-alpha}). -% \item Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (merci à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}). -% \item Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}. -% \item Ajout de cartes des langues d'Europe (figure~\vrefrange{f+euro-lan1}{f+euro-lan2}). -% \item Ajout de cartes du Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des langues d'Afrique (figure~\vref{f+africa}). -% \item Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message. -% \item Ajout de cartes pour la Russie (figures~\vrefrange{f+rus-re}{f+rus-su}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte du Kosovo (figure~\vref{f+kosovo}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des districts de Slovaquie (figure~\vref{f+slovak}). -% \item Ajout de cartes sur l'Islam (figures~\vrefrange{f+islam-pbc}{f+islam-sw}). -% \item Added a figure about hànzì characters (figure~\vref{f+hanzi}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'utilisation des caractères chinois dans le monde (figure~\vref{f+china-ch}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les dialectes chinois (figure~\vref{f+china-l}). -% \item Ajout de cartes sur les systèmes d'écriture (figures~\vrefrange{f+wrs-c}{f+wrs-a}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des régions où le finnois est parlé (figure~\vref{f+finnishl}). -% \item Raccourcissement du chapitre «~Installation~». -% \item Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16. -% \item Remplacement des fichiers \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} et \uxfile{lamed.tex} par \xgrf{lamed3.png}. -% \item Ajout de cartes de langues indigènes du Mexique (figure~\vref{f+mexl}). -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item \textbf{58} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2008/06/26 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} en \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}. -% \item Ajout d'une carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe (figure~\vref{f+leur}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes polonais (figure~\vref{f+polish-d}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'alphabet russe (figure~\vref{f+rus-cyr}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte sur l'alphabet russe (figure~\vref{f+cyr-alf}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte sur les alphabets serbes (figure~\vref{f+serb-a}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte des provinces du Viêtnam (figure~\vref{f+viet4}). -% \item Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes. -% \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes albanais (figure~\vref{f+alb2}). -% \item Ajout d'une carte de la Norvège (figure~\vref{f+norway-p}). -% \item Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. Ajout d'un cadre gris clair autour des drapeaux. -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie (figure~\vref{f+luso-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie (figure~\vref{f+germano-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie (figure~\vref{f+hispano-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie (figure~\vref{f+italo-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation. -% \item Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones (figures~\vrefrange{f+franco-eu-c}{f+franco-asp-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili (figure~\vref{f+swa-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe (figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe (figure~\vref{f+russ-c}). -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais (figure~\vref{f+eng-c}). -% \item Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}, -% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot}, -% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}. -% \item Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}. -% \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais (figure~\vref{f+dutch-c}). -% \item Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~fichiers PDF corrompus. -% \item \textbf{60} -% \begin{itemize} -% \item 2008/07/16 -% \begin{itemize} -% \item Correction mineure dans la figure~\vref{f+arabo-sp-c}. -% \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie. -% \item Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}). -% \item Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux) -% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick} -% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier); -% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}. -% \item Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}. -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{itemize} -% \end{RaggedRight} -% \egroup -% \fi -% ^^A MAJ-F -% -% ^^A ACK -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \chapter*{Acknowledgments\markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}} -% \markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}% -% ^^A \enlargethispage*{1.5\baselineskip} -% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]% -% \noindent -% I ought to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to all whose I forgot.}, for their help, their -% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (in french) and -% \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english), but also \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (in german, but I do not read it well: -% send me also a mail in french or in english).}, -% and/or for their packages, classes, documents, and tools:\hfill\mbox{} -% \or\relax -% \chapter*{Remerciements\markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}} -% \markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}% -% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]% -% \noindent -% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que toutes celles que j'ai oubliées me pardonnent.}, pour -% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement, -% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français) et \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais), mais aussi -% \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (en allemand, mais je le lis très mal: envoyez-moi aussi un courrier en français ou en anglais).} -% et/ou leurs paquetages, classes, documents et outils:\hfill\mbox{} -% \fi -% -% \begin{raggedright}\noindent -% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, -% \name{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}, -% \namea{Nabil}{Abu~El-Ata}{Abu~El-Ata}, -% \name{Tommaso}{Addabbo}, -% \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}, -% \name{Stéphane}{Aicardi}, -% \name{Vartan}{Akopian}, -% \name{A.J.}{Alex}, -% \namea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}, -% \name{Mark}{Alford}, -% \name{Viviane}{Alleton}, -% \namea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}, -% \name{Jérôme}{Andrieux}, -% \name{Ralf}{Angeli}, -% \name{Walter}{Appel}, -% \name{Achod~André}{Aradian}, -% \name{Patrick}{Andries}, -% \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}, -% \name{Tim}{Arnold}, -% \name{Jouko}{Arponen}, -% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, -% \name{Helmer}{Aslasken}, -% \name{David}{Aspinall}, -% \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen}, -% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann}, -% \name{Gonçal}{Badenes}, -% \name{Guillaume}{Balavoine}, -% \name{Jason}{Baldridge}, -% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky}, -% \name{Leonor}{Barroca}, -% \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi}, -% \name{Pierre}{Basso}, -% \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}, -% \name{Jean-Yves}{Baudais}, -% \name{David}{Bausum}, -% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, -% \name{Thierry}{Bayet}, -% \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, -% \name{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}, -% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara}, -% \name{Benoît}{Belet}, -% \name{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}, -% \namea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}, -% \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, -% \name{Alexander}{Berdnikov}, -% \name{Jens}{Berger}, -% \name{Tobias}{Berndt}, -% \name{Karl}{Berry}, -% \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, -% \name{Javier}{Bezos}, -% \name{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}, -% \name{Olivier}{Binisti}, -% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, -% \name{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}, -% \namea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}, -% \name{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}, -% \name{Laurent}{Bloch}, -% \namea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}, -% \name{Patrick}{Boman}, -% \name{Onofre}{Bonvila}, -% \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}, -% \name{Patrice}{Bougette}, -% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais}, -% \name{Andrew}{Bowden}, -% \name{Victor}{Boyko}, -% \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, -% \name{Felix}{Braun}, -% \name{Jim}{Breen}, -% \name{Peter}{Breitenlohner}, -% \name{Roland}{Breton}, -% \name{Catherine}{Bricout}, -% \name{William}{Bright}, -% \namea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}, -% \name{Mimi}{Burbank}, -% \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, -% \name{Patrick}{Burgel}, -% \name{Alexey}{Burykin}, -% \name{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}, -% \namea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}, -% \name{Olivier}{Cardi}, -% \name{Samuele}{Carcagno}, -% \name{David}{Carella}, -% \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, -% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, -% \name{Manuel}{Carriba}, -% \name{Régis}{Caspar}, -% \name{Waldemar}{Celes}, -% \name{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}, -% \name{Winston}{Chang}, -% \name{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}, -% \name{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}, -% \name{Pehong}{Chen}, -% \name{Céline}{Chevalier}, -% \namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}, -% \name{Otfried}{Cheong}, -% \name{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}, -% \name{Pai~H.}{Chou}, -% \name{Pierre}{Chuvin}, -% \name{Yves}{Citoleux}, -% \name{Marian}{Clegg}, -% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, -% \name{Maurizio}{Codogno}, -% \name{Bernard}{Comrie}, -% \name{David~B.}{Cook}, -% \name{Emmanuel}{Cornet}, -% \name{Oliver}{Corff}, -% \name{Prakash}{Countcham}, -% \namea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}, -% \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, -% \name{Adrian}{Daerr}, -% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan}, -% \name{Patrick~W.}{Daly}, -% \name{Peter~T.}{Daniels}, -% \name{Holger}{Danielsson}, -% \name{Alice}{Davison}, -% \namea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}, -% \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}, -% \name{Sébastien}{Demoustier}, -% \name{Andreas}{Deininger}, -% \name{Éric}{Depardieu}, -% \namea{Ben}{De~Rydt}{DeRydt}, -% \name{Bernard}{Desgraupes}, -% \name{Cécile}{Desprairies}, -% \name{Sébastien}{Desreux}, -% \name{Christine}{Detig}, -% \name{Antoni~R.}{Diller}, -% \name{Gérard}{Dorel}, -% \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}, -% \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis}, -% \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer}, -% \name{Denys}{Duchier}, -% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}, -% \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja}, -% \name{Ta~Quang}{Dung}, -% \name{Patrick}{Egan}, -% \namea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}, -% \name{Brian}{Elmegaard}, -% \name{Danie}{Els}, ^^A booktabs -% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, -% \name{Thomas}{Esser}, -% \name{Gilhooly}{Etienne}, -% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt}, -% \name{Mike}{Fabian}, -% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns}, -% \name{Christian}{Faulhammer}, -% \name{Simon}{Fear}, ^^A booktabs -% \name{Jürgen}{Fenn}, ^^A l2tabu -% \name{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}, -% \name{Jeff}{Fessler}, -% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer}, -% \name{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}, -% \name{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}, -% \name{Daniel}{Flipo}, -% \name{Peter~L.}{Flom}, -% \name{Peter}{Flynn}, -% \name{Jim}{Fox}, ^^A dpfloat -% \namea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}, -% \namea{Danny~M.}{Fürniß}{Furniss}, -% \name{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}, -% \name{Federico}{Garcia}, -% \namea{Diego}{García~Morate}{Garcia~Morate}, -% \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, ^^A pict2e -% \namea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}, -% \name{Maarten}{Gelderman}, -% \name{Chuck}{Genschte}, -% \name{Jacques}{Gernet}, -% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, -% \name{Helen}{Gilhooly}, -% \name{Henri}{Giordan}% -% \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis}, -% \name{François}{Giron}, -% \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}, -% \name{Josiane}{Gonthier}, -% \name{Vitali}{Gontsharuk}, -% \name{Michel}{Goossens}, -% \namea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}, -% \name{Mathieu}{Goutelle}, -% \name{Bruce~K.}{Grant}, -% \name{Fraser}{Grant}, -% \namea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}, -% \name{Norman}{Gray}, -% \name{George~D.}{Greenwade}, -% \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}, -% \name{Loïc}{Grenon}, -% \name{Charles}{Grether}, -% \name{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}, -% \name{Olga~A.}{Grineva}, -% \name{Sébastien}{Grot}, -% \name{Micael}{Guignard}, -% \name{Marion}{Gunn}, -% \name{Guntermann}{Klaus}, -% \name{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}, -% \name{Thomas}{Hafner}, -% \name{Hans}{Hagen}, -% \name{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}, -% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi}, -% \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}, -% \name{Thorsten}{Hansen}, -% \name{Patrick}{Happel}, -% \name{Yannis}{Haralambous}, -% \name{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}, -% \name{Alexander}{Harin}, -% \name{Russel~L.}{Harris}, -% \name{Michael~A.}{Harrison}, -% \name{Stephen}{Hartke}, -% \name{Danny}{Heap}, -% \name{Jim}{Hefferon}, -% \name{André}{Heider}, -% \name{Thorsten}{Hein}, -% \name{Sten}{Hellman}, -% \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, -% \name{Yvon}{Henel}, ^^A l2tabu -% \name{Hartmut}{Henkel}, -% \name{Thomas}{Henlich}, ^^A marvosym% -% \name{Stephan}{Hennig}, -% \name{Florence}{Henry}, -% \name{Stephen}{Herborn}, -% \name{Jörg}{Hesoll}, -% \name{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}, -% \name{David}{Hoadley}, -% \name{Taco}{Hoekwater}, -% \name{Alan}{Hoenig}, -% \name{Joe}{Hogg}, -% \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}, -% \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, -% \namea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}, -% \name{Umstatter}{Horst}, -% \name{Don}{Hosek}, -% \name{Yufan}{Hu}, -% \name{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}, -% \name{Dave~W.}{Huseby}, -% \name{Helene}{Hyna}, -% \name{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}, -% \name{Hiroya}{Ikeda}, -% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov}, -% \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}, -% \name{Victor}{Ivrii}, -% \name{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}, -% \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}, -% \name{Youssef}{Jabri}, ^^A Arabi -% \name{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}, ^^A pearls -% \name{Roland}{Jacques}, -% \name{Christophe}{Jacquet}, -% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne}, -% \name{Radwan}{Jalam}, -% \name{Michael}{Janich}, -% \name{Frank}{Jensen}, -% \name{Alan}{Jeffrey}, -% \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten}, -% \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}, -% \name{Loïc}{Joly}, -% \name{David~M.}{Jones}, -% \name{Christophe}{Jorssen}, -% \name{Robert}{Juhasz}, -% \name{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}, -% \name{Stefan}{Junge}, -% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, -% \name{Akira}{Kakuto}, -% \name{Mikko}{Kanerva}, -% \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}, -% \name{David}{Kastrup}, -% \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, -% \name{Jonathan}{Kew}, ^^A xetex -% \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, -% \name{Ki-Joo}{Kim}, -% \name{Bil}{Kleb}, -% \name{Peter}{Kleiweg}, -% \name{Rune}{Kleveland}, -% \namea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}, -% \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, -% \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}, -% \name{Markus}{Kohm}, -% \name{Helmut}{Kopka}, -% \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}, -% \name{Adamantios}{Korais}, -% \name{Vincent}{Krakoviack}, -% \name{Kai}{Kratt}, -% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker}, -% \name{Siep}{Kroonenberg}, -% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}, -% \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, -% \name{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}, -% \name{Florian}{Kulzer}, -% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}, -% \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, -% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}, -% \name{Stéphane}{Laborde}, -% \name{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}, -% \name{Klaus}{Lagally}, -% \name{Leslie}{Lamport}, -% \name{Fabio}{Lanari}, -% \name{Robert}{Lange}, -% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr}, -% \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, -% \name{Henning}{Larsen}, -% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes}, -% \name{Andris}{Lasis}, -% \name{Christian}{Laucou}, -% \name{Jean-Philippe}{Lauffenburger}, -% \name{Arnaud}{Launay}, -% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet}, -% \name{Boris}{Lavva}, -% \name{André}{Lebacq}, -% \name{Olivier}{Lecarme}, -% \name{Jacques}{Leclerc}, -% \name{Iksop}{Lee}, -% \namea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}, -% \name{Jeanne}{Legrand}, -% \name{Philipp}{Lehman}, -% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, -% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt}, -% \namea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}, -% \name{Stéphane}{Lepolozec}, -% \namea{Julien}{Le~Thuaut}{LeThuaut}, -% \namea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}, -% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg}, -% \name{Knut}{Lickert}, -% \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}, -% \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}, -% \name{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}, -% \name{Pierre}{Lobel}, -% \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}, -% \name{Stoffel}{Lombard}, -% \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}, -% \name{Tristan}{Lorino}, -% \name{Tim}{Love}, -% \name{Vincent}{Lozano}, -% \name{Daniel~H.}{Luecking}, -% \name{Ken}{Lunde}, -% \name{Anders}{Lyhne}, -% \namea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}, -% \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}, -% \name{Lars}{Madsen}, -% \name{Richard}{Mahoney}, -% \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}, -% \name{Pierre}{Malecki}, -% \name{Pascal}{Marchand}, -% \name{Bob}{Margolis}, -% \name{Cécile}{Marin}, -% \name{Nicolas}{Markey}, -% \name{Marcus}{Marr}, -% \name{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}, -% \name{Alan}{Marshall}, -% \name{Terry}{Mart}, -% \name{Éric}{Martini}, -% \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, -% \name{Henri}{Massias}, -% \name{Stephen}{Matthews}, -% \name{Andreas}{Matthias}, -% \name{Sven}{Mattisson}, -% \name{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}, -% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}, -% \name{Ben}{McKay}, -% \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, -% \name{Sébastien}{Mengin}, -% \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}, -% \name{Yanick}{Michou}, -% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, -% \name{Young~Joon}{Moon}, -% \name{Ross}{Moore}, -% \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}, -% \name{Florence}{Morgiensztern}, -% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}, -% \name{Michael~A.}{Morrison}, -% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}, -% \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}, -% \name{Andrei}{Nacu}, -% \name{}{National Geographic Society}, -% \name{}{National Institute of the Korean}, -% \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}, -% \name{Lee}{Netherton}, -% \name{Frank}{Neukam}, -% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen}, -% \name{Julien}{Nicolas}, -% \name{Elke}{Niedermair}, -% \name{Michael}{Niedermair}, -% \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}, ^^A pict2e -% \name{Josselin}{Noirel}, -% \name{Tim}{Null}, -% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, -% \name{Tobias}{Oetiker}, -% \name{Haruhito}{Okamura}, -% \name{Mariusz}{Olko}, -% \name{Tanguy}{Ortolo}, -% \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, -% \name{Jörg}{Ott}, -% \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}, -% \name{Scott}{Pakin}, -% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}, -% \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, -% \name{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}, -% \name{Hubert}{Partl}, -% \name{Oren}{Patashnik}, -% \name{Jonathan}{Pechta}, -% \name{Kasper}{Peeters}, -% \namea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}, -% \name{Matthias}{Pelger}, -% \name{Philippe}{Pelletier}, -% \namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}, -% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}, -% \name{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}, -% \name{Paul}{Pichaureau}, -% \name{Éric}{Picheral}, -% \name{Bruno}{Piguet}, -% \namea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}, -% \name{John}{Plaice}, -% \name{Yves}{Plassereau}, -% \name{Ariane}{Poissonnier}, -% \name{Maria}{Polinsky}, -% \name{Philippe}{Pons}, -% \name{Monique}{Pontault}, -% \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}, -% \name{Fabrice}{Popineau}, -% \name{Nico}{Poppelier}, -% \name{Rama}{Porrat}, -% \namea{Camille-Aimé}{Possamaï}{Possamai}, -% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, -% \namea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}, -% \name{Glanville}{Price}, -% \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, -% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz}, -% \name{Bernd}{Raichle}, -% \name{Claude}{Raimond}, -% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}, -% \name{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}, -% \name{Paul}{Rascoe}, -% \name{Keranen}{Reino}, -% \name{Arthur}{Reutenauer}, -% \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}, -% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}, -% \name{François}{Richaudeau}, -% \name{Luis}{Rivera}, -% \name{Yuri}{Robbers}, -% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}, -% \name{Will}{Robertson}, -% \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel}, -% \name{Christian}{Rolland}, -% \name{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}, -% \name{Chris~A.}{Rowley}, -% \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}, -% \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}, -% \name{Young}{Ryu}, ^^A txfonts -% \name{Enn}{Saar}, -% \name{David}{Samsoen}, -% \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, -% \name{Larry}{Sanger}, -% \name{Morgan}{Sangeux}, -% \name{Thierry}{Sanjuan}, -% \name{Eddie}{Saudrais}, -% \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}, -% \name{Bernd}{Schandl}, -% \name{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}, -% \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer}, -% \name{Walter}{Schmidt}, -% \name{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}, -% \name{Uwe}{Schneider}, -% \namea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}, -% \name{Joachim}{Schrod}, -% \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}, ^^A everysel, ragged2e, multitoc -% \name{Ulrich}{Schwartz}, -% \name{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}, -% \name{Michael}{Shell}, -% \vname{Shin}{Jungshik}, -% \namea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}, -% \name{Ali}{Shoukat}, -% \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, -% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}, -% \name{Sindhu}{Singh}, -% \name{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}, -% \name{Petra}{Schlager}, -% \name{Kristian}{Slimak}, -% \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan}, -% \name{John}{Smith}, -% \name{Robin~S.}{Socha}, -% \name{Nick}{Sofroniou}, -% \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}, -% \name{Lianyi}{Song}, -% \name{Yves}{Soulet}, -% \name{Gérard}{Sournia}, -% \name{Pierre-François}{Souyri}, -% \name{Arjen}{Steiner}, -% \name{D.~P.}{Story}, -% \name{Éric}{Streit}, -% \name{Ralf}{Stubner}, -% \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}, -% \name{Cyrille}{Suss}, -% \name{Robert~S.}{Sutor}, -% \name{Chris}{Swoyer}, -% \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}, -% \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, -% \name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}, -% \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}, -% \name{Philip}{Taylor}, -% \namea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}, -% \name{Yves}{Ternon}, -% \name{Manfred}{Thibud}, -% \name{Christina}{Thiele}, -% \name{Harold}{Thimbleby}, -% \name{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}, -% \name{Aurélien}{Thureau}, -% \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}, -% \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, ^^A pict2e -% \namea{Ton}{'t~Lam}{tLam}, -% \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis}, -% \name{Cezare}{Tomczak}, -% \name{Laurent}{Tordella}, -% \name{Mark}{Trettin}, ^^A l2tabu -% \name{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}, -% \name{Ahto}{Truu}, -% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, -% \name{Hideo}{Umeki}, -% \name{Un}{Koaunghi}, -% \name{Turgut}{Uyar}, -% \name{Jari}{Vaario}, -% \name{Christian}{Valantin}, -% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum}, -% \namea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}, -% \name{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}, -% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin}, -% \name{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}, -% \name{Didier}{Verna}, -% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco}, -% \name{Boris}{Veytsman}, -% \name{Alexandre}{Vial}, -% \name{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}, -% \name{Florence M.}{Voegelin}, -% \name{Martin}{Vogel}, -% \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, -% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}, -% \namea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}, -% \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, -% \name{David}{Walden}, -% \name{Jimmy}{Wales}, -% \name{Nigel}{Ward}, -% \name{John}{Warnock}, -% \name{Douglas}{Waud}% -% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}, -% \name{Stephan~B.}{Webanck}, -% \name{Eduard}{Werner}, -% \name{Daphne}{West}, -% \name{Ferenc}{Wettl}, -% \name{Graham}{Williams}, -% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, -% \namea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}, -% \name{Alexandre}{Wolf},% -% \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}, -% \name{Élisabeth}{Wolkowski}, -% \name{Mark}{Wooding}, -% \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}, -% \name{Tim}{Wright}, -% \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk}, -% \name{Damien}{Wyart}, -% \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda}, -% \name{Adi}{Zaimi}, -% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}, -% \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}, -% \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}, -% \name{Charlie~S.}{Zender}, -% \name{Federico}{Zenith}, -% \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}, -% \name{Uwe}{Ziegenhagen}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\ \or\relax\ et\ \fi -% \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}.\par -% \end{raggedright} -% ^^A NEW HISTORY END -% ^^A SEE.. -% \ifcase\LANG\relax -% \index{Suffixes|see{Extensions}} -% \or\relax -% \index{Extensions|see{Suffixes}} -% \fi -% \iftrue % ^^A to index authors from the bibliography (citations replace the page number) -% \bname{}{National Institute of the Korean}{korean-beg}% -% \bname{Iksop}{Lee}{kor-lan}% -% \bname{Bruce~K.}{Grant}{korean-chars}% -% \bname{Philippe}{Pelletier}{pelletier2003,pelletier2004,pelletier2007}% -% \bname{Philippe}{Pons}{pons2007}% -% \bname{Pierre-François}{Souyri}{pons2007,souyri1999}% -% \bnamea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}{japon-dc}% -% \bname{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}{chineco}% -% \bname{Yves}{Citoleux}{chineco}% -% \bnamea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}{chineco}% -% \bname{Jacques}{Gernet}{gernet1,gernet2,gernet3}% -% \bname{Viviane}{Alleton}{alleton2008}% -% \bnamea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}{mace2008}% -% \bname{Gérard}{Dorel}{atlasmi-us}% -% \bnamea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}{atlas-in}% -% \bname{Guillaume}{Balavoine}{atlas-in}% -% \bname{Pascal}{Marchand}{atlas-ru}% -% \bname{Cyrille}{Suss}{atlas-ru}% -% \bnamea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}{atlas-amla}% -% \bnamea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}{atlas-amla}% -% \bname{Yves}{Plassereau}{atlasmi-eu}% -% \bname{Henri}{Giordan}{atlasmi-eu}% -% \bname{Yves}{Ternon}{atlasmi-eu}% -% \bname{Cécile}{Marin}{atlasmi-eu}% -% \bname{Thierry}{Sanjuan}{sanjuan,chineco}% -% \bnamea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}{sanjuan}% -% \bname{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}{bisanwa}% -% \bnamea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}{bisanwa}% -% \bname{Victor}{Ivrii}{ivrii2007a,ivrii2007b}% -% \bname{Roland}{Breton}{breton2003,atlasmi-mo}% -% \bname{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}{breton2003}% -% \bname{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}{breton2003}% -% \bname{Stephen}{Matthews}{comrie2004}% -% \bname{Maria}{Polinsky}{comrie2004}% -% \bname{Catherine}{Bricout}{comrie2004}% -% \bname{Petra}{Schlager}{schlager2007}% -% \bname{Manfred}{Thibud}{schlager2007}% -% \bname{Monique}{Pontault}{OIF}% -% \bname{Alexandre}{Wolf}{OIF}% -% \bname{Christian}{Valantin}{OIF,OIF2003}% -% \bname{Florence}{Morgiensztern}{OIF,OIF2003}% -% \bname{Josiane}{Gonthier}{OIF}% -% \bname{Ariane}{Poissonnier}{AF}% -% \bname{Gérard}{Sournia}{AF}% -% \bnamea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}{AF}% -% \bname{Glanville}{Price}{LOE}% -% \bname{Peter~T.}{Daniels}{WWS}% -% \bname{William}{Bright}{WWS}% -% \bname{Bernard}{Comrie}{comrie1990,comrie2004}% -% \bname{Tristan}{Lorino}{lorino2006}% -% \bname{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}{ramsey1989,kor-lan}% -% \bname{Pierre}{Chuvin}{chuvin2008}% -% \bnamea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}{chuvin2008}% -% \bname{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}{chuvin2008}% -% \bnamea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% -% \bname{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}{lua2005,lua2006}% -% \bnamea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}{lua2006}% -% \bname{Waldemar}{Celes}{lua2006}% -% \bnamea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}{ppvl}% -% \bname{Alan}{Marshall}{marshall1991}% -% \bname{Patrick}{Andries}{andries2008}% -% \bname{Roland}{Jacques}{ppvl}% -% \bname{Tobias}{Berndt}{berndt2007}% -% \bname{Joachim}{Schrod}{ilatex,guntermann1986,detig1994}% -% \bname{Guntermann}{Klaus}{guntermann1986}% -% \bname{Christine}{Detig}{detig1994}% -% \bname{Éric}{Martini}{martini2008}% -% \bname{Olivier}{Binisti}{rich2005}% -% \bname{Patrick}{Boman}{boman2005}% -% \bname{Christian}{Laucou}{boman2005}% -% \bname{François}{Richaudeau}{rich2005}% -% \bname{Patrick}{Burgel}{pluriels}% -% \bname{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}{cjkomega}% -% \bname{Haruhito}{Okamura}{cjkomega}% -% \bname{}{National Geographic Society}{atlas-china}% -% \bname{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}{beebe}% -% \bname{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{occi}% -% \bname{Elke}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% -% \bname{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}{lipkin}% -% \bname{Michael}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}% -% \bname{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}{fnul,fgram,conju}% -% \bname{Claude}{Raimond}{enul}% -% \bname{Paul}{Rascoe}{texasmaps}% -% \bname{Christophe}{Jacquet}{mlatex}% -% \bname{Alice}{Davison}{hindi99}% -% \bname{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}{basque}% -% \bname{Jonathan}{Kew}{xetex}% -% \bname{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}{lowlands}% -% \bname{François}{Giron}{surlatex}% -% \bname{Patrick}{Egan}{nomentbl}% -% \bname{Brian}{Elmegaard}{nomentbl}% -% \bname{Ferenc}{Wettl}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% -% \bname{Stéphane}{Aicardi}{aicardi}% -% \bname{Jouko}{Arponen}{practical}% -% \bname{Jason}{Baldridge}{jason}% -% \bname{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}{fancybox}% -% \bname{Frank}{Jensen}{calc}% -% \bname{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}{calc}% -% \bname{Akira}{Kakuto}{kakuto}% -% \bname{Lee}{Netherton}{nomencl}% -% \bname{Bernd}{Schandl}{nomencl}% -% \bname{Vartan}{Akopian}{armtex}% -% \bname{A.J.}{Alex}{malayalam,malayalam-o}% -% \bnamea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}{china-h}% -% \bnamea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}{icelandic}% -% \bnamea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}% -% \bnamea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}{ethno}% -% \bname{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}{ethno}% -% \bnamea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}{ingo}% -% \bname{Donald}{Arseneau}{notoccite,placeins,cite,overcite,wrapfig,chapterbib,url,ifmtarg}% -% \bname{Gonçal}{Badenes}{catalan}% -% \bname{Pierre}{Basso}{bibtopic}% -% \bname{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}{mongolian}% -% \bname{David}{Bausum}{trm-b,trm}% -% \bname{Benjamin}{Bayart}{JMPL1,texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Thierry}{Bayet}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Claudio}{Beccari}{beccari1998,latin,italian,beccari-pj-2007-1}% -% \bname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}{rubber}% -% \bnamea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}{magyar}% -% \bname{Jens}{Berger}{hypernat}% -% \bname{Alexander}{Berdnikov}{maccents,X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% -% \bname{Karl}{Berry}{impatient,fr-impatient,berry1990,berry2003}% -% \bname{Berhanu}{Beyene}{ethiop}% -% \bname{Javier}{Bezos}{spanish4,spanish,guarani,titletoc}% -% \bname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}{aleph}% -% \bnamea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}{magyar}% -% \bnamea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}{latex-synthex}% -% \bname{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}{bulgarian}% -% \bname{Victor}{Boyko}{cmcyralt/russian.sty}% -% \bname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,dutch,english,irish,norsk,welsh,basque,% -% icelandic,catalan,latin,magyar,bulgarian,turkish,LaTeXbase,galician,galician2,slovak,italian,BEP,% -% frenchb,scottish,swedish,romanian,samin,finnish,interlingua,bahasa,bahasam,russianb1,danish,hebrew2,% -% czech,serbian,croatian,germanb,ngermanb,portuges,breton,esperanto,estonian,polish,ukraineb,greek,% -% lsorbian,usorbian,albanian,slovene,i-ntg,ntg,proc,classes,letter,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F}% -% \bname{Felix}{Braun}{jura}% -% \bname{Jim}{Breen}{breen}% -% \bname{Mustafa}{Burc}{turkish}% -% \bname{Alexey}{Burykin}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}% -% \bname{David}{Carella}{carella}% -% \bname{David~P.}{Carlisle}{LaTeXbase,xr,afterpage,ltxdoc,xr-hyper,color,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,ltclass,ifthen,backref,textcase}% -% \bname{Manuel}{Carriba}{galician,galician2}% -% \bname{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}{latex-synthex,ftb,TLC2F,jcc2008,ftds}% -% \bname{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}{kanji}% -% \bname{Pehong}{Chen}{chen1988}% -% \bnamea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}{slovak}% -% \bname{Bernard}{Desgraupes}{meta-des,desgraupes,unicode-des}% -% \bname{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}{subfigure,captcont,subfig}% -% \bname{Maurizio}{Codogno}{italian}% -% \bname{Oliver}{Corff}{mlsquick,pentaglot,mongol-web,montex}% -% \bname{Prakash}{Countcham}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Sergueï}{Dachian}{armtex}% -% \bname{Arnak}{Dalalyan}{armtex}% -% \bname{Patrick~W.}{Daly}{fullpage,dnatbib,natnotes,kopka,daly1998}% -% \bnamea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}{portuges}% -% \bname{Éric}{Depardieu}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}{montex}% -% \bname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}{texfaq-fr,shorttoc,minitoc-fr,minitoc}% -% \bnamea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}{BEP,TBT,comment,i-ntg,ntg}% -% \bname{Behdad}{Esfahbod}{farsi}% -% \bname{Mike}{Fabian}{cjk-suse}% -% \bname{Robin}{Fairbairns}{texfaq-en}% -% \bname{Jürgen}{Fenn}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen,Fenn-pj-2006-4}% -% \bname{Daniel}{Flipo}{frenchb,CIL2E}% -% \bname{Peter}{Flynn}{flynn,veryshort,Flynn-pj-2005-3,Flynn-pj-2006-4}% -% \bname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}{farsi}% -% \bname{Michel}{Goossens}{latex-web,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,TLGC}% -% \bname{Mathieu}{Goutelle}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Fraser}{Grant}{irish,scottish}% -% \bnamea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}{gr-mil,gr-mmil,gr-fsl}% -% \bname{Norman}{Gray}{urlbst}% -% \bname{George~D.}{Greenwade}{greenwade}% -% \bname{Enrico}{Gregorio}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,gregorio2007}% -% \bname{Olga~A.}{Grineva}{maccents}% -% \bname{Marion}{Gunn}{irish}% -% \bname{Hans}{Hagen}{aleph-hagen,style-hagen,pdftex,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,luatex}% -% \bname{Hartmut}{Henkel}{luatex}% -% \bname{Taco}{Hoekwater}{luatex,luatex2007}% -% \bnamea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}{han,han2000,pdftex,vietnam,han2003,han2008,han2008a}% -% \bname{Patrick}{Happel}{lipsum}% -% \bname{Yannis}{Haralambous}{yannis1990,YH2004,YH2007,yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998,yannis2004,yannis+a}% -% \bname{Alexander}{Harin}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% -% \bname{Michael~A.}{Harrison}{chen1988}% -% \bname{Sten}{Hellman}{swedish}% -% \bname{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}{norsk}% -% \bname{Yvon}{Henel}{texfaq-fr,l2tabufr}% -% \bname{Thomas}{Henlich}{marvosym}% -% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% -% \bname{Florence}{Henry}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{David}{Hoadley}{btxfaq}% -% \bname{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}{norsk}% -% \bname{Umstatter}{Horst}{romanian}% -% \bname{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}{norsk}% -% \bname{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}{basque}% -% \bname{Youssef}{Jabri}{arabi}% -% \bname{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}{pearls}% -% \bname{Michael}{Janich}{polish}% -% \bname{Regnor}{Jernsletten}{samin}% -% \bname{Zhuhan}{Jiang}{vruler}% -% \bname{Loïc}{Joly}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{David~M.}{Jones}{hangcaption}% -% \bname{Christophe}{Jorssen}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Robert}{Juhasz}{romanian}% -% \bname{Mikko}{Kanerva}{finnish}% -% \bname{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}{thailatex,thaistd}% -% \bname{Axel}{Kielhorn}{koma,komab}% -% \bname{Ki-Joo}{Kim}{bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim,latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim}% -% \bname{Peter}{Kleiweg}{interlingua}% -% \bname{Rune}{Kleveland}{norsk}% -% \bname{Jörg}{Knappen}{bahasa,bahasam,esperanto,knappen2004}% -% \bname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}{cmt,texbook,metabook,ftb}% -% \bname{Markus}{Kohm}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bname{Yuri}{Robbers}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bname{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}{robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bname{Helmut}{Kopka}{kopka,kopka-bd1,kopka-bd2,kopka-bd3}% -% \bname{Attila}{Koppanyi}{magyar}% -% \bname{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}{antomega}% -% \bname{Dmitry}{Ivanov}{antomega}% -% \bname{Manfred}{Kudlek}{ethiop}% -% \bname{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}{effective}% -% \bname{Olaf}{Kummer}{ethiop}% -% \bnamea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}{alnumsec}% -% \bname{Klaus}{Lagally}{arabtex2,arabtex}% -% \bname{Leslie}{Lamport}{LaTeXbase,lamport-mkx,latex-manual,ntg,proc,classes,letter}% -% \bname{Olga~G.}{Lapko}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC,russianb1,FULLCYR,floatrow,russianb,ukraineb}% -% \bname{Henning}{Larsen}{danish}% -% \bname{Boris}{Lavva}{hebrew2}% -% \bname{Olivier}{Lecarme}{lecarme}% -% \bname{Jacques}{Leclerc}{tlfq}% -% \bname{Philipp}{Lehman}{TFIG}% -% \bname{Werner}{Lemberg}{russianb1,cjk,cjk2,vietnam,dblaccnt,cyrguide,ukraineb}% -% \bnamea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Knut}{Lickert}{minutes}% -% \bname{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}{fncychap}% -% \bname{Anselm}{Lingnau}{float}% -% \bnamea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}{czech}% -% \bname{Maurizio}{Loreti}{sfheaders}% -% \bname{Tim}{Love}{timlove1994,timlove}% -% \bname{Vincent}{Lozano}{lozano}% -% \bname{Ken}{Lunde}{lunde1993,lunde,lunde1999}% -% \bname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}{turkish}% -% \bname{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}{russianb}% -% \bname{Bob}{Margolis}{bahasam}% -% \bname{Nicolas}{Markey}{texfaq-fr,splitbib,ttb}% -% \bname{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Terry}{Mart}{bahasa,bahasam}% -% \bname{Sven}{Mattisson}{slatex}% -% \bname{Rowland}{McDonnell}{sectsty}% -% \bname{Surapant}{Meknavin}{thailatex}% -% \bname{Sébastien}{Mengin}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Jochen}{Metzinger}{ethiop}% -% \bname{Frank}{Mittelbach}{LaTeXbase,classes,letter,FMI1990,FMI1992,slides,multicol,varioref,doc,dblaccnt,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,enc-inter,TLGC}% -% \bname{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}{komab,koma}% -% \bname{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,Mori1-pj-2007-1,Mori2-pj-2007-1}% -% \bnamea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}{galician,galician2}% -% \bnamea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}{serbian}% -% \bname{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}{LH/russian.sty}% -% \bname{Frank}{Neukam}{koma,komab}% -% \bname{Rolf}{Niepraschk}{pict2e,texfaq-de}% -% \bname{Josef}{Tkadlec}{pict2e}% -% \bname{Josselin}{Noirel}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hypcap,ifpdf,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,makerobust}% -% \bname{Mariusz}{Olko}{polski}% -% \bnamea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}{swedish}% -% \bnamea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}{croatian}% -% \bname{Scott}{Pakin}{dtxtut,symbols,newcommand}% -% \bname{Palash~Baran}{Pal}{bangtex}% -% \bname{Anshuman}{Pandey}{pandey1999,devanagari}% -% \bname{John}{Smith}{devanagari}% -% \bname{Harold}{Thimbleby}{seealso,seealso1}% -% \bname{Dominik}{Wujastyk}{devanagari}% -% \bname{Kevin}{Carmody}{devanagari}% -% \bname{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}{devanagari}% -% \bname{Oren}{Patashnik}{btxdoc,btxhak}% -% \bname{Kasper}{Peeters}{hypertex}% -% \bname{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}{norsk}% -% \bname{Bruno}{Piguet}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{John}{Plaice}{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}% -% \bname{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}{thailatex,thai-how}% -% \bname{Nico}{Poppelier}{BEP}% -% \bname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}{farsi}% -% \bname{Sebastian}{Rahtz}{latex-web,pdftex,hyperref.web,hyperref,TLGC,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,backref,nameref,rotating}% -% \bname{Leonor}{Barroca}{rotating}% -% \bname{Bernd}{Raichle}{germanb,ngermanb,texfaq-de,romaniantex}% -% \bname{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}{portuges}% -% \bname{Keranen}{Reino}{finnish}% -% \bname{Arthur}{Reutenauer}{reutenauer2008}% -% \bnamea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}{romaniantex}% -% \bname{Christian}{Rolland}{breton,rolland1999}% -% \bname{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}{esperanto}% -% \bname{Young}{Ryu}{txfonts}% -% \bname{Enn}{Saar}{estonian}% -% \bnamea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}{basque}% -% \bname{Eddie}{Saudrais}{saudrais2001,saudrais2005}% -% \bnamea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}{polish}% -% \bname{Tobias}{Schlemmer}{slovak}% -% \bname{Walter}{Schmidt}{ngermanb,Schmidt-pj-2006-1,psnfss,fftex}% -% \bnamea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}{multitoc,pdftex,msch2007}% -% \bname{Michael}{Shell}{btxfaq}% -% \bname{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}{ukraineb}% -% \bname{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}{thailatex}% -% \bname{Jankovic}{Slobodan}{serbian}% -% \bname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}{caption2,cap-anleitung,caption,caption-eng,rotfloat}% -% \bname{Joseph~A.}{Wright}{trivfloat}% -% \bname{D.~P.}{Story}{dpstory}% -% \bname{Éric}{Streit}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}{beccari1998,greek,syro2002,greek-ba}% -% \bnamea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}{varsects}% -% \bnamea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}{frenchle,frenchpro,frenchperso}% -% \bname{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}{quotchap}% -% \bname{Mark}{Trettin}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen}% -% \bname{Stefan}{Ulrich}{bibtopic}% -% \bname{Un}{Koaunghi}{HLATEX}% -% \bname{Turgut}{Uyar}{turkish}% -% \bname{Piet}{van~Oostrum}{teximpl}% -% \bnamea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}{texfaq-fr,thomasvo}% -% \bname{Vladimir}{Volovich}{russianb1,cyrguide,ukraineb}% -% \bname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}{Bechtolsheim+TB11-3-409,tex-bech}% -% \bname{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}{platex-pl}% -% \bname{Eduard}{Werner}{lsorbian,usorbian}% -% \bname{Graham}{Williams}{tcat}% -% \bname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}{stdclsdv,needspace,tocloft,abstract,appendix,tocbibind,tocvsec2,ccaption,docmfp,memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3,romannum,ifmtarg,ledmac,ledpar,ledarab,chngpage}% -% \bnamea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}{docstrip-prog,polski}% -% \bname{Damien}{Wyart}{texfaq-fr}% -% \bname{Adi}{Zaimi}{albanian}% -% \bname{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}{slovene}% -% \bnamea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}{latin}% -% \bname{Charlie~S.}{Zender}{latex-cheat}% -% \bname{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,lhcyr}% -% \bnamea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}{slovene}% -% \bname{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}{impatient,fr-impatient}% -% \bname{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}{impatient,fr-impatient}% -% \bname{Mark}{Alford}{alford}% -% \bname{Walter}{Appel}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Céline}{Chevalier}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Emmanuel}{Cornet}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Sébastien}{Desreux}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Paul}{Pichaureau}{ltximpat}% -% \bname{Helmer}{Aslasken}{aslaksen,aslaksen2}% -% \bname{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}{arabe}% -% \bname{Cécile}{Desprairies}{arabe,japo,chinois,russe}% -% \bname{Antoni~R.}{Diller}{diller}% -% \bname{Fabrice}{Popineau}{ftds}% -% \bname{Alan}{Jeffrey}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,ltnews,ltclass}% -% \bname{Chris~A.}{Rowley}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,rowley1999,calc}% -% \bnamea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}{LaTeXbase,letter}% -% \bname{Peter}{Breitenlohner}{etex}% -% \bname{Otfried}{Cheong}{cheong}% -% \bname{Pai~H.}{Chou}{chou}% -% \bname{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}{fergu90}% -% \bname{Maarten}{Gelderman}{gelderman}% -% \bname{Chuck}{Genschte}{pdfspec}% -% \bname{John}{Warnock}{pdfspec}% -% \bname{Helen}{Gilhooly}{japo}% -% \bname{Gilhooly}{Etienne}{japo}% -% \bname{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}{latex-web}% -% \bname{Ross}{Moore}{latex-web}% -% \bname{Robert~S.}{Sutor}{latex-web}% -% \bname{Thorsten}{Hansen}{multibib,bibunits}% -% \bname{Éric}{Picheral}{yannis1995}% -% \bname{Alan}{Hoenig}{unbound}% -% \bname{Hiroya}{Ikeda}{platex-jp}% -% \bname{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}{styleuse}% -% \bname{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}{styleuse}% -% \bname{Siep}{Kroonenberg}{MAPS22-13}% -% \bname{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}{lachand}% -% \bname{Denys}{Duchier}{docstrip-prog}% -% \bname{Mark}{Wooding}{docstrip-prog}% -% \bname{Young~Joon}{Moon}{young-mm}% -% \bname{Tobias}{Oetiker}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% -% \bname{Hubert}{Partl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% -% \bname{Helene}{Hyna}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% -% \bname{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}% -% \bname{Tanguy}{Ortolo}{ortolo}% -% \bname{Jeanne}{Legrand}{ortolo}% -% \bnamea{}{{\LaTeX3}~{Project}~{Team}}{latex3}{ltnews,proc,docstrip,ltoutput,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,encguide,cyrguide} -% \bname{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}{park2003}% -% \bname{Jonathan}{Pechta}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% -% \bname{Federico}{Zenith}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% -% \bname{Holger}{Danielsson}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% -% \bnamea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}% -% \bnamea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}{piska}% -% \bname{Mimi}{Burbank}{piska}% -% \bname{Christina}{Thiele}{piska,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% -% \bname{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}{venkatesan}% -% \bname{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% -% \bname{Florence M.}{Voegelin}{voeg}% -% \bname{Daphne}{West}{russe}% -% \bname{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}{russe}% -% \bname{Thomas}{Hafner}{texfaq-de}% -% \bname{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}{chinois}% -% \bname{Lianyi}{Song}{chinois}% -% \bname{Charles}{Grether}{chinois}% -% \bname{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}{syro2002}% -% \bname{Nick}{Sofroniou}{syro2002}% -% \bname{}{TWS-TDS}{ftds,tds}% -% \bname{Hideo}{Umeki}{geometry}% -% \bname{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}{TLC2F,hufflen}% -% \bname{Benoît}{Belet}{TLC2F}% -% \bname{Yves}{Soulet}{TLC2F}% -% \bnamea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}{TLC2F,jcc2008,yannis+a}% -% \bname{Samuele}{Carcagno}{carcagno}% -% \bname{Simon}{Fear}{booktabs}% -% \bname{Danie}{Els}{booktabs}% -% \bname{Martin}{Vogel}{marvosym}% -% \bname{Don}{Hosek}{morefloats}% -% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}% -% \bnamea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}{pict2e}% -% \bname{Winston}{Chang}{latexsheet}% -% \bname{Didier}{Verna}{minitoc-hyper}% -% \bname{Bernd}{Jaehne}{minitoc-hyper}% -% \bname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}{minitoc-hyper}% -% \bname{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}{ltx-primer,nomencl}% -% \bname{C.~S.}{Yogananda}{kannadatex}% -% \bname{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}{kannadatex}% -% \bname{Vadim}{Maslov}{cmcyralt/russian.sty,cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}% -% \bname{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}{Schmitz-pj-2007-1}% -% \bname{Federico}{Garcia}{Garcia-pj-2006-4,garcia2007}% -% \bname{Boris}{Veytsman}{Veytsman-pj-2006-4-design,nomencl}% -% \bname{Sindhu}{Singh}{Singh-pj-2006-4}% -% \bname{Will}{Robertson}{Robertson-pj-2006-3}% -% \bname{Stephen}{Hartke}{Hartke-pj-2006-1}% -% \bname{Jim}{Hefferon}{Hefferon-pj-2005-4,Hefferon-pj-2006-4}% -% \bname{David}{Walden}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% -% \bname{Philip}{Taylor}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,taylor1996}% -% \bname{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,talbot2004,novices,flowfram,ffuserguide,talbot-admin,talbot-phd,talbot-thesis,talbot-mini}% -% \bname{Joe}{Hogg}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}% -% \bnamea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}{Hoeppner-pj-2005-3}% -% \bname{Peter~L.}{Flom}{Flom-pj-2005-2,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,Flom-pj-2005-4}% -% \bname{Douglas}{Waud}{Waud-pj-2005-1}% -% \bname{Tim}{Null}{Waud-pj-2005-1,Null-pj-2005-2-bh02,Null-pj-2005-3-bh03}% -% \bname{Michael~A.}{Morrison}{morrison}% -% \bname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}{TLGC}% -% \bnamea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}{TLGC,voss2006}% -% \bname{Christian}{Faulhammer}{preusse}% -% \bname{Ulrich}{Schwartz}{preusse}% -% \bnamea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}{preusse}% -% \bname{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}{LMP}% -% \bname{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}{LMP}% -% \bpack{xargs}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}% -% \bpack{chngpage}{chngpage}% -% \bpack{ledmac}{ledmac}% -% \bpack{ledpar}{ledpar}% -% \bpack{ledarab}{ledarab}% -% \bpack{afoot}{ledarab}% -% \bpack{frenchle}{frenchle}% -% \bpack{frenchpro}{frenchpro,frenchperso}% -% \bpack{flowfram}{flowfram,ffuserguide}% -% \bpack{nomentbl}{nomentbl}% -% \bpack{minitoc}{minitoc-fr,minitoc}% -% \bpack{Aleph}{aleph,aleph-hagen}% -% \bpack{dblaccnt}{dblaccnt}% -% \bpack{nomencl}{nomencl}% -% \bpack{hypernat}{hypernat}% -% \bpack{fancybox}{fancybox}% -% \bpack{shorttoc}{shorttoc}% -% \bpack{appendix}{appendix}% -% \bpack{babel}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}% -% \bpack{hyperref}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}% -% \bpack{backref}{backref}% -% \bpack{nameref}{nameref}% -% \bpack{rotating}{rotating}% -% \bpack{hypcap}{hypcap}% -% \bpack{ifpdf}{ifpdf}% -% \bpack{notoccite}{notoccite}% -% \bpack{placeins}{placeins}% -% \bpack{tocbibind}{tocbibind}% -% \bpack{tocloft}{tocloft}% -% \bpack{titletoc}{titletoc}% -% \bpack{titlesec}{titletoc}% -% \bpacka{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}{arabtex2,arabtex}% -% \bpacka{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}{xetex}% -% \bpack{minutes}{minutes}% -% \bpack{needspace}{needspace}% -% \bpack{txfonts}{txfonts}% -% \bpack{ifmtarg}{ifmtarg}% -% \bpack{abstract}{abstract}% -% \bpack{xr}{xr}% -% \bpack{textcase}{textcase}% -% \bpack{ethiop}{ethiop}% -% \bpack{sectsty}{sectsty}% -% \bpack{subfig}{subfig}% -% \bpack{comment}{comment}% -% \bpack{ccaption}{ccaption}% -% \bpack{caption}{caption,caption-eng}% -% \bpack{caption2}{caption2,cap-anleitung}% -% \bpack{bibtopic}{bibtopic}% -% \bpack{bibunits}{bibunits}% -% \bpack{chapterbib}{chapterbib}% -% \bpack{multibib}{multibib}% -% \bpack{hangcaption}{hangcaption}% -% \bpack{varsects}{varsects}% -% \bpack{xr-hyper}{xr-hyper}% -% \bpack{stdclsdv}{stdclsdv}% -% \bpack{CJK}{aslaksen,aslaksen2,chou,cjk-suse,cjk,cjk2,kile-cjk}% -% \bpack{docstrip}{docstrip,docstrip-prog}% -% \btool{urlbst}{urlbst}% -% \btool{rubber}{rubber}% -% \btool{newcommand}{newcommand}% -% \bpack{float}{float}% -% \bpack{floatrow}{floatrow}% -% \bpack{trivfloat}{trivfloat}% -% \bpack{rotfloat}{rotfloat}% -% \bpack{fncychap}{fncychap}% -% \bpack{quotchap}{quotchap}% -% \bpack{romannum}{romannum}% -% \bpack{sfheaders}{sfheaders}% -% \bpack{alnumsec}{alnumsec}% -% \bpack{captcont}{captcont}% -% \bpack{vruler}{vruler}% -% \bpack{doc}{doc}% -% \bpack{shortverb}{doc}% -% \bpack{tocvsec2}{tocvsec2}% -% \bpack{thailatex}{thailatex}% -% \bpack{lipsum}{lipsum}% -% \bpack{subfigure}{subfigure}% -% \bpack{multicol}{multicol}% -% \bpack{geometry}{geometry}% -% \bpack{wrapfig}{wrapfig}% -% \bpacka{\eTeX}{etex}{etex,FMI1990}% -% \bpacka{\Arabi}{arabi}{arabi}% -% \bpack{color}{color}% -% \bpack{docmfp}{docmfp}% -% \bpack{splitbib}{splitbib}% -% \bpack{afterpage}{afterpage}% -% \bpack{multitoc}{multitoc}% -% \bpack{cite}{cite}% -% \bpack{booktabs}{booktabs}% -% \bpack{url}{url}% -% \bpack{varioref}{varioref}% -% \bpack{fullpage}{fullpage}% -% \bpack{marvosym}{marvosym}% -% \bpack{guarani}{guarani}% -% \bpacka{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}{mlsquick,montex}% -% \bpacka{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}{armtex}% -% \bpack{Antomega}{antomega}% -% \bpacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}{bangtex}% -% \bpacka{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}{spanish4}% -% \bpacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}{devanagari}% -% \bpack{malayalam}{malayalam}% -% \bpack{omal}{malayalam-o}% -% \bpacka{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}{platex-jp,kakuto}% -% ^^A \bpacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX}{polski,platex-pl}% -% \bpack{polski}{polski,platex-pl}% -% \bpacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}{slatex}% -% \bpacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}{farsi}% -% \bpacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}{HLATEX}% -% \bpack{LH}{LH/russian.sty}% -% \bpack{lhcyr}{lhcyr}% -% \bpack{cmcyralt}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,cmcyralt/russian.sty}% -% \bpacka{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}{romaniantex}% -% \bpack{flafter}{ltoutput,TLC2}% -% \bpack{alphanum}{jura}% -% \bpack{morefloats}{morefloats}% -% \bpack{natbib}{dnatbib,natnotes}% -% \bpack{overcite}{overcite}% -% \bpack{pict2e}{pict2e}% -% \bpacka{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}{kannadatex}% -% \bpacka{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}{hypertex}% -% \bpacka{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}{luatex,luatex2007}% -% \bpack{mcaption}{mcaption}% -% \bpack{minitoc-hyper}{minitoc-hyper}% -% \bpack{vietnam}{vietnam}% -% \bpack{calc}{calc}% -% \bpack{makerobust}{makerobust}% -% \bclass{memoir}{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{jura}{jura}% -% \bclass{amsart}{amslatex}% -% \bclass{amsproc}{amslatex}% -% \bclass{amsbook}{amslatex}% -% \bclass{scrbook}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{scrartcl}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{scrreprt}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{scrlettr}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{scrlttr2}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}% -% \bclass{article}{classes}% -% \bclass{report}{classes}% -% \bclass{book}{classes}% -% \bclass{letter}{letter}% -% \bclass{slides}{slides}% -% \bclass{ltxdoc}{ltxdoc}% -% \bclass{ltnews}{ltnews}% -% \bclass{proc}{proc}% -% \fi -% \Finale -% \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 0316f9ea5d2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2179 +0,0 @@ -\begin{filecontents}{./dblaccnt.sty} -% Copyright 2000 Frank Mittelbach <frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org>. -% License: LPPL, version 1.3a or newer, according to -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. -% -% -% This is the file dblaccnt.tex which implements support for multiple -% accents. -% -% -% The code below handles only the case of -% -% \acc1 \acc2 ... glyph -% -% with or without nesting braces. -% -% \acc1 {\acc2 a} -% -% etc. will be handled correctly by removing the brace group during -% the scanning process. This means in particular that conceptually -% any accent command can only handle single token arguments! -% -% It should also work for combinations generated from inputenc, i.e., -% are presented as 8bit tokens or, after passing through something like -% an .aux file, as \IeC{\acc1} \IeC{\acc2} ... -% -% If you use OT1 encoding you have to explicitly reload it (with -% \usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}). -% -% -% History -% -% 1.0 2000/01/27 -% -% Initial release. -% -% 1.1 2005/04/21 -% -% Make it work with LaTeX release 2003/12/01. -% Add copyright message and history. -% - -\ProvidesPackage{dblaccnt}[2005/04/21 v1.1 double accent support] - -\endlinechar \m@ne - - -% We must redefine two internal LaTeX commands to provide hooks for -% assembling accents. - -% Here we test whether #1 (the command to be executed) is \chardef or -% #3 (the encoding) is `?'. If both are false, \assemble@accent@cmds -% will be used. -% -% The first case catches \DeclareTextSymbol, the second catches -% \ProvideTextCommandDefault. Both checks are ugly hacks which hopefully -% disappear in the near future. -% -\def\@dec@text@cmd#1#2#3{ - \ifx#1\chardef - \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ - \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter#2 - \csname#3\string#2\endcsname - } - \else - \ifx#1\chardef@text@cmd - \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ - \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter#2 - \csname#3\string#2\endcsname - } - \else - \if#3? - \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ - \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter#2 - \csname#3\string#2\endcsname - } - \else - \expandafter\def\expandafter#2\expandafter{ - % start looking for acc tokens - \expandafter\assemble@accent@cmds - \csname#3-cmd\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter#2 - \csname#3\string#2\endcsname - } - \fi - \fi - \fi - \let\@ifdefinable\@rc@ifdefinable - \expandafter#1\csname#3\string#2\endcsname -} - - -% The redefined \@tabacckludge macro below assures that the top-level -% definition of the accents (which contains \assemble@accent@cmds) -% will be called. -% -\def\@make@tabacc#1#2{ - \expandafter\def\csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname{#2} -} - -\@make@tabacc{'}{\@acci} -\@make@tabacc{`}{\@accii} -\@make@tabacc{=}{\@acciii} - - -% Here the redefinition of second internal LaTeX macro. -% -\def\@tabacckludge#1{ - \csname @tabacc\string#1\endcsname -} - - -% We only look ahead for further accents if we are to typeset. -% -\def\assemble@accent@cmds{ - \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect - \expandafter\assemble@tokensinit - \fi -} - - -% The init is special as we have to parse over some of the expansion -% of the encoding specific command; for example, \^ might expand to -% -% \assemble@accent@cmds \OT1-cmd \^ \OT1\^ -% ^^^^^^ one token -% -% We start \assemble@tokens with the number of hits so far (\@empty), -% zero the actual code for the current, e.g., \OT1\^ in the above -% example (resp. the corresponding macro in the current font -% encoding), and as a third argument we will pick up the next token -% or group in the input stream for testing. -% -\def\assemble@tokensinit#1#2#3{ - % the usual test for availability in the current encoding - % similar to the test in \@changed@cmd - \@inmathwarn#2 - \expandafter\ifx\csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\ifx\csname ?\string#2\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\def\csname ?\string#2\endcsname{ - \TextSymbolUnavailable#2 - } - \fi - \global\expandafter\let - \csname\cf@encoding \string#2\expandafter\endcsname - \csname ?\string#2\endcsname - \fi - - % here we substitute the current encoding - \expandafter\assemble@tokens@\expandafter\@empty - \csname\cf@encoding\string#2\endcsname -} - - -% The next commands should be considered only as a proof of concept -% -- they can most certainly be streamlined. Here is roughly what -% they do: -% -% \assemble@tokens: If the picked up token is \IeC then get rid of it -% and parse the next token (or group) which is expected to be the -% argument of \IeC. This is done by restarting the whole process. -% Otherwise we have to figure out if the current token (#3) is an -% 8-bit from inputenc, i.e., expanding to \IeC{...}. This is -% handled by calling \assemble@tokensz passing an expansion of #3 -% as well as #3 (or more exactly, its first token since the braces -% get removed in this process) itself. -% -% \assemble@tokensz: Test if the expansion start with \IeC in which -% case it is assumed that it comes from an inputenc 8bit; the next -% token will be considered as its argument and used for further -% processing in \assemble@tokensx. Otherwise the unexpanded #3 -% from above is used. -% -% \assemble@tokensx: If this cmd is called its third argument should -% contain a normalized token from the input stream, i.e. -% -% {..} -> .. -% \IeC{..} -> .. -% ^^xx (expanding to) \IeC{..} -> .. -% -% Now all :-) that remains is testing whether the expansion of this -% token starts with \assemble@accent@cmds, since in this case we have -% found another accent cmd. -% -% #1 is the number of hits, #2 is the real definition in that -% encoding, and #3 is the next token (or group). -% -% The macros \assemble@tokens@ and \assemble@tokens@@ are -% intermediate steps to test whether #3 is empty; if yes, we simply -% expand #2. -% -\def\assemble@tokens@#1#2#3{ - \assemble@tokens@@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#3\@empty} -} - -\def\assemble@tokens@@#1#2#3#4{ - \ifx#4\@empty - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi - {#2{}} - {\assemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} -} - -\def\assemble@tokens#1#2#3{ - \ifx\IeC#3 - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi - % try again but pick up argument of \IeC - {\assemble@tokens@{#1}{#2}} - % this will get rid of a group argument -- nasty :-) - {\expandafter\assemble@tokensz#3\relax\assemble@tokensz{#1}{#2}#3} -} - -\def\assemble@tokensz#1#2\assemble@tokensz#3#4#5{ - \ifx#1\IeC - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi - {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#2} - {\assemble@tokensx{#3}{#4}#5} -} - -% \assemble@tokensx: This passes an expanded and unexpanded version -% of #3 to \ifassemble@tokens to do the actual processing. -% -% \ifassemble@tokens: If we have found another accent command then -% keep its name and record that we had another hit and restart the -% scanning via \assemble@tokens, i.e., we append an `x' to the -% ``hit'' argument that we carry around for no good reason, and we -% append the official name of the accent command (which was picked -% up as part of the expansion of the input token) to the argument, -% storing the list of accents found so far. Note that we do use -% the official name, e.g. `\"', not `\OT1\"' -- the latter is only -% used for the very first accent! -% -% If it turns out that we don't have an accent command here it is -% time to stop the scanning and do some processing. Now finally the -% ``hit'' argument and the list of collected accents comes into play: -% We construct a command which name consists of the string -% ``handle@accent'', followed by a number of `x's each for each hit -% earlier on. Thus in a situation like \"\^a we would execute -% \handle@accentx and in case of \"a \handle@accent. This command -% gets as its arguments the collected accents followed by the token -% which stopped the scanning proccess, e.g. -% -% \handle@accentx \OT1\" \^ {a} -% -% and its purpose is to determine how to produce a glyph from it -% (e.g. as a composite or as a part composite or ...) -% -\def\assemble@tokensx#1#2#3{ - \expandafter - \ifassemble@tokens#3\@empty\@empty\@empty\ifassemble@tokens{#1}{#2}{#3}} - -\def\ifassemble@tokens#1#2#3#4\ifassemble@tokens#5#6#7{ - % next token was defined via \DeclareText... - \ifx#1\assemble@accent@cmds - % thus #3 is its official name - \expandafter\assemble@tokens@ - \else - % execute what has been assembled and exit - \csname handle@accent#5\endcsname#6{#7} - \expandafter\@gobbletwo - \fi - % first two args to \assemble@tokens on next pass - {#5x}{#6#3} -} - - -% Depending on the number of accents found, \handle@accent[x[x]] will -% be called. - -% ONLY ONE: We check whether \#1-#2 is a known command (a composite) -% and execute it, otherwise try to execute #1{#2} as an accent -% command. -% -\def\handle@accent#1#2{ - \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname\relax - #1{#2} - \else - \csname\string#1-\string#2\endcsname - \fi -} - -% TWO IN A ROW: We check for \#1-#2-#3. If undefined, we apply #1 to -% whatever is the result of #2{#3}. One could think of a more -% complex algorithm here, e.g., if #1-#2 is known as a composite -% modifier (whatever that is) apply that before trying the above but -% this is probably not necessary. -% -\def\handle@accentx#1#2#3{ - \expandafter\ifx\csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname\relax - #1{#2{#3}} - \else - \csname\string#1-\string#2-\string#3\endcsname - \fi -} - -% MORE THAN TWO: (Not handled so far.) If there are more than three, -% then the parsing will die at some point when \handle@accentxx... -% will turn out to be \relax, and then one accent will become an -% argument of another -- too bad. -% -\def\handle@accentxx#1#2#3#4{ - % catch more than two accents in a row - \errmessage{Too many accents, dropping first} - #2#3#4 -} - - -% This is simpler now. -% -\def\DeclareTextCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4{ - \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname - #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3\endcsname{#4} -} - -% This is new. -% -\def\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1#2#3#4#5{ - \expandafter\def\csname\expandafter\string\csname - #2\endcsname\string#1-\string#3-\string#4\endcsname{#5} -} - -% This also. -% -\catcode\z@=11\relax -\def\DeclareTextDoubleComposite#1#2#3#4#5{ - \def\reserved@a{\DeclareTextDoubleCompositeCommand#1{#2}{#3}{#4}} - \bgroup - \lccode\z@#5 - \lowercase{ - \egroup - \reserved@a ^^@} -} -\catcode\z@=15\relax - - -% Now we reinitialize the \@acc... macros to use our new definitions. -% -\AtBeginDocument{ - \let\@acci \' - \let\@accii \` - \let\@acciii \= -} - - -\endlinechar `\^^M - -\endinput - -% end of dblaccnt.tex -\end{filecontents} -\bgroup -\catcode`\^^?=11 -\begin{filecontents}{./chinese1.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file file Bg5.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Chinese captions -% -% character set: Big 5 -% encoding: Big 5 -% -\def\ptctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% -\def\plftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% -\def\plttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% -% -\def\mtctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% -\def\mlftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% -\def\mlttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% -% -\def\stctitle{¥Ø~~¿ý}% -\def\slftitle{¹Ï~¥Ø~¿ý}% -\def\slttitle{ªí~¥Ø~¿ý}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./chinese2.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Chinese captions -% -% character set: Big 5 -% encoding: Big 5 -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{¥216~~¿253} -\def\plftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} -\def\plttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} -% -\def\mtctitle{¥216~~¿253} -\def\mlftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} -\def\mlttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} -% -\def\stctitle{¥216~~¿253} -\def\slftitle{¹207~¥216~¿253} -\def\slttitle{ª237~¥216~¿253} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./farsi1.mlo} -\ProvidesFiles{farsi1.mlo}[2005/09/13] -% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project -% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, -% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), -% Hassan Abolhassani, and others. -% http://www.farsitex.org -\def\ptctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} -\def\plftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} -\def\plttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} -% -\def\mtctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} -\def\mlftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} -\def\mlttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} -% -\def\stctitle{êú¨´ õ€À¤›‘–} -\def\slftitle{óƒÆ´ ªØ‘ñ} -\def\slttitle{óƒÆ´ ›Àøñ} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./farsi2.mlo} -\ProvidesFiles{farsi2.mlo}[2005/09/13] -% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project -% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi, -% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), -% Hassan Abolhassani, and others. -% http://www.farsitex.org -\def\ptctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} -\def\plftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} -\def\plttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} -% -\def\mtctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} -\def\mlftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} -\def\mlttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} -% -\def\stctitle{–‘›¤¢÷õ –¨¤úê} -\def\slftitle{ñ‘îª –¨þó} -\def\slttitle{ñø¢› –¨þó} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hangul1.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Hangul captions -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -\def\ptctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\plftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\plttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% -% -\def\mtctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% -% -\def\stctitle{¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\slftitle{±×¸²~¸ñÂ÷}% -\def\slttitle{Ç¥~¸ñÂ÷}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hangul2.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Hangul captions -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{¸241Â247}% -\def\plftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% -\def\plttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% -% -\def\mtctitle{¸241Â247}% -\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% -\def\mlttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% -% -\def\stctitle{¸241Â247}% -\def\slftitle{±215¸178~¸241Â247}% -\def\slttitle{Ç165~¸241Â247}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hangul3.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Hangul captions set 2 -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -\def\ptctitle{Â÷·Ê}% -\def\plftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% -\def\plttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% -% -\def\mtctitle{Â÷·Ê}% -\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% -\def\mlttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% -% -\def\stctitle{Â÷·Ê}% -\def\slftitle{±×¸²~Â÷·Ê}% -\def\slttitle{Ç¥~Â÷·Ê}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hangul4.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Hangul captions set 2 -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{Â247·202}% -\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% -\def\plttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% -% -\def\mtctitle{Â247·202}% -\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% -\def\mlttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% -% -\def\stctitle{Â247·202}% -\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Â247·202}% -\def\slttitle{Ç165~Â247·202}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hanja1.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Hanja captions -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{Ù205ó173}% -\def\plftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% -\def\plttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% -% -\def\mtctitle{Ù205ó173}% -\def\mlftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% -\def\mlttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% -% -\def\stctitle{Ù205ó173}% -\def\slftitle{±215¸178~Ù205ó173}% -\def\slttitle{ø250~Ù205ó173}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hanja2.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at> -% -% Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997) -% -% Hanja captions -% -% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992) -% encoding: EUC (=Wansung) -% -\def\ptctitle{ÙÍó}$ -\def\plftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ -\def\plttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ -% -\def\mtctitle{ÙÍó}$ -\def\mlftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ -\def\mlttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ -% -\def\stctitle{ÙÍó}$ -\def\slftitle{±×¸²~ÙÍó}$ -\def\slttitle{øú~ÙÍó}$ -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Japanese captions -% -% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) -% encoding: SJIS -% -\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese2.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Japanese captions -% -% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) -% encoding: EUC -% -\def\plttitle{Ìܼ¡}% -\def\plftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% -\def\plttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% -% -\def\mlttitle{Ìܼ¡}% -\def\mlftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% -\def\mlttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% -% -\def\slttitle{Ìܼ¡}% -\def\slftitle{¿ÞÌܼ¡}% -\def\slttitle{ɽÌܼ¡}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese3.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Japanese captions -% -% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) -% encoding: EUC -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{Ì220¼161}% -\def\plftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% -\def\plttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% -% -\def\mtctitle{Ì220¼161}% -\def\mlftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% -\def\mlttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% -% -\def\stctitle{Ì220¼161}% -\def\slftitle{¿222Ì220¼161}% -\def\slttitle{É189Ì220¼161}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese4.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Japanese captions -% -% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) -% encoding: SJIS -% -\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ} -\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}–ÚŽŸ} -\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}–ÚŽŸ} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese5.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mlo}[[2005/01/28] -% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package -% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e -% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) -% -% Japanese captions -% -% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990) -% encoding: SJIS -% -% preprocessed -% -\def\ptctitle{–218Ž159} -\def\plftitle{125–218Ž159} -\def\plttitle{•92–218Ž159} -% -\def\mtctitle{–218Ž159} -\def\mlftitle{125–218Ž159} -\def\mlttitle{•92–218Ž159} -% -\def\stctitle{–218Ž159} -\def\slftitle{125–218Ž159} -\def\slttitle{•92–218Ž159} -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./japanese6.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31] -% -% Japanese captions -% -%% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty -%% Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding. -%% From Kumazawa Toshiki -%% kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp -%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html -% -\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mlo}[2006/10/31]% -% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty% -\def\ptctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% -\def\plftitle{}ˆê——}% -\def\plttitle{•\ˆê——}% -% -\def\mtctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% -\def\mlftitle{}}% -\def\mlttitle{•\}% -% -\def\stctitle{–ÚŽŸ}% -\def\slftitle{}}% -\def\slttitle{•\}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./malayalam-omega.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mlo}[2007/11/21] -% From omal.sty -% by Alex A.J. <indicTeX@gmail.com> -% -\def\ptctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% -\def\plftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% -\def\plttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% -% -\def\mtctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% -\def\mlftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% -\def\mlttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% -% -\def\stctitle{\mal ഉളàµà´³à´Ÿà´•àµà´•à´‚}% -\def\slftitle{\mal à´šà´¿à´¤àµà´°à´™àµà´™à´³àµâ€}% -\def\slttitle{\mal ടേബിളàµà´•à´³àµâ€}% -% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca.mlo} -%% This package redefines several LaTeX defaults for printing Russian -%% documents in alternative encoding. Uses packages cmcyr and -%% indentfirst. By Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu). 01/18/95. -\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mlo}[2006/03/07] -%% From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package -%% Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu) -\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} -\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} -\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} -\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-cca1.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mlo}[2006/02/07] -%% Titles for minitoc.sty -%% using cmcyr fonts in alt encoding -%% From the cmcyralt package -%% (A.Harin and V.Zhytnikov)] -%% -\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lh.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mlo}[2006/03/07] -%% Russian (russian-lh) titles for minitoc.sty -%% from russian.sty in the LH package -%% Sergei O. Naoumov (serge@astro.unc.edu) -%% -\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax -%% for books -- -\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥} -\else -%% for articles etc.-- -\def\ptctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} -\fi -\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\def\mtctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} -\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\def\stctitle{‘®¤¥à¦ ¨¥} -\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª à¨á㪮¢} -\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ} -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyralt.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}[2006/03/10] -%% From lhcyralt.sty in the lhcyr package -%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -\def\ptctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\plftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\plttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\mlftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\mlttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\def\stctitle{Ž£« ¢«¥¨¥}% -\def\slftitle{‘¯¨á®ª ¨««îáâà 権}% -\def\slttitle{‘¯¨á®ª â ¡«¨æ}% -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}[2006/03/10] -%% From lhcyrkoi.sty in the lhcyr package -%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -\def\ptctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% -\def\plftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% -\def\plttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% -\def\mlftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% -\def\mlttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% -%% -\def\stctitle{ïÇÌÁ×ÌÅÎÉÅ}% -\def\slftitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÉÌÌÀÓÔÒÁÃÉÊ}% -\def\slttitle{óÐÉÓÏË ÔÁÂÌÉÃ}% -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./russian-lhcyrwin.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}[2006/03/10] -%% From lhcyrwin.sty in the lhcyr package -%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru) -\def\ptctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% -\def\plftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% -\def\plttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% -%% -\def\mtctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% -\def\mlftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% -\def\mlttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% -%% -\def\stctitle{Îãëàâëåíèå}% -\def\slftitle{Ñïèñîê èëëþñòðàöèé}% -\def\slttitle{Ñïèñîê òàáëèö}% -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./thai.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{thai.mlo}[2005/01/28] -% from thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system -% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -% -\def\ptctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% -\def\plftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% -\def\plttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% -% -\def\mtctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% -\def\mlftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% -\def\mlttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% -% -\def\stctitle{ÊÒúÑ}% -\def\slftitle{ÊÒúÑÃÙ»}% -\def\slttitle{ÊÒúѵÒÃÒ§}% -% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hangul-u8.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21] -%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package -%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) -%% -%% Hangul captions for Lambda -%% -\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{목~ì°¨} -\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~목차} -\ksnamedef{plttitle}{í‘œ~목차} -%% -\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{목~ì°¨} -\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~목차} -\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{í‘œ~목차} -%% -\ksnamedef{stctitle}{목~ì°¨} -\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~목차} -\ksnamedef{slttitle}{í‘œ~목차} -%% -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./hanja-u8.mlo} -\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mlo}[2006/02/21] -%% From the file u8hangul.tex in the HLaTeX package -%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net) -%% -%% Hanja captions for Lambda -%% -\ksnamedef{ptctitle}{ç›®~次} -\ksnamedef{plftitle}{그림~目次} -\ksnamedef{plttitle}{表~目次} -%% -\ksnamedef{mtctitle}{ç›®~次} -\ksnamedef{mlftitle}{그림~目次} -\ksnamedef{mlttitle}{表~目次} -%% -\ksnamedef{stctitle}{ç›®~次} -\ksnamedef{slftitle}{그림~目次} -\ksnamedef{slttitle}{表~目次} -%% -\end{filecontents} -\egroup -\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.ist} -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -%% -%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system. -%% -------------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the -%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%% The latest version of this license is in -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package is -%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. -%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -actual '=' -quote '!' -level '>' -encap '|' -preamble -"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" -postamble -"\n\\end{theindex}\n" -item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " -item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " -delim_0 "\\dotfill " -delim_1 "\\dotfill " -delim_2 "\\dotfill " -% The next lines will produce some warnings when -% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different -% versions of the program: -lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" -lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" -lethead_flag 1 -heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" -heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" -headings_flag 1 -%% -% Added for french. -symhead_positive "Symboles" -symhead_negative "symboles" -numhead_positive "Nombres" -numhead_negative "nombres" -%% -%% End of file `minitoc-fr.ist'. -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.ist} -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -%% -%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license -%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this -%% license is in: -%% -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version -%% 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -%% -%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert. -%% -%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' -%% distributed with it. -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -actual '=' -quote '!' -level '>' -encap '|' -preamble -"\\begin{theindex}\\flushcolumns\\parindent=0pt \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" -postamble -"\n\\end{theindex}\n" -item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " -item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " -delim_0 "\\dotfill " -delim_1 "\\dotfill " -delim_2 "\\dotfill " -% The next lines will produce some warnings when -% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different -% versions of the program: -lethead_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" -lethead_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" -lethead_flag 1 -heading_prefix "{\\lneed{8.5}\\vspace{\\baselineskip}\\large\\bfseries\\null\\hfill\\relax\\xhead{" -heading_suffix "}\\hfill\\null}\\nopagebreak\\vspace*{\\baselineskip}\n" -headings_flag 1 -%% -%% -%% End of file `minitoc.ist'. -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.lan} -\def\LANG{0} -\endinput -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc-fr.lan} -\def\LANG{1} -\endinput -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.pre} -% chaptermark: do not uppercase the headers -% \def\HLS{\hspace*{-\leftmargin}} % Header Left Shift -\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% - \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}} -% \markboth{\chaptername~\thechapter~---~#1}{\chaptername~.\thechapter~---~#1}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% do not uppercase the headers in TOC, LOF, LOT, BIB -\makeatletter -\let\RELAX\relax -% We replace \MakeUppercase by \RELAX -% TOC -\renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \else - \@restonecolfalse - \fi - \chapter*{\contentsname - \@mkboth{% - \RELAX\contentsname}{\RELAX\contentsname}}% - \@starttoc{toc}% - \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi - } -% LOF -\renewcommand\listoffigures{% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \else - \@restonecolfalse - \fi - \chapter*{\listfigurename - \@mkboth{\RELAX\listfigurename}{\RELAX\listfigurename}}% - \@starttoc{lof}% - \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi - } -% LOT -\renewcommand\listoftables{% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn - \else - \@restonecolfalse - \fi - \chapter*{\listtablename - \@mkboth{% - \RELAX\listtablename}{\RELAX\listtablename}}% - \@starttoc{lot}% - \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi - } -% BIB -\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1] - {\chapter*{\bibname - \@mkboth{\RELAX\bibname}{\RELAX\bibname}}% - \mtcaddchapter[\bibname]% - \bibpreamble - \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% - \leftmargin\labelwidth - \advance\leftmargin\labelsep - \@openbib@code - \usecounter{enumiv}% - \let\p@enumiv\@empty - \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty - \widowpenalty4000% - \sfcode`\.\@m} - {\def\@noitemerr - {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}% - \endlist} -% Do nor slant text in headers -\if@twoside - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markboth {\RELAX{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter -% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~% - [\thechapter]~---~% - \fi - \fi - ##1}}{}}% - \def\sectionmark##1{% - \markright {\RELAX{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ % - \fi - ##1}}}} -\else - \def\ps@headings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty - \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\markboth - \def\chaptermark##1{% - \markright {\RELAX{% - \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne - \if@mainmatter -% \@chapapp~\thechapter~---~% - [\thechapter]~---~% - \fi - \fi - ##1}}}} -\fi -\def\ps@myheadings{% - \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty - \def\@evenhead{\bfseries\large\thepage\hfil\upshape\leftmark}% - \def\@oddhead{\bfseries\large{\upshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark\@gobble - \let\sectionmark\@gobble - } -\makeatother -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% PB HYPERREF % \usepackage[position=top,farskip=3ex,captionskip=2ex]{subfig} -\usepackage{tocbibind} -% Do not uppercase -\makeatletter -\renewcommand{\tocetcmark}[1]{% - \@mkboth{\RELAX{#1}}{\RELAX{#1}}} -\makeatother -\RequirePackage{fixltx2e} -\usepackage{xspace} -\usepackage{calc} -\usepackage{afterpage} -\usepackage{comment} -\usepackage{enumerate} -%<ADDITIONS -\usepackage{ragged2e} -\usepackage{array} -% colonne de type `p', mais raggedright... -\newcolumntype{R}[1]{>{\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}p{#1}} -\newcolumntype{L}[1]{>{\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}p{#1}} -\newcolumntype{C}[1]{>{\Centering\arraybackslash}p{#1}} -% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, P et X. -\newcolumntype{Z}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}X} -\newcolumntype{Y}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}X} -\newcolumntype{O}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\Centering\arraybackslash}X} -% La somme des coeffs doit être égale au nombre de colonnes Z, O, P et X. -\newcolumntype{P}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\arraybackslash}X} -%ADDITIONS> -\usepackage{textcomp} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{TS1}{92} -\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbackslash}{TS1} -\usepackage{amsfonts} -\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{\usepackage{txfonts}}{\relax} -\IfFileExists{mflogo.sty}{\usepackage{mflogo}}% -{\def\MF{\textbf{\texttt{METAFONT}}} - \def\MP{\textbf{\texttt{METAPOST}}}} -\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript} -\newif\ifDP\DPfalse -\IfFileExists{dpfloat.sty}{\usepackage{dpfloat}\DPtrue}{\DPfalse} -\newif\ifFLP\FLPfalse -\IfFileExists{floatpag.sty}{\usepackage{floatpag}\FLPtrue}{\FLPfalse} -\usepackage{nameref} -\input{\jobname.lan} -\newif\ifFTR -\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue % ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\lefthyphenmin=3 -\righthyphenmin=3 -\hyphenation{Mittelbach} -\hyphenation{Jackowski} -\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Impatient} -\hyphenation{make-index} -\hyphenation{hyper-link} -\FTRfalse -\usepackage[english]{varioref} -\or\relax -\lefthyphenmin=3 -\righthyphenmin=3 -\hyphenation{Mittelbach} -\hyphenation{Jackowski} -\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Impatient} -\hyphenation{make-index} -\hyphenation{hyper-link} -\FTRtrue -\usepackage[french]{varioref} -\fi -\usepackage{frbib} -\makeatletter % ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse% ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\makeatother % ESSAI pour tromper varioref -\usepackage{multicol}% v40 -\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc} -\usepackage{fixfoot} -\usepackage[bottom,hang,multiple]{footmisc} -% \def\footnotelayout{\color[rgb]{0.37254903,0.37254903,0.37254903}} -\renewcommand{\multfootsep}{,} -\setlength{\footnotemargin}{.7em} %1.8em by default, much too wide. -% Check if booktabs package is available -\newif\ifBT \BTfalse -\IfFileExists{booktabs.sty}{\BTtrue\usepackage{booktabs}}{\BTfalse} -\usepackage{ifpdf} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\def\gpdftitle{The minitoc package} -\or\relax -\def\gpdftitle{Le paquetage minitoc} -\fi -\ifpdf - \usepackage[pdftex]{color} -% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40} -% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.} -% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.} -% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.} -% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05} -% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0,0.5} -% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.} -% \definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.} -% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.} -% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1} -% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.} - \usepackage[pdftex,pstarrows]{pict2e} - \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx} - \usepackage[pdftex, colorlinks,% - pdfpagelayout={SinglePage},% -% pdfpagetransition=Dissolve,% slow -% pdfpagetransition={Split /H /O},% - pdfview={Fit},% - pdfstartview={Fit},% - pdftitle={\gpdftitle},% - pdfsubject={minitoc},% - pdfauthor={Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert},% - pdfcreator={pdfLaTeX with hyperref package},% - pdfproducer={pdflatex},% -% pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},% - pdfkeywords={latex,toc,table-of-contents,part,chapter,section},% -% pdfpagescrop={53 486 389 754},% -% pdfpagescrop={0 72 595 772},% % A4 cropped -% pdfcompresslevel=9,% - pagebackref=true,% - pdfnewwindow=true,% -%% pdffitwindow=true,% -%% pdfcenterwindow=false,% - pdftoolbar=true,% - pdfmenubar=true,% -%% pdfwindowui=false,% - bookmarks=true,% - unicode=true,% - a4paper=true,% -% plainpages=false,% -% pageanchor=false,% -% hyperindex=true,% - breaklinks=true,% - bookmarksopenlevel=0,% - bookmarksopen,% -% DEFAULTS % COLORS -% DEFAULTS linkbordercolor={blue},% -% DEFAULTS linkcolor={blue},% -% DEFAULTS menubordercolor={blue},% -% DEFAULTS % menucolor={FireBrick},% -% DEFAULTS % basic color % menucolor={red},% -% DEFAULTS pagecolor={blue},% -% DEFAULTS % citecolor={DarkGreen},% -% DEFAULTS citecolor={green},% -% DEFAULTS % urlcolor={FireBrick},% -% DEFAULTS urlcolor={red},% -% DEFAULTS filecolor={blue},% -% DEFAULTS % COLORS - bookmarksnumbered=true]% - {hyperref}% - \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}% -\else - \usepackage[dvips]{color}% -% \definecolor{OliveGreen}{cmyk}{0.64,0,0.95,0.40} -% \definecolor{Green}{cmyk}{1.,0.,1.,0.} -% \definecolor{RedOrange}{cmyk}{0.,0.77,0.87,0.} -% \definecolor{Cyan}{cmyk}{1.,0.,0.,0.} -% \definecolor{light}{cmyk}{0.,0.,0.,0.05} -% \definecolor{NavyBlue}{rgb}{0.,0.,.5} -% basic color % \definecolor{blue}{rgb}{0.,0.,1.} - %\definecolor{DarkGreen}{rgb}{0.,.35,0.} -% basic color % \definecolor{green}{rgb}{0.,1.,0.} -% \definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{.55,.1,.1} -% basic color % \definecolor{red}{rgb}{1.,0.,0.} - \usepackage[dvips,pstarrows]{pict2e}% - \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}% - \usepackage{hyperref}% - \IfFileExists{hypcap.sty}{\usepackage[all]{hypcap}}{}% -% \usepackage{breakurl} % DOES NOT WORK -\fi -\makeatletter % to include some useful commands -%avoid warnings -\providecommand*{\toclevel@xpart}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@xchapter}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@xsect}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@starpart}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@starchapter}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@starsection}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@ppart}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@pchapter}{0} -\providecommand*{\toclevel@psect}{0} -\makeatother -\usepackage{tabularx} -\def\UrlFont{\sffamily} -% Check if url package is available -% \IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{\let\url\texttt} -\def\eLaTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\LaTeX} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\usepackage[french,english]{babel} -\or\relax -\usepackage[french,english]{babel} -\usepackage{franc,frnew} -% prepare a box for phonetics... -\newsavebox{\latexbox} -\catcode`\:=12 -\savebox{\latexbox}{\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}} -\catcode`\:=\active -\fi -%\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc} -%\def\ij{i\kern-.1ex j} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\ij}{T1}{188} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\IJ}{T1}{156} -\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc} -\ifcase\LANG\relax -\or\relax -\IfFileExists{mypatches.sty}{\usepackage{mypatches}}{\relax} -\fi -%\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} -% gray rules for tables/figures -\definecolor{figrulecolor}{gray}{.82} -%\definecolor{figrulecolor}{cmyk}{.7,.1,.1,.1} % ESSAIS -\providecommand{\topfigrule}{\relax} -\providecommand{\botfigrule}{\relax} -\providecommand{\medfigrule}{\relax} -\iffalse % NO figrules... sight -\renewcommand{\topfigrule}{% - \vspace*{3pt}% - \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% - \vspace*{-5pt}} -\renewcommand{\botfigrule}{% - \vspace*{-3pt}% - \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% - \vspace*{1pt}} -\renewcommand{\medfigrule}{% - \vspace*{-3pt}% - \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}% - \vspace*{-2pt}} -\fi % NO figrules... sight -% -% -\makeatletter % to include some useful commands -\providecommand{\WEB}{\textsc{WEB}} -\providecommand{\BibTeX}{{\rmfamily B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em - T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} -\providecommand{\SLaTeX}{{\rmfamily S\LaTeX}} -\renewcommand{\SLaTeX}{{\sffamily S\LaTeX}} % \sffamily to be coherent with other package names -%\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\rm B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em -% T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} -\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\upshape B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em - T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}} -\let\BiBTeX\BibTeX -\def\NTS{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}} -\providecommand*{\pdfTeX}{pdf\TeX} -%\def\eTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX} -\providecommand*{\eTeX}{$\csname m@th\endcsname\varepsilon$-\TeX} -%\newcommand{\Arabi}{\L{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa% \L not used here -% \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo -\newcommand{\Arabi}{\mbox{\sffamily A\kern-.2ex\lower.25ex\hbox{r}\kern-.25exa% - \kern-.22exb\kern-.15exi}} %Logo -\newcommand{\devnag}{Devan\=agar{\=\i}} -\def\XeTeX{\leavevmode - \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.1667em \TeX}% - \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0} -\def\XeLaTeX{\leavevmode - \setbox0=\hbox{X\lower.5ex\hbox{\kern-.15em\reflectbox{E}}\LaTeX}% - \dp0=0pt\ht0=0pt\box0} -% IF YOU NOT HAVE THE manfnt FONT, the dangerous bends will not be printed... -\IfFileExists{manfnt.sty}{% does not work with .tfm -%\typeout{manfnt.tfm FOUND} -\def\DBEND{% -\ifcase\LANG\relax -{} like the one shown in the margin\virage\relax -\or\relax -{} comme celui montré dans la marge\virage\relax -\fi}% -\newfont{\manfnt}{manfnt} -\newcommand\virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\raggedleft - {{\manfnt\symbol{'177}}~~}]{\raggedright {~~\manfnt\symbol{'177}}}\normalmarginpar} -\def\@Vir{\hbox to12mm{\hbox{}\leaders% - \hbox{{\manfnt\char127}\kern2pt}\hfil\hbox{}}} -\newcommand\Virage{\reversemarginpar\marginpar[\hfill{\@Vir~~}]{{~~\@Vir}\hfill}\normalmarginpar}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -}%ELSE -{\let\Virage\relax \let\virage\relax \let\DBEND\relax} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% END OF REPLACE -\def\smooth{\spaceskip=0.3em plus .8em minus .1em -\xspaceskip=0.6em plus 1em minus .2em -\pretolerance=10 \tolerance=10000 \looseness=-10000 -\parfillskip=0pt plus10fill\relax}% -%%% \newenvironment{SCBOX}[1]{\mbox{\scshape #1}}{} -\newenvironment{SMOOTH}{\bgroup\smooth}{\par\egroup} -% -\let\oendquote\endquote -\def\nendquote{\oendquote\penalty-1\relax} -% -\newenvironment{xmessage}[1][XXXXX]{% - \expandafter\label{mess+#1}% - \begin{samepage}% - \let\endquote\nendquote\relax\smooth\lneed{5}\strut\hrule\relax\jmess{#1}\penalty10000}% -{\par\end{samepage}} -% -\def\Cat#1{\hbox{$\langle$\emph{#1}$\rangle$}} -\def\<#1>{\Cat{#1}} -%%% -%%%% Some useful commands from Stefan Ulrich -\newcommand\changeskips{% - \@tempdima\abovecaptionskip - \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip - \belowcaptionskip\@tempdima -} -\newcommand\thickline{% - \noalign{\hrule\@height1pt\vskip.8ex\relax}% -} -\newcommand\V[1]{\texttt{\string#1}} -\newcommand\Chap{$^*$} -\newcommand\Sec{$^{**}$} -\newcommand\Lang{$^\dag$} -\newcommand\Strut{\rule[2.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}} -\newcommand\Strutt{\rule[3.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}} -\newcommand\FontDefault[2]{% - \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - #1\\ - \hspace*{2em}#2 - \end{tabular}% -} -\newcommand\FontChapSec[3]{% - \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}% - #1\\ - \hspace*{2em}#2\Chap\\ - \hspace*{2em}#3\Sec - \end{tabular}% -} -%\makeatother -%\makeatletter -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% -\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage - \if@twoside - \ifodd\c@page\else - \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage - \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi - \fi - \fi - }% -\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\makeatother -%old% -\def\oname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}} -\def\oiname#1#2{\oinameA{#1}{#2}\oinameB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\name}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\iname}[2]{\inameA{#1}{#2}\inameB{#1}{#2}} -\newcommand{\uname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}} -\newcommand{\namea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -\newcommand{\inamea}[3]{\inameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\inameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}} -%\def\xname#1#2{\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}} -\let\oxname\oname -\let\xname\name -% vietnamese name: last-first -%old% -\def\ovname#1#2{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\oinameA{#2}{#1}\oinameB{#2}{#1}} -\newcommand{\vname}[2]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}} -\newcommand{\ivname}[2]{\inameA{#2}{#1}\inameB{#2}{#1}} -\newcommand{\vnamea}[3]{{\protect\linebreak[0]}\mbox{\textsc{#2}~\textrm{\upshape{#1}}}\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}} -\newcommand{\ivnamea}[3]{\inameaA{#2}{#1}{#3}\inameaB{#2}{#1}{#3}} -\parskip=12pt -%\def\bs{{\ttfamily\char'134}} -\def\bs{\textbackslash} %ESSAI -\setcounter{tocdepth}{6} -\setcounter{parttocdepth}{0} % only chapters -\setcounter{minitocdepth}{6} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6} -\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.0} -\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.9999} -\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.9999} -\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9999} -\setcounter{totalnumber}{10} -\setcounter{topnumber}{10} -\setcounter{bottomnumber}{10} -\makeatletter -\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}% to push floats to top on float pages -\makeatother -\clubpenalty=10000 -\widowpenalty=10000 -\let\mysize\small -\author{\name{Jean-Pierre F.}{Drucbert}\\% -ONERA~/~Centre de Toulouse~/~SRI\\% -\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}} -\date{\today} -\title{The \texttt{minitoc} package\\(version~\#44)} -\parindent=0pt -\lefthyphenmin=3 -\righthyphenmin=3 -\hyphenation{Mittelbach} -\hyphenation{Jackowski} -\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy} -\hyphenation{Impatient} -\hyphenation{make-index} -\hyphenation{hyper-link} -\makeatletter -\let\o@tocrmarg\@tocrmarg -\def\@tocrmarg{\o@tocrmarg plus 1fil} -% macros for needed vertical space -\def\need#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i - \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi - \kern-\dimen@i - \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left - \ifdim #1>\dimen@ - \vfill\eject\PackageInfo{'need' macro}{WARNING- EJECT BY NEED} - \fi - \kern\dimen@i - \endgroup} -\def\lneed#1{\need{#1\baselineskip}} -\def\sneed#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i - \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi - \kern-\dimen@i - \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left - \ifdim #1>\dimen@ - \vfill\null\newpage\PackageInfo{'sneed' macro}{WARNING- SOFT EJECT BY NEED} - \fi - \kern\dimen@i - \endgroup} -\def\lsneed#1{\sneed{#1\baselineskip}} -% to avoid a page break just after -% a part/chapter/section title in a table of contents. -\let\old@l@part\l@part -\def\l@part{\lneed{6}\old@l@part} -\let\old@l@chapter\l@chapter -\def\l@chapter{\lneed{2.5}\old@l@chapter} -% -% %Donald Arseneau asnd@reg.triumf.ca -% % bottomfnote.sty % replaced by footmisc.sty -% \let\bf@makecolold=\@makecol -% \def\@makecol{\advance\skip\footins\fill \bf@makecolold} -% % end of bottomfnote.sty -% indentations multiples of 1.5em. -% enlarge section numbers (numwidth) in tocs. -\def\l@section{\lneed{1.5}\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{3.0em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.0em}{3.2em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{4.5em}{4.1em}} -\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.0em}{5.0em}} -\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{7.5em}{6.0em}} -% -% \renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{2.3em}} -\renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0.0em}{3.0em}} -\let\l@table\l@figure -\makeatother -\providecommand{\AmS}{$\mathcal{A}$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\mathcal{M}$}% - \kern-.125em$\mathcal{S}$}% -%%% -\providecommand{\BAR}{\texttt{\textbar}} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% wdesc &co -\def\wdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1} -\def\wdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth -\advance\leftmargin\labelsep -\let\makelabel\wdesclabel}} -\let\endwdesc\endlist -\def\wit[#1]{\item[{{#1}\hfill}]} -% bulleted labels -\def\buwdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \hbox{$\bullet$~~\bf #1}} -\def\buwdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{{$\bullet$~~#1}}\leftmargin\labelwidth -\advance\leftmargin\labelsep -\let\makelabel\buwdesclabel}} -\let\endbuwdesc\endlist -% boxed labels -\def\bxdesclabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \fbox{\bf #1}} -\def\bxdesc#1{\list{}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1}\leftmargin\labelwidth -\advance\leftmargin\labelsep -\let\makelabel\bxdesclabel}} -\let\endbxdesc\endlist -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\RequirePackage{boldsc} -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./mypatches.sty} -% LOCAL PATCH -% encoding T1 for \" (francais) -\def\fileversion{v02} -\def\filedate{2006/06/01} -\ProvidesPackage{mypatches}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space - Package mypatches] -% dieresis accent; special case for i -\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{T1}[1]{{\accent"4\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{OT1}[1]{{\accent"7F\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}} -% encoding T1 for \w (czech) -\gdef\czech@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) -\gdef\croatian@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1) -\global\let\w\czech@w -% \q for czech -\gdef\czech@q#1{#1\kern-2pt\char'47}% -\global\let\q\czech@q -% backslash character (Barre Oblique Inversée: \boi) -\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{T1}{{\tt\char '20}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{OT1}{{\tt\char '134}} -%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{T1}{{\char '6}} -%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{OT1}{{\char '27}} -\let\degre\undefined -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{'6} -\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{'27} -% -\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} -\global\let\w\czech@w -% -\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}} -\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}} -\global\let\q\czech@q -% Pb with \No (Nobelium) in chemsym.sty -\let\Noo\No -\let\No\undefined -% \textcent, \textcurrentcy, \textyen, \textbrokenbar -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcent}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char162}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textcurrency}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char164}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textyen}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char165}} -\ProvideTextCommand{\textbrokenbar}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char166}} -\RequirePackage{cmsd} -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./boldsc.sty} -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} -\ProvidesPackage{boldsc}[1996/11/12] -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{% - <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>% - <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*ecxc% -}{} -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{sc}{<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{} -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./franc.sty} -\ProvidesPackage{franc}[1994/12/16] -\def\figurename{Figure} -\def\tablename{Table} -\def\contentsname{Table des Mati\`eres} -\def\listfigurename{Liste des Figures} -\def\listtablename{Liste des Tableaux} -\def\bibname{Bibliographie} -\def\indexname{Index} -\def\chaptername{Chapitre} -\def\appendixname{Appendice} -\def\partname{Partie} -\def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e} -\def\seename{voir} -\def\alsoseename{voir aussi} -\def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm er}$\else\number\day\fi \space\ifcase\month\or -janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or juin\or -juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or d\'ecembre\fi -\space\number\year} -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./frbib.sty} -% -% Pour la bibliographie: -% -% En fonction du style french, par de'faut en anglais : -% Si on ne fait pas de traduction de mots en franc,ais ou que cette notion -% n'existe pas, on fait tout en anglais : - -%%% Correction --bg 2001/08/03 -%%%\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\let\ifFTR\iffalse\fi -\def\@tempa{\let\ifFTR\iffalse} -\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\expandafter\@tempa\fi - -\newcommand{\andname}{\ifFTR et\else and\fi} -\newcommand{\editorname}{\ifFTR \'editeur\else editor\fi} -\newcommand{\editornames}{\ifFTR \'editeurs\else editors\fi} -\newcommand{\volumename}{\ifFTR volume\else volume\fi} -\newcommand{\Volumename}{\ifFTR Volume\else volumes\fi} -\newcommand{\ofname}{\ifFTR de\else of\fi} -\newcommand{\numbername}{\ifFTR num\'ero\else number\fi} -\newcommand{\Numbername}{\ifFTR Num\'ero\else Number\fi} -\newcommand{\inname}{\ifFTR dans\else in\fi} -\newcommand{\Inname}{\ifFTR Dans\else In\fi} -\newcommand{\editionname}{\ifFTR \'edition\else edition\fi} -%\def\pagename{\ifFTR page\else page \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. -\newcommand{\pagesname}{\ifFTR pages\else pages\fi} -%\newcommand{\chaptername}{\ifFTR chapitre\else \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty. -\newcommand{\technicalreportname}{\ifFTR Rapport Technique\else Technical - Report\fi} -\newcommand{\revisionname}{\ifFTR R\'evision\else Revision\fi} -\newcommand{\janname}{\ifFTR janvier\else January\fi} -\newcommand{\febname}{\ifFTR f\'evrier\else February\fi} -\newcommand{\marname}{\ifFTR mars\else March \fi} -\newcommand{\aprname}{\ifFTR avril\else April\fi} -\newcommand{\mayname}{\ifFTR mai\else May\fi} -\newcommand{\junname}{\ifFTR juin\else June\fi} -\newcommand{\julname}{\ifFTR juillet\else July\fi} -\newcommand{\augname}{\ifFTR ao\^ut\else August\fi} -\newcommand{\sepname}{\ifFTR septembre\else September\fi} -\newcommand{\octname}{\ifFTR octobre\else October\fi} -\newcommand{\novname}{\ifFTR novembre\else November\fi} -\newcommand{\decname}{\ifFTR d\'ecembre\else December\fi} -\end{filecontents} -\begin{filecontents}{./frnew.sty} -%permet dans la frappe de retrouver les habitudes de -%la dactylographie francaise qui conseille de mettre -%un espace avant les signes de ponctuation ; : ! ? -%et d'empecher pourtant une coupure de ligne a cet -%endroit dans le traitement -\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% - \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\!\do\?\do\:\do\;} -\catcode`\@=11 -\catcode`\;=\active -\catcode`\:=\active -\catcode`\!=\active -\catcode`\?=\active -\def;{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string;} -\def:{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\fi\penalty\@M\ \fi\string:} -\def!{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string!} -\def?{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@ - \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string?} -\let\old@C\^ -\let\old@T\" -%\uccode"10=`I -%\uccode"11=`J -\uccode`\i=`I -\uccode`\j=`J -%\def\^#1{\ifx#1i{\old@C\i}\else{\old@C #1}\fi} -%\def\"#1{\ifx#1i{\old@T\i}\else{\old@T #1}\fi} -\def\og{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}} -\def\fg{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\,\rangle\!\rangle$}} -\def\guill#1{\og\relax #1\relax\fg} -\frenchspacing -\def\fron{\catcode`\;=\active -\catcode`\:=\active -\catcode`\!=\active -\catcode`\?=\active -\frenchspacing} -\def\froff{\catcode`\;=12 -\catcode`\:=12 -\catcode`\!=12 -\catcode`\?=12 -\nonfrenchspacing} -\def\@tochtitle{Table des Chapitres} -\def\@utochtitle{TABLE DES CHAPITRES} -\def\@Hint{Indications} -%%% Espace apres le : -\fron -\end{filecontents} -%% -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> -%% -%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license -%% or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this -%% license is in: -%% -%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%% -%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version -%% 2003/12/01 or later. -%% -%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package -%% given in the file `minitoc.l'. -%% -\input docstrip.tex -\keepsilent - -%\usedir{tex/latex/minitoc} -\usedir{.} - -\preamble -This is a generated file. - -%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 -%% 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 -%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert -%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr> - -This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license -or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this -license is in: - - http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - -and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version -2003/12/01 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". - -This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert (JPFD). - -This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l' -distributed with it. -\endpreamble - -\Msg{****************} -\Msg{*** PACKAGES ***} -\Msg{****************} -\generate{\file{minitoc.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc}}} -\generate{\file{minitoc-fr.dtx}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc-fr}}} -\generate{\file{mtcoff.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcoff}}} -\generate{\file{mtcmess.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcmess}}} -\generate{\file{mtcpatchmem.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcpatchmem}}} -\Msg{*****************************} -\Msg{*** EXAMPLES OF DOCUMENTS ***} -\Msg{*****************************} -\generate{\file{mtc-2c.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2c}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-2nd.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-2nd}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-3co.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-3co}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-add.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-add}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-ads.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ads}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-amm.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-amm}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-apx.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-apx}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-art.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-art}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-bk.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bk}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-bo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-bo}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-ch0.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ch0}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-cri.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-cri}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-fko.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fko}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-fo1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo1}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-fo2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-fo2}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-gap.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-gap}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-hi1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi1}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-hi2.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hi2}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-hia.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hia}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-hir.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hir}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-hop.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-hop}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-liv.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-liv}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-mem.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mem}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-mm1.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mm1}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-mu.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-mu}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-nom.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-nom}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-ocf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ocf}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-ofs.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-ofs}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-sbf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-sbf}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-scr.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-scr}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-syn.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-syn}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-tbi.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tbi}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-tlc.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlc}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-tlo.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tlo}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-tsf.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-tsf}}} -\generate{\file{mtc-vti.tex}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-vti}}} -\Msg{*****************} -\Msg{*** MLD FILES ***} -\Msg{*****************} -\generate{\file{acadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadian}}} -\generate{\file{acadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadien}}} -\generate{\file{afrikaan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaan}}} -\generate{\file{afrikaans.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaans}}} -\generate{\file{albanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{albanian}}} -\generate{\file{american.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{american}}} -\generate{\file{arab.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab}}} -\generate{\file{arab2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab2}}} -\generate{\file{arabi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabi}}} -\generate{\file{arabic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabic}}} -\generate{\file{armenian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{armenian}}} -\generate{\file{australian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{australian}}} -\generate{\file{austrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{austrian}}} -\generate{\file{bahasa.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasa}}} -\generate{\file{bahasai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasai}}} -\generate{\file{bahasam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasam}}} -\generate{\file{bangla.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bangla}}} -\generate{\file{basque.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{basque}}} -\generate{\file{bengali.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bengali}}} -\generate{\file{bicig.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig}}} -\generate{\file{bicig2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig2}}} -\generate{\file{bicig3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig3}}} -\generate{\file{bithe.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bithe}}} -\generate{\file{brazil.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazil}}} -\generate{\file{brazilian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazilian}}} -\generate{\file{breton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{breton}}} -\generate{\file{british.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{british}}} -\generate{\file{bulgarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarian}}} -\generate{\file{bulgarianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarianb}}} -\generate{\file{buryat.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat}}} -\generate{\file{buryat2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat2}}} -\generate{\file{canadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadian}}} -\generate{\file{canadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadien}}} -\generate{\file{castillan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillan}}} -\generate{\file{castillian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillian}}} -\generate{\file{catalan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{catalan}}} -\generate{\file{chinese1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese1}}} -\generate{\file{chinese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese2}}} -\generate{\file{croatian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{croatian}}} -\generate{\file{czech.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{czech}}} -\generate{\file{danish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{danish}}} -\generate{\file{devanagari.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{devanagari}}} -\generate{\file{dutch.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{dutch}}} -\generate{\file{english.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english}}} -\generate{\file{english1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english1}}} -\generate{\file{english2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english2}}} -\generate{\file{esperant.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperant}}} -\generate{\file{esperanto.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperanto}}} -\generate{\file{estonian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{estonian}}} -\generate{\file{ethiopia.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopia}}} -\generate{\file{ethiopian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian}}} -\generate{\file{ethiopian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian2}}} -\generate{\file{farsi1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi1}}} -\generate{\file{farsi2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi2}}} -\generate{\file{farsi3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi3}}} -\generate{\file{finnish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish}}} -\generate{\file{finnish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish2}}} -\generate{\file{francais.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{francais}}} -\generate{\file{french.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french}}} -\generate{\file{french1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french1}}} -\generate{\file{french2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french2}}} -\generate{\file{frenchb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchb}}} -\generate{\file{frenchle.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchle}}} -\generate{\file{frenchpro.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchpro}}} -\generate{\file{galician.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{galician}}} -\generate{\file{german.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{german}}} -\generate{\file{germanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb}}} -\generate{\file{germanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb2}}} -\generate{\file{greek.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek}}} -\generate{\file{greek-mono.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-mono}}} -\generate{\file{greek-polydemo.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polydemo}}} -\generate{\file{greek-polykatha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polykatha}}} -\generate{\file{guarani.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{guarani}}} -\generate{\file{hangul1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul1}}} -\generate{\file{hangul2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul2}}} -\generate{\file{hangul3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul3}}} -\generate{\file{hangul4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul4}}} -\generate{\file{hangul-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul-u8}}} -\generate{\file{hanja1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja1}}} -\generate{\file{hanja2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja2}}} -\generate{\file{hanja-u8.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja-u8}}} -\generate{\file{hebrew.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew}}} -\generate{\file{hebrew2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew2}}} -\generate{\file{hindi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi}}} -\generate{\file{hindi-modern.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hindi-modern}}} -\generate{\file{hungarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hungarian}}} -\generate{\file{icelandic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{icelandic}}} -\generate{\file{indon.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indon}}} -\generate{\file{indonesian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{indonesian}}} -\generate{\file{interlingua.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{interlingua}}} -\generate{\file{irish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{irish}}} -\generate{\file{italian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian}}} -\generate{\file{italian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian2}}} -\generate{\file{japanese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese}}} -\generate{\file{japanese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese2}}} -\generate{\file{japanese3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese3}}} -\generate{\file{japanese4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese4}}} -\generate{\file{japanese5.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese5}}} -\generate{\file{japanese6.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese6}}} -\generate{\file{kannada.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{kannada}}} -\generate{\file{khalkha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{khalkha}}} -\generate{\file{latin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin}}} -\generate{\file{latin2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin2}}} -\generate{\file{latinc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc}}} -\generate{\file{latinc2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latinc2}}} -\generate{\file{latvian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian}}} -\generate{\file{latvian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian2}}} -\generate{\file{letton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton}}} -\generate{\file{letton2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton2}}} -\generate{\file{lithuanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian}}} -\generate{\file{lithuanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian2}}} -\generate{\file{lowersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lowersorbian}}} -\generate{\file{lsorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lsorbian}}} -\generate{\file{magyar.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar}}} -\generate{\file{magyar2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar2}}} -\generate{\file{magyar3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar3}}} -\generate{\file{malay.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malay}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-b.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-b}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-keli.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-keli2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli2}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-mr.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-mr}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-omega.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-omega}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana2}}} -\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana3}}} -\generate{\file{manju.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{manju}}} -\generate{\file{mexican.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mexican}}} -\generate{\file{meyalu.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{meyalu}}} -\generate{\file{mongol.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongol}}} -\generate{\file{mongolb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolb}}} -\generate{\file{mongolian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongolian}}} -\generate{\file{naustrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{naustrian}}} -\generate{\file{newzealand.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{newzealand}}} -\generate{\file{ngerman.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngerman}}} -\generate{\file{ngermanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb}}} -\generate{\file{ngermanb2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb2}}} -\generate{\file{norsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk}}} -\generate{\file{norsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk2}}} -\generate{\file{nynorsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk}}} -\generate{\file{nynorsk2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk2}}} -\generate{\file{occitan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan}}} -\generate{\file{occitan2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{occitan2}}} -\generate{\file{polish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish}}} -\generate{\file{polish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish2}}} -\generate{\file{polski.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polski}}} -\generate{\file{portuges.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuges}}} -\generate{\file{portuguese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuguese}}} -\generate{\file{romanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian}}} -\generate{\file{romanian2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian2}}} -\generate{\file{romanian3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian3}}} -\generate{\file{russian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian}}} -\generate{\file{russian2m.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2m}}} -\generate{\file{russian2o.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2o}}} -\generate{\file{russianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianb}}} -\generate{\file{russianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianc}}} -\generate{\file{russian-cca.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca}}} -\generate{\file{russian-cca1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-cca1}}} -\generate{\file{russian-lh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lh}}} -\generate{\file{russian-lhcyralt.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyralt}}} -\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrkoi}}} -\generate{\file{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian-lhcyrwin}}} -\generate{\file{samin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{samin}}} -\generate{\file{scottish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{scottish}}} -\generate{\file{serbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbian}}} -\generate{\file{serbianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbianc}}} -\generate{\file{slovak.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovak}}} -\generate{\file{slovene.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovene}}} -\generate{\file{spanish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish}}} -\generate{\file{spanish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish2}}} -\generate{\file{spanish3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish3}}} -\generate{\file{spanish4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish4}}} -\generate{\file{swahili.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swahili}}} -\generate{\file{swedish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish}}} -\generate{\file{swedish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish2}}} -\generate{\file{thai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{thai}}} -\generate{\file{turkish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{turkish}}} -\generate{\file{uighur.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur}}} -\generate{\file{uighur2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur2}}} -\generate{\file{uighur3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uighur3}}} -\generate{\file{UKenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{UKenglish}}} -\generate{\file{ukraineb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukraineb}}} -\generate{\file{ukrainian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukrainian}}} -\generate{\file{uppersorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{uppersorbian}}} -\generate{\file{USenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{USenglish}}} -\generate{\file{usorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{usorbian}}} -\generate{\file{vietnam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnam}}} -\generate{\file{vietnamese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnamese}}} -\generate{\file{welsh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{welsh}}} -\generate{\file{xalx.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx}}} -\generate{\file{xalx2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx2}}} -\generate{\file{xalx3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{xalx3}}} -% -% NO preamble/postamble for mtc-add.bib -\nopreamble -\nopostamble -\Msg{******************} -\Msg{*** A BIB FILE ***} -\Msg{******************} -\generate{\file{mtc-add.bib}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtc-addbib}}}% -\obeyspaces -\Msg{*************************************************************} -\Msg{* *} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to read the *} -\Msg{* Installation chapter in minitoc.pdf (or minitoc-fr.pdf) *} -\Msg{* or the INSTALL file. *} -\Msg{* *} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file minitoc.dtx *} -\Msg{* (or minitoc-fr.dtx) through PdfLaTeX. *} -\Msg{* *} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing! *} -\Msg{* *} -\Msg{*************************************************************} - -\endbatchfile |